Apple iphone_4s_important_product_information_guide
Apple iphone_4s_important_product_information_guide
Apple sur FNAC.COM
TELECHARGER LE PDF :
http://manuals.info.apple.com/en_US/iphone_4s_important_product_information_guide.pdf
Voir également d'autres Guides APPLE :
Apple-macbook_pro-retina-mid-2012-important_product_info_br
Apple-macbook_pro-13-inch-mid-2012-important_product_info
Apple-macbook_air-11-inch_mid-2012-qs_br
Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_MainStage
Apple-Compressor_3_User_Manual_F
Apple-Color_1.0_User_Manual_F
Apple-guide_de_configuration_airport_express_4.2
Apple-TimeCapsule_SetupGuide
Apple-Instruments_et_effets_Logic_Express_8
Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_de_WaveBurner
Apple-Macmini_Guide_de_l'utilisateur
Apple-PowerMacG5_UserGuide
Disque dur, ATA parallèle Instructions de remplacement
Apple-final_cut_pro_x_logic_effects_ref_f
Apple-Leopard_Installationshandbok
Manuale Utente PowerBookG4
Apple-thunderbolt_display_getting_started_1e
Apple-Compressor-4-Benutzerhandbuch
Apple-macbook_air_11inch_mid2011_ug
Apple-macbook_air-mid-2012-important_product_info_j
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation
Apple-Manuel_de_l_utilisateur_d_Utilitaire_de_reponse_d_impulsion
Apple-Aperture_2_Raccourcis_clavier
AppleTV_Setup-Guide
Apple-livetype_2_user_manual_f
Apple-imacG5_17inch_harddrive
Apple-macbook_air_guide_de_l_utilisateur
Apple-MacBook_Early_2008_Guide_de_l_utilisateur
Apple-Keynote-2-Guide-de-l-utilisateur
Apple-PowerBook-User-s-Guide-for-PowerBook-computers
Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide-5200CD-and-5300CD
Apple-Macintosh-Performa-User-s-Guide
Apple-Workgroup-Server-Guide
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-des-fonctionnalites
Apple-iPad-User-Guide-For-iOS-5-1-Software
Apple-Boot-Camp-Guide-d-installation-et-de-configuration
Apple-iPod-nano-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-4eme-generation
Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE
Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE
Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID
Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio
Power Mac G5 Guide de l’utilisateur APPLE
Guide de l'utilisateur PAGE '08 APPLE
Guide de l'utilisateur KEYNOTE '09 APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur KEYNOTE '3 APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur UTILITAIRE RAID
Guide de l'Utilisateur Logic Studio
Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 5.1
PowerBook G4 Premiers Contacts APPLE
Guide de l'Utilisateur iphone pour le logiciel ios 5.1 APPLE
Guide de l’utilisateur ipad Pour le logiciel iOS 4,3
Guide de l’utilisateur iPod nano 5ème génération
Guide de l'utilisateur iPod Touch 2.2 APPLE
Guide de l’utilisateur QuickTime 7 Mac OS X 10.3.9 et ultérieur Windows XP et Windows 2000
Guide de l'utilisateur MacBook 13 pouces Mi 2010
Guide de l’utilisateur iPhone (Pour les logiciels iOS 4.2 et 4.3)
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPod-touch-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iPad-2-pour-le-logiciel-ios-4-3-APPLE
Guide de déploiement en entreprise iPhone OS
Guide-de-l-administrateur-Apple-Remote-Desktop-3-1
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Xserve-Diagnostics-Version-3X103
Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802.11n-5e-Generation
Guide-de-configuration-AirPort-Extreme-802-11n-5e-Generation
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Capteur-Nike-iPod
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-iMac-21-5-pouces-et-27-pouces-mi-2011-APPLE
Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Apple-Qadministrator-4
Guide-d-installation-Apple-TV-3-eme-generation
User-Guide-iPad-For-ios-5-1-Software
iPhone 4
Important Product
Information GuideThis Important Product Information Guide contains safety and handling,
regulatory, software license, and warranty information for iPhone.
Look for recycling, disposal, and other environmental information in the
iPhone User Guide at:??support.apple.com/manuals/iphone
±To avoid injury, read all operating instructions and the following
safety information before using iPhone. For detailed operating
instructions, read the iPhone User Guide on your iPhone by
visiting help.apple.com/iphone or using the iPhone User Guide
bookmark in Safari. For downloadable versions of the latest
iPhone User Guide and this Important Product Information Guide,
visit:??support.apple.com/manuals/iphone
Important Safety and Handling Information
WARNING:??Failure to follow these safety instructions could result in fire,
electric shock, or other injury or damage to iPhone or other property.
Carrying and Handling iPhone iPhone contains sensitive components.
Do not drop, disassemble, microwave, burn, paint, or insert foreign objects
into iPhone. Do not use iPhone if it has been damaged—for example, if
iPhone is cracked, punctured, or damaged by water.
The front and back covers of iPhone are made of glass. This glass could
break if iPhone is dropped on a hard surface, is subjected to a substantial
impact, or is crushed, bent, or deformed. If the glass chips or cracks, do not
touch or attempt to remove the broken glass. Stop using iPhone until the
glass is replaced by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Glass
cracked due to misuse or abuse is not covered under the warranty.
If you are concerned about scratching or abrasion, use a case, sold
separately.
Keeping the Outside of iPhone Clean Clean iPhone immediately if it
comes into contact with any contaminants that may cause stains—for
example, ink, dyes, makeup, dirt, food, oils, and lotions. To clean iPhone,
unplug all cables and turn off iPhone (press and hold the On/Off button,
and then slide the onscreen slider). Then use a soft, slightly damp, lint-free
cloth. Avoid getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners,
household cleaners, aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives
to clean iPhone. The front glass surface has an oleophobic coating. To
remove fingerprints, simply wipe these surfaces with a soft, lint-free
cloth. The ability of this coating to repel oil will diminish over time with
normal usage, and rubbing the screen with an abrasive material will further
diminish its effect and may scratch the glass.
Avoiding Water and Wet Locations Do not expose iPhone to water or
rain, or handle iPhone near wet locations—for example, near washbasins
or toilets. Take care not to spill any food or liquid on iPhone. In case
iPhone gets wet, unplug all cables, turn off iPhone before cleaning, and
allow it to dry thoroughly before turning it on again. Do not attempt
to dry iPhone with an external heat source, such as a microwave oven
or hair dryer. Damage to iPhone caused by contact with liquid is not
covered under the warranty.Repairing or Modifying iPhone Never attempt to repair or modify
iPhone yourself. iPhone does not contain any user-serviceable parts,
except (where applicable) for the SIM card and SIM tray. Disassembling
iPhone, including the removal of external screws and back cover, may
cause damage that is not covered under the warranty. If iPhone has been
submerged in water, punctured, or subjected to a severe fall, do not
use it until you take it to an Apple Authorized Service Provider. Service
should only be provided by Apple or an Apple Authorized Service
Provider. If you have questions, contact Apple or an Apple Authorized
Service Provider. For service information, go to:
www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/faq
Battery Replacement Do not attempt to replace the rechargeable
battery in iPhone yourself. The battery should be replaced only by
Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider. For more information
about battery replacement service, go to:??
www.apple.com/batteries/replacements.html
Charging iPhone To charge iPhone, use only the Apple Dock Connector
to USB Cable with the following: (i) an Apple USB Power Adapter,
(ii) another Apple-branded product or accessory designed to work with
iPhone, (iii) a third-party accessory certified to use the Apple “Works with
iPhone” or “Made for iPhone” logo, (iv) a high-power USB port on another
device that is compliant with the USB 2.0 or 1.1 standard, or (v) a power
adapter compliant with one or more of the following standards EN
301489-34, IEC 62684, YD/T 1591-2009, CNS 15285, ITU L.1000, or another
applicable mobile phone power adapter interoperability standard.
An iPhone Micro USB Adapter (available separately in some areas) or
other adapter may be needed to connect iPhone to some compatible
power adapters.
Note:??Only micro USB power adapters in certain regions that comply
with applicable mobile phone power adapter interoperability standards
are compatible. Please contact the power adapter manufacturer to find
out if your micro USB power adapter complies with these standards.
Read all safety instructions for any products and accessories before using
with iPhone. Apple is not responsible for the operation of, or any damage
caused by, third-party accessories or their compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
When you use the Apple USB Power Adapter to charge iPhone, make
sure that the power adapter is fully assembled before you plug it into
a power outlet. Then insert the Apple USB Power Adapter firmly into
the power outlet. Do not connect or disconnect the Apple USB Power
Adapter with wet hands.
The Apple USB Power Adapter may become warm during normal use.
Always allow adequate ventilation around the Apple USB Power Adapter
and use care when handling. Unplug the Apple USB Power Adapter if any
of the following conditions exist:
 The power cord or plug has become frayed or damaged.
 The adapter is exposed to rain, liquid, or excessive moisture.
 The adapter case has become damaged.
 You suspect the adapter needs service or repair.
 You want to clean the adapter. Avoiding Hearing Damage Permanent hearing loss may occur if the
receiver, earbuds, headphones, speakerphone, or earpiece are used
at high volume. Use only compatible receivers, earbuds, headphones,
speakerphones, or earpieces with your device. Turn on the audio and
check the volume before inserting anything in your ear. You can adapt
over time to a higher volume of sound that may sound normal but can
be damaging to your hearing. If you experience ringing in your ears
or muffled speech, stop listening and have your hearing checked. The
louder the volume, the less time is required before your hearing could be
affected. Hearing experts suggest that to protect your hearing:
 Limit the amount of time you use the receiver, earbuds, headphones,
speakerphone, or earpieces at high volume.
 Avoid turning up the volume to block out noisy surroundings.
 Turn the volume down if you can’t hear people speaking near you.
For information about how to set a maximum volume limit on iPhone,
see the iPhone User Guide.
Emergency Calls You should not rely on wireless devices for essential
communications, such as medical emergencies. Use of iPhone to call
emergency services may not work in all locations or all operating
conditions. Emergency numbers and services vary by region, and
sometimes an emergency call cannot be placed due to network
availability or environmental interference. Some cellular networks may
not accept an emergency call from iPhone if iPhone is not activated, if
iPhone is not compatible with or configured to operate on a particular
cellular network, or (when applicable) if iPhone does not have a SIM or if
the SIM is PIN-locked.
Driving and Riding Safely Use of iPhone while driving a vehicle or
riding a bicycle may be distracting. If you find using iPhone disruptive
or distracting while driving or riding, pull off the road and park before
making or answering a call. Use of iPhone alone or with headphones
(even if used only in one ear) while driving or riding is not recommended
and is illegal in some areas. Consider using a compatible hands-free
device with iPhone. Use of a hands-free device may be required in some
areas. Check and obey the laws and regulations regarding the use of
mobile devices like iPhone in the areas where you drive or ride.
Navigating Safely Do not rely on iPhone applications that provide
maps, digital compass headings, orientation information, traffic
information, directions, or location-based navigation to determine
precise locations, proximity, orientation, distance, traffic conditions or
direction. These applications should only be used for basic navigation
assistance.
Maps, directions, and location-based applications depend on data
services. These data services are subject to change and may not be
available in all areas, resulting in maps, digital compass headings,
directions, traffic conditions or location-based information that may be
unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete.
iPhone contains an internal digital compass located in the upper-right
corner of iPhone. The accuracy of digital compass headings may be
negatively affected by magnetic or other environmental interference,
including interference caused by the close proximity of the magnets contained in the iPhone earbuds. Never rely solely on the digital
compass for determining direction. Compare the information provided
on iPhone to your surroundings and defer to posted signs to resolve
any discrepancies.
Do not use location-based applications while performing activities that
require your full attention. Always comply with posted signs and the laws
and regulations in the areas where you are using iPhone.
For Vehicles Equipped with an Air Bag An air bag inflates with great
force. Do not store iPhone or any of its accessories in the area over the air
bag or in the air bag deployment area.
Seizures, Blackouts, and Eyestrain A small percentage of people may
be susceptible to blackouts or seizures (even if they have never had one
before) when exposed to flashing lights or light patterns such as when
playing games or watching video. If you have experienced seizures
or blackouts or have a family history of such occurrences, you should
consult a physician before playing games (if available) or watching videos
on your iPhone. Discontinue use of iPhone and consult a physician if
you experience headaches, blackouts, seizures, convulsion, eye or muscle
twitching, loss of awareness, involuntary movement, or disorientation.
To reduce risk of headaches, blackouts, seizures, and eyestrain, avoid
prolonged use, hold iPhone further away from your eyes, use iPhone in a
well-lit room, and take frequent breaks.
Choking Hazards iPhone and its accessories may contain small parts,
which may present a choking hazard to small children. Keep such parts
away from small children.
Repetitive Motion When you perform repetitive activities such as
typing or playing games on iPhone, you may experience occasional
discomfort in your hands, arms, shoulders, neck, or other parts of your
body. Take frequent breaks and if you have discomfort during or after
such use, stop use and see a physician.
Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off iPhone when in any area
with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Do not charge iPhone, and obey
all signs and instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion
or fire, resulting in serious injury or even death.
Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often, but not always,
marked clearly. Potential areas may include: fueling areas (such as gas
stations); below deck on boats; fuel or chemical transfer or storage
facilities; vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or
butane); areas where the air contains chemicals or particles (such as grain,
dust, or metal powders); and any other area where you would normally be
advised to turn off your vehicle engine.
Using Connectors, Ports, and Buttons Never force a connector into
a port or apply excessive pressure to a button, because this may cause
damage that is not covered under the warranty. If the connector and port
don’t join with reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Check for
obstructions and make sure that the connector matches the port and that
you have positioned the connector correctly in relation to the port.
Accessories and Wireless Performance Not all iPod accessories are
fully compatible with iPhone. Turning on Airplane Mode on iPhone may
eliminate audio interference between iPhone and an accessory. While Airplane mode is on, you cannot make or receive calls or use features that
require wireless communication. Under some conditions, certain accessories
may affect iPhone wireless performance. Reorienting or relocating iPhone
and the connected accessory may improve wireless performance.
Keeping iPhone Within Acceptable Temperatures iPhone is designed
to be operated in temperatures between 0º and 35º C (32º to 95º F) and
stored in temperatures between -20º and 45º C (-4º to 113º F). Low- or
high-temperature conditions might temporarily shorten battery life or
cause iPhone to temporarily stop working properly. Leaving iPhone in
a parked vehicle or in direct sunlight can cause iPhone to exceed these
storage or operating temperature ranges. Avoid dramatic changes in
temperature or humidity when using iPhone as condensation may form
on or within iPhone.
When you’re using iPhone or charging the battery, it is normal for iPhone
to get warm. The exterior of iPhone functions as a cooling surface that
transfers heat from inside the unit to the cooler air outside.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy iPhone transmits and receives
radio frequency (RF) energy through its antennas. The iPhone cellular
antennas are located at the top and bottom edges of iPhone. The Wi-Fi
and Bluetooth® antenna is located near the top of iPhone.
iPhone is designed and manufactured to comply with the limits for
exposure to RF energy set by international regulatory agencies, including
the FCC of the United States, IC of Canada, MIC of Japan, and the Counsel
of the European Union, among others.
“Specific Absorption Rate,” or SAR, refers to the rate at which the body
absorbs RF energy. The SAR limits for mobile phones are 1.6 watts per
kilogram (W/kg) for the FCC and IC, and 2.0 W/kg for the Council of the
European Union.
iPhone has been tested,
1
and meets the FCC, IC, and European Union RF
exposure guidelines for cellular, Wi-Fi, and Bluetooth operation.
During SAR testing, iPhone is held in standard operating positions (i.e.,
at the head and on the body) and its radios are set to transmit at the
highest power level. iPhone’s maximum SAR levels on each frequency of
operation are provided in a chart at the end of this section.
The SAR levels experienced during normal use may be lower than the
maximum SAR levels. In normal use, iPhone automatically adjusts radio
transmission power to the lowest level necessary to communicate with
the wireless network.
When carrying iPhone, keep it 1.5 cm (5/8 inch) or more away from your
body to ensure exposure levels remain at or below the maximum levels.
Avoid cases with metal parts.
1
The device was tested according to measurement standards and
procedures specified in FCC OET Bulletin 65, Supplement C (Edition
01-01) and IEEE 1528-2003, and Canada RSS 102, Issue 4, March 2010.
iPhone adheres to the European Council Recommendation of 12
July 1999 on the Limitation of Exposure of the General Public to
Electromagnetic Fields [1999/519/EC]. Exposure to RF energy is related to time and distance. If you are
concerned about RF exposure, decrease your total talk time on iPhone
and increase your distance to iPhone by using one of the many
hands-free options available, including the built-in speakerphone, the
supplied headphones with built-in mic, or other third-party accessories.
For more information about RF energy exposure, see the FCC’s Radio
Frequency Safety page at:??www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety
For information about the scientific research related to RF energy
exposure, see the World Health Organization’s EMF Research Database at:
www.who.int/peh-emf/research/database
Frequency Band
2
Body
3
Head FCC & IC 1g SAR Limit (W/kg)
GSM 850 1.15 1.04 1.6
GSM 1900 0.99 1.08 1.6
UMTS II 1900 0.578 1.18 1.6
UMTS V 850 0.981 1.13 1.6
CDMA 800 MHz
Band Class 0
1.11 1.15 1.6
CDMA 1900 MHz
Band Class 1
0.649 1.18 1.6
2.4 GHz Wi-Fi 0.191 0.372 1.6
Frequency Band
2
Body
3
Head EU 10g SAR Limit (W/kg)
EGSM 900 0.989 0.766 2.0
GSM 1800 0.695 0.959 2.0
UMTS I 2100 0.495 0.98 2.0
UMTS VIII 900 0.681 0.988 2.0
2.4 GHz Wi-Fi 0.106 0.267 2.0
Radio Frequency Interference Radio-frequency emissions from
electronic equipment can negatively affect the operation of other
electronic equipment, causing them to malfunction. Although iPhone is
designed, tested, and manufactured to comply with regulations governing
radio frequency emission in countries such as the United States, Canada,
the European Union, and Japan, the wireless transmitters and electrical
2
Your iPhone may be configured to support one or more of the listed
frequency bands, depending on carrier technology and network
availability. The frequency band used by iPhone varies depending on
wireless service provider, wireless technology, and region.
3
iPhone positioned 10 mm (13/32 inch) away from the body.circuits in iPhone may cause interference in other electronic equipment.
Therefore, please take the following precautions:
Aircraft Use of iPhone may be prohibited while traveling in aircraft.
For more information about using Airplane Mode to turn off the iPhone
wireless transmitters, see the iPhone User Guide.
Vehicles Radio frequency emissions from iPhone may affect electronic
systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or its
representative regarding your vehicle.
Pacemakers The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends
that a minimum separation of 15 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a
handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference
with the pacemaker. Persons with pacemakers:
 Should always keep iPhone more than 15 cm (6 inches) from the
pacemaker when the phone is turned on
 Should not carry iPhone in a breast pocket
 Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential
for interference
If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, turn
iPhone off immediately.
Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) iPhone has been tested and rated
under the American National Standard Institute (ANSI) C63.19-2007 hearing
aid compatibility standard. The ANSI standard measures radio frequency
interference for acoustic coupling (“M” rating) and inductive coupling
with hearing aids operating in telecoil mode (“T” rating). Phones must
be rated M3 or greater and T3 or greater to be hearing aid compatible
under FCC rules.
For more information, see the “Hearing Aid Compatibility” section of the
iPhone User Guide. For current iPhone hearing aid compatibility ratings,
go to:??www.apple.com/support/hac
iPhone may interfere with some hearing aids. If you experience
interference, consult the hearing aid manufacturer or your physician for
alternatives or remedies.
Compatibility With Other Wireless Technologies This phone has been
tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless
technologies that it uses. However, there may be some newer wireless
technologies used in this phone that have not been tested yet for use
with hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of this
phone thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or
cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult
your service provider or the manufacturer of this phone for information
on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or
exchange policies, consult your service provider or phone retailer.
Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device,
consult the device manufacturer or your physician to determine if it is
adequately shielded from radio frequency emissions from iPhone.
Health Care Facilities Hospitals and health care facilities may use
equipment that is particularly sensitive to external radio frequency
emissions. Turn iPhone off when staff or posted signs instruct you to do so.Blasting Areas and Posted Facilities To avoid interfering with blasting
operations, turn off iPhone when in a “blasting area” or in areas posted
“Turn off two-way radio.” Obey all signs and instructions.
Certification and Compliance
See iPhone for the certification and compliance marks specific to that
device. To view, choose Settings > General > About > Regulatory.
Australia/
New Zealand
Canada IC: 579C-E2430A
E.U.
Japan
Mexico Singapore
U.S.
FCC ID: BCG-E2430A
Important:??Changes or modifications to this product not authorized
by Apple could void the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and
wireless compliance and negate your authority to operate the product.
This product has demonstrated EMC compliance under conditions that
included the use of compliant peripheral devices and shielded cables
between system components. It is important that you use compliant
peripheral devices and shielded cables between system components to
reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, televisions, and
other electronic devices.
FCC Compliance Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses,
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of the following measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Canadian Compliance Statement
Complies with the Canadian ICES-003 Class B specifications. Cet appareil
numérique de la Classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
This device complies with RSS 210 of Industry Canada. This Class B
device meets all the requirements of the Canadian interference-causing
equipment regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B respecte
toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation
of the device.
Cet appareil est conforme aux normes CNR exemptes de licence
d’Industrie Canada. Le fonctionnement est soumis aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) cet appareil ne doit pas provoquer d’interférences et (2) cet
appareil doit accepter toute interférence, y compris celles susceptibles de
provoquer un fonctionnement non souhaité de l’appareil.
European Union Regulatory Conformance
The equipment complies with the RF Exposure Requirement 1999/519/EC,
Council Recommendation of 12 July 1999 on the limitation of exposure of
the general public to electromagnetic fields (0–300 GHz). This equipment
meets the following conformance standards:
EN 300 328, EN 301 489-17, EN 301 511, EN 301 908, EN 50385
This wireless device complies with the R&TTE Directive.
EU Declaration of Conformity
???????????Apple Inc. ?????????, ?? ???? ?????????? ? ????????,
Wi-Fi ? Bluetooth ?????????? ? ? ???????????? ??? ????????????
?????????? ? ??????? ????????? ??????? ?? ????????? 1999/5/??.
Cesky??Spolecnost Apple Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že toto mobilní zarízení s
technologií Wi-Fi a Bluetooth vyhovuje základním požadavkum a dalším
príslušným ustanovením smernice 1999/5/ES.
Dansk??Undertegnede Apple Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr
cellular, Wi-Fi og Bluetooth overholder de væsentlige krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Deutsch??Hiermit erklärt Apple Inc., dasssich Mobiltelefon,Wi-Fi und
Bluetooth in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden Anforderungen
und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG
befinden.Eesti??Käesolevaga kinnitab Apple Inc., et see mobiil-, Wi-Fi- ja
Bluetooth-seade vastab direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
English??Hereby, Apple Inc. declares that this cellular, Wi-Fi, and
Bluetooth device is in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Español??Por medio de la presente Apple Inc. declara que este
dispositivo celular, Wi-Fi y Bluetooth cumple con los requisitos
esenciales y cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de
la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
??????????Me t?? pa???sa, ? Apple Inc. d????e? ?t? a?t? ? s?s?e??
????t??, Wi-Fi ?a? Bluetooth s?µµ??f??eta? p??? t?? ßas????
apa?t?se?? ?a? t?? ???p?? s?et???? d?at??e?? t?? ?d???a? 1999/5/??.
Français??Par la présente Apple Inc. déclare que l’appareil cellulaire,
Wi-Fi, et Bluetooth est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux
autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Islenska??Apple Inc. lýsir því hér með yfir að þetta tæki, sem er farsími,
þráðlaus og með blátannartækni (e: cellular, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth,)
fullnægir lágmarkskröfum og öðrum viðeigandi ákvæðum
Evróputilskipunar 1999/5/EC.
Italiano??Con la presente Apple Inc. dichiara che questo dispositivo
cellulare, Wi-Fi e Bluetooth è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latviski??Ar šo Apple Inc. deklare, ka cellular, Wi-Fi un Bluetooth ierice
atbilst Direktivas 1999/5/EK butiskajam prasibam un citiem ar to
saistitajiem noteikumiem.
Lietuviu??Šiuo„Apple Inc.“ deklaruoja, kad korinio,„Wi-Fi“ ir„Bluetooth“
ryšio irenginys atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB
Direktyvos nuostatas.
Magyar??Alulírott, Apple Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a mobil, Wi-Fi és
Bluetooth megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
Malti??Hawnhekk, Apple Inc. tiddikjara li dan l-apparat cellulari, Wi-Fi,
u Bluetooth huwa konformi mar-rekwiziti essenzjali u dispozizzjonijiet
ohra relevanti tad-Direttiva 1999/5/KE.
Nederlands??Hierbij verklaart Apple Inc. dat het toestel cellular, Wi-Fi, en
Bluetooth in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de andere
bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Norsk??Apple Inc. erklærer herved at dette mobiltelefon-, Wi-Fi- og
Bluetooth-apparatet er i samsvar med de grunnleggende kravene og
øvrige relevante krav i EU-direktivet 1999/5/EF.
Polski??Niniejszym Apple Inc. oswiadcza, ze ten telefon komórkowy,
urzadzenie Wi-Fi oraz Bluetooth sa zgodne z zasadniczymi wymogami
oraz pozostalymi stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Português??Apple Inc. declara que este dispositivo móvel, Wi-Fi e
Bluetooth está em conformidade com os requisitos essenciais e outras
disposições da Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Româna??Prin prezenta, Apple Inc. declara ca acest aparat celular, Wi-Fi
?i Bluetooth este în conformitate cu cerintele esentiale si cu celelalte
prevederi relevante ale Directivei 1999/5/CE.
Slovensko??Apple Inc. izjavlja, da so celicne naprave ter naprave Wi-Fi in
Bluetooth skladne z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi ustreznimi dolocili
direktive 1999/5/ES.Slovensky??Apple Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že toto mobilné, Wi-Fi &
Bluetooth zariadenie splna základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné
ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Suomi??Apple Inc. vakuuttaa täten, että tämä matkapuhelin-, Wi-Fija Bluetooth-tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten
vaatimusten ja sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Svenska??Härmed intygar Apple Inc. att denna mobiltelefoni-, Wi-Fi-,
och Bluetooth-enhet står i överensstämmelse med de väsentliga
egenskapskrav och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av
direktiv 1999/5/EG.
A copy of the EU Declaration of Conformity is available at:
www.apple.com/euro/compliance
iPhone can be used in the following countries:
European Community Restrictions
Français??Pour usage en intérieur uniquement. Consultez l’Autorité de
Régulation des Communications Electroniques et des Postes (ARCEP)
pour connaître les limites d’utilisation des canaux 1 à 13. www.arcep.fr
Japan Compliance Statement—VCCI Class B Statement
iPhone Terms and Conditions
IMPORTANT:??BY USING YOUR iPHONE, iPAD or iPOD TOUCH (“iOS
DEVICE”), YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE FOLLOWING
APPLE AND THIRD PARTY TERMS:
A.??APPLE iOS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
B.??NOTICES FROM APPLE
C.??GOOGLE MAPS TERMS AND CONDITIONS
D.??YOUTUBE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPLE INC. iOS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
Single Use License
PLEASE READ THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT (“LICENSE”)
CAREFULLY BEFORE USING YOUR iOS DEVICE OR DOWNLOADING THE
SOFTWARE UPDATE ACCOMPANYING THIS LICENSE. BY USING YOUR
iOS DEVICE OR DOWNLOADING A SOFTWARE UPDATE, AS APPLICABLE,
YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, DO NOT USE THE iOS DEVICE OR DOWNLOAD THE SOFTWARE UPDATE. FOR iOS DEVICE
PURCHASERS, IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THE LICENSE,
YOU MAY RETURN THE iOS DEVICE WITHIN THE RETURN PERIOD TO THE
APPLE STORE OR AUTHORIZED DISTRIBUTOR WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT
FOR A REFUND, SUBJECT TO APPLE’S RETURN POLICY FOUND AT
http://www.apple.com/legal/sales_policies/.
1. General.
(a) The software (including Boot ROM code and other embedded
software), documentation, interfaces, content, fonts and any data that
came with your iOS Device (“Original iOS Software”), as may be updated
or replaced by feature enhancements, software updates or system restore
software provided by Apple (“iOS Software Updates”), whether in read
only memory, on any other media or in any other form (the Original iOS
Software and iOS Software Updates are collectively referred to as the
“iOS Software”) are licensed, not sold, to you by Apple Inc. (“Apple”) for
use only under the terms of this License. Apple and its licensors retain
ownership of the iOS Software itself and reserve all rights not expressly
granted to you.
(b) Apple, at its discretion, may make available future iOS Software
Updates for your iOS Device. The iOS Software Updates, if any, may not
necessarily include all existing software features or new features that
Apple releases for newer or other models of iOS Devices. The terms of
this License will govern any iOS Software Updates provided by Apple
that replace and/or supplement the Original iOS Software product,
unless such iOS Software Update is accompanied by a separate license in
which case the terms of that license will govern.
2. Permitted License Uses and Restrictions.
(a) Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, you are granted
a limited non-exclusive license to use the iOS Software on a single
Apple-branded iOS Device. Except as permitted in Section 2(b) below,
and unless as provided in a separate agreement between you and Apple,
this License does not allow the iOS Software to exist on more than one
Apple-branded iOS Device at a time, and you may not distribute or make
the iOS Software available over a network where it could be used by
multiple devices at the same time. This License does not grant you any
rights to use Apple proprietary interfaces and other intellectual property
in the design, development, manufacture, licensing or distribution of
third party devices and accessories, or third party software applications,
for use with iOS Devices. Some of those rights are available under
separate licenses from Apple. For more information on developing
third party devices and accessories for iOS Devices, please email
madeforipod@apple.com. For more information on developing software
applications for iOS Devices, please email devprograms@apple.com.
(b) Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, you are granted
a limited non-exclusive license to download iOS Software Updates that
may be made available by Apple for your model of the iOS Device to
update or restore the software on any such iOS Device that you own
or control. This License does not allow you to update or restore any
iOS Device that you do not control or own, and you may not distribute
or make the iOS Software Updates available over a network where
they could be used by multiple devices or multiple computers at the same time. If you download an iOS Software Update to your computer,
you may make one copy of the iOS Software Updates stored on your
computer in machine-readable form for backup purposes only, provided
that the backup copy must include all copyright or other proprietary
notices contained on the original.
(c) You may not and you agree not to, or to enable others to, copy
(except as expressly permitted by this License), decompile, reverse
engineer, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, decrypt,
modify, or create derivative works of the iOS Software or any services
provided by the iOS Software, or any part thereof (except as and only
to the extent any foregoing restriction is prohibited by applicable law
or to the extent as may be permitted by licensing terms governing use
of open-sourced components included with the iOS Software). Any
attempt to do so is a violation of the rights of Apple and its licensors of
the iOS Software.
(d) By storing content on your iOS Device you are making a digital copy.
In some jurisdictions, it is unlawful to make digital copies without prior
permission from the rights holder. The iOS Software may be used to
reproduce materials so long as such use is limited to reproduction of
non-copyrighted materials, materials in which you own the copyright, or
materials you are authorized or legally permitted to reproduce.
(e) You agree to use the iOS Software and the Services (as defined
in Section 5 below) in compliance with all applicable laws, including
local laws of the country or region in which you reside or in which you
download or use the iOS Software and Services.
(f) Use of and access to certain features of the iOS Software and certain
Services (as defined in Section 5) may require you to apply for a unique
user name and password combination, known as an Apple ID. In addition,
you acknowledge that many features and Services of the iOS Software
transmit data and could impact charges to your data plan, and that
you are responsible for any such charges. For more information, please
consult the User Guide for your iOS Device.
3. Transfer. You may not rent, lease, lend, sell, redistribute, or sublicense
the iOS Software. You may, however, make a one-time permanent transfer
of all of your license rights to the iOS Software to another party in
connection with the transfer of ownership of your iOS Device, provided
that: (a) the transfer must include your iOS Device and all of the iOS
Software, including all its component parts, original media, printed
materials and this License; (b) you do not retain any copies of the iOS
Software, full or partial, including copies stored on a computer or other
storage device; and (c) the party receiving the iOS Software reads and
agrees to accept the terms and conditions of this License.
4. Consent to Use of Data.
(a) Diagnostic and Usage Data. If you opt in to diagnostic and usage
collection, you agree that Apple and its subsidiaries and agents may
collect, maintain, process and use diagnostic, technical, usage and related
information, including but not limited to information about your iOS
Device, computer, system and application software, and peripherals, that
is gathered periodically to facilitate the provision of software updates,
product support and other services to you (if any) related to the iOS
Software, and to verify compliance with the terms of this License. Apple may use this information, as long as it is collected in a form that does
not personally identify you, to provide and improve Apple’s products
and services. If you have opted in and have Location Services turned
on, the location of your device may also be sent to help Apple analyze
wireless or cellular performance issues (e.g. the strength or weakness of
a cellular signal in a particular location). To enable Apple’s partners and
third party developers to improve their software, hardware and services
designed for use with Apple products, Apple may also provide any such
partner or third party developer with a subset of diagnostic information
that is relevant to that partner’s or developer’s software, hardware and/or
services, as long as the diagnostic information is in a form that does not
personally identify you.
(b) Location Data. Apple and its partners and licensees may provide
certain services through your iOS Device that rely upon location
information. To provide and improve these services, where available,
Apple and its partners and licensees may transmit, collect, maintain,
process and use your location data, including the real-time geographic
location of your iOS Device, road travel speed information, and location
search queries. The location data and queries collected by Apple are
collected in a form that does not personally identify you and may be
used by Apple and its partners and licensees to provide location-based
products and services. By using any location-based services on your
iOS Device, you agree and consent to Apple’s and its partners’ and
licensees’ transmission, collection, maintenance, processing and use of
your location data and queries to provide and improve location-based
and road traffic-based products and services. You may withdraw this
consent at any time by going to the Location Services setting on your
iOS Device and either turning off the global Location Services setting or
turning off the individual location settings of each location-aware item
on your iOS Device. Disabling these location features will only impact
the location-based functionality of your iOS Device. It will not affect iOS
Device features unrelated to location services. When using third party
applications or services on the iOS Device that use or provide location
data, you are subject to and should review such third party’s terms and
privacy policy on use of location data by such third party applications
or services.
(c) Siri. If your iOS Device supports Siri, which includes the dictation
feature, these features allow you to make requests, give commands and
dictate text to your device using your voice. When you use Siri, the things
you say will be recorded and sent to Apple to process your requests.
Your device will also send Apple other information, such as your first
name and nickname; the names, nicknames, and relationship with you
(e.g., “my dad”) of your address book contacts; and song names in your
collection (collectively, your “User Data”). All of this data is used to help
Siri understand you better and recognize what you say. It is not linked to
other data that Apple may have from your use of other Apple services.
By using Siri, you agree and consent to Apple’s and its subsidiaries’
and agents’ transmission, collection, maintenance, processing, and
use of this information, including your voice input and User Data, to
provide and improve Siri and other Apple products and services. If
you have Location Services turned on, the location of your iOS Device
at the time you make a request will also be sent to Apple to help Siri improve the accuracy of its response to your location-based requests.
You may disable the location-based functionality of Siri by going to
the Location Services setting on your iOS Device and turning off the
individual location setting for Siri. You can also turn off Siri altogether
at any time. To do so, open Settings, tap General, tap Siri, and slide the
Siri switch to “off”. You may also restrict the ability to use Siri under the
Restrictions Setting.
(d) FaceTime. The FaceTime video calling feature of the iOS Software
(“FaceTime”) requires Internet access and may not be available in all
countries or regions. Your use of FaceTime is subject to your compliance
with Section 2(e) above. In order to set up FaceTime, and to initiate and
receive FaceTime calls between you and other FaceTime users, certain
unique identifiers for your iOS Device and account are needed. These
unique identifiers may include your email address(es), the Apple ID
information you provide, a hardware identifier for your iOS Device, and
your iPhone’s telephone number. By using the iOS Software, you agree
that Apple may transmit, collect, maintain, process and use these
identifiers for the purpose of providing and improving the FaceTime
feature. You understand that your iPhone’s telephone number will
be displayed to the other party on the video call (even if you have a
blocked number) or your email address will be shown, depending on
what setting you choose. If you are using a FaceTime-capable iPad or
iPod touch, your email address will be displayed to the other party on
the video call. You may turn off the FaceTime feature by going to the
FaceTime setting on your iOS Device or by going to the Restrictions
setting and enabling the FaceTime restriction.
(e) iMessage. The messaging feature of the iOS Software (“iMessage”)
may not be available in all countries or regions. Your use of iMessage
is subject to your compliance with Section 2(e) above. In order to set
up iMessage, and to initiate and receive iMessages between you and
other iOS Device users, certain unique identifiers for your iOS Device and
account are needed. These unique identifiers may include your email
address(es), the Apple ID information you provide, a hardware identifier
for your iOS Device, and your iPhone’s telephone number. By using the
iOS Software, you agree that Apple may transmit, collect, maintain,
process and use these identifiers for the purpose of providing and
improving the iMessage service. The iMessage service requires a Wi-Fi
or cellular data connection. To facilitate delivery of your iMessages and
to enable you to maintain conversations across your devices, Apple may
hold your iMessages in encrypted form for a limited period of time. If
your message cannot be sent as an iMessage, your message may be sent
as an SMS or MMS message, for which carrier messaging rates may apply.
You understand that your iPhone’s telephone number will be displayed
to the other party (even if you have a blocked number) or your email
address will be shown, depending on what setting you choose. If you are
using an iMessage-capable iPad or iPod touch your email address will be
displayed to the other party. You may turn off the iMessage service by
going to the Messages setting on your iOS Device.
(f) Photo Stream. By using the Photo Stream feature of iCloud, you
agree that Apple may store photos taken on your iOS Device or
uploaded from your computer for a limited period of time and
automatically send the photos to your other Apple iOS Devices or computers that are Photo Stream-enabled. Please note that a limited
number of photos may be stored at any one time, and older photos will
be automatically deleted from Photo Stream over time. Any photos you
want to keep must be saved to your camera roll, another album or your
computer. Photo resolution may vary depending on the device to which
the photos are downloaded. If you do not wish to use Photo Stream, you
can turn Photo Stream off on all of your iOS Devices or computers that
are Photo Stream-enabled. All use of the Photo Stream feature is subject
to the terms and conditions of this agreement and the iCloud Terms and
Conditions located at: http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/.
(g) Interest-Based Advertising. Apple may provide mobile, interest-based
advertising to you. If you do not want to receive relevant ads on your
iOS Device, you can opt out by going to this link on your iOS Device:
http://oo.apple.com. If you opt out, you will continue to receive the
same number of mobile ads, but they may be less relevant because
they will not be based on your interests. You may still see ads related
to the content on a web page or in an application or based on other
non-personal information. This opt-out applies only to Apple advertising
services and does not affect interest-based advertising from other
advertising networks.
(h) Privacy Policy. At all times your information will be treated in
accordance with Apple’s Privacy Policy, which is incorporated by
reference into this License and can be viewed at: www.apple.com/
privacy/.
5. Services and Third Party Materials.
(a) The iOS Software enables access to Apple’s iTunes Store, App Store,
Game Center, iCloud and other Apple and third party services and web
sites (collectively and individually, “Services”). Such Services may not be
available in all languages or in all countries. Use of these Services requires
Internet access and use of certain Services may require an Apple ID, may
require you to accept additional terms and may be subject to additional
fees. By using this software in connection with an Apple ID, iTunes Store
account, Game Center account, or iCloud account, you agree to the
applicable terms of service for that account, such as the latest iTunes
Store Terms and Conditions or Game Center Terms and Conditions, which
you may access and review at http://www.apple.com/legal/itunes/ww/,
or the iCloud Terms and Conditions which can be found at
http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/, respectively.
(b) If you sign up for iCloud, certain iCloud features like “Back Up” and
“Find My iPhone” may be accessed directly from the iOS Software. You
acknowledge and agree that your use of iCloud and these features is
subject to the latest terms and conditions of the iCloud service, which
you may access and review at: http://www.apple.com/legal/icloud/ww/
(c) You understand that by using any of the Services, you may encounter
content that may be deemed offensive, indecent, or objectionable,
which content may or may not be identified as having explicit language,
and that the results of any search or entering of a particular URL may
automatically and unintentionally generate links or references to
objectionable material. Nevertheless, you agree to use the Services at
your sole risk and that Apple shall have no liability to you for content
that may be found to be offensive, indecent, or objectionable. (d) Certain Services may display, include or make available content, data,
information, applications or materials from third parties (“Third Party
Materials”) or provide links to certain third party web sites. By using the
Services, you acknowledge and agree that Apple is not responsible for
examining or evaluating the content, accuracy, completeness, timeliness,
validity, copyright compliance, legality, decency, quality or any other
aspect of such Third Party Materials or web sites. Apple, its officers,
affiliates and subsidiaries do not warrant or endorse and do not assume
and will not have any liability or responsibility to you or any other person
for any third-party Services, Third Party Materials or web sites, or for any
other materials, products, or services of third parties. Third Party Materials
and links to other web sites are provided solely as a convenience to you.
(e) Financial information displayed by any Services is for general
informational purposes only and should not be relied upon as
investment advice. Before executing any securities transaction based
upon information obtained through the Services, you should consult
with a financial or securities professional who is legally qualified to give
financial or securities advice in your country or region. Location data
provided by any Services is for basic navigational purposes only and
is not intended to be relied upon in situations where precise location
information is needed or where erroneous, inaccurate, time-delayed or
incomplete location data may lead to death, personal injury, property or
environmental damage. Neither Apple nor any of its content providers
guarantees the availability, accuracy, completeness, reliability, or
timeliness of stock information, location data or any other data displayed
by any Services.
(f) You agree that the Services contain proprietary content, information
and material that is owned by Apple and/or its licensors, and is protected
by applicable intellectual property and other laws, including but not
limited to copyright. You agree that you will not use such proprietary
content, information or materials other than for permitted use of the
Services or in any manner that is inconsistent with the terms of this
License or that infringes any intellectual property rights of a third party
or Apple. No portion of the Services may be reproduced in any form or
by any means. You agree not to modify, rent, lease, loan, sell, distribute,
or create derivative works based on the Services, in any manner, and
you shall not exploit the Services in any unauthorized way whatsoever,
including but not limited to, using the Services to transmit any computer
viruses, worms, trojan horses or other malware, or by trespass or
burdening network capacity. You further agree not to use the Services in
any manner to harass, abuse, stalk, threaten, defame or otherwise infringe
or violate the rights of any other party, and that Apple is not in any way
responsible for any such use by you, nor for any harassing, threatening,
defamatory, offensive, infringing or illegal messages or transmissions that
you may receive as a result of using any of the Services.
(g) In addition, Services and Third Party Materials that may be accessed
from, displayed on or linked to from the iOS Device are not available in all
languages or in all countries or regions. Apple makes no representation
that such Services and Materials are appropriate or available for use
in any particular location. To the extent you choose to use or access
such Services and Materials, you do so at your own initiative and are
responsible for compliance with any applicable laws, including but not limited to applicable local laws. Apple and its licensors reserve the right
to change, suspend, remove, or disable access to any Services at any
time without notice. In no event will Apple be liable for the removal
of or disabling of access to any such Services. Apple may also impose
limits on the use of or access to certain Services, in any case and without
notice or liability.
6. Termination. This License is effective until terminated. Your rights
under this License will terminate automatically or otherwise cease to be
effective without notice from Apple if you fail to comply with any term(s)
of this License. Upon the termination of this License, you shall cease all
use of the iOS Software. Sections 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 12 and 13 of this License
shall survive any such termination.
7. Disclaimer of Warranties.
7.1 If you are a customer who is a consumer (someone who uses the
iOS Software outside of your trade, business or profession), you may
have legal rights in your country of residence which would prohibit the
following limitations from applying to you, and where prohibited they
will not apply to you. To find out more about rights, you should contact a
local consumer advice organization.
7.2 YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT, TO THE
EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, USE OF THE iOS SOFTWARE
AND SERVICES IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
IS WITH YOU.
7.3 TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE iOS SOFTWARE
ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND APPLE AND APPLE’S
LICENSORS (COLLECTIVELY REFERRED TO AS “APPLE” FOR THE PURPOSES
OF SECTIONS 7 AND 8) HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES,
EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
7.4 APPLE DOES NOT WARRANT AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH
YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES, THAT THE
FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN OR SERVICES PERFORMED BY THE iOS
SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR
ERROR-FREE, THAT ANY SERVICE WILL CONTINUE TO BE MADE AVAILABLE,
THAT DEFECTS IN THE iOS SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED,
OR THAT THE iOS SOFTWARE WILL BE COMPATIBLE OR WORK WITH ANY
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, APPLICATIONS OR THIRD PARTY SERVICES.
INSTALLATION OF THIS SOFTWARE MAY AFFECT THE USABILITY OF THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, APPLICATIONS OR THIRD PARTY SERVICES.
7.5 YOU FURTHER ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE iOS SOFTWARE AND
SERVICES ARE NOT INTENDED OR SUITABLE FOR USE IN SITUATIONS OR
ENVIRONMENTS WHERE THE FAILURE OR TIME DELAYS OF, OR ERRORS
OR INACCURACIES IN, THE CONTENT, DATA OR INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE iOS SOFTWARE OR SERVICES COULD LEAD TO DEATH, PERSONAL
INJURY, OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT
NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, LIFE
SUPPORT OR WEAPONS SYSTEMS.
7.6 NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
APPLE OR AN APPLE AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A
WARRANTY. SHOULD THE iOS SOFTWARE OR SERVICES PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION
OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION AND LIMITATIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
8. Limitation of Liability. TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL
INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES
FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO
TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY
OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED
TO YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE iOS SOFTWARE AND SERVICES
OR ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR APPLICATIONS IN CONJUNCTION
WITH THE iOS SOFTWARE, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE
THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF
APPLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR
PERSONAL INJURY, OR OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
SO THIS LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. In no event shall Apple’s
total liability to you for all damages (other than as may be required by
applicable law in cases involving personal injury) exceed the amount of
two hundred and fifty dollars (U.S.$250.00). The foregoing limitations will
apply even if the above stated remedy fails of its essential purpose.
9. Digital Certificates. The iOS Software contains functionality that
allows it to accept digital certificates either issued from Apple or from
third parties. YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR DECIDING WHETHER
OR NOT TO RELY ON A CERTIFICATE WHETHER ISSUED BY APPLE OR A
THIRD PARTY. YOUR USE OF DIGITAL CERTIFICATES IS AT YOUR SOLE
RISK. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, APPLE
MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
AS TO MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
ACCURACY, SECURITY, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS
WITH RESPECT TO DIGITAL CERTIFICATES.
10. Export Control. You may not use or otherwise export or re-export the
iOS Software except as authorized by United States law and the laws of
the jurisdiction(s) in which the iOS Software was obtained. In particular,
but without limitation, the iOS Software may not be exported or reexported (a) into any U.S. embargoed countries or (b) to anyone on the
U.S. Treasury Department’s list of Specially Designated Nationals or the
U.S. Department of Commerce Denied Person’s List or Entity List. By using
the iOS Software, you represent and warrant that you are not located
in any such country or on any such list. You also agree that you will not use the iOS Software for any purposes prohibited by United States law,
including, without limitation, the development, design, manufacture or
production of missiles, nuclear, chemical or biological weapons.
11. Government End Users. The iOS Software and related documentation
are “Commercial Items”, as that term is defined at 48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting
of “Commercial Computer Software” and “Commercial Computer Software
Documentation”, as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
§227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R.
§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the Commercial Computer
Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being
licensed to U.S. Government end users (a) only as Commercial Items and
(b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to
the terms and conditions herein. Unpublished-rights reserved under the
copyright laws of the United States.
12. Controlling Law and Severability. This License will be governed by
and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California,
excluding its conflict of law principles. This License shall not be governed
by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, the application of which is expressly excluded. If you are
a consumer based in the United Kingdom, this License will be governed
by the laws of the jurisdiction of your residence. If for any reason a
court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision, or portion thereof,
to be unenforceable, the remainder of this License shall continue in full
force and effect.
13. Complete Agreement; Governing Language. This License constitutes
the entire agreement between you and Apple relating to the iOS
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous understandings
regarding such subject matter. No amendment to or modification of
this License will be binding unless in writing and signed by Apple. Any
translation of this License is done for local requirements and in the event
of a dispute between the English and any non-English versions, the
English version of this License shall govern, to the extent not prohibited
by local law in your jurisdiction.
14. Third Party Acknowledgements. Portions of the iOS Software may
utilize or include third party software and other copyrighted material.
Acknowledgements, licensing terms and disclaimers for such material
are contained in the electronic documentation for the iOS Software,
and your use of such material is governed by their respective terms. Use
of the Google Safe Browsing Service is subject to the Google Terms of
Service (http://www.google.com/terms_of_service.html) and to Google’s
Privacy Policy (http://www.google.com/privacypolicy.html).
15. Use of MPEG-4; H.264/AVC Notice.
(a) The iOS Software contains MPEG-4 video encoding and/or decoding
functionality. The iOS Software is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual
Patent Portfolio License for the personal and non-commercial use of a
consumer for (i) encoding video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual
Standard (“MPEG-4 Video”) and/or (ii) decoding MPEG-4 video that was
encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial
activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed by MPEG LA
to provide MPEG-4 video. No license is granted or shall be implied for any
other use. Additional information including that relating to promotional, internal and commercial uses and licensing may be obtained from MPEG
LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegla.com.
(b) The iOS Software contains AVC encoding and/or decoding
functionality, commercial use of H.264/AVC requires additional licensing
and the following provision applies: THE AVC FUNCTIONALITY IN THE
iOS SOFTWARE IS LICENSED HEREIN ONLY FOR THE PERSONAL AND
NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN
COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii)
DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED
IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR AVC VIDEO
THAT WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE
AVC VIDEO. INFORMATION REGARDING OTHER USES AND LICENSES MAY
BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
16. Yahoo Search Service Restrictions. The Yahoo Search Service
available through Safari is licensed for use only in the following countries
and regions: Argentina, Aruba, Australia, Austria, Barbados, Belgium,
Bermuda, Brazil, Bulgaria, Canada, Cayman Islands, Chile, China, Colombia,
Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Grenada, Guatemala, Hong
Kong, Hungary, Iceland, India, Indonesia, Ireland, Italy, Jamaica, Japan,
Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malaysia, Malta, Mexico, Netherlands, New
Zealand, Nicaragua, Norway, Panama, Peru, Philippines, Poland, Portugal,
Puerto Rico, Romania, Singapore, Slovakia, Slovenia, South Korea, Spain,
St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, Thailand, The Bahamas,
Trinidad and Tobago, Turkey, UK, Uruguay, US and Venezuela.
17. Microsoft Exchange Notice. The Microsoft Exchange mail setting
in the iOS Software is licensed only for over-the-air synchronization of
information, such as email, contacts, calendar and tasks, between your
iOS and Microsoft Exchange Server or other server software licensed by
Microsoft to implement the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync protocol.
EA0790
Rev. 8/15/11
NOTICES FROM APPLE
If Apple needs to contact you about your product or account, you
consent to receive the notices by email. You agree that any such notices
that we send you electronically will satisfy any legal communication
requirements.
GOOGLE MAPS TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Thank you for trying out the Google Maps for mobile software application!
This page contains the terms and conditions (the “Terms and Conditions”)
for Google Maps for mobile and the enterprise version of Google Maps for
mobile. In order to use this software, including any third party software
made available to you in conjunction with this software and/or the related
service, (collectively referred to below as “Google Maps for mobile”) you
agree to be bound by these Terms and Conditions, either on behalf of
yourself or on behalf of your employer or other entity. If you are agreeing
to be bound by these Terms and Conditions on behalf of your employer or
other entity, you represent and warrant that you have full legal authority
to bind your employer or such entity to these Terms and Conditions. If you don’t have the legal authority to bind, please press “No” when asked
whether you agree to these Terms and Conditions, and do not proceed
with use of this product.
Additional Terms??Google Maps for mobile is designed to be used in
conjunction with Google’s Maps services and other Google services.
Accordingly, you agree and acknowledge that your use of Google Maps
for mobile is also subject to (a) the specific terms of service for Google
Maps (which can be viewed at http://local.google.com/help/terms_local.
html) including the content notices applicable thereto (which can
be viewed at http://local.google.com/help/legalnotices_local.html),
(b) the general Google terms of service (which can be viewed at
http://www.google.com/terms_of_service.html) and (c) Google’s
overall privacy policy (which can be viewed at http://www.google.com/
privacypolicy.html), as well as specific privacy policies, such as the Google
Maps for mobile privacy policy included with this application, such
provisions being hereby incorporated into these Terms and Conditions
by reference. To the extent that there is any inconsistency or conflict
between such additional terms and these Terms and Conditions, the
provisions of these Terms and Conditions take precedence.
Network Charges??Google does not charge for downloading or using
Google Maps for mobile, but depending on your plan and your carrier or
provider, your carrier or other provider may charge you for downloading
Google Maps for mobile or for use of your mobile phone when you access
information or other Google services through Google Maps for mobile.
Non-Commercial Use Only??Google Maps for mobile is made available
to you for your non-commercial use only. This means that you may use it
for your personal use only: you may use it at work or at home, to search
for anything you want, subject to the terms set out in these Terms and
Conditions. You need to obtain Google’s permission first, which you can
do by contacting mobile-support@google.com, if you want to sell Google
Maps for mobile or any information, services, or software associated
with or derived from it, or if you want to modify, copy, license, or create
derivative works from Google Maps for mobile.
Unless you have our prior written consent, you agree not to modify,
adapt, translate, prepare derivative works from, decompile, reverse
engineer, disassemble or otherwise attempt to derive source code from
Google Maps for mobile.
Furthermore, you may not use Google Maps for mobile in any manner
that could damage, disable, overburden, or impair Google’s services (e.g.,
you may not use the Google Maps for mobile in an automated manner),
nor may you use Google Maps for mobile in any manner that could
interfere with any other party’s use and enjoyment of Google’s services.
If you have comments on Google Maps for mobile or ideas on how to
improve it, please email mobile-support@google.com. Please note that
by doing so, you also grant Google and third parties permission to use
and incorporate your ideas or comments into Google Maps for mobile
(or third party software) without further notice or compensation.
Intellectual Property??As between you and Google, you agree and
acknowledge that Google owns all rights, title and interest in and to
Google Maps for mobile, including without limitation all associated Intellectual Property Rights. “Intellectual Property Rights” means any
and all rights existing from time to time under patent law, copyright
law, trade secret law, trademark law, unfair competition law, and any
and all other proprietary rights, and any and all applications, renewals,
extensions and restorations thereof, now or hereafter in force and effect
worldwide. You agree to not remove, obscure, or alter Google’s or any
third party’s copyright notice, trademarks, or other proprietary rights
notices affixed to or contained within or accessed in conjunction with or
through the Google Maps for mobile.
Disclaimer of Warranties??Google and any third party who makes its
software available in conjunction with or through Google Maps for
mobile disclaim any responsibility for any harm resulting from your use
of Google Maps for mobile and/or any third party software accessed in
conjunction with or through Google Maps for mobile.
GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE IS PROVIDED “AS IS,” WITH NO WARRANTIES
WHATSOEVER. GOOGLE AND SUCH THIRD PARTIES EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM
TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED,
AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. GOOGLE
AND ANY SUCH THIRD PARTIES DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING
THE SECURITY, RELIABILITY, TIMELINESS, AND PERFORMANCE OF GOOGLE
MAPS FOR MOBILE AND SUCH THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE.
YOU UNDERSTAND AND AGREE THAT YOU DOWNLOAD AND/OR USE
GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE AT YOUR OWN DISCRETION AND RISK AND
THAT YOU WILL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY DAMAGES TO YOUR
COMPUTER OR MOBILE DEVICE SYSTEM OR LOSS OF DATA THAT RESULTS
FROM THE DOWNLOAD OR USE OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE. SOME
STATES OR OTHER JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE AND JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION.
Limitation of Liability??UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL GOOGLE
OR ANY THIRD PARTY WHO MAKE THEIR SOFTWARE AVAILABLE IN
CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH THE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE
BE LIABLE TO ANY USER ON ACCOUNT OF THAT USER’S USE OR MISUSE
OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE. SUCH LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL
APPLY TO PREVENT RECOVERY OF DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, AND PUNITIVE DAMAGES
WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON WARRANTY, CONTRACT, TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), OR OTHERWISE, (EVEN IF GOOGLE AND/
OR A THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE PROVIDER HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES). SUCH LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SHALL APPLY WHETHER THE DAMAGES ARISE FROM USE OR MISUSE
OF AND RELIANCE ON GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE OR ON PRODUCTS
OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH
GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE, FROM INABILITY TO USE GOOGLE MAPS FOR
MOBILE OR PRODUCTS OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION
WITH OR THROUGH THE GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE, OR FROM THE
INTERRUPTION, SUSPENSION, OR TERMINATION OF GOOGLE MAPS FOR
MOBILE OR PRODUCTS OR SERVICES MADE AVAILABLE IN CONJUNCTION WITH OR THROUGH GOOGLE MAPS FOR MOBILE (INCLUDING SUCH
DAMAGES INCURRED BY THIRD PARTIES). SUCH LIMITATION SHALL APPLY
NOTWITHSTANDING A FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY LIMITED
REMEDY AND TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW. SOME
STATES OR OTHER JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Miscellaneous Provisions??These Terms and Conditions will be governed
by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California,
without giving effect to the conflict of laws provisions of California or
your actual state or country of residence. If for any reason a court of
competent jurisdiction finds any provision or portion of these Terms
and Conditions to be unenforceable, the remainder of these Terms and
Conditions will continue in full force and effect.
These Terms and Conditions constitute the entire agreement between
you and Google with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersede
and replace all prior or contemporaneous understandings or agreements,
written or oral, regarding such subject matter. Any waiver of any
provision of these Terms and Conditions will be effective only if in writing
and signed by Google.
September 2007
YOUTUBE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
http://www.youtube.com/t/terms
Apple One (1) Year Limited Warranty—iPhone
For Apple Branded Products Only
HOW CONSUMER LAW RELATES TO THIS WARRANTY. THIS WARRANTY
GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER RIGHTS
THAT VARY FROM STATE TO STATE (OR BY COUNTRY OR PROVINCE).
OTHER THAN AS PERMITTED BY LAW, APPLE DOES NOT EXCLUDE, LIMIT
OR SUSPEND OTHER RIGHTS YOU MAY HAVE, INCLUDING THOSE THAT
MAY ARISE FROM THE NONCONFORMITY OF A SALES CONTRACT. FOR
A FULL UNDERSTANDING OF YOUR RIGHTS YOU SHOULD CONSULT THE
LAWS OF YOUR COUNTRY, PROVINCE OR STATE.
WARRANTY LIMITATIONS THAT MAY AFFECT CONSUMER LAW. TO THE
EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, THIS WARRANTY AND THE REMEDIES
SET FORTH ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
REMEDIES AND CONDITIONS, WHETHER ORAL, WRITTEN, STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. APPLE DISCLAIMS ALL STATUTORY AND IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
WARRANTIES AGAINST HIDDEN OR LATENT DEFECTS, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY LAW. IN SO FAR AS SUCH WARRANTIES CANNOT BE
DISCLAIMED, APPLE LIMITS THE DURATION AND REMEDIES OF SUCH
WARRANTIES TO THE DURATION OF THIS EXPRESS WARRANTY AND, AT
APPLE’S OPTION, THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT SERVICES DESCRIBED
BELOW. SOME STATES (COUNTRIES AND PROVINCES) DO NOT ALLOW
LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY (OR CONDITION)
MAY LAST, SO THE LIMITATION DESCRIBED ABOVE MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.WHAT IS COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY? Apple warrants the Applebranded hardware product and accessories contained in the
original packaging (“Apple Product”) against defects in materials
and workmanship when used normally in accordance with Apple’s
published guidelines for a period of ONE (1) YEAR from the date of
original retail purchase by the end-user purchaser (“Warranty Period”).
Apple’s published guidelines include but are not limited to information
contained in technical specifications, user manuals and service
communications.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED BY THIS WARRANTY? This warranty does not
apply to any non-Apple branded hardware products or any software,
even if packaged or sold with Apple hardware. Manufacturers, suppliers,
or publishers, other than Apple, may provide their own warranties to
you but Apple, in so far as permitted by law, provides their products
“AS IS”. Software distributed by Apple with or without the Apple brand
(including, but not limited to system software) is not covered by this
warranty. Please refer to the licensing agreement accompanying the
software for details of your rights with respect to its use. Apple does not
warrant that the operation of the Apple Product will be uninterrupted
or error-free. Apple is not responsible for damage arising from failure to
follow instructions relating to the Apple Product’s use.
This warranty does not apply: (a) to consumable parts, such as
batteries or protective coatings that are designed to diminish over
time, unless failure has occurred due to a defect in materials or
workmanship; (b) to cosmetic damage, including but not limited to
scratches, dents and broken plastic on ports; (c) to damage caused by
use with another product; (d) to damage caused by accident, abuse,
misuse, liquid contact, fire, earthquake or other external cause; (e)
to damage caused by operating the Apple Product outside Apple’s
published guidelines; (f) to damage caused by service (including
upgrades and expansions) performed by anyone who is not a
representative of Apple or an Apple Authorized Service Provider
(“AASP”); (g) to an Apple Product that has been modified to alter
functionality or capability without the written permission of Apple;
(h) to defects caused by normal wear and tear or otherwise due to the
normal aging of the Apple Product, or (i) if any serial number has been
removed or defaced from the Apple Product.
IMPORTANT RESTRICTION. Apple may restrict warranty service to the
country where Apple or its Authorized Distributors originally sold the
Apple Product.
YOUR RESPONSIBILITIES. YOU SHOULD MAKE PERIODIC BACKUP COPIES
OF THE INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE APPLE PRODUCT’S STORAGE
MEDIA TO PROTECT THE CONTENTS AND AS A PRECAUTION AGAINST
POSSIBLE OPERATIONAL FAILURES.
Before receiving warranty service, Apple or its agents may require that
you furnish proof of purchase details, respond to questions designed to
assist with diagnosing potential issues and follow Apple’s procedures
for obtaining warranty service. Before submitting your Apple Product
for warranty service you should maintain a separate backup copy of the
contents of its storage media, remove all personal information that you
want to protect and disable all security passwords.DURING WARRANTY SERVICE THE CONTENTS OF THE STORAGE MEDIA
WILL BE DELETED AND REFORMATTED. APPLE AND ITS AGENTS ARE NOT
RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LOSS OF SOFTWARE PROGRAMS, DATA OR OTHER
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE STORAGE MEDIA OR ANY OTHER
PART OF THE APPLE PRODUCT SERVICED.
Following warranty service your Apple Product or a replacement product
will be returned to you as your Apple Product was configured when
originally purchased, subject to applicable updates. Apple may install
system software updates as part of warranty service that will prevent
the Apple Product from reverting to an earlier version of the system
software. Third party applications installed on the Apple Product may
not be compatible or work with the Apple Product as a result of the
system software update. You will be responsible for reinstalling all other
software programs, data and information. Recovery and reinstallation of
other software programs, data and information are not covered under
this warranty.
Important: Do not open the Apple Product. Opening the Apple Product
may cause damage that is not covered by this warranty. Only Apple or
an AASP should perform service on this Apple Product.
WHAT WILL APPLE DO IN THE EVENT THE WARRANTY IS BREACHED?
If during the Warranty Period you submit a valid claim to Apple or an
AASP, Apple will, at its option, (i) repair the Apple Product using new or
previously used parts that are equivalent to new in performance and
reliability, (ii) replace the Apple Product with a product that is at least
functionally equivalent to the Apple Product and is formed from new
and/or previously used parts that are equivalent to new in performance
and reliability, or (iii) exchange the Apple Product for a refund of your
purchase price.
Apple may request that you replace certain user-installable parts or
products. A replacement part or product, including a user-installable
part that has been installed in accordance with instructions provided by
Apple, assumes the remaining warranty of the Apple Product or ninety
(90) days from the date of replacement or repair, whichever provides
longer coverage for you. When a product or part is replaced or a refund
provided, any replacement item becomes your property and the replaced
or refunded item becomes Apple’s property.
HOW TO OBTAIN WARRANTY SERVICE. Please access and review the
online help resources described below before seeking warranty service.
If the Apple Product is still not functioning properly after making
use of these resources, please contact an Apple representative or, if
applicable, an Apple owned retail store (“Apple Retail”) or AASP, using the
information provided below. An Apple representative or AASP will help
determine whether your Apple Product requires service and, if it does,
will inform you how Apple will provide it. When contacting Apple via
telephone, other charges may apply depending on your location.
Online information with details on obtaining warranty service is
provided below.
WARRANTY SERVICE OPTIONS. Apple will provide warranty service
through one or more of the following options:(i) Carry-in service. You may return your Apple Product to an Apple Retail
or AASP location offering carry-in service. Service will be performed at
the location, or Apple Retail or an AASP may send your Apple Product
to an Apple Repair Service (“ARS”) location to be serviced. Once you are
notified that service is complete, you will promptly retrieve the Apple
Product from the Apple Retail or AASP location, or the Apple Product will
be sent directly to your location from the ARS location.
(ii) Mail-in service. If Apple determines that your Apple Product is eligible
for mail-in service, Apple will send you prepaid waybills and if applicable,
packaging material, so that you may ship your Apple Product to an ARS
or AASP location in accordance with Apple’s instructions. Once service is
complete, the ARS or AASP location will return the Apple Product to you.
Apple will pay for shipping to and from your location if all instructions
are followed.
(iii) Do-it-yourself (DIY) parts service. DIY parts service allows you to
service your own Apple Product. If DIY parts service is available in the
circumstances, the following process will apply.
(a) Service where Apple requires return of the replaced product or part.
Apple may require a credit card authorization as security for the retail
price of the replacement product or part and applicable shipping costs. If
you are unable to provide credit card authorization, DIY parts service may
not be available to you and Apple will offer alternative arrangements
for service. Apple will ship a replacement product or part to you with
installation instructions, if applicable, and any requirements for the return
of the replaced product or part. If you follow the instructions, Apple will
cancel the credit card authorization, so you will not be charged for the
product or part and shipping to and from your location. If you fail to
return the replaced product or part as instructed or return a replaced
product or part that is ineligible for service, Apple will charge your credit
card for the authorized amount.
(b) Service where Apple does not require return of the replaced product
or part. Apple will ship you free of charge a replacement product or
part accompanied by instructions on installation, if applicable, and any
requirements for the disposal of the replaced product or part.
(c) Apple is not responsible for any labor costs you incur relating to DIY
parts service. Should you require further assistance, contact Apple at the
telephone number listed below.
Apple reserves the right to change the method by which Apple may
provide warranty service to you, and your Apple Product’s eligibility
to receive a particular method of service. Service will be limited to the
options available in the country where service is requested. Service
options, parts availability and response times may vary according to
country. You may be responsible for shipping and handling charges if
the Apple Product cannot be serviced in the country it is in. If you seek
service in a country that is not the original country of purchase, you will
comply with all applicable import and export laws and regulations and
be responsible for all custom duties, V.A.T. and other associated taxes
and charges. Where international service is available, Apple may repair
or replace products and parts with comparable products and parts that
comply with local standards.LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN THIS WARRANTY
AND TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, APPLE IS NOT
RESPONSIBLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OR
CONDITION, OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF USE; LOSS OF REVENUE; LOSS OF ACTUAL OR
ANTICIPATED PROFITS (INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFITS ON CONTRACTS);
LOSS OF THE USE OF MONEY; LOSS OF ANTICIPATED SAVINGS; LOSS
OF BUSINESS; LOSS OF OPPORTUNITY; LOSS OF GOODWILL; LOSS OF
REPUTATION; LOSS OF, DAMAGE TO, COMPROMISE OR CORRUPTION
OF DATA; OR ANY INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGE
HOWSOEVER CAUSED INCLUDING THE REPLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT
AND PROPERTY, ANY COSTS OF RECOVERING, PROGRAMMING, OR
REPRODUCING ANY PROGRAM OR DATA STORED IN OR USED WITH THE
APPLE PRODUCT OR ANY FAILURE TO MAINTAIN THE CONFIDENTIALITY
OF INFORMATION STORED ON THE APPLE PRODUCT.
THE FOREGOING LIMITATION SHALL NOT APPLY TO DEATH OR PERSONAL
INJURY CLAIMS, OR ANY STATUTORY LIABILITY FOR INTENTIONAL AND
GROSS NEGLIGENT ACTS AND/OR OMISSIONS. APPLE DISCLAIMS ANY
REPRESENTATION THAT IT WILL BE ABLE TO REPAIR ANY APPLE PRODUCT
UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR REPLACE THE APPLE PRODUCT WITHOUT
RISK TO OR LOSS OF INFORMATION STORED IN THE APPLE PRODUCT.
SOME STATES (COUNTRIES AND PROVINCES) DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY
TO YOU.
PRIVACY. Apple will maintain and use customer information in
accordance with the Apple Customer Privacy Policy available at www.
apple.com/legal/warranty/privacy.
GENERAL. No Apple reseller, agent, or employee is authorized to make
any modification, extension, or addition to this warranty. If any term
is held to be illegal or unenforceable, the legality or enforceability of
the remaining terms shall not be affected or impaired. This warranty
is governed by and construed under the laws of the country in which
the Apple Product purchase took place. Apple is identified at the end
of this document according to the country or region in which the
Apple Product purchase took place. Apple or its successor in title is the
warrantor under this warranty.
ONLINE INFORMATION. More information of the following is available
online:
International Support Information
www.apple.com/support/country
Authorized Distributors
www.apple.com/iphone/countries
Apple Authorized Service Providers
support.apple.com/kb/HT1937
Apple Retail Store
www.apple.com/retail/storelistApple Support and Service
support.apple.com/kb/HE57
Apple Complimentary Support
www.apple.com/support/country/index.html?dest=complimentary
Warranty Obligor for Region or Country of Purchase
Region/Country of Purchase Apple Address
Americas
Brazil Apple Computer Brasil Ltda
Av. Cidade Jardim 400, 2 Andar, Sao Paulo,
SP Brasil 01454-901
Canada Apple Canada Inc.
7495 Birchmount Rd.; Markham, Ontario,
Canada; L3R 5G2 Canada
Mexico Apple Operations México S.A. de C.V.
Prolongación Paseo de la Reforma #600,
Suite 132
Colonia Peña Blanca, Santa Fé
Delegación Álvaro Obregón
México D. F., CP 01210, México
United States and
Other Americas Countries
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop; Cupertino, CA 95014, USA
Europe, Middle East and Africa
All countries Apple Sales International
Hollyhill Industrial Estate Hollyhill, Cork,
Republic of Ireland
Asia Pacific
Australia; New Zealand; Fiji,
Papua New Guinea; Vanuatu
Apple Pty. Limited.
PO Box A2629, Sydney South,
NSW 1235, Australia
Hong Kong Apple Asia Limited
2401 Tower One, Times Square,
Causeway Bay, Hong Kong
India Apple India Private Ltd.
19th Floor, Concorde Tower C,
UB City No 24, Vittal Mallya Road,
Bangalore 560-001, India
Japan Apple Japan Inc.
3-20-2 Nishishinjuku, Shinjuku-ku,
Tokyo, Japan
Korea Apple Korea Ltd.
3201, ASEM Tower; 159, Samsung-dong,
Gangnam-Gu; Seoul 135-798,
Republic of Korea
Afghanistan, Bangladesh,
Bhutan, Brunei, Cambodia,
Guam, Indonesia, Laos,
Singapore, Malaysia, Nepal,
Pakistan, Philippines,
Sri Lanka, Vietnam
Apple South Asia Pte. Ltd.
7 Ang Mo Kio Street 64
Singapore 569086Region/Country of Purchase Apple Address
People’s Republic of China Apple Computer Trading (Shanghai) Co. Ltd.
Room 1815, No. 1 Jilong Road, Waigaoqiao
Free Trade Zone, Shanghai 200131 China
Thailand Apple South Asia (Thailand) Limited
25th Floor, Suite B2, Siam Tower,
989 Rama 1 Road, Pataumwan,
Bangkok, 10330
Taiwan Apple Asia LLC
16A, No. 333 Tun Hwa S. Road. Sec. 2,
Taipei, Taiwan 106
Other Asian Pacific Countries Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop; Cupertino, CA 95014, USA
iPhone US Warranty v3.0© 2011 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Apple, the Apple logo, FaceTime, iPhone, iPod, iPod touch, iTunes,
Safari, Siri, the Made for iPod logo, and the Works with iPhone logo are
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The Made for iPhone logo and iMessage are trademarks of Apple Inc.
iTunes Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries. App Store and iCloud are service marks of Apple Inc.
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other
countries and is used under license. The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Apple Inc. is under license.
034-5992-A
Printed in XXXX
iPhone
User Guide
For iPhone OS 3.1 SoftwareContents
9 Chapter 1: Getting Started
9 Viewing the User Guide on iPhone
9 What You Need
10 Activating iPhone
10 Installing the SIM Card
10 Registering iPhone
11 Setting Up iPhone Using VoiceOver
11 Syncing
16 Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts
18 Installing Configuration Profiles
19 Disconnecting iPhone from Your Computer
20 Chapter 2: Basics
20 iPhone at a Glance
23 Home Screen
26 Buttons
28 Touchscreen
31 Onscreen Keyboard
37 Searching
38 Voice Control
39 Stereo Headset
40 Connecting to the Internet
43 Battery
45 Security Features
46 Cleaning iPhone
46 Restarting and Resetting iPhone
47 Chapter 3: Phone
47 Phone Calls
51 Visual Voicemail
54 Contacts
54 Favorites
54 Ringtones and the Ring/Silent Switch
255 Bluetooth Devices
56 International Calls
59 Chapter 4: Mail
59 Setting Up Email Accounts
59 Sending Email
60 Checking and Reading Email
64 Searching Email
64 Organizing Email
66 Chapter 5: Safari
66 Viewing Webpages
69 Searching the Web
69 Bookmarks
70 Web Clips
71 Chapter 6: iPod
71 Getting Music, Video, and More
73 Music and Other Audio
81 Videos
84 Setting a Sleep Timer
85 Changing the Browse Buttons
86 Chapter 7: Messages
86 Sending and Receiving Messages
88 Sharing Photos and Videos
88 Sending Voice Memos
89 Editing Conversations
89 Using Contact Information and Links
90 Managing Previews and Alerts
91 Chapter 8: Calendar
91 About Calendar
91 Syncing Calendars
92 Viewing Your Calendar
93 Searching Calendars
93 Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars
94 Adding Calendar Events to iPhone
95 Responding to Meeting Invitations
96 Alerts
97 Chapter 9: Photos
97 About Photos
97 Syncing Photos and Videos with Your Computer
Contents 398 Viewing Photos and Videos
99 Slideshows
100 Sharing Photos and Videos
102 Assigning a Photo to a Contact
102 Wallpaper
103 Chapter 10: Camera
103 About Camera
104 Taking Photos and Recording Videos
105 Viewing and Sharing Photos and Videos
105 Trimming Videos
106 Uploading Photos and Videos to Your Computer
107 Chapter 11: YouTube
107 Finding and Viewing Videos
108 Controlling Video Playback
109 Managing Videos
109 Getting More Information
110 Using YouTube Account Features
111 Changing the Browse Buttons
111 Sending Videos to YouTube
112 Chapter 12: Stocks
112 Viewing Stock Quotes
113 Getting More Information
114 Chapter 13: Maps
114 Finding and Viewing Locations
119 Bookmarking Locations
119 Getting Directions
121 Showing Traffic Conditions
121 Finding and Contacting Businesses
123 Chapter 14: Weather
123 Viewing Weather Summaries
124 Getting More Weather Information
125 Chapter 15: Voice Memos
125 Recording Voice Memos
126 Listening to Voice Memos
127 Managing Voice Memos
128 Trimming Voice Memos
128 Sharing Voice Memos
129 Syncing Voice Memos
4 Contents130 Chapter 16: Notes
130 Writing and Reading Notes
131 Searching Notes
131 Emailing Notes
131 Syncing Notes
132 Chapter 17: Clock
132 World Clocks
133 Alarms
133 Stopwatch
134 Timer
135 Chapter 18: Calculator
135 Using the Calculator
135 Standard Memory Functions
136 Scientific Calculator Keys
138 Chapter 19: Settings
138 Airplane Mode
139 Wi-Fi
140 VPN
140 Notifications
141 Carrier
141 Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch
142 Brightness
142 Wallpaper
142 General
150 Mail, Contacts, Calendars
153 Phone
156 Safari
157 Messages
158 iPod
159 Photos
159 Store
159 Nike + iPod
160 Chapter 20: iTunes Store
160 About the iTunes Store
161 Finding Music, Videos, and More
162 Purchasing Ringtones
162 Purchasing Music or Audiobooks
163 Purchasing or Renting Videos
164 Streaming or Downloading Podcasts
Contents 5165 Checking Download Status
165 Syncing Purchased Content
165 Changing the Browse Buttons
166 Viewing Account Information
166 Verifying Purchases
167 Chapter 21: App Store
167 About the App Store
167 Browsing and Searching
169 Info Screen
170 Downloading Applications
171 Deleting Applications
171 Writing Reviews
172 Updating Applications
172 Syncing Purchased Applications
173 Chapter 22: Compass
173 Getting Compass Readings
174 Compass and Maps
176 Chapter 23: Contacts
176 About Contacts
176 Adding Contacts
177 Searching Contacts
178 Managing Contacts on iPhone
180 Chapter 24: Nike + iPod
180 Activating Nike + iPod
181 Additional Nike + iPod Settings
182 Chapter 25: Accessibility
182 Accessibility Features
183 VoiceOver
189 Zoom
190 White on Black
190 Mono Audio
190 Speak Auto-text
191 Triple-click Home
191 Closed Captioning and Other Helpful Features
193 Appendix A: Troubleshooting
193 Apple iPhone Support Site
193 General
195 iTunes and Syncing
6 Contents196 Phone and Voicemail
197 Safari, Text, Mail, and Contacts
200 Sound, Music, and Video
201 iTunes Stores
201 Removing the SIM Card
202 Backing Up iPhone
204 Updating and Restoring iPhone Software
205 Appendix B: Other Resources
205 Safety, Software, and Service Information
206 Viewing the User Guide on iPhone
206 Disposal and Recycling Information
207 Apple and the Environment
208 Index
Contents 7Getting Started
1
· WARNING: To avoid injury, read all operating instructions in this guide and
safety information in the iPhone Important Product Information Guide at
www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone before using iPhone.
Viewing the User Guide on iPhone
The iPhone User Guide, optimized for viewing on iPhone, is available at
help.apple.com/iphone.
View the guide on iPhone: In Safari, tap , then tap the iPhone User Guide bookmark.
Add an icon for the guide to the Home screen: When viewing the guide, tap , then
tap “Add to Home Screen.”
The iPhone User Guide is available in many languages.
View the guide in a different language: Tap “Change Language” at the bottom of the
screen on the main contents page, then choose the language you want.
What You Need
To use iPhone, you need:
• A wireless service plan with a carrier that provides iPhone service in your area
• A Mac or a PC with a USB 2.0 port and one of the following operating systems:
• Mac OS X version 10.4.11 or later; version 10.5.7 or later is required for syncing
Notes and for using iPhone as a modem
• Windows XP Home or Professional with Service Pack 3 or later
• Windows Vista Home Premium, Business, Enterprise, or Ultimate edition
• Display resolution on your computer set to 1024 x 768 or higher
• iTunes 8.2 or later, available at www.itunes.com/download (iTunes 9 or later required
for certain features)
• QuickTime 7.6.2 or later (for playing videos recorded by iPhone 3GS on your
computer)
9• An iTunes Store account (for purchases from the iTunes Store or App Store)
• An Internet connection for your computer (broadband recommended)
Activating iPhone
Before you can use any of iPhone’s features, you must activate iPhone by signing up
for a service plan with an iPhone service carrier in your area and registering iPhone
with the network.
Your iPhone may have been activated at the time of purchase. If it isn’t activated,
contact your iPhone retailer or cellular service provider.
For more information about iPhone, go to www.apple.com/iphone.
Installing the SIM Card
If your SIM card was not preinstalled, you must install the SIM card before you can use
iPhone.
SIM
card
SIM tray
SIM eject tool
Install the SIM card:
1 Insert the end of the SIM eject tool into the hole on the SIM tray.
Press firmly and push it straight in until the tray pops out. If you don’t have a SIM eject
tool, you can use the end of a paper clip.
2 Pull out the SIM tray and place the SIM card in the tray.
The angled corner of the SIM ensures that the card fits only the correct way in the tray.
3 With the tray aligned as shown, carefully replace the SIM tray containing the SIM card
in iPhone.
Registering iPhone
Registering iPhone with iTunes enables iTunes to identify your iPhone when it’s
connected to your computer and help you manage its contents. You can then sync
information with your computer and media from iTunes, and create backups of
iPhone’s contents and settings. You can create an iTunes Store account, or specify an
existing account, to enable purchases with iPhone. iTunes also records iPhone’s serial
number in the event you need it for service or in case of loss.
10 Chapter 1 Getting StartedRegister iPhone:
1 Download and install the latest version of iTunes from www.itunes.com/download.
2 Connect iPhone to a USB 2.0 port on your Mac or PC using the cable that came with
iPhone.
3 Follow the onscreen instructions in iTunes to register iPhone and sync iPhone with
your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks on your computer, and with music, video,
and other content from your iTunes library.
In the Set Up Your iPhone screen, select “Automatically sync contacts, calendars
and bookmarks” to configure those items to sync automatically when you connect
iPhone to your computer. You can also customize your sync settings in iTunes.
See the following section.
Setting Up iPhone Using VoiceOver
If you’re visually impaired, VoiceOver (available only on iPhone 3GS) can help you set
up iPhone without a sighted assistant. VoiceOver describes aloud what appears on
the screen, so you can use iPhone without seeing it. When you connect iPhone to
your computer, iTunes detects whether you’re using a compatible screen reader on
your computer, such as VoiceOver on a Mac or GW Micro Window-Eyes on a PC, and
automatically enables VoiceOver on iPhone. A sighted user can also enable VoiceOver
on iPhone for you, using Accessibility settings. See “Using VoiceOver” on page 187.
Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages.
Syncing
With iPhone, you can have easy access to important information on your computer,
including your contacts, calendars, and even your browser bookmarks, as well as to
music, video, and other content in your iTunes library.
About Syncing
Syncing copies information and content between iPhone and your computer, keeping
it current and up-to-date, whether you make changes on iPhone or on your computer.
Chapter 1 Getting Started 11iTunes lets you specify the information and content on your computer that you want
to sync with iPhone. By default, iTunes syncs automatically with iPhone whenever you
connect iPhone to your computer.
You can also set up iPhone to sync your MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange accounts,
over the air. See “Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts” on page 16.
Syncing with iTunes
You can set iTunes to sync any or all of the following:
• Contacts—names, phone numbers, addresses, email addresses, and more
• Calendars—appointments and events
• Email account settings
• Webpage bookmarks
• Notes (requires Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later on a Mac, or Microsoft Outlook 2003
or 2007 on a PC)
• Ringtones
• Music and audiobooks
• Photos and videos (in your computer’s photo application or folder)
• iTunes U collections
• Podcasts
• Movies, TV shows, and music videos
• Applications downloaded from the iTunes Store
You can adjust sync settings whenever iPhone is connected to your computer.
Ringtones, music, audiobooks, podcasts, iTunes U collections, videos, and applications
can be synced from your iTunes library. If you don’t already have content in iTunes,
the iTunes Store (available in some countries) makes it easy to preview and download
content to iTunes. You can also add music to your iTunes library from your CDs. To
learn about iTunes and the iTunes Store, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help.
Contacts, calendars, notes, and webpage bookmarks are synced with applications
on your computer, as described in the following section. Contacts and calendars are
synced both ways between your computer and iPhone. New entries or changes you
make on iPhone are synced to your computer, and vice versa. Notes and webpage
bookmarks are also synced both ways. Photos and videos (Mac only) can be synced
from an application or from a folder.
Email account settings are synced only from your computer’s email application to
iPhone. This allows you to customize your email accounts on iPhone without affecting
email account settings on your computer.
12 Chapter 1 Getting StartedNote: You can also set up email accounts directly on iPhone. See “Mail, Contacts, and
Calendar Accounts.”
Purchases you make on iPhone in the iTunes Store or the App Store are synced back
to your iTunes library. You can also purchase or download content and applications
directly from the iTunes Store on your computer, and then sync them to iPhone.
You can set iPhone to sync with only a portion of what’s on your computer.
For example, you might want to sync only a group of contacts from your address
book, or only unwatched video podcasts.
Important: You should be logged in to your own computer user account before
connecting iPhone.
Set up iTunes syncing:
1 Connect iPhone to your computer, and open iTunes (if it doesn’t open automatically).
2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar.
3 Configure the sync settings in each of the settings panes.
See the following section for descriptions of the panes.
4 Click Apply in the lower-right corner of the screen.
By default, “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected” is selected.
iPhone Settings Panes in iTunes
The following sections provide an overview of each of the iPhone settings panes.
For more information, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help.
Summary Pane
Select “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected” to have iTunes sync iPhone
automatically whenever you connect it to your computer. Deselect this option if you
want to sync only by clicking the Sync button in iTunes. For more information about
preventing automatic syncing, see “Preventing Automatic Syncing” on page 15.
Chapter 1 Getting Started 13Select “Sync only checked songs and videos” if you want iTunes to skip unchecked
items in your iTunes library when syncing.
Select “Manually manage music and videos” to turn off automatic syncing in the Music
and Video settings panes. See “Manually Managing Content” on page 72.
Select “Encrypt iPhone backup” if you want to encrypt the information stored on your
computer when iTunes makes a backup. Encrypted backups are indicated by a padlock
icon, and a password is required to restore the information to iPhone. See “Backing Up
iPhone” on page 202.
Click Configure Universal Access to turn on Accessibility features (available only on
iPhone 3GS). See Chapter 25,“Accessibility,” on page 182.
Info Pane
The Info pane lets you configure the sync settings for your contacts, calendars, email
accounts, and web browser.
• Contacts
Sync contacts with applications such as Mac OS X Address Book, Yahoo! Address
Book, and Google Contacts on a Mac, or with Yahoo! Address Book, Google Contacts,
Windows Address Book (Outlook Express), Windows Vista Contacts, or Microsoft
Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you can sync contacts with multiple
applications. On a PC, you can sync contacts with only one application at a time.)
If you sync with Yahoo! Address Book, you only need to click Configure to enter your
new login information when you change your Yahoo! ID or password after you’ve
set up syncing.
• Calendars
Sync calendars from applications such as iCal on a Mac, or from Microsoft Outlook
2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you can sync calendars with multiple applications.
On a PC, you can sync calendars with only one application at a time.)
• Mail Accounts
Sync email account settings from Mail on a Mac, and from Microsoft Outlook 2003
or 2007 or Outlook Express on a PC. Account settings are transferred only from your
computer to iPhone. Changes you make to an email account on iPhone don’t affect
the account on your computer.
Note: The password for your Yahoo! email account isn’t saved on your computer,
so it can’t be synced and must be entered on iPhone. In Settings, choose “Mail,
Contacts, Calendars,” tap your Yahoo! account, and enter the password.
• Web Browser
You can sync bookmarks on iPhone with Safari on a Mac, or with Safari or Microsoft
Internet Explorer on a PC.
14 Chapter 1 Getting Started• Notes
Sync notes in the Notes application on iPhone with notes in Mail on a Mac or with
Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC. (On a Mac, you must have Mac OS version
10.5.7 or later installed to sync notes.)
• Advanced
These options let you replace the information on iPhone with the information on
your computer during the next sync.
Applications Pane
Use the Applications pane to specify which App Store applications to sync on
iPhone, or to arrange your Home screen (requires iTunes 9 or later). Any applications
downloaded directly to iPhone are automatically backed up to your iTunes library
when you sync. If you manually delete an application on iPhone, you can reinstall it
from this pane as long as it was previously synced.
Ringtones Pane
Use the Ringtones pane to select the ringtones you want to sync to iPhone.
Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, and iTunes U Panes
Use these panes to specify the media you want to sync. You can sync all music, movies,
TV shows, podcasts, and iTunes U collections, or select the content you want on
iPhone.
If you want to watch rented movies on iPhone, transfer them to iPhone using the
Movies pane in iTunes.
If there’s not enough room on iPhone for all the media you’ve specified, iTunes can
create a special playlist and set it to sync with iPhone.
Note: The iTunes U pane appears only in iTunes 9 or later. In earlier versions of iTunes,
iTunes U content appeared in the Podcasts pane.
Photos Pane
You can sync photos and videos (Mac only, iTunes 9 required) with iPhoto 4.0.3 or later,
or Aperture on a Mac; or with Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later on a PC. You can
also sync photos and videos in any folder on your computer that contains images.
Preventing Automatic Syncing
You can prevent iPhone from syncing automatically when you connect iPhone to a
computer other than the one you usually sync with.
Turn off automatic syncing for iPhone: Connect iPhone to your computer. In iTunes,
select iPhone in the sidebar, then click the Summary tab. Deselect “Automatically sync
when this iPhone is connected.” You can still sync by clicking the Sync button.
Chapter 1 Getting Started 15Prevent automatic syncing for all iPhones and iPods: In iTunes choose iTunes >
Preferences (on a Mac) or Edit > Preferences (on a PC), click Devices, and select “Disable
automatic syncing for all iPhones and iPods.”
If this checkbox is selected, iPhone won’t sync automatically, even if “Automatically
sync when this iPhone is connected” is selected in the Summary pane.
Prevent automatic syncing one time, without changing settings: Open iTunes,
connect iPhone to your computer, then press and hold Command-Option (on a Mac)
or Shift-Control (on a PC) until you see iPhone appear in the sidebar.
Sync manually: In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar, then click Sync in the bottomright corner of the window. Or, if you’ve changed any sync settings, click Apply.
Mail, Contacts, and Calendar Accounts
iPhone works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular
email systems.
Setting Up Accounts
MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange provide not only email, but contact and calendar
information that can be synced to iPhone automatically, over the air. MobileMe can
also sync your bookmarks on iPhone with Safari on a Mac, or with Safari or Microsoft
Internet Explorer on a PC. You set up MobileMe, Exchange, and other email accounts
directly on iPhone.
iPhone uses the Exchange ActiveSync protocol to sync email, calendars, and contacts
with the following versions of Microsoft Exchange:
• Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack 2
• Exchange Server 2007 Service Pack 1
For many popular email accounts, iPhone automatically enters most of the settings
for you.
If you don’t already have an email account, you can get a free account online at
www.yahoo.com, www.google.com, or www.aol.com. You can also try MobileMe,
free for 60 days. Go to www.me.com.
Set up an account on iPhone:
1 From the iPhone Home screen, tap Settings.
2 Tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account.
3 Tap an account type:
• Microsoft Exchange
• MobileMe
• Google email
16 Chapter 1 Getting Started• Yahoo! Mail
• AOL
• Other
4 Enter your account information and tap Save.
Your service provider or system administrator can provide the account settings you
need.
Exchange accounts: Enter your complete email address, domain (optional), user name,
password, and a description. The description can be whatever you like.
iPhone supports Microsoft’s Autodiscovery service, which uses your user name and
password to determine the address of the Exchange server. If the server’s address
can’t be determined, you’re asked to enter it. (Enter the complete address in the Server
field.) Once you connect to the Exchange server, you may be prompted to change your
passcode to match the policies set on the server.
5 If you’re setting up a MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange account, tap the items you want
to use on iPhone—mail, contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only).
MobileMe includes the Find My iPhone feature that helps you locate iPhone if it’s been
lost or stolen, and remotely lock, set a passcode, or erase the information on iPhone if
necessary. See “Security Features” on page 45.
If you enable Find My iPhone for your MobileMe account, make sure that Push is
turned on for Fetch New Data. In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch
New Data, and if Push is off, tap to turn it on.
For Exchange accounts, you can set how many days of email you want to sync to
iPhone.
If you already have contact or calendar information on iPhone when you enable the
account, iPhone asks what you want to do with existing information on iPhone. You
can choose to merge the existing data into your MobileMe or Exchange account. If
you don’t merge the data, you can choose to keep it in a separate account on iPhone
(the account is labeled “On My iPhone”), or delete it. Existing bookmarks can only be
merged or deleted.
Similarly, when you disable contacts or calendars in an MobileMe or Exchange account,
or if you delete an account, iPhone asks if you want to keep information or delete it.
You can add contacts using an LDAP account if your company or organization
supports it. See “Adding Contacts” on page 176.
You can subscribe to CalDAV or iCal (.ics) calendars. See “Subscribing to and Sharing
Calendars” on page 93.
Chapter 1 Getting Started 17Push Accounts
MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and Yahoo! Mail are known as “push” accounts. When
new information is available, such as the arrival of an email message, the information
is automatically delivered (pushed) to iPhone. (In contrast, “fetch” services require your
email software to periodically check with your service provider to see if new messages
have arrived, and then request them to be delivered.) MobileMe and Exchange also
use push to sync your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only) if you have
those items selected in the account settings.
Synced information is transferred automatically over your wireless connection; you
don’t need to connect iPhone to your computer to sync. If you don’t have a cellular
connection, iPhone can receive pushed data over a Wi-Fi connection when iPhone is
awake (the screen is on, or iPhone is connected to your computer or a power adapter).
Installing Configuration Profiles
If you’re in an enterprise environment, you may be able to set up accounts and
other items on iPhone by installing a configuration profile. Configuration profiles
provide a way for system administrators to quickly set up your iPhone to work with
the information systems at your company, school, or organization. For example, a
configuration profile might set up your iPhone to access the Microsoft Exchange
servers at work, enabling iPhone to access your Exchange email, calendars, and
contacts.
Configuration profiles can configure multiple settings on iPhone all at once. For
example, a configuration profile can set up your Microsoft Exchange account, VPN
account, and certificates for secure access to your company’s network and information.
A configuration profile may turn on the Passcode Lock, requiring you to create and
enter a passcode for using iPhone.
Your system administrator may distribute configuration profiles by email or by putting
them on a secure webpage. A system administrator may also install a configuration
profile directly on iPhone for you.
Install a configuration profile:
1 Using iPhone, open the email message or download the configuration profile from the
website provided by your system administrator.
2 When the configuration profile opens, tap Install.
3 Enter passwords and other information as requested.
Important: You may be asked to verify that the configuration profile is trusted. If in
doubt, consult your system administrator before installing a configuration profile.
18 Chapter 1 Getting StartedSettings provided by a configuration profile cannot be altered. If you want to change
these settings, you must first remove the configuration profile or install an updated
configuration profile.
Remove a profile: In Settings, choose General > Profile, then select the configuration
profile and tap Remove.
Removing a configuration profile deletes the settings and all other information
installed by the configuration profile from iPhone.
Disconnecting iPhone from Your Computer
Unless iPhone is syncing with your computer, you can disconnect it from your
computer at any time.
When iPhone is syncing with your computer, iPhone shows “Sync in progress.” If you
disconnect iPhone before it finishes syncing, some data may not get transferred. When
iPhone finishes syncing, iTunes shows “iPhone sync is complete.”
Cancel a sync: Drag the slider on iPhone.
If you get a call during a sync, the sync is canceled automatically and you can unplug
iPhone to answer the call. Connect iPhone after the call to finish syncing.
Chapter 1 Getting Started 19Basics
2
iPhone at a Glance
Headset jack
Receiver
Ring/Silent
switch
Camera
(on back)
SIM card tray
Volume
buttons
Touchscreen
Speaker
Dock
connector
Home button
Sleep/Wake
button
Microphone
Application
icons
Status bar
Your Home screen may look different, depending on the model of iPhone you have
and whether you have rearranged its icons.
iPhone Included Accessories
Dock Connector to USB Cable
Stereo headset
USB power adapter SIM eject tool
20Item What you can do with it
Apple Earphones with Remote and Mic
(iPhone 3GS)
iPhone Stereo Headset (iPhone 3G)
Listen to music, videos, and phone calls. Use
the built-in microphone to talk. Press the center
button to answer or end a call. When listening
to iPod, press the button once to play or pause
a song, or press twice quickly to skip to the next
track. Use the + and – buttons to adjust the
volume (iPhone 3GS only). Press and hold the
center button to use Voice Control (iPhone 3GS
only).
Dock Connector to USB Cable Use the cable to connect iPhone to your
computer to sync and charge. The cable can be
used with the optional dock or plugged directly
into iPhone.
USB power adapter Connect the power adapter to iPhone using
the included cable, then plug it into a standard
power outlet to charge iPhone.
SIM eject tool Eject the SIM card.
Status Icons
The icons in the status bar at the top of the screen give information about iPhone:
Status icon What it means
Cell signal Shows whether you’re in range of the cellular
network and can make and receive calls. The
more bars, the stronger the signal. If there’s no
signal, the bars are replaced with “No service.”
Airplane mode Shows that airplane mode is on—you cannot use
the phone, access the Internet, or use Bluetooth®
devices. Non-wireless features are available.
See “Airplane Mode” on page 138.
3G Shows that your carrier’s 3G network is available,
and iPhone can connect to the Internet over 3G.
Available on iPhone 3G or later. See “How iPhone
Connects to the Internet” on page 40.
Chapter 2 Basics 21Status icon What it means
EDGE Shows that your carrier’s EDGE network is
available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet
over EDGE. See “How iPhone Connects to the
Internet” on page 40.
GPRS Shows that your carrier’s GPRS network is
available, and iPhone can connect to the Internet
over GPRS. See “How iPhone Connects to the
Internet” on page 40.
Wi-Fi Shows that iPhone is connected to the Internet
over a Wi-Fi network. The more bars, the stronger
the connection. See “Joining a Wi-Fi Network” on
page 41.
Network activity Shows over-the-air syncing or other network
activity. Some third-party applications may also
use this icon to indicate an active process.
Call Forwarding Shows that Call Forwarding is set up on iPhone.
See “Call Forwarding” on page 154.
VPN Shows that you’re connected to a network using
VPN. See “Network” on page 143.
Lock Shows that iPhone is locked. See “Sleep/Wake
Button” on page 26.
TTY Shows that iPhone is set to work with a TTY
machine. See “Using iPhone with a Teletype (TTY)
Machine” on page 154.
Play Shows that a song, audiobook, or podcast is
playing. See “Playing Songs” on page 73.
Alarm Shows that an alarm is set. See “Alarms” on
page 133.
Bluetooth Blue or white icon: Bluetooth is on and a device,
such as a headset or car kit, is connected. Gray
icon: Bluetooth is on, but no device is connected.
No icon: Bluetooth is turned off. See “Bluetooth
Devices” on page 55.
Battery Shows battery level or charging status.
See “Battery” on page 43.
22 Chapter 2 BasicsHome Screen
Press the Home button at any time to go to the Home screen, which contains your
iPhone applications. Tap any application icon to get started.
iPhone Applications
The following applications are included with iPhone:
Phone
Make calls, with quick access to recent callers, favorites, and all your contacts. Dial
manually using the numeric keypad. Or just use voice dialing. Visual voicemail presents
a list of your voicemail messages. Just tap to listen to any message you want, in any
order you want.
Mail
iPhone works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email
systems—including Yahoo! Mail, Google email, and AOL—as well as most industrystandard POP3 and IMAP email systems. View PDFs and other attachments within Mail.
Save attached photos and graphics to your Camera Roll album.
Safari
Browse websites over a cellular data network or over Wi-Fi. Rotate iPhone sideways
for widescreen viewing. Double-tap to zoom in or out—Safari automatically fits the
webpage column to the iPhone screen for easy reading. Open multiple pages. Sync
bookmarks with Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on your computer. Add Safari web
clips to the Home screen for fast access to favorite websites. Save images from websites
to your Photo Library.
iPod
Listen to your songs, audiobooks, and podcasts. Create on-the-go playlists, or use
Genius to create playlists for you. Listen to Genius Mixes of songs from your library.
Watch movies and video podcasts in widescreen.
Messages
Send and receive SMS text messages. Conversations are saved in an iChat-like
presentation, so you can see a history of messages you’ve sent and received. Send
photos, video clips (iPhone 3GS only), contact information, and voice memos to MMS
devices (iPhone 3G or later).
Calendar
View and search your MobileMe, iCal, Microsoft Entourage, Microsoft Outlook, or
Microsoft Exchange calendars. Enter events on iPhone and they get synced back to the
calendar on your computer. Subscribe to calendars. Set alerts to remind you of events,
appointments, and deadlines.
Photos
View photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) you’ve taken with iPhone, received in Mail or
MMS (iPhone 3GS only) messages, or synced from your computer’s photo application.
(Video syncing on Macs only.) View them in portrait or landscape orientation. Zoom
in on photos for a closer look. Watch a slideshow. Email photos and videos, send them
in MMS messages (iPhone 3G or later), or publish them to MobileMe galleries. Assign
images to contacts, and use them as wallpaper.
Chapter 2 Basics 23Camera
Take photos, and record videos (iPhone 3GS only). View them on iPhone, email them,
send them in an MMS message (iPhone 3G or later), or upload them to your computer.
Trim and save video clips. Upload videos directly to YouTube. Take a friend’s picture and
set iPhone to display it when that person calls you.
YouTube
Play videos from YouTube’s online collection. Search for any video, or browse featured,
most viewed, most recently updated, and top-rated videos. Set up and log in to your
YouTube account—then rate videos, sync your favorites, show subscriptions, and more.
Upload your own videos taken with iPhone.
Stocks
Watch your favorite stocks, updated automatically from the Internet. View company
news and current trading information, such as opening or average price, trading
volume, or market capitalization. Rotate iPhone to see detailed charts in landscape
orientation. Drag your finger along the charts to track price points, or use two fingers
to see a range between points.
Maps
See a street map, satellite view, or hybrid view of locations around the world. Zoom
in for a closer look, or check out the Google Street View. Find and track your current
(approximate) location. See which way you’re facing (iPhone 3GS only, using its builtin compass). Get detailed driving, public transit, or walking directions and see current
highway traffic conditions. Find businesses in the area and call with a single tap.
Weather
Get current weather conditions and a six-day forecast. Add your favorite cities for a
quick weather report anytime.
Voice
Memos
Record voice memos on iPhone. Play them back on iPhone or sync them with iTunes
to listen to voice memos on your computer. Attach voice memos to email or MMS
messages (iPhone 3G or later).
Notes
Jot notes on the go—reminders, grocery lists, brilliant ideas. Send them in email.
Sync notes to Mail or Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express.
Clock
View the time in cities around the world—create clocks for your favorites. Set one or
more alarms. Use the stopwatch, or set a countdown timer.
24 Chapter 2 BasicsCalculator
Add, subtract, multiply, and divide. Rotate iPhone sideways to use expanded scientific
functions.
Settings
Set up accounts and adjust all iPhone settings in one convenient place. Set your own
volume limit for listening comfort. Set your ringtone, wallpaper, screen brightness,
and settings for network, phone, mail, web, music, video, photos, and more. Set autolock and a passcode for security. Restrict access to explicit iTunes content and certain
applications. Reset iPhone.
iTunes
Search the iTunes Store for music, ringtones, audiobooks, TV shows, music videos, and
movies. Browse, preview, purchase, and download new releases, top items, and more.
Rent movies to view on iPhone. Stream and download podcasts. Read reviews or write
your own reviews for your favorite store items.
App Store
Search the App Store for iPhone applications you can purchase or download using
your Wi-Fi or cellular data network connection. Read reviews or write your own reviews
for your favorite apps. Download and install the application on your Home screen.
Compass
Use the built-in digital compass (iPhone 3GS only) to determine your heading. Get your
current coordinates. Choose between true north and magnetic north.
Contacts
Get contact information synced from MobileMe, Mac OS X Address Book, Yahoo!
Address Book, Google Contacts, Windows Address Book (Outlook Express), Microsoft
Outlook, or Microsoft Exchange. Search, add, change, or delete contacts, which get
synced back to your computer.
Nike + iPod
Nike + iPod (which appears when you activate it in Settings) turns iPhone into a
workout companion. Track your pace, time, and distance from one workout to the next
and choose a song to power through your routine. (iPhone 3GS only. Requires select
Nike shoes and a Nike + iPod Sensor, sold separately.)
Note: Application functionality and availability may vary depending on the country or
region where you purchase and use iPhone. Contact your carrier for more information.
Customizing the Home Screen
You can customize the layout of icons on the Home screen—including the Dock
icons along the bottom of the screen. If you want, arrange them over multiple
Home screens.
Rearrange icons:
1 Touch and hold any Home screen icon until the icons begin to wiggle.
2 Arrange the icons by dragging them.
3 Press the Home button to save your arrangement.
You can also add links to your favorite webpages on the Home screen. See “Web
Clips” on page 70.
Chapter 2 Basics 25You can also rearrange the Home screen icons and the order of the screens (in iTunes
9 or later) when iPhone is connected to your computer. Select iPhone in the iTunes
sidebar, then click the Applications tab.
Create additional Home screens: While arranging icons, drag an icon to the right
edge of the screen until a new screen appears. You can flick to return to the original
screen and drag more icons to the new screen.
You can create up to 11 screens. The number of dots above the Dock shows the
number of screens you have, and indicates which screen you’re viewing.
Switch to another Home screen: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row
of dots.
Go to the first Home screen: Press the Home button.
Reset your Home screen to the default layout: Choose Settings > General > Reset
and tap Reset Home Screen Layout.
Buttons
A few simple buttons make it easy to turn iPhone on and off, adjust the volume, and
switch between ring and silent modes.
Sleep/Wake Button
When you’re not using iPhone but you still want to receive calls and text messages,
you can lock it.
When iPhone is locked, nothing happens if you touch the screen. You can still listen to
music and adjust the volume, and use the center button on your iPhone headset (or
the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to play or pause a song, or answer
or end a call.
26 Chapter 2 BasicsBy default, if you don’t touch the screen for a minute, iPhone locks automatically.
Sleep/Wake
button
Lock iPhone Press the Sleep/Wake button.
Unlock iPhone Press the Home button or the Sleep/Wake
button, then drag the slider.
Turn iPhone completely off Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button for a few
seconds until the red slider appears, then drag
the slider. When iPhone is off, incoming calls go
straight to voicemail.
Turn iPhone on Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the
Apple logo appears.
For information about changing how long before iPhone locks, see “Auto-Lock” on
page 145. For information about setting iPhone to require a passcode to unlock it,
see “Passcode Lock” on page 145.
Volume Buttons
When you’re on the phone or listening to songs, movies, or other media, the buttons
on the side of iPhone adjust the audio volume. Otherwise, the buttons control the
volume for the ringer, alerts, and other sound effects.
WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important
Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
To adjust the volume, use the buttons on the side of iPhone.
Volume
up
Volume
down
To set a volume limit for music and videos on iPhone, see “Music” on page 158.
Chapter 2 Basics 27Ring/Silent Switch
Flip the Ring/Silent switch to change between ring and silent modes.
Ring
Silent
When set to ring mode, iPhone plays all sounds. When set to silent mode, iPhone
doesn’t ring or play alerts and other sound effects.
Important: Clock alarms, audio-dependent applications such as iPod, and many games
still play sounds through the built-in speaker when iPhone is set to silent mode.
By default, when you get a call, iPhone vibrates whether it’s set to ring mode, or in
silent mode. If iPhone is set to ring mode, you can silence a call by pressing the Sleep/
Wake button or one of the volume buttons once. Press a second time to send the call
to voicemail.
For information about changing sound and vibrate settings, see “Sounds and the Ring/
Silent Switch” on page 141.
Touchscreen
The controls on the iPhone touchscreen change dynamically depending on the task
you’re performing.
Opening Applications
Open an application: Tap an icon.
28 Chapter 2 BasicsClose an application and return to the Home screen: Press the Home button
below the display.
Scrolling
Drag up or down to scroll. On some screens such as webpages, you can also scroll side
to side.
Dragging your finger to scroll won’t choose or activate anything on the screen.
Flick to scroll quickly.
You can wait for the scrolling to come to a stop, or touch anywhere on the screen to
stop it immediately. Touching the screen to stop scrolling won’t choose or activate
anything.
To quickly scroll to the top of a list, webpage, or email, just tap the status bar.
Chapter 2 Basics 29Lists
Some lists have an index along the right side, which helps you navigate quickly.
Find items in an indexed list: Tap a letter to jump to items starting with that letter.
Drag your finger along the index to scroll quickly through the list.
Index
Choose an item: Tap an item in the list.
Depending on the list, tapping an item can do different things—for example, it may
open a new list, play a song, open an email, or show someone’s contact information so
you can call that person.
Return to a previous list: Tap the back button in the upper-left corner.
Zooming In or Out
When viewing photos, webpages, email, or maps, you can zoom in and out. Pinch your
fingers together or apart. For photos and webpages, you can double-tap (tap twice
quickly) to zoom in, then double-tap again to zoom out. For maps, double-tap to zoom
in and tap once with two fingers to zoom out.
30 Chapter 2 BasicsViewing in Landscape
Many iPhone applications let you view the screen in either portrait or landscape
orientation. Rotate iPhone and the display rotates too, adjusting automatically to fit
the new screen orientation.
You may prefer landscape for viewing webpages in Safari, or when entering text, for
example. Webpages automatically scale to the wider screen in landscape, making the
text and images larger. Similarly, the onscreen keyboard is larger in landscape, which
may help increase your typing speed and accuracy.
The following applications support both portrait and landscape orientation:
• Mail
• Safari
• Messages
• Notes
• Contacts
• Stocks
• iPod
• Photos
• Camera
• Calculator
Movies viewed in iPod and YouTube appear only in landscape orientation. Street views
in Maps also appear in landscape.
Onscreen Keyboard
Use the onscreen keyboard to enter text, such as contact information, text messages,
and web addresses.
Chapter 2 Basics 31Typing
Depending on the application you’re using, the intelligent keyboard may automatically
suggest corrections as you type to help prevent mistyped words.
Enter text:
1 Tap a text field, such as in a note or new contact, to bring up the keyboard.
2 Tap keys on the keyboard.
Start by typing with just your index finger. As you get more proficient, you can type
more quickly using two thumbs.
As you type, each letter appears above your thumb or finger. If you touch the wrong
key, you can slide your finger to the correct key. The letter isn’t entered until you
release your finger from the key.
Type uppercase Tap the Shift key before tapping a letter. Or
touch and hold the Shift key, then slide to a letter.
Quickly type a period and space Double-tap the space bar. (You can turn
this feature on or off in Settings > General >
Keyboard.)
Turn caps lock on Double-tap the Shift key. The Shift key turns
blue, and all letters you type are uppercase. Tap
the Shift key again to turn caps lock off. (You can
turn this feature on or off in Settings > General >
Keyboard.)
Show numbers, punctuation, or symbols Tap the Number key. Tap the Symbol key
to see additional punctuation and symbols.
Type letters or symbols that aren’t on the
keyboard
Touch and hold the related letter or symbol, then
slide to choose a variation.
32 Chapter 2 BasicsDictionary
For many languages, iPhone has dictionaries to help you type. The appropriate
dictionary is activated automatically when you select a supported keyboard.
For a list of supported languages, see www.apple.com/iphone/specs.html.
iPhone uses the active dictionary to suggest corrections or complete the word you’re
typing. You don’t need to interrupt your typing to accept the suggested word.
Suggested
word
Accept or reject dictionary suggestions:
m To reject the suggested word, finish typing the word as you want it, then tap the “x” to
dismiss the suggestion before typing anything else. Each time you reject a suggestion
for the same word, iPhone becomes more likely to accept your word.
m To use the suggested word, type a space, punctuation mark, or return character.
Turn Auto-Correction on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Auto-Correction
on or off. Auto-Correction is on by default.
Note: If you’re entering Chinese or Japanese, tap one of the suggested alternatives.
Editing
An onscreen magnifying glass helps you position the insertion point for typing and
editing text. You can select text to cut, copy, and paste.
Chapter 2 Basics 33Position the insertion point: Touch and hold to bring up the magnifying glass,
then drag to position the insertion point.
Select text: Tap the insertion point to display the selection buttons. Tap Select to
select the adjacent word or tap Select All to select all text. When you’re typing, you can
also double-tap to select a word. In read-only documents, such as webpages, or email
or text messages you’ve received, touch and hold to select a word.
Drag the grab points to select more or less text.
Cut or copy text: Select text, then tap Cut or Copy.
Paste text: Tap the insertion point and tap Paste. The last text that you cut or copied is
inserted. Or select text and tap Paste to replace the text.
Undo the last edit: Shake iPhone and tap Undo.
34 Chapter 2 BasicsInternational Keyboards
iPhone provides keyboards that allow you to enter text in many different languages,
including languages that read from right to left. For a complete list of supported
keyboards, go to www.apple.com/iphone/specs.html.
Turn international keyboards on or off:
1 In Settings, choose General > International > Keyboards.
2 Turn on the keyboards you want. Languages with more than one keyboard, such as
Japanese and Chinese, indicate the number of keyboards available. Tap to choose a
keyboard for that language.
Switch keyboards if more than one keyboard is
turned on
Tap to switch keyboards. When you tap
the symbol, the name of the newly activated
keyboard appears briefly.
Type letters, numbers, or symbols that aren’t on
the keyboard
Touch and hold the related letter, number, or
symbol, then slide to choose a variation. On the
Hebrew and Thai keyboards, for example, you can
choose native numbers by touching and holding
the related Arabic number.
Enter Japanese Kana Use the Kana keypad to select syllables. For more
syllable options, tap the arrow key and select
another syllable or word from the window.
Enter Japanese QWERTY Use the QWERTY keyboard to input code for
Japanese syllables. As you type, suggested
syllables appear. Tap the syllable to choose it.
Enter Emoji picture characters Use the Emoji keyboard. Available only on
iPhones purchased and used in Japan.
Enter Korean Use the 2-Set Korean keyboard to type Hangul
letters. To type double consonants or compound
vowels, touch and hold the letter, then slide to
choose the double letter.
Enter Simplified or Traditional Chinese Pinyin Use the QWERTY keyboard to enter Pinyin for
Chinese characters. As you type, suggested
Chinese characters appear. Tap a character to
choose it, or continue entering Pinyin to see
more character options.
Chapter 2 Basics 35Enter Traditional Chinese Zhuyin Use the keyboard to enter Zhuyin letters. As you
type, suggested Chinese characters appear. Tap
a character to choose it, or continue entering
Zhuyin to see more character options. After you
type an initial letter, the keyboard changes to
show more letters.
Enter handwritten Simplified or Traditional
Chinese
Use the touchpad to enter Chinese characters
with your finger. As you write character strokes,
iPhone recognizes them and shows matching
characters in a list, with the closest match at the
top. When you choose a character, its related
characters appear in the list as additional choices.
You can get some complex characters by
entering two or more component characters.
For example, enter ? (fish), then ? (bristle), to
get ? (partial name of Hong Kong International
Airport), which appears in the character list with
an arrow next to it. Tap the character to replace
the characters you entered.
When Simplified or Traditional Chinese handwriting formats are turned on, you can
enter Chinese characters with your finger, as shown:
Touchpad
36 Chapter 2 BasicsSearching
You can search many applications on iPhone, including Mail, Calendar, iPod, Notes,
and Contacts. You can search an individual application, or search all the applications at
once using Spotlight.
Go to Spotlight: From the main page of the Home screen, flick left to right.
If you’re on the main Home screen page, you can press the Home button to go to
Spotlight. From the Spotlight page, press the Home button to return to the main
Home screen page. You can also set iPhone to go to Spotlight when you double-click
the Home button. See “Home” on page 147.
Search iPhone: On the Spotlight page, enter text in the Search field. Search results
appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of
the results.
Icons to the left of the search results let you know which application the results are
from. Tap an item in the results list to open it.
Application What’s searched
Contacts First, last, and company names
Mail To, From, and Subject fields of all accounts (the
text of messages isn’t searched)
Calendar Event titles, invitees, and locations (notes aren’t
searched)
iPod Music (names of songs, artists, and albums) and
the titles of podcasts, video, and audiobooks
Notes Text of notes
Spotlight also searches the names of the native and installed applications on iPhone,
so if you have a lot of applications you may want to use Spotlight as a way to locate
and open applications.
Open applications from Spotlight: Enter the application name, then tap to open the
application directly from the search results.
Use the Search Results settings to choose which applications are searched and the
order in which they’re searched. See “Home” on page 147.
Chapter 2 Basics 37Voice Control
Voice Control (available only on iPhone 3GS) lets you make phone calls and control
iPod music playback using voice commands.
Note: Voice Control isn’t available in all languages.
Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen
appears and you hear a beep. You can also press and hold the center button on the
iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset).
Use the following commands to make calls or play songs.
Call someone in contacts Say “call” or “dial,” then say the name of the
person. If the person has more than one phone
number, you can add “home” or “mobile,” for
example.
Dial a number Say “call” or “dial,” then say the number.
Control music playback Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause”
or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or
“previous song.”
Play an album, artist, or playlist Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist”
and the name.
Shuffle the current playlist Say “shuffle.”
Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who
sings this song,” or “who is this song by.”
Use Genius to play similar songs Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more
songs like this.”
Cancel Voice Control Say “cancel” or “stop.”
For best results:
• Speak into the iPhone microphone as if you were making a phone call. You can also
use the microphone in your iPhone or Bluetooth headset.
• Speak clearly and naturally.
38 Chapter 2 Basics• Say only iPhone commands and names, and numbers. Pause slightly between
commands.
• Use full names.
By default, Voice Control expects you to speak voice commands in the language that’s
set for iPhone (the General > International > Language setting). The Voice Control
settings let you change the language for speaking voice commands. Some languages
are available in different dialects or accents.
Change language or country: In Settings, choose General > International > Voice
Control and tap the language or country.
Voice Control for the iPod application is always on, but for security you can prevent
voice dialing when iPhone is locked.
Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: In Settings, choose General > Passcode
Lock and turn Voice Dial off. Unlock iPhone to use voice dialing.
See“Voice Dialing” on page 48 and“Using Voice Control with iPod” on page 77.
Stereo Headset
The headset included with iPhone features a microphone and an integrated button
that allows you to answer and end calls easily, and control audio and video playback.
The headset included with iPhone 3GS (shown here) also has volume buttons.
Center button
Plug in the headset to listen to music or make a phone call. Callers hear you through
the built-in microphone. Press the center button to control music playback and answer
or end calls, even when iPhone is locked. (You can also use the equivalent button on
your Bluetooth headset to control these functions.)
Pause a song or video Press the center button once. Press again to
resume playback.
Skip to the next song Press the center button twice quickly.
Return to previous song Press the center button three times quickly.
Fast-forward Press the center button twice quickly and hold.
Chapter 2 Basics 39Rewind Press the center button three-times quickly and
hold.
Adjust the volume (iPhone 3GS only) Press the + or – button.
Answer an incoming call Press the center button once.
End the current call Press the center button once.
Decline an incoming call Press and hold the center button for about two
seconds, then let go. Two low beeps confirm you
declined the call.
Switch to an incoming or on-hold call and put
the current call on hold
Press the center button once. Press again to
switch back to the first call.
Switch to an incoming or on-hold call and end
the current call
Press and hold the center button for about two
seconds, then let go. Two low beeps confirm you
ended the first call.
Use Voice Control (iPhone 3GS only) Press and hold the center button. See “Voice
Control” on page 38.
If you get a call while the headset is plugged in, you can hear the ringtone through
both the iPhone speaker and the headset.
Connecting to the Internet
iPhone connects to the Internet automatically whenever you use Mail, Safari, YouTube,
Stocks, Maps, Weather, the App Store, or the iTunes Store.
How iPhone Connects to the Internet
iPhone connects to the Internet using either a Wi-Fi network or a cellular data network.
iPhone does the following, in order, until connected:
• Connects over the last Wi-Fi network you used that’s available.
• If no previously used Wi-Fi networks are available, iPhone shows a list of Wi-Fi
networks in range. Tap a network and, if necessary, enter the password to join.
Networks that require a password show next to them. You can prevent iPhone
from automatically showing available networks. See “Wi-Fi” on page 139.
• If no Wi-Fi networks are available or you choose not to join any, iPhone connects to
the Internet over a cellular data network ( , , or ).
If no Wi-Fi networks are available and a cellular data network isn’t available, iPhone
cannot connect to the Internet.
Note: If you don’t have a 3G connection, you cannot use the Internet over a cellular
data network when you’re on a call. You must have a Wi-Fi connection to use Internet
applications while also talking on the phone.
40 Chapter 2 BasicsMany Wi-Fi networks can be used free of charge including, in some regions, Wi-Fi
hotspots provided by your iPhone carrier. Some Wi-Fi networks require a fee. To join a
Wi-Fi network at a hotspot where charges apply, you can usually open Safari to see a
webpage that allows you to sign up for service.
Joining a Wi-Fi Network
The Wi-Fi settings let you turn on Wi-Fi and join Wi-Fi networks.
Turn on Wi-Fi: Choose Settings > Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on.
Join a Wi-Fi network: Choose Settings > Wi-Fi, wait a moment as iPhone detects
networks in range, then select a network (fees may apply to join some Wi-Fi networks).
If necessary, enter a password and tap Join (networks that require a password appear
with a lock icon).
Once you’ve joined a Wi-Fi network manually, iPhone automatically connects to it
whenever the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in
range, iPhone joins the one last used.
When iPhone is connected to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the
top of the screen shows the connection strength. The more bars you see, the stronger
the connection.
For information about configuring Wi-Fi settings, see “Wi-Fi” on page 139.
Cellular Data Network Access
3G, EDGE, and GPRS allow Internet connectivity over the cellular network available
through your iPhone carrier’s wireless service. Check the carrier’s network coverage in
your area for availability.
You can tell iPhone is connected to the Internet via the cellular data network if you see
the 3G ( ), EDGE ( ), or GPRS ( ) icon in the status bar at the top of the screen.
Note: If you don’t have a 3G connection, you may not be able to receive calls while
iPhone is actively transferring data over a cellular network—downloading a webpage,
for example. Incoming calls then go directly to voicemail.
Turn 3G on: In Settings, choose General > Network and tap Enable 3G.
If you’re outside your carrier’s network, you may be able to access the Internet through
another carrier. To enable email, web browsing, and other data services whenever
possible, turn Data Roaming on.
Turn Data Roaming on: In Settings, choose General > Network and turn Data
Roaming on.
Important: Roaming charges may apply. To avoid data roaming charges, make sure
Data Roaming is turned off.
Chapter 2 Basics 41Internet Access on an Airplane
Airplane mode turns off the iPhone radio transmitters to avoid interfering with aircraft
operation. In some regions, where allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws
and regulations, you can turn on Wi-Fi while airplane mode is on, to:
• Send and receive email
• Browse the Internet
• Sync your contacts and calendars over the air
• Stream YouTube videos
• Get stock quotes
• Get map locations
• Get weather reports
• Purchase music and applications
For more information, see “Airplane Mode” on page 138.
VPN Access
VPN (virtual private network) provides secure access over the Internet to private
networks, such as the network at your company or school. Use Network settings to
configure and turn on VPN. See “Network” on page 143.
VPN can also be automatically set up by a configuration profile. See “Installing
Configuration Profiles” on page 18. When VPN is set up by a configuration profile,
iPhone may turn on VPN automatically whenever it’s needed. Contact your system
administrator for more information.
Using iPhone as a Modem
You can use iPhone 3G or later as a modem to connect, or tether, your computer to the
Internet. You can connect iPhone to your computer using the Dock Connector to USB
Cable, or via Bluetooth.
Note: Additional fees may apply. Contact your carrier for more information.
Tethering works over the cellular data network. You can’t share a Wi-Fi connection to
the Internet. If you have a 3G connection, you can make and receive phone calls while
tethering.
Note: To use iPhone as a modem with a Mac computer, it must be running Mac OS X
version 10.5.7 or later.
Set up a tethering connection:
1 In Settings, choose General > Network > Internet Tethering.
2 Slide the Internet Tethering switch to On.
3 Connect iPhone to your computer:
42 Chapter 2 Basics• USB: Connect your computer to iPhone, using the Dock Connector to USB Cable.
In your computer’s Network services settings, choose iPhone.
On a Mac, a pop-up window appears the first time you connect, saying “A new
network interface has been detected.” Click Network Preferences, configure the
network settings for iPhone, then click Apply. On a PC, use the Network Control
Panel to configure the iPhone connection.
• Bluetooth: On iPhone, choose Settings > General > Bluetooth and turn on
Bluetooth. Then refer to the documentation that came with your computer system
software to pair and connect iPhone with your computer.
When you’re connected, a blue band appears at the top of the screen. Tethering
remains on when you connect with USB, even when you aren’t actively using the
Internet connection.
Monitor your cellular data network usage: In Settings, choose General > Usage.
Battery
iPhone has an internal rechargeable battery.
Charging the Battery
WARNING: For important safety information about charging iPhone, see the
Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
The battery icon in the upper-right corner shows the battery level or charging status.
You can also display the percentage of the battery charge (iPhone 3GS only).
Charging Charged
Charge the battery: Connect iPhone to a power outlet using the included Dock
Connector to USB Cable and USB power adapter.
Chapter 2 Basics 43Charge the battery and sync iPhone: Connect iPhone to your computer using the
included Dock Connector to USB Cable. Or connect iPhone to your computer using the
included cable and the Dock, available separately.
Unless your keyboard has a high-powered USB 2.0 port, you must connect iPhone to a
USB 2.0 port on your computer.
Important: The iPhone battery may drain instead of charge if iPhone is connected to a
computer that’s turned off or is in sleep or standby mode.
If you charge the battery while syncing or using iPhone, it may take longer to charge.
Important: If iPhone is very low on power, it may display one of the following images,
indicating that iPhone needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use it.
If iPhone is extremely low on power, the display may be blank for up to two minutes
before one of the low-battery images appears.
or
Maximizing Battery Life
iPhone uses lithium-ion batteries. To learn more about how to maximize the lifespan
and battery life of your iPhone, go to www.apple.com/batteries.
Replacing the Battery
Rechargeable batteries have a limited number of charge cycles and may
eventually need to be replaced. The iPhone battery isn’t user replaceable; it can
only be replaced by an authorized service provider. For more information, go to
www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/battery.
44 Chapter 2 BasicsSecurity Features
Security features help protect the information on iPhone from being accessed by
others.
You can set up a passcode that you must enter each time you turn on or wake up
iPhone.
Set a passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode, then
enter the passcode again to verify it. iPhone then requires you to enter the passcode
to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings.
For addition information about using a passcode lock, see “Passcode Lock” on
page 145.
Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: In Settings, choose General > Passcode
Lock and turn Voice Dial off. Unlock iPhone to use voice dialing.
The Find My iPhone feature helps you locate iPhone if it’s been lost or misplaced, and
display a message on your iPhone to help someone return it to you. It includes Remote
Wipe, which lets you erase all your information on iPhone in case you don’t recover
it. The Remote Passcode Lock feature lets you remotely lock your iPhone and create a
new or replacement 4-digit passcode.
Find My iPhone requires a MobileMe account. MobileMe is an online service, available
by subscription. Go to www.apple.com/mobileme for more information.
To enable this feature, turn on Find My iPhone in your MobileMe account settings.
See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16.
Find your iPhone: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com and go to the
Find My iPhone pane. Follow the onscreen instructions to locate your device on a map
and display a message on its screen along with an optional sound to help you find it.
Remotely wipe information on your iPhone: Log in to your MobileMe account at
www.me.com, then go to the Find My iPhone pane. Click “Remote Wipe…,” and follow
the onscreen instructions.
A remote wipe is equivalent to the “Erase all content and settings” feature in Settings.
It resets all settings to their defaults and erases all your information and media.
See “Resetting iPhone” on page 149.
Remotely lock your iPhone: Log in to your MobileMe account at www.me.com, then
go to the Find My iPhone pane. Click Remote Passcode Lock, and follow the onscreen
instructions.
Chapter 2 Basics 45Cleaning iPhone
To clean iPhone, unplug all cables and turn off iPhone (press and hold the Sleep/ Wake
button, then slide the onscreen slider). Then use a soft, slightly damp, lint-free cloth.
Avoid getting moisture in openings. Don’t use window cleaners, household cleaners,
aerosol sprays, solvents, alcohol, ammonia, or abrasives to clean iPhone. If your iPhone
has an oleophobic coating on the screen (iPhone 3GS only), simply wipe your iPhone’s
screen with a soft, lint-free cloth to remove oil left by your hands and face.
For additional information about handling iPhone, see the iPhone Important Product
Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Restarting and Resetting iPhone
If something isn’t working right, try restarting, force quitting an application, or
resetting iPhone.
Restart iPhone: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the red slider appears.
Slide your finger across the slider to turn off iPhone. To turn iPhone back on, press and
hold the Sleep/Wake until the Apple logo appears.
If you can’t turn off iPhone or if the problem continues, you may need to reset. A reset
should be done only if turning iPhone off and on doesn’t resolve the problem.
Force quit an application: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone
for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then press and hold the Home button
until the application quits.
Reset iPhone: Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button and the Home button at the
same time for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears.
For more troubleshooting suggestions, see Appendix A,“Troubleshooting,” on
page 193.
46 Chapter 2 BasicsPhone
3
Phone Calls
Making a call on iPhone is as simple as tapping a name and number in your contacts,
tapping one of your favorites, or tapping a recent call to return it.
Making Calls
Buttons at the bottom of the Phone screen give you quick access to your favorites,
recent calls, your contacts, and a numeric keypad for dialing manually.
WARNING: For important information about driving safely, see the Important Product
Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Number of missed calls
Number of unheard
voicemail messages
Use Contacts to call someone Tap Contacts, choose a contact, then tap a phone
number.
Call a favorite Tap Favorites, then choose a contact.
Return a recent call Tap Recents, then tap a name or number in the
list.
Dial a number Tap Keypad, enter the number, then tap Call.
If you copy a phone number to the clipboard, you can paste it to the keypad and
dial it.
47Paste a number to the keypad: Tap the screen above the keyboard, then tap Paste.
If the phone number you copied included letters, iPhone automatically converts them
to the appropriate digits.
Jump to favorites from anywhere: Double-click the Home button. You can change
this preference in Settings. See “Home” on page 147.
Bring up the last number you dialed: Tap Keypad, then tap Call. Tap Call again to dial
the number.
Voice Dialing
You can use Voice Control (iPhone 3GS only) to call someone in your contacts or dial a
specific number.
Note: Voice Control isn’t available in all languages.
Use Voice Control to make phone calls: Press and hold the Home button until the
Voice Control screen appears and you hear a beep. Then use the commands described
below to make calls.
You can also press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the
equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to use Voice Control.
Call someone in contacts Say “call” or “dial” then say the name of the person.
If the person has more than one number, specify
which one you want to call.
Examples:
 Call John Appleseed
 Call John Appleseed at home
 Call John Appleseed, mobile
Dial a number Say “call” or “dial,” then say the number.
For best results, speak the full name of the person you’re calling. If you give only the
first name, and you have more than one contact with that same name, iPhone asks
which of those contacts you want to call. If there’s more than one number for the
person you’re calling, specify which number to use. If you don’t specify which number,
iPhone asks you which one to use.
When voice dialing a number, speak each digit separately—for example, say “four one
five, five five five, one two one two.”
Note: For the “800” area code in the U.S., you can say “eight hundred.”
Prevent voice dialing when iPhone is locked: In Settings, choose General > Passcode
Lock and turn Voice Dial off. Unlock iPhone to use voice dialing.
48 Chapter 3 PhoneReceiving Calls
When you receive a call, tap Answer. If iPhone is locked, drag the slider. You can also
press the center button on your iPhone headset or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset to answer a call.
Center button
Silence a call: Press the Sleep/Wake button or either volume button. You can still
answer the call after silencing it, until it goes to voicemail.
Decline a call: Do one of the following to send a call directly to voicemail.
• Press the Sleep/Wake button twice quickly.
Sleep/Wake
button
• Press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button
on your Bluetooth headset) for about two seconds. Two low beeps confirm that the
call was declined.
• Tap Decline (if iPhone is awake when a call comes in).
Block calls and maintain Wi-Fi access to the Internet: In Settings, turn on Airplane
Mode, then tap Wi-Fi to turn it on.
While On a Call
When you’re on a call, the screen shows call options.
Chapter 3 Phone 49Mute your line Tap Mute. You can still hear the caller, but the
caller can’t hear you.
Use the keypad to enter information Tap Keypad.
Use the speakerphone or a Bluetooth device Tap Speaker. The Button is labeled Audio Source
when a Bluetooth device is available, which
lets you select the Bluetooth device, iPhone,
or Speaker Phone.
See contact information Tap Contacts.
Put a call on hold Tap Hold. Neither party can hear the other.
Make another call Tap Add Call.
Use other applications during a call: Press the Home button, then tap an
application icon.
End a call: Tap End Call. Or press the center button on your iPhone headset (or the
equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset).
Second Calls
During a call, you can make or receive another call. If you receive a second call, iPhone
beeps and shows the caller’s information and a list of options.
Note: Making and receiving a second call may be an optional service in some
countries. Contact your carrier for more information.
Respond to a second call:
• To ignore the call and send it to voicemail, tap Ignore.
• To hold the first call and answer the new one, tap Hold Call + Answer.
• To end the first call and answer the new one, tap End Call + Answer.
Make a second call: Tap Add Call. The first call is put on hold.
Switch between calls: Tap Swap. The active call is put on hold.
Create a conference call: Tap Merge Calls. See “Conference Calls” below.
Conference Calls
You can talk to more than one person at a time, and merge up to five calls, depending
on your carrier.
Note: Conference calling may be an optional service in some countries. Contact your
carrier for more information.
Create a conference call:
1 Make a call.
2 Tap Add Call and make another call. The first call is put on hold.
3 Tap Merge Calls. The calls are merged on one line and everyone can hear each other.
50 Chapter 3 Phone4 Repeat steps two and three to add up to five calls.
Drop one call Tap Conference and tap next to a call.
Then tap End Call.
Talk privately with a call Tap Conference, then tap Private next to a call.
Tap Merge Calls to resume the conference.
Add an incoming call Tap Hold Call + Answer, then tap Merge Calls.
If your service includes conference calling, iPhone always has a second line available in
addition to the conference call.
Emergency Calls
If iPhone is locked with a passcode, you may still be able to make an emergency call.
Make an emergency call when iPhone is locked: On the Enter Passcode screen, tap
Emergency Call, then dial the number using the keypad.
Important: Only emergency numbers valid in the region where you’re making the call
will work. In some countries, you can’t make emergency calls unless your SIM card is
installed and activated, and the SIM PIN has been correctly entered or turned off.
In the U.S., location information (if available) is provided to emergency service
providers when you dial 911.
Important: You should not rely on wireless devices for essential communications, such
as medical emergencies. Use of any cellular phone to call emergency services may not
work in all locations. Emergency numbers and services vary by region, and sometimes
an emergency call cannot be placed due to network availability or environmental
interference. Some cellular networks may not accept an emergency call from iPhone if
it doesn’t have a SIM, if you locked your SIM, or if you haven’t activated your iPhone.
Visual Voicemail
On iPhone, visual voicemail lets you see a list of your messages and choose which ones
to listen to or delete, without having to listen to instructions or prior messages.
Note: Visual voicemail may not be available in all regions, or may be an optional
service. Contact your carrier for more information. If visual voicemail isn’t available,
tap Voicemail and follow the voice prompts to retrieve your messages.
Number of missed calls and unheard
voicemail messages appears on the
Home screen Phone icon.
Chapter 3 Phone 51Setting Up Voicemail
The first time you tap Voicemail, iPhone prompts you to create a voicemail password
and record your voicemail greeting.
Change your greeting:
1 Tap Voicemail, tap Greeting, then tap Custom.
2 Tap Record when you’re ready to start.
3 When you finish, tap Stop. To review, tap Play.
To rerecord, repeat steps 2 and 3.
4 Tap Save.
Use your carrier’s default greeting Tap Voicemail, tap Greeting, then tap Default.
Set an alert sound for new voicemail In Settings, choose Sounds and turn New
Voicemail on. The alert sounds once for each new
voicemail. If the Ring/Silent switch is off, iPhone
won’t sound alerts.
Change the voicemail password In Settings, choose Phone > Change Voicemail
Password.
Checking Voicemail
When you tap Phone, iPhone shows the number of missed calls and unheard
voicemail messages.
Number of missed calls
Number of unheard
voicemail messages
52 Chapter 3 PhoneTap Voicemail to see a list of your messages.
Skip to any point in
a message: Drag the
playhead.
Unheard
messages Play/Pause
Contact info
Scrubber bar
Speakerphone (Audio,
when a Bluetooth device
is connected. Tap to
choose audio output.)
Return the call
Listen to a message: Tap the message. (If you’ve already heard the message, tap the
message again to replay it.) Use and to pause and resume playback.
Once you listen to a message, it’s saved until your carrier automatically erases it.
Check voicemail from another phone: Dial your own number or your carrier’s remote
access number.
Deleting Messages
Select a message, then tap Delete. Deleted visual voicemail messages are saved on
iPhone until your carrier permanently erases them.
Listen to a deleted message Tap Deleted Messages (at the end of the list),
then tap the message.
Undelete a message Tap Deleted Messages (at the end of the list),
then tap the message and tap Undelete.
Getting Contact Information
Visual voicemail saves the date and time of the call, the length of the message, and
any available contact information.
See a caller’s contact information: Tap next to a message.
You can use the information to email or text the caller, or update contact info.
Chapter 3 Phone 53Contacts
From a contact’s Info screen, a quick tap lets you make a phone call, create a new email
message, find the location of their address, and more. See “Searching Contacts” on
page 177.
Favorites
Favorites gives you quick access to your most-used phone numbers.
Add a contact’s number to your favorites list: Tap Contacts and choose a contact.
Then tap “Add to Favorites” and choose the number you want to add.
Add a recent caller’s number to your favorites list: Tap Recents and tap next to a
caller, then tap “Add to Favorites.”
Go to favorites: Double-click the Home button. See “Home” on page 147.
Call a contact from your favorites Tap Favorites and choose a contact.
Delete a contact from your favorites Tap Favorites and tap Edit. Then tap next to a
contact or number and tap Remove.
Reorder your favorites list Tap Favorites and tap Edit. Then drag next to a
contact to a new place in the list.
Ringtones and the Ring/Silent Switch
iPhone comes with ringtones you can use for incoming calls, Clock alarms, and the
Clock timer. You can also create and purchase ringtones from songs in iTunes.
Ring/Silent Switch and Vibrate Modes
A switch on the side of iPhone makes it easy to turn the ringer on or off.
Turn the ringer on or off: Flip the switch on the side of iPhone.
Ring
Silent
Important: Clock alarms still sound even if you set the Ring/Silent switch to silent.
Set iPhone to vibrate: In Settings, choose Sounds. Separate controls let you set vibrate
for both ring mode and silent mode.
54 Chapter 3 PhoneFor more information, see Chapter 19,“Settings,” on page 138.
Setting Ringtones
You can set the default ringtone for calls and Clock alarms and timers. You can also
assign individual ringtones to contacts so you know who’s calling.
Set the default ringtone: In Settings, choose Sounds > Ringtone, then choose a
ringtone.
Assign a ringtone to a contact: From Phone, tap Contacts and choose a contact.
Then tap Ringtone and choose a ringtone.
Purchasing Ringtones
You can purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store on your iPhone. See “Purchasing
Ringtones” on page 162.
Bluetooth Devices
You can use iPhone with hands-free Bluetooth headsets and Bluetooth car kits.
iPhone also supports Bluetooth stereo headphone devices when using iPod.
Pairing a Device with iPhone
You must first pair a Bluetooth device with iPhone before you can use it.
Pair with iPhone:
1 Follow the instructions that came with the device to make it discoverable or to set it to
search for other Bluetooth devices.
2 In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on.
3 Choose the device on iPhone and enter its passkey or PIN number. See the instructions
about the passkey or PIN that came with the device.
After you pair a Bluetooth device to work with iPhone, you must make a connection to
have iPhone use the device for your calls.
Connect with iPhone: See the documentation that came with the headset or car kit.
When iPhone is connected to a Bluetooth device, outgoing calls are routed through
the device. Incoming calls are routed through the device if you answer using the
device, and through iPhone if you answer using iPhone.
WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss and
about driving safely, see the Important Product Information Guide at
www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Chapter 3 Phone 55Bluetooth Status
The Bluetooth icon appears in the iPhone status bar at the top of the screen:
• (blue) or (white): Bluetooth is on and a device is connected to iPhone. (The color
depends on the current color of the status bar.)
• (gray): Bluetooth is on but no device is connected. If you’ve paired a device with
iPhone, it may be out of range or turned off.
• No Bluetooth icon: Bluetooth is turned off.
Routing Calls Back Through iPhone
When iPhone is connected to a Bluetooth device, you listen to calls through iPhone by
doing one of the following:
• Answer a call by tapping the iPhone screen.
• During a call, tap Audio on iPhone. Choose iPhone to hear calls through iPhone or
Speaker Phone to use the speakerphone.
• Turn off Bluetooth. In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and drag the switch to
Off.
• Turn off the Bluetooth device, or move out of range. You must be within about 30
feet of a Bluetooth device for it to be connected to iPhone.
Unpairing a Device from iPhone
If you’ve paired iPhone with a device and want to use another device instead, you
must unpair the first device.
Unpair a device:
1 In Settings, choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on.
2 Choose the device and tap Unpair.
International Calls
iPhone 3G and iPhone 3GS are multi-band phones, supporting UMTS/HSDPA (850,
1900, 2100 MHz) and GSM (850, 900, 1800, 1900 MHz), ensuring broad international
coverage.
Making International Calls from Your Home Area
For information about making international calls from your home area, including rates
and other charges that may apply, contact your carrier or go to your carrier’s website.
Using iPhone Abroad
You can use iPhone to make calls in many countries around the world.
Enable international roaming: Contact your carrier for information about availability
and fees.
56 Chapter 3 PhoneSet iPhone to add the correct prefix when dialing from another country: In Settings,
tap Phone, then turn International Assist on. This lets you make calls to your home
country using the numbers in your contacts and favorites, without having to add a
prefix or your country code. International Assist works for U.S. telephone numbers only.
When you make a call using International Assist, “International Assist” appears on the
iPhone screen, alternating with the “calling ...” message, until your call is connected.
Note: International Assist is not available in all areas.
Set the carrier to use: In Settings, tap Carrier, then select the carrier you prefer. This
option is available only when you’re traveling outside your carrier’s network. You can
make calls only on carriers that have roaming agreements with your iPhone service
provider. For more information, see “Carrier” on page 141.
Important: Voice and data roaming charges may apply. To avoid data roaming charges,
turn Data Roaming off.
Turn Data Roaming on or off: In Settings, choose General > Network and turn Data
Roaming on or off. Data Roaming is turned off by default.
Turning Data Roaming off helps to avoid data roaming charges when traveling outside
your carrier’s network by disabling data transmission over the cellular network. You
can still access the Internet if you have a Wi-Fi connection. If Wi-Fi network access isn’t
available, however, you cannot:
• Send or receive email
• Browse the Internet
• Sync your contacts, calendars, or bookmarks with MobileMe or Exchange
• Stream YouTube videos
• Get stock quotes
• Get map locations
• Get weather reports
• Purchase music or applications
Other third-party applications that use data roaming may also be disabled.
If Data Roaming is turned off, you can still make and receive phone calls, and send and
receive text messages. Voice roaming charges may apply. Visual voicemail is delivered
if there’s no charge; if your carrier charges for delivery of visual voicemail when
roaming, turning Data Roaming off prevents the delivery of visual voicemail.
To enable email, web browsing, and other data services, turn Data Roaming on.
Chapter 3 Phone 57Important: If Data Roaming is turned on, you may incur charges when roaming
outside your carrier’s network for the use of any of the features listed above, as well as
for delivery of visual voicemail. Check with your carrier for information about roaming
charges.
Get voicemail when visual voicemail isn’t available: Dial your own number, or touch
and hold “1” on the keypad.
You can use Airplane Mode to turn off cellular services and then turn Wi-Fi on to get
access to the Internet, while preventing voice roaming charges.
Use Airplane Mode to turn off cellular services: In Settings, tap Airplane Mode to turn
it on, then tap Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on. See “Airplane Mode” on page 138.
Incoming phone calls are sent to voicemail. To make and receive calls again and get
your voicemail messages, turn Airplane Mode off.
58 Chapter 3 PhoneMail
4
Mail works with MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, and many of the most popular email
systems—including Yahoo! Mail, Google email, and AOL—as well as other industrystandard POP3 and IMAP email systems. You can send and receive embedded photos
and graphics, and view PDFs and other attachments.
Setting Up Email Accounts
You can set up email accounts on iPhone in either of the following ways:
• Set up an account directly on iPhone. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16.
• In iTunes, use the iPhone preference panes to sync email accounts settings from
your computer. See “Syncing” on page 11.
Sending Email
You can send an email message to anyone who has an email address.
Compose and send a message:
1 Tap .
2 Type a name or email address in the To field, or tap to add a name from your
contacts.
As you type an email address, matching email addresses from your contacts list appear
below. Tap an address to add it. To add more names, tap Return or .
Note: If you’re composing a message from your Microsoft Exchange account and
have access to your enterprise Global Address List (GAL), matching addresses from the
contacts on iPhone appear first, followed by matching GAL addresses.
3 Tap Cc/Bcc/From if you want to copy or blind copy the message to others, or change
the account you send the message from. If you have more than one email account,
you can tap the From field to change the account you’re sending from.
594 Enter a subject, then your message.
You can tap Return to move from one field to another.
5 Tap Send.
Send a photo or video (iPhone 3GS only) in an
email message
In Photos, choose a photo or video, tap ,
then tap Email Photo or Email Video. You can
also copy and paste photos and videos.
The photo or video is sent using your default
email account (see “Mail” on page 152).
Send a video in an email message (iPhone and
iPhone 3G)
In Photos, choose a video, then touch and hold
the video until the Copy command appears. Tap
Copy. Go to Mail and create a new message. Tap
to place an insertion point where you want the
video, then tap the insertion point to display the
edit commands and tap Paste.
The video is sent using your default email
account (see “Mail” on page 152).
Save a draft of a message to complete later Tap Cancel, then tap Save. The message is saved
in the Drafts mailbox.
Reply to a message Tap . Tap Reply to reply only to the sender
or tap Reply All to reply to the sender and all
recipients. Type your return message, then tap
Send.
Files or images attached to the initial message
aren’t sent back.
Forward a message Open a message and tap , then tap Forward.
Add one or more email addresses, type your
message, then tap Send.
When you forward a message, you can include
the files or images attached to the original
message.
Share contact information In Contacts, choose a contact, tap Share Contact
at the bottom of the Info screen, then tap Email.
Checking and Reading Email
The Mail icon shows the total number of unread messages in all your inboxes. You may
have other unread messages in other mailboxes.
Number of unread
emails in your inboxes
Check for new messages: Choose a mailbox or tap at any time.
60 Chapter 4 MailOn each account screen, you can see the number of unread messages in each mailbox.
Number of unread
messages
Tap to see all your
email accounts
Tap a mailbox to see its messages. Unread messages have a blue dot next to them.
Unread messages
When you open a mailbox, Mail loads the number of most recent messages specified
in your Mail settings, if the messages haven’t already been loaded automatically.
(See “Mail” on page 152.)
Load additional messages: Scroll to the bottom of the list of messages and tap Load
More Messages.
Read a message: Tap a mailbox, then tap a message. Within a message, tap or to
see the next or previous message.
Zoom in on part of a message Double-tap an area of the message to zoom in.
Double-tap again to zoom out.
Resize any column of text to fit the screen Double-tap the text.
Resize a message manually Pinch to zoom in or out.
Chapter 4 Mail 61Follow a link Tap the link.
Text links are typically underlined and blue. Many
images are also links. A link can take you to a
webpage, open a map, dial a phone number, or
open a new preaddressed email message.
Web, phone, and map links open Safari, Phone,
or Maps on iPhone. To return to your email, press
the Home button and tap Mail.
See a link’s destination address Touch and hold the link. The address is displayed,
and you can choose to open the link in Safari or
copy the link address to the clipboard.
iPhone displays picture attachments in many commonly used formats (JPEG, GIF, and
TIFF) inline with the text in email messages. iPhone can play many audio attachments
(such as MP3, AAC, WAV, and AIFF). You can download and view files (such as PDF,
webpage, text, Pages, Keynote, Numbers, and Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint
documents) attached to messages you receive.
Open an attached file: Tap the attachment. It downloads to iPhone and then opens.
Tap attachment
to download
You can view attachments in portrait or landscape orientation. If the format of an
attached file isn’t supported by iPhone, you can see the name of the file but you can’t
open it. iPhone supports the following document types:
.doc Microsoft Word
.docx Microsoft Word (XML)
.htm webpage
.html webpage
.key Keynote
.numbers Numbers
.pages Pages
62 Chapter 4 Mail.pdf Preview, Adobe Acrobat
.ppt Microsoft PowerPoint
.pptx Microsoft PowerPoint (XML)
.rtf Rich Text Format
.txt text
.vcf contact information
.xls Microsoft Excel
.xlsx Microsoft Excel (XML)
Save an attached photo to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo, then tap Save
Image. If the photo hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download notice first.
Save an attached video to your Camera Roll album: Touch and hold the attachment,
then tap Save Video. If the video hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download
notice first.
See all the recipients of a message Tap Details.
Tap a name or email address to see the recipient’s
contact information. Then tap a phone number,
email address, or text message to contact the
person. Tap Hide to hide the recipients.
Add an email recipient to your contacts list Tap the message and, if necessary, tap Details
to see the recipients. Then tap a name or email
address and tap Create New Contact or “Add to
Existing Contact.”
Mark a message as unread Open the message and tap “Mark as Unread.”
A blue dot appears next to the message in the
mailbox list until you open it again.
Open a meeting invitation: Tap the invitation.
You can get contact information for the organizer and other attendees, set an alert,
add notes to the event, and add comments that are included in your response emailed
to the organizer. You can accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation. See
“Responding to Meeting Invitations” on page 95.
Turn Push on or off: In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data,
then turn Push on or off. See “Fetch New Data” on page 151.
Chapter 4 Mail 63Searching Email
You can search the To, From, and Subject fields of email messages. Mail searches the
downloaded messages in the currently open mailbox. For MobileMe, Exchange, and
some IMAP mail accounts, you can also search messages on the server.
Search email messages: Open a mailbox, scroll to the top, and enter text in the Search
field. Tap From, To, Subject, or All (From, To, and Subject) to choose which fields you
want to search. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of the list and reveal the
search field.)
Search results for the messages already downloaded to iPhone appear automatically
as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard and see more of the results.
Search messages on the server: Tap “Continue Search on Server” at the end of the
search results.
Note: Search results of messages on servers may vary depending on the type of
account. Some servers may search only whole words.
Organizing Email
You can delete messages one at a time, or select a group to delete all at once. You can
also move messages from one mailbox or folder to another.
Delete a message: Open the message and tap .
You can also delete a message directly from the mailbox message list by swiping left
or right over the message title, then tapping Delete.
To show the
Delete button,
swipe left or
right over
the message.
64 Chapter 4 MailDelete multiple messages: When viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the
messages you want to delete, then tap Delete.
Move a message to another mailbox or folder: When viewing a message, tap , then
choose a mailbox or folder.
Move multiple messages: When viewing a list of messages, tap Edit, select the
messages you want to move, then tap Move and select a mailbox or folder.
Chapter 4 Mail 65Safari
5
Viewing Webpages
Safari lets you surf the web and view webpages on iPhone in the same way as if you
were on your computer. You can create bookmarks on iPhone and sync bookmarks
with your computer. Add web clips for quick access to your favorite sites directly from
the Home screen.
You can view webpages in either portrait or landscape orientation. Rotate iPhone and
the webpage rotates too, automatically adjusting to fit the page.
Opening Webpages
Open a webpage: Tap the address field (on the left side of the title bar), then type the
web address and tap Go. If the address field isn’t visible, tap the status bar at the top of
the screen to quickly scroll to the address field at the top of the webpage.
As you type, web addresses that start with those letters appear. These are bookmarked
pages or recent pages you’ve opened. Tap an address to go to that page. Keep typing
if you want to enter a web address that’s not in the list.
Erase the text in the address field: Tap the address field, then tap .
66Zooming and Scrolling
Zoom in or out: Double-tap a column on a webpage to expand the column. Doubletap again to zoom out.
You can also pinch to zoom in or out manually.
Scroll around a webpage Drag up, down, or sideways. When scrolling,
you can touch and drag anywhere on the page
without activating any links.
Scroll within a frame on a webpage Use two fingers to scroll within a frame on a
webpage. Use one finger to scroll the entire
webpage.
Scroll quickly to the top of a webpage Tap the status bar at the top of the iPhone screen.
Navigating Webpages
Links on webpages typically take you to another place on the web.
Follow a link on a webpage: Tap the link.
Links on iPhone can also initiate a phone call, display a location in Maps, or create a
preaddressed Mail message. To return to Safari after a link opens another application,
press the Home button and tap Safari.
See a link’s destination address Touch and hold the link. The address pops up
next to your finger. You can touch and hold an
image to see if it has a link.
Stop a webpage from loading Tap .
Reload a webpage Tap .
Return to the previous or next page Tap or at the bottom of the screen.
Return to a recently viewed page Tap and tap History. To clear the history list,
tap Clear.
Send a webpage address via email Tap and tap “Mail Link to this Page.”
Save an image or photo to your Camera Roll
album
Touch and hold the image, then tap Save Image.
Chapter 5 Safari 67Opening Multiple Pages
You can have up to eight pages open at a time. Some links automatically open a new
page instead of replacing the current one.
The number inside the pages icon at the bottom of the screen shows how many
pages are open. If there’s no number inside, just one page is open. For example:
= one page is open
= three pages are open
Open a new page: Tap and tap New Page.
Go to another page: Tap and flick left or right. Tap the page you want to view.
Close a page: Tap and tap . You can’t close a page if it’s the only one open.
Entering Text and Filling Out Forms
Some webpages have text fields and forms to fill out. You can set Safari to remember
names and passwords of websites you visit and fill out text fields automatically with
information from Contacts. See “Safari” on page 156.
Bring up the keyboard Tap inside a text field.
Move to another text field Tap another text field, or tap the Next or Previous
button.
Submit a form Once you finish filling out a form, tap Go or
Search. Most pages also have a link you can tap
to submit the form.
Close the keyboard without submitting the
form
Tap Done.
68 Chapter 5 SafariEnable AutoFill to help you fill out web forms: In Settings, choose Safari > AutoFill,
then do one of the following:
• To use information from contacts, turn Use Contact Info on, then choose My Info and
select the contact you want to use.
Safari uses information from Contacts to fill in contact fields on web forms.
• To use information from names and passwords, turn Names & Passwords on.
When this feature is on, Safari remembers names and passwords of websites you
visit and automatically fills in the information when you revisit the website.
• To remove all AutoFill information, tap Clear All.
Searching the Web
By default, Safari searches using Google. You can search using Yahoo!, instead.
Search the web:
1 Tap the search field (on the right side of the title bar).
2 Type a word or phrase that describes what you’re looking for, then tap Google.
3 Tap a link in the list of search results to open a webpage.
Set Safari to search using Yahoo!: From the Home screen choose Settings > Safari >
Search Engine, then choose Yahoo!.
Bookmarks
You can bookmark webpages you want to return to later.
Bookmark a webpage: Open the page and tap . Then tap Add Bookmark.
When you save a bookmark you can edit its title. By default, bookmarks are saved at
the top level of Bookmarks. Tap Bookmarks to choose another folder.
If you use Safari on a Mac, or Safari or Microsoft Internet Explorer on a PC, you can sync
bookmarks with the web browser on your computer.
Sync bookmarks with your computer:
1 Connect iPhone to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar.
3 Click the Info tab, select “Sync … bookmarks” under Web Browser, then click Apply.
See “Syncing” on page 11.
Sync bookmarks with MobileMe: In Settings on iPhone, select Bookmarks in your
MobileMe account. See “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16.
Open a bookmarked webpage: Tap , then choose a bookmark or tap a folder to
see the bookmarks inside.
Chapter 5 Safari 69Edit a bookmark or bookmark folder: Tap , choose the folder that has the
bookmark or folder you want to edit, then tap Edit. Then do one of the following:
• To make a new folder, tap New Folder.
• To delete a bookmark or folder, tap , then tap Delete.
• To reposition a bookmark or folder, drag .
• To edit the name or address, or to put it in a different folder, tap the bookmark or folder.
When you’re finished, tap Done.
Web Clips
Add web clips to the Home screen for fast access to your favorite webpages. Web clips
appear as icons on the Home screen, and you can arrange your web clips along with
the other icons. See “iPhone Applications” on page 23.
Add a web clip: Open the webpage and tap . Then tap “Add to Home Screen.”
When you open a web clip, Safari automatically zooms and scrolls to the area of the
webpage that was displayed when you saved the web clip. The displayed area is also
used to create the icon for the web clip on your Home screen, unless the webpage
comes with its own custom icon.
When you add a web clip, you can edit its name. If the name is too long (more than
about 10 characters), it may appear abbreviated on the Home screen.
Web clips aren’t bookmarks, and aren’t synced by MobileMe or iTunes.
Delete a web clip:
1 Touch and hold any icon on the Home screen until the icons start to wiggle.
2 Tap in the corner of the web clip you want to delete.
3 Tap Delete, then press the Home button to save your arrangement.
70 Chapter 5 SafariiPod
6
iPhone syncs with iTunes on your computer to get songs, videos, and other content
you’ve collected in your iTunes library. For information about adding music and other
media to your iTunes library, open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help.
Getting Music, Video, and More
To get music, video, and other content onto iPhone, you can set up iTunes on your
computer to automatically sync content in your library, or you can manually manage
the media you put on iPhone.
Syncing Content from iTunes
You can transfer music, video, and more onto iPhone by syncing content from iTunes.
You can sync all of your media, or you can select specific songs, videos, podcasts, and
iTunes U collections.
Set iTunes to sync iPod content:
1 Connect iPhone to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar.
3 On the Music, Movies, TV Shows, Podcasts, and iTunes U tabs, select the content you
want to sync to iPhone. For example, you could set iTunes to sync selected music
playlists and the three most recent episodes of your favorite video podcast.
4 Click Apply.
To set iTunes to sync iPod content and other info automatically, click the Summary tab
and select “Automatically sync when this iPhone is connected.”
Important: If you delete an item from iTunes, it will also be deleted from iPhone the
next time you sync.
71Only songs and videos encoded in formats that iPhone supports are transferred to
iPhone. For information about which formats iPhone supports, see “Song, Video, or
Other Items Won’t Play” on page 200.
If there are more songs in your iTunes library than can fit on your iPhone, iTunes
offers to create a special playlist to sync with iPhone. iTunes fills the playlist with
random selections from your library. You can add or delete songs from the playlist
and sync again.
If you listen to part of a podcast or audiobook, your place in the story is included if you
sync the content with iTunes. If you started listening to the story on iPhone, you can
pick up where you left off using iTunes on your computer—or vice versa.
For more information about using iTunes to get music and other media onto your
computer, see “What You Need” on page 9.
Manually Managing Content
The manually managing feature lets you choose just the music, video, and podcasts
you want to have on iPhone.
Set up iPhone for manually managing content:
1 Connect iPhone to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar.
3 Click the Summary tab and select “Manually manage music and videos.”
4 Click Apply.
Add items to iPhone: Drag a song, video, podcast, or playlist in your iTunes library to
iPhone (in the sidebar). Shift-click or Command-click (Mac) or Control-click (Windows)
to select multiple items to add at the same time.
iTunes syncs the content immediately. If you deselect “Manually manage music and
videos,” the content you added manually is removed from iPhone the next time iTunes
syncs content.
Remove items from iPhone: With iPhone connected to your computer, select the
iPhone icon in the iTunes sidebar. Click the disclosure triangle to the left of the icon
to show the contents. Select a content area, such as Music or Movies, then select the
items you want to delete and press the Delete key on the keyboard.
Removing an item from iPhone doesn’t delete it from your iTunes library.
Purchasing and Downloading Content from the iTunes Store
You can use the iTunes Store on iPhone to purchase and download songs, albums,
TV shows, movies, music videos, ringtones, and audiobooks directly to iPhone. You can
also stream and download audio and video podcasts, as well as iTunes U content.
See “About the iTunes Store” on page 160.
72 Chapter 6 iPodTransferring Purchased Content to Another Computer
You can transfer content on iPhone that was purchased using iTunes on one
computer to an iTunes library on another authorized computer. The computer must be
authorized to play content from your iTunes Store account. To authorize the computer,
open iTunes on the computer and choose Store > Authorize Computer.
Transfer purchased content: Connect iPhone to the other computer. iTunes asks if
you want to transfer purchased content.
Converting Videos for iPhone
You can add videos other than those purchased from the iTunes Store to iPhone, such
as videos you create in iMovie on a Mac, or videos you download from the Internet
and then add to iTunes.
If you try to add a video from iTunes to iPhone and a message says the video can’t play
on iPhone, you can convert the video.
Convert a video to work with iPhone: Select the video in your iTunes library and
choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.” Then add the converted video to
iPhone.
Music and Other Audio
The high-resolution Multi-Touch display makes listening to songs on iPhone as much
a visual experience as a musical one. You can scroll through your playlists, or use Cover
Flow to browse through your album art.
WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important
Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Playing Songs
Browse your collection: Tap Playlists, Artists, or Songs. Tap More to browse Albums,
Audiobooks, Compilations, Composers, Genres, iTunes U, or Podcasts.
Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius. If Genius doesn’t appear, you need to turn on
Genius in iTunes 9 or later, and then sync iPhone with iTunes. See “Using Genius on
iPhone” on page 79.
Play a song: Tap the song.
Shake to shuffle: Shake iPhone to turn shuffle on and immediately change songs.
Shake anytime to change to another song.
You can turn the “Shake to Shuffle” feature on or off in Settings > iPod (it’s on by
default). See “Music” on page 158.
Chapter 6 iPod 73Controlling Song Playback
When you play a song, the Now Playing screen appears.
Next/Fast-forward
Play/Pause
Track List
Back
Previous/ Volume
Rewind
Pause a song Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset).
Resume playback Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset).
Raise or lower the volume Drag the volume slider or use the buttons on
the side of iPhone. You can also use the volume
buttons on the iPhone headset (iPhone 3GS only).
Restart a song or a chapter in an audiobook or
podcast
Tap .
Skip to the next song or chapter in an
audiobook or podcast
Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset) twice quickly.
Go to the previous song or chapter in an
audiobook or podcast
Tap twice, or press the center button on the
iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset) three times quickly.
Rewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or . The longer you hold
the control, the faster the song rewinds or fastforwards. On the iPhone headset, press the
center button (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset) twice quickly and hold to
fast forward, or three times quickly and hold to
rewind.
74 Chapter 6 iPodReturn to the iPod browse lists Tap , or swipe to the right over the album
cover.
Return to the Now Playing screen Tap Now Playing.
Display a song’s lyrics Tap the album cover when playing a song. (Lyrics
appear if you’ve added them to the song using
the song’s Info window in iTunes.)
You can display playback controls at any time when you’re listening to music and
using another application—or even when iPhone is locked—by double-clicking the
Home button. See “Home” on page 147.
If you’re using an application, the playback controls appear on top of the application.
After using the controls, you can close them or tap Music to go to the Now Playing
screen. If iPhone is locked, the controls appear onscreen, then disappear automatically
after you finish using them.
Additional Song Controls
From the Now Playing screen, tap the album cover.
The repeat, Genius, and shuffle controls appear along with the scrubber bar. You can
see elapsed time, remaining time, and the song number. The song’s lyrics also appear,
if you’ve added them to the song in iTunes.
The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the
scrub rate from high-speed to fine by sliding your finger down as you drag the
playhead along the scrubber bar.
Repeat Genius Shuffle
Scrubber bar Playhead
Chapter 6 iPod 75Set iPhone to repeat songs Tap . Tap again to set iPhone to repeat only
the current song.
= iPhone is set to repeat all songs in the
current album or list.
= iPhone is set to repeat the current song
over and over.
= iPhone isn’t set to repeat songs.
Skip to any point in a song Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar.
Slide your finger down to adjust the scrub rate.
The scrub rate becomes slower the farther down
you slide your finger.
Make a Genius playlist Tap , and the Genius playlist appears.
See “Using Genius on iPhone” on page 79.
Set iPhone to shuffle songs Tap . Tap again to set iPhone to play songs
in order.
= iPhone is set to shuffle songs.
= iPhone is set to play songs in order.
Shuffle the tracks in any playlist, album, or other
list of songs
Tap Shuffle at the top of the list. For example, to
shuffle all the songs on iPhone, choose Songs >
Shuffle.
Whether or not iPhone is set to shuffle, if you tap
Shuffle at the top of a list of songs, iPhone plays
the songs from that list in random order.
Podcast and Audiobook Controls
From the Now Playing screen, tap the cover.
The email, 30-second repeat, and playback speed controls appear along with the
scrubber bar. You can see elapsed time, remaining time, and the episode or chapter
number.
The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust the
scrub rate from high-speed to fine by sliding your finger down as you drag the
playhead along the scrubber bar.
Scrubber bar Playhead
Playback
speed
Email 30-second repeat
76 Chapter 6 iPodSend an email link to this podcast Tap .
Skip to any point Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide
your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The
scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you
slide your finger.
Play back the last 30 seconds Tap .
Set the playback speed Tap . Tap again to change the speed.
= Play at double speed.
= Play at half speed.
= Play at normal speed.
Using Voice Control with iPod
You can use Voice Control (available only on iPhone 3GS) to control music playback on
iPhone.
Note: Voice Control isn’t available in all languages.
Use Voice Control: Press and hold the Home button until the Voice Control screen
appears and you hear a beep. Then use the commands described below to play songs.
You can also press and hold the center button on the iPhone headset (or the
equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to bring up Voice Control.
Control music playback Say “play” or “play music.” To pause, say “pause”
or “pause music.” You can also say “next song” or
“previous song.”
Play an album, artist, or playlist Say “play,” then say “album,” “artist,” or “playlist”
and the name.
Shuffle the current playlist Say “shuffle.”
Find out more about the currently playing song Say “what’s playing,” “what song is this,” “who
sings this song,” or “who is this song by.”
Use Genius to play similar songs Say “Genius,” “play more like this,” or “play more
songs like this.”
Cancel Voice Control Say “cancel” or “stop.”
Chapter 6 iPod 77Browsing Album Covers in Cover Flow
When you’re browsing music, you can rotate iPhone sideways to see your iTunes
content in Cover Flow and browse your music by album artwork.
Browse album covers Drag or flick left or right.
See the tracks on an album Tap a cover or .
Play any track Tap the track. Drag up or down to scroll through
the tracks.
Return to the cover Tap the title bar. Or tap again.
Play or pause the current song Tap or . You can also press the center button
on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button
on your Bluetooth headset).
78 Chapter 6 iPodViewing All Tracks on an Album
See all the tracks on the album that contains the current song: From the Now
Playing screen tap . Tap a track to play it. Tap the album cover thumbnail to return to
the Now Playing screen.
Rating bar
Back to Now
Playing
screen
Album tracks
In track list view, you can assign ratings to songs. You can use ratings to create smart
playlists in iTunes that dynamically update to include, for example, your highest rated
songs.
Rate a song: Drag your thumb across the rating bar to give the song zero to five stars.
Searching Music
You can search the titles, artists, albums, and composers of songs, podcasts, and other
content you’ve synced to iPhone.
Search music: Enter text in the search field at the top of a song list, playlist, artist list,
or other view of your iPod content. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of a
list and reveal the search field.)
Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard
and see more of the results.
You can also use Spotlight to search for music. See “Searching” on page 37.
Using Genius on iPhone
Genius finds songs in your iTunes library that go great together. A Genius playlist is a
collection of songs that are picked for you to go with a song you choose from your
library. A Genius Mix is a selection of songs of the same kind of music. Genius Mixes
are recreated each time you listen to them, so they’re always new and fresh.
You can create Genius playlists in iTunes and sync them to iPhone. You can also create
and save Genius playlists directly on iPhone.
Chapter 6 iPod 79Genius Mixes are created in iTunes. iTunes creates different mixes depending on the
variety of music you have in your iTunes library. For example, you may have Genius
Mixes that highlight R&B songs, or Alternative Rock songs.
To use Genius on iPhone, first turn on Genius in iTunes, then sync iPhone with iTunes.
Genius Mixes are synced automatically, unless you manually manage your music and
choose which mixes you want to sync in iTunes. Genius is a free service, but requires
an iTunes Store account.
Genius Mixes require iTunes 9 or later. When you sync a Genius Mix, iTunes may select
and sync songs from your library that you haven’t otherwise chosen to sync.
Browse Genius Mixes: Tap Genius. The number of dots at the bottom of the screen
shows the number of mixes you’ve synced from iTunes, and indicates which mix you’re
viewing. Flick left or right to access your other mixes.
Play a Genius Mix: Tap the mix or tap .
Make a Genius playlist on iPhone:
1 Tap Playlists and tap Genius.
2 Tap a song in the list. Genius creates a playlist with additional songs that go great with
that song.
You can also make a Genius playlist of songs that go great with the song you’re
playing. From the Now Playing screen, tap the album cover to display additional
controls, then tap .
Save a Genius playlist: In the playlist, tap Save. The playlist is saved in Playlists with
the title of the song you picked.
You can make and save as many Genius playlists as you want. If you save a Genius
playlist created on iPhone, it syncs back to iTunes the next time you connect.
80 Chapter 6 iPodRefresh a Genius playlist: In the playlist, tap Refresh.
Refreshing a playlist creates a playlist of different songs that go great with the song
you picked. You can refresh any Genius playlist, whether it was created in iTunes and
synced to iPhone, or created directly on iPhone.
Create a Genius playlist from a new song: In the playlist, tap New, then pick a new
song.
Delete a saved Genius playlist: In a playlist that you saved directly on iPhone, tap Edit,
then tap Delete Playlist.
Once a Genius playlist is synced back to iTunes, you won’t be able to delete it directly
from iPhone. You can use iTunes to edit the playlist name, stop syncing, or delete the
playlist.
Making On-The-Go Playlists
Make an on-the-go playlist:
1 Tap Playlists and tap On-The-Go.
2 Browse for songs using the buttons at the bottom of the screen. Tap any song or video
to add it to the playlist. Tap Add All Songs at the top of any list of songs to add all the
songs in the list.
3 When you finish, tap Done.
When you make an on-the-go playlist and then sync iPhone to your computer, the
playlist is saved on iPhone and in your iTunes library, then deleted from iPhone. The
first is saved as “On-The-Go 1,” the second as “On-The-Go 2,” and so on. To put a playlist
back on iPhone, select iPhone in the iTunes sidebar, click the Music tab, and set the
playlist to sync.
Edit an on-the-go playlist: Tap Playlists, tap On-The-Go, tap Edit, then do one of the
following:
• To move a song higher or lower in the list, drag next to the song.
• To delete a song from the playlist, tap next to a song, then tap Delete. Deleting a
song from the on-the-go playlist doesn’t delete it from iPhone.
• To clear the entire playlist, tap Clear Playlist.
• To add more songs, tap .
Videos
With iPhone, you can view video content such as movies, music videos, and video
podcasts. If a video contains chapters, you can skip to the next or previous chapter,
or bring up a list and start playing at any chapter that you choose. If a video provides
alternate language features, you can choose an audio language or display subtitles.
Chapter 6 iPod 81Playing Videos
Play a video: Tap Videos and tap the video.
Display playback controls: Tap the screen to show the controls. Tap again to hide
them.
Controlling Video Playback
Videos play in widescreen to take full advantage of the display.
The scrubber bar lets you skip to any point along the timeline. You can adjust
the scrub rate by sliding your finger down as you drag the playhead along the
scrubber bar.
Scrubber bar Playhead
Play/Pause
Next/Fastforward
Scale
Restart/Rewind Volume
Lovers in Japan by Coldplay is available in the iTunes Store
Pause a video Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset).
Resume playback Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset).
Raise or lower the volume Drag the volume slider. You can also use
the volume buttons on the iPhone headset
(iPhone 3GS only).
Start a video over Drag the playhead on the scrubber bar all the
way to the left, or tap if the video doesn’t
contain chapters.
Skip to the next chapter (if available) Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset) twice quickly.
Go to the previous chapter (if available) Tap , or press the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your
Bluetooth headset) three times quickly.
Start playing at a specific chapter (if available) Tap , then choose a chapter from the list.
82 Chapter 6 iPodRewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or .
Skip to any point in a video Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar. Slide
your finger down to adjust the scrub rate. The
scrub rate becomes slower the farther down you
slide your finger.
Stop watching a video before it finishes playing Tap Done. Or press the Home button.
Scale a video to fill the screen or fit to the
screen
Tap to make the video fill the screen. Tap
to make it fit the screen. You can also double-tap
the video to toggle between fitting and filling the
screen.
When you scale a video to fill the screen, the
sides or top may be cropped from view. When
you scale it to fit the screen, you may see black
bars on the sides or above and below the video.
Select an alternate audio language (if available) Tap , then choose a language from the Audio
list.
Show or hide subtitles (if available) Tap , then choose a language, or Off, from the
Subtitles list.
Searching Video
You can search the titles of movies, TV shows, and video podcasts you’ve synced to
iPhone.
Search video: Enter text in the search field at the top of the list of videos.
Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard
and see more of the results.
Watching Rented Movies
You can rent movies in standard (480p) definition from the iTunes Store and watch
them on iPhone. You can download rented movies directly to iPhone, or transfer them
from iTunes on your computer to iPhone. You can also transfer rented movies back to
iTunes from iPhone. (Rented movies aren’t available in all regions.)
The movie must be fully downloaded before you can start watching. You can pause
a download and resume it later. Rented movies expire after a certain number of days,
and once you start a movie you have a limited amount of time to finish watching it.
The time remaining appears near a movie’s title. Movies are automatically deleted
when they expire. Check the iTunes Store for the expiration time before renting
a movie.
Chapter 6 iPod 83Transfer rented movies to iPhone: Connect iPhone to your computer. Then select
iPhone in the iTunes sidebar, click Movies, and select the rented movies you want to
transfer. Your computer must be connected to the Internet.
View a rented movie: On iPhone, choose iPod > Videos and select a movie.
Watching Videos on a TV
You can connect iPhone to your TV and watch your videos on the large screen. Use the
Apple Component AV Cable, Apple Composite AV Cable, or other authorized iPhone
compatible cable. You can also use these cables with the Apple Universal Dock to
connect iPhone to your TV. (The Apple Universal Dock includes a remote that lets you
control playback from a distance.) Apple cables and docks are available for purchase
separately in many countries. Go to www.apple.com/ipodstore (not available in all
countries).
Deleting Videos from iPhone
You can delete videos from iPhone to save space.
Delete a video: In the videos list, swipe left or right over the video, then tap Delete.
When you delete a video (other than rented movies) from iPhone, it isn’t deleted from
your iTunes library and you can sync the video back to iPhone later. If you don’t want
to sync the video back to iPhone, set iTunes to not sync the video. See “What You
Need” on page 9.
Important: If you delete a rented movie from iPhone, it’s deleted permanently and
cannot be transferred back to your computer.
Setting a Sleep Timer
You can set iPhone to stop playing music or videos after a period of time.
Set a sleep timer: From the Home screen choose Clock > Timer, then flick to set the
number of hours and minutes. Tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod, tap Set,
then tap Start to start the timer.
When the timer ends, iPhone stops playing music or video, closes any other open
application, and then locks itself.
84 Chapter 6 iPodChanging the Browse Buttons
You can replace the browse buttons at the bottom of the screen with buttons you
use more frequently. For example, if you often listen to podcasts, you can replace the
Songs button with Podcasts.
Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the
bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace.
You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them.
Tap Done when you finish. Tap More at any time to access the buttons you replaced.
Chapter 6 iPod 85Messages
7
Sending and Receiving Messages
WARNING: For important information about driving safely, see the Important Product
Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Messages lets you exchange text messages with anyone using an SMS-capable phone.
Messages also supports MMS, so you can send photos, video clips (iPhone 3GS only),
contact information, and voice memos to other MMS-capable devices. You can enter
multiple addresses and send a message to several people at the same time.
Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later. SMS or MMS support may not be
available in all regions. Additional fees may apply for use of Messages. Contact your
carrier for complete information.
You can use Messages whenever you’re in range of the cellular network. If you can
make a call, you can send a message. Depending on your phone plan, you may be
charged for the messages you send or receive.
Send a message: Tap , then enter a phone number or name, or tap and choose a
contact from your contacts list. Tap the text field above the keyboard, type a message,
and tap Send.
The Messages icon on the Home screen shows the total number of unread messages
you have.
Number of
unread messages
86Your conversations are saved in the Messages list. Conversations that contain unread
messages have a blue dot next to them. Tap a conversation in the list to see that
conversation or add to it.
Text messages
you sent
Text messages
from the other
person
iPhone displays the 50 most recent messages in the conversation. To see earlier
messages, scroll to the top and tap Load Earlier Messages.
Send a message to more than one person: Tap , then add recipients. If you enter
a phone number manually (instead of selecting it from Contacts), tap Return before
entering another entry.
Replies from any of the recipients are sent only to you, not to the other people you
texted.
Reply or send a message to a person (or group) you’ve texted before: Tap an entry
in the Messages list, then type a new message in the conversation and tap Send.
Send a message to a favorite or to a recent call:
1 From the Home screen tap Phone, then tap Favorites or Recents.
2 Tap next to a name or number, then tap Text Message.
3 If multiple phone numbers appear, tap the one you want to text.
When MMS is available, Messages allows you to include a subject in your text
messages. You can turn this feature on or off in Messages settings. It is turned on by
default.
Include or remove the subject field: In Settings, tap Messages, then tap Show Subject
Field to turn it on or off.
Note: The subject field and the Show Subject Field setting don’t appear if MMS isn’t
supported by your carrier.
Chapter 7 Messages 87Turn MMS messaging on or off: In Settings, tap Messages, then tap MMS Messaging
to turn it on or off. You may want to turn MMS Messaging off, for example, to prevent
sending or receiving attachments when fees apply.
Note: The MMS Messaging setting doesn’t appear if MMS isn’t supported by your
carrier.
Sharing Photos and Videos
You can take a photo or make a video (iPhone 3GS only) from within Messages and
include it in your conversation with another MMS-capable device. You can save photos
or videos you receive in Messages to your Camera Roll album.
If MMS isn’t supported by your carrier, the button doesn’t appear and you can’t
send photos or videos.
Send a photo or video: Tap and tap “Take Photo or Video” (iPhone 3GS only; on
earlier models, tap “Take Photo”) or “Choose Existing” and select an item from a photo
album and tap Choose.
The limit to the size of attachments is determined by your carrier. If necessary, iPhone
may compress the photo or video. To learn about taking photos and videos, see
Chapter 10,“Camera,” on page 103.
Save a photo or video attachment to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo or
video in the conversation, tap , then tap Save Image or Save Video.
Copy a photo or video: Touch and hold the attachment, then tap Copy. You can paste
the photo or video to an Mail message or another MMS message.
Sending Voice Memos
You can send voice memos in a message to another MMS-capable device.
Send a voice memo: In Voice Memos, tap , tap the voice memo you want to send,
then tap Share and tap MMS. Address the message and tap Send.
88 Chapter 7 MessagesEditing Conversations
If you want to keep a conversation but not the entire thread, you can delete the parts
you don’t want. You can also delete entire conversations from the Messages list.
Edit a conversation: Tap Edit. Tap the circles along the left side to select the parts of
the conversation you want to delete, then tap Delete. When you’re finished, tap Done.
Clear all text and files, without deleting the conversation: Tap Edit, then tap Clear All.
Tap Clear Conversation to confirm.
Forward a conversation: Select a conversation, then tap Edit. Tap the circles on the
left side of the screen to select the parts of the conversation you want to include,
then tap Forward, enter one or more recipients, and tap Send.
Delete a conversation: Tap Edit, then tap next to the conversation and tap Delete.
You can also swipe left or right over the conversation and tap Delete.
To show the
Delete button,
swipe left or right
over the message.
Using Contact Information and Links
Call or email someone you’ve texted: Tap a message in the Text Messages list and
scroll to the top of the conversation. (Tap the status bar to scroll quickly to the top of
the screen.)
• To call the person, tap Call.
• To email the person, tap Contact Info, then tap an email address.
Follow a link in a message: Tap the link.
A link may open a webpage in Safari, initiate a phone call in Phone, open a
preaddressed message in Mail, or display a location in Maps. To return to your text
messages, press the Home button and tap Messages.
Add someone you’ve texted to your contacts list: Tap a phone number in the
Messages list, then tap “Add to Contacts.”
Send contact information: In Contacts, tap the person whose information you want
to share. Tap Share Contact at the bottom of the screen, then tap MMS. Address the
message and tap Send.
Save contact information received: Tap the contact bubble in the conversation and
tap Create New Contact or “Add to Existing Contact.”
Chapter 7 Messages 89Managing Previews and Alerts
By default, iPhone displays a preview of new messages when iPhone is locked or you
are using another application. You can turn this preview on or off in Settings. You can
also enable alerts for text messages.
Turn previews on or off: In Settings, choose Messages and tap Show Preview.
Repeat previews: In Settings, choose Messages and tap Repeat Alert. If you don’t
respond to the first preview of a new message, the preview will be displayed twice
more.
Set whether an alert sounds when you get a text message or preview: In Settings,
choose Sounds, then tap New Text Message. Tap the alert sound you want, or None if
you don’t want an audible alert.
Important: If the Ring/Silent switch is off, text alerts won’t sound.
90 Chapter 7 MessagesCalendar
8
About Calendar
Calendar lets you view individual calendars for your different accounts or a combined
calendar for all accounts. You can view your events in a continuous list, by day, or by
month, and search events by title, invitee, or location.
You can sync iPhone with the calendars on your computer. You can also make, edit,
or cancel appointments on iPhone, and have them synced back to your computer.
You can subscribe to Google, Yahoo!, or Mac OS X iCal calendars using a CalDAV or
iCalendar (.ics) account. If you have a Microsoft Exchange account, you can receive and
respond to meeting invitations.
Syncing Calendars
You can sync Calendar in either of the following ways:
• In iTunes, use the iPhone preference panes to sync with iCal or Microsoft Entourage
on a Mac, or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or 2007 on a PC when you connect iPhone to
your computer. See “Syncing” on page 11.
• In Settings on iPhone, select Calendar in your MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange
accounts to sync your calendar information over the air. See “Setting Up
Accounts” on page 16.
91Viewing Your Calendar
You can view individual calendars for your different accounts or a combined calendar
for all accounts.
View a different calendar: Tap Calendars, then select a calendar. Tap All Calendars to
view combined events from all calendars.
You can view your calendar events in a list, by day, or by month. The events for all of
your synced calendars appear in the same calendar on iPhone.
Switch views: Tap List, Day, or Month.
• List view: All your appointments and events appear in a scrollable list.
• Day view: Scroll up or down to see the events in a day. Tap or to see the
previous or next day’s events.
• Month view: Tap a day to see its events. Tap or to see the previous or next
month.
Add an event
Days with dots
have scheduled
events
Go to today Switch views
Respond to
calendar invitation
Events for
selected day
See the details of an event: Tap the event.
Set iPhone to adjust event times for a selected time zone:
1 In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars.”
2 Under Calendars, tap Time Zone Support, then turn Time Zone Support on.
3 Tap Time Zone and search for a major city in the time zone you want.
When Time Zone Support is on, Calendar displays event dates and times in the time
zone of the city you selected. When Time Zone Support is off, Calendar displays events
in the time zone of your current location as determined by the network time.
92 Chapter 8 CalendarSearching Calendars
You can search the titles, invitees, and locations of the events in your calendars.
Calendar searches the calendar you’re currently viewing, or all calendars if you’re
viewing them all.
Search events: In list view, enter text in the search field.
Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard
and see more results.
Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars
You can subscribe to calendars that use the CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) formats. Many
calendar-based services, including Yahoo!, Google, and the Mac OS X iCal application,
support either format.
Subscribed calendars are read only. You can read events from subscribed calendars on
iPhone, but can’t edit them or create new events. You also can’t accept invitations from
CalDAV accounts.
Subscribe to a CalDAV or .ics calendar:
1 In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account.
2 Choose Other, then choose either Add CalDAV Account or Add Subscribed Calendar.
3 Enter your account information, then tap Next to verify the account.
4 Tap Save.
Apple provides links to a number of free iCal calendars—for national holidays or
sports events, for example—that you may want to subscribe to. The calendars are
automatically added to iCal on your desktop when you download them. You can
then sync them to iPhone as described in “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on
page 93. Go to /www.apple.com/downloads/macosx/calendars.
Chapter 8 Calendar 93You can also subscribe to an iCal (or other .ics) calendar published on the web by
tapping a link to the calendar you receive in an email or text message on iPhone.
Adding Calendar Events to iPhone
You can also enter and edit calendar events directly on iPhone.
Add an event: Tap and enter event information, then tap Done.
You can enter any of the following:
• Title
• Location
• Starting and ending times (or turn on All-day if it’s an all-day event)
• Repeat times—none, or every day, week, two weeks, month, or year
• Alert time—from five minutes to two days before the event
When you set an alert, the option to set a second alert appears. When an alert
goes off, iPhone displays a message. You can also set iPhone to play a sound
(see “Alerts” on page 96).
Important: Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re
traveling, iPhone may not alert you at the correct local time. To manually set the
correct time, see “Date and Time” on page 147.
• Notes
To select which calendar to add the event to, tap Calendar. Read-only calendars don’t
appear in the list.
Edit an event Tap the event, then tap Edit.
Delete an event Tap the event, tap Edit, then scroll down and tap
Delete Event.
94 Chapter 8 CalendarResponding to Meeting Invitations
If you have a Microsoft Exchange account set up on iPhone with Calendars enabled,
you can receive and respond to meeting invitations from people in your organization.
When you receive an invitation, the meeting appears in your calendar with a dotted
line around it. The icon in the lower-right corner of the screen indicates the total
number of new invitations you have, as does the Calendar icon on the Home screen.
Number of
meeting invitations
Respond to an invitation in Calendar:
1 Tap a meeting invitation in the calendar, or tap to display the Event screen and tap
an invitation.
• Tap “Invitation from” to get contact information for the meeting organizer.
Tap the email address to send a message to the organizer. If the organizer is
in your contacts, you can also tap to call or send a text message.
Chapter 8 Calendar 95• Tap Attendees to see the other people invited to the meeting. Tap a name to see
an attendee’s contact information. Tap the email address to send a message to the
attendee. If the attendee is in your contacts, you can also tap to call or send a text
message.
• Tap Alert to set iPhone to sound an alert before the meeting.
• Tap Add Comments to add comments in the email response to the meeting
organizer. You comments will also appear in your Info screen for the meeting.
Notes are made by the meeting organizer.
2 Tap Accept, Maybe, or Decline.
When you accept, tentatively accept, or decline the invitation, a response email that
includes any comments you added is sent to the organizer.
If you accept or tentatively accept the meeting, you can change your response later.
Tap Add Comments if you want to change your comments.
Exchange meeting invitations are also sent in an email message, which lets you open
the meeting’s Info screen from Mail.
Open a meeting invitation in an email message: Tap the invitation.
Alerts
Set calendar alerts: In Settings, choose Sounds, then turn Calendar Alerts on.
If Calendar Alerts is off when an event is about to occur, iPhone displays a message
but makes no sound.
Important: If the Ring/Silent switch is off, calendar alerts won’t sound.
Sound alerts for invitations: In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendar.”
Under Calendars, tap New Invitation Alert to turn it on.
96 Chapter 8 CalendarPhotos
9
About Photos
iPhone lets you carry photos and videos with you, so you can share them with your
family, friends, and associates. You can sync photos and videos (Mac only) from your
computer, view photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only) taken with the built-in camera,
use photos as wallpaper, and assign photos to identify contacts when they call.
You can also send photos and videos in email messages, send photos and videos
(iPhone 3GS only) in MMS messages, and upload photos and videos to MobileMe
galleries.
Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later and if supported by your carrier.
Syncing Photos and Videos with Your Computer
iTunes can sync your photos and videos (Mac only) with the following applications:
• Mac: iPhoto 4.0.3 or later, or Aperture
• PC: Adobe Photoshop Elements 3.0 or later
See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 12.
iPhone supports H.264 and MPEG-4 video formats, with AAC audio. If you are having
trouble syncing a video to iPhone, you might be able to use iTunes to create an iPhone
version of the video.
Create an iPhone version of a video:
1 Copy the video to your iTunes library.
2 In iTunes, select Movies in the Library list and select the video you want to sync.
3 Choose Advanced > “Create iPod or iPhone Version.”
For additional information, go to support.apple.com/kb/HT1211.
97Viewing Photos and Videos
Photos and videos (Mac only) synced from your computer’s photo application can
be viewed in Photos. You can also view the photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only)
you’ve taken with iPhone’s built-in camera or saved from an email or MMS message
(iPhone 3GS only).
View photos and videos:
1 In Photos, tap a photo album.
2 Tap a thumbnail to see the photo or video in full screen.
Show or hide the controls: Tap the full-screen photo or video to show the controls.
Tap again to hide the controls.
Play a video: Tap in the center of the screen.
To replay a video, tap at the bottom of the screen. If you don’t see , tap the screen
to show the controls.
View a photo or video in landscape orientation: Rotate iPhone sideways. The photo
or video reorients automatically and, if it’s in landscape format, expands to fit the
screen.
98 Chapter 9 PhotosZoom in on part of a photo: Double-tap where you want to zoom in. Double-tap
again to zoom out. You can also pinch to zoom in or out.
View video in full screen, or fit video to screen: Double tap the screen to scale the
video to fill the screen. Double-tap again to fit the video to the screen.
Pan around a photo: Drag the photo.
See the next or previous photo or video: Flick left or right. Or tap the screen to show
the controls, then tap or .
Slideshows
You can view photo albums as slideshows, complete with background music.
View a photo album as a slideshow: Tap an album, then tap .
Videos play automatically when they appear during the slideshow.
Stop a slideshow: Tap the screen.
Set slideshow settings: In Settings, choose Photos and set the following options:
• To set the length of time each slide is shown, tap Play Each Slide For and choose a time.
• To set transition effects when moving from photo to photo, tap Transition and choose a
transition type.
• To set whether slideshows repeat, turn Repeat on or off.
• To set whether photos and videos are shown in random order, turn Shuffle on or off.
Chapter 9 Photos 99Play music during a slideshow: In iPod, play a song, then choose Photos from the
Home screen and start a slideshow.
Sharing Photos and Videos
You can send photos and videos in email and MMS messages, add photos and videos
to MobileMe galleries, and publish videos to YouTube. You can also copy and paste
photos and videos, save photos and videos from email messages to Photos, and save
images from webpages to Photos.
Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later and if supported by your carrier.
MMS video attachments are supported only on iPhone 3GS.
Sending a Photo or Video in an Email or MMS Message
Send a photo or video: Choose a photo or video and tap , then tap Email Photo/
Video or MMS.
If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls.
The limit to the size of attachments is determined by your carrier. If necessary, iPhone
may compress the photo or video. To learn about taking photos and videos, see
Chapter 10,“Camera,” on page 103.
Copying and Pasting Photos and Videos
You can copy a photo or video from Photos and paste it to an email or MMS message.
Some third-party applications may also support copying and pasting photos and
videos.
Copy a photo or video: Hold your finger on the screen until the Copy button appears,
then tap Copy.
Paste a photo or video: Tap to place an insertion point where you want to place the
photo or video, then tap the insertion point and tap Paste.
Adding a Photo or Video to a MobileMe Gallery
If you have a MobileMe account, you can add photos and videos (iPhone 3GS only)
directly from iPhone to a gallery you’ve created. You can also add photos and videos to
someone else’s MobileMe gallery if that person has enabled email contributions.
Before you can add photos or videos to a gallery in your MobileMe account, you must:
• Set up your MobileMe account on iPhone
• Publish a MobileMe gallery, and allow adding photos via email or iPhone
For more information about creating a gallery and adding photos and videos to it,
see MobileMe Help.
100 Chapter 9 PhotosAdd a photo or video to your gallery: Choose a photo or video and tap , then tap
“Send to MobileMe.” Enter a title and description, if you like, then select the album to
add the photo or video to and tap Publish.
If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls.
iPhone tells you when the photo or video has been published, and gives you options
to view it on MobileMe or email a link to a friend.
Adding a photo or video to someone else’s gallery: Choose a photo or video and tap
, then tap “Email Photo/Video.” Enter the album’s email address, then click Send.
Publishing Videos to YouTube
If you have a YouTube account, you can publish videos directly from iPhone to
YouTube (iPhone 3GS only). You can’t publish videos longer than than ten minutes.
Publish a video to You Tube:
1 While viewing a video, tap , then tap “Send to YouTube.”
2 Sign in to your YouTube account.
3 Enter publishing information such as Title, Description, and Tags.
4 Tap Category to choose a category.
5 Tap Publish.
Saving Photos and Videos from Email Messages, MMS Messages,
and Webpages
Save a photo in an email message to your Camera Roll album: Tap the photo,
then tap Save Image. If the photo hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the download
notice first.
Save a video in an email message to your Camera Roll album: Touch and hold the
attachment, then tap Save Video. If the video hasn’t been downloaded yet, tap the
download notice first.
Save a photo on a webpage to your Camera Roll album: Touch and hold the photo,
then tap Save Image.
Save a photo or video in an MMS message to your Camera Roll album: Tap the
image in the conversation, tap , and tap Save Image or Save Video.
If you don’t see , tap the screen to show the controls.
You can download the photos and videos in your Camera Roll album to your
computer’s photo application by connecting iPhone to your computer.
Chapter 9 Photos 101Assigning a Photo to a Contact
You can assign a photo to a contact. When that person calls, iPhone displays the photo.
Assign a photo to a contact:
1 Choose Camera from the Home screen and take someone’s picture. Or choose any
photo already on iPhone and tap .
2 Tap “Assign to Contact” and choose a contact.
3 Position and size the photo until it looks the way you want.
Drag the photo to pan, and pinch to zoom in or out.
4 Tap Set Photo.
You can also assign a photo to a contact in Contacts by tapping Edit and then tapping
the picture icon.
Wallpaper
You see a wallpaper background picture as you unlock iPhone or when you’re on a call
with someone you don’t have a high-resolution photo for.
Set a photo as wallpaper:
1 Choose any photo and tap , then tap Use As Wallpaper.
2 Drag the photo to pan, or pinch the photo to zoom in or out, until it looks the way
you want.
3 Tap Set Wallpaper.
You can also choose from several wallpaper pictures included with iPhone by choosing
Settings > Wallpaper > Wallpaper from the Home screen.
102 Chapter 9 PhotosCamera
10
About Camera
With the built-in camera, it’s easy to take photos and record videos with iPhone.
The lens is on the back of iPhone, so you can use the screen to see the photo or video
you’re taking. “Tap to focus” (iPhone 3GS only) lets you focus on a specific area of your
shot and automatically adjust the exposure. You can quickly review—and keep or
delete—photos and videos you’ve taken.
Note: Video features are available only on iPhone 3GS.
Camera photos are tagged with location data, including your current geographical
coordinates provided by the built-in compass (iPhone 3GS only), if Location Services
is turned on. You can use location data with some applications and photo-sharing
websites to track and post where you took your pictures. If Location Services is turned
off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on. If you don’t want to include location data with
your photos and videos, you can still use Camera without having Location Services
turned on. See “Location Services” on page 144.
103Taking Photos and Recording Videos
Taking photos and recording videos with iPhone is as easy as point and tap.
Photo/Video switch
Focus area
Thumbnail of
last shot
Click to
take photo
Take a photo: Aim iPhone and tap .
Make sure the Camera/Video switch is set to .
When you take a photo or start a video recording, iPhone makes a shutter sound.
The sound isn’t played if you’ve set the Ring/Silent switch to silent. See “Sounds and
the Ring/Silent Switch” on page 141.
Note: In some regions, the sound effects for Camera are played even if the Ring/Silent
switch is set to silent.
Record a video: Slide the Camera/Video switch to . Tap to start recording.
The record button blinks while Camera is recording. Tap again to stop recording.
You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button
on your Bluetooth headset) to start and stop recording.
If you take a picture or record a video with iPhone rotated sideways, the picture is
saved in landscape orientation.
A rectangle on the screen shows the area where Camera is focusing the shot.
Change the focus area and set exposure: Tap where you want to focus. Camera
automatically adjusts the exposure for the selected area of the image.
Review a photo or video you’ve just taken: Tap the thumbnail of your last shot, in the
lower-left corner of the screen.
Delete a photo or video: Tap . If you don’t see , tap the screen to display the
controls.
104 Chapter 10 CameraTake a screenshot of the iPhone display: Quickly press and release the Sleep/
Wake and Home buttons at the same time. A flash of the screen lets you know the
screenshot was taken. The screenshot is added to the Camera Roll album.
Viewing and Sharing Photos and Videos
The photos and videos you take with Camera are saved in the Camera Roll album on
iPhone. You can view the Camera Roll album from either Camera or Photos.
View photos and videos in the Camera Roll album: In Camera, tap the thumbnail
image in the lower-left corner of the screen. In Photos, tap the Camera Roll album.
Tap the left or right button, or flick left or right to flip through the photos and videos.
When viewing a photo or video in the Camera Roll album, tap the screen to display
the controls.
For more information about viewing and sharing photos and videos, see:
• “Viewing Photos and Videos” on page 98
• “Sharing Photos and Videos” on page 100
Trimming Videos
You can trim the frames from the beginning and end of videos that you record.
You can trim the original video or save the trim as a new clip.
Chapter 10 Camera 105Trim a video:
1 While viewing a video, tap the screen to display the controls.
2 Drag either end of the frame viewer at the top of the video, then tap Trim.
3 Tap Trim Original or tap Save as New Clip.
Important: Trimming the original video permanently deletes the frames you edit from
the video.
New clips are saved in the Camera Roll album along with the original video.
Uploading Photos and Videos to Your Computer
You can upload the photos and videos you take with Camera to photo applications on
your computer, such as iPhoto on a Mac.
Upload images to your computer: Connect iPhone to your computer.
• Mac: Select the photos you want and click the Import or Download button in
iPhoto or other supported photo application on your computer.
• PC: Follow the instructions that came with your camera or photo application.
If you delete the photos and videos from iPhone when you upload them to your
computer, they’re removed from the Camera Roll album. You can use the iTunes
Photos setup pane to sync photos and videos (Mac only, iTunes 9 or later required)
back to the Photos application on iPhone. See “iPhone Settings Panes in iTunes” on
page 13.
106 Chapter 10 CameraYouTube
11
Finding and Viewing Videos
YouTube features short videos submitted by people from around the world. To use
some features on iPhone, you need to sign in to a YouTube account when prompted.
For information about requirements and how to get a YouTube account, go to
www.youtube.com.
Note: YouTube isn’t available in all languages and locations.
Browse videos: Tap Featured, Most Viewed, or Favorites. Or tap More to browse by
Most Recent, Top Rated, History, Subscriptions, or Playlists.
• Featured: Videos reviewed and featured by YouTube staff.
• Most Viewed: Videos most seen by YouTube viewers. Tap All for all-time most viewed
videos, or Today or This Week for most-viewed videos of the day or week.
• Favorites: Videos you’ve added to Favorites. When you sign in to a YouTube account,
account favorites appear and any existing favorites can be synced to your account.
• Most Recent: Videos most recently submitted to YouTube.
• Top Rated: Videos most highly rated by YouTube viewers. To rate videos, go to
www.youtube.com.
• History: Videos you’ve viewed most recently.
• Subscriptions: Videos from YouTube accounts to which you’ve subscribed. You must
be signed in to a YouTube account to use this feature.
• Playlists: Videos you’ve added to playlists. You must be signed in to a YouTube
account to use this feature.
Search for a video:
1 Tap Search, then tap the YouTube search field.
2 Type a word or phrase that describes what you’re looking for, then tap Search.
107YouTube shows results based on video titles, descriptions, tags, and user names. Listed
videos show title, rating, number of views, length, and the account name that posted
the video.
Play a video: Tap the video.
The video begins to download to iPhone and a progress bar appears. When enough of
the video has downloaded, it begins to play. You can also tap to start the video.
Controlling Video Playback
When a video starts playing, the controls disappear so they don’t obscure the video.
Show or hide the video controls: Tap the screen.
Next/
Fast-forward
Play/Pause
Email
Scale
Download progress
Volume
Playhead Scrubber bar
Bookmark Previous/rewind
Play or pause a video Tap or . You can also press the center button
on the iPhone headset (or the equivalent button
on your Bluetooth headset).
Adjust the volume Drag the volume slider, or use the volume
buttons on the side of iPhone. You can also use
the volume buttons on the iPhone headset
(iPhone 3GS only).
Start a video over Tap .
Skip to the next or previous video in a list Tap twice to skip to the previous video.
Tap to skip to the next video.
Rewind or fast-forward Touch and hold or .
Skip to any point in a video Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar.
Stop watching a video before it finishes playing Tap Done, or press the Home button.
Toggle between scaling a video to fill the screen
or fit to the screen
Double-tap the video. You can also tap to
make the video fill the screen, or tap to make
it fit the screen.
Add a video to Favorites using video controls Start playing a video and tap .
Email a link to the video using video controls Start playing a video and tap .
108 Chapter 11 YouTubeManaging Videos
Tap next to a video to see related videos and more controls for managing videos.
Add the video to Favorites Tap “Add to Favorites.”
Add the video to a playlist Tap “Add to Playlist,” then select an existing
playlist or tap to create a new playlist.
Email a link to the video Tap Share Video.
Browse and view related videos Tap a video in the list of related videos to view,
or tap next to a video for more information.
Getting More Information
Tap next to the video to show the video’s comments, description, date added,
and other information.
Chapter 11 YouTube 109Rate the video or add a comment On the More Info screen, tap “Rate, Comment, or
Flag,” then choose “Rate or Comment.” You must
be signed in to a YouTube account to use this
feature.
See more videos from this account On the More Info screen, tap More Videos.
Subscribe to this YouTube account On the More Info screen, tap More Videos, then
tap “Subscribe to ” at the bottom of
the video list. You must be signed in to a YouTube
account to use this feature.
Using YouTube Account Features
If you have a YouTube account, you can access account features such as subscriptions,
comments and ratings, and playlists. To create a YouTube account, go to
www.youtube.com.
Show favorites you’ve added to your account: In Favorites, tap Sign In, then enter
your username and password to see your account favorites. Any existing favorites
you’ve added to iPhone can be merged with your account favorites when you sign in.
Delete a favorite: In Favorites, tap Edit, tap next to a video, then tap Delete.
Show subscriptions you’ve added to your account: In Subscriptions, tap Sign In, then
enter your username and password to see your account subscriptions. Tap an account
in the list to see all videos for that account.
Unsubscribe from a YouTube account: In Subscriptions, tap an account in the list,
then tap Unsubscribe.
View playlists: In Playlists, tap a playlist to see the list of videos you’ve added. Tap any
video in the playlist to begin playing videos from that point in the playlist.
Edit a playlist: In Playlists, tap Edit, then do one of the following:
• To delete the entire playlist, tap next to a playlist, then tap Delete.
• To create a new playlist, tap , then enter a name for the playlist.
Add a video to a playlist: Tap next to a video, then tap “Add to Playlist” and choose
a playlist.
Delete a video from a playlist:
1 In Playlists, tap a playlist, then tap Edit.
2 Tap next to a playlist, then tap Delete.
110 Chapter 11 YouTubeChanging the Browse Buttons
You can replace the Featured, Most Viewed, Bookmarks, and Search buttons at the
bottom of the screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you watch
top rated videos often but don’t watch many featured videos, you could replace the
Featured button with Top Rated.
Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the
bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace.
You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them.
When you finish, tap Done.
When you’re browsing for videos, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t
visible.
Sending Videos to YouTube
If you have a YouTube account, you can send videos directly from iPhone 3GS to
YouTube. See “Publishing Videos to YouTube” on page 101.
Chapter 11 YouTube 111Stocks
12
Viewing Stock Quotes
Stocks lets you see the latest available quotes for your selected stocks, funds, and
indexes.
Quotes are updated every time you open Stocks when connected to the Internet.
Quotes may be delayed by up to 20 minutes or more depending upon the reporting
service.
Add a stock, fund, or index to the stock reader:
1 Tap , then tap .
2 Enter a symbol, company name, fund name, or index, then tap Search.
3 Select an item from the search results and tap Done.
View charts in landscape orientation: Rotate iPhone sideways. Flick left or right to
view the other charts in your stock reader.
Show the progress of a stock, fund, or index over time: Tap the stock, fund, or index
in your list, then tap 1d, 1w, 1m, 3m, 6m, 1y, or 2y. The chart adjusts to show progress
over one day, one week, one month, three months, six months, one year, or two years.
When you’re viewing a chart in landscape orientation, you can touch the chart to
display the value for a specific point in time.
112Use two fingers to see the change in value over a specific period of time.
Delete a stock: Tap and tap next to a stock, then tap Delete.
Change the order of the list: Tap . Then drag next to a stock or index to a new
place in the list.
Switch the display to percentage change, price change, or market capitalization:
Tap any of the values along the right side of the screen. Tap again to switch to another
view. Or tap and tap %, Price, or Mkt Cap, then tap Done.
Getting More Information
See the summary, chart, or news page about a stock, fund, or index: Select the stock,
fund, or index in your list, then flick the pages underneath the stock reader to view the
summary, chart, or recent news page.
On the news page, you can scroll up and down to read headlines, or tap a headline to
view the article in Safari.
See more information at Yahoo.com: Select the stock, fund, or index in your list,
then tap .
Chapter 12 Stocks 113Maps
13
Finding and Viewing Locations
WARNING: For important information about driving and navigating safely, see the
Important Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Maps provides street maps, satellite photos, a hybrid view, and street views of locations
in many of the world’s countries. You can get detailed driving, public transit, or walking
directions and traffic information. Find and track your current (approximate) location,
and use your current location to get driving directions to or from another place. The
built-in digital compass lets you see which way you’re facing. (iPhone 3GS only).
Important: Maps, digital compass (iPhone 3GS only), directions, and location-based
applications provided by Apple depend on data collected and services provided by
third parties. These data services are subject to change and may not be available in
all geographic areas, resulting in maps, compass headings, directions, or locationbased information that may be unavailable, inaccurate, or incomplete. Compare the
information provided on iPhone to your surroundings and defer to posted signs to
resolve any discrepancies. In order to provide your location, data is collected in a form
that doesn’t personally identify you. If you don’t want such data collected, don’t use
the feature. Not using this feature won’t impact the non–location-based functionality
of your iPhone.
Find a location and see a map:
1 Tap the search field to bring up the keyboard.
2 Type an address, intersection, area, landmark, bookmark, contact, or zip code.
3 Tap Search.
114A pin marks the location. Tap the pin to see the name or description of the location.
Tap to get
information about
the location, get
directions, add the
location to your
bookmarks or
contacts list, or
email a link to
Google Maps.
Locations can include places of interest added by Google My Maps users (“Usercreated content”), and sponsored links that appear as special icons (for example, ).
Zoom in to a part of a map Pinch the map with two fingers. Or double-tap
the part you want to zoom in on. Double-tap
again to zoom in even closer.
Zoom out Pinch the map. Or tap the map with two fingers.
Tap with two fingers again to zoom out further.
Pan or scroll to another part of the map Drag up, down, left, or right.
Find your current location and turn tracking mode on: Tap .
Chapter 13 Maps 115Your current (approximate) location is indicated by a blue marker. If your location can’t
be determined precisely, a blue circle also appears around the marker. The size of the
circle depends on how precisely your location can be determined—the smaller the
circle, the greater the precision.
As you move around, iPhone updates your location, adjusting the map so that the
location indicator remains in the center of the screen. If you tap again or drag the
map, iPhone continues to update your location but stops centering it, so the location
information may move off the screen.
iPhone uses Location Services to determine your location. Location Services uses
available information from cellular network data, local Wi-Fi networks (if you have Wi-Fi
turned on), and GPS ( iPhone 3G or later; GPS not available in all locations). This feature
isn’t available in all areas.
If Location Services is turned off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on. You can’t find and
track your current location if Location Services is turned off. See “Location Services” on
page 144.
To conserve battery life, turn Location Services off when you’re not using it. In Settings,
choose General > Location Services.
Get information about your current location: Tap the blue marker, then tap .
iPhone displays the address of your current location, if available. You can use this
information to:
• Get directions
• Add the location to contacts
• Send the address via email or MMS (iPhone 3G or later)
• Bookmark the location
116 Chapter 13 MapsShow which way you’re facing (iPhone 3GS only): Tap again. (The icon changes to
.) Maps uses the built-in compass to determine which way you’re facing. The angle
shows the accuracy of the compass reading—the smaller the angle, the greater the
accuracy.
Maps uses true north to determine your heading, even if you have magnetic north
set in Compass. If the compass needs calibrating, iPhone asks you to wave the phone
in a figure eight. If there’s interference, you may be asked to move from the source of
interference. See Chapter 22,“Compass,” on page 173.
Use the dropped pin: Tap , then tap Drop Pin.
A pin drops down on the map, which you can then drag to any location you choose.
Replace the pin: Tap , then tap Replace Pin. iPhone drops the pin in the area you’re
currently viewing.
Chapter 13 Maps 117See a satellite or hybrid view: Tap , then tap Satellite or Hybrid to see just a satellite
view or a combined street map and satellite view.
To return to map view, tap Map.
See the Google Street View of a location: Tap . Flick left or right to pan through
the 360° panoramic view. (The inset shows your current view.) Tap an arrow to move
down the street.
Tap to return to map view
To return to map view, tap the map inset in the lower-right corner. Street View isn’t
available in all areas.
118 Chapter 13 MapsSee the location of someone’s address in your
contacts list
Tap in the search field, then tap Contacts
and choose a contact.
To locate an address in this way, the contact
must include at least one address. If the contact
has more than one address, choose the one you
want to locate. You can also find the location of
an address by tapping the address directly in
Contacts.
Add a location to your contacts list Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap
next to the name or description, tap “Add to
Contacts,” then tap “Create New Contact” or “Add
to Existing Contact.”
Email a link to a Google Maps location Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap
next to the name or description, then tap
Share Location and tap Email.
Send a link via MMS to a Google Maps location Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap
next to the name or description, then tap
Share Location and tap MMS (iPhone 3G or later).
Bookmarking Locations
You can bookmark locations that you want to find again later.
Bookmark a location: Find a location, tap the pin that points to it, tap next to the
name or description, then tap “Add to Bookmarks” at the bottom of the Info screen.
See a bookmarked location or recently viewed location: Tap in the search field,
then tap Bookmarks or Recents.
Getting Directions
You can get step-by-step directions for driving, taking public transit, or walking to a
destination.
Get directions:
1 Tap Directions.
2 Enter starting and ending locations in the Start and End fields. By default, iPhone starts
with your current approximate location (if available). Tap in either field to choose a
location in Bookmarks (including your current approximate location and the dropped
pin, if available), Recents, or Contacts.
For example, if a friend’s address is in your contacts list, you can tap Contacts and tap
your friend’s name instead of having to type the address.
To reverse the directions, tap .
Chapter 13 Maps 1193 Tap Route (if you entered locations manually), then select driving ( ), public transit ( ),
or walking ( ) directions.
The travel options available depend on the route.
4 Do one of the following:
• To view directions one step at a time, tap Start, then tap to see the next leg of the
trip. Tap to go back.
• To view all the directions in a list, tap , then tap List. Tap any item in the list to see
a map showing that leg of the trip. Tap Route Overview to return to the overview
screen.
If you’re driving or walking, the approximate distance and travel time appear at the top
of the screen. If traffic data is available, the driving time is adjusted accordingly.
If you’re taking public transit, the overview screen shows each leg of the trip and the
mode of transportation, including where you need to walk. The top of the screen
shows the time of the bus or train at the first stop, the estimated arrival time, and the
total fare. Tap to set your departure or arrival time, and to choose a schedule for
the trip. Tap the icon at a stop to see the departure time for that bus or train, and to
get a link to the transit provider’s website or contact info. When you tap Start and step
through the route, detailed information about each leg of the trip appears at the top
of the screen.
You can also get directions by finding a location on the map, tapping the pin that
points to it, tapping , then tapping Directions To Here or Directions From Here.
Switch start and end points, for reverse directions: Tap .
If you don’t see , tap List, then tap Edit.
See recently viewed directions: Tap in the search field, then tap Recents.
120 Chapter 13 MapsShowing Traffic Conditions
When available, you can show highway traffic conditions on the map.
Show or hide traffic conditions: Tap , then tap Show Traffic or Hide Traffic.
Highways are color-coded according to the flow of traffic:
Green = more than
50 miles per hour
Yellow = 25–50
miles per hour
Gray = no data
currently available
Red = less than 25
miles per hour
If you don’t see color-coded highways, you may need to zoom out to a level where you
can see major roads, or traffic conditions may not be available for that area.
Finding and Contacting Businesses
Find businesses in an area:
1 Find a location—for example, a city and state or country, or a street address—or scroll
to a location on a map.
2 Type the kind of business in the text field and tap Search.
Pins appear for matching locations. For example, if you locate your city and then type
“movies” and tap Search, pins mark movie theatres in your city.
Tap the pin that marks a business to see its name or description.
Find businesses without finding the location first: Type things like:
• restaurants san francisco ca
• apple inc new york
Contact a business or get directions: Tap the pin that marks a business, then tap
next to the name.
From there, you can do the following:
• Tap a phone number to call, an email address to send email to, or a web address to
visit.
• For directions, tap Directions To Here or Directions From Here.
Chapter 13 Maps 121• To add the business to your contacts list, scroll down and tap “Create New Contact”
or “Add to Existing Contact.”
• Share the location of the business by email or text message
See a list of the businesses found in the search: From the Map screen, tap List.
Tap a business to see its location. Or tap next to a business to see its information.
Get
directions
Visit
website
Tap to show
contact info
Call
122 Chapter 13 MapsWeather
14
Viewing Weather Summaries
Tap Weather from the Home screen to get the current temperature and six-day
forecast for one or more cities around the world.
Six-day forecast
Current temperature
Current conditions
Add and delete cities
Number of cities stored
Today’s high and low
If the weather board is light blue, it’s daytime in that city—between 6:00 a.m. and 6:00
p.m. If the board is dark purple, it’s nighttime—between 6:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m.
Add a city:
1 Tap , then tap .
2 Enter a city name or zip code, then tap Search.
3 Choose a city in the search list.
Switch to another city: Flick left or right, or tap to the left or right of the row of dots.
The number of dots below the weather board shows how many cities are stored.
Reorder cities: Tap , then drag next to a city to a new place in the list.
123Delete a city: Tap and tap next to a city, then tap Delete.
Display temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius: Tap , then tap °F or °C.
Getting More Weather Information
You can see a more detailed weather report, news and websites related to the city,
and more.
See information about a city at Yahoo.com: Tap .
124 Chapter 14 WeatherVoice Memos
15
Recording Voice Memos
Voice Memos lets you use iPhone as a portable recording device using the built-in
microphone, iPhone or Bluetooth headset mic, or supported external microphone.
Note: External microphones must be designed to work with the iPhone headset
jack or Dock Connector, such as Apple-branded earbuds or authorized third-party
accessories marked with the Apple “Works with iPhone” logo.
You can adjust the recording level by moving the microphone closer to or further
away from what you’re recording. For better recording quality, the loudest level on the
level meter should be between –3dB and 0 dB.
Record button
Audio level meter
Go to voice memos
125Record a voice memo:
1 Tap to start recording. You can also press the center button on the iPhone headset
(or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset).
2 Tap to pause or to stop recording. You can also press the center button on the
iPhone headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset).
Recordings using the built-in microphone are mono, but you can record stereo using
an external stereo microphone.
When you start a voice recording, iPhone makes a shutter sound. The sound isn’t
played if you’ve set the Ring/Silent switch to silent. See “Sounds and the Ring/Silent
Switch” on page 141.
Note: In some regions, the sound effects for Voice Memos are played even if the Ring/
Silent switch is set to silent.
To use other applications while recording your voice memo, you can lock iPhone or
press the Home button.
Play back a voice memo you just recorded: Tap .
Listening to Voice Memos
Scrubber bar
Playhead
Play a voice memo you’ve previously recorded:
1 Tap .
Memos are listed in chronological order, with the most recent memo first.
2 Tap a memo, then tap .
Tap to pause, then tap again to resume playback.
Skip to any point in a memo: Drag the playhead along the scrubber bar.
126 Chapter 15 Voice MemosListen through the built-in speaker: Tap Speaker.
Managing Voice Memos
Delete a voice memo: Tap a memo in the list, then tap Delete.
See more information: Tap next to the memo. The Info screen displays information
about the length, recording time and date, and provides additional editing and
sharing functions.
Add a label to a memo: On the Info screen tap , then select a label in the list on the
Label screen. To create a custom label, choose Custom at the bottom of the list, then
type a name for the label.
Chapter 15 Voice Memos 127Trimming Voice Memos
You can trim the beginning or ending of a voice memo to eliminate unwanted pauses
or noise.
Trim a voice memo:
1 On the Voice Memos screen, tap next to the memo you want to trim.
2 Tap Trim Memo.
3 Using the time markers as a guide, drag the edges of the audio region to adjust the
beginning and end of the voice memo. To preview your edit, tap .
4 Tap Trim Voice Memo.
Important: Edits you make to voice memos can’t be undone.
Sharing Voice Memos
You can share your voice memos as attachments in email or MMS messages
(iPhone 3G or later).
Share a voice memo:
1 On the Voice Memos screen or Info screen, tap Share.
2 Choose Email Voice Memo to open a new message in Mail with the memo attached,
or choose MMS to open a new message in Messages.
A message appears if the file you’re trying to send is too large.
128 Chapter 15 Voice MemosSyncing Voice Memos
iTunes automatically syncs voice memos to your iTunes library when you connect
iPhone to your computer. This lets you listen to voice memos on your computer and
provides a backup if you delete them from iPhone.
Voice memos are synced to the Voice Memos playlist. iTunes creates the playlist if it
doesn’t exist. When you sync voice memos to iTunes, they remain in the Voice Memos
application until you delete them. If you delete a voice memo on iPhone, it isn’t
deleted from the Voice Memos playlist in iTunes. However, if you delete a voice memo
from iTunes, it is deleted from iPhone the next time you sync with iTunes.
You can sync the iTunes Voice Memos playlist to the iPod application on iPhone using
the Music pane in iTunes.
Sync the Voice Memos playlist to iPhone:
1 Connect iPhone to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar.
3 Select the Music tab.
4 Select the “Include voice memos” checkbox and click Apply.
Chapter 15 Voice Memos 129Notes
16
Writing and Reading Notes
Notes are listed in the order of the last modified date, with the most recently modified
note at the top. You can see the first few words of each note in the list. Rotate iPhone
to view notes in landscape orientation and type using a larger keyboard.
Add a note: Tap , then type your note and tap Done.
Read a note: Tap the note. Tap or to see the next or previous note.
Edit a note: Tap anywhere on the note to bring up the keyboard.
Delete a note: Tap the note, then tap .
130Searching Notes
You can search the text of notes.
Search for notes:
1 Drag the note list down or tap the status bar to expose the search window.
2 Enter text in the search field.
Search results appear automatically as you type. Tap Search to dismiss the keyboard
and see more of the results.
Emailing Notes
Email a note: Tap the note, then tap .
To email a note, iPhone must be set up for email. See “Setting Up Email Accounts” on
page 59.
Syncing Notes
You can set up iTunes to automatically sync your notes with email applications such as
Mac OS X Mail (requires Mac OS X version 10.5.7 or later) or Microsoft Outlook 2003 or
2007 on a PC. See “Syncing with iTunes” on page 12.
Chapter 16 Notes 131Clock
17
World Clocks
You can add clocks to show the time in other major cities and time zones around the
world.
View clocks: Tap World Clock.
If the clock face is white, it’s daytime in that city. If the clock face is black, it’s nighttime.
If you have more than four clocks, flick to scroll through them.
Add a clock:
1 Tap World Clock.
2 Tap , then type the name of a city.
Cities matching what you’ve typed appear below.
3 Tap a city to add a clock for that city.
If you don’t see the city you’re looking for, try a major city in the same time zone.
Delete a clock: Tap World Clock and tap Edit. Then tap next to a clock and tap
Delete.
Rearrange clocks: Tap World Clock and tap Edit. Then drag next to a clock to a new
place in the list.
132Alarms
You can set multiple alarms. Set each alarm to repeat on days you specify, or to sound
only once.
Set an alarm:
1 Tap Alarm and tap .
2 Adjust any of the following settings:
• To set the alarm to repeat on certain days, tap Repeat and choose the days.
• To choose the ringtone that sounds when the alarm goes off, tap Sound.
• To set whether the alarm gives you the option to hit snooze, turn Snooze on or off.
If Snooze is on and you tap Snooze when the alarm sounds, the alarm stops and
then sounds again in ten minutes.
• To give the alarm a description, tap Label. iPhone displays the label when the alarm
sounds.
If at least one alarm is set and turned on, appears in the iPhone status bar at the top
of the screen.
Important: Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling,
iPhone alerts may not sound at the correct local time. See “Date and Time” on page 147.
Turn an alarm on or off: Tap Alarm and turn any alarm on or off. If an alarm is turned
off, it won’t sound again unless you turn it back on.
If an alarm is set to sound only once, it turns off automatically after it sounds. You can
turn it on again to reenable it.
Change settings for an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap Edit, then tap next to the alarm
you want to change.
Delete an alarm: Tap Alarm and tap Edit, then tap next to the alarm and tap
Delete.
Stopwatch
Use the stopwatch to time an event:
1 Tap Stopwatch.
2 Tap Start to start the stopwatch.
• To record lap times, tap Lap after each lap.
• To pause the stopwatch, tap Stop. Tap Start to resume.
• To reset the stopwatch, tap Reset when the stopwatch is pause.
If you start the stopwatch and go to another iPhone application, the stopwatch
continues running in the background.
Chapter 17 Clock 133Timer
Set the timer: Tap Timer, then flick to set the number of hours and minutes. Tap Start
to start the timer.
Choose the sound: Tap When Timer Ends.
Set a sleep timer: Set the timer, then tap When Timer Ends and choose Sleep iPod.
When you set a sleep timer, iPhone stops playing music or video when the timer ends.
If you start the timer and then switch to another iPhone application, the timer
continues running.
134 Chapter 17 ClockCalculator
18
Using the Calculator
Tap numbers and functions in Calculator just as you would with a standard calculator.
When you tap the add, subtract, multiply, or divide button, a white ring appears
around the button to let you know the operation to be carried out. Rotate iPhone to
get an expanded scientific calculator.
Standard Memory Functions
• C: Tap to clear the displayed number.
• MC: Tap to clear the memory.
• M+: Tap to add the displayed number to the number in memory. If no number is in
memory, tap to store the displayed number in memory.
• M-: Tap to subtract the displayed number from the number in memory.
• MR: Tap to replace the displayed number with the number in memory. If the button
has a white ring around it, there is a number stored in memory.
The stored number remains in memory when you switch between the standard and
scientific calculators.
135Scientific Calculator Keys
Rotate iPhone to landscape orientation to display the scientific calculator.
2nd Changes the trigonometric buttons (sin, cos, tan, sinh, cosh, and tanh) to their inverse
functions (sin
-1
, cos
-1
, tan
-1
, sinh
-1
, cosh
-1
, and tanh
-1
). It also changes ln to log2, and e
x
to
2
x
. Tap 2nd again to return the buttons to their original functions.
( Opens a parenthetical expression. Expressions can be nested.
) Closes a parenthetical expression.
% Calculates percentages, adds markups, and subtracts discounts. To calculate a
percentage, use it with the multiplication (x) key. For example, to calculate 8% of 500,
enter
500 x 8 % =
which returns 40.
To add a markup or subtract a discount, use it with the plus (+) or minus (–) key.
For example, to compute the total cost of a $500 item with an 8% sales tax, enter
500 + 8 % =
which returns 540.
1/x Returns the reciprocal of a value in decimal format.
x
2
Squares a value.
x
3
Cubes a value.
y
x
Tap between values to raise the first value to the power of the second value.
For example, to compute 3
4
, enter
3 y
x
4 =
which returns 81.
x! Calculates the factorial of a value.
v Calculates the square root of a value.
x
vy Use between values to calculate the x root of y. For example to compute
4
v81, enter
81
x
vy 4 =
which returns 3.
136 Chapter 18 Calculatorlog Returns the log base 10 of a value.
sin Calculates the sine of a value.
sin
-1
Calculates the arc sine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
cos Calculates the cosine of a value.
cos
-1
Calculates the arc cosine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
tan Calculates the tangent of a value.
tan
-1
Calculates the arc tangent of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
ln Calculates the natural log of a value.
log2 Calculates the log base 2. (Available when the 2nd button is tapped.)
sinh Calculates the hyperbolic sine of a value.
sinh
-1
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic sine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is
tapped.)
cosh Calculates the hyperbolic cosine of a value.
cosh
-1
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is
tapped.)
tanh Calculates the hyperbolic tangent of a value.
tanh
-1
Calculates the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a value. (Available when the 2nd button is
tapped.)
e
x
Tap after entering a value to raise the constant “e” (2.718281828459045...) to the power
of that value.
2
x
Calculates 2 to the power of the displayed value. For example, 10 2
x
= 1024. (Available
when the 2nd button is tapped.)
Rad Changes the mode to express trigonometric functions in radians.
Deg Changes the mode to express trigonometric functions in degrees.
p Enters the value of p (3.141592653589793...).
EE An operator that multiplies the currently displayed value by 10 to the power of the next
value you enter.
Rand Returns a random number between 0 and 1.
Chapter 18 Calculator 137Settings
19
Settings allows you to customize iPhone applications, set the date and time, configure
your network connection, and enter other preferences for iPhone.
Airplane Mode
Airplane mode disables the wireless features of iPhone to avoid interfering with
aircraft operation and other electrical equipment.
Turn on airplane mode: Tap Settings and turn airplane mode on.
When airplane mode is on, appears in the status bar at the top of the screen.
No phone, radio, Wi-Fi, or Bluetooth signals are emitted from iPhone and GPS
reception is turned off, disabling many of iPhone’s features. You won’t be able to:
• Make or receive phone calls
• Get visual voicemail
• Send or receive email
• Browse the Internet
• Sync your contacts, calendars, or bookmarks (MobileMe only) with MobileMe or
Microsoft Exchange
• Send or receive text messages
• Stream YouTube videos
• Get stock quotes
• Get map locations
• Get weather reports
• Use the iTunes Store or the App Store
If allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can
continue to use iPhone to:
• Listen to music and watch video
138• Listen to visual voicemail previously received
• Check your calendar
• Take or view pictures
• Hear alarms
• Use the stopwatch or timer
• Use the calculator
• Take notes
• Record voice memos
• Use Compass
• Read text messages and email messages stored on iPhone
Where allowed by the aircraft operator and applicable laws and regulations, you can
turn Wi-Fi back on, enabling you to:
• Send and receive email
• Browse the Internet
• Sync your contacts, calendars, and bookmarks (MobileMe only) with MobileMe and
Microsoft Exchange
• Stream YouTube videos
• Get stock quotes
• Get map locations
• Get weather reports
• Use the iTunes Store or the App Store
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi settings determine whether iPhone uses local Wi-Fi networks to connect to the
Internet. If no Wi-Fi networks are available, or you’ve turned Wi-Fi off, then iPhone
connects to the Internet via your cellular data network, when available. You can use
Mail, Safari, YouTube, Stocks, Maps, Weather, the iTunes Store, and the App Store over a
cellular data network connection.
Turn Wi-Fi on or off: Choose Wi-Fi and turn Wi-Fi on or off.
Join a Wi-Fi network: Choose Wi-Fi, wait a moment as iPhone detects networks in
range, then select a network. If necessary, enter a password and tap Join. (Networks
that require a password appear with a lock icon.)
Once you’ve joined a Wi-Fi network manually, iPhone automatically joins it whenever
the network is in range. If more than one previously used network is in range, iPhone
joins the one last used.
Chapter 19 Settings 139When iPhone is joined to a Wi-Fi network, the Wi-Fi icon in the status bar at the top
of the screen shows signal strength. The more bars you see, the stronger the signal.
Set iPhone to ask if you want to join a new network: Choose Wi-Fi and turn “Ask to
Join Networks” on or off.
When you’re trying to access the Internet, by using Safari or Mail for example, and you
aren’t in range of a Wi-Fi network you‘ve previously used, this option tells iPhone to
look for another network. iPhone displays a list of all available Wi-Fi networks that you
can choose from. (Networks that require a password appear with a lock icon.) If “Ask
to Join Networks” is turned off, you must manually join a network to connect to the
Internet when a previously used network or a cellular data network isn’t available.
Forget a network, so iPhone doesn’t join it automatically: Choose Wi-Fi and tap
next to a network you’ve joined before. Then tap “Forget this Network.”
Join a closed Wi-Fi network: To join a Wi-Fi network that isn’t shown in the list of
scanned networks, choose Wi-Fi > Other, then enter the network name. If the network
requires a password, tap Security, tap the type of security the network uses, and enter
the password.
You must already know the network name, password, and security type to connect to
a closed network.
Some Wi-Fi networks may require you to enter or adjust additional settings, such as a
client ID or static IP address. Ask the network administrator which settings to use.
Adjust settings to connect to a Wi-Fi network: Choose Wi-Fi, then tap next to a
network.
VPN
This setting appears when you have VPN configured on iPhone, allowing you to turn
VPN on or off. See “Network” on page 143.
Notifications
This setting appears when you’ve installed an application from the App Store that uses
the Apple Push Notification service.
Push notifications are used by applications to alert you of new information, even when
the application isn’t running. Notifications differ depending upon the application, but
may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the application’s icon on
the Home screen.
You can turn notifications off if you don’t want to be notified or want to conserve
battery life.
Turn all notifications on or off: Tap Notifications and turn notifications on or off.
140 Chapter 19 SettingsTurn sounds, alerts, or badges on or off for an application: Tap Notifications, then
choose an application from the list and choose the types of notification you want to
turn on or off.
Carrier
This setting appears when you’re outside of your carrier’s network and other local
carrier data networks are available to use for your phone calls, visual voicemail, and
cellular network Internet connections. You can make calls only on carriers that have
roaming agreements with your carrier. Additional fees may apply. Roaming charges
may be billed to you by the carrier of the selected network, through your carrier.
For information about out-of-network coverage and how to enable roaming, contact
your carrier or go to your carrier’s website.
Select a carrier: Choose Carrier and select the network you want to use.
Once you select a network, iPhone uses only that network. If the network is
unavailable, “No service” appears on the iPhone screen and you can’t make or receive
calls or visual voicemail, or connect to the Internet via cellular data network. Set
Network Settings to Automatic to have iPhone select a network for you.
Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch
Switch between ring and silent mode: Flip the Ring/Silent switch on the side of
iPhone.
When set to silent, iPhone doesn’t play any ring, alert, or effects sounds. It does,
however, play alarms set using Clock.
Note: In some regions, the sound effects for Camera and Voice Memos are played even
if the Ring/Silent switch is set to silent.
Set whether iPhone vibrates when you get a call: Choose Sounds. To set whether
iPhone vibrates in silent mode, turn Vibrate under Silent on or off. To set whether
iPhone vibrates in ring mode, turn Vibrate under Ring on or off.
Adjust the ringer and alerts volume: Choose Sounds and drag the slider. Or, if no
song or video is playing and you aren’t on a call, use the volume buttons on the side of
iPhone.
Set the ringtone: Choose Sounds > Ringtone.
Set alert and effects sounds: Choose Sounds and turn items on or off under Ring .
When the Ring/Silent switch is set to ring, iPhone plays sounds for alerts and effects
that are turned on.
You can set iPhone to play a sound whenever you:
• Get a call
Chapter 19 Settings 141• Get a text message
• Get a voicemail message
• Get an email message
• Send an email message
• Have an appointment that you’ve set up to alert you
• Lock iPhone
• Type using the keyboard
Brightness
Screen brightness affects battery life. Dim the screen to extend the time before you
need to recharge iPhone, or use Auto-Brightness.
Adjust the screen brightness: Choose Brightness and drag the slider.
Set whether iPhone adjusts screen brightness automatically: Choose Brightness
and turn Auto-Brightness on or off. If Auto-Brightness is on, iPhone adjusts the screen
brightness for current light conditions using the built-in ambient light sensor.
Wallpaper
You see a wallpaper background picture when you unlock iPhone. You can select one
of the images that came with iPhone, or use a photo you’ve synced to iPhone from
your computer.
Set wallpaper: Choose Wallpaper and choose a picture.
General
The General settings include date and time, security, network, and other settings that
affect more than one application. This is also where you can find information about
your iPhone, and reset iPhone to its original state.
About
Choose General > About to get information about iPhone, including:
• Name of your phone network
• Number of songs, videos, and photos
• Total storage capacity
• Space available
• Software version
• Serial and model numbers
• Wi-Fi and Bluetooth addresses
142 Chapter 19 Settings• IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity) and ICCID (Integrated Circuit Card
Identifier, or Smart Card) numbers
• Modem firmware version of the cellular transmitter
• Legal information
• Regulatory information
Usage
Show battery percentage: Tap Usage and turn Battery Percentage on to display the
percentage of battery charge next to the battery icon in the upper-right corner of
iPhone (iPhone 3GS only).
See your usage statistics: Choose Usage. There, you can see:
• Usage—Amount of time iPhone has been awake and in use since the last full
charge. iPhone is awake whenever you’re using it—including making or receiving
phone calls, using email, sending or receiving text messages, listening to music,
browsing the web, or using any other iPhone features. iPhone is also awake while
performing background tasks such as automatically checking for and retrieving
email messages.
• Standby—Amount of time iPhone has been powered on since its last full charge,
including the time iPhone has been asleep.
• Current period call time and lifetime call time.
• Amount of data sent and received over the cellular data network.
Reset your usage statistics: Tap Usage and tap Reset Statistics to clear the data and
cumulative time statistics. The statistics for the amount of time iPhone has been
unlocked and in standby mode aren’t reset.
Network
Use the Network settings to configure a VPN (virtual private network) connection,
access Wi-Fi settings, or turn Data Roaming on or off.
Enable or disable 3G: Tap to turn 3G on or off.
Using 3G loads Internet data faster in some cases, but may decrease battery
performance. If you’re making a lot of phone calls, you may want to turn 3G off to
extend battery performance.
Turn Data Roaming on or off: Choose General > Network, then turn Data Roaming on
or off.
Data Roaming turns on Internet and visual voicemail access over a cellular data
network when you’re in an area not covered by your carrier’s network. For example,
when you’re traveling, you can turn off Data Roaming to avoid potential roaming
charges. By default, Data Roaming is turned off.
Chapter 19 Settings 143Turn Internet Tethering on or off: Choose General > Network > Internet Tethering,
then turn Internet Tethering on or off.
Internet Tethering lets you share iPhone’s Internet connection with a computer
connected via USB or Bluetooth (not available in all regions). Follow the onscreen
instructions to complete the setup. Additional fees may apply. See “Using iPhone as a
Modem” on page 42.
Add a new VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN > Add VPN
Configuration.
VPNs used within organizations allow you to communicate private information
securely over a non-private network. You may need to configure VPN, for example, to
access your work email on iPhone.
iPhone can connect to VPNs that use the L2TP, PPTP, or Cisco IPSec protocols. VPN
works over both Wi-Fi and cellular data network connections.
Ask your network administrator which settings to use. In most cases, if you’ve set up
VPN on your computer, you can use the same VPN settings for iPhone.
Once you’ve entered VPN settings, a VPN switch appears in the Settings menu that you
can use to turn VPN on or off.
VPN may also be automatically set up by a configuration profile. See “Installing
Configuration Profiles” on page 18.
Change a VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN and tap the
configuration you want to update.
Turn VPN on or off: Tap Settings and turn VPN on or off.
Delete a VPN configuration: Choose General > Network > VPN, tap the blue arrow
to the right of the configuration name, and tap Delete VPN at the bottom of the
configuration screen.
Bluetooth
iPhone can connect wirelessly to Bluetooth devices such as headsets, headphones, and
car kits for music listening and hands-free talking. See “Bluetooth Devices” on page 55.
Turn Bluetooth on or off: Choose General > Bluetooth and turn Bluetooth on or off.
Location Services
Location Services allows applications such as Maps Camera, and Compass to gather
and use data indicating your location. Location Services doesn’t correlate the data
it collects with your personally identifiable information. Your approximate location
is determined using available information from cellular network data, local Wi-Fi
networks (if you have Wi-Fi turned on), and GPS (iPhone 3G or later; GPS may not be
available in all locations).
144 Chapter 19 SettingsYou can turn Location Services off if you don’t want to use this feature. If you turn
Location Services off, you’ll be prompted to turn it on again the next time an
application tries to use this feature.
Turn Location Services on or off: Choose General > Location Services and turn
location services on or off.
To conserve battery life, turn Location Services off when you’re not using it.
Auto-Lock
Locking iPhone turns off the display to save your battery and to prevent unintended
operation of iPhone. You can still receive calls and text messages, and you can adjust
the volume and use the mic button on the iPhone stereo headset when listening to
music or on a call.
Set the amount of time before iPhone locks: Choose General > Auto-Lock and
choose a time.
Passcode Lock
By default, iPhone doesn’t require you to enter a passcode to unlock it.
Set a passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock and enter a 4-digit passcode, then
enter the passcode again to verify it. iPhone then requires you to enter the passcode
to unlock it or to display the passcode lock settings.
Turn passcode lock off: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and
tap Turn Passcode Off, then enter your passcode again.
Change the passcode: Choose General > Passcode Lock, enter your passcode, and
tap Change Passcode. Enter your passcode again, then enter and reenter your new
passcode.
If you forget your passcode, you must restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and
Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204.
Set how long before your passcode is required: Choose General > Passcode Lock and
enter your passcode. Tap Require Passcode, then select how long iPhone can be idle
before you need to enter a passcode to unlock it.
Turn Voice Dial on or off: Choose General > Passcode Lock and turn Voice Dial on
or off.
Erase data after ten failed passcode attempts: Choose General > Passcode Lock,
enter your passcode, and tap Erase Data to turn it on.
After ten failed passcode attempts, your settings are reset to their defaults and all your
information and media is erased:
• On iPhone 3GS: by removing the encryption key to the data (which is encrypted
using 256-bit AES encryption)
• On iPhone and iPhone 3G: by overwriting the data
Chapter 19 Settings 145Important: You can’t use iPhone while data is being overwritten. This can take up to
two hours or more, depending on the model and storage capacity of your iPhone.
(On iPhone 3GS, the removal of the encryption key is immediate.)
Restrictions
You can set restrictions for the use of some applications and for iPod content on
iPhone. For example, parents can restrict explicit music from being seen on playlists,
or turn off YouTube access entirely.
Turn on restrictions:
1 Choose General > Restrictions, then tap Enable Restrictions.
2 Enter a four-digit passcode.
3 Reenter the passcode.
Turn off restrictions: Choose General > Restrictions, then enter the passcode.
Tap Disable Restrictions, then reenter the passcode.
If you forget your passcode, you must restore your iPhone software from iTunes.
See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on page 204.
Set application restrictions: Set the restrictions you want by tapping individual
controls on or off. By default, all controls are on (not restricted). Tap an item to turn it
off and restrict its use.
Safari is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot use Safari
to browse the web or access web clips. Other third-party applications may allow web
browsing even if Safari is disabled.
YouTube is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen.
The iTunes Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot
preview, purchase, or download content.
The App Store is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot
install applications on iPhone.
Camera is disabled and its icon is removed from the Home screen. You cannot take
pictures.
Location data isn’t provided to applications.
Restrict purchases within applications: Turn In-App Purchases off. When enabled,
this feature allows you to purchase additional content or features within applications
downloaded from the App Store.
Set content restrictions: Tap Ratings For, then select a country from the list. You can
then set restrictions using that country’s ratings system for the following categories of
content:
146 Chapter 19 Settings• Music & Podcasts
• Movies
• TV Shows
• Apps
In the United States for example, to allow only movies rated PG or below, tap Movies,
then select PG from the list.
Note: Not all countries have rating systems.
Home
Choose General > Home to set preferences for double-clicking the Home button and
searching categories on the Spotlight page. You can set iPhone so that double-clicking
the Home button goes to the Home screen, Search, Phone Favorites, Camera, or iPod.
Set whether double-clicking the Home button shows iPod controls: Turn on iPod
Controls to display iPod controls when you’re playing music and double-click the
Home button. This feature works even when the display is turned off or iPhone is
locked.
Set what categories appear in search results: Tap Search Results. All search categories
in the list are selected by default. Tap an item to deselect it.
Set the order of search result categories: Tap Search Results, then drag next to a
search category to a new place in the list.
Date and Time
These settings apply to the time shown in the status bar at the top of the screen, and
in world clocks and calendars.
Set whether iPhone shows 24-hour time or 12-hour time: Choose General > Date &
Time and turn 24-Hour Time on or off. (Not available in all countries.)
Set whether iPhone updates the date and time automatically: Choose General >
Date & Time and turn Set Automatically on or off.
If iPhone is set to update the time automatically, it gets the correct time over the
cellular network, and updates it for the time zone you’re in.
Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling, iPhone
may not be able to automatically set the local time.
Set the date and time manually: Choose General > Date & Time and turn Set
Automatically off. Tap Time Zone and enter the name of a major city in your time zone.
Tap the “Date & Time” return button, then tap “Set Date & Time” and enter the date
and time.
Chapter 19 Settings 147Keyboard
Turn Auto-Correction on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Auto-Correction
on or off.
By default, if the default keyboard for the language you select has a dictionary, iPhone
automatically suggests corrections or completed words as you type.
Turn Auto-Capitalization on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn AutoCapitalization on or off.
By default, iPhone automatically capitalizes words after you type sentence-ending
punctuation or a return character.
Set whether caps lock is enabled: Choose General > Keyboard and turn Enable Caps
Lock on or off.
If caps lock is enabled and you double-tap the Shift key on the keyboard, all letters
you type are uppercase. The Shift key turns blue when caps lock is on.
Turn the “.” shortcut on or off: Choose General > Keyboard and turn “.” Shortcut on
or off.
The “.” shortcut lets you double-tap the space bar to enter a period followed by a space
when you’re typing. It’s on by default.
Turn international keyboards on or off: Choose General > Keyboards > International
Keyboards and turn on the keyboards you want.
If more than one keyboard is turned on, tap to switch keyboards when you’re
typing. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly active keyboard appears
briefly. See “International Keyboards” on page 35.
International
Use International settings to set the language for iPhone, turn keyboards for different
languages on or off, and set the date, time, and telephone number formats for your
region.
Set the language for iPhone: Choose General > International > Language, choose the
language you want to use, then tap Done.
Set the Voice Control language for iPhone: Choose General > International > Voice
Control, then choose the language you want to use (available only on iPhone 3GS).
Turn international keyboards on or off: Choose General > International > Keyboards,
and turn on the keyboards you want.
If more than one keyboard is turned on, tap to switch keyboards when you’re
typing. When you tap the symbol, the name of the newly active keyboard appears
briefly. See “International Keyboards” on page 35.
Set date, time, and telephone number formats: Choose General > International >
Region Format, and choose your region.
148 Chapter 19 SettingsThe Region Format also determines the language used for the days and months that
appear in native iPhone applications.
Accessibility
To turn on accessibility features (available only on iPhone 3GS), choose Accessibility
and choose the features you want. See Chapter 25,“Accessibility,” on page 182.
Resetting iPhone
Reset all settings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset All Settings.
All your preferences and settings are reset. Information, such as your contacts and
calendars, and media, such as your songs and videos, aren’t deleted.
Erase all content and settings: Connect iPhone to your computer or a power adapter.
Choose General > Reset and tap “Erase All Content and Settings.”
This resets all settings to their defaults and erases all your information and media:
• On iPhone 3GS: by removing the encryption key to the data (which is encrypted
using 256-bit AES encryption)
• On iPhone and iPhone 3G: by overwriting the data
Important: You can’t use iPhone while data is being overwritten. This can take up to
two hours or more, depending on the model and storage capacity of your iPhone.
(On iPhone 3GS, the removal of the encryption key is immediate.)
Reset network settings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Network Settings.
When you reset network settings, your list of previously used networks and VPN
settings not installed by a configuration profile are removed. Wi-Fi is turned off and
then back on, disconnecting you from any network you’re on. The Wi-Fi and “Ask to
Join Networks” settings are left turned on.
To remove VPN settings installed by a configuration profile, choose Settings > General
> Profile, then select the profile and tap Remove.
Reset the keyboard dictionary: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Keyboard
Dictionary.
You add words to the keyboard dictionary by rejecting words iPhone suggests as you
type. Tap a word to reject the correction and add the word to the keyboard dictionary.
Resetting the keyboard dictionary erases all words you’ve added.
Reset the Home screen layout: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Home Screen
Layout.
Reset the location warnings: Choose General > Reset and tap Reset Location
Warnings.
Chapter 19 Settings 149Location warnings are the requests made by applications (such as Camera, Compass,
and Maps) to use Location Services with those applications. iPhone stops presenting
the warning for an application the second time you tap OK. Tap Reset Location
Warnings to resume the warnings.
Mail, Contacts, Calendars
Use Mail, Contacts, Calendars settings to set up and customize accounts for iPhone:
• Microsoft Exchange
• MobileMe
• Google email
• Yahoo! Mail
• AOL
• Other POP and IMAP mail systems
• LDAP accounts for Contacts
• CalDAV or iCalendar (.ics) accounts for Calendars
Accounts
The Accounts section lets you set up accounts on iPhone. The specific settings that
appear depend on the type of account you’re setting up. Your service provider or
system administrator should be able to provide the information you need to enter.
For more information, see:
• “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16
• “Adding Contacts” on page 176
• “Subscribing to and Sharing Calendars” on page 93
Change an account’s settings: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account,
then make the changes you want.
Changes you make to an account’s settings on iPhone are not synced to your
computer, so you can configure your accounts to work with iPhone without affecting
the account settings on your computer.
Stop using an account: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account, then
turn Account off.
If an account is off, iPhone doesn’t display the account and doesn’t send or check email
from or sync other information with that account, until you turn it back on.
Adjust advanced settings: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an account,
then do one of the following:
150 Chapter 19 Settings• To set whether drafts, sent messages, and deleted messages are stored on iPhone or
remotely on your email server (IMAP accounts only), tap Advanced and choose Drafts
Mailbox, Sent Mailbox, or Deleted Mailbox.
If you store messages on iPhone, you can see them even when iPhone isn’t
connected to the Internet.
• To set how long before messages are removed permanently from Mail on iPhone, tap
Advanced and tap Remove, then choose a time: Never, or after one day, one week,
or one month.
• To adjust email server settings, tap Host Name, User Name, or Password under
Incoming Mail Server or Outgoing Mail Server. Ask your network administrator or
Internet service provider for the correct settings.
• To adjust SSL and password settings, tap Advanced. Ask your network administrator or
Internet service provider for the correct settings.
Delete an account from iPhone: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” choose an
account, then scroll down and tap Delete Account.
Deleting an account means you can no longer access the account with your iPhone.
All email and the contacts, calendar, and bookmark information synced with the
account are removed from iPhone. However, deleting an account doesn’t remove the
account or its associated information from your computer.
Fetch New Data
This setting lets you turn Push on or off for MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, Yahoo!
Mail, and any other push accounts you’ve configured on iPhone. Push accounts
automatically deliver new information to iPhone when new information appears
on the server (some delays may occur). You might want to turn Push off to suspend
delivery of email and other information, or to conserve battery life.
When Push is off, and with accounts that don’t support push, data can still be
fetched—that is, iPhone can check with the server and see if new information is
available. Use the Fetch New Data setting to determine how often data is requested.
For optimal battery life, don’t fetch too frequently.
Turn Push on: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data, then tap to turn
Push on.
Set the interval to fetch data: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Fetch New Data,
then choose how often you want to fetch data for all accounts.
To conserve battery life, fetch less frequently.
Setting Push to OFF or setting Fetch to Manually in the Fetch New Data screen
overrides individual account settings.
Chapter 19 Settings 151Mail
The Mail settings, except where noted, apply to all accounts you’ve set up on iPhone.
To turn alerts sounds for new or sent mail on or off, use the Sounds settings.
Set the number of messages shown on iPhone: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” >
Show, then choose a setting.
Choose to see the most recent 25, 50, 75, 100, or 200 messages. To download additional
messages when you’re in Mail, scroll to the bottom of your inbox and tap Load More
Messages.
Note: For Microsoft Exchange accounts, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and choose
the Exchange account. Tap “Mail days to sync” and choose the number of days of mail
you want to sync with the server.
Set how many lines of each message are previewed in the message list: Choose
“Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Preview, then choose a setting.
You can choose to see up to five lines of each message. That way, you can scan a list of
messages in a mailbox and get an idea of what each message is about.
Set a minimum font size for messages: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Minimum
Font Size, then choose Small, Medium, Large, Extra Large, or Giant.
Set whether iPhone shows To and Cc labels in message lists: Choose “Mail, Contacts,
Calendars,” then turn Show To/Cc Label on or off.
If Show To/Cc Label is on, To or Cc next to each message in a list indicates whether
the message was sent directly to you or you received a copy.
Set whether iPhone confirms that you want to delete a message: Choose “Mail,
Contacts, Calendars” and turn Ask Before Deleting on or off.
If Ask Before Deleting is on, to delete a message you must tap , then confirm by
tapping Delete.
Set whether iPhone automatically loads remote images: Choose “Mail, Contacts,
Calendars” and turn Load Remote Images on or off. If Load Remote Images is off, you
can load images manually when reading a message.
Set whether iPhone sends you a copy of every message you send: Choose “Mail,
Contacts, Calendars,” then turn Always Bcc Myself on or off.
Set the default email account: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Default Account,
then choose an account.
This setting determines which of your accounts a message is sent from when you
create a message from another iPhone application, such as sending a photo from
Photos or tapping the email address of a business in Maps. To send the message from
a different account, tap the From field in the message and choose another account.
Add a signature to your messages: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Signature,
then type a signature.
152 Chapter 19 SettingsYou can set iPhone to add a signature—your favorite quote, or your name, title, and
phone number, for example—to the bottom of every message you send.
Contacts
Set how contacts are sorted: Choose “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then under Contacts
tap Sort Order and do one of the following:
• To sort by first name first, tap First, Last.
• To sort by last name first, tap Last, First.
Set how contacts are displayed: Choose “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then under
Contacts tap Display Order and do one of the following:
• To show first name first, tap First, Last.
• To show last name first, tap Last, First.
Import contacts from a SIM: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Import SIM
Contacts.
The contact information on the SIM is imported to iPhone. If you have Contacts
enabled for both MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange, you’re prompted to choose which
account you want to add the SIM contacts to.
Calendar
Set alerts to sound when your receive meeting invitation: Choose “Mail, Contacts,
Calendars,” and under Calendar tap “New Invitation Alerts” to turn it on.
Set how far back in the past to show your calendar events on iPhone: Choose “Mail,
Contacts, Calendars” > Sync, then choose a period of time.
Turn on Calendar time zone support: Choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” > Time Zone
Support, then turn Time Zone Support on. Select a time zone for calendars by tapping
Time Zone and entering the name of a major city.
When Time Zone Support is on, Calendar displays event dates and times in the time
zone of the city you selected. When Time Zone Support is off, Calendar displays events
in the time zone of your current location as determined by the network time.
Important: Some carriers don’t support network time in all locations. If you’re traveling,
iPhone may not display events or sound alerts at the correct local time. To manually
set the correct time, see “Date and Time” on page 147.
Phone
Use Phone settings to forward incoming calls, turn call waiting on or off, change your
password, and other things. Additional fees may apply. Contact your carrier for pricing
and availability.
Chapter 19 Settings 153Calling from Abroad
Set iPhone to add the correct prefix when dialing from another country: In Settings,
tap Phone, then turn International Assist on. This lets you make calls to your home
country using the numbers in your contacts and favorites, without having to add a
prefix or your country code. International Assist works for U.S. telephone numbers only.
For more information, see “Using iPhone Abroad” on page 56.
Call Forwarding
You can set iPhone to forward incoming calls to another number. For example, you
may be on vacation and want all calls to go somewhere else. If you’re going to an area
with no cellular coverage, you may want to forward calls to a place where you can be
reached.
Set iPhone to forward your calls:
1 Choose Phone > Call Forwarding and turn Call Forwarding on.
2 Tap Forwarding To and enter the phone number you want calls forwarded to.
When Call Forwarding is on, an icon appears in the status bar the top of the screen.
You must be in range of the cellular network when you set iPhone to forward calls, or
calls won’t be forwarded.
Call Waiting
Activate or deactivate call waiting: Choose Phone > Call Waiting, then turn Call
Waiting on or off. If you turn call waiting off and someone calls you when you’re
already on the phone, the call goes to voicemail.
Show My Caller ID
Show or hide your caller ID: Choose Phone > Show My Caller ID, then turn Show My
Caller ID on or off.
If Show My Caller ID is off, people you call can’t see your name or phone number on
their phone.
Using iPhone with a Teletype (TTY) Machine
In some regions, Teletype (TTY) machines are used by deaf or hearing-impaired people
to communicate by typing and reading text. You can use iPhone with a TTY machine
if you have the iPhone TTY Adapter cable, available for purchase separately in many
countries. Go to www.apple.com/store (not available in all countries).
Connect iPhone to a TTY machine: Choose Phone, then turn TTY on. Then connect
iPhone to your TTY machine using the iPhone TTY Adapter.
For information about using a TTY machine, see the documentation that came with
the machine.
154 Chapter 19 SettingsFor more information about other accessibility features of iPhone, go
to Chapter 25,“Accessibility,” on page 182.
Changing Your Voicemail Password
A voicemail password helps prevent others from access your voicemail. You need to
enter the password only when you’re calling in to get your messages from another
phone. You won’t need to enter the password when using voicemail on iPhone.
Change your voicemail password: Choose Phone > Change Voicemail Password.
Locking Your SIM Card
You can lock your SIM card, so it can’t be used without a Personal Identification
Number (PIN). You must enter the PIN each time you turn iPhone off and turn it back
on again. Some carriers require a SIM PIN in order to use iPhone.
Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a
Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card
documentation or contact your carrier. Some cellular networks may not accept an
emergency call from iPhone if the SIM is locked.
Turn the SIM PIN on or off:
1 Choose Phone > SIM PIN, then turn SIM PIN on or off.
2 Enter your PIN to confirm. Use the PIN assigned by your carrier, or your carrier’s default
PIN.
Change the PIN for your SIM card:
1 Choose Phone > SIM PIN.
2 Turn SIM PIN on, then tap Change PIN.
3 Enter your current PIN, then enter your new PIN.
4 Enter your new PIN again to confirm, then tap Done.
Accessing Your Carrier’s Services
Depending on your carrier, you may be able to access some of your carrier’s services
directly from iPhone. For example, you may be able to check your bill balance, call
directory assistance, and view how many minutes you have left.
Access your carrier’s services: Choose Phone. Then scroll down and tap the button for
your carrier’s services.
When you request information such as your bill balance, your carrier may provide the
information in a text message. Contact your carrier to find out if there are any charges
for these services.
Chapter 19 Settings 155Safari
Safari settings let you select your Internet search engine, set security options, and for
developers, turn on debugging.
General
You can use Google or Yahoo! to perform Internet searches.
Select a search engine: Choose Safari > Search Engine and select the search engine
you want to use.
You can set Safari to automatically fill out web forms using contact information, names
and passwords you previously entered, or both.
Enable AutoFill: Choose Safari > AutoFill, then do one of the following:
• To use information from contacts, turn Use Contact Info on, then choose My Info and
select the contact you want to use.
Safari uses information from Contacts to fill in contact fields on web forms.
• To use information from names and passwords, turn Names & Passwords on.
When this feature is on, Safari remembers names and passwords of websites you
visit and automatically fills in the information when you revisit the website.
• To remove all AutoFill information, tap Clear All.
Security
By default, Safari is set to show features of the web, such as some movies, animation,
and web applications. You may wish to change security settings to help protect iPhone
from possible security risks on the Internet.
Change security settings: Choose Safari, then do one of the following:
• To set whether you’re warned when visiting potentially fraudulent websites, turn Fraud
Warning on or off.
Fraud warning protects you from potentially fraudulent Internet sites. When you
visit a suspicious site, Safari warns you about its suspect nature and doesn’t load the
page.
• To enable or disable JavaScript, turn JavaScript on or off.
JavaScript lets web programmers control elements of the page—for example, a
page that uses JavaScript might display the current date and time or cause a linked
page to appear in a new pop-up page.
• To enable or disable plug-ins, turn Plug-ins on or off. Plug-ins allow Safari to play some
types of audio and video files and to display Microsoft Word files and Microsoft
Excel documents.
• To block or allow pop-ups, turn Block Pop-ups on or off. Blocking pop-ups stops only
pop-ups that appear when you close a page or open a page by typing its address.
It doesn’t block pop-ups that open when you tap a link.
156 Chapter 19 Settings• To set whether Safari accepts cookies, tap Accept Cookies and choose Never, “From
visited,” or Always.
A cookie is a piece of information that a website puts on iPhone so the website can
remember you when you visit again. That way, webpages can be customized for you
based on information you may have provided.
Some pages won’t work correctly unless iPhone is set to accept cookies.
• To clear the history of webpages you’ve visited, tap Clear History.
• To clear all cookies from Safari, tap Clear Cookies.
• To clear the browser cache, tap Clear Cache.
The browser cache stores the content of pages so the pages open faster the next
time you visit them. If a page you open doesn’t show new content, clearing the
cache may help.
Developer
The debug console can help you resolve webpage errors. If it’s turned on, the console
appears automatically when a webpage error occurs.
Turn the debug console on or off: Choose Safari > Developer, and turn Debug
Console on or off.
Messages
Use Messages settings to adjust settings for SMS and MMS messages.
Note: MMS is available only on iPhone 3G or later. The MMS Messaging and Show
Subject Field settings doesn’t appear if MMS isn’t supported by your carrier.
Choose whether or not to see a preview of messages on the Home screen: Choose
Messages and turn Show Preview on or off.
Choose whether or not to repeat message alerts: Choose Messages and turn Repeat
Alert on or off. If you ignore a message alert, you’ll be alerted two more times.
Turn MMS messaging on or off: Choose Messages and turn MMS Messaging on or
off. If MMS messaging is turned off, you won’t be able to receive MMS file attachments
such as images or audio.
Show a subject line for messages you send or receive: Choose Messages and turn
Show Subject Field on.
Chapter 19 Settings 157iPod
Use iPod Settings to adjust settings for music and video playback on your iPod.
Music
The Music settings apply to songs, podcasts, and audiobooks.
Turn Shake to Shuffle on or off: Choose iPod, then turn Shake to Shuffle on or off.
When Shake to Shuffle is on, you can shake iPhone to turn shuffle on and immediately
change the currently playing song.
Set iTunes to play songs at the same sound level: In iTunes, choose iTunes >
Preferences if you’re using a Mac, or Edit > Preferences if you’re using a PC, then click
Playback and select Sound Check.
Set iPhone to use the iTunes volume settings (Sound Check): Choose iPod and turn
Sound Check on.
Use the equalizer to customize the sound on iPhone: Choose iPod > EQ and choose
a setting.
Set a volume limit for music and videos: Choose iPod > Volume Limit and drag the
slider to adjust the maximum volume.
Tap Lock Volume Limit to assign a code to prevent the setting from being changed.
Setting a volume limit only limits the volume of music (including podcasts and
audiobooks) and videos (including rented movies), and only when headphones,
earphones, or speakers are connected to the headset jack on iPhone.
WARNING: For important information about avoiding hearing loss, see the Important
Product Information Guide at www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Video
Video settings apply to video content, including rented movies. You can set where to
resume playing videos that you previously started, turn closed captioning on or off,
and set up iPhone to play videos on your TV.
Set where to resume playing: Choose iPod > Start Playing, then select whether
you want videos that you previously started watching to resume playing from the
beginning or where you left off.
Turn closed captioning on or off: Choose iPod and turn Closed Captioning on or off.
158 Chapter 19 SettingsTV Out
Use these settings to set up how iPhone plays videos on your TV. For more information
about using iPhone to play videos on your TV, see “Watching Videos on a TV” on
page 84.
Turn widescreen on or off: Choose iPod and turn Widescreen on or off.
Set TV signal to NTSC or PAL: Choose iPod > TV Signal and select NTSC or PAL.
NTSC and PAL are TV broadcast standards. NTSC displays 480i and PAL displays 576i.
Your TV might use either of these, depending on where you bought it. If you’re not
sure which to use, check the documentation that came with your TV.
Photos
Use Photos settings to specify how slideshows display your photos.
Set the length of time each slide is shown: Choose Photos > Play Each Slide For and
select the length of time.
Set a transition effect: Choose Photos > Transition and select a transition effect.
Set whether to repeat slideshows: Choose Photos and turn Repeat on or off.
Set photos to appear randomly or in order: Choose Photos and turn Shuffle on or off.
Store
Use Store settings to change or create an iTunes Store account. By default, the iTunes
account you’re signed in to when you sync iPhone with your computer appears in
Store settings. You can change accounts on iPhone to purchase music or applications
from another account. If you don’t have an iTunes account, you can create one in Store
settings.
Sign in to an account: Choose Store and tap Sign in, then enter your user name and
password.
View your iTunes Store account information: Choose Store and tap View Account,
then type your password and follow the onscreen instructions.
Sign in to a different account: Choose Store and tap Sign out, then tap Sign in and
enter your username and password.
Create a new account: Choose Store and tap Create New Account, then follow the
onscreen instructions.
Nike + iPod
Use Nike + iPod settings to activate and adjust settings for the Nike + iPod application
(iPhone 3GS only). See Chapter 24,“Nike + iPod,” on page 180.
Chapter 19 Settings 159iTunes Store
20
About the iTunes Store
You can search for, browse, preview, purchase, and download music, ringtones,
audiobooks, TV shows, movies, and music videos from the iTunes Store directly to
iPhone. You can listen to audio or watch video podcasts from the iTunes Store, either
by streaming them from the Internet or by downloading them directly to iPhone.
Note: The iTunes Store is not available in all regions, and iTunes Store content may
vary across regions.
To access the iTunes Store, iPhone must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting
to the Internet” on page 40.
To purchase songs or write reviews, you need an iTunes Store account. By default,
iPhone gets your iTunes Store account settings from iTunes. If you don’t have an iTunes
Store account, or if you want to make purchases from another iTunes Store account,
go to Settings > Store. See “Store” on page 159.
You don’t need an iTunes Store account to play or download podcasts.
160Finding Music, Videos, and More
Browse content: Tap Music, Videos, Ringtones, or Podcasts. Or tap More to browse
by Audiobooks, iTunes U, or Downloads. Choose a sorting method at the top of the
screen to browse by lists such as Featured, Top Tens, or Genres.
Search for content: Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words,
then tap Search. Search results are grouped by category, such as Movies, Albums,
or Podcasts.
Tap an item in a list to see more details on its Info screen. You can read reviews, write
your own review, or email a link about the item to a friend. Depending on the item,
you can also buy, download, or rent it.
Note: If you join a Starbucks Wi-Fi network in a select Starbucks location (available
in the U.S. only), the Starbucks icon appears at the bottom of the screen. You can
preview and purchase the currently playing and other songs from featured Starbucks
Collections.
Chapter 20 iTunes Store 161Purchasing Ringtones
You can preview and purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store and download them to
iPhone.
Note: Ringtones may not be available in all countries.
Browse for ringtones: Tap Ringtones or use Search to find a specific song in the
iTunes Store.
Preview a ringtone: Tap the item to preview. Double-tap the item for more
information.
Purchase and download ringtones:
1 Tap the price, then tap Buy Now.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK.
When you purchase a ringtone, you can set it as your default ringtone, or assign it to a
contact.
If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up.
Your purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made
within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again.
You can change your default ringtone or assign individual ringtones to contacts in
Settings > Sounds. See “Sounds and the Ring/Silent Switch” on page 141.
Ringtones you purchase on iPhone are synced to your iTunes library when you
connect iPhone to your computer. You can sync purchased ringtones to more than one
iPhone, if they’re all synced to the same account you used to purchase the ringtones.
You can’t edit ringtones you purchase from the iTunes Store.
You can create custom ringtones in Garage Band. For information, see Garage Band
Help.
Purchasing Music or Audiobooks
When you find a song, album, or audiobook you like in the iTunes Store, you can
purchase and download it to iPhone. You can preview an item before you purchase it
to make sure it’s what you want.
Preview a song or audiobook: Tap the item.
Purchase and download a song, album, or audiobook:
1 Tap the price, then tap Buy Now.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK.
If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up.
162 Chapter 20 iTunes StoreYour purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made
within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again.
An alert appears if you’ve previously purchased one or more songs from an album.
Tap Buy if you want to purchase the entire album including the songs you’ve already
purchased, or tap Cancel if you want to purchase any remaining songs individually.
Some albums include bonus content, which is downloaded to your iTunes library on
your computer. Not all bonus content is downloaded directly to iPhone.
Once you purchase an item it begins downloading and appears in the Downloads
screen. See “Checking Download Status” on page 165.
Purchased songs are added to a Purchased playlist on iPhone. If you delete the
Purchased playlist, iTunes creates a new one when you buy an item from the iTunes
Store.
You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to
make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit
appears with your account information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens.
Enter a redemption code: Tap Music, then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen
and follow the onscreen instructions.
Purchasing or Renting Videos
When you find a movie, TV show, or music video you like in the iTunes Store, you
can purchase and download it to iPhone. You can purchase movies and TV shows in
standard (480p) or high definition (720p) format.
When you purchase a high-definition video on iPhone, a standard definition version
compatible with iPod and iPhone immediately downloads for viewing. The high
definition version appears in iTunes on your computer in the Downloads queue.
You must be signed in to your iTunes Store account on your computer to view and
download items from the Downloads queue.
Rented movies are available in standard definition only (not available in all regions).
See “Watching Rented Movies” on page 83.
Preview a video: Tap Preview.
Purchase or rent a video:
1 Tap Buy or Rent.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK.
If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up.
Your purchase is charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional purchases made
within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your password again.
Chapter 20 iTunes Store 163Once you purchase an item it begins downloading and appears in the Downloads
screen. Rented movies won’t begin playing until the download completes. See
“Checking Download Status” on page 165.
Purchased videos are added to a Purchased playlist on iPhone. If you delete the
Purchased playlist, iTunes creates a new one the next time you buy an item from the
iTunes Store.
You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to
make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit
appears with your account information at the bottom of most iTunes Store screens.
Enter a redemption code: Tap Music, then tap Redeem at the bottom of the screen
and follow the onscreen instructions.
Streaming or Downloading Podcasts
You can listen to audio podcasts or watch video podcasts streamed over the Internet
from the iTunes Store. You can also download audio and video podcasts to iPhone.
Podcasts you download to iPhone are synced to your iTunes library when you connect
iPhone to your computer.
Tap Podcasts to browse podcasts in the iTunes Store. To see a list of episodes, tap a
podcast. Video podcasts are indicated by the icon.
Stream a podcast: Tap the podcast title.
Download a podcast: Tap the Free button, then tap Download. Downloaded podcasts
appear in the Podcasts list in iPod.
Listen to or watch a podcast you’ve downloaded: In iPod, tap Podcasts at the bottom
of the screen (you may need to tap More first), then tap the podcast. Video podcasts
also appear in your list of videos.
Get more episodes of the podcast you’ve downloaded: In the Podcasts list in iPod,
tap the podcast, then tap Get More Episodes.
Delete a podcast: In the Podcasts list in iPod, swipe left or right over the podcast, then
tap Delete.
164 Chapter 20 iTunes StoreChecking Download Status
You can check the Downloads screen to see the status of in-progress and scheduled
downloads, including purchases you’ve pre-ordered.
See the status of items being downloaded: Tap Downloads.
To pause a download, tap .
If a download is interrupted, iPhone starts the download again the next time it has an
Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the
download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and
signed in to the same iTunes account).
See the status of pre-ordered items: Tap Downloads.
Pre-ordered items appear in a list until the date the item is released. Tap the item for
release date information. Once the item is available for download, a download icon
appears next to the download.
Download a pre-ordered item: Tap the item, then tap .
Pre-ordered items don’t download automatically when they’re released. Return to the
Downloads screen to begin the download.
Syncing Purchased Content
iTunes automatically syncs everything you’ve downloaded or purchased on iPhone to
your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. This lets you access
the downloads on your computer and provides a backup if you delete purchased
content from iPhone.
Purchased content is synced to the “Purchased on ” playlist.
iTunes creates the playlist if it doesn’t exist. iTunes also copies your purchases to the
Purchased playlist that iTunes uses for purchases you make on your computer, if that
playlist exists and is set to sync with iPhone.
Downloaded podcasts are synced to the Podcast list in your iTunes library.
Changing the Browse Buttons
You can replace the Music, Podcasts, Videos, and Search buttons at the bottom of the
screen with ones you use more frequently. For example, if you download audiobooks
often but don’t watch many videos, you could replace the Videos button with
Audiobooks.
Chapter 20 iTunes Store 165Change the browse buttons: Tap More and tap Edit, then drag a button to the
bottom of the screen, over the button you want to replace.
You can drag the buttons at the bottom of the screen left or right to rearrange them.
When you finish, tap Done.
When you’re browsing, tap More to access the browse buttons that aren’t visible.
Viewing Account Information
To view your iTunes Store account information on iPhone, tap your account (at the
bottom of most iTunes Store screens). Or go to Settings > Store and tap View Account.
You must be signed in to view your account information. See “Store” on page 159.
Verifying Purchases
You can use iTunes on your computer to verify that all the music, videos, applications,
and other items you bought from the iTunes Store or App Store are in your iTunes
library. You might want to do this if a download was interrupted.
Verify your purchases:
1 Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet.
2 In iTunes, choose Store > Check for Available Downloads.
3 Enter your iTunes Store account ID and password, then click Check.
Purchases not yet on your computer are downloaded.
The Purchased playlist displays your purchases. However, because you can add or
remove items in this list, it might not be accurate. To see all of your purchases, sign in
to your account, choose Store > View My Account, and click Purchase History.
166 Chapter 20 iTunes StoreApp Store
21
About the App Store
You can search for, browse, review, purchase, and download applications from the App
Store directly to iPhone. Applications you download and install from the App Store on
iPhone are backed up to your iTunes library the next time you sync iPhone with your
computer. You can also install applications you’ve purchased or downloaded through
iTunes on your computer when you sync with iPhone.
Note: The App Store is not available in all regions.
To use the App Store, iPhone must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to
the Internet” on page 40. You also need an iTunes Store account (not available in some
countries) to download applications. By default, iPhone gets your iTunes Store account
settings from iTunes. If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, or if you want to make
purchases from another iTunes Store account, go to Settings > Store. See “Store” on
page 159.
Browsing and Searching
Browse the featured selections to see new, notable, or recommended applications,
or browse Top 25 to see the most popular applications. If you’re looking for a specific
application, use Search.
167Browse applications: Tap Featured, Categories, or Top 25. Choose a category, or
choose a sorting method at the top of the screen to browse by lists such as New,
What’s Hot, Genius, Top Paid, or Top Free.
Browse using Genius: Tap Genius to see a list of recommended apps based on what’s
already in your app collection. To turn Genius on, follow the onscreen instructions.
Genius is a free service, but it requires an iTunes Store account.
Search for applications: Tap Search, tap the search field and enter one or more words,
then tap Search.
168 Chapter 21 App StoreInfo Screen
Tap any application in a list to see more information, such as the application’s price,
screenshots, ratings, and other information.
If you’ve already installed the application, “Installed” appears instead of the price on
the Info screen.
Email a link to the application’s Info page in iTunes: Tap “Tell a Friend” near the
bottom of the Info screen.
View screenshots: Swipe left or right over a screenshot to view additional screenshot
pages. Double-tap to zoom in.
Get ratings and read reviews: Tap Ratings near the bottom of the Info screen.
Report a problem: Tap “Report a Problem” near the bottom of the Info screen. Select a
problem from the list or type optional comments, then tap Report.
Chapter 21 App Store 169Downloading Applications
When you find an application you want in the App Store, you can purchase and
download it to iPhone. If the application is free, you can download it without charge
after providing your iTunes account information.
Once you download an application, it’s immediately installed on iPhone.
Purchase and download an application:
1 Tap the price (or tap Free), then tap Buy Now.
2 Sign in to your account as requested, then tap OK.
If you don’t have an iTunes Store account, tap Create New Account to set one up.
Downloads for purchase are charged to your iTunes Store account. For additional
downloads made within the next fifteen minutes, you don’t have to enter your
password again.
Some applications allow you to make purchases within the application. You can restrict
in-app purchases in Settings. See “Restrictions” on page 146.
Some applications use push notifications to alert you of new information, even when
the application isn’t running. Notifications differ depending upon the application, but
may include text or sound alerts, and a numbered badge on the application’s icon on
the Home screen. See “Notifications” on page 140.
You can redeem iTunes Store gift cards, gift certificates, or other promotional codes to
make purchases. When you’re signed in to your account, your remaining store credit
appears with your account information at the bottom of most App Store screens.
Enter a redemption code: Tap Redeem near the bottom of the Featured screen, then
follow the onscreen instructions.
See the status of downloading applications: After you begin downloading an
application, its icon appears on the Home screen and shows a progress indicator.
If a download is interrupted, iPhone starts the download again the next time it has an
Internet connection. Or, if you open iTunes on your computer, iTunes completes the
download to your iTunes library (if your computer is connected to the Internet and
signed in to the same iTunes account).
170 Chapter 21 App StoreDeleting Applications
You can delete applications you’ve installed from the App Store. If you delete an
application, data associated with the application will no longer be available to iPhone,
unless you reinstall the application and restore its data from a backup.
You can reinstall an application and restore its data as long as you backed up iPhone
with iTunes on your computer. (If you try to delete an application that hasn’t been
backed up to your computer, an alert appears.) To retrieve the application data,
you must restore iPhone from a backup containing the data. See “Restoring from a
Backup” on page 203.
Delete an App Store application:
1 Touch and hold any application icon on the Home screen until the icons start to
wiggle.
2 Tap in the corner of the application you want to delete.
3 Tap Delete, then press the Home button to save your arrangement.
When you delete an application, its data is no longer accessible via the iPhone user
interface, but it isn’t erased from your iPhone. For information about erasing all
content and settings, see “Erase All Content and Settings” in iPhone settings.
See “Resetting iPhone” on page 149.
Writing Reviews
You can write and submit your own application reviews directly on iPhone.
Write a review:
1 Tap Ratings near the bottom of the Info screen.
2 On the Reviews screen, tap “Write a Review.”
3 Select the number of stars (1–5) for your rating of the application, and enter your
nickname, a title for the review, and optional review comments. If you’ve written
reviews before, the nickname field is already filled in. Otherwise, you’re asked to create
a reviewer nickname.
4 Tap Send.
You must be signed in to your iTunes Store account and have purchased or
downloaded the item in order to submit reviews.
Chapter 21 App Store 171Updating Applications
Whenever you access the App Store, it checks for updates to applications you’ve
installed. The App Store also automatically checks for updates every week. The App
Store icon shows the total number of application updates available.
If an update is available and you access the App Store, the Updates screen appears
immediately. Application updates are downloaded and automatically installed when
you choose to update them. Application upgrades are new releases that can be
purchased or downloaded through the App Store on iPhone or the iTunes Store on
your computer.
Update an application:
1 At the bottom of the screen, tap Updates.
2 Tap an application to see more information about the update.
3 Tap Update.
Update all applications: At the bottom of the screen, tap Updates, then tap
Update All.
If you try to update an application purchased from a different iTunes Store account,
you’re prompted for that account’s ID and password in order to download the update.
Syncing Purchased Applications
iTunes automatically syncs applications you’ve downloaded or purchased on iPhone
to your iTunes library when you connect iPhone to your computer. This lets you access
the downloads on your computer and provides a backup if you delete applications
from iPhone.
Downloaded applications are backed up the next time you sync with iTunes.
Afterwards, only application data is backed up when you sync with iTunes.
Applications are synced to the Applications list in your iTunes library. iTunes creates
the list if it doesn’t exist.
172 Chapter 21 App StoreCompass
22
Getting Compass Readings
The built-in compass (iPhone 3GS only) shows which direction you’re facing, along
with the geographical coordinates of your current location. You can choose magnetic
north, or have Compass adjust the declination to show true north.
Important: The accuracy of digital compass headings may be negatively affected by
magnetic or other environmental interference, including interference caused by the
close proximity of the magnets contained in the iPhone earbuds. The digital compass
should only be used for basic navigation assistance and should not be solely relied on
to determine precise locations, proximity, distance, or direction.
The compass needs to be calibrated the first time you use it, and may need to be
calibrated occasionally after that. iPhone alerts you whenever calibration is needed.
Calibrate iPhone: Wave iPhone in a figure eight. You may be asked to move away
from a source of interference.
173See which way you’re facing: Hold iPhone level to the ground. The compass needle
rotates to point north. Your current direction appears at the top of the screen.
The coordinates of your current location are displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Switch between true north and magnetic north: Tap and tap the setting
you want.
Compass and Maps
The icon at the bottom of the Compass screen lets you find your current location
in Maps. Maps also takes advantage of the built-in compass to show which way you’re
facing.
See your current location in Maps: Tap . Maps opens and indicates your current
location with a blue marker.
174 Chapter 22 CompassShow which way you’re facing: In Maps, tap again. (The icon changes to .)
The angle shows the accuracy of the compass reading—the smaller the angle,
the greater the accuracy.
See “Finding and Viewing Locations” on page 114.
Chapter 22 Compass 175Contacts
23
About Contacts
Contact makes it easy to call, email, and text your friends and associates with iPhone.
You can add contacts directly on iPhone, or sync contacts from applications on your
computer, or with your MobileMe, Microsoft Exchange, Google, or Yahoo! accounts.
You can open Contacts directly from the Home screen, or from within the Phone
application.
Adding Contacts
You can add contacts to iPhone in the following ways:
• In iTunes, sync contacts from Google or Yahoo!, or sync with applications on your
computer (see “Syncing” on page 11)
• Set up MobileMe or Microsoft Exchange accounts on iPhone, with Contacts enabled
(see “Setting Up Accounts” on page 16)
• Install a profile that sets up an Exchange account, with Contacts enabled
(see “Installing Configuration Profiles” on page 18)
• Set up an LDAP account on iPhone
• Enter contacts directly on iPhone
• Import contacts from a SIM
The number of contacts you can add is limited only by the amount of memory on
iPhone.
176Set up an LDAP account:
1 In Settings, tap “Mail Contacts, Calendars,” then tap Add Account.
2 Tap Other, then tap Add LDAP Account.
3 Enter your LDAP account information and tap Next to verify the account.
4 Tap Save.
When you set up an LDAP account, you can view and search for contacts on your
company or organization’s LDAP server. The server appears as a new group in Contacts.
Since LDAP contacts aren’t downloaded to iPhone, you must have an Internet
connection to view them. Check with your system administrator for specific account
settings and other requirements (such as VPN).
Import contacts from another phone’s SIM: In Settings, tap “Mail, Contacts,
Calendars,” then tap Import SIM Contacts.
The contact information on the SIM is imported to iPhone. If you have Contacts
enabled for both MobileMe and Microsoft Exchange, you’re prompted to choose which
account you want to add the SIM contacts to.
Important: iPhone doesn’t store contacts on its SIM.
Searching Contacts
You can search first, last, and company names in your contacts on iPhone. If you have
a Microsoft Exchange account set up on iPhone, you may also be able to search your
enterprise Global Address List (GAL) for contacts in your organization. If you have an
LDAP account set up on iPhone, you can search contacts on your organization’s LDAP
server.
When you enter search information, contacts with matching information appear
immediately as you start to type.
Search contacts: In Contacts, tap the search field at the top of any list of contacts
and enter a first, last, or company name. (To scroll quickly to the top of the list, tap the
status bar.)
Search a GAL: Tap Groups, tap Directories at the bottom of the list, then enter a first,
last, or company name.
You can’t edit GAL contacts or save them to iPhone.
Search an LDAP server: Tap Groups, tap the LDAP server name, then enter a first, last,
or company name.
You can’t edit LDAP contacts or save them to iPhone.
Chapter 23 Contacts 177Managing Contacts on iPhone
Add a contact on iPhone: Tap Contacts and tap .
Delete a contact In Contacts, choose a contact, than tap Edit. Scroll
down and tap Delete Contact.
Add a contact from the keypad Tap Keypad, enter a number, then tap .
Tap Create New Contact and enter the caller’s
information, or tap “Add to Existing Contact” and
choose a contact.
Edit contact information In Contacts, choose a contact, then tap Edit. To
add an item, tap . To delete an item, tap .
Enter a pause in a number Tap , then tap Pause. One or more pauses
may be required by a phone system before
dialing an extension, for example. Pauses appear
as commas when the number is saved.
Add a recent caller’s phone number to your
contacts
Tap Recents and tap next to the number.
Then tap Create New Contact, or tap “Add to
Existing Contact” and choose a contact.
Assign a photo to a contact:
1 Tap Contacts and choose a contact.
2 Tap Edit and tap Add Photo, or tap the existing photo.
3 Tap Take Photo to use the camera. Or tap Choose Existing Photo and choose a photo.
4 Drag and scale the photo as desired.
5 Tap Set Photo.
178 Chapter 23 ContactsUse a contact’s info screen: Tap Contacts and choose a contact. Then tap an item.
Visit the website
Call
Send an email
Send a text message
Add a phone
number to your
favorites list
See a map and
get directions
Note: The Contacts screen shown here includes the buttons across the bottom that
are available when you view Contacts from within the Phone application. These
buttons don’t appear if you open Contacts directly from the Home screen.
A star next to a phone number means the number is in your favorites list.
See your own phone number: Tap Contacts and scroll to the top of the list.
(Not available in all regions.)
Chapter 23 Contacts 179Nike + iPod
24
Activating Nike + iPod
When activated in Settings, the Nike + iPod application appears on the Home screen
(iPhone 3GS only). With a Nike + iPod Sensor (sold separately), the Nike + iPod
application provides audible feedback on your speed, distance, time elapsed, and
calories burned during a running or walking workout. When iPhone is connected to
iTunes on your computer, you can send your workout information to Nikeplus.com,
where you can track your progress, set goals, and participate in challenges.
See the Nike + iPod documentation for information about activating and using
Nike + iPod.
Turn Nike + iPod on or off: In Settings, choose Nike + iPod and turn Nike + iPod on or
off. When Nike + iPod is turned on, its icon appears on the Home screen.
180Additional Nike + iPod Settings
In Settings, choose Nike + iPod to activate and adjust settings for the Nike + iPod
application.
Choose a PowerSong: Choose PowerSong and select a song from your music library.
Turn spoken feedback on or off: Choose Spoken Feedback and select a male or
female voice to accompany your workout, or Off to turn off spoken feedback.
Set a distance preference: Choose Distance, then select Miles or Kilometers to
measure your workout distance.
Set your weight: Choose Weight, then flick to enter your weight.
Set the screen orientation: Choose Lock Screen, then select a screen orientation
preference.
Set up the Nike + iPod Sensor: Choose Sensor, then follow the onscreen instructions
to set up your sensor (sold separately).
You can use a Nike+ compatible remote (sold separately) to control Nike + iPod
wirelessly. Before using a remote for the first time, you must set it up on iPhone.
Set up the Nike + iPod remote: Choose Remote, then follow the onscreen instructions
to set up your remote (third-party product sold separately).
Chapter 24 Nike + iPod 181Accessibility
25
Accessibility Features
In addition to the many features that make iPhone easy to use for everyone,
accessibility features (available only on iPhone 3GS) are designed to make it easier
for users with visual, auditory, or other physical disabilities to use iPhone. These
accessibility features include:
• VoiceOver
• Zoom
• White on Black
• Mono Audio
• Speak Auto-text
With the exception of VoiceOver, these accessibility features work with all iPhone
applications, including third-party applications you download from the App Store.
VoiceOver works with all applications that come preinstalled on iPhone. In addition,
third-party developers can use the iPhone Accessibility API to make their applications
accessible for VoiceOver users.
For more information about the accessibility features of iPhone, go to
www.apple.com/accessibility.
Each accessibility feature can be turned on or off in the Accessibility settings on
iPhone. You can also turn accessibility features on or off in iTunes when iPhone is
connected to your computer.
Turn accessibility features on or off in iTunes:
1 Connect iPhone to your computer.
2 In iTunes, select iPhone in the sidebar.
3 In the Summary pane, click Configure Universal Access in the Options section.
1824 Select the accessibility features that you want to use and click OK.
VoiceOver
VoiceOver describes aloud what appears onscreen, so that you can use iPhone without
seeing it. VoiceOver speaks in the language specified in International settings, which
may be influenced by the Region Locale setting.
Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages.
VoiceOver tells you about each element on the screen as it’s selected. When an
element is selected, it’s enclosed by a black rectangle (for the benefit of those who can
see the screen) and VoiceOver speaks the name or describes the item. The enclosing
rectangle is referred to as the VoiceOver cursor. If text is selected, VoiceOver reads the
text. If a control (such as a button or switch) is selected and Speak Hints is turned on,
VoiceOver may tell you the action of the item or provide instructions for you—for
example, “double-tap to open.”
When you go to a new screen, VoiceOver plays a sound and automatically selects and
speaks the first element of the screen (typically, the item in the upper-left corner).
VoiceOver also lets you know when the display changes to landscape or portrait,
and when the screen is locked or unlocked.
Setting Up VoiceOver
Important: VoiceOver changes the gestures used to control iPhone. Once VoiceOver
is turned on, you have to use VoiceOver gestures to operate iPhone—even to turn
VoiceOver off again to resume standard operation.
Turn VoiceOver on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver and
tap the VoiceOver On/Off switch.
You can also set Triple-click Home to turn VoiceOver on or off. See “Triple-click
Home” on page 191.
Note: You cannot use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time.
Chapter 25 Accessibility 183Turn spoken hints on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver,
and tap the Speak Hints On/Off switch. Spoken hints are turned on by default.
Set the VoiceOver speaking rate: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility >
VoiceOver, and adjust the Speaking Rate slider.
You can choose what kind of feedback you get when you type. You can set VoiceOver
to speak characters, words, both, or nothing. If you choose to hear both characters and
words, VoiceOver speaks each character as you type it, then speaks the whole word
when you finish it by entering a space or punctuation.
Choose typing feedback: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver >
Typing Feedback, then choose Characters, Words, Characters and Words, or Nothing.
Change the language spoken by VoiceOver: In Settings, choose General >
International > Language, then select a language and tap OK. Some languages may be
influenced by the Region Local setting. In Settings, choose General > International >
Region Format and select the format.
Note: VoiceOver isn’t available in all languages.
Practice gestures: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > VoiceOver > Practice
Gestures, then tap Practice VoiceOver Gestures. Practice the gestures described in
“VoiceOver Gestures,” below. When you’re finished practicing, tap Done.
VoiceOver Gestures
When VoiceOver is turned on, the standard touchscreen gestures have different effects.
These and some additional gestures allow you to move around the screen and to
control the individual elements when they’re selected. VoiceOver gestures include
using two and three fingers to tap or flick. For best results when using two- and threefinger gestures, relax and let your fingers touch the screen with some space between
your fingers.
You can use standard gestures when VoiceOver is turned on, by double-tapping and
holding your finger on the screen. A series of tones indicates that normal gestures
are in force. They remain in effect until you lift your finger. Then VoiceOver gestures
resume.
You can use many different techniques to enter VoiceOver gestures. For example, you
can enter a two-finger tap using two fingers from one hand, or one finger from each
hand. You can also use your thumbs. Try different techniques to discover which works
best for you.
If your gestures don’t work, try quicker movements, especially for double-tap and
flicking gestures. To flick, try quickly brushing the screen with your finger or fingers.
You can practice VoiceOver gestures in Settings: choose General > Accessibility >
VoiceOver > Practice Gestures and tap the Practice VoiceOver Gestures button.
Here’s a summary of key VoiceOver gestures:
184 Chapter 25 AccessibilityNavigate and Read
• Tap: Speak item.
• Flick right or left: Select the next or previous item.
• Flick up or down: Depends on the Rotor Control setting. See “Rotor Control” on
page 185.
• Two-finger tap: Stop speaking the current item.
• Two-finger flick up: Read all from top of screen.
• Two-finger flick down: Read all from current position.
• Three-finger flick up or down: Scroll one page at a time.
• Three-finger flick right or left: Go to the next or previous page (such as the Home
screen, Stocks, or Safari).
• Three-finger tap: Speak the scroll status (which page or rows are visible).
Select and Activate
• Double-tap: Activate selected item.
• Touch an item with one finger, tap the screen with another finger (“split-tapping”):
Activate item.
• Double-tap and hold (1 second) + standard gesture: Use a standard gesture.
The double-tap and hold gesture tells iPhone to interpret the subsequent gesture as
standard. For example, you can double-tap and hold, then without lifting your finger,
drag your finger to slide a switch.
• Two-finger double tap: Answer or end a call. Play or pause in iPod, YouTube, Voice
Memos, or Photos. Take a picture (Camera). Start or pause recording in Camera or
Voice Memos. Start or stop the stopwatch.
• Three-finger double tap: Mute or unmute VoiceOver.
• Three-finger triple tap: Turn the display on or off.
Do single-finger flicking gestures quickly, to distinguish them from dragging gestures.
Rotor Control
The rotor control is an invisible dial that you can use to change the results of up and
down flick gestures when VoiceOver is turned on.
Operate the rotor: Rotate two fingers on the iPhone screen to “turn” the dial to
choose between options.
Chapter 25 Accessibility 185The effect of the rotor depends on what you’re doing. For example, if you’re reading
text in an email you received, you can use the rotor to switch between hearing text
spoken word-by-word or character-by-character when you flick up or down. If you’re
browsing a webpage, use the rotor to choose whether you hear text word-by-word
or character-by-character, hear just the headers, hear just the links (all of them, visited
links, or links not yet visited), hear form elements, or hear descriptions of images. In
other words, you can use the rotor setting to hear all the text, or to jump from one
element to another of a certain type, such as headers or links.
Rotor options depend on the context of what you’re doing.
Reading text
• Select and hear text character-by-character
• Select and hear text word-by-word
Browsing a webpage
• Select and hear text character-by-character
• Select and hear text word-by-word
• Select and hear headers
• Select and hear links
• Select and hear form controls
• Select and hear visited links
• Select and hear links not visited
• Select and hear images
• Select and hear static text
• Zoom in or out
Entering text
• Move insertion point and hear text character-by-character
• Move insertion point and text word-by-word
• Text editing functions
• Auto-text
Using a control (such as the spinner for setting the time in Clock)
• Select and hear value character-by-character
• Select and hear value word-by-word
• Adjust the value of the control object
186 Chapter 25 AccessibilityUsing VoiceOver
Select items on the screen: Drag your finger over the screen. VoiceOver identifies
each element as you touch it. You can also move systematically from one element to
the next by flicking left or right with a single finger. Elements are selected from leftto-right, top-to-bottom. Flick right to go to the next element, or flick left to go to the
previous element.
“Tap” a selected item when VoiceOver is turned on: Double-tap anywhere on the
screen.
Speak the text of an element, character by character or word by word: With the
element selected, flick up or down with one finger. Flick down to read the next
character, or flick up to read the previous character. Twist the rotor control to read
word by word.
Adjust a slider: With a single finger, flick up to increase the setting or down to
decrease the setting. VoiceOver announces the setting as you adjust it.
Scroll a list or area of the screen: Flick up or down with three fingers. Flick down
to page down through the list, or flick up to page up through the list. When paging
through a list, VoiceOver speaks the range of items displayed (for example, “showing
rows 5 through 10”).
You can also scroll continuously through a list, instead of paging through it. Doubletap and hold. When you hear a series of tones, you can move your finger up or down
to scroll the list. Continuous scrolling stops when you lift your finger.
Use a list index: Some lists have an alphabetical index along the right side. The index
cannot be selected by flicking between elements; you must touch the index directly
to select it. With the index selected, flick up or down to move along the index. You can
also double-tap, then slide your finger up or down.
Unlock iPhone: Select the Unlock switch, then double-tap the screen.
Rearrange the Home screen: On the Home screen select the icon you want to move.
Double-tap and hold, then drag the icon. VoiceOver speaks the row and column
position as your drag the icon. Release the icon when it’s in the location you want. You
can drag additional icons. Drag an item to the left or right edge of the screen to move
it to another page of the Home screen. When you’re finished rearranging the icons,
press the Home button.
Chapter 25 Accessibility 187Mute VoiceOver Double-tap with three fingers. Double-tap again
with three fingers to turn speaking back on.
To turn off only VoiceOver sounds, set the
Ring/Silent switch to Silent.
Stop speaking an item Tap once with two fingers. Tap again with
two fingers to resume speaking. Speaking
automatically resumes when you select
another item.
Turn off the display while you use VoiceOver Triple-tap with three fingers. Triple-tap again with
three fingers to turn on the display again.
Speak entire screen from the top Flick up with two fingers.
Speak from current item to bottom of screen Flick down with two fingers.
Status information about iPhone can be heard by touching the top of the screen.
This can include the time, battery life, Wi-Fi signal strength, and more.
Entering and Editing Text
When you select a text field with VoiceOver, you can use the onscreen keyboard to
enter text. You can use the editing features of iPhone to cut, copy, or paste in the
text field.
Note: Safari doesn’t support copying webpage content. The editing features work only
in editable text fields.
Enter text:
1 Use VoiceOver to select an editable text field, then double tap to display the insertion
point and bring up the onscreen keyboard. If the field already contains text, the
insertion point is placed at the beginning or at the end of the text. Double-tap again
to place the insertion point at the opposite end. VoiceOver tells you the position of the
insertion point.
The insertion point and onscreen keyboard may appear automatically when you select
a text field. VoiceOver announces when you’re in editing mode.
2 To type, select a key on the keyboard by flicking left or right, then double-tap to
enter the character. Or drag you finger around the keyboard to select a key, and,
while holding the key with one finger, tap the screen with another finger to enter the
character. VoiceOver speaks the key when it’s selected, and again when it’s entered.
To enter an accented character, double-tap and hold until you hear a sound that
indicates the alternate characters have appeared, then drag left or right to select and
hear the choices. Release your finger to enter the current selection.
188 Chapter 25 AccessibilityMove the insertion point: Flick up or down to move the insertion point forward or
backward in the text. VoiceOver makes a sound when the insertion point moves, and
speaks the character that the insertion point moved across. Use the rotor to choose
whether you want to move the insertion point by character or by word.
Select text: Use the rotor to choose edit. Flick up or down to choose between the
Select and Select All functions, then double tap. If you chose Select, the word closest
to the insertion point is selected when you double-tap. If you chose Select All, the
entire text is selected.
Pinch to increase or decrease the selection.
Cut, Copy, or Paste: Make sure the rotor is set to edit. With text selected, flick up or
down to choose Cut, Copy, or Paste, then double-tap.
Undo: Shake iPhone, flick left or right to choose the action to undo, then double-tap.
Using Maps
With VoiceOver, you can zoom in or out, select pins, and get information about
locations.
Zoom in or out: Use the rotor to choose zoom mode, then flick up or down to zoom
in or out.
Select a pin: Touch a pin, or flick left or right to move from one item to another.
Get information about a location: With a pin selected, double-tap to display the
information flag. Flick left or right to select the flag, then double-tap to display the
information page.
Editing Videos and Voice Memos
You can use VoiceOver gestures to trim Camera videos and Voice Memo recordings.
Trim a voice memo: On the Voice Memos screen, select the button to the right of the
memo you want to trim, then double-tap. Then select Trim Memo and double-tap.
Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Flick up to drag to the right, or flick down
to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current position will
trim from the recording. To execute the trim, select Trim Voice Memo and double-tap.
Trim a video: While viewing a video, double-tap the screen to display the video
controls. Select the beginning or end of the trim tool. Then flick up to drag to the right,
or flick down to drag to the left. VoiceOver announces the amount of time the current
position will trim from the recording. To execute the trim, select Trim and double-tap.
Zoom
Many iPhone applications let you zoom in and out specific elements. For example,
you can double-tap or use the pinch gesture to expand webpage columns in Safari.
Zoom is a special accessibility feature that lets you magnify the entire screen of any
application you’re using to help you see what’s on the display.
Chapter 25 Accessibility 189Turn Zoom on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility > Zoom and tap the
Zoom On/Off switch.
Note: You cannot use VoiceOver and Zoom at the same time.
Zoom in or out: Double-tap the screen with three fingers. By default, the screen is
magnified by 200 percent. If you manually change the magnification (by using the tapand-drag gesture, described below), iPhone automatically returns to that magnification
when you zoom in by double-tapping with three fingers.
Increase magnification: With three fingers, tap and drag toward the top of the
screen (to increase magnification) or toward the bottom of the screen (to decrease
magnification). The tap-and-drag gesture is similar to a double-tap, except you don’t
lift your fingers on the second tap—instead, drag your fingers on the screen. Once you
start dragging, you can drag with a single finger.
Move around the screen: When zoomed in, drag or flick the screen with three fingers.
Once you start dragging, you can drag with a single finger so that you can see more
of the screen. Hold a single finger near the edge of the display to pan to that side of
the screen image. Move your finger closer to the edge to pan more quickly. When you
open a new screen, Zoom always goes to the top-middle of the screen.
White on Black
Use White on Black to invert the colors on the iPhone display, which may make it
easier to read the screen. The screen looks like a photographic negative when White
on Black is turned on.
Invert the screen’s colors: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the
“White on Black” switch.
Mono Audio
Mono Audio combines the sound of the left and right channels into a mono signal
played on both sides. This enables users with hearing impairment in one ear to hear
the entire sound signal with the other ear.
Turn Mono Audio on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap the
Mono Audio switch.
Speak Auto-text
Speak Auto-text speaks the text corrections and suggestions iPhone makes when
you’re typing.
Turn Speak Auto-text on or off: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility and tap
the Speak Auto-text switch.
Speak Auto-text also works with VoiceOver or Zoom.
190 Chapter 25 AccessibilityTriple-click Home
Triple-click Home provides an easy way to turn some of the Accessibility features on
or off when you press the Home button quickly three times. You can set Triple-click
Home to turn VoiceOver on or off, turn White on Black on or off, or present the
options to:
• Turn VoiceOver on or off
• Turn Zoom on or off
• Turn White on Black on or off
Triple-click Home is turned off by default.
Set the Triple-click Home function: In Settings, choose General > Accessibility >
Triple-click Home and choose the function you want.
Closed Captioning and Other Helpful Features
Many features available on all models of iPhone help make iPhone accessible to all
users, including those with visual or auditory impairments.
Closed Captioning
You can turn on closed captioning for videos in iPod settings. See “Video” on page 158.
Voice Control
Voice Control (available only on iPhone 3GS) lets you make phone calls and control
iPod music playback by using voice commands. See “Voice Dialing” on page 48, and
“Using Voice Control with iPod” on page 77.
Large Phone Keypad
Make phone calls simply by tapping entries in your contacts and favorites lists. When
you need to dial a number, iPhone’s large numeric keypad makes it easy. See “Phone
Calls” on page 47.
Widescreen Keyboards
Several applications let you rotate iPhone when you’re typing so that you can use a
larger keyboard:
• Mail
• Safari
• Messages
• Notes
• Contacts
Chapter 25 Accessibility 191Visual Voicemail
The play and pause controls in visual voicemail let you control the playback of
messages. Drag the playhead on the scrubber bar to repeat a portion of the message
that’s hard to understand. See “Checking Voicemail” on page 52.
Assignable Ringtones
You can assign distinctive ringtones to individuals in your contacts list for audible
caller ID. You can purchase ringtones from the iTunes Store on iPhone. See “Purchasing
Ringtones” on page 162.
Instant Messaging (IM) Chat
The App Store features many Internet Messaging (IM) applications such as AIM,
BeejiveIM, ICQ, and Yahoo! Messenger that are optimized for iPhone.
Minimum Font Size for Mail Messages
To increase readability, set a minimum font size for Mail message text to Large,
Extra Large, or Giant. See “Mail” on page 152.
TTY Support (Available in Some Areas)
Use iPhone in TTY mode with the iPhone TTY Adapter (available separately) to use
a Teletype (TTY) machine. See “Using iPhone with a Teletype (TTY) Machine” on
page 154.
Universal Access in Mac OS X
Take advantage of the Universal Access features in Mac OS X when you use iTunes
to sync information and content from your iTunes library to iPhone. In the Finder,
choose Help > Mac Help, then search for “universal access.”
For more information about iPhone and Mac OS X accessibility features, go to
www.apple.com/accessibility.
192 Chapter 25 AccessibilityTroubleshooting
A Appendix
Apple iPhone Support Site
Comprehensive support information is available online at
www.apple.com/support/iphone.
General
Low-Battery Image Appears
iPhone is low on power and needs to charge for up to ten minutes before you can use
it. For information about charging iPhone, see “Charging the Battery” on page 43.
or
iPhone Doesn’t Respond
• iPhone may be low on power. Connect iPhone to your computer or to its power
adapter to charge. See “Charging the Battery” on page 43.
• Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a
red slider appears, and then press and hold the Home button until the application
you were using quits.
• If that doesn’t work, turn iPhone off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/
Wake button on top of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then
drag the slider. Then press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo
appears.
• If that doesn’t work, reset iPhone. Press and hold both the Sleep/Wake button and
the Home button for at least ten seconds, until the Apple logo appears.
193iPhone Still Doesn’t Respond After Reset
• Reset iPhone settings. From the Home screen choose Settings > General > Reset
> Reset All Settings. All your preferences are reset, but your data and media aren’t
deleted.
• If that doesn’t work, erase all content on iPhone. See “Resetting iPhone” on page 149.
• If that doesn’t work, restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and Restoring
iPhone Software” on page 204.
“This accessory is not made to work with iPhone” Appears
Make sure the dock connector is free of debris.
If you connect iPhone to an accessory not specifically made for it, iPhone may ask
if you want to turn on airplane mode. This is to eliminate radio interference from
cellular signals coming from iPhone. You may be able to use iPhone with the accessory
whether or not you turn on airplane mode. However, the accessory may not charge
iPhone.
If you turn on airplane mode, you won’t be able to make calls, send or receive
text messages, access the Internet, or use Bluetooth devices with iPhone until you
disconnect iPhone from the accessory or turn off airplane mode.
“This accessory is not supported by iPhone” Appears
The accessory you attached may not work with iPhone. Make sure the dock connector
is free of debris.
Connect-to-iTunes Screen Appears
iPhone needs to be activated. Connect iPhone to your computer and open iTunes if it
doesn’t open automatically.
iPhone Is Too Warm
If the interior temperature of iPhone 3G or later exceeds normal operating
temperatures, you may experience the following as it attempts to regulate its
temperature:
• iPhone stops charging
• the display dims
• the cellular signal is weak
• a temperature warning screen appears
Important: You cannot use iPhone while the temperature warning screen is displayed
except to make an emergency call. If none of the above measures succeeds in
lowering the internal temperature, iPhone automatically goes into a deep sleep mode
until it cools. You cannot make an emergency call when iPhone is in this mode. Move
iPhone to a cooler location and wait a few minutes before trying to use iPhone again.
194 Appendix A TroubleshootingiTunes and Syncing
iPhone Doesn’t Appear in iTunes
• The iPhone battery might need to be recharged. For information about charging
iPhone, see “Charging the Battery” on page 43.
• Disconnect other USB devices from your computer and connect iPhone to a
different USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on your keyboard).
• Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of
iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press
and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter
your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked.
Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a
Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card
documentation or contact your carrier.
• Restart your computer and reconnect iPhone to your computer.
• Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from
www.apple.com/itunes.
Syncing Doesn’t Work
• The iPhone battery might need to be recharged. For information about charging
iPhone, see “Charging the Battery” on page 43.
• Disconnect other USB devices from your computer and connect iPhone to a
different USB 2.0 port on your computer (not on your keyboard).
• Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of
iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press
and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter
your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked.
Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a
Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card
documentation or contact your carrier.
• Restart your computer and reconnect iPhone to your computer.
• Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from
www.apple.com/itunes.
Contacts, Calendars, or Bookmarks Don’t Sync
• Download and install (or reinstall) the latest version of iTunes from
www.apple.com/itunes.
Appendix A Troubleshooting 195Yahoo! or Google Contacts Doesn’t Sync
iTunes may not be able to connect with Yahoo! or Google. Make sure your computer
is connected to the Internet, and that you’ve entered the correct ID and password in
iTunes. Connect iPhone to your computer, click the Info tab in iTunes, click Configure in
the Contacts section, then enter your current ID and password.
Yahoo! Address Book Still Has Contacts Deleted From iPhone
Yahoo! Address Book doesn’t allow contacts containing a Messenger ID to be deleted
through syncing. To delete a contact containing a Messenger ID, log in to your Yahoo!
account online and delete the contact using Yahoo! Address Book.
Phone and Voicemail
Can’t Make or Receive Calls
• Check the cell signal icon in the status bar at the top of the screen. If there are no
bars, or if it says “No service,” try moving to a different location. If you’re indoors, try
going outdoors or moving closer to a window.
• Check to make sure you’re in an area with network coverage. Go to your carrier’s
website to see network coverage areas.
• Make sure airplane mode isn’t on. From the Home screen choose Settings, then turn
airplane mode off. If that doesn’t work, turn airplane mode on, wait 15 seconds, then
turn airplane mode off again.
• Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of
iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press
and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter
your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked.
Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a
Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card
documentation or contact your carrier.
• There may be a problem with your wireless service. Call your carrier or go to your
carrier’s website.
• Restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on
page 204.
Visual Voicemail Isn’t Available
Visual Voicemail is delivered over the cellular data network. Because Data Roaming is
turned off by default, you may not have access to the Internet when traveling abroad
unless you turn Data Roaming on. In Settings choose General > Network, then tap
Data Roaming.
Important: Data roaming charges may apply when Data Roaming is on.
196 Appendix A TroubleshootingVisual Voicemail may be an optional service in some countries. Contact your carrier for
more information.
You Can’t Remember Your Voicemail Password
If iPhone prompts you for your password when you tap Voicemail and you don’t
remember your password, tap for instructions on resetting it.
Voicemail Service Is Called When You Tap Voicemail
If the voice instructions prompt you, enter your voicemail password. Otherwise, wait
until you hear any voice instruction, then end the call. After a time, Voicemail should
become available again.
This may occur if you removed the SIM card from iPhone and replace it with another
SIM card.
Safari, Text, Mail, and Contacts
Websites, Text, or Email Aren’t Available
• Check the cell signal icon in the status bar at the top of the screen. If there are no
bars, or if it says “No service,” try moving to a different location. If you’re indoors, try
going outdoors or moving closer to a window.
• Check to make sure you’re in an area with network coverage. Go to your carrier’s
website to see network coverage areas.
• If the cellular network isn’t available, connect to a Wi-Fi network if possible.
• Make sure airplane mode isn’t on. From the Home screen choose Settings, then turn
airplane mode off. If that doesn’t work, turn airplane mode on, wait 15 seconds, then
turn airplane mode off again.
• Make sure to include an area code for every phone number in your contacts list that
you use to send or receive text messages.
• Turn iPhone off and back on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top of
iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, then drag the slider. Then press
and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears. Tap Unlock and enter
your SIM’s PIN if the SIM is locked.
Important: If you enter the PIN incorrectly three times, you may need to enter a
Personal Unlocking Key (PUK) to enable your SIM card again. Refer to the SIM card
documentation or contact your carrier.
• There may be a problem with your wireless service. Call your carrier or go to your
carrier’s website.
Appendix A Troubleshooting 197• If you’re traveling abroad, you may not have Internet access because Data Roaming
is turned off (the default). Turn Data Roaming on or connect to a Wi-Fi network.
To turn Data Roaming on, in Settings choose General > Network and tap Data
Roaming. Data roaming charges may apply.
Important: Data roaming charges may apply. To avoid data roaming charges, turn
Data Roaming off.
• Restore the iPhone software. See “Updating and Restoring iPhone Software” on
page 204.
Can’t Send Email
If iPhone is unable to send email, try the following:
• In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and select the account you’re trying
to use. Tap Account Info, then tap SMTP under Outgoing Mail Server. Under Other
SMTP Server, tap the SMTP server for your carrier, then tap to turn the server on.
The Under Other SMTP settings also allow you to set up additional SMTP servers.
Contact your carrier or Internet service provider for configuration information.
• Set up your email account directly on iPhone instead of syncing it from iTunes.
In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap Add Account and enter your
account information. If iPhone is unable to locate your service provider’s settings
when you enter your email address, go to www.apple.com/support and search for
HT1277 to get additional help in setting up your account.
• Turn iPhone off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top
of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then
press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears.
• Turn off Wi-Fi so iPhone is connecting to the Internet via the cellular data network.
In Settings, choose Wi-Fi and turn off Wi-Fi.
For additional troubleshooting information, go to www.apple.com/support and search
for TS1426. If you still can’t send email, you can call an Apple Expert (not available in all
countries). Go to www.apple.com/support/expert for information. If Apple Expert is not
available in your country, get a free GMail, Yahoo!, or AOL account and try forwarding
your mail to that account.
Can’t Receive Email
If iPhone is unable to receive email, try the following:
• If you’re using one or more computers to check the same email account, that may
be creating a lock-out issue. For more information, go to www.apple.com/support
and search for TS2621.
198 Appendix A Troubleshooting• Set up your email account directly on iPhone instead of syncing it from iTunes.
In Settings, choose “Mail, Contacts, Calendars,” tap Add Account and enter your
account information. If iPhone is unable to locate your service provider’s settings
when you enter your email address, go to www.apple.com/support and search for
HT1277 to get additional help in setting up your account.
• Turn iPhone off, then turn it on again. Press and hold the Sleep/Wake button on top
of iPhone for a few seconds until a red slider appears, and then drag the slider. Then
press and hold the Sleep/Wake button until the Apple logo appears.
• Turn off Wi-Fi so iPhone is connecting to the Internet via the cellular data network.
In Settings, choose Wi-Fi and turn off Wi-Fi.
For additional troubleshooting information, go to www.apple.com/support and search
for TS1426. If you still can’t receive email, you can call an Apple Expert (not available in
all countries). Go to www.apple.com/support/expert for information. If Apple Expert
is not available in your country, get a free GMail, Yahoo!, or AOL account and try
forwarding your mail to that account.
Email Attachment Won’t Open
The file type may not be supported. iPhone supports the following email attachment
file formats:
.doc Microsoft Word
.docx Microsoft Word (XML)
.htm webpage
.html webpage
.key Keynote
.numbers Numbers
.pages Pages
.pdf Preview, Adobe Acrobat
.ppt Microsoft PowerPoint
.pptx Microsoft PowerPoint (XML)
.rtf Rich Text Format
.txt text
.vcf contact information
.xls Microsoft Excel
.xlsx Microsoft Excel (XML)
Appendix A Troubleshooting 199GAL Contacts Don’t Appear
Check your Microsoft Exchange settings to make sure you’re on the right server. In
Settings, tap “Mail, Contacts, Calendars” and choose an account to display its settings.
If you’re trying to search for GAL contacts in Contacts, tap Groups and tap Directories
at the bottom of the list.
Sound, Music, and Video
No Sound
• Unplug and reconnect the headset. Make sure the connector is pushed in all the
way.
• Make sure the volume isn’t turned down all the way.
• Music on iPhone might be paused. Try pressing the center button on the iPhone
headset (or the equivalent button on your Bluetooth headset) to resume playback.
Or from the Home screen, tap iPod, tap Now Playing, then tap .
• Check to see if a volume limit is set. From the Home screen choose Settings > iPod
> Volume Limit. For more information, see “Music” on page 158.
• Make sure you’re using the latest version of iTunes (go to www.apple.com/itunes).
• If you’re using the optional dock’s line out port, make sure your external speakers or
stereo are turned on and working properly.
Pressing Mic Button Doesn’t Resume Music Playback
iPhone goes to sleep after music has been paused for five minutes. Press the Home
or Sleep/Wake button to wake up iPhone.
Song, Video, or Other Items Won’t Play
The song may have been encoded in a format that iPhone doesn’t support. The
following audio file formats are supported by iPhone. These include formats for
audiobooks and podcasting:
• AAC (M4A, M4B, M4P, up to 320 Kbps)
• Apple Lossless (a high-quality compressed format)
• MP3 (up to 320 Kbps)
• MP3 Variable Bit Rate (VBR)
• WAV
• AA (audible.com spoken word, formats 2, 3, and 4)
• AAX (audible.com spoken word, AudibleEnhanced format)
• AIFF
200 Appendix A TroubleshootingThe following video file formats are supported by iPhone:
• H.264 (Baseline Profile Level 3.0)
• MPEG-4 (Simple Profile)
A song encoded using Apple Lossless format has full CD-quality sound, but takes up
only about half as much space as a song encoded using AIFF or WAV format. The same
song encoded in AAC or MP3 format takes up even less space. When you import music
from a CD using iTunes, it’s converted to AAC format by default.
Using iTunes for Windows, you can convert nonprotected WMA files to AAC or MP3
format. This can be useful if you have a library of music encoded in WMA format.
iPhone doesn’t support WMA, MPEG Layer 1, MPEG Layer 2 audio files, or audible.com
format 1.
If you have a song or video in your iTunes library that isn’t supported by iPhone,
you may be able to convert it to a format iPhone supports. See iTunes Help for more
information.
iTunes Stores
iTunes Store Isn’t Available
To use the iTunes Store, iPhone must be connected to the Internet. See “Connecting to
the Internet” on page 40. The iTunes Store isn’t available in all countries.
Can’t Purchase Content
To purchase content from the iTunes Store or App Store, you must have an iTunes
Store account. Open iTunes on your computer and choose Store > Create Account. You
can also set up an account on iPhone. See “Viewing Account Information” on page 166.
Note: The iTunes Store is available only in some countries.
Removing the SIM Card
If you need to send your iPhone in for service, or if you want to loan your iPhone to
someone and you still want to be able to make calls, you may be able to use the SIM
card inside iPhone with another phone.
Appendix A Troubleshooting 201Remove the SIM card: Insert the end of the SIM eject tool (or a small paper clip) into
the hole on the SIM tray. Press firmly and push it straight in until the tray pops out.
SIM eject SIM tray
tool
SIM card
Backing Up iPhone
iTunes creates backups of settings, downloaded applications and data, and other
information on iPhone. You can use a backup to restore these items to your iPhone
after a software restore or to transfer the information to another iPhone.
Backing up iPhone or restoring from a backup is not the same as syncing content
and other items (such as music, podcasts, ringtones, photos, videos, and applications
that you download via iTunes) with your iTunes library. Backups include settings,
downloaded applications and data, and other information that resides on iPhone.
You can restore these items from a backup using iTunes, but you may also have to sync
your iTunes library content again.
Applications downloaded from the App Store are backed up the next time you sync
with iTunes. Afterwards, only application data is backed up when you sync with iTunes.
Creating Backups
Backups can be created in the following ways:
• Once iPhone has been configured to sync with a particular computer, iTunes
automatically makes a backup of iPhone on that computer when you sync. iTunes
won’t automatically back up an iPhone that isn’t configured to sync with that
computer. If you’ve configured iPhone to automatically sync with iTunes on a
specific computer, iTunes will back up iPhone every time you connect it to that
computer. Automatic syncing is turned on by default. iTunes only makes one backup
each time you connect, even if you sync multiple times before disconnecting.
• If you choose to update the software on iPhone, iTunes will back up iPhone
automatically, even if it isn’t configured to sync with iTunes on that computer.
• If you choose to restore the software on iPhone, iTunes asks if you want to back up
iPhone before restoring.
If you use a Bluetooth headset or car kit with iPhone and you restore settings,
you must pair the Bluetooth device with iPhone again to use it.
202 Appendix A TroubleshootingFor more information about backups, including the settings and information stored in
a backup, go to www.apple.com/support and search for HT1766.
Restoring from a Backup
You can restore the settings, application data, and other information from a backup,
or use this feature to transfer these items to another iPhone.
Restore iPhone from a backup:
1 Connect iPhone to the computer you normally sync with.
2 In iTunes, Control-click iPhone in the sidebar and choose “Restore from Backup” from
the menu that appears.
3 Choose the backup that you want to restore from the pop-up menu, then click Restore.
If your backup is encrypted, you’ll need to enter your password.
After restoring from a backup, previous data is no longer accessible via the iPhone
user interface, but it isn’t erased from your iPhone. For information about erasing all
content and settings, see “Resetting iPhone” on page 149.
Important: Restoring iPhone from a backup restores all data in the backup, including
data for other applications. If you choose an old backup, restoring from it could replace
the data for applications with data that is not current.
Removing a Backup
You can remove a backup of iPhone from the list of backups in iTunes. You may want
to do this, for example, if a backup was created on someone else’s computer.
Remove a backup:
1 In iTunes, open iTunes Preferences.
• Windows: Choose Edit > Preferences.
• Mac: Choose iTunes > Preferences.
2 Click Devices (iPhone does not need to be connected).
3 Select the backup you want to remove, then click Delete Backup.
4 Confirm you wish to remove the selected backup by clicking Delete Backup.
5 Click OK to close the iTunes Preferences Window.
Appendix A Troubleshooting 203Updating and Restoring iPhone Software
You can use iTunes to update or reinstall iPhone software, restore default settings,
and delete all data on iPhone.
• If you update, the iPhone software is updated. Your downloaded applications,
settings, and data aren’t affected.
Note: In some cases, an update may also include restoring iPhone.
• If you restore, the latest version of iPhone software is reinstalled, settings are restored
to their defaults, and data stored on iPhone is deleted, including downloaded
applications, songs, videos, contacts, photos, calendar information, and any other
data. If you’ve backed up iPhone with iTunes on your computer, you can restore data
from the backup at the end of the restore process.
Deleted data is no longer accessible via the iPhone user interface, but isn’t erased from
your iPhone. For information about erasing all content and settings, see “Resetting
iPhone” on page 149.
Update or restore iPhone:
1 Make sure you have an Internet connection and have installed the latest version of
iTunes from www.apple.com/itunes.
2 Connect iPhone to your computer.
3 Select iPhone in the iTunes sidebar and click the Summary tab.
4 Click “Check for Update.” iTunes tells you if there’s a newer version of the iPhone
software available.
5 Click Update to install the latest version of the software. Or click Restore to restore.
Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the restore process.
For more information about updating and restoring iPhone software, go to
www.apple.com/support and search for HT1414.
204 Appendix A TroubleshootingOther Resources
B Appendix
Safety, Software, and Service Information
The following table describes where to get more iPhone-related safety, software, and
service information.
To learn about Do this
Using iPhone safely See the Important Product Information Guide at
www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone for the
latest safety and regulatory information.
iPhone service and support, tips, forums, and
Apple software downloads
Go to www.apple.com/support/iphone.
Service and support from your carrier Contact your carrier or go to your carrier’s
website.
The latest information about iPhone Go to www.apple.com/iphone.
Using iTunes Open iTunes and choose Help > iTunes Help. For
an online iTunes tutorial (available in some areas
only), go to www.apple.com/support/itunes.
MobileMe Go to www.me.com.
Using iPhoto on Mac OS X Open iPhoto and choose Help > iPhoto Help.
Using Address Book on Mac OS X Open Address Book and choose Help > Address
Book Help.
Using iCal on Mac OS X Open iCal and choose Help > iCal Help.
205To learn about Do this
Microsoft Outlook, Windows Address Book,
Adobe Photoshop Album, and Adobe
Photoshop Elements
See the documentation that came with those
applications.
Finding your iPhone serial number or
International Mobile Equipment Identity (IMEI)
number
You can find your iPhone serial and IMEI numbers
on the iPhone packaging. Or, on iPhone, choose
Settings > General > About from the Home
screen. In iTunes on your computer, hold down
the Control key and choose Help > About iTunes
(Windows) or iTunes > About iTunes (Mac), then
release the Control key. (Press the Space bar to
pause the scrolling.)
Obtaining warranty service First follow the advice in this guide and online
resources. Then go to www.apple.com/support
or see the Important Product Information Guide at
www.apple.com/support/manuals/iphone.
Battery replacement service Go to www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/
battery.
Using iPhone in an enterprise environment Go to www.apple.com/iphone/enterprise.
Viewing the User Guide on iPhone
The iPhone User Guide, optimized for viewing on iPhone, is available at
help.apple.com/iphone.
View the guide on iPhone: In Safari, tap , then tap the iPhone User Guide bookmark.
Add an icon for the guide to the Home screen: When viewing the guide, tap , then
tap “Add to Home Screen.”
The iPhone User Guide is available in many languages.
View guide in a different language: Tap “Change Language” at the bottom of the
screen on the main contents page, then choose the language you want.
Disposal and Recycling Information
Apple Used Mobile Phone Recycling Program (available in some areas): For free
recycling of your old mobile phone, a prepaid shipping label, and instructions, see:
www.apple.com/environment/recycling
206 Appendix B Other ResourcesiPhone Disposal and Recycling: You must dispose of iPhone properly according to
local laws and regulations. Because iPhone contains electronic components and a
battery, iPhone must be disposed of separately from household waste. When iPhone
reaches its end of life, contact local authorities to learn about disposal and recycling
options, or simply drop it off at your local Apple retail store or return it to Apple. The
battery will be removed and recycled in an environmentally friendly manner. For more
information, see: www.apple.com/environment/recycling
European Union—Electronics and Battery Disposal Information: This symbol means
that according to local laws and regulations your product and its battery should
be recycled separately from household waste. When this product reaches its end of
life, take it to a collection point designated by local authorities for the recycling of
electronic equipment. The improper disposal of waste electronic equipment from
the consumer may be subject to fines. The separate collection and recycling of your
product and its battery at the time of disposal will help conserve natural resources
and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the
environment.
For collection and recycling schemes for iPhone, go to:
www.apple.com/environment/recycling/nationalservices/europe.html
Battery Replacement for iPhone: The rechargeable battery in iPhone should be
replaced only by an authorized service provider. For battery replacement services go
to: www.apple.com/support/iphone/service/battery
Deutschland: Dieses Gerät enthält Batterien. Bitte nicht in den Hausmüll werfen.
Entsorgen Sie dieses Gerätes am Ende seines Lebenszyklus entsprechend der
maßgeblichen gesetzlichen Regelungen.
Nederlands: Gebruikte batterijen kunnen worden ingeleverd bij de chemokar of in een
speciale batterijcontainer voor klein chemisch afval (kca) worden gedeponeerd.
Türkiye: EEE yönetmelig?ine (Elektrikli ve Elektronik Es¸yalarda Bazi Zararli Maddelerin
Kullaniminin Sinirlandirilmasina Dair Yönetmelik) uygundur.
Apple and the Environment
At Apple, we recognize our responsibility to minimize the environmental
impacts of our operations and products. For more information go to:
www.apple.com/environment
Appendix B Other Resources 207Index
3G 21, 41
12-hour time 147
24-hour time 147
A
accessibility
features 182
Mono Audio 190
setting up iPhone using VoiceOver 11
settings 149
Speak Auto-text 190
Triple-click Home 191
VoiceOver 183
White on Black 190
Zoom 189
accounts 16, 150
“push” 18, 151
activating iPhone 10
adjusting brightness 142
Adobe Photoshop 97
Adobe Photoshop Elements 15
airplane mode
settings 138
status icon 21
turning on 138
alarms
deleting 133
setting 133
status icon 22
turning on or off 133
album covers 78
album tracks 79
alert
voicemail 52
alerts
adjusting volume 27, 141
calendar 96
turning on or off 141
alternate audio language 83
answering calls 39
anti-phishing. See Safari fraud warning
App Store
about 167
browsing 167
deleting applications 171
Genius 168
store account 159, 167
syncing 12
syncing purchased content 172
updating applications 172
verifying purchases 166
applications 23
deleting 171
attachments
email 62
audio
alternate language 83
mono 190
audio file formats, supported 201
audiobooks
syncing 12
Auto-Brightness 142
AutoFill 69, 156
auto-lock, setting time for 145
AV cables 84
B
backing up iPhone 14
backups
creating 202
removing 203
restoring from 203
battery
charging 43
low on power 44, 193
maximizing life 44
replacing 44, 206
status icon 22
Bluetooth
finding address 143
headset 26, 38, 39, 48, 49, 50, 74, 77, 78, 82, 104,
108, 126, 200, 202
routing calls back through iPhone 56
status icon 22
turning on or off 144
unpairing device 56
Index
208bookmarking
map locations 119
webpages 69
YouTube videos 108, 109
bookmarks, syncing 12, 14, 69
brightness
adjusting 142
setting to adjust automatically 142
browser cache, clearing 157
browsing
album covers 78
App Store 167
iTunes Music Store 161
YouTube videos 107
businesses, finding 121
buttons, changing 85
C
cable, Dock Connector to USB 11, 21
cache, clearing browser 157
Calculator 135
scientific 136
Calendar
about 91
searching 93
views 92
See also events
calendars, syncing 12, 14, 91
call forwarding 154
call options 49
call waiting, turning on or off 154
caller ID, hiding or showing 154
calls
no service 196
See also phone
Camera
deleting pictures 104
exposure 104
focus 104
seeing photos and videos you’ve taken 104, 105
taking pictures 104
upload pictures to your computer 106
caps lock, enabling 148
carrier services 155
Cc 152
cell signal, status icon 21
cellular network 41
charging battery 43
cleaning iPhone 46
Clock 132
clocks, adding 132
closed captioning, turning on or off 158
Compass
current coordinates 174
heading 174
True and Magnetic North 174
component AV cable 84
composite AV cable 84
computer requirements 9
conference calls 50
configuration profiles 18
connecting to Internet 40
contacts
adding and editing 178
adding from Maps 119
adding from text messages 89
assigning photo to 102
favorite 54
GAL (Global Address List) 59, 177, 200
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol) 177
seeing location of 119
send info by email 60
setting how displayed 153
setting how sorted 153
syncing 12, 13, 14, 176
using to call someone 47
Yahoo! Address Book 14
controls, using 28
converting
videos 73
converting unprotected WMA files 201
cookies 157
copying
images 100
photos and videos in MMS messages 88
text 33
Cover Flow 78
current approximate location 119, 174
cutting and pasting text 33
D
data, erasing 17, 45, 145, 149
date and time, setting 147
date format 148
debug console 157
declining calls 49
deleting
alarms 133
all content and settings 45, 149
applications from the App Store 171
clocks 132
contacts 178
contacts from Favorites 54
email account 151
email messages 64
notes 130
pictures 104
playlists 81
removing 203
songs from a playlist 81
videos 84
Index 209YouTube playlists 110
YouTube videos from a playlist 110
developer settings 157
Dialing a phone number 47
directions, getting 119
disconnecting iPhone from computer 19
display freezes 194
Dock Connector 125
Dock Connector to USB cable 11, 21
downloading
applications 170
podcasts 164
E
EDGE 40
editing
text 33
text conversations 89
videos 106
effects sounds, turning on or off 141
email accounts
syncing 12
emergency calls 51
ending calls 39
enterprise, using iPhone 206
equalizer 158
erasing data 17, 45, 145, 149
events, calendar 94
Exchange. See Microsoft Exchange
exposure 104
F
favorites
calling a contact from 47, 54
managing 54
sending text messages 87
Fetch New Data 151
file formats, supported 62, 199, 200, 201
Find My iPhone 17, 45
focus 104
force quit an application 46
formats
date, time, and telephone number 148
forwarding messages 60
G
GAL (Global Address List) 59, 177, 200
Genius Mixes 73, 80
Genius playlists 76, 79
Genius, App Store 168
gestures, VoiceOver 184
getting help 205
getting started 9
Google search engine 156
Google
Contacts 14, 196
searching the web 69
GPRS 40
GPS 116
grab points 34
H
hands-free phone calls 50, 144
headset
about 21, 39
center button 21, 26, 38, 39, 48, 49, 50, 74, 77, 78,
82, 104, 108, 126, 200
using with Voice Memos 125
headset button. See mic button
help, getting 205
hold, putting calls on 50
Home screen 23, 29
adding web clips 70
customizing 25
hybrid view 118
I
iCal 14, 205
ICCID number 143
icons
applications 23
status 21
See also buttons
images
copying 100
pasting 100
IMAP
accounts 59
searching email 64
IMEI number 143
installing
applications from the App Store 170
configuration profiles 18
international keyboards 35, 148
Internet, connecting to 40
iPhoto 15, 205
iPod
changing browse buttons 85
converting videos for iPhone 73
deleting videos 84
Genius Mixes 80
Genius playlists 79
headset controls 39
on-the-go playlists 81, 110
playing songs using Voice Control 77
repeating or shuffling songs 76
searching 79, 83
settings 158
Shake to Shuffle 73, 158
sleep timer 84
210 IndexiTunes Store
about 160
account 10, 159, 160, 163, 167
browsing 161
checking download status 165
purchasing ringtones 162
purchasing songs and albums 162
streaming or downloading podcasts 164
syncing purchased content 165
verifying purchases 166
iTunes U
syncing 12, 15, 71
iTunes
getting help 205
iPhone doesn’t appear in 195
settings panes 13
K
keyboards
Emoji 35
international 35, 148
typing on 32
keypad, numbers 50
L
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) 177
links
in email 62
on webpages 67
location. See Maps
Location Services 144
location warnings 150
locking iPhone 22, 26, 27
lyrics, displaying 75
M
Mac system requirements 9
magnetic north 173
Mail
account setup 59, 150
attachments 62, 199
Cc 152
checking for new messages 60, 64
deleting email account 151
deleting messages 64
forwarding messages 60
links 62
load additional messages 61
marking messages as unread 63
organizing email 65
password settings 151
problems opening an attachment 199
reading messages 61
replying to messages 60
resizing text column 61
saving drafts 60
searching 64
seeing recipients 63
sending email to someone you’ve texted 89
sending messages 59
sending photos and videos 60
sending webpage addresses 67
sending YouTube video links 108, 109
settings 150, 151
share contact information 60
signatures 152
storing email on iPhone or server 151
syncing email account settings 12
Yahoo! email account 18
zooming in a message 61
Maps
adding location to a contact 119
bookmarking location 119
current approximate location 116, 119
dropped pin 117
finding businesses 121
finding location 114
getting directions 119
GPS 116
hybrid view 118
satellite view 118
seeing location of a contact 119
share location 119
traffic conditions 121
zooming 115
Messages
contacting someone you’ve texted 89
editing conversations 89
following links in messages 89
previews 90
replying to messages 87
saving a photo or video clip 88
saving conversations 87
sending a photo or video clip 88
sending messages 86
setting alert sounds 90
settings 157
show earlier messages 87
mic button 39
microphone
about 39
built-in 125
muting 50
microphone, external 125
Microsoft Excel 156
Microsoft Exchange 16, 23, 25, 59, 176
push accounts 18
searching email 64
setting up account 16
syncing 16, 57, 91
Microsoft Internet Explorer 14, 69
Index 211Microsoft Outlook 14, 15
Microsoft Word 156
missed calls
number of 52
returning 47
MMS 23, 24, 86, 88, 89, 97, 98, 100, 101, 116, 119, 128,
157
See also Messages
MobileMe 16, 23, 25, 176
getting help 205
push accounts 18
searching email 64
security features 17, 45
sending photos to a gallery 100
setting up account 16
syncing 57, 69, 91
model number 142
modem firmware version 143
Mono Audio 190
movies
rented 15, 83
syncing 12
music
lyrics 75
managing manually 14
previewing 162
purchasing 162
searching 79
syncing 12, 15, 71
See also iPod
music videos
syncing 12
muting a call 50
N
navigating. See panning, scrolling
Network activity
status icon 22
networks 139
Nike + iPod
settings 159, 181
north, true and magnetic 173
Notes 130
searching 131
syncing 12
NTSC 159
O
on-the-go playlists 81
orientation, changing 66
Outlook Express. See Windows Address Book
Outlook. See Microsoft Outlook
overview, iPhone applications 23
P
pairing with Bluetooth headset 55
PAL 159
panning
maps 115
webpages 67
parental controls. See Restrictions
passcode 145
password
changing 155
voicemail 197
pasting
images 100
photos and videos in MMS messages 88
text 33
pausing songs and videos 39
PC system requirements 9
phone network name 142
Phone
adding and editing contacts 178
answering calls 39, 40, 49
call waiting 154
calling internationally 56
calling someone you’ve texted 89
carrier services 155
changing voicemail password 155
conference calls 50
declining calls 40, 49
emergency calls 51
ending calls 39, 40, 50
forwarding calls 154
hands-free 50
hiding or showing caller ID 154
locking SIM card 155
making calls 47
missed calls 52
muting calls 50
putting calls on hold 50
ring mode 54
routing calls back through iPhone 56
second calls 50
setting up voicemail 52
settings 153
silencing calls 49
silent mode 54
switching between calls 40, 50
turning on vibrate 54
unpairing Bluetooth device 56
using favorites 54
using speakerphone 50
using TTY machine 154
voice dialing 48
voicemail 51, 52
voicemail alerts 52
photo albums 99
212 Indexphotos
saving MMS attachments 88
sending in MMS messages 88
Photos
assigning photos to contacts 102
emailing photos 100
playing music during slideshow 100
sending in email messages 60
settings 99, 159
syncing 12, 15, 97
using photos as wallpaper 102
viewing slideshows 99
zooming photos 99
See also Camera
pictures
taking 104
See also Camera, Photos
PIN number 155
playlists, making 81
plug-ins 156
podcasts
downloading 164
streaming 164
syncing 12, 15, 71
pop-ups 156
power adapter 21
power, low 44
previewing
music 162
ringtones 162
videos 163
previewings
text messages 90
problems. See troubleshooting
purchased content
syncing 165, 172
purchasing
applications 167
iTunes content 72
music 160, 162
ringtones 162
videos 163
push accounts 18, 151
R
reading email 61
Recents, using to call someone 47
rechargeable batteries 44
removing
backups 203
SIM card 201
rented movies 83
renting
movies 15
videos 163
repeating 76
replacing battery 44, 206
replying to messages 60
requirements for using iPhone 9
reset iPhone 46
resizing webpage columns 67
restarting 46
restoring iPhone software 204
restoring settings and information 203
restrictions, setting 146
ring mode 28, 54, 141
ringer
adjusting volume 27, 141
turning on or off 141
Ring/Silent switch 28, 54
ringtones
previewing 162
purchasing 162
setting 55, 141
syncing 12
rotor control 185
routing calls back through iPhone 56
S
Safari
AutoFill 69, 156
bookmarking webpages 69
clearing cache 157
cookies 157
Debug Console 157
developer settings 157
fraud warning 156
Home screen web clips 70
navigating 67
opening webpages 66, 68
plug-ins 156
pop-ups 156
reloading webpages 67
resizing columns to fit screen 67
saving images to your Photo Library 67
searching the web 69
security 156
sending webpage addresses in email 67
settings 156
stopping webpages from loading 67
syncing bookmarks 12, 14
typing in text fields 68
zooming webpages 67
satellite view 118
screen 142
setting to adjust automatically 142
using 28
screen reader 11
scrolling
about 29
maps 115
webpages 67
Index 213search engine 156
searching
App Store 167
calendars 93
global 37
iTunes Music Store 161
Mail messages 64
music 79
notes 131
videos 83
searching the web 69
searching YouTube videos 107
security
erase data after ten failed passcode attempts 145
features 45
Find My iPhone 17, 45
setting passcode for iPhone 145
web 156
selecting text 34
sending
email 59
photos and video clips 88
photos from Photos 100
text messages 86
voice memos 88
serial number, finding 142, 206
service and support information 205
settings
accessibility 149
accounts 150
airplane mode 138
alarms 133
alerts 90, 96
auto-capitalization 148
auto-correction 33, 148
auto-lock 145
Bluetooth 144
brightness 142
Calendar 92, 96
date and time 92, 147
developer 157
email server 151
Fetch New Data 151
international 148
iPod 158
language 148
location services 144
Mail, Contacts, Calendars 150
Mail 150
messages 157
Nike + iPod 159, 181
notifications 140
passcode lock 145
Phone 153
Photos 99, 159
resetting 149
restrictions 146
Safari 69, 156
screen brightness 142
security 156
Shake to Shuffle 158
slideshow 99
sound 90, 96
Store 159
temperature 124
TV out 159
usage statistics 143
vibrate 54
video 158
VoiceOver 182
VPN 144
wallpaper 102, 142
Wi-Fi 139
Shake to Shuffle 73, 158
sharing
photos and videos in email messages 60
photos and videos in MMS messages 88
shuffling songs 76
signatures, email 152
silencing calls 49
silent mode 28, 54, 141
SIM card, locking 155
sleep. See locking iPhone
sleep timer 84
slideshows 99, 100
settings 159
SMS 86
See also Messages
software
getting help 205
updating and restoring 204
version 142
sound
adjusting ringer and alerts volume 141
adjusting volume 27
no sound 200
setting limit 158
Sound Check 158
sound effects 27
sounds
adjusting volume 40
calendar alert 96
setting ringtone 141
turning on or off 141
Speak Auto-text 190
speakerphone 50
SSL 151
star next to a phone number 179
Starbucks, browsing and purchasing music 161
status icons 21
stock information, Yahoo! 113
Stocks, adding and deleting quotes 112
214 Indexstopwatch, using 133
storage capacity 142
Store, settings 159
streaming podcasts 164
subtitles 83
surfing the web 66
switching between calls 50
syncing
calendars 91
getting calls during 19
Google Contacts 14, 196
iTunes library contents 12
Microsoft Exchange 16, 57, 91
MobileMe 16, 57, 91
photos 97
preventing 15
purchased songs 165
“Sync in progress” message 19
webpage bookmarks 69
Yahoo! Address Book 196
syncing voice memos 129
system requirements 9
T
taking pictures 104
telephone. See Phone
telephone number format 148
text
cutting or copying 33
pasting 33
typing 32
text messaging. See Messages
Text
typing in webpages 68
time format 148
time zone support 92, 93, 147, 153
time, setting 147
timer
setting 134
sleep 134
touchscreen, using 28
traffic conditions, checking 121
transfer settings and information 202
transferring
purchased content 73, 165
transferring purchased content 172
transferring settings and information 203
transition effects, setting 159
trimming videos 106
Triple-click Home setting 191
troubleshooting
backing up 202
can’t browse websites 197
can’t make a call 196
can’t open an attachment 199
can’t purchase music or applications 201
can’t text 197
display freezes 193
email not available 197
GAL contacts don’t appear 200
iPhone calls voicemail service 197
iPhone doesn’t appear in iTunes 195
iPhone doesn’t respond 193
iPhone doesn’t turn on 193
no sound 200
problems playing songs or other content 200
removing the SIM card 201
restarting 46
software update and restore 204
true north 173
TTY machine, using 154
turning iPhone on or off 26
TV shows
syncing 15
TV shows, syncing 12
TV signal settings 159
typing
keyboard 32
in webpage text fields 68
U
undoing edits 34
unlocking iPhone 27
unpairing Bluetooth device 56
unread messages, marking 63
unsupported audio file formats 201
updating iPhone software 204
usage statistics
battery percentage 143
resetting 143
seeing 143
USB
cable 11, 21
port 11
power adapter 21
V
vibrate, setting 54, 141
video settings 158
videos
alternate audio language 83
converting for iPhone 73
deleting 84
editing 106
previewing 163
purchasing 163
saving MMS attachments 88
searching 83
sending in MMS messages 88
subtitles 83
syncing 12, 15, 71
trimming 106
Index 215watching on a TV 84
See also iPod, Music, YouTube
virtual private network. See VPN
Voice Control
making phone calls 38, 48
playing songs 38, 77
using with headset 40
Voice Memos
attaching to MMS messages 128
emailing 128
recording 125
syncing 129
trimming 128
voicemail
about 51
alerts 52
changing password 155
checking and managing 52
forgotten password 197
greeting 52
setting up 52
VoiceOver
about 183
entering and editing text 188
gestures 184
rotor control 185
setting up iPhone using 11
volume
adjusting 27, 40
adjusting for ringer and alerts 141
setting limit 158
VPN
accessing networks using 42
configuring 144
set up by configuration profile 18
turning on or off 144
W
waking iPhone 27
wallpaper
choosing 142
settings 102
using photo as 102
warranty service 206
watching videos on a TV 84
weather information, Yahoo! 124
Weather
adding cities 123
deleting cities 124
temperature settings 124
viewing 123
web. See Safari
web clips, adding to Home screen 70
webpages
bookmarking 69
syncing 12, 14
White on Black 190
Wi-Fi
addresses 143
forgetting a network 140
joining networks 41, 139
settings 139
status icon 22
turning on or off 139
Windows Address Book 14
Windows XP 9
WMA files, converting 201
“Works with iPhone” logo 125
World Clock 132
Y
Yahoo!
Address Book 14, 196
search engine 156
search using 69
searching using 69
stock information 113
weather information 124
YouTube
bookmarking videos 108, 109
browsing videos 107
emailing links 108, 109
playing videos 108
searching for videos 107
Z
Zoom (Accessibility feature) 189
zooming
email messages 61
maps 115
photos 99
webpages 67
216 IndexK Apple Inc.
© 2009 Apple Inc. All rights reserved.
Apple, the Apple logo, Cover Flow, iCal, iPhoto, iPod,
iTunes, Keynote, Mac, Macintosh, Mac OS, Numbers,
Pages, Safari, and Spotlight are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Finder, iPhone, Multi-Touch, and Shuffle are trademarks
of Apple Inc.
iTunes Store is a service mark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
App Store and MobileMe are service marks of Apple Inc.
The Nike + iPod Sport Kit is covered by one or more
of U.S. patent numbers 6,018,705, 6,052,654, 6,493,652,
6,298,314, 6,611,789, 6,876,947, and 6,882,955, either
alone or when used in combination with a Nike + iPod
enabled iPod media player or iPhone 3GS.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Apple Inc. is under license.
Adobe and Photoshop are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the U.S.
and/or other countries.
Other company and product names mentioned herein
may be trademarks of their respective companies.
Mention of third-party products is for informational
purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement
nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility
with regard to the performance or use of these
products. All understandings, agreements, or warranties,
if any, take place directly between the vendors and the
prospective users. Every effort has been made to ensure
that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is
not responsible for printing or clerical errors.
019-1650/2009-09
ð
Macintosh
User’s Guide
the Includes setup, troubleshooting, and important health-related
information for the Macintosh LC 630 DOS Compatible K Apple Computer, Inc.
© 1995 Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.
Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the
written consent of Apple. Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying
software license agreement.
The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes without
the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair
competition in violation of federal and state laws.
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is
not responsible for printing or clerical errors.
Apple Computer, Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014-2084
(408) 996-1010
Apple, the Apple logo, AppleShare, AppleTalk, ImageWriter, LaserWriter, Macintosh,
MacTCP, ProDOS, QuickTime, and StyleWriter are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Apple Desktop Bus, AppleScript, Balloon Help, Disk First Aid, Finder, Macintosh PC
Exchange, PlainTalk, PowerTalk, and QuickDraw GX are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Adobe, Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Photoshop, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated, which may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
ExposurePro is a registered trademark of Baseline Publishing, Inc.
Helvetica and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG and/or its subsidiaries.
Hewlett-Packard, LaserJet, and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
MacLink Plus is a trademark of Data Viz., Inc.
Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.Windows is a
trademark of Microsoft Corporation and SoftWindows is a trademark used under license.
NetWare is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc.
QMS is a registered trademark of QMS, Inc.
QuarkXPress is a registered trademark of Quark, Inc.
Sound Blaster is a trademark of Creative Technology, Ltd.
SuperPaint is a trademark of Aldus Corporation, a subsidiary of Adobe Systems Incorporated
which may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
Tektronix is a registered trademark of Tektronix, Inc.
Simultaneously published in the United States and Canada.
Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an
endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the
performance or use of these products.iii
Communications regulation information vii
Preface Your DOS-compatible Macintosh computer ix
1 Getting Started 1
Plugging in the computer 1
Installing an expansion card 3
Connecting a monitor 3
Connecting the mouse and keyboard 6
Connecting other equipment 7
Turning the computer on 8
Problems turning your computer on? 10
What’s next? 11
Learning the basics 12
Reviewing the basics 13
Turning the computer off 14
Where to find answers 15
Contents2 Getting Help 17
Getting answers to your questions 18
Identifying objects on the screen 26
Learning useful shortcuts 27
3 Connecting Additional Equipment 29
Where to connect additional equipment 30
Connecting an Apple PlainTalk Microphone 31
Connecting external stereo speakers 32
Connecting a game controller 33
Expanding memory 34
Installing internal drives 34
4 Installing and Using Application Programs in the
Macintosh Environment 35
Installing Macintosh application programs 36
Working with several programs at a time 37
Backing up your files 38
5 Operating in the PC Environment 39
Switching between the Macintosh and PC environments 40
Setting up the PC environment 42
Working in the PC environment 44
Running network software 53
Using multimedia, MIDI, and game application programs 54
Using Macintosh peripherals in the PC environment 55
Using PC peripherals 59
iv Contents6 Configuring the PC Environment 61
Choosing settings 62
Configuring the PC serial ports 63
Setting the monitor 64
Setting the time and date 64
Setting shared memory 65
Choosing shared folders or volumes 67
Turning on PC sounds 69
Configuring drives C and D 70
Managing PC files from the Mac OS 71
Changing the size of the drive container 72
Understanding the status line 76
7 Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 77
When you have questions 77
When you run into trouble 77
Solutions to common problems 80
Initializing a hard disk 93
Repairing a damaged disk 97
Installing or reinstalling Mac OS system software 102
8 Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 113
When you have questions 113
Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software 119
Contents vAppendix A Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 129
Health-related information about computer use 129
Safety instructions 134
Handling your computer equipment 135
Cleaning your equipment 139
Locking and unlocking the mouse 141
Appendix B Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC
Environment 143
Opening the computer 145
Installing a communication card 148
Installing a SIMM for the PC environment 149
Closing the computer 154
Appendix C Special Keys on Your Keyboard 157
Appendix D Installing Macintosh Easy Open 159
Choosing an application to open a document 159
Using the Macintosh Easy Open control panel 161
Appendix E Installing Network Management Software 163
Installing NetWare client software 163
Installing Novell’s LAN Workplace for DOS TCP/IP software 167
Installing NetManage’s Chameleon TCP/IP software 169
Installing Windows for Workgroups 173
Installing Spry’s Air Series TCP/IP software 173
Installing Mosaic 177
Index 179
vi ContentsCommunications regulation information
FCC statement
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device
in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. See instructions if interference to
radio or television reception is suspected.
Radio and television interference
The equipment described in this manual generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency
energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s
instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device
in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed
to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If
the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices.
If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct
the interference by using one or more of the following measures:
m Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
m Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio.
m Move the computer farther away from the television or radio.
m Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio.
(That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by
different circuit breakers or fuses.)
If necessary, consult an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple. See the service and support
information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television
technician for additional suggestions. You may find the following booklet helpful: Interference
Handbook (stock number 004-000-00493-1). This booklet, prepared by the Federal
Communications Commission, is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, DC 20402.
IMPORTANT Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Computer, Inc.,
could void the FCC Certification and negate your authority to operate the product.
This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple
peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is
important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between
system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets,
and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded
cables and connectors through an Apple-authorized dealer. For non-Apple peripheral devices,
contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance.
Communications regulation information viiDOC statement
DOC Class B Compliance This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio
noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard
entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications.
Observation des normes—Classe B Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits
radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme
sur le matériel brouilleur : “Appareils Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par le ministre des
Communications.
VCCI statement
CD-ROM drive
WARNING Making adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified in your
equipment’s manual may result in hazardous exposure.
WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet containing the laser. The laser beam used in
this product is harmful to the eyes. The use of optical instruments, such as magnifying lenses,
with this product increases the potential hazard to your eyes. For your safety, have this
equipment serviced only by an Apple-authorized service provider.
If you have an internal Apple CD-ROM drive in your computer, your computer is a Class 1
laser product. The Class 1 label, located on the computer, indicates that the drive meets
minimum safety requirements. A service warning label is on the CD-ROM drive inside the
computer.
viii Communications regulation informationYour Macintosh includes hardware and software that let you use DOS and
Windows application programs directly on your Macintosh computer. It
contains a high-performance microprocessor that’s fully compatible with the
latest DOS and Windows software. You can
m simultaneously run Macintosh operating system (Mac OS) and PC
application programs
m switch between the Mac OS and PC environment at any time without
quitting the applications you’re using
m view the current environment on a single monitor
m use the same hard disk for both Mac OS and PC software
m share files and folders (directories) between the Mac OS and the PC
environment
m cut, copy, and paste data between Mac OS and DOS or Windows
documents
m use your Macintosh keyboard and mouse with PC software
m use your Macintosh modem, monitor, and printer with PC software, or
connect PC-compatible equipment
m use a joystick or other game controller with PC application programs
ix
Your DOS-Compatible Macintosh Computerm share the random-access memory (RAM) in your Macintosh with the PC
environment, or use a memory module (SIMM) for the exclusive use of the
PC environment
m use the built-in Macintosh serial ports with PC software
m access PC CD-ROM discs using an Apple CD-ROM drive
m play Sound Blaster-compatible sounds
m communicate with network servers and other computers running
PC software
To begin, follow the instructions in Chapters 1 and 2 to set up your
computer and get started using it. Read Chapters 3 and 4 when you are
ready to connect additional equipment to your computer and install
Mac OS application programs. Read Chapters 5 and 6 to start using DOS
and Windows application programs on your Macintosh computer. Turn to
Chapters 7 and 8 if you have questions or problems using your Macintosh.
x Your DOS-Compatible Macintosh ComputerMonitor cable
(sometimes built into the monitor)
Monitor power cord
(sometimes built into the monitor)
Computer power cord
Keyboard
Monitor Macintosh DOS-compatible computer
Mouse
Keyboard cable
(sometimes built
into the keyboard
as shown here)The illustration on the facing page shows all the equipment you need to set
up your computer and begin using it. Place your equipment on a sturdy, flat
surface near a grounded wall outlet. Before following the setup instructions in
this chapter, you may want to read “Arranging Your Office” in Appendix A
(in the section on health-related information) for tips on adjusting your work
furniture so that you’re comfortable when using the computer.
Plugging in the computer
Before you plug your Macintosh into a wall socket, carefully read all the
setup instructions in this chapter. Then, before you connect anything to your
Macintosh, follow the instructions in this section to plug it in. The plug
grounds the computer and protects it from electrical damage while you are
setting up.
1
1 Getting Started
Follow the instructions in this
chapter to set up your computer
and learn the basics.When you are ready to begin, follow these steps:
1 Plug the socket end of the computer’s power cord into the recessed power cord socket
(marked with the symbol ²) on the back of the computer.
2 Plug the other end of the power cord into a three-hole grounded outlet or power strip.
Choose a power outlet to which you have easy access.
IMPORTANT Be sure that at least one end of the power cord is within easy
reach so that you can unplug the computer when you need to.
If the computer starts up: If you hear a tone, the computer has started up and
you need to turn it off before proceeding. Press the power button (also called
the standby power button) located on the back of the computer to turn the
computer off.
Power cord plug Power cord socket Standby power button
WARNING This equipment is intended to be electrically grounded.Your
Macintosh is equipped with a three-wire grounding plug—a plug that
has a third (grounding) pin. This plug will fit only a grounded AC
outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into
the outlet, contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a
properly grounded outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding
plug!
2 Chapter 1Installing an expansion card
If you purchased any expansion cards for your Macintosh or extra memory
for use in the PC environment, install the cards or memory now. (For
instructions, see Appendix B, “Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for
the PC Environment,” as well as the documentation that came with the cards
or memory module.) If you don’t have an expansion card or memory to install,
go on to the next section, “Connecting a Monitor.”
Connecting a monitor
You can connect many types of monitors to your Macintosh. To connect a
monitor from a manufacturer other than Apple, refer to the instructions that
came with the monitor.
Connecting the monitor power cord
Monitors have two cords to connect—a power cord and a monitor cable.
To connect the monitor power cord, follow these steps:
1 Place the monitor where you will be using it.
You can place a monitor with a 15-inch or smaller screen on top of your
computer. Don’t place larger monitors on the computer.
Keep these considerations in mind:
m Allow a few inches for air circulation around the sides of the computer
and monitor.
m Make sure that the top of the screen is slightly below eye level when you’re
sitting at the keyboard.
m Position the monitor to minimize glare and reflections on the screen from
overhead lights and windows.
m Consult “Arranging Your Office” in the section “Health-Related
Information About Computer Use” in Appendix A for suggestions on
locating your computer equipment.
Getting Started 32 Connect the monitor power cord to the monitor.
On some monitors, the cord is already attached.
3 Plug in the monitor power cord.
Be sure to plug the power cord into a three-hole grounded outlet or
power strip.
Monitor power cord
Monitor power socket
4 Chapter 1Connecting the monitor cable
After you plug in the monitor power cord, you connect the monitor cable to
the computer’s monitor port.
To connect the monitor cable, follow these steps:
1 Attach the monitor cable to the monitor.
On some monitors, the cable is already attached (as shown below).
2 Attach the monitor cable to the monitor port on the back panel of the computer.
The monitor port is on the upper-right corner of the back panel. It is marked
with the ª icon (symbol). Be sure you plug the cable into the correct port.
Monitor cable
ª Monitor port
Getting Started 5Connecting the mouse and keyboard
You have a choice of several keyboards for your Macintosh. The way you
connect the mouse and keyboard depends on whether the keyboard has a
separate cable or a built-in cable.
Connecting a keyboard with a separate cable
1 Plug the mouse cable into the port on either side of the keyboard.
Most right-handed people prefer to use the mouse with their right hand; most
left-handed people prefer to use their left hand. Plug the mouse into the port
on the side you prefer.
The plug and the port are marked with the × icon (symbol). Align the
symbols before you insert the plug. (The positions of the port and icon on
your keyboard may be different from those pictured here.)
By the way: A port marked with the × icon is called an Apple Desktop Bus
(ADB) port.
2 Plug the keyboard cable (both ends are the same) into the other port on the keyboard.
If you plugged the mouse cable in on the right, for example, plug the keyboard
cable in on the left.
3 Plug the keyboard cable into the port marked with the × icon on the back of the
computer.
Some monitors have a port to which you can connect the keyboard or mouse.
See the information that came with your monitor.
ADB icon
6 Chapter 1Connecting a keyboard with a built-in cable
1 Plug the mouse cable into the recessed port on the back of the keyboard.
The plug and the port are marked with the × icon (symbol). The positions of
the port and icon on your keyboard may be different from those pictured.
By the way: A port marked with the × icon is called an Apple Desktop Bus
(ADB) port.
2 Plug the keyboard cable into the port marked with the × icon on the back of the
computer.
Some monitors have a port to which you can connect the keyboard or mouse.
See the information that came with your monitor.
Connecting other equipment
If you are new to the Macintosh, it’s a good idea to get some experience using
your computer before you connect other equipment, such as a printer or
scanner. To learn basic Macintosh skills, continue with the instructions in
this chapter.
When you’re ready to connect other equipment to your Macintosh, see the
instructions in Chapter 3.
This cable plugs into the Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) port
on the back of the computer. The ADB port on the
computer is marked with the × icon.
Plug the mouse into the recessed port on
the keyboard. The flat part of the plug should
be pointing down, as shown here.
Getting Started 7Turning the computer on
Follow these steps to turn the computer on:
1 Turn on the monitor.
See the information that came with your monitor for the location of the
power button.
2 Turn on your computer by pressing the Power key.
The Power key is at the top of the keyboard. You can recognize this key by the
triangle outline on it (P).
You hear a tone from the computer as it starts up.
8 Chapter 13 Check to see what’s on your screen.
m If you see the Macintosh desktop, as in the illustration below, your system
software has already been installed, and your computer is ready to use.
Skip now to the section “What’s Next?” later in this chapter.
m If you see a blinking question mark, you need to install system software on
your computer’s hard disk. (System software is the set of programs your
computer uses to start itself up.) See “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS
System Software” in Chapter 7 for information on how to install system
software.
m If you see anything else on your screen, or nothing at all, see the next
section, “Problems Turning Your Computer On?”
Getting Started 9
Macintosh desktop
Hard disk iconProblems turning your computer on?
If you don’t see anything on the screen, check these items to see if you can
identify the problem:
m Is the computer plugged into a power source? If it is plugged into a power
strip, is the power strip turned on?
m Is the computer turned on? The power-on light on the front panel should
be on. If it isn’t on, press the standby power button on the computer’s back
panel (marked with the symbol ¨).
m Are the keyboard and mouse cables connected correctly? (Don’t disconnect
the keyboard or mouse cable while the computer is on. You could damage
your equipment.)
m Is the monitor power cord plugged in?
m Is the monitor turned on? (Check the power-on light on the front of the
monitor.)
m Is the monitor cable attached firmly to both the monitor and computer?
m Is the brightness control on the monitor adjusted correctly? (On Apple
monitors, the brightness control is marked with the symbol Û.)
10 Chapter 1What’s next?
Congratulations! You’ve finished setting up your computer. Now continue
with one of the following steps:
m If you are new to the Macintosh, turn to the next section, “Learning
the Basics.”
m If you are an experienced Macintosh user, turn to Chapter 2, “Getting
Help,” to learn about Macintosh Guide, your main source of information
when you’re working with the Mac OS (the Macintosh environment).
m If you want to connect other equipment, such as a printer, to your
computer, see Chapter 3, “Connecting Additional Equipment.”
m If you want to start using DOS or Windows application programs on your
Macintosh, turn to Chapter 5, “Operating in the PC Environment.”
Before you begin working with your computer, be sure to read the important
health and safety information in Appendix A.
IMPORTANT If you need to turn off your computer at any point, please see
“Turning the Computer Off” later in this chapter. It is very important to use
the correct procedure for shutting down your Macintosh before turning it off.
Getting Started 11Learning the basics
If you are new to the Macintosh, you should begin by looking at the easy-touse program called the Macintosh Tutorial. The tutorial teaches you the basic
skills you’ll need to use your computer in the Macintosh environment. To
start the tutorial, follow these steps:
1 Slide the mouse along your mouse pad or desk.
Hold the mouse as shown, with the cable pointing away from you. Don’t press
the mouse button (under your index finger). Notice that the arrow (8) on the
screen moves in the same direction that you move the mouse.
If the arrow doesn’t move, make sure that the cables connecting the mouse
and keyboard are secure and that your mouse is positioned as shown in the
illustration.
2 Move the tip of the arrow (8) to the question mark (h) in the upper-right portion of the
screen.
If you run out of room on your mouse pad or desk while moving the mouse,
pick up the mouse and place it where there’s more room. (The arrow on the
screen moves only when the mouse is in contact with the mouse pad or desk.)
3 With the tip of the arrow on the question mark, press and hold down the mouse button.
A list of choices (called a menu) appears. This is the Guide (h) menu, which
is the place to go when you have a question about how to use your computer
in the Macintosh environment (Mac OS). (The Guide [h] menu is not
available when you’re in the PC environment.)
Mouse button
12 Chapter 14 While holding down the mouse button, move the arrow until the words “Macintosh
Tutorial” are highlighted, then release the mouse button.
A window appears welcoming you to the tutorial. You can set this book aside
for now and follow the instructions on the screen. When you have completed
the tutorial, return to this book.
Reviewing the basics
The following illustration summarizes many of the basic skills and terms you
learned from the tutorial.
Getting Started 13
To throw away an item you
no longer want, drag it to the
Trash and choose Empty
Trash from the Special menu.
This icon represents your
computer’s internal hard disk.
To change the size or shape of
a window, drag the size box.
To bring hidden portions of a
window’s contents into view,
click the scroll arrows.
The strip across the
top of the screen is
called the menu bar.
The symbols and
words in it represent
menus of commands.
Icons are small pictures
that represent disks,
folders, programs, and
documents. To open
an icon, click the
icon twice quickly.
Windows are boxes
that display text,
graphics, or icons. To
bring a partially
covered window to the
front, click anywhere
in the window.
To close a window,
click the close box.
You can have several application
programs open at once. To see which
program is active or to switch from
one program to another, use this
menu (called the Application menu).
To find an answer to
a question about the
Macintosh
environment, look in
the Guide (h) menu.
To move a window,
drag it by the title bar.Turning the computer off
To turn the computer off, you choose Shut Down from the Special menu.
Detailed instructions follow.
1 Move the tip of the arrow to the word “Special” at the top center of the screen.
If the word “Special” does not appear at the top of the screen, you’re working
in the wrong program. Pull down the Application menu (to the right of the
Guide [h] menu) and choose Finder. Then try step 1 again.
2 With the tip of the arrow on the word “Special,” press and hold down the mouse button.
3 While holding down the mouse button, move the arrow down the list of choices until the
words “Shut Down” are highlighted, then release the mouse button.
You can also shut down your computer from the keyboard.
1 Press the Power key (marked with a triangle) on the keyboard.
You will see a message asking whether you want to shut down or continue
working.
2 Click Shut Down.
To turn the computer on, simply press the Power key again.
WARNING Do not turn the computer off by pressing the standby power
button on the back panel. If you do so, you may lose any work you
haven’t previously saved to a disk. You also risk losing any open
documents.
14 Chapter 1Where to find answers
When you have questions about using your Macintosh, there are several
places you can look for answers.
In this book
Use this book to help you set up your computer and learn about it,
or to find solutions to problems.
In the Guide menu
The Guide menu (marked with the h icon) is your main source
of information about the Macintosh environment. To learn how to
get different kinds of help from the Guide menu, see Chapter 2 in
this book.
In other manuals
For answers to questions about other equipment or about
application programs you have purchased, see the manuals
that came with the equipment or programs. Manuals for DOS
and Windows are included with your computer.
From Apple’s customer support hotline
If you can’t find an answer in any of the materials provided, call the
customer support hotline. (The phone number for the hotline is in
the service and support information that came with your computer.)
User’s Guide
Macintosh
Getting Started 15The Guide menu is your main source of information when you’re working
with your computer in the Macintosh environment. The menu is identified by
a question mark (h) in the upper-right corner of the screen.
(If you need instructions on using DOS or Windows, see the appropriate
manual.)
17
2 Getting Help
Use the instructions in this
chapter to learn about the help
available to you in the Guide menu.Getting answers to your questions
When you have a question while working in the Macintosh environment, you
can get the answer by choosing Macintosh Guide from the Guide menu.
1 Pull down the Application menu (in the upper-right corner of the screen) and choose
Finder to make it the active application program.
A checkmark in the menu indicates that the Finder is the active program.
2 Pull down the Guide menu (marked with the h icon) and choose Macintosh Guide.
The Macintosh Guide window appears.
Whenever you use Macintosh Guide, its window remains in front of other
windows. If the window gets in your way, you can move it by dragging its
title bar (the gray bar across the top of the window).
18 Chapter 23 Notice the three buttons at the top of the window: Topics, Index, and Look For.
Macintosh Guide gives you three ways of finding information:
m Topics lets you choose from a list of general subjects; it is like the table of
contents in a book.
m Index lets you choose from an alphabetical list of more specific subjects; it
is like the index in a book.
m Look For lets you search for information related to a specific word or phrase
that you type.
In the following sections you will practice using each method.
If you have problems while using Macintosh Guide, see “Tips for Using
Macintosh Guide” later in this chapter.
Getting answers with the Topics button
1 In the Macintosh Guide window, click the Topics button.
A list of general topics appears on the left side of the Macintosh Guide
window. (Depending on the hardware and software you have, the list of topics
may look different.)
Getting Help 192 Click “Setting Options” in the list of topics.
When you click any topic area, a list of related questions appears on the right
side of the Macintosh Guide window.
3 Click the question “How do I set the time and date?” and then click OK. Or double-click
the question.
A small window appears with instructions for you to follow.
4 Read and follow the instructions in this window.
Macintosh Guide provides step-by-step instructions to answer the question
you selected. When you have completed each step, click the right arrow in the
lower-right corner to see the next step.
5 When you have completed all the steps, click the Topics button in the lower-left corner to
return to the main Macintosh Guide window.
Now continue with the next section.
20 Chapter 2
Click here to see the next
step (if there is one).
To get instructions,
click a question…
…and then click OK.
If you want to
return to the main
Macintosh Guide
window, click here.Getting answers with the Index button
1 In the Macintosh Guide window, click the Index button.
An alphabetical list of subjects appears on the left side of the window.
2 Scroll through the alphabetical list until the phrase “background pattern” is visible.
You can scroll through the list either by dragging the slider to the letter B or
by using the scroll bar at the right of the list.
3 Click the phrase “background pattern” in the alphabetical list.
When you click any index entry, a list of related questions appears on the
right side of the Macintosh Guide window.
Getting Help 21
Scroll bar
Slider
To get instructions,
click a question…
…and then click OK.4 Click the question “How do I change the background pattern?” and then click OK. Or
double-click the question.
A small window appears with instructions for you to follow.
5 Read and follow the instructions in the window.
Macintosh Guide provides step-by-step instructions to answer the question
you selected. When you have completed each step, click the right arrow in the
lower-right corner to see the next step.
6 When you have completed all the steps, click the Topics button in the lower-left corner to
return to the main Macintosh Guide window.
Now continue with the next section.
22 Chapter 2
Click here to see the next
step (if there is one).
If you want to
return to the main
Macintosh Guide
window, click here.Getting answers with the Look For button
1 In the Macintosh Guide window, click the Look For button.
A small box appears on the left side of the window, where you can type text.
2 Click the arrow button to activate the text box.
3 Type “sound” in the text box and then click Search.
When you click Search, a list of questions related to the word or phrase you
typed appears on the right side of the Macintosh Guide window.
Getting Help 23
To activate the text
box, click here.
Type a word or phrase
in the text box…
…and then click here.
To get instructions,
click a question…
…and then click OK.4 Click the question “How do I change the beep sound?” and then click OK. Or doubleclick the question.
A small window appears with instructions for you to follow.
5 Read and follow the instructions in the window.
Macintosh Guide provides step-by-step instructions to answer the question
you selected. When you have completed each step, click the right arrow in the
lower-right corner to display the next step.
6 When you have completed all the steps, click the close box in the upper-left corner to
close Macintosh Guide.
24 Chapter 2
If you want to close
Macintosh Guide,
click here.
Click here to see the next
step (if there is one).Tips for using Macintosh Guide
Here are a few tips for using Macintosh Guide effectively:
m Macintosh Guide is available only in the Macintosh environment, and
only when you are in the Finder—the desktop area where you can see
the icons of disks, folders, and files. (Other programs may also have
help available in the Guide menu, however.) If you don’t see
Macintosh Guide in the Guide menu, pull down the Application menu
(to the right of the Guide menu) and choose Finder.
m Follow the steps when you’re instructed to; don’t skip ahead or read
ahead. That way the computer can check to make sure you’ve done a
step correctly.
m Unlike most windows, the Macintosh Guide window stays in front of
other windows on the screen so that your instructions are never
covered. If you need to move the Guide window out of the way, drag
it by the title bar at the top of the window.
You can also move the window out of the way by clicking the zoom
box. Click the box once to shrink the window; click it a second time
to expand the window to its original size.
m If you need more information about an instruction or a term, click the
button labeled “Huh?” to get further explanation. (The “Huh?” button
is dimmed when no additional information is available.)
m If you want to return to the main Macintosh Guide window, click the
Topics button in the lower-left corner of the Guide window.
m When you’re finished using Macintosh Guide, click the close box in
the upper-left corner of the window.
Getting Help 25
Zoom box
Close box Title bar
Topics button “Huh?” button Right arrowIdentifying objects on the screen
Sometimes you’ll see an unfamiliar item on the screen and ask yourself,
“What’s that?” You can get an answer by using a Macintosh feature known as
Balloon Help.
Balloon Help explains the function of icons, menus, commands, and other
items in the Macintosh environment using balloons like those you see in
comic strips.
Follow these steps to use Balloon Help:
1 Pull down the Guide menu (marked with the h icon) and choose Show Balloons.
2 Point to any object on the screen that you want to identify.
A balloon appears next to the object. In the following illustration, for
example, pointing to the Trash displays a balloon that explains how to use the
Trash to throw items away.
Although balloons appear next to items when you point to them, the way
you work does not change; you can still select icons, choose commands,
and so on.
3 When you’re finished using Balloon Help, choose Hide Balloons from the Guide menu.
26 Chapter 2Learning useful shortcuts
You can perform many tasks in the Finder more quickly if you use keyboard
or mouse shortcuts. For example, instead of clicking an icon and choosing
Open from the File menu, you can simply double-click the icon to open it.
Follow these steps to learn keyboard and mouse shortcuts:
1 Pull down the Guide menu (marked with the h icon) and choose Shortcuts.
The main Macintosh Shortcuts window appears.
Getting Help 272 Click one of the category buttons.
Another window appears, describing shortcuts for that category.
3 Read about the shortcuts available for the category you selected.
Click the right arrow in the lower-right corner of the window to display the
next window (if there is one).
4 When you finish reading about the shortcuts for your category, click the Topics button in
the lower-left corner to return to the main Macintosh Shortcuts window. Or click the
close box in the upper-left corner to close the window.
28 Chapter 2
If you want to
close the window,
click here.
Click here to see the next
window (if there is one).
Click here to return to
the main Macintosh
Shortcuts window for
more categories.The illustration below shows a basic Macintosh system. You can expand your
computer system by connecting additional hardware (such as a printer,
modem, or external audio speakers).
Mouse
Monitor
Computer
Keyboard
Hard disk drive
(internal)
Floppy disk drive
CD-ROM drive
(optional)
Volume buttons
Use these buttons to
change the volume of the
computer’s sound.
CD-ROM drive
Open/Close button
Power-on light
Headphone jack
Remote control sensor
-
f
29
3 Connecting Additional Equipment
Read this chapter for information on
expanding your computer system
with additional hardware.Where to connect additional equipment
The illustration on this page shows where equipment should be connected to
your computer.
For instructions on connecting additional equipment such as a printer or
scanner, see the manual that came with the equipment.
-
W Modem port
[ Printer port
Connects your Macintosh
to a printer or
LocalTalk network.
V ADB port
Connects your
Macintosh to input
equipment, such as a
keyboard or a trackball.
Å
g SCSI port
Connects your Macintosh to
SCSI equipment, such as hard
disk drives and scanners.
Connects an external
modem to your Macintosh. Sound output port
Connects your Macintosh
to headphones, externally
powered (amplified)
speakers, or other audio
output equipment.
Sound input port
Connects your Macintosh to a professional-quality
microphone or other audio input equipment.
F Security lock
port
Standby power button
² Power socket
ª Monitor port
Connects your monitor
to your Macintosh.
Communication card
access cover
Covers port for optional
communication card.
Joystick port
Connects your Macintosh
to a joystick or other game
controller. (For the PC
environment only.)
Video input card (optional)
Connects your Macintosh to a video camera,
VCR, or other video equipment.
TV tuner card (optional)
Connects your Macintosh
to an external TV antenna
or cable TV service.
¨
30 Chapter 3Connecting an Apple PlainTalk Microphone
Your computer has a sound input port, which you can use to connect an Apple
PlainTalk Microphone.
Use PlainTalk only: You should connect only the Apple PlainTalk
Microphone. Other models of microphone will not work with your
Macintosh.
To connect the microphone, do this:
m Plug the microphone’s connector into the sound input port (marked with the icon X)
on the back of the computer.
Sound
input port
Sound
output port
Connecting Additional Equipment 31Connecting external stereo speakers
You can take advantage of your computer’s stereo sound output by attaching
externally powered (amplified) speakers. (Only externally powered speakers
will work with your Macintosh.)
1 Assemble the speakers and the cable you need.
You need a cable with stereo miniplugs at each end to connect one or both
speakers to the computer. (Some speakers require a dual-plug adapter.
Others, like those shown here, accept a single stereo miniplug and are joined
by standard speaker wires.)
The following illustration shows the equipment configuration and the
connections for a computer sound system.
2 Turn off the Macintosh.
3 Plug a stereo miniplug into the sound output port on the Macintosh.
4 Plug a stereo miniplug into the Audio In port on one of the speakers.
If the speakers take a dual-plug cable, connect both plugs to the speakers’
Audio In ports.
Stereo miniplug
Audio In port
- Sound output port
Externally
powered
speakers
32 Chapter 35 Connect the speakers together with speaker wires, if necessary.
6 Turn on the computer.
You hear the computer’s sound through the external speakers.
Note: To control the volume of your external speakers, use the volume button
on the front of the computer. If you are playing an audio compact disc (CD),
you may also need to adjust the volume control in the program you’re using to
play CDs. For more information on sound and playing audio CDs, see the
“Sound” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. For
information on hearing sounds in the PC environment, see “Turning On PC
Sounds” in Chapter 6.
Connecting a game controller
Connect a game controller, such as a joystick, as shown.
m Attach the joystick’s connector to the joystick port on the lower-right corner of the
computer’s back panel. Tighten the thumbscrews securely.
Joystick port
Connecting Additional Equipment 33Expanding memory
The random-access memory (RAM) in your computer can be expanded.
Installing additional RAM adds more memory chips to your computer and
expands its capabilities. The Technical Information booklet that came with
your computer describes how much additional memory can be installed in
your Macintosh.
You can also add up to 32 megabytes (MB) of RAM for use exclusively in the
PC environment. See Appendix B, “Installing an Expansion Card or Memory
for the PC Environment,” for further information.
Memory for your computer is provided in packages called Single Inline
Memory Modules (SIMMs). The SIMMs must be the correct type for your
computer. It is very important that the SIMMs be correctly installed in your
Macintosh. Incorrect installation can result in errors, unpredictable results,
and damage to your equipment and data.
Installing internal drives
Your Macintosh can hold up to three internal storage devices, including a
floppy disk drive, a CD-ROM (compact disc read-only memory) drive, and a
hard disk drive (several capacities are available). These drives may already be
installed. If you want to add or replace an internal drive, see your Appleauthorized dealer.
WARNING To avoid damage to your computer, Apple recommends that
only an Apple-certified technician install additional RAM. Consult the
service and support information that came with your computer for
instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or
Apple for service. If you attempt to install additional RAM yourself, any
damage you may cause to your equipment will not be covered by the
limited warranty on your computer. See an Apple-authorized dealer or
service provider for information about this or any other warranty
question.
34 Chapter 3Your computer has several Macintosh application programs already installed,
as well as some Macintosh programs that must installed before you can use
them. You will need to run an application program’s Installer program before
the application program will work. You’ll find these programs on your
hard disk.
You may want to experiment with AppleScript, one of the programs on your
hard disk. With AppleScript you can automate tasks in the Finder and other
scriptable programs (programs that support AppleScript). Instructions for
using AppleScript are included in the AppleScript folder.
If your computer has enough memory, you can install QuickDraw GX and
PowerTalk. QuickDraw GX gives your computer more powerful printing and
font capabilities. PowerTalk provides an open collaboration environment with
a universal mailbox and other electronic mail services. To install each of these
programs, open the folder of the item you want to install and double-click the
Installer icon.
Another program, Video Monitor, is for use with computers that have audiovisual (AV) capabilities. For information on using Video Monitor, see the
“Video” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu.
If you want to install DOS application programs, see Chapter 5, “Operating in
the PC Environment,” and refer to your DOS manual.
35
4
Installing and Using Application Programs
in the Macintosh Environment
Read this chapter for information on
installing and using application
programs in the Mac OS.Installing Macintosh application programs
You’ll probably want to buy and install additional application programs. See
the manuals you receive with your programs for instructions on installing and
using them.
In most cases, you’ll install a Macintosh application program on your internal
hard disk from floppy disks that contain the program. The following
illustration shows how to insert a floppy disk in your computer’s floppy
disk drive.
To use your programs most effectively, follow these guidelines:
m Put only one copy of each program on your hard disk. Having more than
one copy can cause errors.
m Whenever you copy a program disk to your hard disk, be careful not to
copy a System Folder. Always check to see what you’ve copied, and drag
any extra System Folders to the Trash.
m If a program malfunctions consistently, try installing a fresh copy. If that
doesn’t help, find out from the software manufacturer whether your version
of the program is compatible with the system software you’re using.
For instructions on how to eject floppy disks, see the “Disks” topic of
Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu.
Insert the floppy disk, metal
end first, into the floppy disk
drive of your computer.
36 Chapter 4Working with several programs at a time
You can open as many application programs and desk accessories as your
computer’s memory allows.
All open programs in the Mac OS are listed in the Application menu at the
right end of the menu bar. The name of the active program (the one you’re
using right now) has a checkmark next to it, and its icon appears in the
menu bar.
You can have programs open in both the Macintosh and PC environments at
the same time, but only your Macintosh programs appear in the Application
menu.
Finding out which programs are open
If you have several programs and windows open, you can find out which
program is active and which other programs are open by pulling down the
Application menu.
Switching programs
You can switch to another open program or desk accessory by choosing its
name from the Application menu.
If a program’s icon is dimmed in the menu, that means its windows are
hidden. Choosing the program from the Application menu displays its
windows.
You can also switch to another program by clicking in a window that belongs
to an open program, or by double-clicking a program icon (or the icon of a
document that was created with the program).
Installing and Using Application Programs in the Macintosh Environment 37
The Finder icon
Commands to hide or
display open windows
Open programs A checkmark indicates
the active program.For instructions on switching from the Macintosh environment to the PC
environment, see the section “Switching Between the Macintosh and PC
Environments” in Chapter 5.
Hiding and showing windows on the desktop
You can hide all windows except those of the active program by choosing
Hide Others from the Application menu.
The other programs remain open even though their windows are hidden.
When you switch to another program, its windows become visible again.
If you want to see all the open windows, choose Show All from the
Application menu.
Backing up your files
Making backup copies of important files is good protection against possible
damage to the originals.
m You can back up files stored on your hard disk by copying them to floppy
disks.
m You can back up an entire floppy disk by copying it to another floppy disk,
or to a hard disk.
m You can use a commercial backup program to copy new and changed files
from a hard disk to another hard disk, to a tape drive, or to a series of
floppy disks.
m If your computer is on a network, you can back up files by copying them to
a shared disk on the network.
To back up files in the Macintosh environment, copy the files to a disk
manually or use a Macintosh backup program. Do not use PC backup
programs in the Mac OS.
38 Chapter 4Your DOS-compatible Macintosh comes with standard versions of DOS and
Windows already installed. Also installed is software you can use to work in
both the Macintosh and PC environments and share data between the two
environments. This software is described in this chapter and the next.
This chapter covers how to
m switch between the Mac OS and the PC environment
m set up and operate in the PC environment
m use floppy disks and disk drives
m cut, copy, and paste data between Mac OS and DOS or Windows
documents
m run network software
m use multimedia, MIDI, and game applications
m use both Macintosh and PC peripheral devices in the PC environment
39
5 Operating in the PC Environment
Follow the instructions in this
chapter to start working in the PC
environment on your Macintosh.Switching between the Macintosh and PC environments
You switch between the Mac OS and the PC environment using the PC Setup
control panel. Follow these steps:
1 Choose Control Panels from the Apple (K) menu.
2 Double-click the PC Setup icon to open the control panel
3 Click Switch to PC to switch to the PC environment.
4 To switch back to the Mac OS, press x-Return.
40 Chapter 5Switching with a keyboard command
You can set a keyboard command, or hot key, to switch between the Mac OS
and the PC environment. To set the hot key, you must be in the Macintosh
environment (if you are in the PC environment, press x-Return).
m To choose a hot key, open the PC Setup control panel and press the Tab key to select
the Hot Key text field; then type the keys you want to use.
The x key is automatically included. You can use any alphanumeric or special
key. You can also include other modifier keys (Option, Control, and/or Shift).
x-Return always switches from the PC to the Mac OS, regardless of the
control panel setting.
You can also switch to the PC by clicking Switch to PC in the control panel.
Ejecting disks in the PC environment
Here are a few commands you will find useful while you work in the PC
environment.
m To eject a disk from the Macintosh disk drive while you’re in the PC environment,
press x-E.
m To eject a CD-ROM disc in the PC environment, press x-Y.
For more details, see the section “Working in the PC Environment,” later in
this chapter.
Turning the PC on and off
You use the buttons near the bottom of the control panel to switch
environments, to restart the PC, or to shut the PC off.
m Switch to PC immediately switches to the PC environment.
m Start/Restart PC starts the PC if it’s off, or restarts it if it’s running (but
doesn’t switch to the PC environment).
m Shut down PC turns off the PC.
IMPORTANT Clicking Off at the top of the PC Setup control panel prevents
you from switching to the PC environment. When you restart the computer,
the PC environment is turned off and any RAM you requested for it is
available to the Mac OS.
Operating in the PC Environment 41Starting the PC automatically
To have the PC start automatically when you turn on your Macintosh:
m Click the checkbox next to Auto-start PC.
To make the PC environment appear when you turn on your Macintosh:
1 Click the checkbox next to Switch at Startup.
2 In the Control Panels folder, double-click the General Controls icon to open it.
3 Turn off the Shutdown Warning option in the General Controls panel.
If Shutdown Warning is turned on when you switch from the Mac OS to the
PC environment, you will not be able to switch back again for a few minutes.
Fading the screen
To have the screen fade briefly before switching environments, click the
checkbox next to Fade Screens.
Setting up the PC environment
In order to take advantage of certain utilities, you may need to modify your
DOS CONFIG.SYS file. For information about how to edit DOS files, see
your DOS manual. For information about the kinds of changes you might
need to make, read the information below.
Note: Your DOS system software also includes alternate versions of the
CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files that allow you to select from a
variety of memory management options each time you start DOS. For
information on how to install these alternate files, see “Replacing the
CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT Files” in the section “Reinstalling
the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8.
42 Chapter 5Memory management utilities
If you use a memory management utility such as EMM386 or QEMM, you
need to configure it to be compatible with your DOS-compatibility hardware
and software.
IMPORTANT Apple does not recommend using automated memory
configuration utilities with your DOS-compatible Macintosh because they can
require more memory than management utilities you configure manually.
Additionally, some memory configuration utilities may not be able to
determine the exact nature of the DOS-compatibility hardware, and therefore
may not be compatible.
If you want to use EMM386 (included as part of DOS) and don’t require
expanded memory, set CONFIG.SYS to the following:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS RAM=D000-EFFF
If you require expanded memory, set CONFIG.SYS to the following:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM=D000-EFFF FRAME=D000
If you want to use QEMM, use the frame option (ST:F):
DEVICE=C:\QEMM\QEMM386.SYS RAM ST:F ARAM=B080-B7FF
ARAM=C900-DFFF R:1
If you want to use the Stealth mapping option (ST:M), set CONFIG.SYS to
DEVICE=C:\QEMM\QEMM386.SYS RAM ST:M X=C800-CFFF X=FC00-
FCFF X=FE00-FFFF ARAM=B080-B7FF ARAM=C900-DFFF R:2
Configure other memory management utilities such that D000 through EFFF
is the only area in the BIOS that can be mapped to upper memory.
To prevent the ROM BIOS from becoming corrupted when the
DOS-compatibility card is configured for 2 MB of memory, set the
switch in the CONFIG.SYS file to turn memory testing off.
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF
For more information on making the best use of memory, read the sections on
memory management in your DOS manual, or refer to the documentation for
your memory manager if you are using something other than EMM386.
Operating in the PC Environment 43Working in the PC environment
When you switch to DOS or Windows, you’re operating in a real PC world.
The floppy disk drive, mouse, and keyboard all act as they would with a
standard PC. There are, however, some mapping issues you need to be
aware of.
Floppy disk drives and floppy disks
m The Macintosh floppy disk drive is drive A. To eject a disk from this disk
drive while you’re in the PC environment, press x-E.
m If you insert a Mac OS-format floppy disk while you’re in the PC
environment, it is ejected.
You can access an unlocked floppy disk only in the environment that was in
the foreground when the floppy disk was inserted.
When you insert a locked PC disk, both environments have access to it.
Blank disks are formatted as DOS disks in the PC environment. In the
Mac OS, you can format disks for DOS or the Mac OS (among other choices).
Some blank disks are preformatted by the manufacturer. If you insert a new,
blank disk in the PC environment and it is ejected, it may have been
preformatted as a Macintosh disk. To use the disk in the PC environment, you
must first return to the Mac OS and reformat (reinitialize) the disk as a
DOS disk.
The Mac OS Disk Copy application program cannot read a DOS-formatted
floppy disk unless the disk is unlocked.
Floppy disks formatted in the PC environment in DOS 720K format are not
readable by some DOS computers. Instead, format the disk in the Macintosh
environment, choosing “DOS 720K” as the format. See “How do I prepare a
disk for use?” in the “Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the
Guide (h) menu.
Restarting the PC from a floppy disk
To restart (reboot) the PC environment from a floppy disk, insert the disk into
the floppy drive. Press x-Control-Alt-[keypad] period. When the floppy disk
is ejected, immediately reinsert it into the disk drive.
44 Chapter 5CD-ROM discs and drives
You can use DOS and Windows CD-ROM discs in Apple CD-ROM drives.
To eject a CD-ROM disc in the PC environment, press x-Y. If the CD-ROM
disc cannot be ejected (because a file is in use or the CD-ROM disc is being
shared), the Macintosh beeps.
You can listen to audio CDs in either the PC environment or Mac OS, but you
cannot control them from both environments at the same time. For example, if
you began listening to an audio CD while working in the PC environment
and then switched to the Mac OS, you would have to return to the PC
environment in order to adjust the CD’s volume.
Playing an audio CD in Windows while running low-level media tools, such
as PC Tools or Microsoft Anti-Virus, may cause your system to crash. It is
best to reduce computer activity to a minimum while using such tools.
You cannot use more than one CD-ROM drive at a time in the PC
environment.
The PC sets up a drive letter (E) for a CD-ROM drive even if no drive is
connected. If no CD-ROM drive is connected to your system, you can use this
drive letter and free some memory by editing the AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS files.
In the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, add REM to the beginning of the line
LH C:\DOS\MSCDEX /D:CDDRVR /L:E
In the CONFIG.SYS file, add REM to the beginning of the line
DEVICE=C:\Apple\CDROM.SYS /D:CDDRVR
Prefacing these commands with REM makes DOS ignore them.
Operating in the PC Environment 45Pointing device
The standard Macintosh pointing device has one button; most PC devices
have two. The button on the Macintosh pointing device behaves like the left
button on a PC device.
m To simulate the right button, press the = key on the keypad.
m To press the left and right buttons at the same time, press the mouse button
and the = key simultaneously.
If you have Windows installed, you can use its Mouse control panel to switch
the button assignment.
Note: DOS does not come with a mouse driver. A mouse driver for Windows
is installed on your system along with Windows, however.
Keyboard
The DOS-compatible Macintosh supports all Apple keyboards.
The Option key on an Apple keyboard can be used as the Alt key in the PC
environment.
The Apple Extended Keyboard and the Apple Design Keyboard can be used
normally. With the Apple Keyboard II, use the following equivalents for keys
on a PC keyboard. These equivalents also apply to the Apple Adjustable
Keyboard if the function key keyboard isn’t plugged in.
46 Chapter 5PC key Equivalent on Macintosh keyboard
F1 through F9 x-1 through 9
F10 x-0
F11 x-(minus)
F12 x-(equals)
F13 x-[
F14 x-]
F15 x-\
Home x-[keypad] 7
PageUp x-[keypad] 9
End x-[keypad] 1
PageDown x-[keypad] 3
Insert x-[keypad] 0
Del x-[keypad] (period)
Using the Apple Adjustable keyboard: If you are using the Apple Adjustable
keyboard, you cannot use key combinations made up of keys from the main
keyboard and function keys (for example, Shift-F1). This means you cannot
restart the PC using the x-Control-Alt-[keypad] period key combination.
Click Restart PC in the PC Setup control panel instead.
MacShare
MacShare is a PC application program that lets the PC view Mac OS folders
and volumes as drive letters. You can have as many shared drives as there are
drive letters.
m To specify the number of drive letters, modify your CONFIG.SYS file to include a
LASTDRIVE statement.
LASTDRIVE=x
where x is a letter between E and Z. (The PC reserves drives A through D
for its floppy and hard disk drives.)
Operating in the PC Environment 47For example, if you use M as your LASTDRIVE value, you could have up to
nine extra drives using drives labeled E through M. A CD-ROM drive, if
installed, uses E.
Each additional drive letter uses 100 bytes of PC memory.
Clipboard
You can exchange clipboard information between the PC environment and the
Mac OS. The type of information you can exchange depends on whether
you’re running DOS or Windows.
Windows Clipboard
You can exchange text, PICT, RTF, and bitmap files between the Mac OS and
Windows using the Copy and Paste commands from the Edit menu. You can
also purchase additional third-party software to provide translations for other
data types.
DOS “Clipboard”
If you’re running DOS, you can capture text or a PICT file from a region of
the screen that you define using the DOSCLIP TSR (Terminate-and-StayResident program). The memory-resident program is loaded automatically
each time you switch to DOS. You activate DOSCLIP by pressing a keyboard
combination, or keystroke, (preset to Shift-Control-C) and then selecting a
region to copy.
Keystroke starts process: On the PC side, enter the keystroke first; then,
holding down the mouse button, select a region to copy. (This process works
only if a DOS mouse driver is installed.) Releasing the mouse button sends
the selection to the Clipboard. In the Mac OS, you select the area first and
then issue the keystroke.
48 Chapter 5To capture text or a PICT file from a region on the screen if you don’t have a
DOS mouse driver installed, follow these instructions:
1 Activate DOSCLIP.
The DOSCLIP activation keystroke is preset to Shift-Control-C.
A cursor appears in the center of the screen.
2 Use the keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor to the upper-left corner of the region
you want to copy.
3 Holding down the Shift key, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the lower-right
corner of the region.
4 Release the Shift key.
The selected area is copied to the Clipboard.
m You can paste text into DOS from the Mac OS. The preset keystroke is
Shift-Control-V.
Changing the predefined keystrokes in DOS
You change the preset keystrokes for copying and pasting by editing the
AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
m To change the keystroke for the Copy command, use the form
C:\APPLE\DOSCLIP/Cnm…
m To change the keystroke for the Paste command, use the form
C:\APPLE\DOSCLIP/Pnm…
In both cases, n is a number representing a key scan code from the following
table, and m… is one or more of the characters A, C, and S (for Alt, Control,
and Left- or Right-shift).
For example, the preset code for Copy is /C46CA—/C[opy using the key] 46
[which is C, plus the] C[ontrol key plus the] A[lt key]. To change the
keystroke to F3, you’d type the following:
C:\APPLE\DOSCLIP/C61
Note: To get on-screen help about other DOSCLIP options, type
DOSCLIP /? at the DOS prompt.
Operating in the PC Environment 49Key Scan code Key Scan code
0 11 ' " 40
1 2 , < 51
2 3 - _ 12
3 4 . > 52
4 5 / ? 53
5 6 ; : 39
6 7 = + 13
7 8 [ { 26
8 9 \ | 43
9 10 ] } 27
` ~ 41
+ (keypad) 78 tab 15
- (keypad) 74 alt 56
arrow (down) 80 bksp 14
arrow (left) 75 caps 58
arrow (right) 77 center 76
arrow (up) 72 ctrl 29
del 83 pgdn 81
end 79 pgup 73
enter 28 prtsc 55
esc 1 scroll 70
home 71 shift (left side) 42
ins 82 shift (right side) 54
num 69 space 57
continues .
50 Chapter 5Key Scan code Key Scan code
F1 59 F7 65
F2 60 F8 66
F3 61 F9 67
F4 62 F10 68
F5 63 F11 87
F6 64 F12 88
A 30 N 49
B 48 O 24
C 46 P 25
D 32 Q 16
E 18 R 19
F 33 S 31
G 34 T 20
H 35 U 22
I 23 V 47
J 36 W 17
K 37 X 45
L 38 Y 21
M 50 Z 44
Operating in the PC Environment 51Tips for using the Clipboard
When the PC environment is running, you have three separate clipboards to
work with—the Mac OS Clipboard, the Windows Clipboard, and DOSCLIP.
Translation between the clipboards takes place each time you switch between
the PC and Macintosh environments. When using these clipboards there are a
few things to keep in mind.
m If you copy an item to the Macintosh Clipboard, switch to Windows, and
then copy an item to the Windows Clipboard, the original Macintosh
Clipboard contents will be deleted. To prevent this, remove the PC
Clipboard extension from the Extensions folder (inside the System Folder
in the Mac OS).
m In order to translate the contents of the Macintosh Clipboard to the
Windows Clipboard, Windows must be already running when you switch
environments. If you switch to DOS and then launch Windows, the
Macintosh Clipboard will be translated into DOSCLIP, and the Windows
Clipboard will be blank.
m In order to translate the contents of the Macintosh Clipboard to DOSCLIP,
Windows must not be running when you switch environments. If Windows
is running when you switch to the PC, the Macintosh Clipboard will be
translated into the Windows Clipboard, and DOSCLIP will be blank.
m DOSCLIP contents cannot be pasted into Windows, or vice versa.
m Graphics can be copied from a DOS application program to DOSCLIP, but
graphics cannot be pasted into a DOS program from DOSCLIP.
m After copying a graphic from DOS using DOSCLIP, you may experience
difficulty in pasting the graphic into a Macintosh application program.
If this happens, try increasing the Macintosh program’s memory.
(See the question “How do I change a program’s memory size?“ in the
“Working with Programs” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the
Guide [h] menu.)
m Sounds cannot be copied between the Macintosh and the PC.
m Plain text is automatically translated from one environment to another, but
in order to retain font and style information, additional Macintosh Easy
Open translators must be used (for example, MacLink Plus from DataViz).
52 Chapter 5m When using DOSCLIP from within certain application programs, it may
not be possible to select the text using the mouse. In these cases, either use
the keyboard to select your text, or check that the standard DOS mouse
driver is not loaded.
m When the PC environment is active, all Macintosh programs are put in the
background to allow the PC Clipboard to run in the foreground. If you do
not want your Macintosh programs to run in the background while you are
in the PC environment, you must disable the Clipboard translation by
removing the PC Clipboard Extension from the Extensions folder (inside
the System Folder in the Mac OS).
Running network software
The DOS-Compatibility Software on your computer supports any networking
protocols, operating systems, or application programs that are compatible with
Novell’s Open Data-Link Interface specification (ODI).
m To set up the software, install your networking client software in the PC environment.
Networking client software such as Netware is not included with the DOScompatible Macintosh.
Compatible and incompatible protocols
You can run NetWare in the PC environment at the same time that you’re
running AppleTalk in the Mac OS.
To use IPX or TCP networking protocols, you must have an Ethernet card
installed in your computer’s communication slot. (The Ethernet card is not a
standard feature.)
You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC
environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC
environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot
use the same protocol in both environments at the same time.
If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have
installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the Control Panels
folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the MacIPX
control panel.
Operating in the PC Environment 53If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment, remove MacTCP
from the Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in
the MacTCP control panel.
Network performance is improved by adding memory to the DOScompatibility card installed in your computer, as described in Appendix B.
For more information, see Appendix E, “Installing Network Management
Software.”
Using multimedia, MIDI, and game application programs
These types of programs, whether they are run in the PC or Macintosh
environment, see a marked performance improvement when there is a
memory SIMM on the DOS-compatibility card for the exclusive use of
the PC environment. See the Technical Specifications booklet to determine
whether your computer has a SIMM installed on the DOS-compatibility card.
You can also install a SIMM with greater memory capacity, as described
in Appendix B, “Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC
Environment.” QuickTime application performance is especially improved
with a SIMM.
Some DOS-based MPEG players require a VGA monitor to output video. All
VGA modes can be displayed on Macintosh monitors supported by the DOScompatible Macintosh. If the monitor specified to display the PC is a VGA
monitor, select VGA in the Display box in the PC Setup control panel. You
cannot select VGA for a shared monitor configuration from the PC Setup
control panel if your monitor is not capable of displaying VGA. Multiscan
monitors can display VGA.
54 Chapter 5Using Macintosh peripherals in the PC environment
You use the serial ports of your Macintosh just like the serial ports of any
PC-compatible computer.
The maximum data transfer rate supported by the DOS-compatible hardware
when a COM port is mapped to a Macintosh serial port is 19,200 bits per
second (bps). If you’re capturing serial output to a Mac OS text file, there is
no limit.
Using printers
For DOS or Windows printing, use the LPT1.DOS or LPT1 serial port. In
general, you must use printers that are Macintosh-compatible and use their
corresponding printer extension for the Macintosh. However, in a PC Novell
NetWare environment you can print to a PC-compatible printer attached to a
Novell network. See Appendix E, “Installing Network Management
Software.”
DOS uses the printer selected in the Macintosh Chooser as the default LPT1
device. If you have a serial printer directly connected to a COM port,
however, DOS uses that printer instead.
The DOS-compatible software can process output for Epson and PostScript
printers, and for all printers that use Hewlett-Packard’s page control
language (PCL).
QuickDraw printers such as the StyleWriter or ImageWriter work only with
Epson emulation. (If a printer is not a PostScript or PCL printer, it’s
considered to be a QuickDraw printer.) For non-PostScript PCL printers, use
the appropriate PCL driver in the PC environment. For non-PostScript,
non-PCL printers, configure your DOS application program to use the
Epson LQ-2500 driver. If this driver isn’t available, try another Epson LQ
or LX series driver. Be sure to turn on the PCL option if it’s available for
your printer.
Operating in the PC Environment 55The Epson emulator works by first translating the DOS text to a similar
Macintosh font, then interpreting that text into a series of QuickDraw
commands. Some characters in the original DOS character set may not have
exact translations to a Macintosh font. The use of a PostScript font is
recommended in these cases, because the PostScript standard requires no
translation.
About color: Color printing is not supported under Epson emulation. When
printing from the PC to a color or grayscale QuickDraw printer, be sure to
select the Black & White option in the Print dialog box.
If you have a PCL printer, printing is limited to text-only or graphics-only
when printing over an AppleTalk network. To print text only, select your
printer’s driver in the Windows Control Panel. To print graphics only, choose
the LaserJet III driver from the Windows Control Panel. If you need to print
mixed graphics and text, many Windows programs bit-map their text so that
it becomes a graphic. Additionally, PCL printing of text and graphics together
is possible when printing over a Novell network, where a PC print server is
connected to the PCL printer and handles the print job. Select your printer’s
own driver in the Windows Control Panel.
For PostScript printers, use the Apple LaserWriter II NT driver (or another
PostScript driver if the Apple LaserWriter II NT driver is not available) or the
Windows PostScript driver.
IMPORTANT Be sure to make settings in the Mac OS PC Print Spooler that
match the drivers you use in the PC environment, or your printer will not
work correctly. See “Setting Preferences in the PC Print Spooler” for details.
Turning off Background Printing in the Macintosh Chooser may increase the
performance of some printers.
Configuring a printer for Windows: For better performance when you
configure a printer for Windows, select LPT1.DOS instead of LPT as
the port.
56 Chapter 5IMPORTANT If you try to print a file using a PostScript printer driver for a
non-PostScript printer, and the preferences are set to Epson, your file will not
be printed. Instead, the file will be moved to a folder called “Spooler
Rejected” in the Mac OS. To print the file, choose the proper printer driver in
the PC environment and try again.
Note: Data sent to the LPT1 port is automatically routed to the printer
selected in the Chooser in the Mac OS. There is no actual parallel port on
the DOS-compatible Macintosh.
AppleShare Print Server
The AppleShare Print Server should not be installed in a DOS-compatible
Macintosh because the server’s software conflicts with the PC Print Spooler.
You can, however, connect your DOS-compatible Macintosh to a network that
uses an AppleShare Print Server.
Setting preferences in the PC Print Spooler
You can set preferences in the PC Print Spooler to control a variety of
print functions.
To choose your Print Spooler settings, follow these steps:
1 In the Macintosh environment, open the Extensions folder inside the System Folder.
2 Find the PC Print Spooler icon and open it.
Operating in the PC Environment 573 Choose Preferences from the File menu.
A dialog box appears.
4 Choose your settings as appropriate.
The selection you make for “Interpret non-PostScript as” must match the
type of printer you have specified in the PC environment. If the settings are
mismatched, your printer may produce gibberish. In addition, the PCL option
works only if the printer is set up to accept PCL commands.
The selection you make for “When emulating an Epson printer” determines
how much of a page is available for printing. If you use the option that allows
gaps between pages, configure your application programs to print to a 60-line
page, rather than a 66-line page, or your margins will be off and your pages
will not print correctly.
5 Click OK.
66 lines maximum for Epson: Page sizes greater than 66 lines (standard letter
size paper) are not supported by the Epson driver. Legal and other larger sizes
will be cut off after either 60 or 66 lines, depending on the setting you’ve
chosen. If you find that your printing is clipped at either the top or bottom of
the page, click the No Gaps option.
58 Chapter 5Using PC peripherals
Because of the RS-422 implementation of the Macintosh, the following
RS-232 signals are not available to the PC:
m Carrier Detect (CD)
m Data Set Ready (DSR)
m Request to Send (RTS)
m Ring Indicator (RI)
Applications or serial devices requiring these signals won’t work.
While the DOS-compatible Macintosh does not support Carrier Detect (CD),
you can set most communications application programs to respond to the
CARRIER string sent back by most modems.
For more information about accessing serial ports from DOS, see the
documentation that came with your DOS software.
IMPORTANT The following chart lists the various signals present on the
Macintosh Mini DIN-8 connector, and on what pins these signals are present
on PC-style DB-9 and DB-25 connectors. This information may be of use if
you are planning to have a custom cable built. Refer to the manual for the
serial device that you plan to attach to the Macintosh for the recommended
serial connection, and use the chart below to find out what the proper
Macintosh wiring should be.
Macintosh signal Macintosh Mini DIN-8 DB-9 DB-25 RS-232 name
HSK0 1 4 20 DTR
HSK1 2 8 5, 8 CTS, DCD
TXD- 3 3 2 TXD
GND 4 5 7 GND
RXDA- 5 2 3 RXD
TXDA+ 6 N/C N/C
GP1 7 N/C N/C
RXD+ 8 5 7 GND
Operating in the PC Environment 59This chapter covers how to configure the PC environment and change PC
options using the PC Setup control panel.
Your Macintosh comes with the PC environment already configured and
ready to use. Read this chapter only if you want to change the way the PC
environment is set up, or if you have reinstalled the DOS-compatibility
software and need to reconfigure it.
You can control how your Macintosh and your DOS-compatible hardware and
software work together with the PC Setup control panel. You use the control
panel to accomplish the following tasks:
m choose folders or volumes to be shared between the Mac OS and the PC
environment
m turn the PC card on and off
m configure PC serial ports
m set display options
m set the shared memory size
m turn PC sounds on and off and use Sound Blaster sound capabilities
m configure PC drives
You also use the control panel to switch environments immediately and to
start, restart, or shut down the PC.
61
6 Configuring the PC Environment
Use the instructions in this chapter
if you need to change settings for
the PC environment.Choosing settings
To choose settings, follow these steps:
1 Choose Control Panels from the Apple (K) menu.
2 Double-click the PC Setup control panel to open it.
3 When you have specified the settings you want, close the control panel.
All settings except RAM take effect as soon as you make them. If you
change the RAM setting, you must restart the Macintosh before the change
takes effect.
Online help available: To get brief on-screen explanations of items in the
control panel, choose Show Balloons from the Guide (h) menu. To get
detailed step-by-step help, see the “DOS Compatibility Software” topic of
Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu.
62 Chapter 6Configuring the PC serial ports
Your DOS-compatible Macintosh supports two serial ports, COM1 and
COM2. You can map these ports to an unused Macintosh printer port or
modem port, to a text file for later processing, or to a setting of None.
m To assign a Macintosh serial port to a COM port, make a selection in the COM port’s
pop-up menu.
When you map a port to a text file, a dialog box appears that you use to
specify a name and location for the file. Macintosh serial ports already in use
appear dimmed in the menu. (The printer port may be in use by AppleTalk,
which may be used for a network or LaserWriter connection; the modem port
may be in use by communications or fax software.) Changes to these
selections take place immediately.
Assigned ports may not be available to the Mac OS: Mac OS programs may no
longer be able to access ports that you’ve assigned to DOS. Allocate these
ports only when they’re needed, and deallocate them when they’re no longer
required by your DOS programs. (You won’t have to restart the computer to
have the changes take effect.)
The maximum baud rate supported by the DOS-compatible Macintosh when
a COM port is mapped to a Macintosh serial port is 19,200. However, when
the MODE command is issued in DOS and the serial port is set at 19,200
baud, the incorrect message “Function not supported on this computer” is
displayed. This occurs because DOS is looking for specific hardware (a PC
UART) that is not emulated by the DOS-compatible Macintosh. The
Macintosh actually does support 19,200 baud, and can be set by a number of
communication application programs.
Configuring the PC Environment 63Setting the monitor
The monitor connected to your Macintosh DOS-compatible system displays
the environment (Mac OS or PC) you’re working in. Even though you see
only one environment at a time, the other environment can still be active in
the background.
To set the monitor for the PC environment:
m Choose a monitor type in the Display pop-up menu.
See the Technical Information booklet that came with your computer for a list
of supported Macintosh monitors and for VGA and SVGA monitor
specifications.
If the DOS-compatibility software recognizes the monitor connected to your
computer as a non-multiscan display, it makes the appropriate selection for
you; other menu options are dimmed.
16" monitor requires driver: If you have a 16" monitor, the PC doesn’t use the
entire screen unless you install a display driver for the program that you’re
using. (DOS can’t use a video driver, so there will always be a large black
border around the DOS screen.) See “Reinstalling Video Drivers” in the
section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8 for
instructions.
Setting the time and date
The PC environment uses the same date and time settings as the Mac OS. If
you change the time and date on the PC, it will not affect the time and date
on the Mac OS.
When you restart the PC, it synchronizes its time and date with the settings
you’ve chosen in the Mac OS. (The PC may lag up to 10 seconds behind the
Mac OS.)
64 Chapter 6Setting shared memory
You can install a 72-pin SIMM (memory module) on the DOS-compatible
card in your computer to give the card up to 32 MB of RAM for its exclusive
use. When no SIMM is installed, the card uses a portion of the RAM
installed in your Macintosh.
If your computer came with a SIMM already installed on the
DOS-compatible card, you cannot share memory between the Mac OS
and the PC environment. The PC uses the memory installed on the
DOS-compatible card exclusively. The shared memory options in the
PC Setup control panel will be dimmed (unavailable). See the Technical
Specifications booklet to determine whether your computer contains a
SIMM installed on the DOS-compatible card.
m Choose the amount of memory you want for your PC in the RAM pop-up menu.
In the RAM pop-up menu, a small square (M) shows the RAM that the PC is
currently using and a bullet (•) indicates how much RAM you assigned.
When the Macintosh starts up, it claims RAM for its own use before it sets
aside RAM for the PC. If the PC has less RAM than you installed, turn off
the Mac OS RAM disk (if you’re using one) in the Memory control panel.
You may also need to lower the disk cache size in the Memory control panel
to 128K or less.
Memory changes take place when you restart the Macintosh.
IMPORTANT Memory that you set aside for the PC environment is not
available to the Mac OS. To make this memory available, you must turn off
the PC (click the Off button at the top of the PC Setup control panel) and
restart the Macintosh.
Configuring the PC Environment 65Changing the amount of conventional memory
Many DOS and Windows programs require conventional memory to run.
At the same time, many device drivers and TSRs may be loaded into
conventional memory. If you find that you do not have enough conventional
memory to run some of your DOS or Windows programs, take the
following steps.
To increase Upper Memory Block (UMB) space to 122K instead of 64K, add
the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file:
DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\EMM386.EXE RAM=D000-EFFF FRAME=D000
To load DOS into the UMB (high memory) also add the following to your
CONFIG.SYS file:
DOS=HIGH, UMB
Insert the LOADHIGH (LH) command before all TSRs and device drivers in
the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. For example:
LH C:\DOS\SMARTDRV.EXE /X
This will load these into UMB (high memory). If you run out of UMB space,
you may see an error message like this during the boot process:
Run time error R6009
-not enough space for environment.
In this case, remove LH from TSRs and device drivers one or two at a time,
and try again until the error message does not appear.
If a DOSCLIP copy command is executed from within Harvard Graphics 3.0,
then the PC crashes when Harvard Graphics is quit. To prevent this, use the
steps outlined above, making sure that SMARTDRV is one of the drivers
preceded with LH.
IMPORTANT To prevent the System BIOS from becoming corrupted when the
PC is configured for 2 MB of memory, set the switch in the CONFIG.SYS file
to turn memory testing off:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF
66 Chapter 6Choosing shared folders or volumes
You can set up a Mac OS folder, Macintosh hard disk, shared disk, or
CD-ROM disc on a network to act as a PC drive.
Sharing a folder on your Macintosh hard disk is a convenient way to
transfer files between the Mac OS and the PC environment, especially if
you are dealing with many files, or large files.
You can share entire disks, or volumes. This is especially useful for network
volumes, CD-ROM drives, or other volumes that otherwise would not be
readily available to the PC environment. DOS treats all shared volumes as
network volumes. Some DOS commands, such as FORMAT, CHKDSK,
UNDELETE, and SUBST will not work on shared volumes.
m Choose an available drive letter from the Sharing pop-up menu in the PC Setup
control panel.
A dialog box appears, letting you select a folder or disk (volume) for
the drive.
Shared folders and volumes revert to their usual unshared status when you
shut down your Macintosh. To have a folder or volume automatically assigned
to a drive letter at startup, click the checkbox next to Attach at Startup. The
name of an automatically attached folder or volume appears underlined in the
Sharing pop-up menu. To turn off an assignment, choose the underlined item
in the menu.
IMPORTANT For the sharing functions to work properly, DOS must be running,
MacShare should be loaded as part of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, and a
LASTDRIVE=x statement should appear in the CONFIG.SYS file, where
x is the highest drive letter available for sharing. AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS have x preset to M. See “MacShare” in the section “Working in
the PC Environment” in Chapter 5 for more information.
See the “Using DOS Files & Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the
Guide (h) menu, for more information on transferring files between the PC
environment and the Mac OS using floppy disks and other media.
IMPORTANT Use caution when handling the drive file. Erasing one of these is
equivalent to reformatting the hard drive it is emulating. The drive file is
locked when it is installed on your computer. If you must unlock it, be very
careful not to erase it.
Configuring the PC Environment 67Using shared folders
Because two operating systems have access to each shared folder, there may
be a noticeable slowdown in performance when using these folders for highspeed PC applications such as multimedia programs, or during large file
transfers between them. For optimum performance, place PC application
programs and their files in the C or D drive rather than in a shared folder.
The performance of Macintosh programs is unaffected by placing them in
shared folders.
Since the PC doesn’t understand the concept of resource forks the same way
the Macintosh does, information in a Macintosh file’s “resource fork” is lost
when it is copied by the PC. For example, if a Macintosh file is copied
between two shared folders using the COPY command in DOS, that file’s
original icon will be lost, and the file itself may be unusable in the Mac OS.
Many document files do not have resource forks and can be copied between
shared folders with no problems. The applications that created the files
contain the resource information for these files. However, QuickTime files
cannot be successfully copied between shared folders.
In some Microsoft application programs, there is a misrepresentation of the
shared drive icons. When you open a file from a shared folder in Microsoft
Excel or Microsoft Word, the shared drive icon may appear as a floppy disk
or CD. This does not affect the file’s content, and the file is still usable.
Do not attempt to use shared folders from a DOS shell run from Windows.
Strange text characters in a document
When using shared folders to exchange documents between the Mac OS and
the PC, in some cases a Macintosh application program may not be able to
interpret the file format of a PC document. When this happens, the
document’s formatting is displayed incorrectly and you may see strange
characters in the document.
m Try using a different application program.
m Translate the document into a different file format using one of the file
format translation utilities available for the Macintosh (such as MacLink
Plus Easy Open Translators from DataViz).
m Transfer the text using DOSCLIP.
m Use the Export feature found in many programs.
m Use a PC-Macintosh translation utility.
68 Chapter 6Turning on PC sounds
To have Sound Blaster and other PC sounds played through the Macintosh
speaker or through headphones, you need to make settings in both the PC
Setup control panel and in the Sound control panel.
Choosing a setting in the Sound pop-up menu
The Sound pop-up menu in the PC Setup control panel gives you three
choices:
m To hear PC sounds in both the PC environment and the Mac OS, choose
Enabled.
m To hear PC sounds only when you’re in the PC environment, choose
Auto Enabled.
m To shut off PC sounds entirely, choose Disabled.
Sound control panel takes precedence: The setting in the PC Setup control
panel’s Sound pop-up menu has no effect on sounds generated in the Mac OS.
If the volume is set to 0 in the Sound control panel, however, you won’t hear
any PC sounds no matter what the setting is in the PC Setup control panel’s
Sound menu.
For sounds generated by the Sound Blaster card and for sounds from the PC,
the Sound control panel must be set with the Internal CD playthrough option
turned on. For instructions, see the “Sound” topic of Macintosh Guide,
available in the Guide (h) menu.
The PC Sound control in the PC Setup control panel does not affect sounds
produced by the Sound Blaster card. Only PC-generated sounds such as the
system beep are affected by this control. To turn off both PC and Sound
Blaster-generated sounds, use the master volume control of the Mixer Control
application from the Audio program group, or turn off the Internal CD
playthrough in the Sound control panel in the Mac OS. (For instructions, see
the “Sound” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu.)
The Sound Blaster hardware installed in your DOS-compatible Macintosh is
not able to record sounds.
The DOS-compatible Macintosh does not fully support Sound Blaster 8-bit,
Sound Blaster 2.0, or Sound Blaster Pro drivers. If problems occur, use the
Sound Blaster 16 driver that comes with your computer.
Configuring the PC Environment 69Configuring drives C and D
You use the C: and D: pop-up menus to create or select PC drives. Drive C is
required; drive D is optional. You can use a PC-formatted SCSI hard drive
attached to your Macintosh, or you can create a drive container—a virtual PC
drive—on any Macintosh hard drive. You can even use a drive container
created by SoftPC or SoftWindows.
To use a PC-formatted SCSI drive as a startup (boot) drive, format the drive to
be bootable by using the FORMAT C: /S command.
m To create a drive container for drive C or D, choose New Drive File from the
C: or D: pop-up menu.
Set a location for the drive container, and give it a name and a size. Then
click Initialize Drive File.
When using a PC-formatted SCSI device as the PC’s C or D drive, ensure that
the driver for that device is not loaded by PC Exchange. This would cause PC
Exchange to mount the drive instead of the PC environment. Open the PC
Exchange control panel and click the Options button. Make sure the SCSI
driver for the device you want to use is not checked. Then click OK. This
ensures that the PC will be able to load the C drive.
Single versus multiple partitions: When you initialize a container this way, it
contains a single partition. To initialize a container with multiple partitions,
prepare it in DOS using the FDISK command instead of initializing it
through the PC Setup control panel. Then format it using the FORMAT
command. Use the /S parameter in the FORMAT command to make the
container bootable (for example, type FORMAT C: /S at the DOS prompt).
See the DOS manual for further instructions on using these commands.
m To change the drive container for drive C or D, choose Other Drive File from
the C: or D: pop-up menu, then locate the new drive container in the dialog box
that appears.
The change takes effect the next time you restart the PC. To have the change
take place immediately, click the Restart button at the bottom of the control
panel.
70 Chapter 6m To use a PC drive or partition, choose Drive Partition from the C: or D: pop-up menu.
A dialog box appears with a list of available partitions.
If you use a PC drive or partition and you have a utility that mounts these
devices on the Macintosh, unmount the drive or partition before starting the
PC by dragging its icon to the Trash.
If you intend to mount your PC drive file, partition, or disk on the Macintosh
using Macintosh PC Exchange, do not use a PC compression program. Drives
that are compressed cannot be mounted.
Managing PC files from the Mac OS
You can gain access to files in a drive container even if you’re in the Mac OS.
Follow these steps:
1 Double-click the drive container in the Finder.
The drive container appears as a disk icon on the Mac OS desktop.
2 Double-click the container’s disk icon.
The icon opens and you have access to the files inside it.
You can now manipulate these files as you would any Mac OS files.
Drive container may be read-only: If the PC is running, you won’t be able to
add anything to the drive container from the Mac OS. To do so, shut down the
PC from the PC Setup control panel and then do steps 1 and 2 above.
WARNING If you don’t unmount the drive or partition, you may lose data
because both the Macintosh and the PC may write to the device at the
same time.
Configuring the PC Environment 71Changing the size of the drive container
You may find, after installing software in a drive container, that the container
is too small or too large for your needs. You cannot change the size of an
existing drive container, but you can create a new one in the appropriate size
and move the software to it. You can also create an additional drive container
to supplement the existing one.
Two active containers maximum: For the following procedure to work,
drive D must be available for assignment to a new drive container. If both
drives C and D have been assigned, you must first set drive D to None and
drive C to the container you need to replace. (The contents of the container
mapped to drive D are unaffected.)
Calculating the proper size
To determine the proper size for the new container, follow these steps:
1 Make sure you’re in the Mac OS, then open the PC Setup control panel.
You see a small apple at the upper-left corner of the screen when you’re in the
Mac OS.
2 Check the name of the container associated with drive C.
The name of the container appears above the C: pop-up menu.
3 Locate the container in the Finder.
72 Chapter 64 Open the container’s Get Info window and note the container’s size.
To open the container’s Get Info window, select the container’s icon and
choose Get Info from the File menu.
5 Close the Get Info window by clicking its close box.
6 Switch to the PC environment.
7 At the DOS C: prompt, type DIR.
Note how much space is available.
8 Subtract the amount of available space on the drive from the container size.
The number you get is the current size you need for storage.
9 Add 10 percent to the result of the calculation in step 8.
It’s a good idea to have extra space available, because some applications may
need to write temporary work files to the drive, or you may need to add
software to the drive at a later time. The 10 percent figure, however, is
arbitrary; use a number that suits your needs.
If the current container is too large, the result of this calculation is the size
that the new container should be. Skip to step 12.
10 Determine the amount of storage needed by the additional software you want to install.
To do so, add together the individual storage space required for each program
you want to install. This information is probably available in the
documentation that came with your software.
11 Add the sums from steps 9 and 10.
The resulting sum is the size that the new container should be.
12 Press x-Return to switch back to the Mac OS.
Configuring the PC Environment 73Creating the new container
Now that you know what size the container should be, you’re ready to
create it.
1 Follow the instructions under “Configuring Drives C and D” earlier in this chapter to
create a new container for drive D.
You may need to remove some files from your hard disk to free enough space
for the new container.
2 Click Restart PC at the bottom of the PC Setup control panel.
3 Click Switch to PC.
You now have two drives available—drive C, your original container, and
drive D, the container you just created.
Moving the files
You can transfer your files from the old container to the new one in either the
Mac OS or the PC environment.
m To move files in the Mac OS, drag all the files from the existing drive container to
the new one.
To move the files in the PC environment, follow these steps:
1 At the DOS prompt, type FORMAT D: /S and press Return.
This command makes the new drive container bootable.
Answer Y when DOS asks if you’re sure.
2 When the DOS prompt returns, type the following command:
XCOPY C:\*.* D:\*.* /E /V
This command copies all the files and directories from your drive C container
to your drive D container.
3 Press x-Return to switch back to the Mac OS when copying is complete.
74 Chapter 64 In the PC Setup control panel, choose None from the D: pop-up menu.
Doing so deallocates drive D.
5 Choose Other Drive File from the C: pop-up menu and select the container you just
created.
Your new container is now associated with drive C.
6 Click Restart PC at the bottom of the PC Setup control panel.
7 Click Switch to PC.
8 At the DOS prompt, type DIR.
You should see a list of all the files you copied.
You may want to run some of your programs to verify that everything has
been copied correctly.
m To throw away the original drive container, first switch to the Mac OS. Then drag the
original container to the Trash and choose Empty Trash from the Special menu.
Doing so frees up the space on your hard disk that the container held in
reserve.
Configuring The PC Environment 75Understanding the status line
The status line at the bottom of the control panel gives you messages about
the status of the PC hardware and software. Messages can include any of the
following:
m DOS-compatibility card not present Your computer’s system software did not
recognize the DOS-compatible card installed in your computer. Reinstall
the PC software according to the directions in Chapter 8.
If reinstalling the software doesn’t help, contact an Apple-authorized
service provider for assistance, or call Apple’s customer support hotline.
(The phone number for the hotline is in the service and support
information that came with your computer.)
m PC Setup software not loaded An error occurred during the start-up process
and the DOS environment won’t run.
m PC is running You’ve clicked Start PC and the card is active.
m PC is shut down The card is installed but not running. To start the card,
click Start PC, or select Auto-Start PC and restart the computer.
m PC is turned off The Off button at the top of the PC Setup control panel
is selected.
m Not enough memory Your computer must have at least 8 megabytes (MB)
of RAM installed, and the PC requires at least 2 MB of free RAM if you
don’t have a SIMM installed on the DOS-compatible card for the exclusive
use of the PC. Turn off the RAM disk, if you’re using one, in the Memory
control panel, and restart your Macintosh.
76 Chapter 577
Consult this chapter if you experience
problems using the Mac OS.
When you have questions
If you want to know how to do a particular task in the Mac OS, refer to
Macintosh Guide in the Guide (h) menu. For instructions on using
Macintosh Guide, see Chapter 2 of this manual.
If you have problems working in the PC environment on your Macintosh, see
Chapter 8, “Troubleshooting in the PC Environment.”
If you have questions about using DOS, see your DOS manual.
When you run into trouble
While you’re using your computer, you may occasionally see a bomb icon
or an error message, or you may have a problem such as the pointer (8)
“freezing” on the screen. If you have trouble with your computer, take a few
minutes to read the information in this chapter. If your problem is related to a
particular procedure, you should also look for information on that procedure
in Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu. For additional
troubleshooting information and a list of common questions relating to the
Mac OS, see the “Troubleshooting” topic of Macintosh Guide.
If you are unable to access Macintosh Guide (for example, if your screen
is “frozen”), refer to this chapter to see if you can resolve the problem.
7 Troubleshooting in the Macintosh EnvironmentTake your time
When you see an error message, you don’t have to take action immediately.
The message stays on the screen until you click the OK button or turn off the
Macintosh.
To help diagnose and correct the problem, gather as much information on the
situation as you can before starting over.
m Make a note of exactly what you were doing when the problem occurred.
Write down the message on the screen and its ID number (if any). Also list
the programs you were using and the names of any items you know have
been added to the System Folder since the system software was installed.
This information will help a service person diagnose the problem. (It is
helpful to keep a printed copy of the items in your System Folder. For
instructions on printing the contents of a folder, see the “Printing & Fonts”
topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide [h] menu.)
m Check the screen for any clues. Is a menu selected? What programs and
document icons are open? Note anything else that seems relevant.
m If you were typing text and were not able to save it before the problem
occurred, you can write down the parts of the text still visible on the
screen so that some of your work will be easy to replace.
m Ask other Macintosh users about the problem you’re having; they may have
a solution for it.
If you need repair service, consult the service and support information
that came with your computer for instructions on how to contact an Appleauthorized service provider or Apple for assistance.
78 Chapter 7Start over
Often you can eliminate a problem simply by clearing the computer’s memory
and starting over.
If you can, save any open documents before restarting the Macintosh. If your
system is frozen and does not respond to anything you do, or if you have a
“bomb” message on the screen, saving may not be possible. You can try
pressing x-Option-Esc to quit the program in use when the problem
occurred; if this works, you can then save the documents open in other
programs before restarting.
To restart your Macintosh, try the following steps:
1 If you can, choose Restart from the Special menu or from the dialog box that’s on the
screen.
Dialog boxes contain messages from the computer. If something goes wrong,
a message may appear on the screen, asking you to restart the computer.
2 If you can’t choose Restart, hold down the x and Control keys while you press the
Power key (marked with a triangle).
This key combination restarts the computer. (Use this key combination only
when you can’t choose Restart from the Special menu.)
3 If nothing happens, turn off your computer with the standby power button, wait at least
10 seconds, and then turn it on again.
4 If the standby power button doesn’t turn off the computer, unplug your Macintosh.
If you suspect that the problem is with other equipment, such as a printer or
an external hard disk that’s attached to your computer, turn that equipment off
for 10 seconds or longer, then turn it on again and restart the Macintosh.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 79Rebuild your desktop regularly
A process known as “rebuilding the desktop” helps your Macintosh keep
track of data on your startup disks. Although you usually use the hard disk in
your computer as a startup disk, you can also start up from any other disk that
has system software installed. It’s a good idea to rebuild the desktop of your
startup disks once a month or so.
To rebuild the desktop of a startup disk, follow these steps:
1 Hold down the Option and x keys while you start up your computer.
Do not release the keys until you see a message asking whether you want to
rebuild the desktop.
2 Click OK.
Solutions to common problems
The computer is turned on but the screen is dark.
One of the following is probably the cause:
m You have a screen saver program that darkens the screen when the
computer has not been used for a certain period.
Press a key or move the mouse to turn off the screen saver.
m The monitor’s brightness control (Û) is not adjusted properly.
Check the monitor’s brightness control and turn it up if necessary.
m The Macintosh or the monitor is not getting power.
Make sure the monitor is plugged in and turned on, and that the monitor
cable is firmly connected to both the computer and the monitor.
Make sure the computer’s power cord is firmly connected to the computer
and plugged into a grounded electrical outlet, and that the outlet has power.
If you have more than one monitor and only one is dark, check that it is set
up correctly in the Monitors control panel. For information on using more
than one monitor, see the “Monitors” topic of Macintosh Guide, available
in the Guide (h) menu.
80 Chapter 7m The monitor is plugged into the wrong port on the computer.
Make sure the monitor is plugged into the monitor port (marked with the
ª icon) on the upper-right corner of the computer’s back panel. If the
monitor is plugged into another port, it will not work.
If you are displaying video from your computer on a television screen, it is
normal for your computer monitor to be dark.
The computer won’t start up.
m The game controller is plugged into the wrong port.
Make sure the game controller is plugged into the joystick port on the
lower-right corner of the computer’s back panel. If the game controller is
plugged into another port, the computer will not start up.
The computer’s clock keeps time inaccurately.
Your computer has a clock that runs continuously. When the computer is
turned off, a battery keeps the clock running. If your clock begins to keep
time inaccurately, have your Apple-authorized service provider replace the
battery.
When you start up, a disk icon with a blinking question mark appears in the middle
of the screen.
This icon indicates that your Macintosh cannot find the system software it
needs to start up. One of the following is probably the cause:
m Your computer may be having a problem recognizing external equipment
that uses the Small Computer System Interface (SCSI).
Turn off all external SCSI equipment and disconnect the first SCSI device
in the chain from your computer’s SCSI port. Then restart the computer. If
the computer starts up after you disconnect your SCSI equipment, refer to
the manuals that came with the equipment for information on the proper
way to connect SCSI equipment and assign SCSI ID numbers.
If you have a printer connected to your computer’s SCSI port, make sure
your printer is not supposed to be connected to the printer port instead.
Check the manuals that came with your printer for information on how to
connect it properly.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 81m System software is not installed on the startup hard disk, the system
software is damaged, or the hard disk is not working properly.
Start up your computer using the Disk Tools floppy disk or (if you have a
built-in CD-ROM drive) with the CD-ROM disc that contains system
software. (For instructions on how to start up your computer from the
CD-ROM disc, see “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” in the section
“Initializing a Hard Disk” later in this chapter.) Then follow the
instructions in “Repairing a Damaged Disk” later in this chapter to test
your startup hard disk and repair any damage.
If repairing the disk doesn’t help, follow the instructions in “Installing or
Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter to reinstall
system software on your startup hard disk.
When you try to start up from a floppy disk, a disk icon with an X appears in the middle
of the screen and the floppy disk is ejected.
This icon indicates that the floppy disk you tried to start up from is not a
startup disk.
Wait a few seconds. The computer should start up from its internal hard
disk. Make sure you insert floppy disks only after the computer has begun
starting up.
82 Chapter 7A “sad Macintosh” icon appears and the computer won’t start up.
This icon indicates that your Macintosh cannot start up because of a problem
with the system software or the computer hardware.
Eject any floppy disks by turning off the computer and then holding down
the mouse button while you turn the computer on again. Try starting up with
the Disk Tools floppy disk or (if you have a built-in CD-ROM drive) with the
CD-ROM disc that contains system software. (For instructions on how to start
up your computer from the CD-ROM disc, see “Starting Up From a CD-ROM
Disc” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” later in this chapter.) If the “sad
Macintosh” icon appears again, consult the service and support information
that came with your computer for information on contacting an Appleauthorized service provider or Apple for assistance.
The Macintosh “hangs” or freezes during startup.
If the Mac OS is sharing 16MB or more of memory with the PC environment
and Disklight of Norton Utilities 3.1.1 is installed, the computer will freeze
during startup. This does not occur with 8MB or less shared memory. Restart
the Macintosh using one of the techniques described in “Start Over” in the
section “When You Run Into Trouble,” earlier in this chapter. Open the PC
Setup control panel and change the shared memory setting to 8 MB or less.
The hard disk icon does not appear on the desktop.
If you don’t see a hard disk icon on the desktop, try the following:
m If the hard disk is internal, shut down your computer, wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn it on again.
m If the hard disk is external, make sure that it is turned on and that its cable
is connected firmly; then restart the Macintosh.
m Check the ID numbers of all SCSI equipment connected to your computer.
See the manuals that came with your SCSI equipment for information on
setting SCSI ID numbers.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 83m If the hard disk is your startup disk, start your computer using the
Disk Tools floppy disk or (if you have a built-in CD-ROM drive) with the
CD-ROM disc that contains system software. (For instructions on how to
start up your computer from the CD-ROM disc, see “Starting Up From
a CD-ROM Disc” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” later in this
chapter.) Then follow the instructions in “Repairing a Damaged Disk”
later in this chapter to test your startup hard disk and repair any damage.
If repairing the disk doesn’t help, follow the instructions in “Installing or
Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter to reinstall
system software on your startup hard disk.
Icons do not appear correctly on your screen.
You need to rebuild the desktop—a process that helps your Macintosh keep
track of files and folders on your hard disks. For instructions, see “Rebuild
Your Desktop Regularly” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” earlier
in this chapter.
If icons do not appear correctly after you rebuild the desktop, restart your
computer while pressing the Shift key to temporarily turn off system
extensions. When you see the “Welcome to Macintosh—extensions off”
message, release the Shift key and press the Option and x keys until you see
a message asking if you want to rebuild the desktop.
Your Macintosh can’t read a floppy disk.
If you see a message that a floppy disk is unreadable, try one of the following:
m If the disk has never been used, you may simply need to initialize it. For
instructions, see the “Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in in the
Guide (h) menu.
m The disk may be damaged. See “Repairing a Damaged Disk” later in this
chapter for information on testing and repairing disks.
m The disk may be a DOS disk that the Macintosh environment cannot use.
Try switching to the PC environment and inserting the disk again.
84 Chapter 7If you are trying to use a DOS disk in the Macintosh environment, consider
the following:
m The disk may have been formatted incorrectly on a DOS computer (or in
the PC environment on your Macintosh). On DOS computers it’s possible
to format a standard double-sided disk in a high-density (1440K) format,
and vice versa. Disks formatted in this way cannot be read by a Macintosh
computer.
When formatting disks in the DOS environment for use in both the
Mac OS and DOS, always format standard double-sided disks in the 720K
format. Always format high-density disks in the 1440K format.
If a disk has been formatted incorrectly, switch to the PC environment and
copy the disk’s contents onto another disk that has been properly formatted.
The pointer (8) freezes on the screen.
Your system has a software problem.
m Press x-Option-Esc to quit the application program in use when the
problem occurred. If this works, you can save the documents open in other
programs before restarting.
m Restart your Macintosh. (For instructions, see “Start Over” in the section
“When You Run Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter.) Most software
problems are temporary, and restarting usually corrects the problem.
m Check the startup disk and program you were using when the problem
occurred. Make sure that all programs, desk accessories, and system
extensions you’re using are compatible with the system software.
m Sometimes incompatible system extensions or control panels can cause
system software problems. Restart while holding down the Shift key; this
temporarily turns off all system extensions. If your computer works
normally after you do this, remove all extensions from the Extensions
folder (inside the System Folder) and put them back into the Extensions
folder one at a time. Restart after you add each extension. This procedure
should identify any incompatible extensions.
You can also use the Extensions Manager control panel to turn off
individual extensions. For information on using this control panel to
manage system extensions, see the “Setting Options” topic of Macintosh
Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 85m If the problem recurs, you may need to reinstall system software. See
“Installing or Reinstalling System Software” later in this chapter for
instructions.
A dialog box with a bomb appears.
Your system has a software problem.
m Write down what you were doing when the message appeared, the text of
the message, and the message number, if there is one.
m Restart your Macintosh. (See “Start Over” in the section “When You Run
Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter for instructions.) Most software
problems are temporary, and restarting usually corrects the problem.
m Check the startup disk and application program you were using when the
dialog box appeared. Make sure that all programs, desk accessories, and
system extensions you’re using are compatible with the system software.
Reinstalling the system software may correct the problem.
m Sometimes incompatible system extensions or control panels can cause
system software problems. Restart while holding down the Shift key; this
temporarily turns off all system extensions. If your computer works
normally after you do this, remove all extensions from the Extensions
folder (inside the System Folder) and put them back into the Extensions
folder one at a time. Restart after you add each extension. This procedure
should identify any incompatible extensions.
You can also use the Extensions Manager control panel to turn off
individual extensions. For information on using this control panel to
manage system extensions, see the “Setting Options” topic of Macintosh
Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu.
m If the problem recurs, you may need to reinstall system software. See
“Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter
for instructions.
86 Chapter 7The pointer (8) doesn’t move when you move the mouse.
One of the following situations is probably the cause:
m Your system has a software problem.
Press x-Option-Esc to quit the application program in use when the
problem occurred. If this works, you can save the documents open in other
programs before restarting.
Restart your Macintosh. See “Start Over” in the section “When You Run
Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter for instructions.
Check the startup disk and program you were using when the problem
occurred. Make sure that all programs, desk accessories, and system
extensions you’re using are compatible with the system software. Try
starting up the computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc
that contains system software. (For instructions on how to start up your
computer from the CD-ROM disc, see “Starting Up From a CD-ROM
Disc” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” later in this chapter.) If
your computer starts up normally, there may be an extension conflict.
If the problem recurs, you may need to reinstall system software. See
“Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System Software” later in this chapter
for instructions.
m The mouse is not connected properly.
Turn the computer off using the standby power button, check that the
mouse and keyboard cables are connected properly, and then restart the
computer.
m Signals from the mouse are not reaching the computer, either because the
mouse needs cleaning or because there is something wrong with the
mouse.
Clean the mouse according to the instructions in Appendix A of this book.
If you have another mouse or pointing device, try connecting and using it.
(Turn off the computer before connecting it.) If the new device works, there
is probably something wrong with the mouse you replaced.
If none of these procedures solves the problem, consult the service and
support information that came with your computer for instructions on how to
contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for assistance.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 87Typing on the keyboard produces nothing on the screen.
One of the following is probably the cause:
m Your system has a software problem.
Restart your Macintosh. For instructions, see “Start Over” in the section
“When You Run Into Trouble” earlier in this chapter.
Check the startup disk and application program you were using when the
problem occurred. Make sure that all programs, desk accessories, and
system extensions you’re using are compatible with the system software.
If the problem recurs, you may need to reinstall system software. See
“Installing or Reinstalling System Software” later in this chapter for
instructions.
m You haven’t selected any text or set the insertion point (i).
Make sure the program you want to type in is the active program. Then
place the pointer (8) in the active window and click to set an insertion
point (i) or drag to select text (if you want to replace the text with your
typing).
m The keyboard is not connected properly.
Turn off the computer using the standby power button, then check that the
keyboard cable is connected properly at both ends.
If you have a keyboard with an ADB port (marked with the × icon) on
each end, turn off the Macintosh using the standby power button and plug
the keyboard cable into the other ADB port on the keyboard. (You may
have to unplug the mouse to do this.) Then restart the computer.
m The keyboard is damaged.
If you have access to another keyboard, try using it instead. (Turn the
computer off before connecting it.) If the new keyboard works, there is
probably something wrong with the one you replaced.
If none of these procedures solves the problem, consult the service and
support information that came with your computer for instructions on how
to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for assistance.
88 Chapter 7You can’t start an application program or it quits unexpectedly. Or, when you try to open
a program, you see a message that not enough memory is available.
One of the following is probably the cause:
m The Macintosh ran out of memory.
Quit the programs that you have open and then open the program you want
to use, or restart your Macintosh.
Use the Memory control panel to turn on virtual memory. For more
information on virtual memory, see the “Memory” topic of Macintosh
Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu.
m The program needs more memory.
Use the program’s Info window to give it more memory. For more
information on increasing a program’s memory, see the “Memory” topic
of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu.
m The program requires special hardware, such as a floating-point unit
(FPU), and your computer doesn’t have the hardware installed.
Check the documentation that came with the program to find out if the
program requires a Macintosh with special hardware, such as an FPU. Then
check the Technical Information booklet that came with your Macintosh to
find out if your computer is equipped with such special hardware, or if the
hardware can be installed. Consult your Apple-authorized service provider
for information on installing special hardware in your computer.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 89You see a message that an application program can’t be found.
The following dialog box appears if you try to open a document that was
created with software that is not on your hard disk.
Normally, you see this message if you try to open a document that came from
another Macintosh with software that is different from yours.
m The Macintosh Easy Open control panel is not installed. This is a control
panel that you can use to open documents when you don’t have the
program that created them. Reinstall the control panel from the system
software disks or CD-ROM disc containing system software that came with
your computer. (See the section “Installing or Reinstalling Mac OS System
Software” later in this chapter for instructions.) See Appendix D for
instructions on using Macintosh Easy Open.
m Some documents can be opened by more than one application program.
Try starting a program that you think might be able to open the document,
and then choose Open from the program’s File menu to try to open the
document.
m Purchase and install the correct software to use the document, or find out
if the creator of the document can convert it to a form that one of your
programs can use.
m Don’t try to open the files in the System Folder. Most of the files in the
System Folder are used by your computer for internal purposes and are not
intended to be opened.
m Rebuild the desktop by holding down the Option and x keys while starting
up your computer. Keep holding down the keys until you see a message
asking whether you want to rebuild the desktop. Click OK.
90 Chapter 7m If the document is from a DOS computer and you want to open it in the
Macintosh environment, use the PC Exchange control panel to specify
which Macintosh program will open the document. For information about
working with DOS documents in the Mac OS, see the “Using DOS Files &
Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the Guide (h) menu.
You experience problems using a DOS document.
If you can’t open a DOS document using a Macintosh program, try the
following:
m Open the document from within the program by choosing Open in the
program’s File menu.
m Use the PC Exchange control panel to change the document’s type to one
that can be opened by the program.
If a DOS document is displayed incorrectly, or you see strange codes or
characters in the document, try one of the following:
m Your application program may have special procedures for opening and
saving documents with different file formats. See the information that
came with your program.
m Try opening the document in another program.
Note: Some characters that can be displayed on the Macintosh are not
accurately displayed on DOS computers.
For more information about working with DOS documents in the Mac OS,
see the “Using DOS Files & Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide, available in the
Guide (h) menu.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 91The Mac OS is running out of memory even though I’m not running any PC programs.
When sharing memory with the PC environment, the Macintosh allocates a
portion of its memory to the PC. Because of this, the Mac OS may not be able
to load all your system extensions, including the PC Setup control panel.
If this problem occurs, try the following:
m Add memory to the DOS-compatibility card, as described in Appendix B.
m Decrease the shared memory setting.
m Remove PowerTalk and QuickDraw GX from the Extensions folder inside
the System Folder.
m Remove any other system extensions you don’t need.
m Change the name of the PC Setup control panel to !PC Setup so that it
loads first.
Shared memory assigned to the PC isn’t available to the Mac OS until you
turn off the PC. If the previous suggestions don’t solve your problem, click the
Off button at the top of the PC Setup control panel and restart the Macintosh.
92 Chapter 7Initializing a hard disk
Before you can use a new disk, the disk must be prepared so that the
computer knows where to store information on the disk. This preparation is
called initializing (or formatting) the disk.
When do you need to initialize a hard disk?
The hard disk inside your computer was initialized at the factory, so you
shouldn’t need to initialize it. You need to initialize a hard disk only if
m you purchase a hard disk that has not been initialized at the factory
m your hard disk is damaged
If a hard disk needs to be initialized, the disk’s icon does not appear on the
desktop when you start up the computer using another disk.
Starting up from a CD-ROM disc
To initialize, test, or repair a hard disk, or to install system software on a hard
disk, you need to start up your computer from another disk. If your computer
has a CD-ROM drive, you can start up your computer using the CD-ROM
disc containing system software that came with the computer.
To start up the computer using the CD-ROM disc, follow these steps:
1 Turn your computer on.
2 Press the Open/Close button on your CD-ROM drive, and quickly insert the CD-ROM disc
containing system software into the drive.
3 Immediately press and hold down the C key on your keyboard.
Continue to hold down the key until you see the “Welcome to Macintosh”
message.
WARNING Initializing a disk erases any information that may be on it.
Before you initialize a damaged disk, try to repair it as described in
“Repairing a Damaged Disk” later in this chapter.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 93If a blinking question mark appears, or if the computer starts up from your hard
disk: You did not insert the CD-ROM disc quickly enough for the computer to
recognize it as a startup disk. Follow these steps:
1 Shut down your computer.
The CD-ROM disc will remain in the CD-ROM drive.
2 Turn the computer on.
3 Immediately press and hold down the C key on the keyboard.
Continue to hold down the key until you see the “Welcome to Macintosh”
message.
Starting up from a floppy disk
To initialize, test, or repair a hard disk, or to install system software on a
hard disk, you need to start up your computer from another disk. If you don’t
have a built-in CD-ROM drive, you can start up the computer using either
the Disk Tools or Install Disk 1 floppy disk that came with your computer.
To start up your computer using a floppy disk, follow these steps:
1 Shut down your computer.
2 Insert the floppy disk into the disk drive.
If you want to initialize, test, or repair your hard disk, use the Disk Tools
disk to start up your computer. If you want to install Mac OS system software,
use the Install Disk 1 disk.
3 Turn the computer on.
94 Chapter 7Reinitializing your computer’s internal hard disk
You initialize the internal hard disk using a program called Internal HD
Format, which is on the floppy disk labeled Disk Tools that came with your
computer. If your computer came with a CD-ROM drive and you didn’t
receive floppy disks, you can find Internal HD Format on the CD-ROM disc
that contains system software.
1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains
system software.
See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy
Disk” earlier in this section.
2 Double-click the Internal HD Format icon to open it.
You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Internal HD Format.
3 Type a name for your disk in the name box.
4 If you want to make sure that none of the hard disk’s original information is recognizable
after reinitialization, choose Zero Data in the Options menu.
If you choose Zero Data, initialization may take a few minutes. (If you don’t
choose Zero Data, initialization will take less than 30 seconds.)
5 Click Initialize.
A message informs you that initializing the disk erases all information on it.
6 Click OK.
During initialization, a status bar shows you the progress of the initialization.
7 When the initialization is complete, click Done.
If a message reports that initialization failed, try again. If initialization fails
a second time, take the disk to your Apple-authorized service provider for
repair.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 95Initializing an external SCSI hard disk
You initialize an Apple external SCSI hard disk using a program called Apple
HD SC Setup, which is on the floppy disk labeled Disk Tools that came with
your computer. If your computer came with a CD-ROM drive and you didn’t
receive floppy disks, you can find Apple HD SC Setup on the CD-ROM disc
that contains system software.
1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains
system software.
See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy
Disk” earlier in this section.
2 Open the Apple HD SC Setup icon.
You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Apple HD SC Setup.
3 Click Drive until the disk you want to initialize appears.
You cannot initialize the disk that you used to start up your computer or the
disk that contains the Apple HD SC Setup program.
4 Click Initialize.
96 Chapter 7
SCSI ID number of the currently selected hard disk
Name of the currently selected hard disk5 Click Init to initialize the hard disk.
6 If a message appears asking you to name the disk, type a name and then click OK.
7 Click Quit when you see a message reporting that initialization was successful.
If a message reports that initialization failed, try again. If initialization fails a
second time, take the disk to your Apple-authorized service provider for
repair.
Repairing a damaged disk
Disks can become damaged by repeated use and handling.
When do you need to repair a disk?
If you see a message reporting that a disk is damaged or unreadable, you may
need to repair the disk.
Try these suggestions first
If you can’t start up from a hard disk or you don’t see the hard disk icon on the
desktop, try the following:
m If the hard disk is internal, shut down your Macintosh, wait at least 10
seconds, and then turn it on again.
m If the hard disk is external, make sure that it is turned on and that its cable
is connected firmly; then restart the Macintosh.
m If the hard disk is your startup disk, start up with a different startup disk. If
the hard disk’s icon appears on your desktop, reinstall system software on
the hard disk (see “Installing or Reinstalling System Software” later in this
chapter).
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 97
Click here to initialize the disk. m Check the ID numbers of all SCSI equipment connected to your computer.
Each device must have a unique ID number (the computer itself has the ID
number 7). Also check that the chain of devices is terminated properly. For
information on setting SCSI ID numbers and terminating a SCSI chain,
see the manuals that came with your SCSI equipment.
m Test the disk following the instructions that come next.
Checking for damage on your internal hard disk
You can check for damage on your internal hard disk with the Internal HD
Format program, which is on the floppy disk labeled Disk Tools that came with
your computer. If your computer has a built-in CD-ROM drive and you didn’t
receive floppy disks, you can find the Internal HD Format program on the
CD-ROM disc that contains system software. You can use Internal HD Format
at any time to check for damaged blocks (segments of the hard disk that
cannot reliably be used to store information).
1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains
system software.
See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy
Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter.
2 Open the Internal HD Format icon.
You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Internal HD Format.
3 Choose Scan All Blocks in the Functions menu.
If the program finds damaged blocks, it marks them so the computer will not
store information in them. This process does not harm any information on the
hard disk.
98 Chapter 7Testing an external SCSI hard disk
You can test an external Apple SCSI hard disk with the Apple HD SC Setup
program, which is on the floppy disk labeled Disk Tools that came with your
computer. If your computer has a built-in CD-ROM drive, and you didn’t
receive floppy disks, you can find the Apple HD SC Setup program on the
CD-ROM disc that contains system software.
1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains
system software.
See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy
Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter.
2 Open the Apple HD SC Setup icon.
You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Apple HD SC Setup.
3 Click Drive until the disk you want appears.
4 Click Test.
5 When a message tells you that testing is complete, click Quit.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 99
SCSI ID number of the currently selected hard disk
Name of the currently selected hard diskIf the test reveals a problem, you may be able to correct it by using Disk First
Aid or another disk repair program (see the instructions in the next section),
or you may need to reinitialize the disk (see “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier
in this chapter). Consult an Apple-authorized service provider for assistance,
if necessary.
How to repair a hard disk or floppy disk
You can repair some types of disk damage by using the Disk First Aid
program, which is included either on the Disk Tools floppy disk or on the
CD-ROM disc containing system software that came with your computer.
1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains
system software.
See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy
Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter.
2 Open the Disk First Aid icon.
You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Disk First Aid.
3 Click the icon of the disk you want to test.
Disk icons appear in a box at the top of the Disk First Aid window.
100 Chapter 74 Click Repair to begin testing and repairing the disk.
You can’t repair the startup disk or the disk that contains the Disk First Aid
program, but you can test these disks by clicking Verify. If the program
reveals a problem with either of these disks, start up the computer from
another disk so that you can repair the damaged disk.
If you want to test and repair another disk, click its icon and then click
Repair.
5 When testing and repair are finished, choose Quit from the File menu.
If Disk First Aid cannot correct the problem
m Try repairing the disk again. Sometimes repeating the process corrects the
problem.
m Use another disk repair or recovery program. Some disk repair programs
let you recover information from a damaged disk.
m Consult a computer repair specialist for help.
m Once you have recovered all the information you can, erase (reinitialize)
the disk. If initialization doesn’t work, discard the damaged disk (if it’s a
floppy disk), or take it to your Apple-authorized service provider for repair
(if it’s a hard disk).
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 101Installing or reinstalling Mac OS system software
System software is the set of programs and other files that the Mac OS uses to
start itself up, keep track of your files, and run the application programs you
use. System software is kept in the folder called the System Folder. When you
turn on your computer, it looks for a startup disk, which is a disk that
contains the system software. The startup disk is usually the hard disk that’s
inside your computer, although another hard disk or a floppy disk can also be
a startup disk.
The accessory kit that came with your Macintosh provides system software on
either a set of floppy disks or a CD-ROM disc. You can use the floppy disks
or the CD-ROM disc to install the system software on your Macintosh if you
need to do so.
When should you install system software?
Your Macintosh came with all the necessary system software installed on its
internal hard disk, so you don’t need to install system software on that disk
unless you encounter software problems.
If you have a new hard disk or a newly initialized hard disk that doesn’t
contain system software, or if you want to upgrade to a more recent version of
system software on a hard disk, follow the instructions in “Installing System
Software” later in this chapter.
If you want to install DOS on a drive container or another volume that
you’re using as a PC drive, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section
“Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8.
When should you reinstall system software?
If you have a problem with your system software, you may see this icon in the
middle of the screen:
If this icon appears, follow the instructions in “Repairing a Damaged Disk”
earlier in this chapter to test your startup hard disk and repair any damage.
102 Chapter 7If repairing the disk doesn’t help, follow the instructions in the next section,
“Installing System Software,” to reinstall system software on your startup
hard disk.
Installing system software
Follow the steps in this section to do what is commonly called a “normal”
installation of system software.
If you’re installing system software on a hard disk for the first time, make sure
that your hard disk has been initialized, a process that prepares the disk to
store information. If you see the hard disk’s icon on the desktop when you
start up the computer, the disk has been initialized. If no disk icon appears
when you start up, see “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter for
instructions.
To do a normal installation, follow these steps:
1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains
system software.
See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy
Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter.
2 Find and open the Disk First Aid icon.
You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Disk First Aid.
After Disk First Aid starts, follow the instructions on the screen. Disk First
Aid checks your hard disk for any problems.
3 When Disk First Aid has finished checking your hard disk, choose Quit from the
File menu.
4 Shut down your computer.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 1035 Start up your computer from the Install Disk 1 disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains
system software.
See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy
Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter.
The Installer’s Welcome screen appears. You may have to double-click the
System Software Installer icon to open the Installer program.
6 Click OK.
The Easy Install dialog box appears.
7 Make sure that the hard disk named in the box is the one on which you want to install
system software.
If it isn’t, click Switch Disk until the correct disk name appears.
8 Click Install.
9 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
If you’re installing system software from floppy disks, you see messages
asking you to insert different disks.
104 Chapter 7
Parts of system
software to be
installed
Disk on which
system software
will be installed
Click here to install the
software you need.
Click here to install on
a different disk.10 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, click Restart.
If a message reports that installation was not successful, try installing again.
(Follow the instructions on the screen.)
If, after reinstalling system software by doing a normal installation, you still
experience problems with your computer, follow the steps in the next section
for doing a “clean” installation of system software.
IMPORTANT Certain system extensions or application programs that were
originally on your hard disk may not be installed with the Installer program.
If you notice that a certain extension or program was not installed, you may
need to install it separately. You can find these additional extensions and
programs on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software. If you don’t
have a CD-ROM drive, see the service and support information that came
with your computer for information on how to contact Apple directly for
assistance.
Doing a clean installation of system software
The steps in this section outline what is commonly called a “clean”
installation of system software. Do a clean installation if you can’t determine
what is damaged in your System Folder (especially if you think any special
software, such as control panels, system extensions, or custom utilities, may be
causing the problems you’re experiencing). You should also do a clean
installation if you’re still having problems with your computer after you’ve
reinstalled system software by doing a normal installation.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 105Testing your hard disk
To prepare your hard disk for a clean installation, follow these steps:
1 Start up your computer from the Disk Tools disk or the CD-ROM disc that contains
system software.
See “Starting Up From a CD-ROM Disc” or “Starting Up From a Floppy
Disk” in the section “Initializing a Hard Disk” earlier in this chapter.
2 Find and open the Disk First Aid icon.
You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Disk First Aid.
After Disk First Aid starts, follow the instructions on the screen. Disk First
Aid checks your hard disk for any problems.
3 When Disk First Aid has finished checking your hard disk, choose Quit from the
File menu.
Preparing an external SCSI hard disk for reinstallation of system software
If you’re reinstalling system software on an Apple external SCSI hard disk,
follow these additional steps. If you’re reinstalling system software on your
internal hard disk, skip to the next section, “Installing New System Software.”
1 Find and open the Apple HD SC Setup icon.
You may need to look in a folder called Utilities to find Apple HD SC Setup.
2 Click Drive until the disk on which you want to reinstall system software appears.
3 Click Update and follow the instructions on the screen.
106 Chapter 74 When you see a message that the update (preparation for reinstalling system software)
was successful, click Quit.
The external SCSI hard disk is now prepared for reinstalling system software,
and you can proceed with the installation.
Installing new system software
1 Insert the Install Disk 1 disk into the floppy disk drive, or insert the CD-ROM disc that
contains system software into the CD-ROM drive.
The Installer’s Welcome screen appears. You may have to double-click the
System Software Installer icon to open the Installer program.
2 Click Continue.
The Easy Install dialog box appears.
3 Make sure that the hard disk named in the Destination Disk box is the one on which you
want to install system software.
If it isn’t, click Switch Disk until the correct disk name appears.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 107
Parts of system
software to be
installed
Disk on which
system software
will be installed
Click here to install the
software you need.
Click here to install on
a different disk.4 Hold down Shift–x–K to start the clean installation.
The following dialog box appears.
5 Click the Install New System Folder button and click OK.
The Easy Install dialog box appears. The Install button has changed to Clean
Install, and the contents of your old System Folder have been moved to a new
folder named Previous System Folder.
6 Click Clean Install.
7 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
It takes a few minutes to complete the installation.
8 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, you may need to
click Restart.
You need to click Restart only if you installed software onto the startup disk.
If a message reports that installation was not successful, try repeating the
clean installation procedure.
108 Chapter 7
Click here to install the
software you need.Replacing special software
1 Copy any special software items from the Previous System Folder back to your System
Folder one item at a time, restarting the computer after copying each item.
Special software consists of items such as control panels, system extensions,
or custom utilities that you may have added to your System Folder.
IMPORTANT Be very careful not to replace (copy over) any of the files in the
System Folder with files from the Previous System Folder.
2 Check after each restart to make sure your computer is not having any software
problems.
If any of your special software items causes software problems, contact the
software manufacturer for assistance or an upgrade.
Doing a custom installation
For most Macintosh users, the Easy Install procedure described in the
previous sections is appropriate, because it automatically installs all the items
you need. However, if you’d like to select a combination of system software
files for your specific needs, you can customize your system software
installation. You use custom installation to install or update one or more
specific files, or to save space on your hard disk by installing only the files
you want.
To install customized system software, follow these steps:
1 Insert the Install Disk 1 disk into the floppy disk drive, or insert the CD-ROM disc that
contains system software into the CD-ROM drive.
The Installer’s Welcome screen appears. You may have to double-click the
System Software Installer icon to open the Installer program.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 1092 Click OK.
The Easy Install dialog box appears.
3 Choose Custom Install from the pop-up menu.
The Custom Install dialog box appears, listing all available system software
components.
4 Scroll through the list of components, clicking the checkbox next to each component
you want to install.
110 Chapter 7To get additional information about a component, click the box with the letter
i in it to the right of the component.
5 Click Install.
6 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
7 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, click Quit.
If a message reports that installation was not successful, try installing again.
(Follow the instructions on the screen.)
8 Restart your Macintosh.
The system software is installed and your computer is ready to use.
Troubleshooting in the Macintosh Environment 111When you have questions
Read this chapter when you have questions about using the PC environment
on your Macintosh.
If you have questions about using DOS or DOS application programs, see
your DOS manual or the manuals that came with your programs.
WARNING If you have a problem with your DOS-compatibility hardware
or software and nothing presented in this manual solves it, consult the
service and support information that came with your computer for
instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or
Apple for assistance. If you attempt to repair the DOS-compatibility
hardware yourself, any damage you may cause to the DOS-compatibility
hardware will not be covered by the limited warranty on your DOScompatible Macintosh. Contact an Apple-authorized dealer or service
provider for additional information about this or any other warranty
question.
113
8 Troubleshooting in the PC Environment
Consult this chapter if you have
problems using the PC environment
on your Macintosh.When I try to switch to DOS, my screen is blank or has no synchronization.
If the monitor has never worked in DOS, it is most likely not able to
synchronize properly to the DOS video signal. Refer to the information in the
Technical Information booklet on monitor specifications and video modes, and
check with your monitor vendor to see if your monitor conforms to these
specifications.
If your monitor was working previously, verify that its type is selected in the
Display pop-up menu of the PC Setup control panel.
If its type doesn’t show, use the Display pop-up menu to select the correct
type. Restart the computer and, immediately after the chime sounds, hold
down the x-Option-P-R keys. When you hear another chime, release the keys.
Then open the PC Setup control panel again. You’ll get a message that PC
Setup is not properly installed. This is normal. Verify the settings, and restart
the computer again.
The Macintosh “hangs” or freezes during startup.
If the Mac OS is sharing 16 MB or more of memory with the PC
environment, and Disklight of Norton Utilities 3.1.1 is installed, the computer
will freeze during startup. This does not occur with 8 MB or less shared
memory. Restart the Macintosh using one of the techniques described in
“Start Over” in the section “When You Run Into Trouble” in Chapter 7. Open
the PC Setup control panel and change the shared memory setting to 8 MB
or less.
The DOS-compatibility software doesn’t seem to be installed.
Open the Control Panels folder and look for the PC Setup control panel. If
you find it, the DOS-compatibility software is installed. If not, or if you find
it but it doesn’t work, there may be a problem with the software. Reinstall the
software according to the instructions in “Reinstalling the DOS-compatibility
Software,” later in this chapter.
If you do find the PC Setup control panel, open it. If drive C is mapped to a
drive container, a drive container has been created. If drive C is not mapped
to a drive container, follow the instructions in “Creating a Drive Container”
in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” later in this
chapter.
114 Chapter 8When I switch to the PC environment, I see this message: “Non-system disk or disk
error. Replace and strike any key when ready.”
The DOS-compatibility hardware can’t find DOS.
Switch to the Mac OS by pressing x-Return, open the PC Setup control
panel, and make sure drive C is mapped to a drive container. If not, follow the
instructions under “Configuring Drives C and D” in Chapter 6.
If drive C is mapped to a drive container, it may not be the drive container
that holds DOS. If other drive containers have been created, double-click each
one in the Mac OS and look for DOS folders and files. If you locate a
container with DOS in it, map it to drive C.
If no drive container exists, the PC software may not be installed. First, create
a drive container by following the instructions under “Configuring Drives
C and D” in Chapter 6. Then follow the instructions under “Reinstalling PC
Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” later
in this chapter.
I’m running applications in both environments and they seem sluggish.
You may be sharing Macintosh RAM with the PC. Performance may improve
if you give the PC environment its own memory by installing a SIMM
(memory module) on the DOS-compatibility card in your computer. For
instructions, see Appendix B.
Additionally, significant drive access in one environment (including file
sharing) can cause a slowdown in the other.
There is a delay when switching between environments.
When switching would interfere with a Mac OS system task, there is a slight
delay until the task is completed.
There also may be a delay while clipboard information is transferred between
the two environments. (If there’s a large amount of information on the
clipboard, you may actually see the translator window.)
If Shutdown Warning is turned on in the General Controls panel in the Mac
OS, you cannot switch back to the Mac OS immediately after switching to the
PC. Wait a few minutes and try switching again. To fix the problem, open the
General Controls panel in the Mac OS and turn off the Shutdown
Warning option.
Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 115I switched to the PC environment and I can’t figure out how to switch back to the
Mac OS.
Press x-Return at any time to switch to the Mac OS.
Inserting a PC-format disk in the Mac OS brings up an initialization message.
Macintosh PC Exchange may not be installed. Look in the Control Panels
folder for a control panel called Macintosh PC Exchange. If you don’t find it,
reinstall Macintosh PC Exchange from the floppy disks or CD-ROM disc that
contains system software.
I’m in the PC environment and I can’t figure out how to eject a floppy disk.
Press x-E.
I’m in the PC environment and I can’t figure out how to eject a CD-ROM disc.
Press x-Y.
The PC drive file I initialized has only one partition.
Macintosh PC Exchange configures drives to have a single partition. The DOS
program FDISK can configure a drive with up to four partitions. See your
DOS manual for more information.
The PC won’t start up, and there’s a message saying there is not enough free memory.
Your computer must have at least 8 MB of RAM installed. If you don’t have a
SIMM installed for the exclusive use of the PC environment (see the Technical
Information booklet), the PC requires at least 2 MB of free RAM if you are
using DOS, and 4 MB if you are using Windows. Turn off the RAM disk, if
you’re using one, in the Memory control panel. Additionally, set the disk
cache size in the Memory control panel to 128K or less.
116 Chapter 8The PC Setup icon has a red slash through it at startup.
If PC Setup doesn’t have enough memory to allocate to the PC at startup time,
it will turn itself off. Check the Memory control panel for disk cache and
RAM disk sizes; the disk cache should be set no higher than 128K, and the
RAM disk should be off (or have a small amount of memory allocated to it).
Restart the Macintosh if you change either of these settings.
If these steps don’t correct the problem, throw away the PC Setup Prefs file in
the Preferences folder within the System Folder and restart the Macintosh.
Then use the PC Setup control panel to recreate your settings.
When I switch to the Mac OS from the PC environment, the following message appears:
“PC Clipboard requires additional system services in order to function. Please ensure
that the DOS-compatibility card is successfully installed.”
Macintosh Easy Open software is either not installed or has been turned off.
Turn on the Macintosh Easy Open control panel, or reinstall it from the DOS
Compatibility Installer (for the Mac OS) disk. If your computer has a built-in
CD-ROM drive and you don’t have the floppy disk, use the DOS Compatibility
Installer program on the CD-ROM disc that contains system software.
I set the DOS-compatibility card to use 4 MB (or more) of RAM, but I get an error
message from my PC application program saying that there’s not enough memory
to run it.
If you are sharing memory between the Macintosh and PC, the Mac OS may
be using some of the RAM you requested for the PC. Turn off the RAM disk,
if you’re using one, in the Memory control panel; then restart the Macintosh.
A PC program displays a message that it needs 540K to run, but I have 4MB of memory
allocated to the PC environment.
The program is referring to conventional memory. Most of the balance of the
4 MB of memory you assigned to the PC is used by the EMM386 memory
management software. Configure your application program to use more
extended memory and less conventional memory. You may also need to
disable some device drivers or other software in your CONFIG.SYS and
AUTOEXEC.BAT files to free up more conventional RAM. See the section
on managing memory in your DOS manual for more information.
Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 117The Mac OS is running out of memory even though I’m not running any PC programs.
When sharing memory with the PC environment, the Macintosh allocates a
portion of its memory to the PC. Because of this, the Mac OS may not be
able to load all your system extensions, including the PC Setup control panel.
If this problem occurs, try the following:
m Add memory to the DOS-compatibility card, as described in Appendix B.
m Decrease the shared memory setting.
m Remove PowerTalk and QuickDraw GX from the Extensions folder inside
the System Folder.
m Remove any other system extensions you don’t need.
m Change the name of the PC Setup control panel to !PC Setup so that it
loads first.
Shared memory assigned to the PC isn’t available to the Mac OS until you
turn off the PC. If the previous suggestions don’t solve your problem, click the
Off button at the top of the PC Setup control panel and restart the Macintosh.
My monitor flashes oddly when I switch environments.
This is a natural effect when a single monitor is used by two different
environments. Turn on the Fade Screens option in the PC Setup control panel.
The PC environment is frozen, and pressing Control-Alt-Delete doesn’t reset the system.
Press the x-Control-Alt-[keypad] period keys. The system will reset with a
cold start.
When I print a document in the PC environment, the top and bottom get clipped.
In the Mac OS, open PC Print Spooler in the Extensions folder, choose
Preferences from the File menu, and click “Gaps between pages (60-lines).”
In the PC environment, configure your applications to print to a 60 line page,
rather than a 66-line page, or your margins will be off and your pages will
not print correctly.
118 Chapter 8When I start up certain software in the PC environment, my Apple monitor shows a
jumbled image and the display rolls.
Some application programs that write directly to the hardware (especially
games) may cause the Apple 13", 14", and 16" monitors to lose video
synchronization at program startup. Call the software company to see if the
software has a switch to force it to make BIOS calls (or if an upgrade is
available with this feature).
DOS begins to start up but then the screen freezes. My cursor blinks, but I cannot
type anything.
Press x-Control-Alt-[keyboard] period to restart the PC. When you see the
message “Starting MS-DOS,” press and hold the F5 key. This will bypass your
CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files. Edit the CONFIG.SYS file so that
the HIMEM.SYS driver looks like the following:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF
Restart the PC; it should now start up normally.
Reinstalling the DOS-compatibility software
Your Macintosh DOS-compatible computer comes with the
DOS-compatibility hardware and software already installed. You
should reinstall the software only if you are having severe software problems.
Follow the instructions in this section.
There are several steps to reinstalling your DOS-compatibility software:
m install the Mac OS software
m create a storage area (called a drive container) for DOS software
m set aside RAM for the PC environment, if necessary
m install the Microsoft MS-DOS operating system (and Microsoft Windows
if you wish)
m install the additional DOS software that came with your DOS-compatible
computer
m install your own PC software
For information on setting up the software after you install it, including
additional changes you may need to make to the DOS AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS files, see Chapter 5.
Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 119Reinstalling Mac OS software
You’ll install several extensions and control panels in your System Folder.
1 Start up your Macintosh while holding down the Shift key.
This starts the Macintosh with extensions turned off.
2 Insert the floppy disk named DOS Compatibility Installer Disk (for Mac OS Environment)
into the floppy disk drive.
If your computer has a built in CD-ROM drive, and you don’t have this floppy
disk, insert the CD-ROM disc that contains system software.
3 Find the DOS Compatibility Installer icon and double-click it to open it.
4 Click Install in the dialog box that appears.
The software is automatically installed onto your hard disk.
5 When the installation is complete, click Quit and restart your Macintosh.
The following Mac OS software is now installed in your System Folder:
Name Location
Macintosh Easy Open Control Panels folder
PC Exchange Control Panels folder
PC Setup Control Panels folder
PC Setup Guide Additions Extensions folder
PC Clipboard Extensions folder
PC Clipboard Translators Extensions folder
PC Print Spooler Extensions folder
PC Network Extension Extensions folder
120 Chapter 8Creating a drive container
A drive container is a file on a Macintosh hard disk that acts as a hard drive
for the PC. You create a drive container using the PC Setup control panel.
1 Open the PC Setup control panel.
2 Choose New Drive File from the C: pop-up menu.
A dialog box appears.
3 Choose a location for the drive container.
The drive container can be on any hard disk attached to the Macintosh. At
least 40 MB of free space is recommended.
Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 121It’s best to locate the container at the root level of your hard disk (not in any
folders or sub-folders) so that you can locate it easily.
4 Type a name for the drive container.
You can type up to 31 characters. Pick a descriptive name such as PC Drive or
PC Container so that you can easily identify it.
When you finish, press the Tab key to move to the Size field.
5 Type a size (in MB) for the drive container.
At least 40 MB is recommended. The exact amount of space you need
depends on what application programs you intend to install for DOS and
Windows. Check the documentation that came with the programs to see
how much space you’ll need, then allow some extra room for growth.
(The software included with your DOS-compatible computer requires
about 25 MB.)
6 Check Initialize Drive File to automatically initialize the drive container with a single
partition.
If you want more than one partition, you can leave the box unchecked and use
the FDISK and FORMAT programs after you’ve installed DOS. (See your
DOS manual for instructions and information about the FDISK and
FORMAT commands and their options.)
7 Click Create.
Assigning RAM to the PC
The PC needs memory to operate. You can provide memory with a memory
module (SIMM) installed on the DOS-compatibility card in your computer,
or by assigning it RAM from your Macintosh. If a memory module is
installed on the DOS-compatibility card, the RAM pop-up menu options
will be dimmed (unavailable). The amount of memory available to the PC
will depend of the amount of RAM on the installed SIMM. See the Technical
Specifications booklet to find out whether your DOS-compatibility card
includes a SIMM and what RAM capacity the SIMM has. If a SIMM is
installed, skip to “Reinstalling PC Software,” next.
122 Chapter 8Memory installed on the DOS-compatibility card in your computer is for the
exclusive use of the PC environment, and provides a marked increase in
performance of PC applications.
If no memory module is installed, you need to assign RAM to the PC.
1 Choose a memory size from the RAM pop-up menu in the PC Setup control panel.
If you’re installing DOS only, choose a minimum of 2 MB. If you intend to
install Windows, choose a minimum of 4 MB.
Note: Windows performance will increase if you allocate more memory to
the PC. However, RAM assigned to the PC is not available in the Mac OS
until you turn off the card in the PC Setup control panel and restart the
computer.
2 Restart the Macintosh.
IMPORTANT If the RAM size is set to 2 MB, modify the CONFIG.SYS file in
DOS as follows:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF
Reinstalling PC software
You begin by installing the Microsoft MS-DOS operating system included
with your computer. You can also install Microsoft Windows if you wish.
1 Open the PC Setup control panel and click Switch to PC.
The Macintosh desktop disappears, and you see a message about a missing
operating system or about a disk error. Ignore the message.
2 Insert the CD-ROM disc containing DOS and Windows software into the computer’s
CD-ROM drive.
If you are using floppy disks, insert the Microsoft MS-DOS Setup floppy disk
and press Return.
The DOS disks and manual are in the same shrink-wrapped package.
3 If you are using the CD-ROM disc, find and open Microsoft MS-DOS Setup.
Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 1234 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
If you are using floppy disks, press x-E to eject a disk when necessary.
Note: The MS-DOS installation disks do not include a DOS mouse driver.
A mouse driver for Windows is automatically installed, however, if you install
Microsoft Windows. Mouse drivers for DOS are widely available from thirdparty sources.
5 When DOS installation is complete, you may want to install Windows. If you are using
the CD-ROM disc, find and open the file called Windows Series Installation Instruction
Diskette 1 of 6, type A:setup, and press Return.
If you are using floppy disks, insert the disk labeled Windows Series
Installation Instruction Diskette 1 of 6, type A:setup, and press Return.
The Windows disks and manual are in the same shrink-wrapped package.
You can skip this and the next step if you don’t want to install Windows.
6 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
If you are using floppy disks, press x-E to eject a disk when necessary.
The following PC software is now installed:
DOS (directory)
WINDOWS (directory)
COMMAND.COM
AUTOEXEC.BAT
CONFIG.SYS
124 Chapter 8Installing additional PC software
Your DOS-compatible computer comes with additional software utilities that
you may want to install. The following table describes the function of each
program. For more information on using these programs, see Chapter 5,
“Operating in the PC Environment.”
Program name Function
DOSCLIP Lets you copy and paste between DOS and Mac OS.
WINCLIP Lets you copy and paste between Windows and Mac OS.
MACSHARE Lets you share Mac OS volumes and folders with the PC environment.
CDROM Lets you access your Macintosh CD-ROM drive from the PC environment.
MACODI Provides support for accessing networks in the PC environment.
To install the additional software, follow these steps:
1 With the PC environment on the screen, insert the disk named DOS Compatibility
Installer Disk (for PC Environment) into the disk drive.
2 Choose one of the options below to install software for either DOS alone or both DOS
and Windows.
m To install software for DOS alone, type A:INSTALL at the DOS prompt
and press Return.
m To install software for both DOS and Windows, start Windows, select the
Run command from the File menu, type A:SETUP for the program name,
and click OK.
3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 125Replacing the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files
Your DOS-compatible PC software includes alternate versions of the
CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files that let you select from a variety of
DOS memory-management options. Each time you start DOS, you will see a
menu that asks if you want to optimize memory for just DOS, for a DOS
program that requires maximum conventional memory, for a DOS program
that requires maximum expanded memory, or if you want to start Windows
immediately.
To install the alternate CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files, follow
these instructions:
1 Switch to the PC environment.
2 At the DOS prompt, type the following:
C:
REN CONFIG.SYS CONFIG.BAK
REN AUTOEXEC.BAT AUTOEXEC.BAK
COPY ALT_CFGS\CONFIG.APL CONFIG.SYS
COPY ALT_CFGS\AUTOEXEC.APL AUTOEXEC.BAT
3 To restart the PC with the alternate files installed, type Control-Alt-[keypad] period.
If your keyboard has a Delete key, you can press Control-Alt-Delete instead.
The PC restarts and the new menu appears.
Modifying the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files
You may want to modify the CONFIG.SYS file by hand to meet specific
needs. Use the DOS Edit command (or any other DOS or Windows editor)
and make the changes listed below.
IMPORTANT Make backup copies of your original files before you change
them. That way you still have your originals in case problems develop.
Be sure to save the file when you are finished. To prevent the ROM BIOS
from becoming corrupted when the PC is configured for 2 MB of memory, be
sure to add the underlined text to the indicated line:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS/ TESTMEM:OFF
126 Chapter 8If you do not intend to use software that requires expanded memory (EMS),
make the following change:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE NOEMS RAM=D000-EFFF
If you intend to use software that does use expanded memory, or you’re
unsure what you may need in the future, make the following change:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM=D000-EFFF FRAME=D000
Depending on how you have reconfigured the file, your CONFIG.SYS file
should look something like this:
DEVICE=C:\DOS\SETVER.EXE
DEVICE=C:\DOS\HIMEM.SYS /TESTMEM:OFF
DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE RAM=D000-EFFF FRAME=D000
DOS=HIGH,UMB
FILES=30
LASTDRIVE=M
Additionally, your AUTOEXEC.BAT file should contain the following:
LH C:\DOS\SMARTDRV.EXE /X
@ECHO OFF
PROMPT $p$g
PATH C:\WINDOWS;C:\DOS
SET TEMP=C:\DOS
(The reference to Windows in the PATH line applies only if you chose to
install Windows.)
See your DOS manual to learn how to edit and save your DOS files.
IMPORTANT Some memory configuration utilities, such as MEMMAKER,
may not be able to determine the exact nature of the hardware of the DOScompatible computer and, therefore, may not be compatible. Additionally,
using third-party compression software such as DriveSpace on a drive
container prevents you from accessing the container or the files within it
from the Mac OS. For these reasons, Apple does not recommend using these
programs with your DOS-compatible computer.
Troubleshooting in the PC Environment 127Bypassing the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files at startup
To bypass the CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files during the startup
process, press and hold the F5 key (x-5 on non-extended keyboards) after the
memory testing is complete.
Reinstalling Sound Blaster software
To install Sound Blaster software, follow these steps:
1 Insert the Sound Blaster Software Installation disk in the floppy disk drive while the PC is
in the foreground.
2 From DOS, type A:INSTALL and press Return.
3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
4 Restart DOS to use the new software.
To do so, press Control-Alt-[keypad] period.
See the enclosed manual, Using PC Sounds with the DOS-Compatibility Card,
for information about using the Sound Blaster utilities.
Reinstalling video drivers
If you intend to run Windows with 256 colors at a resolution of 640 by 480
pixels, or if you intend to use an Apple 16" or VGA display with 16 colors at a
resolution of 800 by 600 pixels, follow these steps:
1 Insert the Display Drivers Disk 1 disk in the floppy disk drive while the PC is in the
foreground.
2 From DOS, type A: and press Return to set the current drive to A.
3 Type SETUP and press Return to run the setup program.
Follow the instructions on the screen to install the video drivers. Select
Windows 3.1 as the application.
Note: If you are using an Apple 16" monitor, DOS is displayed at a resolution
of 640 by 480 pixels centered on your monitor and surrounded by a large
black border.
128 Chapter 8For your own safety and that of your equipment, follow all the instructions in
this chapter. Keep these instructions available for reference by you and others.
Health-related information about computer use
Muscle soreness, eye fatigue, and other discomforts and injuries sometimes
associated with using computers can occur from performing any number of
activities. In fact, misuse of the same muscles during multiple activities can
create a problem that might not otherwise exist. For example, if you engage
in nonwork activities that involve repetitive stress on the wrist—such as
bicycling—and also use your computer’s keyboard improperly, you may
increase your likelihood of developing wrist problems. Some individuals are
at greater risk of developing these problems because of their health,
physiology, lifestyle, and general exposure to stress. Work organization and
conditions, such as workstation setup and lighting, also play a part in your
overall health and comfort. Preventing health problems is a multifaceted task
that requires careful attention to the way you use your body every hour of
every day.
The most common health effects associated with using a computer are
musculoskeletal discomfort and eye fatigue. We’ll discuss each area of
concern below.
129
Appendix A
Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips
Read this appendix for important
health and safety instructions,
as well as tips on keeping your
computer in good working order.Musculoskeletal discomfort
As with any activity that involves sitting for long periods of time, using a
computer can make your muscles sore and stiff. To minimize these effects, set
up your work environment carefully, using the guidelines that follow, and take
frequent breaks to rest tired muscles. To make working with your computer
more comfortable, allow enough space in your work area so that you can
change position frequently and maintain a relaxed posture.
Another type of musculoskeletal concern is repetitive stress injuries (RSIs),
also known as cumulative trauma disorders (CTDs). These problems can
occur when a certain muscle or tendon is repeatedly overused and forced into
an unnatural position. The exact causes of RSIs are not totally understood, but
in addition to awkward posture, such factors as the amount of repetition, the
force used in the activity, the individual’s physiology, workplace stress level,
and lifestyle may affect the likelihood of experiencing an RSI.
RSIs did not suddenly arise when computers were invented; tennis elbow and
writer’s cramp, for example, are two RSIs that have been with us for a long
time. Although less common than other RSIs, one serious RSI discussed more
often today is a wrist problem called carpal tunnel syndrome, which may be
aggravated by improper use of computer keyboards. This nerve disorder
results from excessive pressure on the median nerve as it passes through the
wrist to the hand.
This section offers advice on setting up your work area to enhance your
comfort while you use your computer. Since the effects of repetitive
movements associated with using a computer can be compounded by those of
other work and leisure activities to produce or aggravate physical problems,
proper use of your computer system must be considered as just one element
of a healthy lifestyle.
No one, of course, can guarantee that you won’t have problems even when you
follow the most expert advice on using computer equipment. You should
always check with a qualified health specialist if muscle, joint, or eye
problems occur.
130 Appendix AEye fatigue
Eye fatigue can occur whenever the eyes are focused on a nearby object for a
long time. This problem occurs because the eye muscles must work harder to
view an object that’s closer than about 20 feet (6 meters). Improper lighting
can hasten the development of eye fatigue. Although eye fatigue is annoying,
there’s no evidence that it leads to permanent damage.
Whenever you’re engaged in an activity that involves close-up work—such as
reading a magazine, doing craft work, or using a computer—be sure to have
sufficient glare-free lighting and give your eyes frequent rest breaks by
looking up and focusing on distant objects. Remember to have your eyes
examined regularly.
To prevent discomfort and eye fatigue:
m Arrange your workspace so that the furniture is properly adjusted for you
and doesn’t contribute to an awkward working posture.
m Take frequent short breaks to give your muscles and eyes a chance to rest.
Arranging your office
Here are some guidelines for adjusting the furniture in your office to
accommodate your physical size and shape.
m An adjustable chair that provides firm, comfortable support is best. Adjust
the height of the chair so your thighs are horizontal and your feet flat on
the floor.
The back of the chair should support your lower back (lumbar region).
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the backrest to fit your
body properly.
m When you use the computer keyboard, your shoulders should be relaxed.
Your upper arm and forearm should form an approximate right angle, with
your wrist and hand in roughly a straight line.
Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 131You may have to raise your chair so your forearms and hands are at the
proper angle to the keyboard. If this makes it impossible to rest your feet
flat on the floor, you can use a footrest with adjustable height and tilt to
make up for any gap between the floor and your feet. Or you may lower
the desktop to eliminate the need for a footrest. Another option is to use a
desk with a keyboard tray that’s lower than the regular work surface.
m Position the mouse at the same height as your keyboard. Allow adequate
space to use the mouse comfortably.
m Arrange the monitor so the top of the screen is slightly below your eye
level when you’re sitting at the keyboard. The best distance from your eyes
to the screen is up to you, although most people seem to prefer 18 to 28
inches (45 to 70 cm).
m Position the monitor to minimize glare and reflections on the screen from
overhead lights and windows. You may want to use a tiltable monitor
stand. The stand lets you set the monitor at the best angle for viewing,
helping to reduce or eliminate glare from lighting sources you can’t move.
Thighs horizontal
Shoulders relaxed
Screen positioned to avoid
reflected glare
Forearms and hands
in a straight line
Forearms level
or tilted up slightly
Lower back supported
Feet flat on the floor
Top of the screen at or slightly
below eye level (You may need
to adjust the height of your
monitor by placing something
under it or by raising your
work surface.)
Clearance under work surface
45–70 cm (18–28 in.)
132 Appendix AAvoiding fatigue
m Change your seated position, stand up, or stretch whenever you start to feel
tired. Frequent short breaks are helpful in reducing fatigue.
m Use a light touch when typing or using a mouse and keep your hands and
fingers relaxed.
m Some computer users may develop discomfort in their hands, wrists, or
arms after intensive work without breaks. If you begin to develop chronic
pain or discomfort in your hands, wrists, or arms, consult a qualified
health specialist.
m Allow adequate work space so that you can use your keyboard and mouse
comfortably. Place papers or other items so you can view them easily while
using your computer. A document stand may make reading papers more
comfortable.
m Eye muscles must work harder to focus on nearby objects. Occasionally
focus your eyes on a distant object, and blink often while you work.
m Clean your screen regularly. Keeping the screen clean helps reduce
unwanted reflections.
What about electromagnetic emissions?
There has been recent public discussion of the possible health effects of
prolonged exposure to extremely low frequency (ELF) and very low
frequency (VLF) electromagnetic fields. Such fields are associated with
electromagnetic sources such as television sets, electrical wiring, and some
household appliances—as well as computer monitors.
Apple has reviewed scientific reports and sought the counsel of government
regulatory agencies and respected health organizations. Based on the
prevailing evidence and opinions, Apple believes that the electric and
magnetic fields produced by computer monitors do not pose a health risk.
In response to those customers who wish to reduce their exposure to
electromagnetic fields, Apple has lowered the emission levels of our products.
We are also actively encouraging further scientific research so we can
continue to promote the health and safety of our customers and employees.
Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 133Safety instructions
For your own safety and that of your equipment, always take the following
precautions.
Turn off the computer completely and disconnect the power plug (by pulling
the plug, not the cord) if any of the following conditions exists:
m the power cord or plug becomes frayed or otherwise damaged
m you spill something into the case
m your Macintosh is exposed to rain or any other excess moisture
m your Macintosh has been dropped or the case has been otherwise damaged
m you suspect that your Macintosh needs service or repair
m you want to clean the case (use only the recommended procedure
described later in this chapter)
Be sure that you always do the following:
m Keep your Macintosh away from sources of liquids, such as wash basins,
bathtubs, shower stalls, and so on.
m Protect your Macintosh from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow,
and so on.
m Read all the installation instructions carefully before you plug your
Macintosh into a wall socket.
m Keep these instructions handy for reference by you and others.
m Follow all instructions and warnings dealing with your system.
WARNING Electrical equipment may be hazardous if misused. Operation
of this product, or similar products, must always be supervised by an
adult. Do not allow children access to the interior of any electrical
product and do not permit them to handle any cables.
134 Appendix AHandling your computer equipment
Follow these guidelines for handling your computer and its components:
m When setting up your computer, place components on a sturdy, flat surface,
and carefully follow all setup instructions.
m When connecting or disconnecting a cable, always hold the cable by its
connector (the plug, not the cord).
m Turn off your computer and all its components before connecting or
disconnecting any cables to add or remove any component. Failure to do so
could seriously damage your equipment.
m Never force a connector into a port. If the connector and port do not join
with reasonable ease, they probably don’t match. Make sure that the
connector matches the port and that you have positioned the connector
correctly in relation to the port.
m Take care not to spill any food or liquid on the computer, keyboard, mouse,
or other components. If you do, turn your computer off immediately and
unplug it before cleaning up the spill. Depending on what you spilled and
how much of it got into your equipment, you may have to bring your
equipment to an Apple-authorized service provider.
m Protect the computer and its components from direct sunlight and rain or
other moisture.
m Keep all ventilation openings clear and unobstructed. Without proper air
circulation, components can overheat, causing damage or unreliable
operation.
WARNING This equipment is intended to be electrically grounded. Your
Macintosh is equipped with a three-wire grounding plug—a plug that
has a third (grounding) pin. This plug will fit only a grounded AC
outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into
the outlet, contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a
properly grounded outlet. Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding
plug!
Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 135Handling the monitor
Follow these procedures for handling a monitor:
m Turn down the screen brightness control if you leave the computer turned
on for extended periods. If the brightness is not turned down, the image on
the screen could “burn in” and damage the screen.
You can also use a “screen saver” program, which dims or varies the image
on the screen when the computer has been idle for a specified period of
time. These programs are available from independent suppliers and user
groups.
m Make sure that the ventilation openings on the computer and the monitor
are clear and unobstructed.
m Some large monitors cannot safely be placed on top of the computer.
Check the instructions that came with the monitor for setup information.
m If there is interference on the monitor’s screen or on a television or radio
near your computer, move the affected equipment farther away.
Handling the keyboard
Take care not to spill any liquid on the keyboard. If you do, turn off your
computer immediately.
m If you spill liquid that is thin and clear, unplug the keyboard, turn it upside
down to let the liquid drain out, and let it dry for 24 hours at room
temperature. If, after you take these steps, the keyboard doesn’t work, take
it to an Apple-authorized service provider for repair.
m If you spill liquid that is greasy, sweet, or sticky, unplug the keyboard and
take it to an Apple-authorized service provider for repair.
136 Appendix AHandling floppy disks
Ejecting a disk
For instructions on ejecting a floppy disk, a CD-ROM disc, or a removable
media disk from the Mac OS, see the “Disks” topic of Macintosh Guide,
available in the Guide (h) menu.
For instructions on ejecting disks in the PC environment, see “Ejecting Disks
in the PC Environment” in the section “Switching Between the Macintosh
and PC Environments” in Chapter 5.
125° F (52° C)
50° F (10° C)
Keep disks dry.
Do not use a
pencil or an
eraser on a disk
or disk label.
Store disks at
temperatures
between 50° F
and 125° F.
Do not touch the
exposed part of the
disk behind the
metal shutter.
Keep disks away
from magnets.
Avoid exposing
disks to extremely
hot temperatures.
Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 137If you can’t eject a floppy disk
If you can’t eject a floppy disk in the usual way, try the following in order:
m Hold down the x and Shift keys and press the number 1 key on your
keyboard to eject a disk in the internal disk drive.
m Turn off the computer. If the disk isn’t ejected, then hold down the button
on your mouse or other pointing device while you turn the computer on
again.
m Locate the small hole near the disk drive’s opening, and carefully insert the
end of a large straightened paper clip into it. Push gently until the disk is
ejected. Do not use excessive force.
If nothing works, take the computer or disk drive to your Apple-authorized
service provider to have the disk removed.
Power supply
The power supply in your computer is a high-voltage component and should
not be opened for any reason, even when the computer is off. If the power
supply needs service, contact your Apple-authorized dealer or service
provider.
138 Appendix ACleaning your equipment
Follow these general rules when cleaning the outside of your computer and
its components:
m Use a damp, soft, lint-free cloth to clean the computer’s exterior. Avoid
getting moisture in any openings.
m Don’t use aerosol sprays, solvents, or abrasives.
Cleaning the computer case
To clean the case, do the following:
1 Turn off the computer completely and then disconnect the power plug. (Pull the plug,
not the cord.)
2 Wipe the surfaces lightly with a clean, soft cloth dampened with water.
Cleaning the monitor
To clean the screen, put household glass cleaner on a soft cloth and wipe the
screen. Don’t spray the cleaner directly on the screen, because the liquid
might drip into the monitor or computer.
Cleaning the mouse
The mouse contains a small ball that must roll smoothly for the mouse to
work properly. You can keep this ball free of dirt and grease by using the
mouse on a clean, lint-free surface and cleaning it occasionally.
You need a few cotton swabs and a clean, soft, lint-free cloth.
1 Turn off your computer.
Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 1392 Turn the mouse upside down and turn the plastic ring on the bottom counterclockwise to
disengage it.
If you have an older mouse, you may need to press the plastic ring (rather
than turn it) to disengage it.
If the mouse is locked, see the next section, “Locking and Unlocking the
Mouse,” for instructions on how to unlock it.
3 Turn the mouse right-side up with one hand and catch the ring and the ball with your
other hand.
4 Clean the three small rollers inside the mouse with a cotton swab moistened with water.
Rotate the rollers to clean all around them.
5 Wipe the mouse ball with a clean, soft, dry, and lint-free cloth.
6 If necessary, wash the mouse ball with warm soapy water (use a mild soap such as a
dishwashing liquid) and then dry the mouse ball thoroughly.
7 Gently blow into the mouse case to remove any dust that has collected there.
140 Appendix A8 Put the ball and the ring back in place.
Your mouse should roll smoothly across your mouse pad or desk. If it doesn’t,
repeat these instructions carefully.
Locking and unlocking the mouse
If you have a newer mouse, you can lock it so the ball can’t be removed. A
locking mouse has a small hole on the plastic ring.
To lock the mouse, follow these steps:
1 Insert a straightened paper clip into the hole on the plastic ring.
2 Press down on the paper clip while you turn the ring clockwise.
Turn the ring a very short distance, until it stops. When the recessed area on
the ring is not lined up with the recessed area surrounding the ring, the mouse
is locked.
The mouse ring is locked when the recessed area on the ring
does not line up with the recessed area surrounding the ring.
Recessed area on ring
Recessed area surrounding ring
Insert a straightened paper clip into this hole.
(The hole may be located here on your mouse.)
Health, Safety, and Maintenance Tips 141To unlock the mouse, follow these steps:
1 Insert a straightened paper clip into the hole on the plastic ring.
2 Press down on the paper clip while you turn the ring counterclockwise.
Turn the ring a very short distance. When the recessed area on the ring is
lined up with the recessed area surrounding the ring, the mouse is unlocked.
The mouse ring is unlocked when the recessed area on the
ring lines up with the recessed area surrounding the ring.
Recessed area on ring
Recessed area surrounding ring
Insert a straightened paper clip into this hole.
(The hole may be located here on your mouse.)
142 Appendix AExpansion cards are printed circuit boards that can be installed in your
computer to give it special capabilities, such as enhanced video capabilities,
networking and communications, and additional processing power.
You can install an expansion card by following the instructions that came
with the card, or by following the instructions in this appendix. However, be
sure to read this appendix for instructions that may be specific to your
computer.
If your computer comes with a Single Inline Memory Module (SIMM)
installed on the DOS-compatibility card, you can remove it or replace it with
a SIMM that has a higher memory capacity.
143
Appendix B Installing an Expansion Card
or Memory for the PC Environment
Read this appendix for instructions
on installing an expansion card
in your computer or memory
for the PC environment. If your computer does not already have a SIMM installed on the
DOS-compatibility card, you can add a SIMM that provides up to 32 MB
(megabytes) of RAM for the exclusive use of your PC. The SIMM that your
card uses is the same type of SIMM that your computer uses. Follow the
instructions in this appendix to install a SIMM.
Cards fit into slots on the computer’s logic board—the board that holds the
components that make your computer work. There are three types of slots on
your computer’s logic board, each labeled on the board:
m a communication slot for an internal modem or an Ethernet card
m a video-in slot for a card that brings signals into the computer from a
videocassette recorder (VCR), laserdisc player, video camera, or similar
equipment
WARNING To avoid damage to your computer, Apple recommends that
only an Apple-certified technician install additional RAM. Consult the
service and support information that came with your Apple product for
instructions on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or
Apple for service. If you attempt to install additional RAM yourself, any
damage you may cause to your equipment will not be covered by the
limited warranty on your computer. See an Apple-authorized dealer or
service provider for additional information about this or any other
warranty question.
144 Appendix Bm an LC-compatible 68030 processor-direct slot (PDS). The
DOS-compatibility card is already installed in this slot; you cannot add
another card to it.
Note: The process you use to install a TV tuner card is different from the one
described in this appendix. See the documentation that came with that card
for instructions.
Installing an expansion card or SIMM involves three steps:
m opening the computer
m inserting the card or SIMM into a particular slot
m closing the computer
WARNING To avoid damaging your computer and expansion card, do
not attempt to install any expansion card without first checking the
documentation for that card. If the documentation specifies that an
Apple-certified technician must install the card (usually because
the installation requires special training or tools), consult the service
and support information that came with your computer for instructions
on how to contact an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple for
assistance. If you attempt to install the card yourself, any damage you
may cause to the computer or card will not be covered by the limited
warranty on your computer. If the card is not an Apple-labeled product,
check with an Apple-authorized dealer or service provider to see if you
can install it yourself.
Video-in slot
Communication slot
Vertical plate
LC-compatible PDS slot
(with DOS-compatibility card installed)
Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 145Opening the computer
1 Shut down your computer by choosing Shut Down from the Special menu.
You can also press the Power key on the keyboard.
2 Unplug all the cables except the power cord from your computer.
Leaving the power cord plugged in helps protect the computer from damage
caused by electrostatic discharge.
IMPORTANT To avoid generating static electricity that may damage
components, do not walk around the room until you have completed the
installation of the expansion card or SIMM and closed the computer.
Additionally, move the logic board as little as possible while it is outside the
computer case.
3 Place your thumbs on the two tabs at the top of the back panel, and press down.
4 Pulling gently, swing the panel down, and slip it out.
Remove the back panel.
146 Appendix B5 If there are security screws on the vertical plate on the back of the computer, remove
them with a Phillips screwdriver.
6 Unplug the power cord from your computer.
7 Swing the handle out from its storage position. Then grasp the handle and gently but
firmly pull it toward you.
The vertical plate and the logic board to which it’s attached slide all the way
out of the computer.
What you do next depends on the type of equipment you want to install.
If there are security screws, remove both screws from the vertical plate.
Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 147Installing a communication card
1 If your communication card has ports for connecting equipment, remove the plastic
access cover from the vertical plate.
2 Remove the communication card from its static-proof bag.
Hold the card by its edges to avoid touching any connectors on the card.
3 Locate the slot on the logic board labeled COMMUNICATION SLOT.
Communication slot
Push the two plastic tabs apart and pull off the
metal retainer so the access cover can come off.
Vertical plate
Metal retainer
148 Appendix B4 Align the card over the communication slot.
5 Press down on the card until the connector is solidly in place.
Don’t force the card. If you meet resistance, pull the card out and try again.
To see if the card is properly connected, lift it gently. If it resists and stays in
place, it’s connected.
Installing or replacing a SIMM for the PC environment
Your computer may have come with a SIMM already installed on the
DOS-compatibility card inside your computer. The SIMM provides memory
for the exclusive use of the PC environment. (See the Technical Information
booklet to find out whether your computer has such a SIMM installed.) To
replace the SIMM with a SIMM of greater capacity, or to install a SIMM if
you don’t already have one installed, follow the instructions in this section.
Note: The SIMMs used by the DOS-compatibility card are the same
72-pin SIMMs used to expand memory in your Macintosh. They are
interchangeable.
Communication slot
Vertical plate
Communication
port access hole
Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 149Removing a SIMM
If your computer has a SIMM already installed on the DOS-compatibility
card, follow these steps to remove it.
1 Push the metal clips at either end of the SIMM away from the SIMM.
Use your fingernails.
2 Rotate the SIMM until it is at a slight angle.
Rotate the SIMM away from its vertical position
to disengage it from the SIMM slot.
To release the SIMM, move the metal clip on each side away from the SIMM.
SIMM slot Vertical plate
150 Appendix B3 Gently pull the SIMM from its slot.
Hold the SIMM only by its edges. Don’t touch the connectors along the
bottom edge.
Handle the SIMM by the sides only, so that you
don’t touch the connectors along the bottom edge.
Pull the SIMM from the SIMM slot.
(It comes out at a slight angle.)
Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 151Installing a SIMM
1 Remove the SIMM from its static-proof bag.
Handle the SIMM by its edges. Avoid touching the connectors.
2 Insert the SIMM into the SIMM slot on the DOS-compatibility card assembly, as shown
in the illustration. (Your SIMM may have components on one side or on both sides, as
shown.)
The SIMM fits into the slot only one way.
Make sure the notch on the SIMM is on this side.
Insert the SIMM into the SIMM slot.
(Insert the SIMM at a slight angle.)
Connectors
SIMM slot Vertical plate
152 Appendix B3 Rotate the SIMM gently to the back until you feel it snap into place.
The plastic pin on the SIMM slot
should engage the hole in the SIMM.
Be sure that the metal clips snap into place.
Rotate the SIMM back until it snaps into place.
Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 153Closing the computer
1 Slip the base of the logic board into the guide rails inside the computer case and swing
the handle back into its storage position.
2 Press the reset button on the logic board, and then slide the logic board back into the
computer.
1 Press the reset button located on the main logic board
(the bottom-most layer) with a ball-point pen or similar object.
2 Gently but firmly
push the vertical plate
back into the computer
until the logic board is
solidly in place.
Make sure the logic board slides
into the guides that are on both
sides of the computer’s interior.
Swing the handle up,
into its storage position.
154 Appendix B3 If you removed security screws earlier, reinsert them now.
4 Slip the three hooks at the base of the back panel into the grooves in the computer case.
5 Swing the back panel up and snap it into place.
Snap the plastic back panel into place.
Slip the three hooks on the back panel
into the grooves in the computer case.
Insert security screws here.
Installing an Expansion Card or Memory for the PC Environment 1556 Plug the cables back into the computer.
7 Reconnect the power cord.
Your computer is now ready to turn on and use.
WARNING Never turn on your computer unless all of its internal and
external parts are in place. Operating the computer when it is open or
missing parts can be dangerous, and can damage your computer.
156 Appendix B157
Your computer keyboard contains certain special keys that typewriter
keyboards don’t have. Many of these keys allow you to give commands to
the computer without using the mouse. For example, in many application
programs, pressing the x (Command) key at the same time as the Q key is
often an alternative method of quitting a program.
The following table describes what you can do with the special keys on your
keyboard. The number of special keys on your keyboard may vary from this
list; it depends on the model of keyboard you have.
For information on how keys on Apple keyboards correspond to the keys
on a PC keyboard, see “Keyboard” in the section “Working in the PC
Environment” in Chapter 5.
Special keys on Apple keyboards
Arrow keys Use to move the insertion point, as an alternative to using the
pointer. In some programs, the arrow keys have other functions.
Caps Lock key Use to capitalize a series of letters (numbers and symbols
aren’t affected).
Clear key Use to delete the current selection (or use the Delete key).
In some programs, Clear has other functions.
x (Command) key Use in combination with other keys as an alternative to
choosing a menu command.
continued .
num
lock
clear
caps
lock
Read this appendix to learn
how to use the special
keys on your keyboard.
Appendix C
Special Keys on Your KeyboardSpecial keys on Apple keyboards (continued)
Control key In combination with other keys, this key provides shortcuts or
modifies other actions.
Delete key Use to delete selected material, or the character to the left of the
insertion point.
Enter key In a dialog box, pressing Enter is the same as clicking the
outlined button. In some programs, pressing this key confirms
information you have provided.
Escape key The function of this key depends on the program you’re using.
Function keys Some programs allow you to use the 12 function keys to give
commands. You can assign commands or action sequences to
function keys with special utility programs.
Option key Use in combination with other keys to produce special
characters or modify actions.
Numeric keys Use to produce numbers and mathematical symbols; some
programs use these keys as function keys to initiate actions.
Power key On some models, press to turn on the computer. Also press to
shut down the computer on certain models.
Return key Use to move the insertion point to the beginning of the next line.
In a dialog box, pressing Return is the same as clicking the
outlined button.
Shift key Use to produce capital letters (or the upper character
on the key).
Other special keys The function of these keys depends on the operating system
and program you’re using.
Tab key Use to move the insertion point to the next stopping place
(such as a tab stop or field in a dialog box or program).
tab
help home
end
ins
del
page
up
page
down
shift
return
num
lock
clear = /
*
7
4
0
8
5
2
9
6
3
enter
1
.
option
alt
F1
esc
enter
delete
control
158 Appendix CYou use Macintosh Easy Open software to open a document when you don’t have the
application that created it.
When you choose Open from an application’s File menu with Macintosh Easy
Open installed, you may see more documents than you did before. You’ll also
see additional information when you use a list view of the files in a folder
(including DOS, Windows, and ProDOS documents).
Choosing an application to open a document
Without Macintosh Easy Open, you see this message when you try to open a
document created by an application missing from your computer.
159
Appendix D
Using Macintosh Easy Open
Follow the instructions in this
chapter if you have problems
opening some documents.With Macintosh Easy Open installed, you see a list of programs that can open
the document.
m Double-click any application in the dialog box to open the document.
If you don’t like the results you see when the document opens, quit the
application and try again using a different choice from the list.
If Macintosh Easy Open can’t find any application to open your document,
you see this dialog box:
Note: Macintosh Easy Open lists only the programs that will produce the
best results. To see applications that may produce less than optimum results,
deselect “Show only recommended choices.”
160 Appendix DUsing the Macintosh Easy Open control panel
You use the Macintosh Easy Open control panel to set preferences when
you’ve installed additional translators available from your software retailer.
Such translators give you more choices for opening documents.
On/Off
If you turn off Macintosh Easy Open, it won’t try to find applications to open
your documents. You’ll still see extra information in list views.
Always Show Choices
When you use additional translators purchased from your software retailer,
you can set preferences that determine which application opens a document.
If you turn on Always Show Choices, Macintosh Easy Open presents the full
list of applications and translators to open your documents, even if you have
indicated a preference.
Include Choices from Servers
Turn off this option if you want Macintosh Easy Open to search for programs
only on hard disks directly connected to your Macintosh, ignoring programs
on shared disks. (Using applications over the network is slower than using
them on a hard disk.)
Delete Preferences
Click this button to erase the record of choices you’ve made for specific
translator preferences (useful only if you’ve previously installed translators
purchased from your software retailer). You may want to erase your
preferences when you install new translation software in order to have
Macintosh Easy Open prompt you for new choices.
Using Macintosh Easy Open 161In this chapter
The DOS-compatibility card inside your computer supports network drivers
that conform to Novell's Open Data-Link Interface (ODI). This appendix
contains instructions for installing such network management software. It
covers
m installing NetWare client software
m installing Novell’s LAN Workplace for DOS TCP/IP software
m installing NetManage’s Chameleon TCP/IP software
m installing Windows for Workgroups
m installing Spry’s Air Series TCP/IP software
m installing Mosaic
Installing NetWare client software
The instructions below will guide you through installation of client software
for Novell NetWare versions 3.12, 4.01, and 4.02. PersonalNetWare is not
supported at this time. You must have Windows installed before installing the
NetWare client software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling
PC Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software”
in Chapter 8.
163
Appendix E
Installing Network Management SoftwareBefore you start, be sure you have the appropriate floppy disks for the version
of NetWare you wish to install.
In addition, you need to know the Ethernet frame type in use on your
network segment. You must choose the appropriate frame type in Step 11
below. If you are not certain which one to select, ask your network
administrator before you begin the installation.
1 Insert the Novell NetWare Client for DOS WSDOS_1 disk into the disk drive.
2 At the DOS prompt, type the following:
A:
INSTALL
3 The NetWare Client Install screen appears.
Follow the instructions, pressing Return for each selection.
4 Define the directory for NetWare.
The default is C:\NWCLIENT. Press Return once to confirm the entry and
press it again to execute this step.
5 Edit the CONFIG.SYS file.
Change your LASTDRIVE statement so that it reads LASTDRIVE=Z.
6 Add the following line to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
CALL C:\NWCLIENT\STARTNET.BAT
Press Y-Return.
7 Decide whether you wish to load the Windows support in the directory where you have
loaded Windows.
Press Y or N. If yes, press Return once to confirm the Windows subdirectory
entry and again to execute this step.
8 Select the driver for the network board. Press Return.
9 A message asks you to insert another disk. Follow the instructions on the screen.
10 In the dialog box, select Power Macintosh 6100 Ethernet Adapter and press Return.
164 Appendix E11 In the dialog box for selecting a frame type, press Return.
12 Use the arrow keys to choose the appropriate frame type for the Novell server you will be
using.
13 Press Return. Then press Esc to continue.
14 Press Return to copy the MACODI.COM driver to the NetWare subdirectory.
15 Following the instructions on the screen, insert the NetWare Client for DOS WSDOS_1
disk again.
16 If you wish to add files and a NetWare group to the Windows directory, insert the
NetWare Client for MS Windows WSWIN_1 disk and follow the instructions on the
screen.
When installation is complete, a dialog box appears asking you to reboot
(restart) the computer.
17 Eject the disk by pressing x-E.
18 Press Control-Alt-Delete.
You now have additional network drives and mappings available. Your first
network drive letter is Novell’s default of F, unless this drive is already in use
on your machine, or if your network is set up to use a different starting drive.
19 To log into the network, type:
F:
LOGIN
PASSWORD:
Installing Network Management Software 165Conserving memory
During NetWare client installation you add the line
CALL C:\NWCLIENT\STARTNET.BAT
to the beginning of the AUTOEXEC.BAT file. This command then loads four
programs into DOS memory—LSL.COM, MACODI.COM, IPXODI.COM,
and VLM.EXE (in this order). To conserve memory in the lower DOS region,
you may wish to edit the STARTNET.BAT file (installed with your NetWare
software) to load those four programs with the LOADHIGH (LH) command.
See your DOS documentation for details on manually optimizing DOS
memory. (Be aware that the Microsoft utility MEMMAKER does not work
with the DOS-compatible Macintosh.)
Mapping drive letters
When you map a network resource as a drive letter, the Macintosh PC Setup
control panel recognizes that those drive letters are unavailable for use as
shared folders. However, when the network no longer uses the drive letter, PC
Setup will still show them as unavailable for sharing folders until you restart
the PC.
In addition, if a drive letter is being shared before you start up the PC and
Novell needs to use that drive letter, then the Novell network drive will take
precedence over that shared drive letter.
For further information, see your Novell installation and administration
manuals, or contact your network adminstrator.
166 Appendix EInstalling Novell’s LAN Workplace for DOS TCP/IP software
IMPORTANT You must not have MacTCP installed when you run DOS TCP/IP
software; the two will conflict with one another.
You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC
environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC
environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use
the same protocol in both environments at the same time.
If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have
previously installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the
Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the
MacIPX control panel.
If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment and you have
previously installed MacTCP in the Mac OS, remove MacTCP from the
Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the
MacTCP control panel.
You must have Windows installed before installing the LAN Workplace
for DOS software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC
Software” in the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in
Chapter 8.
In addition, you need to know the following information before you start:
m A legitimate, assigned IP address for the machine on which you’re
installing the TCP/IP software (for example, 222.111.11.1). For connecting to
the Internet, your service provider will tell you the correct address. For
TCP/IP networking within your company, your network administrator can
provide you with an address.
If you have either a BOOTP or an RARP server to dynamically assign IP
addresses, you don’t need to know the IP address before beginning the
installation.
Installing Network Management Software 167m If you are on a network with a subnet mask, you need the IP address for
that mask, for example:
255.0.0.0 for client Class A IP addresses
(those between 0.0.0.1 to 127.255.255.254]
255.255.0.0 for client Class B IP addresses
(those between 128.0.0.1 and 191.255.255.254]
255.255.255.0 for client Class C IP addresses
(those between 192.0.0.1 and 223.255.255.254]
m If you will connect to a TCP/IP host through a router, you need to know
the IP address for that router.
m The name of your domain name server (for example, server.edu).
m The IP address of your domain name server.
Once you have this information, you can proceed with the installation by
following Novell’s instructions and answering the on-screen prompts.
168 Appendix EInstalling NetManage’s Chameleon TCP/IP software
IMPORTANT You must not have MacTCP installed when you run DOS TCP/IP
software; the two will conflict with one another.
You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC
environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC
environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use
the same protocol in both environments at the same time.
If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have
previously installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the
Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the
MacIPX control panel.
If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment and you have
previously installed MacTCP in the Mac OS, remove MacTCP from the
Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the
MacTCP control panel.
You must have Windows installed before installing the Chameleon TCP/IP
software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in
the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8.
In addition, you need to know the following information before you start:
m A legitimate, assigned IP address for the machine on which you’re
installing the TCP/IP software (for example, 222.111.11.1). For connecting to
the Internet, your service provider will tell you the correct address. For
TCP/IP networking within your company, your network administrator can
provide you with an address.
m The name of your domain name server (for example, server.edu).
m The IP address of your domain name server (for example, 111.222.0.0).
m The IP address of your Internet gateway, if any.
Once you have this information, you can proceed.
Installing Network Management Software 169To install Chameleon from Windows:
1 In the Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu.
2 Type A:\SETUP.
Follow the on-screen instructions and prompts. Near the end of the
installation, you will be asked to respond to a series of dialog boxes. Respond
as follows:
ADD INTERFACE
Click OK.
INTERNET ADDRESS
Enter the address provided by your network administrator or service provider.
SUBNET MASK
Click OK. The software will supply the correct mask.
HOST NAME
Select a name for your client machine.
DOMAIN NAME
Enter the name for your domain name server.
3 Choose Domain Servers from the Services menu.
4 Enter the IP address of the domain name server.
5 Choose Gateway from the Services menu.
6 Enter the IP address of the Internet gateway, if any.
7 Save the settings by pressing Alt-F-S.
If you will be using a dial-up TCP/IP connection, skip to the next section,
“Restarting Windows.” If not, proceed with step 8.
8 Go to the C:\NWCLIENT directory
9 Copy NET.CFG to NET.OLD. (Save a copy of the existing NET.CFG file.)
170 Appendix E10 Modify the NET.CFG file.
A sample modified file is shown below. Note the addition of the Protocol
statements in the Link Driver section and the addition of the Protocol TCP/IP
section. The frame types and IP addresses used in your environment may be
different from this example.
Link Driver MACODI
Protocol IPX E0 ETHERNET_802.2
Frame ETHERNET_802.2
Frame Ethernet_II
; Frame Ethernet_802.3
; Frame Ethernet_SNAP
Protocol RARP 8035 ethernet_ii
Protocol ARP 806 ethernet_ii
Protocol IP 800 ethernet_ii
PORT 300
INT 10
; node address 12d43
NetWare DOS Requester
FIRST NETWORK DRIVE = F
Protocol TCPIP
ip_router 17.131.1.0
ip_netmask 255.0.0.0
ip_address 17.131.0.14
PATH LANG_CFG C:\NET\LANG
PATH SCRIPT C:\NET\SCRIPT
PATH PROFILE C:\NET\PROFILE
PATH LWP_CFG C:\NET\HSTACC
PATH TCP_CFG C:\NET\TCP
Link Support
Buffers 4 1500
MemPool 4096
Installing Network Management Software 171Restarting Windows
1 Restart the PC.
2 Start Windows.
You see the Chameleon group window.
Testing the installation
If you will be using a direct connection to a domain name server, you can test
the installation by using the Ping application program.
1 Double-click the Custom icon in the Chameleon group to open it.
2 Double-click the Ping icon.
3 Click Start.
4 Enter the name for a domain name server.
You should get a response back within a few seconds.
Using a dial-up service
If you will be using a dial-up service such as Portal, you may need to edit the
configuration file to reflect any differences between the default setup and
your setup. Click the Custom icon in Windows, open the appropriate .CFG
file, and edit the file.
You can test the installation by using Ping. For example, with Portal:
1 Connect using Alt-C.
2 Ping the name news.ip.portal.com.
You should get a response back within a few seconds.
172 Appendix EInstalling Windows for Workgroups
To support networking with your DOS-compatibility hardware, you need to
install software that supports ODI (Open Data-Link Interface) drivers. Follow
these steps:
1 Install Windows for Workgroups 3.1.1, electing to not install the networking software.
2 Follow the instructions in “Installing NetWare Client Software,” earlier in this appendix.
3 Follow the instructions in “Installing NetManage’s Chameleon TCP/IP Software,” earlier
in this appendix.
Installing Spry’s Air Series TCP/IP Software
IMPORTANT You must not have MacTCP installed when you run DOS TCP/IP
software; the two will conflict with one another.
You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC
environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC
environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use
the same protocol in both environments at the same time.
If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have
previously installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the
Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the
MacIPX control panel.
If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment and you have
previously installed MacTCP in the Mac OS, remove MacTCP from the
Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the
MacTCP control panel.
You must have Windows installed before installing Spry’s Air Series TCP/IP
software. If you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in
the section “Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8.
Installing Network Management Software 173If your PC is using a VGA driver, and your Air Series software is version 3.0,
you need to make the following change. (These instructions assume that you
have Windows installed in the C:\WINDOWS directory. If Windows is
elsewhere, type the actual Windows location.)
1 Make sure the Air Series Setup disk is not read-only.
2 Place the disk in drive A.
3 Type the following at the DOS prompt:
A:
COPY SETUP.BMP SETUP.OLD
COPY C:\WINDOWS\RIVETS.BMP A:SETUP.BMP
In addition, you will need to know the following information before you
start:
m Your Internet e-mail address.
m A legitimate, assigned IP address for the machine on which you're
installing the TCP/IP software (for example, 222.111.11.1). For connecting to
the Internet, your service provider will tell you the correct address. For
TCP/IP networking within your company, your network administrator can
provide you with an address.
m If you are on a network with a subnet mask, the IP address for that mask,
for example:
255.0.0.0 for client Class A IP addresses
(those between 0.0.0.1 to 127.255.255.254),
255.255.0.0 for client Class B IP addresses
(those between 128.0.0.1 and 191.255.255.254), and
255.255.255.0 for client Class C IP addresses
(those between 192.0.0.1 and 223.255.255.254).
m If you will connect through a gateway, the IP address for that device.
m The name of your domain name server (for example, server.edu).
Once you have this information, you can proceed.
174 Appendix ETo install Air Series from Windows:
1 In the Program Manager, open the File menu and choose Run.
2 Type A:\SETUP.
Follow the instructions you see on the screen.
3 When the installation asks you to select the Ethernet card manufacturer and type,
choose anything.
Note the name of the adapter you select (for example, 3Com is 3C5x9). The
Apple driver is not on the list, so you will need to edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT
file after completing the installation.
4 When the installation asks if you want to update the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, select YES.
5 Once the installation is complete, exit Windows.
6 Edit the AUTOEXEC.BAT file as follows. (You can use any convenient text editor, such as
EDIT in the DOS directory.)
m Comment out the line
CALL C:\NWCLIENT\STARTNET.BAT
m Change the line
C:\AIR\BIN\
to
C:\AIR\BIN\MACODI
m If you are are on a NetWare local area network and using the Novell VLM
redirector, add the line
C:\NWCLIENT\VLM
after the line
C:\AIR\BIN\TCPIP
m If you are using NETx, add the line
C:\NWCLIENT\VLM
before the line
C:\AIR\BIN\TCPIP
Installing Network Management Software 1757 Restart the PC.
8 Log into the network and start Windows.
You should now see the Air Series group window.
Testing the installation
To test the installation:
1 Double-click the Air Telnet icon to open it.
An Open Telnet Session dialog box appears.
2 Double-click the name of your domain name server.
You see a VT100 window with a login prompt.
176 Appendix EInstalling Mosaic
IMPORTANT You must not have MacTCP installed when you run DOS TCP/IP
software; the two will conflict with one another.
You can use the IPX and TCP protocols at the same time in either the PC
environment or the Mac OS, or you can use one protocol in the PC
environment and the other protocol in the Mac OS. However, you cannot use
the same protocol in both environments at the same time.
If you want to use the IPX protocol in the PC environment and you have
previously installed MacIPX in the Mac OS, remove MacIPX from the
Control Panels folder or select AppleTalk as your network interface in the
MacIPX control panel.
If you want to use the TCP protocol in the PC environment and you have
previously installed MacTCP in the Mac OS, remove MacTCP from the
Control Panels folder or select an interface other than Ethernet in the
MacTCP control panel.
You must have Windows installed before installing the Mosaic software. If
you need to reinstall Windows, see “Reinstalling PC Software” in the section
“Reinstalling the DOS-Compatibility Software” in Chapter 8.
In addition, you must have already installed
m A TCP/IP software package.
m Win32s, which allows Windows to run 32-bit applications. Win32s is
freeware and can be found on a number of on-line services.
To install Mosaic:
1 In the Program Manager, choose Run from the File menu.
2 Type C:\WIN32\DISK1\SETUP.
3 Answer all the dialog boxes to complete the installation.
4 After Win32s is installed, a Group window labeled Win32 Applications appears.
5 Press Alt-F-New to create an icon for Mosaic.
6 In the New Program Object dialog box, select Program Item.
Installing Network Management Software 1777 Fill in the Program Item Properties dialog box as follows:
Description: Mosaic
Command Line: C:\MOSAIC\MOSAIC.EXE
Working Directory: C:\MOSAIC
8 Click OK.
A Mosaic icon appears in the Win32 Applications Group window.
9 Copy the C:\MOSAIC\MOSAIC.INI directory to the C:\WINDOWS\ directory.
You are now ready to use Mosaic.
178 Appendix EA
active program, identifying 13, 37
ADB. See Apple Desktop Bus
Alt key (PC), simulating 46
Apple Adjustable keyboard, equivalent
Macintosh and PC keys 46–47
Apple-authorized service provider,
contacting
can’t eject a floppy disk 138
damaged disks 100, 101
DOS-compatibility hardware/software
problems 113
installing additional RAM (SIMMs) or
internal drives 34, 144, 145
installing system extensions or
programs 105
liquid or other spills on computer
equipment 135, 136
radio or television interference vii
repair service 78, 83, 87
replacing the clock battery 81
servicing the CD-ROM drive viii
servicing the power supply 138
Apple Desktop Bus (ADB), port
on computer 6, 7, 30
on keyboard 6, 7, 88
Apple HD SC Setup program
96, 99, 106–107
Apple Keyboard II, equivalent Macintosh
and PC keys 46–47
Apple LaserWriter II NT printer
driver 56
Apple PlainTalk Microphone,
connecting 31
AppleScript program 35
AppleShare Print Server, conflict with
PC Print Spooler 57
AppleTalk 53, 56
Application menu 13, 37–38
application programs
installing (Mac OS) 36, 105
Macintosh Easy Open and 159–161
MacShare (PC environment)
47–48, 67, 125
memory management and 89, 117
Mixer Control 69
performance issues using shared
folders 68
PowerTalk 35, 92, 118
QuickDraw GX 35, 92, 118
Sound Blaster 69
switching (Mac OS) 37–38
troubleshooting 89–91, 115, 117–119
working with several at a time
(Mac OS) 37–38
179
Indexarrow keys 157
arrow pointer. See pointer
audio compact discs, playing 33
Audio In port on external speakers 32
AUTOEXEC.BAT file (DOS)
bypassing at startup 119, 128
changing preset keystrokes for
DOSCLIP 49–51
freeing up RAM 117
installing NetWare client software
164, 166
installing Spry Air Series TCP/IP
software 175
loading files into high memory
(UMB) 66
loading MacShare program 67
modification guidelines 126–127
replacing with an alternate
version 126
using CD-ROM drive letter if no
CD-ROM drive is connected 45
using expanded memory 117, 127
Auto-start PC checkbox, PC Setup
control panel 42
B
background printing
(PC environment) 56
backing up files (Mac OS) 38
Balloon Help 26
basic Macintosh system, illustration 29
battery in computer’s clock, replacing 81
baud rate, for a COM port mapped to a
serial port 63
BIOS. See ROM BIOS; System BIOS
blinking question mark on screen
9, 81–82, 94, 102
“bomb” message on screen 77, 79
brightness control on monitor
10, 80, 136
C
C: or D: pop-up menu, PC Setup control
panel 70–71, 72–73, 75
cables
keyboard 6, 7
monitor 5
mouse 6, 7
safe handling of 135
Caps Lock key 157
carpal tunnel syndrome 130
CD-ROM discs
ejecting while in PC environment
41, 45, 116
playing an audio CD in Windows
while running low-level media
tools 45
starting the computer from 93–94
using DOS or Windows CD-ROM
discs 45
CDROM DOS utility 125
CD-ROM drive
illustration 29
installing 34
PC drive letter for 45
chair, adjusting for computer use
131, 132
cleaning computer equipment 139–141
clean installation of system software
105–109
Clear key 157
Clipboard, exchanging information
between PC environment and
Mac OS 48–53, 115
clock
keeps time inaccurately 81
setting time and date 64
close box 13
closing the computer 154–156
color printing (PC environment) 56
COM1/COM2 serial ports 63
x-Control-Alt-[keypad] period keys,
to restart the computer (PC
environment) 44, 47, 118, 119
180 Indexx-Control-Power key, to restart the
computer (Mac OS) 79
x-E, to eject a disk in PC environment
41, 44
x key 157
x-Option-Esc, to quit an application
program (Mac OS) 79, 85, 87
x-Option, restarting the computer to
rebuild the desktop 80, 84, 90
x-Return, to switch back to Mac OS
40, 41, 116
x-Y, to eject a CD-ROM disc in PC
environment 41, 45
communication card
access cover 30, 148
installing 143–149, 154–156
communication slot on logic board
144, 145, 148, 149
COM port, mapped to Macintosh serial
port 55, 63
compression programs, PC Exchange
and 71
computer equipment
arranging and adjusting for optimal
use 130, 131–132
cleaning 139–141
closing the computer 154–156
components of a basic Macintosh
system 29
guidelines for handling 135–138
opening the computer 146–147
safety precautions 134, 156
CONFIG.SYS file (DOS)
bypassing at startup 119, 128
changing if RAM size is set to 2MB
123, 126
freeing up RAM 117
increasing high memory (UMB) 66
installing NetWare client
software 164
modification guidelines 126–127
replacing with an alternate
version 126
sharing Mac OS folders and volumes
as PC drives 47–48, 67
turning memory testing off 66
using CD-ROM drive letter if no
CD-ROM drive is connected 45
using expanded memory 43, 117, 127
using memory-management
utilities 43
configuring the PC environment 61–76.
See also PC environment
connecting
additional equipment 29–33
Apple PlainTalk Microphone 31
external stereo speakers 32–33
game controller or joystick 33
keyboard and mouse 6–7
monitor 3–5
containers. See drive containers
Control-Alt-[keypad] period, to restart
DOS 118, 119, 126, 128
Control key 158
control panels
Extensions Manager 85, 86
Macintosh Easy Open 90, 117, 161
MacIPX 53
MacTCP 54
Memory 65, 89, 116, 117
Mouse (Windows) 46
PC Exchange 70, 91, 116
PC Setup 40–42, 61–76, 92, 114–115,
118, 121–123
Sound 69
Control Panels folder 53, 54, 116
conventional memory 66, 117.
See also memory
cumulative trauma disorders (CTDs) 130
customer service. See Apple-authorized
service provider; customer
support hotline
customer support hotline 15
custom installation of system software
(Mac OS) 109–111
Custom Install dialog box 110
Index 181D
damaged disks, repairing 82, 84, 97–101
dampness, protecting the computer from
134, 135
data transfer rate for COM port mapped
to Macintosh serial port 55, 63
date and time, setting
(PC environment) 64
DB-9/DB-25 connectors (PC
environment), signals present
on 59
Delete key 158
desk accessories, working with several at
a time 37
desktop, rebuilding 80, 84
dialog boxes
Custom Install 110
dialog box with a bomb appears on
screen 86
Easy Install 104, 107, 108
Disk First Aid program
100–101, 103, 106
disks. See CD-ROM discs; floppy disks;
hard disks
Disk Tools disk (or CD-ROM disc
containing system software)
initializing hard disks 94–96
installing system software 103
starting up from, for problem
diagnosis 82–84, 87
testing/repairing hard disks 98–100
Display Drivers Disk 1 disk 128
Display pop-up menu, PC Setup control
panel 64
documents. See files
DOS “Clipboard” (DOSCLIP)
48–53, 125
DOS commands that do not work on
shared volumes 67
DOS-compatibility card. See also PC
environment
installing a SIMM 143–147, 149–156
LC-compatible PDS slot 145
network management software support
53–54, 163–178
SIMM installed for exclusive use of
PC environment 65, 76, 116,
122, 149
system software doesn’t recognize 76
DOS Compatibility Installer Disk (for
Mac OS Environment) 117, 120
DOS Compatibility Installer Disk (for PC
Environment) 125
DOS-compatibility software. See also
AUTOEXEC.BAT file;
CONFIG.SYS file; PC
environment; PC Setup control
panel; Windows
networking protocol support
53–54, 163–178
reinstalling 119–128
troubleshooting 114, 115
DOS disks
using in Mac OS 85
using in PC environment 44
drive containers
accessing PC files in 71
choosing a location for 121–122
choosing or changing size of
72–74, 121–122
creating 70–71, 74, 121–122
naming 122
partitioning 70–71, 116, 122
throwing away 75
transferring files from an old to a new
container 74–75
troubleshooting 114–115
DriveSpace DOS utility, compatibility
issues with 127
182 IndexE
Easy Install dialog box 104, 107, 108
ejecting disks
can’t eject a disk 138
while in Mac OS 137
while in PC environment 41, 44, 45,
116, 137
electromagnetic emissions, health effects
of exposure to 133
EMM386 memory management DOS
utility 43, 117
Empty Trash command (Special menu)
13, 75
Enter key 158
Epson emulation, PC environment print
output and 55–56, 57
error messages 77–79. See also messages
Escape key 158
expansion card
installing 3, 143–147, 149–156
Extensions folder
PC Clipboard extension 52, 53
PC Print Spooler 57, 118
removing/replacing system extensions
85, 86
Extensions Manager control panel 85, 86
eye fatigue associated with computer use
129, 131, 133
F
fading the screen before switching
environments 42
fatigue from computer use, avoiding
131, 133
FDISK DOS utility 116
files
accessing PC files in a drive
container 71
backing up (Mac OS) 38
opening with Macintosh Easy Open
159–161
transferring between Mac OS and PC
environment 67–68
transferring from an old to a new
container 75
troubleshooting 68, 90–91
Finder, making active 18
floating-point unit (FPU) 89
floppy disk drive
illustration 29
installing 34
floppy disks
backing up files on (Mac OS) 38
Disk First Aid program and 100–101
DOS 720K format, problems with 44
ejecting 41, 44, 116, 137–138
formatting for use in both Mac OS and
DOS 85
guidelines for handling 137
inserting 36
locked/unlocked (PC environment) 44
repairing 84, 100–101
restarting the PC environment
from 44
starting the computer from 82, 94
unreadable 84–85
using a DOS disk in Mac OS 85, 116
using a Mac OS disk in PC
environment 44
folders
AppleScript 35
Control Panels 53, 54, 116
Extensions 52, 53, 57, 85, 86, 118
performance issues with shared
folders 68
Previous System Folder 109
sharing with PC environment 47–48,
67–68, 125
Spooler Rejected 57
System Folder 36, 102, 109
Function keys 158
furniture for computer use, arranging
130, 131–132
Index 183G
game applications, SIMMs and 54
game controller, connecting 33, 81
graphics
DOSCLIP and 52
printing in PC environment 56
grounding plug 2, 135
Guide menu. See also Macintosh Guide
defined 13, 15, 17
Macintosh Guide command 18
running the Macintosh Tutorial from
12–13
Shortcuts command 27–28
Show/Hide Balloons commands
26, 62
H
hard disks
backing up files on 38
checking for damage 98, 103, 106
Disk First Aid program and
100–101, 103, 106
icon 9, 13, 83
initializing/reinitializing 93–97
installing 34
repairing a damaged disk
82, 84, 97–101
testing an external SCSI hard disk
99–100
using a PC-formatted SCSI drive as a
startup drive 70
headphone jack, illustration 29
health-related information about
computer use 129–133
help. See Apple-authorized service
provider; Balloon Help;
customer support hotline;
Macintosh Guide
Hewlett-Packard page control language
(PCL) 55, 58
Hide Balloons command
(Guide menu) 26
Hide Others command (Application
menu) 38
hiding/showing windows on the
desktop 38
high memory (UMB), increasing (PC
environment) 66
HIMEM.SYS driver (DOS) 119
hot key, to switch between Mac OS and
PC environment 41
hotline. See customer support hotline
“Huh?” button in Macintosh Guide
window 25
I
icons
ADB 6, 7
Apple HD SC Setup 96, 99, 106
blinking question mark 9, 81, 102
defined 13
Disk First Aid 100, 103, 106
disk with an “X” 82
hard disk 9, 13, 83
“sad Macintosh” 83
Trash 13
Index button in Macintosh Guide window
19, 21–22
initializing
an external SCSI hard disk 96–97
an internal hard disk 93–95
Install Disk 1 disk 94, 104, 107, 109
Installer program 104–105, 107–111
installing. See also reinstalling
application programs (Mac OS) 36
communication cards 143–149,
154–156
internal drives 34
network management software
163–178
PC software utilities 125
Single Inline Memory Modules
(SIMMs) 143–147, 149–156
system software 102–111
Windows for Workgroups 173
184 Indexinterference with radio and television
reception vii, 136
internal drives, installing 34
Internal HD Format program 95, 98
IPX networking protocol, compatibility
issues 53–54, 167, 169,
173, 177
J
joystick, connecting 33
joystick port 30, 33, 81
K
keyboard. See also keys
connecting 6–7
correct posture for using 131–132
damaged or connection problems
with 88
guidelines for handling 136
support for various Apple keyboards
(in PC environment) 46–47
keyboard cable 6, 7
keyboard shortcuts 27–28
keyboard tray 132
keys. See also keyboard
equivalent Macintosh and PC keys
46–47
special keys on Apple keyboards
157–158
key scan code table for DOSCLIP
keystrokes 49–51
L
LaserJet III printer driver (PC
environment) 56
LC-compatible PDS slot on logic
board 145
liquid spills on computer equipment
134, 135, 136
locking the mouse 141
logic board 144–145, 147, 154
Look For button in Macintosh Guide
window 19, 23–24
LPT1.DOS/LPT1 port for printing in PC
environment 55, 56
M
Macintosh Easy Open program
control panel 90, 117, 161
translators 52, 161
using 159–161
Macintosh environment (Mac OS)
backing up files 38
Clipboard tips 52–53
initializing a hard disk 93–97
installing and working with
application programs 36–38
installing system software
102–111, 119–123
Mac OS software installed in System
Folder 120
network protocol compatibility with
PC environment 53–54
PC Print Spooler settings
56, 57–58, 118
problems and solutions 77–92
repairing a damaged disk 97–101
switching to and from 40–42,
117, 118
Macintosh Guide. See also Guide menu
closing 24, 25
“Huh?” button 25
moving or shrinking the window 25
opening the Macintosh Guide
window 18
returning to the Macintosh Guide
window 20, 22, 25
tips for using 25
using the Index button 19, 21–22
using the Look For button 19, 23–24
using the Topics button 19–20
Index 185Macintosh peripherals, using in PC
environment 55–58
Macintosh Shortcuts window 27–28
Macintosh system, illustration 29
Macintosh Tutorial 12–13
MacIPX, Control Panels folder 53
MACODI DOS utility 125
Mac OS. See Macintosh environment
MacShare program 47–48, 67, 125
MacTCP, compatibility issues with DOS
TCP/IP software 54, 167, 169,
173, 177
MEMMAKER DOS utility, compatibility
issues with 127, 166
memory. See also Single Inline Memory
Modules (SIMMs)
assigning to PC environment
65, 122–123
changing the RAM setting, PC control
panel 62
conserving when using NetWare client
software 166
conventional memory
increasing for DOS or Windows
programs 66
versus extended memory 117
expanding 34, 143–147, 149–156
not enough memory 76, 89, 92,
116–118
shared memory
pre-installed SIMMs and 65, 76,
116, 122–123
setting 65, 122–123
troubleshooting 92, 114
virtual memory 89
Memory control panel 65, 89, 116, 117
memory-management DOS utilities
43, 117
menu bar 13
messages, on PC Setup control panel
status line 76. See also
error messages
microphone, connecting 31
Microsoft MS-DOS Setup disk (or
CD-ROM disc containing
DOS/Windows software) 123
MIDI application programs, SIMMs
and 54
Mini DIN-8 connector (Mac OS), signals
present on 59
Mixer Control program 69
MODE command (DOS) 63
modem port 30
moisture, protecting the computer from
134, 135
monitor. See also screen
brightness control 10, 80, 136
cleaning the screen 133, 139
connecting 3–5
guidelines for handling 136
positioning for optimal use 3, 132
setting for PC environment 64
synchronization to DOS video signal
114, 119
troubleshooting 80–81, 114, 118, 119
turning on 8
monitor cable, connecting 5
monitor port 5, 30
monitor power cord, connecting 3, 4
Mosaic network software, installing
177–178
mouse. See also pointing device
cleaning 139–141
connecting 6–7
connection problems 87
how to use 12
locking/unlocking 141–142
mouse button 12
mouse cable 6, 7
Mouse control panel (Windows) 46
mouse drivers, DOS and Windows
46, 124
mouse shortcuts 27–28
MPEG players (DOS-based), video
output requirements 54
MS-DOS and Windows, reinstalling
123–124
multimedia application programs,
SIMMs and 54
musculoskeletal discomfort associated
with computer use 129, 130
186 IndexN
NetManage Chameleon TCP/IP software,
installing 169–172
NetWare client software, installing
163–166
network management software and
protocols 53–54, 163–178
networks, backing up files on
(Mac OS) 38
Novell LAN Workplace for DOS TCP/IP
software, installing 167–168
Novell NetWare Client for DOS
WSDOS 1 disk 164, 165
Novell NetWare Client for MS Windows
WSWIN 1 disk 165
Novell network, PCL printing of text and
graphics (PC environment) 56
Novell Open Data-Link Interface (ODI)
DOS compatibility with 53, 163
Windows for Workgroups and 173
numeric keys 158
O
ODI. See Novell Open Data-Link
Interface
online help. See Balloon Help;
Macintosh Guide
opening the computer 146–147
Option key 46, 158
P
page size, setting 58, 118
partitions for drive containers 70–71,
116, 122
PC Clipboard Extension (Mac OS)
52, 53
PC environment. See also
AUTOEXEC.BAT file;
CONFIG.SYS file; PC Setup
control panel; Windows
answers to common problems
113–119
configuring drives C and D 70–71
configuring the PC serial ports 63
conventional memory 66, 117
creating and using PC drive containers
70–75, 114–115, 121–122
DOSCLIP 48–53, 125
DOS commands that do not work on
shared volumes 67
ejecting disks 41, 44, 45, 116,
137–138
exchanging Clipboard information
with Mac OS 48–53, 125
expanding memory 34, 143–147,
149–156
installing PC utilities 125
memory-management utilities 43, 117
network management software and
protocols 53–54, 163–178
not enough memory 76, 116–118
PC Print Spooler settings and 56,
57–58, 118
PC software installed during
installation 124
playing sounds 69
reinstalling DOS-compatibility
software 119–128
RS-232 signal support 59
setting the monitor for 64
setting the time and date 64
setting up 42–43
shared memory 65, 122–123
SIMMs and 65, 76, 116, 122–123
starting automatically 42
switching back and forth from Mac
OS 40–42, 117, 118
using a PC-formatted SCSI drive as a
startup drive 70
using CD-ROM discs 45
using floppy disks 44
using Macintosh-compatible printers
and peripherals 55–57
using Mac OS folders and volumes as
PC drives 47–48, 67–68, 125
using PC peripherals 59
Index 187PC Exchange control panel 70, 91, 116
PCL (Hewlett-Packard page control
language) 55, 58
PC peripherals, using 59
PC Print Spooler, setting preferences in
56, 57–58, 118
PC Setup control panel
changing RAM setting 62
choosing settings 61–62
configuring the PC serial ports 63
creating and using drive containers
70–71, 72–74, 114–115,
121–122
mapping drive letters when using
NetWare client software 166
memory management, troubleshooting
117, 118
setting shared memory 65, 92, 123
setting the monitor for PC
environment 64
sharing folders or volumes 67
status line messages 76
switching between Mac OS and PC
environment 40–42
turning on PC sounds 69
plugging in
the computer 1–2
the monitor 4
pointer
doesn’t move when you move the
mouse 87
“freezes” on the screen 85–86
learning how to move 12
pointing device. See also mouse
simulating a PC pointing device 46
ports
ADB 6, 7, 30, 88
Audio In, on external speakers 32
COM 55, 63
illustration 30
joining connectors to, safety
instructions 135
joystick 30, 33, 81
LPT1.DOS/LPT1 55, 56
monitor 5, 30
sound input/output 30, 31, 32
PostScript-compatible print output
(PC environment) 55, 56, 57
PostScript printer drivers
(PC environment) 56, 57
power button. See standby power button
power cord
computer 2
monitor 3–4
Power key 8, 14, 158
power-on light 10, 29
power socket 30
power supply, servicing 138
PowerTalk program 35, 92, 118
precautions. See safety instructions
Previous System Folder 109
printer port 30
printing
page size and 58, 118
using Macintosh-compatible printers
in PC environment 55–58
programs. See application programs
Q
QEMM memory management DOS
utility 43
QuickDraw GX program 35, 92, 118
QuickDraw printers, Epson emulation
and 55–56
R
radio reception, interference with
vii, 136
RAM. See memory; Single Inline
Memory Modules (SIMMs)
RAM disk 65, 116, 117. See also
memory
188 IndexRAM pop-up menu, PC Setup control
panel 65, 122, 123
rebuilding the desktop 80, 84
reinitializing the internal hard disk 95
reinstalling. See also installing
DOS-compatibility software 119–128
MS-DOS and Windows 123–124
Sound Blaster software 128
system software 102–111
video drivers 128
remote control sensor, illustration 29
repairing disks 82, 84, 97–101
repetitive stress injuries (RSIs) 130
resource forks 68
Restart command (Special menu) 79
restarting the computer
Mac OS 79
PC environment 44, 47, 119
Return key 158
ROM BIOS, DOS memory management
and 43, 126
RS-232 signal support in PC
environment 59
S
safety instructions
for CD-ROM drive viii
general precautions 134
turning on the computer 156
screen. See also monitor
appears dark 10, 80–81
cleaning 133, 139
fading before switching
environments 42
minimizing glare and reflections
132, 133
screen saver programs 80, 136
scroll arrows, defined 13
SCSI equipment, computer doesn’t
recognize 81
SCSI external hard disk
initializing 96–97
preparing for reinstallation of system
software 106–107
testing 99–100
using a PC-formatted SCSI drive as a
startup drive 70
SCSI ID numbers 96, 98, 99
security lock port 30
serial ports 55, 56, 63
shared drives, using Mac OS folders or
volumes as PC drives 47–48,
67–68
shared folders/volumes
MacShare and 47–48, 67, 125
strange text characters in shared
documents 68
using 67–68
shared memory. See also memory
pre-installed SIMMs and 65, 76, 116,
122–123
setting 65, 122–123
troubleshooting 92, 114
shared volumes, DOS commands that do
not work on 67
Sharing pop-up menu, PC Setup control
panel 67
Shift key 158
Shortcuts command, Guide menu 27–28
Show All command
(Application menu) 38
Show Balloons command (Guide menu)
26, 62
showing/hiding windows on the
desktop 38
Shut Down command (Special menu) 14
Shut Down PC button, PC Setup
control panel 41
SIMMs. See Single Inline
Memory Modules
SIMM slot 150–153
Index 189Single Inline Memory Modules
(SIMMs). See also memory
installed for exclusive use of the
PC environment 65, 76, 116,
122, 149
installing 34, 143–147, 149–156
performance improvements and
54, 122–123
sharing memory and 65, 122
size box, defined 13
Sound Blaster (PC environment)
playing sounds 69
reinstalling software 128
Sound Blaster Software Installation
disk 128
Sound control panel 69
sound input/output ports 30, 31, 32
Sound pop-up menu, PC Setup control
panel 69
sounds, turning on (PC environment) 69
speakers, connecting 32–33
Special menu
Empty Trash command 13, 75
Restart command 79
Shut Down command 14
spills on computer equipment, safety
instructions 134, 135, 136
Spooler Rejected folder 57
Spry Air Series TCP/IP software,
installing 173–176
standby power button 2, 14, 30, 79
starting the computer. See also turning on
the computer
from a CD-ROM disc 93–94
from a floppy disk 82, 94
troubleshooting 80–84, 114, 119
Start/Restart PC button, PC Setup control
panel 41
startup disk 84, 87, 102
static electricity, avoiding
generating 146
status line on PC Setup control panel 76
stereo miniplug 32
stereo speakers, connecting 32–33
switching application programs
(Mac OS) 37–38
switching environments 40–42, 114,
115–116, 118
Switch to PC button, PC Setup control
panel 41
System BIOS, preventing corruption
of 66
system extensions
installing 105
Mac OS is unable to load 118
removing/replacing 85, 86
turning off 84, 85, 86
System Folder 36, 102, 109
system software (Mac OS)
blinking question mark and
9, 81–82, 102
installing or reinstalling 102–111
T
Tab key 158
TCP networking protocol, compatibility
issues 53–54, 167, 169,
173, 177
television reception, interference with
vii, 136
temperature ranges, for storing floppy
disks 137
time and date, setting in PC
environment 64
title bar, defined 13
Topics button in Macintosh Guide
window 19–20
transferring files
from an old to a new drive container
74–75
between Mac OS and PC environment
67–68
translating documents into different file
formats 68
190 IndexTrash
emptying 13, 75
icon 13
troubleshooting in Mac OS. See also
troubleshooting in PC
environment
answers to common problems 80–92
application program problems 36,
89–91
blinking question mark on screen 9,
81–82, 94, 102
“bomb” message on screen 77, 79
clock keeps time inaccurately 81
computer doesn’t recognize SCSI
equipment 81
computer “hangs” or freezes during
startup 83
dialog box with a bomb appears on
screen 86
ejecting a floppy disk 138
error messages 77–79
icons do not appear correctly on
screen 84
initializing/reinitializing a hard disk
93–97
installing/reinstalling system software
102–111
keyboard problems 88
messages on PC Setup control panel
status line 76
monitor problems 10, 80–81
mouse connection problems 87
not enough memory 89, 92
opening files 90–91
performance issues with shared
folders 68
pointer doesn’t move 85–86, 87
rebuilding the desktop 80, 84
repairing a damaged disk 97–101
restarting the computer 79
“sad Macintosh” icon appears 83
screen is dark 10, 80–81
starting the computer 10, 80–84
strange text characters when using
shared folders 68
system software installation
problems 82
turning the computer on 10
typing produces nothing on screen 88
unreadable floppy disks 84–85
using a DOS document in Mac OS 91
troubleshooting in PC environment. See
also troubleshooting in Mac OS
answers to common problems
114–119
application program problems 115,
117–119
bypassing CONFIG.SYS and
AUTOEXEC.BAT at
startup 119
computer “hangs” or freezes during
startup 114, 119
Disklight of Norton Utilities, shared
memory issues 114
DOS-compatibility software problems
114, 115
ejecting a floppy disk or CD-ROM
disc 116, 138
Macintosh Easy Open software not
installed or turned off 117
memory-management issues 114,
116–118
monitor synchronization
problems 114
not enough memory 116–117,
117–118
PC crashes when Harvard Graphics is
quit 66
PC environment is frozen 114, 118
PC Setup memory issues 117
performance issues with shared
folders 68
printing, top and bottom of page get
clipped 118
running out of UMB (high memory)
space 66
Index 191shared memory problems 114
Sound Blaster support 69
strange text characters when using
shared folders 68
switching environments 114,
115–116, 117, 118
using a PC-format disk in Mac
OS 116
turning off
the computer 14, 134, 135
PC environment 41
sounds 69
system extensions 84, 85, 86
turning on. See also starting the computer
the computer 8, 10, 156
PC environment 41, 42
sounds 69
tutorial, starting the Macintosh Tutorial
12–13
TV tuner card, installing 145
TV tuner card port 30
typing produces nothing on screen,
troubleshooting 88
U
UMB (high memory), increasing (PC
environment) 66
unlocking the mouse 142
V
ventilation for computer equipment
135, 136
vertical plate 145, 147–150, 152, 154
VGA modes displayed on Macintosh
monitors 54
video drivers 64, 128
video input card port 30
video-in slot on logic board 144, 145
Video Monitor program 35
video signal (DOS), monitor
specifications and 114, 119
virtual memory 89. See also memory
volume buttons on computer 29, 33
volumes (Mac OS), sharing with PC
environment 47–48, 67–68
W, X, Y, Z
warranty on computer, limitations of
34, 113, 144, 145
WINCLIP Windows utility 125
Windows. See also PC environment
Mosaic network software and
177–178
Novell LAN Workplace for DOS
TCP/IP software and 167
performance based on memory 123
printing on Macintosh-compatible
printers 55–57
reinstalling 123–124
Spry Air Series TCP/IP software and
173, 174–176
Windows Clipboard, exchanging
information with Mac OS
48, 52–53
Windows control panel, selecting printer
drivers 56
Windows for Workgroups, installing 173
windows on the desktop 13, 38
Windows PostScript driver 56
Windows Series Installation Instruction
Diskette 1 of 6 124
work space, arranging 130, 131–132
192 Index
Apple
QuickTake 100
User’s Guide for MacintoshK Apple Computer, Inc.
© 1994 Apple Computer, Inc. All rights reserved.
Under the copyright laws, this manual may not be copied, in whole or in part, without the
written consent of Apple. Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying
software license agreement.
The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes without
the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair
competition in violation of federal and state laws.
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Apple is
not responsible for printing or clerical errors.
Apple Computer, Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 95014-6299
(408) 996-1010
© Image Software 1992, 1993, 1994.
Portions Copyright Eastman Kodak Company.
Apple, the Apple logo, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Macintosh, and PowerBook are
trademarks of Apple Computer Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Apple
SuperDrive, GeoPort, QuickTake, and QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Adobe, Adobe Illustrator, Adobe Photoshop, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated, which may be registered in certain jurisdictions.
Classic is a registered trademark licensed to Apple Computer, Inc.
ExposurePro is a registered trademark of Baseline Publishing, Inc.
Helvetica and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype Company.
QMS is a registered trademark of QMS, Inc.
QuarkXPress is a registered trademark of Quark, Inc.
SuperPaint is a registered trademark of Aldus Corporation.
Tektronix is a registered trademark of Tektronix, Inc.
Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Simultaneously published in the United States and Canada.
Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an
endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the
performance or use of these products.iii
Communications regulation information vi
1 Getting Started With the QuickTake 100 Camera 1
Do you have what you need? 2
System requirements 2
Your camera at a glance 3
Charging the batteries 4
Installing the batteries 5
Installing the QuickTake software 6
Custom installation 7
What if you upgrade your Macintosh system software? 8
What next? 8
2 Using the Camera to Take Pictures 9
Turning on the camera 10
Taking pictures 11
Focal range and flash range 11
ContentsUsing the controls 12
Flash settings 12
Resolution settings 13
Pictures taken and pictures available 14
Battery level 14
Timer 15
Waking the camera 16
3 Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 17
Connecting the camera to your Macintosh 18
Looking at the pictures in the camera 20
Transferring pictures to your Macintosh 21
Opening pictures on the Macintosh 22
Opening a picture in the image window 22
Opening a slide table 23
Working with your pictures 24
Editing slide names 25
Getting information about a slide 25
Opening a slide to a full-size image 26
Zoom views in the image window 27
Changing the printed size of a picture 27
Cropping a picture 28
Changing the bit depth of a picture 29
Copying a picture to another application 29
Rotating a picture 30
Saving a picture 31
Printing your pictures 33
Printing a slide table 33
Printing a single image 34
iv ContentsNaming the camera 35
Setting the clock in the camera 36
Taking pictures from the Macintosh 37
Erasing pictures from the camera 38
Using the camera with a power adapter 39
Traveling with the camera 40
Using the battery booster pack with the camera 40
4 QuickTake Software Menu Commands 41
The File menu 42
The Edit menu 46
The Image menu 47
The Camera menu 49
The Windows menu 50
5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 51
Caring for your camera 51
Solving problems 52
Appendix A Specifications 55
Appendix B Battery Information 57
Appendix C Using the Camera with a Windows-Based PC 61
Appendix D Using QuickTake Setup 63
Index 65
Contents vCommunications regulation information
Radio and television interference
The equipment described in this manual generates, uses, and can radiate radio-frequency
energy. If it is not installed and used properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s
instructions—it may cause interference with radio and television reception.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device
in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed
to provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential installation. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
You can determine whether your computer system is causing interference by turning it off. If
the interference stops, it was probably caused by the computer or one of the peripheral devices.
If your computer system does cause interference to radio or television reception, try to correct
the interference by using one or more of the following measures:
m Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops.
m Move the computer to one side or the other of the television or radio.
m Move the computer farther away from the television or radio.
m Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit from the television or radio.
(That is, make certain the computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled by
different circuit breakers or fuses.)
If necessary, consult an Apple-authorized service provider or Apple. See the service and support
information that came with your Apple product. Or, consult an experienced radio/television
technician for additional suggestions. You may find the following booklet helpful: Interference
Handbook (stock number 004-000-00493-1). This booklet, prepared by the Federal
Communications Commission, is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office,
Washington, DC 20402.
IMPORTANT Changes or modifications to this product not authorized by Apple Computer, Inc.,
could void the FCC Certification and negate your authority to operate the product.
This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions that included the use of Apple
peripheral devices and Apple shielded cables and connectors between system components. It is
important that you use Apple peripheral devices and shielded cables and connectors between
system components to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios, television sets,
and other electronic devices. You can obtain Apple peripheral devices and the proper shielded
cables and connectors through an Apple-authorized dealer. For non-Apple peripheral devices,
contact the manufacturer or dealer for assistance.
vi Communications Regulation InformationFCC statement
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device
in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. See instructions if interference to
radio or television reception is suspected.
DOC statement
DOC Class B Compliance This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio
noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing equipment standard
entitled “Digital Apparatus,” ICES-003 of the Department of Communications.
Observation des normes—Classe B Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits
radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme
sur le matériel brouilleur : “Appareils Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par le ministre des
Communications.
VCCI statement
Communications Regulation Information viiThe QuickTake 100 is an easy-to-use camera that produces high-quality
pictures you can quickly transfer to your Macintosh computer. With the
QuickTake 100 you can capture images, and with your Macintosh you can
manipulate and modify those images to suit your purposes. The QuickTake
100 is a valuable new tool for graphic artists, publishing professionals, and
anyone who wants to use images to communicate.
IMPORTANT Save this manual. It contains important safety and operating
instructions.
In this chapter
m An inventory of items you need
m System requirements
m Features of the camera
m How to charge NiCad batteries
m Installing batteries in the camera
m Installing the QuickTake software
1
1
Getting Started
With the QuickTake 100 CameraDo you have what you need?
Before you begin, unpack the QuickTake 100 package. Be sure you have the
items shown in this illustration:
System requirements
To use the QuickTake 100 camera with your computer, you need
m a Macintosh with a 68020 or higher central processing unit (any Macintosh
except a Macintosh Plus, SE, Classic, Portable, or PowerBook 100)
m system software version 7.0.1• (with Tune-Up 1.1.1) or a later version
m 4 MB of RAM with 8 MB of virtual memory or 8MB of RAM
m an Apple SuperDrive (or any floppy drive that can read high-density disks)
m a hard drive with at least 10 MB available
QuickTake 100 camera Battery charger
Rechargeable NiCad
batteries
Serial cable QuickTake software
Neck strap
2 Chapter 1Your camera at a glance
This illustration shows the front, rear, and bottom of the camera.
Shutter release
Serial port and
power adapter port
(behind the cover)
Sliding lens cover
(opened)
Camera lens
Viewfinder lens (with light sensors
above and below, for the light meter) Built-in flash
Viewfinder Battery compartment
Control buttons
Control panel display
Timer light
Adjustable neck strap
Tripod mounting hole Neck strap
attachment points
Front view
Rear view
Bottom view
Getting Started With the QuickTake 100 Camera 3Charging the batteries
The three NiCad batteries you received with the QuickTake 100 must be
charged before you can use them. Use the battery charger that came with the
camera.
1 Insert the batteries into the charger.
2 Plug the battery charger into an electrical outlet.
It takes five hours to fully charge three NiCad batteries. (Be sure to fully
charge the batteries the first time you use them.) If you want to take pictures
right away, you can use three AA non-rechargeable batteries (not included) in
the camera. For information about battery care, see Appendix B.
3 Unplug the battery charger, remove the batteries, and install them in the camera.
See instructions for installing batteries on the next page.
WARNING To reduce the risk of injury, charge only rechargeable nickelcadmium batteries in the battery charger that came with the QuickTake
100 camera. Charging other types of batteries may cause them to leak or
explode, resulting in personal injury and property damage.
Make sure you position the + and –
ends of each battery as indicated on
the battery charger.
When batteries are charging, this
red light glows.
4 Chapter 1Installing the batteries
Use the three NiCad batteries that came with your camera. If the NiCad
batteries are being charged, you can substitute three AA non-rechargeable
batteries in the camera.
1 Flip open the door to the battery compartment.
2 Insert the batteries into the camera.
3 Close the battery compartment door.
See also: Appendix B, “Battery Information.”
Position the – and + ends of each
battery as indicated on the door.
Arrange the ribbon under the batteries so you can use
it to pull them out when you need to replace them.
WARNING Do not mix different types of batteries in the camera. Use
only three NiCad batteries or three AA non-rechargeable batteries.
Mixing batteries may cause a fire or a small explosion.
Getting Started With the QuickTake 100 Camera 5Installing the QuickTake software
Before you can transfer images from your camera to your Macintosh
computer, you need to install the necessary software on your Macintosh.
You’ll need the QuickTake disks that came with your camera. The disks
contain
m the Installer, a program that installs everything you need
m QuickTake 1.0, a program that transfers pictures from the camera to your
Macintosh
m other files needed by the QuickTake 100 camera
IMPORTANT If you have system software version 7.0.1• on your Macintosh, you
must turn on AppleTalk before you install QuickTake software. Open the
Chooser and make sure that AppleTalk is active.
1 Insert the appropriate installation disk into a floppy disk drive.
The choice depends on whether you have a Power Macintosh or not.
m If you have a Power Macintosh, insert QuickTake for Power Macintosh.
m Otherwise, insert QuickTake Install Disk 1.
If necessary, open the disk icon.
2 Double-click the Installer icon to open it.
3 In the Welcome dialog box that appears, click OK.
6 Chapter 1
Use the Installer to install
the QuickTake software.
For important late-breaking
information, open the Read Me.4 In the Installer dialog box, click Install.
A status box keeps you informed of progress during installation.
5 When you see a message on your screen, follow directions and insert the next disk.
Near the end of the process, you’ll be asked to insert the first disk again.
6 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, click Restart.
The Installer restarts your Macintosh. You’ll find a new folder containing the
QuickTake software on your hard disk.
Custom installation
If you click the Customize button in the Installer, you’ll see a list of specific
items you can install individually. To ensure that all the necessary software is
installed, use Easy Install instead.
Getting Started With the QuickTake 100 Camera 7
Make sure you install
the QuickTake
software on the disk
you use as your
startup disk.
When you’re ready to
begin, click Install.
To switch to a
different disk,
click Switch Disk.What if you upgrade your Macintosh system software?
If you decide to replace or upgrade your Macintosh system software after
you’ve installed the QuickTake software, you may not be able to open the
QuickTake application program. To fix this problem, reinstall the QuickTake
software.
As an alternative, you can use the custom Installer:
1 Insert the appropriate installation disk into a floppy disk drive.
The choice depends on whether you have a Power Macintosh or not.
m If you have a Power Macintosh, insert QuickTake for Power Macintosh.
m Otherwise, insert QuickTake Install Disk 1.
If necessary, open the disk icon.
2 Double-click the Installer icon to open it.
3 In the Welcome dialog box that appears, click OK.
4 In the Installer dialog box, click Customize.
5 Choose Shared Library Manager from the list.
6 Click Install.
7 When you see a message reporting that the installation was successful, click Restart.
You have reinstalled the Shared Library Manager, and you can open the
QuickTake program again.
What next?
To begin taking pictures, go on to Chapter 2.
8 Chapter 1
Use the Installer to install
the QuickTake software.Because the QuickTake 100 camera is small and light and runs on batteries,
you can take pictures with it anywhere.
In this chapter
m Turning on the camera
m Taking pictures
m Using the controls
m Waking the camera from sleep
9
2 Using the Camera to Take PicturesTurning on the camera
To turn the camera on, slide open the lens cover.
Lens cover Be careful not to touch
the camera lens.
10 Chapter 2Taking pictures
Look straight through the viewfinder and take time to frame the subject you
want to photograph. Hold the camera steady, and press the shutter release.
Because the camera delays briefly before taking the picture, be sure to hold it
still until you hear the shutter click. When the camera is ready for the next
picture (in a few seconds), a green light glows in the viewfinder. The pictures
can remain in the camera’s memory up to one year (or until you erase them).
Focal range and flash range
Try to keep a distance of at least four feet between you and the object you
want to photograph. The camera can focus on objects as close as four feet and
as far away as infinity. Objects closer than four feet may be out of focus, but
objects in the range between four feet and infinity will be properly focused.
The flash can illuminate objects as close as four feet and as far away as nine
feet.
4' 9' (Distance) Infinity
Focus
Flash
Press the shutter release.
Viewfinder
You can hold the camera horizontally or vertically.
Using the Camera to Take Pictures 11Using the controls
When the camera is on, the control panel display appears.
Flash settings
There are three possible settings for the flash. Each time you press the flash
button, you cycle from one setting to the next.
A
To let the camera’s light
sensor determine when
to flash, press the button
until you see this icon.
For a flash with
every picture,
press the button
until you see this icon.
To turn off the flash,
press the button until
you see this icon.
A stands for automatic.
When you turn on or
wake the camera, this
setting always appears.
When your subject is in
shadow, and the background
is brighter, use this setting.
A
Flash button
Erase All button
(explained in Chapter 3)
Control panel display Resolution button
Timer button
12 Chapter 2Resolution settings
There are two possible settings for resolution. Each time you press the
resolution button, you toggle from one setting to the other.
m Standard resolution means 320 x 240 pixels. You can take up to 32
standard-resolution pictures.
m High resolution means 640 x 480 pixels. Each picture contains more detail.
You can take a maximum of eight high-resolution pictures; they take more
space in memory than standard-resolution pictures.
m You can mix high- and standard-resolution pictures on the camera, all in
24-bit color.
A A
For standard resolution,
press the button until
you see this icon.
For high resolution,
press the button until
you see this icon.
Using the Camera to Take Pictures 13Pictures taken and pictures available
The number in the center of the control panel shows how many pictures
you’ve taken. The smaller number next to the resolution icon shows how
many pictures you can take before the camera is full.
Battery level
Just below the center of the panel is a battery icon. It tells you how much
power is left in your batteries.
If the batteries run out, the pictures in your camera are safe, but you need
fresh batteries to take any more pictures. For information about battery care,
see Appendix B.
A A A
Batteries fully
charged (or power
adapter connected)
Batteries running low Batteries empty
Recharge them or replace
them with fresh batteries.
A A
Pictures taken Pictures you can take at the
selected resolution
This number changes when you
change the resolution setting.
The camera automatically switches
to standard resolution when there
isn’t enough memory for a
high-resolution picture.
14 Chapter 2Timer
The timer gives you 10 seconds before the camera takes a picture.
1 Press the timer button.
2 Press the shutter and prepare for the picture.
On the top front of the camera, a red indicator light glows steadily for eight
seconds, then it blinks rapidly for another two seconds. When time is up, the
camera takes the picture.
A
When the timer is on,
the timer icon blinks.
Using the Camera to Take Pictures 15Waking the camera
To conserve battery power, the camera goes to sleep after 60 seconds of
inactivity (or after 5 minutes of inactivity when connected to your
Macintosh). To wake it, you can press and release the shutter, or close and
reopen the sliding lens cover.
If the camera is connected to your Macintosh, you must close and reopen the
lens cover to wake it. Pressing the shutter won’t work.
To wake the camera, press
and release the shutter.
Or close and reopen the lens cover.
16 Chapter 2When you finish taking pictures (or when the camera is full), you can connect
it to your Macintosh computer and transfer the pictures to the computer.
In this chapter
m Connecting the camera to your Macintosh
m Looking at the pictures on the camera
m Transferring pictures to your Macintosh
m Working with pictures
m Saving a picture
m Printing your pictures
m Naming the camera
m Setting the clock in the camera
m Taking pictures from your Macintosh
m Erasing pictures from the camera
m Using the camera with an AC power adapter
17
3 Using the Camera With Your MacintoshConnecting the camera to your Macintosh
Use the serial cable that came with your camera.
1 Turn off the camera (shut the lens cover).
2 Plug one end of the serial cable into the modem or printer port on your Macintosh.
If both ports are in use, free the one that’s most convenient and connect the
camera.
IMPORTANT It is not necessary to turn off your Macintosh before you connect
and disconnect the serial cable. (As long as a serial port is free, it’s not active.)
However, if you want to connect or disconnect other devices (for example,
SCSI devices), you should check the appropriate manuals first. In many cases
you must turn off the Macintosh before you connect or disconnect a cable.
These icons identify the printer and
modem ports on your Macintosh.
Connect the camera to either port.
Some Macintosh computers have a
combined serial port with two icons.
18 Chapter 33 Plug the other end of the cable into the serial port on the camera.
4 Turn on the camera (open the lens cover).
When the camera is connected and turned on, an animated rectangle appears
on the control panel display.
The edge of the
rectangle moves.
Press the cover in and slide it open. Serial port
Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 19Looking at the pictures in the camera
While the pictures are in the camera, you can see what they look like and
work with them. (To move them to your Macintosh before you work with
them, see the next section, “Transferring Pictures to Your Macintosh.”)
1 Connect the camera to your Macintosh.
For instructions, see “Connecting the Camera to Your Macintosh,” earlier in
this chapter.
2 If necessary, turn on the camera by sliding open the lens cover.
3 On your Macintosh, double-click the QuickTake icon to open it.
4 Choose View Slides in Camera from the Camera menu.
The pictures appear in a slide table on your Macintosh screen.
For information about what you can do with the pictures, see “Working With
Your Pictures,” later in this chapter.
20 Chapter 3Transferring pictures to your Macintosh
Before you can transfer pictures from the camera, it must be connected to
your Macintosh. For instructions, see “Connecting the Camera to Your
Macintosh,” earlier in this chapter.
1 If the camera is off, turn it on by sliding open the lens cover.
When the camera is connected and turned on, an animated rectangle appears
on the control panel display.
2 On your Macintosh, double-click the QuickTake icon to open it.
3 Choose Move All Camera Images to Disk from the Camera menu.
In the box that appears, choose the location you want for the pictures.
After the images have been moved to your Macintosh, a message appears that
gives you a chance to erase the images from the camera. (If you prefer, you
can use the Erase All button. See “Erasing Pictures From the Camera,” later
in this chapter.)
Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 21
When you’re ready,
click Save.
To create a new folder for the
pictures, click this button.Opening pictures on the Macintosh
Once the pictures are on your Macintosh, you can use the QuickTake software
to look at them, make some changes, and save the pictures in a variety of
formats and bit depths. (See “Working with Pictures,” later in this chapter.)
Opening a picture in the image window
1 On your Macintosh, double-click the QuickTake icon to open it.
2 Choose Open from the File menu.
3 In the box that appears, click the picture you want to see and click Open.
22 Chapter 3
The X means Show
Preview is on. You see
a preview of any
QuickTake picture
you select.
The picture appears in
an image window.Opening a slide table
1 On your Macintosh, double-click the QuickTake icon to open it.
2 Choose Open Slide Table from the File menu.
3 In the box that appears, find the pictures you want to see.
4 To open the slide table, click the Choose button.
The pictures appear in a slide table window.
5 To see a picture in detail, double-click the slide.
Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 23
When you’ve found the
pictures you want to
open as a slide table,
click Choose.
In this example, the
pictures contained in
the Mixed Pictures
folder will open
as a slide table.
A slide like this represents an
image with no preview imported
from another application program.
To see the image here, choose
Create Slide from the Image menu.Working with your pictures
Whether the pictures are in the camera or have been moved to your
Macintosh, you can use the QuickTake software to look at them, make some
changes, and save the pictures in a variety of formats and bit depths.
With slides you can
m edit the name under each slide, giving slides the names you want
m use the Get Info command to get specific information (such as the image’s
width and height)
m print the slide table
m open slides to full-size images
With a full-size image you can
m see different zoom views of an image
m print the image
m change the size of the printed image
m crop the image
m change the image’s bit depth
m use the Copy command to copy the image (or selected parts of it) to paste
into a document in another application program
With slides or a full-size image you can
m change the picture’s orientation by rotating it from vertical to horizontal
(and vice versa)
m save the pictures you like, using the Save or Save As command
On the next few pages you’ll find instructions for doing the tasks listed here.
24 Chapter 3Editing slide names
You can give your slides names that mean something to you.
Getting information about a slide
1 Click the slide.
2 Choose Get Info from the File menu.
An information window appears.
Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 25
Select the name
under the slide and
type a new name.Opening a slide to a full-size image
To see the picture full size, double-click the slide.
26 Chapter 3
Double-click the slide
to see it full size.Zoom views in the image window
To see the picture in the image window enlarged, actual size, or reduced,
choose View from the Image menu, then choose an item from the submenu.
When you open an image the first time, the QuickTake software uses all the
pixels to present the best possible image on your monitor. With a highresolution image, the picture appears at 200% magnification.
Changing the printed size of a picture
To change the size of a printed picture, choose Resize from the Image menu.
In the box that appears, you can specify one aspect (width, height, or
resolution) of the size you want the picture to be. (Resizing affects the entire
picture displayed in the image window. You can’t select and resize one section
of the picture.)
Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 27
High-resolution images show
144 dots per inch (dpi).
Standard resolution images
show 72 dpi.
When you choose Zoom In,
the image doubles in size.
When you choose Zoom Out,
the image shrinks to half its
previous size.
To change the width, height, or
resolution of a printed picture, type
the number you want in the space
provided. You can define one
aspect of the size; QuickTake
calculates the other two aspects.
To choose the unit of
measure you want
(inches or
centimeters), use this
pop-up menu.
This represents a QuickTake
high-resolution image.
This shows the size
of the picture when
it’s printed.Cropping a picture
1 Drag the pointer to include just the part of the picture you want in the selection
rectangle.
If you don’t get it right the first time, click outside the selection rectangle (or
press x-Z) to cancel the selection. Then try again.
2 Choose Crop from the Image menu.
The cropped image appears.
28 Chapter 3
Inside the
rectangle is the
part of the image
you keep.Changing the bit depth of a picture
You may want to change the image bit depth of a picture you take. For
example, if the picture uses millions of colors, but you plan to print it on a
grayscale printer, you can change the image bit depth to 256 shades of gray.
Changing bit depth and compression scheme can reduce the amount of disk
space required to store an image, but the changes may affect image quality.
To change the bit depth, choose Change Image Depth from the Image menu.
Then choose the bit depth you want. If you’re not happy with the result,
choose Undo from the Edit menu.
Copying a picture to another application
You can copy QuickTake pictures and paste them into documents in other
applications. (You cannot paste them into other QuickTake pictures.)
1 Drag the pointer to include in the selection rectangle the part of the picture you want to
copy.
To copy the entire image, choose Select All from the Edit menu.
2 Choose Copy from the Edit menu.
3 Position the pointer in the target document and choose Paste from the Edit menu.
A copy of the selected image appears in the document.
Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 29
This is an optimized palette
depending on the scene or
subject in the picture.Rotating a picture
To rotate the selected slide or picture, choose Rotate from the Image menu. A
submenu appears, and you can specify how far you want to turn the slide or
picture.
In the slide table, you can only rotate pictures that are in the PICT QuickTake
format. You can rotate a single, full-size image in any format.
If you rotate a picture that’s in the camera, you must save it to make the
change permanent. (If you’ve already moved the image to the Macintosh, the
computer remembers the change whether you save it or not.)
30 Chapter 3Saving a picture
If you want to preserve changes you make, you have to save the modified
picture. The Save and Save As commands in the QuickTake software behave
like the same commands in other Macintosh application programs. In
addition, the QuickTake software provides features that allow you to choose a
specific file format (such as PICT or TIFF), bit depth, and file compression.
1 To save the picture in the active image window, choose Save As from the File menu.
2 In the box that appears, type a name for the picture.
Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 31
Type a name for
the picture here.3 Choose the file format you want from the pop-up menu.
The file format you choose depends on the requirements of the application
into which you plan to import the picture.
m PICT is the basic Macintosh file format for images and is used by almost all
Macintosh programs that read image files.
The PICT QuickTake format is created (and compressed) by the camera.
To open images in this format on a Macintosh, you need the QuickTake
Image and QuickTime extensions. To open images saved in the compressed
PICT formats, you need only the QuickTime extension. To open images
saved in PICT with no compression, use any application that reads PICT.
m TIFF stands for Tagged Image File Format. TIFF is another commonly used
file format for storing bitmapped images in various resolutions.
4 Choose the image depth you want from the pop-up menu.
The image depth you choose depends on the printer to which you plan to
send the picture or the monitor on which you plan to display it.
5 Click the Save button (or press Return).
32 Chapter 3
These three formats use JPEG
compression for a smaller file size,
but with some loss of image quality.
If you use 256 colors, Custom Colors
adjust to the scene or subject, showing
an image at its best. However, this setting
may cause other color images on your
desktop to look strange.
Default colors for a 256-color monitorPrinting your pictures
You can use the QuickTake application to print the pictures you take, and you
can print them while they are on the camera or after you transfer them to your
Macintosh.
Printing a slide table
1 Open the slide table you want to print.
2 Choose Print from the File menu.
3 In the box that appears, choose the settings you want.
In a short while, the printed slide table is ready at your printer.
Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 33
When the options are
set the way you want
them, click Print.
IMPORTANT Be sure
to click Color/ Grayscale
before you print
QuickTake images.34 Chapter 3
Printing a single image
1 Make sure the picture you want to print is opened as a full-size image.
2 Choose Print from the File menu.
3 In the box that appears, choose the settings you want.
Sometimes a printed high-resolution picture is smaller than it appears on your
screen.
m A high-resolution image takes full advantage of its 640 x 480 pixels on the
screen and appears at twice its actual size. (The title bar of the image
window tells you the magnification is 200%.) Its printed size is 100%.
m A standard-resolution image appears in a 320 x 240 pixel size on screen
and the same size when it prints. (The magnification is 100%.)
To change the size of a printed picture, use the Resize command. For details,
see “Changing the Printed Size of a Picture,” earlier in this chapter.
When the options are
set the way you want
them, click Print.
IMPORTANT Be sure
to click Color/ Grayscale
before you print
QuickTake images.Naming the camera
You can give your camera a name. When you look at the pictures while
they’re on the camera, its name appears as the title of the slide table window.
The camera must be connected to your Macintosh. For instructions, see
“Connecting the Camera to Your Macintosh,” earlier in this chapter.
1 On your Macintosh, double-click the QuickTake icon to open it.
2 Choose Set Camera Name from the Camera menu.
3 In the box that appears, type the name you want.
4 When you’re finished, click Set.
Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 35
The name you type
can contain up to
31 characters.Setting the clock in the camera
The camera’s internal clock keeps track of the date and time you take each
picture. This information is useful, and in some circumstances important, so
take time now to set the clock.
The camera must be connected to your Macintosh. (For instructions, see
“Connecting the Camera to Your Macintosh,” earlier in this chapter.) If you
want to check the date and time on the Macintosh before you set the camera,
use the General Controls panel.
1 If necessary, turn on the camera by sliding open the lens cover.
2 On your Macintosh, double-click the QuickTake icon to open it.
3 Choose Set Camera Date & Time from the Camera menu.
4 To set the camera to match your Macintosh, click OK in the box that appears.
Whenever you want to check the accuracy of the camera’s clock, choose Set
Camera Date & Time from the Camera menu.
IMPORTANT If the batteries in your QuickTake camera go dead or you remove
them and don’t replace them immediately, the camera’s clock stops. To
guarantee that the clock in the camera matches the clock on your Macintosh,
you must connect the camera to the computer and repeat the procedure
described here.
36 Chapter 3Taking pictures from the Macintosh
You can use the camera controls on your Macintosh to take pictures.
1 Connect the camera to your Macintosh.
For instructions, see “Connecting the Camera to Your Macintosh” earlier in
this chapter.
2 Arrange the camera so it’s in a position to take the picture you want.
3 Choose Camera Controls from the Camera menu.
4 In the box that appears, change any settings to suit your needs.
For details about the different settings, see “Using the Controls” in Chapter 2.
5 When you’re ready, click Take a Picture.
You can use the Erase All button to erase the pictures on the camera.
Remember that the control erases all the images permanently.
Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 37
Resolution button
Timer button
Flash button
Erase All buttonErasing pictures from the camera
After you transfer your pictures to your Macintosh, you should erase them
from the camera to make room for new pictures.
If the camera is connected to your Macintosh, there’s another way to erase
pictures. You can open the QuickTake program and choose Camera Controls
from the Camera menu. Then click the Erase All button on the Macintosh
screen.
WARNING This erases all of the pictures in the camera. You cannot
erase a few and leave the rest in the camera.
To erase all the pictures in the camera,
lightly press the Erase All button.
(Use any small, pointed object.)
As the pictures are erased, the Trash icon in the
control panel display blinks. In a few seconds,
the display shows 0 (zero) pictures taken.
38 Chapter 3Using the camera with a power adapter
To conserve battery power, you can use a power adapter and plug the camera
into an available power outlet. Use only the QuickTake 100 AC Adapter (part
number M2851LL/A) or the PowerBook AC Adapter with the QuickTake 100.
It’s a good idea to use the power adapter for power while the camera is
connected to your Macintosh. (Note: The power adapter does not recharge
batteries in the camera. If you have rechargeable batteries, use the charger
that came with the QuickTake 100. See “Charging the Batteries” in Chapter 1.)
WARNING Never alter the plug on the power adapter. If it will not fit an
electrical outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualifed electrician.
Improper connection may result in electrical shock. Use of a power
adapter not recommended or sold by Apple Computer, Inc., may result
in a risk of fire, electrical shock, or injury.
Using the Camera With Your Macintosh 39Traveling with the camera
The QuickTake 100 Travel Case (part number M2848G/A) is available at
authorized Apple resellers. The travel case includes a leather camera grip and
a protective carrying case.
Using the battery booster pack with the camera
The QuickTake 100 Battery Booster Pack (part number M2655G/A) is
available at authorized Apple resellers. The booster pack lets you take
thousands of pictures with your QuickTake 100 camera. It comes with eight
AA lithium batteries and plugs into the power adapter port on your camera.
QuickTake 100 Battery Booster Pack
QuickTake 100 Travel Case
40 Chapter 341
This chapter explains what happens when you choose any of the commands
from the QuickTake software menus.
In this chapter
m The File menu
m The Edit menu
m The Image menu
m The Camera menu
m The Windows menu
4 QuickTake Software Menu CommandsThe File menu
The commands in the File menu work on the contents of windows or folders.
m Open Brings up a box that you can use to locate and open your pictures.
When you open the selected picture, it appears by itself in an image window.
42 Chapter 4
The X means Show
Preview is on. You see
a preview of any
QuickTake picture
you select.m Open Slide Table Brings up a box which you can use to open slides of all the
pictures in a folder you select.
The pictures in the selected folder appear together in a slide table window.
m Close Closes the active window. If you haven’t saved changes to the picture
in the image window, a message appears asking you whether you want to
save the picture before closing the window.
m Save Saves a picture you’ve opened, including any changes you’ve made to
it. Use Save (rather than the Save As command) for routine saving of your
pictures.
m Save As Saves a picture the first time you open it and want to save it. Also
lets you save it with a different name, or in a different folder, or on a
different disk, or in a different file format.
QuickTake Software Menu Commands 43
When you’ve chosen
the folder containing the
pictures you want to
see, click here.
To change the file format and bit depth
of an image, use these pop-up menus.The file format you choose depends on the requirements of the application
program into which you plan to import the picture.
The image depth you choose depends on the printer to which you plan to
send the picture or the monitor on which you plan to display it.
m Page Setup Lets you set the page size, orientation, and other options for
pictures that you print using QuickTake software.
44 Chapter 4
To select
enhancements to
the printed image,
click Options.
When the options are
set the way you want
them, click OK.m Print Prints the picture displayed in the image window. A box appears with
options for printing your document.
m Quit Ends a session with the QuickTake software. If you’ve modified the
picture in the image window but haven’t saved it, a message appears asking
you whether you want to save the picture before quitting the program.
QuickTake Software Menu Commands 45
When the options are
set the way you want
them, click Print.
IMPORTANT Be sure
to click Color/ Grayscale
before you print
QuickTake images.The Edit menu
The commands in the Edit menu let you work with selected parts of the
picture in the image window.
m Undo Cancels your most recent changes to the picture. For example, if you
used the Crop command and don’t like the results, you can choose Undo to
cancel the crop.
m Cut Removes the material you have selected and places it on the Clipboard.
You can only use the Cut command to edit the names of pictures in the
slide table.
m Copy Copies the material you have selected to the Clipboard. The original
material stays where it was when you selected it.
m Paste Copies the material on the Clipboard to the active window in another
program (not QuickTake). The program you are using determines where
you can paste the material and how much freedom you have to move it
around. You can continue to paste copies until you cut or copy a new
selection (which replaces the old contents of the Clipboard).
m Select All Selects everything in the picture, placing the selection rectangle
around the outer edge of the picture.
46 Chapter 4The Image menu
The commands in the Image menu work with the picture in the image
window, and some of them work with slides in the slide table.
m View Lets you see a picture in the image window enlarged or reduced or at
its actual size (100%). Each time you choose Zoom In, the image doubles
in size. When you choose Zoom Out, the image shrinks to half its previous
size.
m Rotate Rotates the selected slide or picture. When you choose Rotate, a
submenu appears that lets you specify how far you want to turn the slide or
picture.
In the slide table, you can only rotate pictures that are in the QuickTake
format. Full-size images can be rotated in any format.
If you rotate a picture that’s in the camera, you must save it to make the
change permanent. (If you’ve already moved the image to the Macintosh, the
computer remembers the change whether you save it or not.)
QuickTake Software Menu Commands 47m Resize Brings up a box that lets you specify one aspect (width, height, or
resolution) of the size you want the picture to be. (Resizing affects the
entire picture displayed in the image window. You can’t select and resize
one section of the picture.) You can change the dimensions of the image to
meet your specific requirements.
m Crop Trims a picture to include only the part you’ve selected with the
selection rectangle.
m Change Image Depth Lets you change the bit depth of the picture in the
image window. For example, if you don’t need all the information
contained in millions of colors, changing to 256 shades of gray reduces the
size of the file on your disk.
m Create Slide Creates a preview image so you can see pictures from other
sources alongside your QuickTake pictures in the slide table.
m Sort Slides By Lets you choose to sort slides in numerical order by date or
alphabetical order by name.
48 Chapter 4
To change the width, height, or
resolution of a printed picture, type
the number you want in the space
provided. You can define only one
aspect of the size; QuickTake
calculates the other two aspects.
To choose the unit of
measure you want,
use this pop-up
menu.
This represents a QuickTake
high-resolution image.
This shows the size
(in inches or
centimeters) of the
picture when it’s
printed.The Camera menu
The commands in the Camera menu work with the camera. You must connect
the camera to your Macintosh before you can use this menu. (For instructions
on connecting the camera to your Macintosh, see Chapter 3.)
m View Slides in Camera Lets you see slides of the pictures currently in the
camera.
m Move All Camera Images to Disk Transfers pictures from the camera to your
Macintosh. When you choose this command, a box appears that lets you
specify where to save the pictures.
QuickTake Software Menu Commands 49m Set Camera Name Brings up a box that lets you give a unique name to your
camera. This is especially helpful if more than one camera may transfer
pictures to a particular Macintosh.
m Set Camera Date & Time Brings up a box that tells you whether the clock
needs to be reset to match your Macintosh. If it does, click OK.
m Camera Controls Brings up a control panel like the one on the camera.
The Windows menu
The Windows menu lists the names of all the QuickTake windows currently
open. You can choose which window should be frontmost. (If you haven’t
saved and named their contents, image windows are identified as Image 1,
Image 2, and so on.)
50 Chapter 4
The name you type can
contain up to 31 characters.
When you’re ready, click Set.
To change the resolution, click here.
To turn on (or turn off) the timer, click here.
To change the flash
To erase the
pictures in the
camera, click here.
To take a picture, click here.This chapter offers suggestions to help you care for your camera and solve
problems.
In this chapter
m Maintenance tips
m Problem-solving tips
Caring for your camera
These suggestions should help you maintain the QuickTake 100 camera:
m Protect the camera from moisture and excessive heat.
m Don’t use harsh or abrasive cleaners on the camera. Wipe off dust with a
clean, dry cloth.
m When you are not taking pictures, close the lens cover to protect the lens
and keep it clean (and to extend battery life).
51
5 Maintenance and Troubleshootingm To clean the lens, first blow away any surface dust or dirt. Breathe on the
lens to form a mist, then gently wipe away the mist with a soft, lint-free
cloth or lens cleaning tissue. Don’t press hard, or you may scratch the lens.
Never wipe a dry lens.
m If you store the camera for an extended period, remove the batteries. When
you replace the batteries, remember to reset the date and time. (For
instructions, see “Setting the Clock in the Camera” in Chapter 3.)
Solving problems
This section describes some problems you might encounter, and offers
solutions you can try.
IMPORTANT If you have a problem with your camera and nothing
recommended here solves it, contact your authorized service provider.
Camera won’t take pictures
m The camera may not be turned on. Make sure the lens cover is open.
m The camera may be asleep. Press the shutter release or close and then open
the lens cover.
m If you just took a flash picture, the flash may be recharging. Look for the
green light in the viewfinder. When it comes on, the camera is ready to
take another picture.
m The batteries may be low or dead. Replace the batteries or connect the AC
power adapter to the camera.
m The batteries may not be installed correctly. (See “Installing the Batteries”
in Chapter 1.)
WARNING Don’t use solvents or solutions unless they are specifically
designed for cleaning camera lenses. Don’t use chemically treated tissues
intended for eyeglasses.
52 Chapter 5m The camera’s memory may have no room for another picture. Transfer the
pictures from the camera to your Macintosh, then erase the pictures. (See
“Erasing Pictures From the Camera” in Chapter 3.)
m The camera may be connected to your Macintosh. You can use the camera
controls on the Macintosh to take pictures (see “Taking Pictures From the
Macintosh” in Chapter 3), or disconnect the serial cable from the camera.
Can’t see anything through the viewfinder
m Make sure the lens cover is open.
m Move the camera around slightly as you look through it. You need to look
straight through the viewfinder.
Flash fails to go off
m Make sure the flash is turned on. (See “Flash Settings” in Chapter 2.)
m The batteries may be low or dead. Replace the batteries.
m The batteries may not be installed correctly. (See “Installing the Batteries”
in Chapter 1.)
The Macintosh doesn’t recognize the camera
Different devices and programs may compete with the camera for the use of a
serial port on your Macintosh. If there’s a problem, a message tells you that
the camera is not responding. Make sure the serial cable is connected
properly, the camera is turned on, and the batteries have enough power.
If you have system software version 7.0.1•, try the following to resolve the
problem:
m Turn on AppleTalk in the Chooser. AppleTalk must be turned on to use the
QuickTake software with system software version 7.0.1•.
m Determine whether you have a LocalTalk device connected to the printer
port. If you do, connect the camera to the modem port.
m If you have a non-LocalTalk device, or no device at all, connected to the
printer port, open the Network control panel and change the setting from
LocalTalk to Remote Only. (If you use an EtherTalk network, leave the
setting on EtherTalk.) Then connect the camera to either port.
Maintenance and Troubleshooting 53Pictures are fuzzy, blurry, or blotchy
m The lens may be dirty. Clean the lens. (See “Caring for Your Camera,”
earlier in this chapter.)
m The subject or the camera may have moved. Hold the camera steady, and
use the flash. (See “Taking Pictures” and “Flash Settings” in Chapter 2.)
m The subject may be out of focal range. Keep a distance of at least four feet
between you and the subject. The flash illuminates subjects between four
and nine feet from the camera.
m The resolution setting may not be appropriate for the subject. Change to
high resolution. (See “Resolution Settings” in Chapter 2.)
Pictures are too dark (underexposed)
m There may not be enough light to take a picture. Turn on the flash. (See
“Flash Settings” in Chapter 2.)
m The subject may be too far away for the flash to have an effect. Make sure
the subject is no more than nine feet away. (See “Focal Range and Flash
Range” in Chapter 2.)
Pictures are too light (overexposed)
m If the camera is set to use flash with every picture, that may be too much
light. Change to automatic flash. (See “Flash Settings” in Chapter 2.)
m The subject may be too close. Make sure the subject is at least four feet
away. (See “Focal Range and Flash Range” in Chapter 2.)
m The camera may be pointed directly at a bright light. Try a different angle.
m The light sensors (above and below the viewfinder lens) may be dirty. Use
a soft, dry cloth to clean them. (To locate the light sensors, see “Your
Camera at a Glance” in Chapter 1.)
m One or both of the light sensors may be covered inadvertently. Be careful
not to obstruct the light sensors while you take pictures.
Part of a picture is missing
m Some part of the lens may be covered. Keep your hands, the neck strap,
and other objects away from the lens and the built-in flash.
54 Chapter 5Physical
m Depth 6.1 in. (155 mm)
m Width 5.3 in. (135 mm)
m Height 2.2 in. (55 mm)
m Weight 1 lb. (0.5 kg)
Technical
m Type CCD Still Frame Camera
m Image size 320 x 240 pixels standard resolution;
640 x 480 high resolution
m Interface GeoPort (Macintosh); RS-232C serial (Windows)
m Bit depth 24-bit color
m Memory 1 MB Flash EPROM
55
Appendix A
SpecificationsCamera
m Lens field of view 8 mm (equivalent to 50-mm lens on a 35-mm film
camera)
m ISO equivalent to approximately ISO 85
m Focus range 4 feet to infinity
m Aperture ƒ2.8 to ƒ16
m Shutter speed 1/30 second to 1/175 second
m Flash range 4 feet to 9 feet
Temperature
m Operating 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F)
m Storage (6 months) –40° to 47° C (–40° to 117° F)
m Transit (72 hours) –40° to 65° C (–40° to 149° F)
m Humidity Classified as Class 1 equipment
Power requirements
m Standby <500 mW
m Operating <4.5 W
Operating environment
m Temperature 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F)
m Humidity 20 to 95 percent, noncondensing
Electrical requirements
m Internal power 3 AA batteries (3.6 V DC to 5.4 V DC)
m External power 4.5 V DC/1.75 A to 8.0 V DC/1.0 A
Accessories
m QuickTake 100 Travel Case (part number M2848G/A)
m QuickTake 100 Battery Booster Pack (part number M2655G/A)
56 Appendix AThe QuickTake camera comes with three AA rechargeable NiCad (nickelcadmium) batteries and a battery charger. In place of the NiCad batteries, the
camera can use other AA batteries. This appendix contains important
information about the battery charger and the batteries you can use in the
QuickTake camera.
Important safety instructions for using the battery charger
m Save this manual. It contains important safety and operating instructions.
m Before using the battery charger, read all instructions and cautionary
markings on the charger, the batteries, and the QuickTake camera.
m The battery charger is designed for indoor use only. Do not expose the
charger to rain or snow.
m Charge only NiCad rechargeable batteries. Charging other types of
batteries with the charger that came with the camera may cause them to
leak or explode, resulting in personal injury and property damage.
m Use of an attachment (such as a battery charger, power supply, or serial
cable) not recommended specifically for use with QuickTake 100 and sold
by Apple Computer may result in a risk of fire, electrical shock, or injury.
m Do not plug the charger into an extension cord.
57
Appendix B
Battery Informationm If the charger has been hit, dropped, or damaged in any way, do not
operate it. Take it to an authorized service provider for repair.
m Do not disassemble the charger. If it needs service or repair, take it to an
authorized service provider. Incorrect reassembly may result in fire or
electric shock.
m To reduce the risk of electric shock, unplug the charger from the electrical
outlet before you attempt to clean it. Turning off power to the outlet will
not reduce this risk.
Caring for batteries
Here are some general suggestions for good battery care.
m Always handle batteries carefully.
m Do not short-circuit battery terminals (that is, do not touch both terminals
with a metal object). Do not carry loose batteries in a pocket or purse
where they may mix with coins, keys, or other metal objects. Doing so may
cause an explosion or a fire.
m Do not drop, puncture, disassemble, mutilate, or incinerate the batteries.
m Recharge batteries only as described in this manual and only in ventilated
areas.
m Intense heat can shorten battery life. Do not leave batteries in hot locations
(such as the trunk of a car) for more than a day or two.
m Do not leave NiCad batteries in storage for longer than 6 months without
recharging them. Store unused batteries in a dry place at normal room
temperature.
m Dispose of used batteries according to the battery manufacturer’s
instructions.
58 Appendix BWays to improve battery performance
Here are some tips that may help you get the most from your batteries.
m When you replace used batteries, replace all the old ones with new ones.
Mixing new and used batteries weakens the performance of the new ones.
(If you are using rechargeable batteries, replace batteries that are running
low with a complete set of fully charged batteries.)
m Batteries work best when the contact surfaces are clean. If necessary, clean
these surfaces by gently rubbing with a clean pencil eraser or a cloth.
Rechargeable NiCad batteries
If you’ve used a set of rechargeable batteries for a while, and they seem not to
last as long as when they were new, discharge them completely before
recharging them. Unless the batteries are wearing out, this should improve
their lasting power.
WARNING Damaged nickel-cadmium (NiCad) batteries may leak small
amounts of potassium hydroxide. This substance can cause severe burns
to the skin and eyes. If you touch a damaged battery, immediately rinse
your hands and any other affected areas with water for at least 5
minutes. Do not use soap.
Battery Information 59You can use the QuickTake 100 camera with a computer running Windows
software, but you’ll need a special cable and the Windows version of the
QuickTake software. You can purchase the QuickTake 100 Connection Kit for
Windows with everything you need.
61
Appendix C
Using the Camera with a Windows-Based PCThe QuickTake Setup control panel puts a camera icon on the desktop for
convenient access to images on the QuickTake 100 camera. (By the way, you
don’t need the camera icon to use the QuickTake 1.0 application program.)
1 Make sure the camera is connected to your Macintosh and turned on.
2 Choose Control Panels from the Apple (K) menu.
3 Open QuickTake Setup.
4 In the box that appears, click Connect To Camera.
63
Appendix D
Using QuickTake Setup64 Appendix D
The camera icon appears on your desktop. You can use the control panel to
m rename the camera
m make sure the camera’s clock is reset automatically when you connect your
QuickTake 100 to the Macintosh
m control the camera’s sleep schedule
m erase the images on the camera
5 To see the images on the camera, double-click the camera icon to open it.
You have several options for using the images on the camera:
m To open an image in the QuickTake 1.0 application program, double-click
the image icon. You can use QuickTake 1.0 to save images in formats other
than PICT QuickTake (the original format of images on the camera).
m To view the images and edit them, use an appropriate image-editing,
image-database, or word-processing program.
m To move the images to your hard disk, drag them to the disk. You can open
and view images on the camera but cannot save them there.
6 To close the control panel, click its close box.
7 To remove the camera from your desktop, drag the icon to the Trash.
By the way, you can move the QuickTake Setup icon out of the Control Panels
folder to a more convenient place.
This icon represents your
QuickTake 100 camera.
(You don’t need this icon
on your desktop to use
QuickTake 1.0.)
IMPORTANT This erases everything on the camera.
You cannot select individual images to erase.
To change the time that
elapses before the camera
goes to sleep, use this
pop-up menu.
To rename your
camera, type a name
and click Set Name.A
AC adapter 39
accessories 56
aperture 56
AppleTalk 6, 53
applications, copying pictures to 29
B
batteries 57–59
caring for 58
charging 4
checking level of 14
cleaning 59
conserving with power adapter 39
conserving with sleep 16
damaged 59
discharging 59
disposing of 58
improving performance of 59
installing 5
rechargeable 57–59
recharging 58
removing for long-term storage 52
replacing 59
safety instructions for 4, 5, 59
storing 58
troubleshooting 59
types to use 57
battery booster pack 40
battery charger
caring for 57–58
charging batteries with 4
safety instructions for 57–58
battery compartment 3
battery terminals 58
bit depth, changing 29, 43–44, 48
bit depth specifications 55
C
cable, connecting 18–19
Camera Controls command (Camera
menu) 37–38, 50
camera icon on desktop 63–64
camera lens 3
Camera menu 49–50
Camera Controls command 37–38, 50
Move All Camera Images to Disk
command 21, 49
Set Camera Date & Time command
36, 50
Set Camera Name command 35, 50
View Slides in Camera command
20, 49
65
Indexcamera specifications 56
care
of batteries 58
of battery charger 57–58
of camera 51–52
Change Image Depth command (Image
menu) 29, 48
charging batteries 4
cleaning
batteries 59
camera 51–52
lens 52
clock, setting 36, 50
resetting automatically 64
Close command (File menu) 43
closing active windows 43
color, 24-bit 13
colors (image depth) 44, 48
commands, undoing 46
compression scheme, changing 29
connecting camera to Macintosh 18–20
control buttons 3
control panel, QuickTake Setup 63–64
control panel display 3, 12
controls 12–15
battery level 14
flash settings 12
pictures taken and pictures
available 14
resolution settings 13
timer 15
Copy command (Edit menu) 29, 46
copying pictures 46
to another application 29
Create Slide command (Image menu)
23, 48
Crop command (Image menu) 28, 48
cropping pictures 28, 48
customizing software installation 7
Cut command (Edit menu) 46
D
date, setting 36, 50
desktop, camera icon on 63–64
disposing of batteries 58
E
editing slide names 25, 46
Edit menu 46
Copy command 29, 46
Cut command 46
Paste command 29, 46
Select All command 29, 46
Undo command 29, 46
electrical requirements 56
Erase All button
in QuickTake software 37–38
on camera 38
Erase Camera button 64
erasing pictures 37–38, 64
EtherTalk network 53
F
file format, changing 31–32, 43–44
File menu 42–45
Close command 43
Get Info command 25
Open command 42
Open Slide Table command 23, 43
Page Setup command 44
Print command 33–34, 44
Quit command 44
Save As command 43–44
Save command 43
flash
location of 3
range of 11, 54, 56
recharging 52
setting 12
troubleshooting 53
66 IndexFlash button
in QuickTake software 37
on camera 12
flash icon 12
focal range 11, 54, 56
folders
creating for pictures 21
opening pictures in 23, 43
format, changing 31–32, 43–44
framing subjects 11
G
Get Info command (File menu) 25
grayscale printing 29, 33–34, 45
green light in viewfinder 11, 52
H
hard disk, moving images to 64
high resolution, setting 13
high-resolution images 27
printing 34
humidity 56
I, J, K
icons
camera on desktop 63–64
flash 12
modem port 18
printer port 18
QuickTake 20, 22
resolution 14
serial port 18
timer 15
Trash 38
image depth, changing 29, 32, 43–44, 48
Image menu 47–48
Change Image Depth command
29, 48
Create Slide command 23, 48
Crop command 28, 48
Resize command 27, 48
Rotate command 30, 47
Sort Slides By command 48
View command 27, 47
image size specifications 55
image window
changing image depth in 48
cropping pictures in 48
opening pictures in 22
resizing images in 48
rotating pictures in 47
zoom views in 27, 47
images. See pictures
Installer 6–7
installing
batteries 5
QuickTake software 6–8
custom installation 7
interface 55
interference vi–vii
L
lens 3, 10
cleaning 52
field of view 56
troubleshooting 54
lens cover 3
keeping closed 51
turning camera off with 18
turning camera on with 10, 19
waking camera with 16
lighting 54. See also flash
lights
green light in viewfinder 11, 52
red timer light 3, 15
light sensors 12, 54
LocalTalk devices 53
looking at pictures in camera 20
Index 67M
Macintosh
connecting camera to 18–20
failure to recognize camera 53
opening pictures on 22–23
taking pictures from 37
transferring pictures to 21
using camera with 17–39
working with pictures on 24–39
maintenance 51–53
memory, full 53
memory specifications 55
menu commands 41–50. See also
specific menu or command
modem port 18
modem port icon 18
Move All Camera Images to Disk
command (Camera menu)
21, 49
moving images to hard disk 64
N
naming
camera 35, 50, 64
pictures 31
slides 25
neck strap 3
NiCad batteries. See batteries
O
Open command (File menu) 42
opening pictures 22–23, 42, 64
in image window 22
in QuickTake 1.0 64
in slide table 23, 43
opening slides to full-size image 26
Open Slide Table command (File menu)
23, 43
operating environment 56
P
Page Setup command (File menu) 44
Paste command (Edit menu) 29, 46
pasting pictures 46
into other applications 29
PC, Windows-based 61
photography. See taking pictures
physical specifications 55
PICT format 31–32, 44
PICT QuickTake format 30, 32, 44
pictures
changing image depth of 32, 48
changing printed size of 27
changing size with Resize command
27, 48
changing size with View command
27, 47
copying 46
copying to another application 29
creating folder for 21
creating slides 23
cropping 28, 48
date and time stamp for 36, 50
editing slide names 25, 46
erasing from camera 21, 38, 64
getting information about slides 25
moving to hard disk 64
naming 31
number taken and number
available 14
opening 22–23, 42
opening slides to full-size image 26
opening slide table 23
previewing 22, 42, 48
printing options for 44
printing single image 34
printing slide table 33
quality of 54
rotating 30, 47
saving 31–32, 43–44
sorting slides 48
68 Indextaking with camera 11–15
taking with Macintosh 37
transferring to Macintosh 21, 49
troubleshooting 52–54
undoing changes to 46
viewing different sizes of 27
viewing in camera 20, 49
working with 24–39
working with selected parts of 46
pixels 13
ports
modem port 18
power adapter port 3, 40
printer port 18, 53
serial port 3, 18–19, 53
power. See batteries; power adapter
power adapter 39
power adapter port 3, 40
PowerBook AC Adapter 39
power requirements 56
previewing pictures 22, 42, 48
Print command (File menu) 33–34, 44
printer port 18, 53
printer port icon 18
printers, grayscale 29, 33–34, 45
printing pictures 33–34, 44–45
grayscale 29, 33–34, 45
high-resolution images 34
low-resolution images 34
options for 43–44
printing a single image 34
printing slide table 33
Q
QuickTake icon 20, 22
QuickTake 100 AC Adapter 39
QuickTake 100 Battery Booster Pack 40
QuickTake 100 Connection Kit for
Windows 61
QuickTake 100 Travel Case 40
QuickTake Setup 63–64
QuickTake software
AppleTalk and 6, 53
changing pictures with 24–25, 27–31
copying pictures to another
application with 29
erasing pictures with 38
installing 6–8
menu commands 41–50
naming camera with 35
opening pictures with 22–31
printing pictures with 33–34
quitting 45
saving pictures with 31–32
setting clock with 36
taking pictures with 37
transferring pictures with 21
upgraded system software and 8
viewing pictures with 20, 26–27
Windows version of 61
Quit command (File menu) 44
R
rechargeable batteries 57–59
recharging 4, 57–58
discharging 59
recharging flash 52
red timer light 3, 15
renaming the camera 64
repair 58
replacing batteries 59
resetting the clock automatically 64
Resize command (Image menu) 27, 48
Resolution button
in QuickTake software 37
on camera 12
resolution icons 14
resolution settings 13
Rotate command (Image menu) 30, 47
rotating pictures and slides 30, 47
Index 69S
safety instructions
batteries 5, 59
battery charger 4, 57–58
Save As command (File menu) 31,
43–44
Save command (File menu) 31, 43
saving pictures 31–32, 43–44
Select All command (Edit menu) 29, 46
selecting whole picture 29, 46
serial cable
connecting 18–19
disconnecting 53
serial port 3, 18–19, 53
serial port icon 18
service 52, 58
Set Camera Date & Time command
(Camera menu) 36, 50
Set Camera Name command (Camera
menu) 35, 50
setting camera clock 36, 50, 64
shadowed subjects, photographing 12
Show Preview 22, 42
shutter 3, 11
waking camera with 16
shutter speed 56
sleep
setting time for 64
waking from 16
slides
creating 23
editing names of 25, 46
getting information about 25
opening to full-size image 26
previewing 48
rotating 47
sorting 48
viewing in camera 20
slide table 20
creating slides in 48
opening 23
printing 34
rotating pictures in 47
sorting slides in 48
software. See applications; QuickTake
software
sorting slides 48
Sort Slides By command (Image
menu) 48
specifications 55–56
standard resolution, setting 13
standard resolution images 27
printing 34
storing
batteries 58
camera 52, 56
system requirements 2
system software
version 7.0.1•, QuickTake software
and 6, 53
upgrading 8
T
taking pictures 11–15
focusing 11, 54, 56
framing subjects 11
from Macintosh 37
of shadowed subjects 12
resolution settings 13
tracking pictures taken and pictures
available 14
troubleshooting 52–54
with or without flash 11–12
with timer 15
technical specifications 55–56
temperature specifications 56
TIFF format 31–32, 44
70 Indextime, setting 36, 50
Timer button
in QuickTake software 37
on camera 12, 15
timer icon 15
timer light 3, 15
transferring pictures to Macintosh 21, 49
Trash icon 38
travel case 40
traveling with the camera 40
tripod mounting hole 3
troubleshooting 52–54
batteries 59
flash 53
Macintosh doesn’t recognize
camera 53
picture quality 54
taking pictures 52–53
viewfinder 53
turning off camera 18
turning off flash 12
turning on camera 10, 19
U
Undo command (Edit menu) 29, 46
upgrading system software 8
V
View command (Image menu) 27, 47
viewfinder
framing subject with 11
green light in 11, 52
location of 3
troubleshooting 53
viewfinder lens 3
viewing pictures in camera 20
View Slide in Camera command (Camera
menu) 20, 49
W, X, Y
waking the camera 16
windows, closing 43
Windows-based PCs, using camera
with 61
Windows menu 50
Z
zoom views in image window 27, 47
Index 71Apple Computer, Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, California 95014-6299
408.996.1010
TLX 171-576
030-6161-A
Printed in U.S.A.
ð
Personal
LaserWriter300
User’s Guide
ðK Apple Computer, Inc.
This manual and the software described in it are copyrighted, with all rights reserved.
Under the copyright laws, this manual or the software may not be copied, in whole or
part, without written consent of Apple, except in the normal use of the software or to
make a backup copy of the software. The same proprietary and copyright notices must
be affixed to any permitted copies as were affixed to the original. This exception does
not allow copies to be made for others, whether or not sold, but all of the material
purchased (with all backup copies) may be sold, given, or loaned to another person.
Under the law, copying includes translating into another language or format.
You may use the software on any computer owned by you, but extra copies cannot be
made for this purpose.
The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries. Use of the “keyboard” Apple logo (Option-Shift-K) for commercial purposes
without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and
unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws.
© Apple Computer, Inc., 1993
20525 Mariani Avenue
Cupertino, CA 95014-6299
(408) 996-1010
Apple, the Apple logo, AppleTalk, LaserWriter, and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple
Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Chicago, Finder, Geneva, GrayShare, Monaco, New York, System 7, and TrueType are
trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Adobe, Adobe Illustrator, and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems,
Incorporated, registered in the United States. Adobe Photoshop is a trademark of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Helvetica, Palatino, and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype Co.
ITC Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are
registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.
MacPaint is a registered trademark of Claris Corporation.
QMS is a registered trademark, and ColorScript is a trademark, of QMS, Inc.
QuarkXPress is a registered trademark of Quark, Inc.
Simultaneously published in the United States and Canada.
Mention of third-party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes
neither an endorsement nor a recommendation. Apple assumes no responsibility with
regard to the performance or use of these products.Radio and television interference v
Preface About Your Personal LaserWriter 300 vii
Energy conservation mode vii
TrueType fonts viii
GrayShare viii
Sharing your printer viii
Printing grayscale viii
Chapter 1 Setting Up Your Printer 1
Choosing a location for the printer 1
Carrying the Personal LaserWriter 300 2
Important safety instructions 2
Connecting the printer to a Macintosh 3
Choosing a port 3
Installing the printer software 4
System requirements 4
Installation 5
Chapter 2 Adding Toner and Paper 7
Removing the plastic shipping restraints 7
Installing or changing a toner cartridge 8
Plugging in the printer 10
Loading the paper cassette 11
Loading 3-hole punched paper 13
Loading letterhead paper 13
Loading legal-size paper 14
Chapter 3 Printing 15
Turning on the printer 15
Choosing face-down or face-up delivery 16
Using the Chooser the first time you print 17
Defining the page setup 18
Printing a document 19
Printing paper or envelopes with the manual feed slot 20
iii
ContentsPrinting on both sides of a page 21
Sharing your printer with other users 21
Using a shared printer connected to another Macintosh 23
Controlling the use of your printer by others 24
Chapter 4 Tips and Troubleshooting 25
Safety precautions 25
Checking the printer’s status lights 27
Solving some common problems 28
About paper 37
About fonts 38
How to use different kinds of fonts 38
Use restraint when choosing fonts 39
Add emphasis and contrast 39
Be careful setting alignment and columns 40
Choose the right size 40
Find out more 40
Appendix Specifications 41
Index 43
iv ContentsImportant
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with the
specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules. See instructions if
interference to radio or television reception is suspected.
Radio and television interference
The equipment described in this manual generates, uses, and can
radiate radio-frequency energy. If it is not installed and used
properly—that is, in strict accordance with Apple’s instructions—it
may cause interference with radio and television reception.
This equipment has been tested and complies with the limits for a
Class B digital device in accordance with the speci?cations in Part
15 of FCC rules. These specifications are designed to provide
reasonable protection against such interference in a residential
installation. However, there is no guarantee that the interference
will not occur in a particular installation.
You can determine whether your computer is causing interference
by turning it off. If the interference stops, it was probably caused
by the computer or one of the peripheral devices.
If your computer system does cause interference to radio or
television reception, try to correct the interference by using one
or more of the following measures:
m Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference
stops.
m Move the computer to one side or the other of the television
or radio.
m Move the computer farther away from the television or radio.
m Plug the computer into an outlet that is on a different circuit
from the television or radio. (That is, make certain the
computer and the television or radio are on circuits controlled
by different circuit breakers or fuses.)
If necessary, consult your authorized Apple dealer or an
experienced radio/television technician for additional suggestions.
You may find helpful the following booklet, prepared by the
Federal Communications Commission: Interference Handbook
(stock number 004-000-00345-4). This booklet is available from
the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.
vS Important: Changes or modifications to this product not
authorized by Apple Computer, Inc., could void the FCC
Certification and negate your authority to operate the
product.
This product was tested for FCC compliance under conditions
that included the use of shielded cables and connectors
between system components. It is important that you use
shielded cables and connectors to reduce the possibility of
causing interference to radios, television sets, and other
electronic devices. For Apple peripheral devices, you can
obtain the proper shielded cables from your authorized Apple
dealer. For non-Apple peripheral devices, contact the
manufacturer or dealer for assistance. S
DOC Class B Compliance This digital apparatus does not
exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital
apparatus set out in the radio interference regulations of the
Canadian Department of Communications.
Observation des normes—Classe B Le présent appareil
numérique n’émet pas de bruits radioélectriques dépassant les
limites applicables aux appareils numériques de la Classe B
prescrites dans les règlements sur le brouillage radioélectrique
édictés par le Ministère des Communications du Canada.
s Warning: Making adjustments or performing procedures
other than those specified in your equipment’s manual may
result in hazardous exposure. s
s Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet
containing the laser. The laser beam used in this product is
harmful to the eyes. The use of optical instruments, such as
magnifying lenses, with this product increases the potential
hazard to your eyes. For your safety, have this equipment
serviced only by an authorized Apple service provider. s
This printer is a Class 1 laser product. It carries a Class 1 label
underneath the printer and a service warning label inside the
printer.
Service warning label
Class 1 label
viAbout Your Personal
LaserWriter 300
The Personal LaserWriter 300 includes many features designed to
produce high-quality text and graphics and deliver the
performance of higher-priced laser printers. This preface
describes the printer’s main features:
m Energy conservation mode maintains your printer in a
standby state that conserves energy by shutting off most of
the printer’s functions when they are not in use. The printer
“wakes up” automatically when you print a document.
m TrueType fonts produce sharp characters at any size on the
screen or printer.
m GrayShare software lets you print grayscale images and
share your personal printer with other users on a network.
Energy conservation mode
One of the first things you will notice about your Personal
LaserWriter 300 is that it has no power on/off switch. This is
because it is equipped with energy conservation mode, an
automatic on/off feature that conserves energy by shutting off
most of the printer’s functions when they are not in use. The
printer remains in a standby state.
When the printer detects something to be printed, it “wakes up”
and goes to full power. After printing your document, the printer
automatically returns to standby.
As long as the Personal LaserWriter 300 is plugged in, it will be on
standby. While on standby, the Ready/In Use status light (marked
with the icon U) glows steadily. When you send the printer
something to be printed, the light will flash and you will hear a fan
come on.
The Personal LaserWriter 300 is intended to be plugged in and on
standby continuously. There is no need to unplug it, except for
maintenance or moving. The printer consumes very little energy
when it is on standby—less than 10 watts, about the same amount
as a night-light.
vii
PrefaceTrueType fonts
All fonts supplied with the LaserWriter are TrueType fonts.
TrueType is a font technology from Apple Computer that produces
sharp characters at any size on the screen or printer.
The disks provided with your LaserWriter contain many widely
used font families, including ITC Avant Garde®
, ITC Bookman®
,
Courier, Helvetica®
, Helvetica Narrow, New Century Schoolbook,
Palatino®
, and Times®
, as well as four Apple fonts—Chicago,
Geneva, Monaco, and New York—and three special-purpose fonts:
Symbol, ITC Zapf Chancery®
, and ITC Zapf Dingbats®
.
The Personal LaserWriter 300 is compatible with all font
technologies for the Macintosh, including TrueType, bitmaps, and
Type 1 fonts used with Adobe Type Manager.
See “About Fonts” in Chapter 4, “Tips and Troubleshooting,” for
more information.
GrayShare
Sharing your printer
With the GrayShare printer software provided, you can either use
the Personal LaserWriter 300 as a personal printer available to your
Macintosh only, or share the printer with additional users
connected to your network.
When you share the printer, it remains connected to your own
Macintosh. Network users can see the printer’s name and select it
in the Macintosh Chooser like any other network printer. The
documents they send to your printer are stored temporarily on
your computer’s disk and printed in the order received.
You have complete control over the shared printer. You can turn
sharing on or off at any time. You use the Print Monitor program
in your Macintosh system software to view and delete the print
jobs that have been sent to your printer. Chapter 3 provides
complete instructions about sharing.
Printing grayscale
The Personal LaserWriter 300 prints images in more than 30 levels
of gray. Grayscale printing produces finer images. Choosing
grayscale printing is explained in “Printing a Document” in
Chapter 3.
viii Preface: About Your Personal LaserWriter 300Setting Up Your Printer
This chapter tells you how to connect the printer to your
computer and install the printer software.
S Important: Do not plug the printer in at this time. After you
connect the printer to your computer, and install the printer
software, you should continue with Chapter 2, “Adding Toner
and Paper.” After you add the toner, you can plug the printer
in. Plugging the printer in before adding toner can cause a
paper jam when the printer starts up for the first time. S
Choosing a location for the printer
Choose a flat, stable surface with adequate room around the
printer as shown. The area should be well ventilated and away
from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold, or humidity.
Allow 4 inches (10 cm) at the back of the printer for airflow.
Allow 21 inches (52 cm) at the front of the
printer to allow access to the paper cassette.
Allow space for airflow
around the vent.
1
Chapter 1Carrying the Personal LaserWriter 300
To carry the Personal LaserWriter 300, hold it firmly and level with
both hands. Holding the printer in positions other than the one
shown may cause an accident.
Place the LaserWriter on the flat, stable surface you have chosen.
s Warning: Never lift the LaserWriter by the front and rear of
the cassette, or the face-down delivery tray; otherwise, the
printer may drop and be damaged. s
Important safety instructions
Always take the following precautions:
m Protect the printer from dampness and sources of liquids.
m Don’t use devices that produce open flames, such as Bunsen
burners, near the printer.
m Don’t use alcohol-based or ammonia-based cleaners on or
around the printer.
m Clean the printer with only a damp cloth and, if necessary, a
mild soap or detergent. Be careful to avoid getting liquid in
the printer or the power cord receptacle.
Disconnect the power plug immediately if any of the following
situations occur:
m The power cord or plug is frayed or damaged.
m Liquid gets spilled on or into the printer.
m The printer needs cleaning, servicing, or repair.
s Warning: Electrical equipment may be hazardous if misused.
Operation of the printer must always be supervised by an
adult. Do not allow children access to the interior of the
printer and do not permit them to handle any cables. s
2 Chapter 1: Setting Up Your PrinterConnecting the printer to a Macintosh
To connect the printer, you need an Apple Peripheral-8 cable, part
number M0197. The Apple Peripheral-8 cable has special shielding
to reduce the possibility of causing interference to radios,
television sets, and other electronic devices. If you do not have an
Apple Peripheral-8 cable, you can obtain one from an authorized
Apple dealer.
Choosing a port
Your Macintosh has a printer port (marked with the icon [) and
a modem port (marked with the icon W). You can attach the
printer cable to either of these ports.
If your computer is connected to a network, your printer port may
already be connected to a network cable. If the printer port is
unavailable, you can use the modem port.
S Important: If your computer is not connected to a network,
and you plug your printer cable into the printer port, you
must make sure that AppleTalk is inactive in the Macintosh
Chooser desk accessory. See “Using the Chooser the First
Time You Print” in Chapter 3. S
No matter which Macintosh you have,
these icons identify the printer
and modem ports.
Press the cable firmly into
this notch to secure it.
Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Printer 3Installing the printer software
Before you can print, you may need to install the software from
the disks that came with your printer. To protect the disks, it is a
good practice to lock them before use. See your Macintosh User’s
Guide for information on locking floppy disks.
v Is your software already installed? Some Macintosh
computers come with printer software already installed on the
hard disk. If your computer has the LaserWriter 300 software
already installed, you do not need to install the printer
software. v
To see if your computer already has the LaserWriter 300 software,
open the Apple (K) menu and choose the Chooser. If the
LaserWriter 300 software is on your hard disk, the LaserWriter 300
icon will appear in the Chooser.
If you see the LaserWriter 300 icon, skip this section of this book,
and go on to Chapter 2, “Adding Toner and Paper.”
System requirements
The printer software can operate on a Macintosh using System 7
with at least 2 MB of memory, or System 6.0.7 with at least 1 MB of
memory. Performance is best using System 7 with at least 4 MB of
memory, or System 6.0.7 with at least 2 MB of memory.
If your system software is an earlier version, you need to obtain a
system software upgrade from your computer or software dealer.
4 Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Printer
LaserWriter 300 iconInstallation
Before you install the printer software, quit any application
programs that may be open. If you have virus protection software,
turn it off.
Then follow these steps:
1. Insert the LaserWriter 300 Install disk and open the
disk icon.
A window appears, showing the contents of the disk.
2. Drag the TeachText icon to your hard disk.
If you already have a copy of TeachText on your hard disk, you
don’t need to drag this icon.
3. Double-click the Installer icon to open it.
The Installer’s Welcome screen describes the items that will
be installed on your disk.
4. Click OK to clear the Welcome screen and display the
Easy Install dialog box.
v Installing customized printer software: These instructions
cover the Easy Install process, which is recommended for
most Macintosh users. If you click Customize before you click
Install, you can select individual items to install from the disks.
This is not recommended unless you are an experienced user
and know which items to select. v
continues .
Chapter 1: Setting Up Your Printer 55. Make sure that the disk indicated on the screen is the
one on which you want to install printer software.
If the wrong disk name appears, click Switch Disk until the
correct name appears.
6. Click Install.
If any of your system’s application programs are open, a
message appears warning you that you must quit the
applications before installing the printer software. Click
Continue to quit the applications.
Status messages inform you of progress during installation.
7. Insert additional disks when messages on your screen
request them.
8. When you see a message reporting that the installation
was successful, click Restart.
Go on to Chapter 2 to install a toner cartridge and load the
paper cassette, and then to Chapter 3 when you’re ready to
begin printing.
If you have virus protection software, turn it back on after the
installation.
v Read the ReadMe file: The ReadMe file on the LaserWriter
300 Install disk contains the latest information about your
Personal LaserWriter 300. Double-click this file to
open and read it; then choose Quit from the File menu
to close it. v
6 Chapter 1: Setting Up Your PrinterAdding Toner and Paper
This chapter tells you how to install a toner cartridge into the
printer and load paper into a cassette.
S Important: If you are setting up your Personal LaserWriter
300 for the first time, please add toner and paper before you
plug your printer into an outlet. Otherwise, a paper jam may
occur when your printer starts up. S
Removing the plastic shipping restraints
If you are installing a toner cartridge for the first time, you must
remove the two orange plastic shipping restraints from inside the
printer before you can install the cartridge.
1. Open the printer access door.
2. Remove the shipping restraints.
Press on the restraints to remove them.
If you are installing for the first time,
remove the plastic shipping restraints.
Press the release
button to open the
access door.
7
Chapter 2Installing or changing a toner cartridge
Toner is the powdered ink that produces the image on the paper.
Follow these steps to install a toner cartridge into the printer.
1. Open the printer access door.
2. If you are replacing a used cartridge, remove the old
cartridge and set it aside.
3. Unpack the new toner cartridge and gently rock it to
distribute the toner inside.
Save the protective bag. If you move or transport your printer,
you will need to remove the cartridge and transport it
separately in the bag.
Do not expose the cartridge to direct sunlight. Don’t expose it
to room light for more than five minutes, or the life of the
cartridge may be reduced.
Gently rock the toner cartridge.
Press the release button
to open the access door.
8 Chapter 2: Adding Toner and Paper4. Pull the tab to remove the tape.
s Warning: Be sure to pull the tape in the direction shown.
Don’t pull it too quickly or at too sharp an angle; otherwise,
the tape may break. s
5. Insert the cartridge into the printer.
Line up the markings on the sides of the cartridge with the
arrows in the printer.
6. With both hands, press down gently on the cartridge to
secure it in place.
7. Close the access door.
Align arrows.
Pull the tape
completely out.
Pull the tape in the direction
shown. Do not pull it to either
side or it may break.
Chapter 2: Adding Toner and Paper 9Plugging in the printer
A power cord is supplied with your printer.
Be sure the power cord is within easy reach, in case you want to
unplug the printer.
When you plug the power cord into an outlet, the Ready/In Use
light comes on.
s Warning: The Personal LaserWriter 300 is equipped with a
three-wire grounding plug—a plug that has a third
(grounding) pin. This plug fits only a grounding-type AC
outlet. If you are unable to insert the plug into an outlet,
contact a licensed electrician to replace the outlet with a
properly grounded one. This equipment is meant to be
electrically grounded. Do not defeat the purpose of the
grounding plug! s
Press the power cord firmly
into this notch to secure it.
10 Chapter 2: Adding Toner and PaperLoading the paper cassette
The universal paper cassette supplied with your printer holds up
to 100 sheets of copier-weight bond paper. The paper size can be
U.S. Letter, A4, U.S. Legal, or Executive. For good advice on paper
quality, see Chapter 4, “Tips and Troubleshooting.”
To load the paper cassette:
1. Take the cassette out of the printer and place it on a flat
surface.
If you are loading the paper cassette for the first time, remove
the orange cardboard and plastic shipping inserts.
2. Adjust the sliding backstop in the cassette so it clicks
into the notch for the appropriate paper size.
Be sure the backstop is in one of the notches. Setting it
between notches will result in a printing error.
To change paper size, slide the paper guide in the direction of
the arrow and line up the paper guide pointer with the paper
size you want.
continues .
Adjustable paper guide
Sliding backstop
If you are installing for the
first time, turn the paper
cassette over and press both
clips to remove the plastic insert.
Chapter 2: Adding Toner and Paper 113. Insert a stack of paper that fits below the top edge of
the paper bracket inside the cassette.
4. Slide the cassette into the printer.
To remove the cassette to refill it, grasp it and pull firmly
straight out.
Push firmly to make sure
the cassette is in place.
Make sure paper fits under
the corner brackets.
Insert paper this end first.
Corner bracket
12 Chapter 2: Adding Toner and PaperLoading 3-hole punched paper
Follow the instructions for loading ordinary paper, and position
the sheets as shown below.
Loading letterhead paper
Follow the instructions for loading ordinary paper, and position
the sheets as shown below.
Insert letterhead paper face down with the top
of the page at this end of the cassette.
The holes should line up
along this side of the cassette.
Chapter 2: Adding Toner and Paper 13Loading legal-size paper
Follow the instructions for loading ordinary paper, adjusting the
sliding backstop to accommodate legal-size paper.
Slide the cassette firmly into the printer. The cassette and paper
will extend out the back of the printer.
14 Chapter 2: Adding Toner and PaperPrinting
This chapter explains how to print documents on a Personal
LaserWriter 300 connected to your own Macintosh, to share the
printer with other users on a network, and to use shared printers
connected to other computers on the network.
More printing instructions can be found in the manuals for your
applications, such as word processing programs. These programs
may include additional printing controls.
Before you use the printer, you should have installed the software
as described in Chapter 1, and installed a toner cartridge and
paper cassette as shown in Chapter 2.
Turning on the printer
One of the first things you will notice about your Personal
LaserWriter 300 is that it has no power on/off switch. As soon as
the printer is plugged into an outlet, its power is on and the
printer is in a standby state. There is no wait for the printer to
warm up.
The Personal LaserWriter 300 is equipped with an energy
conservation mode, an automatic on/off feature that conserves
energy by shutting off most of the printer’s functions when they
are not in use. The printer remains on standby.
When the printer detects something to be printed, it “wakes up”
and goes to full power. After printing your document, the printer
automatically returns to standby.
As long as the printer is plugged in, it will be on standby. While on
standby, the printer’s Ready/In Use status light (marked with the
icon U) glows steadily. When you send the printer something to
be printed, the light will flash and you will hear a fan come on.
The Personal LaserWriter 300 is intended to be plugged in and on
standby continuously. There is no need to unplug it, except for
maintenance or moving. When it is on standby the printer
consumes very little energy—less than 10 watts, about the same
amount as a night-light.
15
Chapter 3Choosing face-down or face-up delivery
You can select either face-down or face-up paper delivery with
your Personal LaserWriter 300, depending on the type of paper
you are using.
When you choose face-down delivery, paper comes out into the
delivery tray on top of the printer, face down and stacked in order.
The delivery tray can hold at least 25 sheets of standard copierweight bond paper. Face-down delivery is useful when you want
your document collated; but it is limited to plain paper only.
To select face-down delivery, set the paper delivery selector as
shown here:
In face-up delivery, paper comes out of the face-up delivery slot at
the back of the printer. Face-up delivery uses a straight paper
path, which helps to avoid paper jams and curl. Face-up delivery is
required for envelopes, transparencies, labels, and other special
papers.
If you choose face-up delivery, be sure there is enough space
behind the printer for the paper to come out.
To select face-up delivery, set the paper delivery selector as shown
here:
Set the selector for
face-up delivery.
Paper delivery selector
Set the selector for
face-down delivery.
Paper delivery selector
16 Chapter 3: PrintingUsing the Chooser the first time you print
You use the Chooser desk accessory to tell the Macintosh where
to send print jobs.
In the Chooser, you choose the port to which you connected the
Personal LaserWriter 300, and can also choose among printers
connected to your network, if any.
S Important: Once you choose the printer in the Chooser, you
won’t need to repeat this step unless you change printers or
change the way your printer is connected. S
1. Choose the Chooser from the Apple (K) menu.
2. After you choose the printer, close the Chooser.
Chapter 3: Printing 17
First click the
LaserWriter 300
icon in this box.
Then click the serial port
that you used to connect
the printer.
Click here to share the
printer over a network
or to create a log of
printed jobs. See
“Sharing Your Printer
With Other Users.”
Be sure to make
AppleTalk inactive if
your computer is not
on a network and
you connected the
printer to the printer
port (marked with
the icon [).
Background Printing lets
you use your computer
for other things while it
is printing. For details,
see the Print Monitor
instructions in your
Macintosh User’s Guide.Defining the page setup
The Page Setup command is found in the File menu of nearly all
Macintosh programs. Depending on the program you are using,
some of the options in this dialog box may change. You need to
choose Page Setup only if you want to change settings.
18 Chapter 3: Printing
Click here to reduce the image by 4%. This
makes the printed dots proportional to the
dots on your screen so there is no distortion
when you print a bitmapped image.
Click here to reduce
the margins and print
closer to the edge of
the page.
Click one of these
icons to choose
vertical or
horizontal page
orientation.
Type any size from
5% to 999% or
choose a preset
size.
Click
Options to
display the
page setup
options.
Choose from six
paper sizes: U.S.
Letter, U.S. Legal,
Executive, A4,
#10 Envelope,
and Monarch
Envelope.Printing a document
The Personal LaserWriter 300 prints your document using the
cassette or manual feed. See the next section for instructions if
you choose Manual Feed as the paper source.
1. Open the document you want to print or select its icon
in the Macintosh Finder.
2. Choose Print from the File menu.
3. Choose the appropriate settings and click Print.
After a moment, the Ready/In Use light begins to blink. Then
you will hear the fan come on. There will be a brief wait
before printing.
Chapter 3: Printing 19
To print more
than one copy,
type a number
here.
Choose from an
alert message or
a system sound
to notify you
when a print job
is finished.
Choose the paper source
from the top menu. To print
the first page on special
paper, click “First from” and
use both menus.
If you don’t want to print
all pages, click in these
boxes and type the first
and last page to print.
Click here to display
the printer’s density
control. See “The
Image Is Too Light or
Too Dark” in Chapter 4
for details.
Choose Grayscale or
Black and White
printing. If your
document contains
colors or shades of
gray, Grayscale
produces a sharper
image. Black and
White printing is
faster, but produces
a coarser image. Printing paper or envelopes with the
manual feed slot
If you want to use paper that is different from the paper in the
cassette, you can use the manual feed slot to insert sheets one at a
time as the document is printed. You can also use this slot to print
on envelopes and other nonstandard paper sizes.
1. Open the document you want to print or select its icon
in the Macintosh Finder.
2. Choose Print from the File menu.
3. In the Print dialog box, choose Manual Feed from the
Paper Source pop-up menu.
4. Click Print.
The sheet you inserted is printed. If the document has
additional pages, a message on your screen will alert you each
time a new sheet is needed. To avoid paper jams, always wait
for the prompt before inserting a new sheet.
5. Insert a sheet of paper or envelope as shown. Be sure to
keep the page straight so it feeds correctly.
Feed envelopes
flap side down.
Align along this edge.
20 Chapter 3: Printing
Choose Manual Feed.Printing on both sides of a page
Follow these steps to print a document using both sides of the
paper.
1. Print the first side of the page using manual feed or the
paper cassette.
2. Take out the printed sheet, turn it over, and print the
second side using manual feed, inserting the sheet as
shown here.
Always use manual feed for printing the second side. To avoid
jams, don’t load already printed pages into the paper cassette.
Sharing your printer with other users
If your Macintosh is connected to a network, you can set up your
printer to let other users on the network use it.
Follow these steps to turn on the printer’s sharing feature:
1. Choose the Chooser from the Apple (K) menu.
2. Click the LaserWriter 300 icon.
continues .
Top of sheet
Chapter 3: Printing 21
Click the LaserWriter
300 icon in this box.
Click the serial port to
which you connected
the printer.
Click Setup. Make AppleTalk
active.3. Make AppleTalk active if it is not already active.
4. Click Setup.
5. Click Share this Printer and enter the options for the
shared printer and in the Setup dialog box.
Background printing is automatically turned on when a
printer is shared. For details, see the Print Monitor
instructions in your Macintosh User’s Guide.
6. Click OK.
7. Close the Chooser window.
Network users can now choose your printer in their Chooser
(see the next section for details).
22 Chapter 3: Printing
Click to place an
X in this
checkbox.
Type a name for
the printer. This
is the name
other users will
see in their
own Chooser.
Type a password
if you want to
share the
printer with
only users who
know the
password.
Click to place an X here if you want to keep a
record of all print jobs. The log file (a text file) is
kept in the Printer Preferences folder in the
Preferences folder inside your System Folder.Using a shared printer connected to another
Macintosh
To print on a shared Personal LaserWriter 300, network users must
have the LaserWriter 300 driver installed on their computers,
AppleTalk must be active, and the shared printer and Macintosh
must be turned on.
Each user wanting to use the shared printer should use the
LaserWriter 300 installation disks and follow the instructions in
Chapter 1 to install the printer software.
Once the software is installed, the shared printer appears in the
list of network printers available in the Chooser desk accessory.
1. Choose the Chooser from the Apple (K) menu.
2. Click the LaserWriter 300 icon.
3. In the list of printers on the right, click the name of the
shared LaserWriter you want to use.
You can click the Get Info button in the Chooser window to
see whether any fonts in your system are unavailable on the
selected printer. If your document contains any such fonts,
printing will be slower, because information about the fonts
must be sent from your computer to the printer. (For faster
printing, use a printer on which the fonts are available, or
install the fonts on the Macintosh to which the shared printer
is connected.)
4. Close the Chooser.
Your Macintosh will now send all subsequent print jobs to the
shared printer.
Chapter 3: Printing 23
First click the
LaserWriter 300 icon.
Then click the
name of the
shared printer.Controlling the use of your printer by others
After you turn on the sharing feature, you still have complete
control over the shared printer:
m You can turn sharing on or off at any time.
m You can type a password in the Sharing Setup dialog box so
only those who know the password can use your printer.
m You can use the Print Monitor program in your Macintosh
system software to view a list of print jobs that have been sent
to your printer, and to delete any jobs in the list.
The Print Monitor program is available when you have
Background Printing turned on in the Chooser, and comes on
automatically when others use your shared printer. Refer to your
Macintosh User’s Guide for more information about the Print
Monitor program.
v Your computer’s performance: When others use your printer,
their documents are printed in the background so your work
is not interrupted. While your computer is printing in the
background, you may experience an occasional pause or other
symptoms of reduced performance. v
24 Chapter 3: PrintingTips and Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions to printing problems you may
encounter while using your printer.
s Warning: If you have a problem with your printer and
nothing presented in this chapter solves it, see the service and
support information that came with your printer or computer.
If you attempt to repair the printer yourself, any damage you
may cause to the printer will not be covered by the limited
warranty. s
See page 2 for additional safety information.
Safety precautions
Consider these rules of safety before you open the printer or
attempt to troubleshoot problems:
m Don’t attempt to disassemble the printer.
m Don’t use oil inside the printer.
m Don’t use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer.
They may react with the toner.
m Don’t use alcohol-based cleaners on or around the printer.
They may react with the plastic case.
m Don’t leave the access door open. Exposing the toner
cartridge to light may damage the cartridge.
continues .
25
Chapter 4m Don’t open the drum-protection shutter on the toner
cartridge.
m Be sure the power cord is within easy reach, should you want
to unplug the printer at any time. Since the Personal
LaserWriter 300 has no power switch, unplugging it is the only
way to turn it off.
m Never try to manually defeat the interlock switches inside the
printer.
S Important: The fixing assembly in the printer operates at
very high temperatures. When you need to open the printer,
be careful not to touch the fixing assembly. S
Some odor from the heat of the printing process is normal.
Fixing assembly.
This area gets very hot.
26 Chapter 4: Tips and TroubleshootingChecking the printer’s status lights
Always check the status lights first when a printing problem
occurs. These often tell you the cause of the problem.
m The Ready/In Use light should glow steadily whenever the
printer is on, and blink when it is printing.
m The Paper Out light is on only when there is no paper in the
cassette, or the printer is waiting for manual feed.
m The Paper Jam light is on when any obstruction occurs in the
paper path.
Paper Out light
Ready/In Use light
Paper Jam light
Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 27Solving some common problems
The Chooser doesn’t show the LaserWriter 300 icon
If the LaserWriter 300 icon is missing from the box that identifies
different printer types, you need to install the printer software
from the disks that came with your printer.
To install the software, follow the instructions in “Installing the
Printer Software” in Chapter 1. Then make sure you select the
printer, as shown in “Using the Chooser the First Time You Print,”
in Chapter 3.
The Macintosh can’t find the printer
If you have selected the printer icon in the Chooser but nothing
prints or you get a message that no printer has been found, one of
the following may be the cause:
m The printer has been unplugged. Make sure it is plugged
securely into an outlet (the green status light should be on).
m In the Chooser, you may have chosen the wrong printer or
selected the wrong serial port (the modem port instead of the
printer port, or vice versa). Select the correct Chooser options
as described in “Using the Chooser the First Time You Print,”
in Chapter 3.
m There’s a loose plug somewhere. Check to make sure that
both ends of the cable are properly connected. See Chapter 1,
“Setting Up Your Printer.”
m If you are connected to a network and are printing on a
shared Personal LaserWriter 300, check to be sure you have
chosen the correct zone in the Chooser. The Macintosh to
which the printer is connected must be turned on.
If you still can’t resolve the problem, the printer may not be
functioning properly. Contact an authorized Apple service
provider about repairs.
28 Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting
If there’s no
LaserWriter 300
icon here, you
haven’t installed
the printer
software
correctly.Printing takes a long time
Printing may be slow on pages containing complex graphics or
pages printed using landscape (horizontal) orientation.
The processing speed of your computer and the amount of
memory it has directly affect printing time. A faster computer or
more memory results in faster printing.
The printer won’t print a particular page or document
If a document contains a page with very complex graphic images,
the printer may be unable to print the page. You will see a
message telling you that your printer has “insufficient memory.”
Remove some of the complex detail from that page (or spread the
information over two pages) and try again to print it. You are
more likely to experience this problem when printing legal-size
documents.
Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 29Type looks jagged or some text changes to the Geneva font
The most likely cause of this problem is that you are using a nonTrueType font.
LaserWriter 300 printers use two kinds of fonts: outline fonts and
bitmapped fonts. TrueType fonts are outline fonts. Each character
in an outline font is produced by instructions that describe its
shape. A character from an outline font can be printed smoothly
in any size you specify. Your Personal LaserWriter 300 comes with
a set of TrueType fonts (see “About Fonts,” later in this chapter).
Bitmapped fonts are fixed in shape and size: Your printer can
produce smooth bitmapped characters only in the sizes for which
it has instructions (a map of dots for each font size). If you use a
bitmapped font in a size for which your printer does not have
instructions, your system tries to create the size you want. The
resulting type can look jagged. Even a font that looks good on
your screen can look bad when printed out.
The best solution to this problem is to switch to a TrueType
version of the font you want to use. To see if you have a TrueType
version:
1. Find your Fonts on your system.
If you have System 7, version 7.1 or higher, open your System
Folder and then open your Fonts folder.
If you have an earlier version of System 7, open your System
Folder.
If you have System 6, insert your LaserWriter 300 Install disk
and double-click the Font-DA Mover.
30 Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting2. Look in the list of fonts for the font you wish to use.
If it is a TrueType font, its icon will look something like this:
If it is a non-TrueType font, its icon will look like this:
If you are using System 6, you will see a list of font names in
the Font-DA Mover. If the font name has a number next to it,
then it is a non-TrueType font.
If a TrueType version of your font is available, use it in your
documents.
When your computer runs low on memory, TrueType turns itself
off and some TrueType fonts may be displayed and printed in the
Geneva font. If you’ve installed fixed-size versions of your
TrueType fonts, they will not change to Geneva, but they will look
very jagged when TrueType is turned off.
For more help with fonts, see “About Fonts,” later in this chapter.
Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 31
This number tells you
the size of the font.The printer prints on only part of the paper
Make sure you have selected the appropriate paper size in the
Page Setup dialog box.
Check the adjustment of the sliding backstop in the paper
cassette to make sure it is correct for your paper size. See
“Loading the Paper Cassette” in Chapter 2.
Paper is jammed
To avoid paper jams, make sure the paper cassette is properly
loaded with one of the recommended paper types. (See “Paper
Feeds Improperly,” next.) If you are using manual feed, be sure to
wait for the prompt before inserting a new sheet.
Paper jams are sometimes caused by moving or jarring the printer.
32 Chapter 4: Tips and TroubleshootingIf the Paper Jam status light is on, follow these steps:
1. Remove the paper cassette.
Be sure the paper is loaded correctly in the paper cassette.
The stack of paper should fit under all the corner brackets.
With the paper cassette removed, look inside the printer and
remove any jammed sheets you see.
2. Open the printer and remove the cartridge.
Look inside the printer and remove any jammed sheets you
see. Pull the sheet straight out. Avoid pulling at an angle that
might tear the paper and leave scraps inside the printer.
Replace the toner cartridge when done.
continues .
Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 333. Open the printer’s back door as shown below. Press the
paper release lever and pull the jammed sheet out
through the front.
This type of jam is often caused by an interruption in printing.
4. If the paper is wrapped around the roller, remove it as
shown below.
Press the
paper release lever.
34 Chapter 4: Tips and TroubleshootingPaper feeds improperly
If paper tears, gets skewed, or comes through the printer
crumpled, it may not be entering the printer properly.
Remove any jammed sheets from inside the printer. Remove the
paper cassette, turn the stack of paper over, and replace the
cassette (most paper has one side that prints better). It may also
help to fan the edge of the stack with your thumb, in case some of
the sheets are stuck together.
Make sure the stack of paper is loaded correctly into the paper
cassette, and fits under all the corner brackets.
Some papers cause jams because they are not intended for use
with laser printers. See “About Paper,” later in this chapter, for
advice on choosing papers.
Unwanted lines or stripes appear
If white or dark lines appear on the page, try the following:
m Remove the toner cartridge and rock it to redistribute the
toner. Be sure to hold the cartridge horizontally.
Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 35Toner stains appear on printed pages
If the printed pages are not clean, there may be a buildup of toner
on the printing rollers. If stains appear on the backs of printed
pages, you may have printed an image that is larger than the
paper, causing toner to be deposited in the paper path.
To clean the rollers, print several blank pages until the stains
disappear.
The image is too light or too dark
If printing is too light or too dark, try the following:
m Take out the toner cartridge and rock it gently to distribute
toner. If this doesn’t help, you may need to replace the
cartridge. See “Installing or Changing a Toner Cartridge” in
Chapter 2 for instructions.
m Choose Print from the File menu and click Options to display
the Print Density control.
m If the problem occurs on paper other than the recommended
copier-weight bond, the toner may not adhere well to the
paper you are using. Try using a fresh package of paper. For
advice on choosing paper for your laser printer, see “About
Paper,” next.
36 Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting
Drag the slider toward the
right to darken the image.About paper
Many problems, such as toner smearing, paper curling, or paper
feeding improperly, can be caused by the paper you are using. To
assure good results, use only paper, envelopes, and transparencies
that are manufactured for use with laser printers and photocopy
machines.
Make sure any paper you use is free of tears, wrinkles, dust, and
oil stains. Paper with cutouts or perforations is not recommended.
Here is a list of papers to avoid:
m extremely slick or shiny paper
m erasable typewriter paper
m paper that is highly textured
m coated paper
m stapled paper
m envelopes that contain fasteners or snaps
m multipart forms
s Warning: Do not use paper printed using low-temperature
dyes or thermography. Such materials can peel away from the
paper or melt inside the LaserWriter and cause damage.
Colored paper can be used as long as the color is added
during the paper-making process, not after, and the color
can withstand the heat generated by the printer’s fixing
assembly (approximately 190° C or 374° F). Envelopes,
transparencies, and labels are acceptable as long as they
contain no fasteners and can withstand the heat generated
by the fixing assembly. s
The paper cassette can hold U.S. Letter, A4, U.S. Legal, and
Executive paper.
Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 37About fonts
The disks provided with your LaserWriter contain fonts from the
most widely used font families. Font families (also called
typefaces) can be classified into two groups: serif and sans serif.
The small accents at the ends of the strokes of the letters are
serifs. Fonts that do not have these accents are “sans” serifs.
How to use different kinds of fonts
Serif fonts are considered more readable than sans serif fonts. For
long passages of text, typographers generally choose serif fonts.
Sans serif fonts are used for headlines and short passages.
Your font disks contain seven serif typefaces: ITC Bookman®
,
Courier, New Century Schoolbook, Palatino®
, Times®
, Chicago,
and New York. All but Courier are commonly used for both long
passages and headlines or captions. Courier is designed to look
like output from a typewriter, and does not give a page a typeset
appearance. Times is the most commonly used typeface in the
selection, and is considered to be one of the most readable fonts.
The disks include five sans serif typefaces: ITC Avant Garde®
,
Helvetica®
, Helvetica Narrow, Geneva, and Monaco. These fonts
are appropriate for headlines, posters, and captions; they are
sometimes also used for short passages in brochures, invitations,
and so forth. Helvetica and Helvetica Narrow are the most widely
used of the sans serif typefaces in the selection. Because of its
compact width, Helvetica Narrow is also convenient for
mathematical expressions and spreadsheets.
Your font disks also contain three special-purpose fonts: Symbol,
ITC Zapf Chancery®
, and ITC Zapf Dingbats®
. Symbol is handy for
technical documents that contain equations and formulas. Zapf
Chancery is highly decorative, and is useful for invitations,
diplomas, and the like. Zapf Dingbats contains arrows, pointing
fingers, small pictures (icons), and other symbols for decorating
and illustrating your documents.
38 Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting
T T
Serif Sans SerifUse restraint when choosing fonts
A good rule of thumb to use when choosing fonts for your
documents is: Avoid using more than two font families on the
same page.
It is fine to use several sizes and styles (such as bold or italic) of
the same font family on the same page. Using too many font
families on the same page gives your document a “ransom note”
appearance. A good combination is one sans serif font for your
headings and one serif font for your body text. Avoid combining
two serif or two sans serif font families on a page.
The two-font family rule does not apply to the Symbol and ITC
Zapf Dingbats®
fonts: You can add these as needed in addition to
the regular fonts you have chosen.
Add emphasis and contrast
To add emphasis and contrast to your documents, use bold, italic,
and, occasionally, all caps.
Don’t underline unless there is a special purpose for it, as in a
formula or equation. Underlining is a throwback to the typewriter
and gives your document an unprofessional look.
Italics is the best choice for putting emphasis on passages within
your body text. It is also useful for book titles and foreign phrases.
Bold is best used for headings. Type set in bold looks important
and authoritative. Using all caps has a similar effect. Use type set
in all caps sparingly, however, because it is very difficult to read.
Don’t use outline or shadow styles except for decoration on
posters, in logos, and similar pieces.
Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting 39Be careful setting alignment and columns
Properly aligning your text can enhance or detract from your
document’s readability. One of the most common mistakes is to
set a document in many narrow columns, with full justification
(text lined up on the left and right). This allows for only a few
words per line, and “darkens” a page by eliminating the white
space around the edges of the text.
Flush-left alignment with a ragged right edge lends an informal
feeling, and is generally considered to be the most readable of
settings.
Centering is useful for formal announcements or invitations, but
avoid centering long passages.
Choose the right size
Use 9- to 12-point type for long passages of body text. Smaller
sizes can be very difficult to read. Note, however, that different
typefaces of the same point size vary in “visual size”: 9-point
Helvetica looks larger than 9-point Times.
Find out more
There are many excellent sources to help you produce
professional-looking documents. Look for books and magazines
on desktop publishing, graphic design, and typography.
40 Chapter 4: Tips and Troubleshooting41
Specifications
Print quality
m 300 dots per inch for text and graphics
Printer RAM
m 512K of RAM
Printer fonts
m Standard TrueType font families. The Personal LaserWriter 300
can support additional fonts from Apple and from other
suppliers.
Speed
m Four pages per minute maximum. Actual speed depends on
the images printed and the computer used.
Interface
m Serial, externally clocked
Life expectancy
m Minimum life expectancy is 150,000 pages, with no monthly
page limit.
Paper feed
m Automatic feed from paper cassette; manual feed for single
sheets
Printing materials
Apple recommends 20-lb. photocopy bond (75 g/m
2
). You can use
16-lb. (64 g/m
2
) to 28-lb. (105 g/m
2
) paper with manual feed; the
paper cassette accepts 16-lb. (64 g/m
2
) to 24-lb. (90 g/m
2
) paper.
Accepts most letterhead and colored stock, and medium-weight
laser printer transparencies. Print labels using manual feed. Use
envelopes recommended for laser printers. Print envelopes,
transparencies, and other special media using manual feed and
face-up delivery.
Paper sizes and capacity
The paper cassette can hold up to 100 sheets of U.S. Letter, U.S.
Legal, A4, and Executive paper sizes.
Imageable area
m Maximum printable line: 203 mm (8.00 in.)
m Minimum top and bottom margins: 6.35 mm (0.25 in.)
m Minimum left and right margins: 6.35 mm (0.25 in.)
Actual imageable area may vary depending on the application
program.
AppendixDimensions
m Height: 16.1 cm (6.3 in.)
m Width: 38.5 cm (15.2 in.)
m Depth: 37.9 cm (14.9 in.)
Weight
m 7 kg (15.4 lb.) not including cartridge
Operating environment
Temperature
m 50° to 90.5° F (10° to 32.5° C)
Humidity
m 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing
Toner cartridge storage environment
m 32° to 95° F (0° to 35° C)
Input electrical requirements
U.S./Japan
m 100–120 V (±10%), 50–60 Hz (±2 Hz)
Europe/Australia
m 220–240 V (±10%), 50 Hz (±2 Hz)
Power consumption
Operating
m 450 W maximum at 115 V or 220 V
Standby
m 10 W or less
Ozone emission
m Less than 0.05 parts per million maximum, measured in
accordance with ECMA 129 or UL114 standards for ozone
density measurement
Laser Specifications
m Type: Anode Common Type
m Wavelength: 775–795 nm
m Output power: 5 MW
42 Appendix: SpecificationsA
alert message, choosing 19
alignment, design tips 40
Apple Peripheral-8 cable 3
AppleTalk, setting up printer for 21–22
Avant Garde®
font 38
B
background printing
on network 22, 24
setting up in Choose 17
bitmapped fonts
Page Setup for 18
TrueType fonts vs. 30
Black and White printing, choosing 19
bold font, using 39
Bookman®
font 38
C
cable
checking 28
connecting to printer port 3
carrying the printer 2
cassette feed, printing with 19. See also paper
cassette
centering 40
changing toner cartridge 8–9
Chicago font 38
Chooser
LaserWriter 300 icon missing from 28
printer problems and 28
setting up printer in 17
setting up for network in 21–23
cleaning the printer 2, 25
colored paper 37
columns, design tips 40
connecting the printer 3
Courier font 38
customized software, installing 5–6
D
density control, displaying 19, 36
design tips 39, 40
E
Easy Install dialog box 5
electrical requirements 42
energy conservation mode vii, 15
envelopes
acceptable types of 37
face-up delivery required for 16
printing 20
environmental requirements 42
F
fixing assembly caution 26
font families 38
combining 39
fonts
about 38–40
adding emphasis or contrast with 39
choosing 38–39
finding 30–31
jagged type problems 30–31
mixing types of 39
shared printer and 23
sizes 40
TrueType viii
TrueType vs. bitmapped 30
43
IndexG
Geneva font 38
TrueType fonts printed as 31
graphics, print speed and 29
grayscale printing viii
choosing 19
GrayShare software viii
H
Helvetica®
font 38
Helvetica Narrow font 38
horizontal page orientation
choosing 18
print speed and 29
I
icons
font 31
Installer 5
LaserWriter 300 4
printer and modem port 3
Installer icon 5
installing paper cassette 11–12
installing printer software 4–6
installing toner cartridge 7–9
“insufficient memory” message 29
italic font, using 39
ITC Avant Garde font®
38
ITC Bookman®
font 38
ITC Zapf Chancery®
font 38
ITC Zapf Dingbats®
font 38, 39
J, K
jagged type problems 30–31
L
labels
acceptable types of 37
face-up delivery required for 16
landscape orientation. See horizontal page
orientation
laser specifications 42
LaserWriter 300 icon 4
missing from Chooser 28
legal-size paper
“insufficient memory” message with 29
loading 14
letterhead paper, loading 13
location for printer 1
log file, for shared printer 22
M
Macintosh computer, connecting to 3
maintenance, safety precaution vi, 2, 25–26.
See also troubleshooting
manual feed, printing with 20
paper jam and 32
on second side 21
margins
design tips 40
imageable area 41
reducing 18
memory capacity
print speed and 29
TrueType fonts and 31
modem port 3
modem port icon 3
Monaco font 38
multiple copies, printing 19
N
network
connecting printer on 3
GrayShare software for viii
setting up in Chooser 17
sharing printer on 21–24
New Century Schoolbook font 38
New York font 38
O
operating environment 42
ozone emission 42
P, Q
page orientation, choosing 18
Page Setup
defining 18
design tips 40
Palatino®
font 38
44 Indexpaper
about 37
face-down vs. face-up delivery 16
feeding improperly 35
jammed 32–34
loading 13–14
Page Setup options 18
printing both sides of 21
printing on only part of 32
printing too light or dark on 36
sizes and types 11, 18, 37, 41
status lights 27
unwanted lines or stripes on 35
paper cassette
capacity 41
loading 11–12
printing with 19
removing 12
removing paper jam from 33
paper delivery selector 16
paper jams 32–34
Paper Jam status light 27
Paper Out status light 27
paper release lever 34
password, for shared printer 22, 24
plugging in the printer 10
portrait (vertical page) orientation,
choosing 18
ports 3
setting up in Chooser 17
power consumption 42
power cord, plugging in 10
Print Density control 36
Print dialog box 19, 20
printer icon. See LaserWriter 300 icon
printer port
connecting to 3
setting up in Chooser 17
printer port icon 3
printing 15–24
on both sides of page 21
with cassette feed 19
Chooser setup for 17
face-down vs. face-up delivery 16
with manual feed 20
Page Setup options 18
problems. See troubleshooting
“turning on” printer 15
Print Monitor program, controlling printer
with 24
problems. See troubleshooting
R
radio interference vii
cable for preventing 3
ReadMe file 6
Ready/In Use status light vii, 15
reducing printed image 18
roller
cleaning toner from 36
paper wrapped around 34
S
safety precautions vi, 2
grounding plug 10
troubleshooting and 25–26
sans serif fonts 38
selected pages, printing 19
serial port, setting up in Chooser 17
serif fonts 38
setup 1–6
carrying the printer 2
in Chooser 17
connecting to Macintosh 3
face-down vs. face-up delivery 16
installing software 4–6
installing toner cartridge 7–9
loading paper cassette 11–12
location options 1
Page Setup 18
plugging in printer 10
for printer sharing 21–24
safety precautions 2
turning on printer 15
shared printer
controlling 24
setup for 21–23
shipping restraints, removing 7
software
GrayShare viii
installing 4–6
preinstalled 4
TrueType fonts viii
Index 45specifications 41–42
standby status vii, 15
status lights
Paper Jam 27
Paper Out 27
Ready/In Use vii, 15, 27
Symbol font 38, 39
system software
fonts and 30, 31
requirements 4
T
television interference v–vi
cable for preventing 3
3-hole punched paper, loading 13
Times®
font 38
toner 8
pages stained with 36
redistributing 35, 36
toner cartridge
changing 8–9
installing 7–9
transparencies, face-up delivery required
for 16
troubleshooting 28–36
“insufficient memory” message 29
jagged type 30–31
LaserWriter 300 icon missing 28
paper feed problems 35
paper types to avoid 37
printing on only part of paper 32
printing too light or dark 36
printing too slow 29
safety precautions 25–26
toner stains on page 36
unwanted lines or stripes on page 35
warranty caution 25
TrueType fonts viii
bitmapped fonts vs. 30
finding 30–31
turning off the printer 26
turning on printer 15
typefaces. See fonts
U
underlining 39
V
vertical page orientation, choosing 18
W, X, Y
warranty caution 25
Z
Zapf Chancery®
font 38
Zapf Dingbats®
font 38, 39
46 IndexApple Computer, Inc.
20525 Mariani Avenue
Cupertino, California 95014-6299
(408) 996-1010
TLX 171-576
030-3858-A
Printed in U.S.A.
MASTER ART FOR BLACK LOGO
Cinema Tools 4
Manuel de
l’utilisateurK Apple Inc.
© 2007 Apple Inc. Tous droits réservés.
Vos droits sur le logiciel sont régis par le contrat de
licence du logiciel. Le propriétaire ou l’utilisateur autorisé
d’une copie valide du logiciel Final Cut Studio est autorisé à reproduire cette publication à des fins d’apprentissage dudit logiciel. Aucune portion de cette publication
ne peut être reproduite ni transmise à des fins commerciales, telles que la vente de copies de cette publication,
ou pour fournir des services d’assistance payants.
Le logo Apple est une marque d’Apple Inc., déposée
aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays. En l’absence du
consentement écrit préalable d’Apple, l’utilisation à des
fins commerciales de ce logo via le clavier (Option + 1)
pourra constituer un acte de contrefaçon et/ou de concurrence déloyale.
Tout a été mis en œuvre pour que les informations pré-
sentées dans ce manuel soient exactes. Apple n’est pas
responsable des erreurs de reproduction et d’impression.
Remarque : comme Apple publie fréquemment de nouvelles versions et des mises à jour de son logiciel système, de ses applications et de ses sites Internet, il se
peut que les images incluses dans cet ouvrage soient
légèrement différentes de ce qui apparaît à l’écran.
Apple Inc.
1 Infinite Loop
Cupertino, CA 950142084
408-996-1010
www.apple.com
Apple, le logo Apple, Final Cut, Final Cut Pro,
Final Cut Studio, FireWire, Mac, Mac OS, Monaco et
QuickTime sont des marques d’Apple Inc., déposées
aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
Cinema Tools, Finder et OfflineRT sont des marques
d’Apple Inc.
AppleCare et Apple Store sont des marques de service
d’Apple Inc., déposée aux États-Unis et dans d’autres pays.
Les autres noms de produits et de sociétés sont la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. Les produits commercialisés par des entreprises tierces ne sont mentionnés que
pour information, sans aucune intention de préconisation
ni de recommandation. Apple décline toute responsabilité
quant à l’utilisation et au fonctionnement de ces produits.
Les photos de production du film « Koffee House
Mayhem » sont utilisées avec l’aimable autorisation
de Jean-Paul Bonjour. « Koffee House Mayhem »
© 2004 Jean-Paul Bonjour. Tous droits réservés.
http://www.jbonjour.com
Les photos de production du film « A Sus Ordenes » sont
utilisées avec l’aimable autorisation d’Eric Escobar. « A Sus
Ordenes » © 2004 Eric Escobar. Tous droits réservés.
http://www.kontentfilms.com 3
1 Table des matières
Préface 7 Introduction à Cinema Tools
8 Montage numérique de film
10 Pourquoi la vidéo 24P ?
10 Utilisation de la vidéo 24P
11 Montage offline et online
11 À propos de ce manuel
12 Sites Web Apple
Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Chapitre 1 17 Avant de commencer votre projet
17 Avant de tourner votre film
18 Choix du film à utiliser
19 Transfert du film sur bande vidéo
19 Télécinéma
20 Techniques de transfert déconseillées
21 Quelle quantité de données faut-il transférer ?
23 Infos générales sur la vitesse de défilement des images
23 Utilisation de la vidéo NTSC
25 Utilisation de la vidéo PAL
26 Utilisation de la vidéo 24P
27 Prise en compte du timecode
30 À propos du son
30 Choix d’un enregistreur audio
30 Choix d’un format de timecode audio
31 Mixage de l’audio final
32 Synchronisation de l’audio et de la vidéo
34 Utilisation de Final Cut Pro
34 Réglage de la base temps des séquences
34 Sortie sur bande lors d’un montage à 24 ips
35 Utilisation d’effets4 Table des matières
Chapitre 2 37 Le flux de production de Cinema Tools
37 Étapes fondamentales du flux de production
37 Création de la base de données Cinema Tools
41 Capture des plans sources
45 Connexion des plans à la base de données
45 Préparation des plans pour le montage
46 Montage des plans dans Final Cut Pro
46 Génération de listes de film et de listes des modifications dans Cinema Tools
47 Cinema Tools Exemples de flux de production
47 Jusqu’où peut-on aller dans Final Cut Pro ?
49 Si vous avez utilisé des transferts scene-and-take
50 Si vous avez utilisé des transferts camera-roll
Chapitre 3 53 L’interface utilisateur de Cinema Tools
53 Cinema Tools Fenêtres et zones de dialogues
64 Les zones de dialogues disponibles dans Final Cut Pro et Cinema Tools
Chapitre 4 69 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools
71 Choix du mode de création de la base de données
71 Réalisation de la capture avant la création de la base de données
71 Si vous disposez d’une liste télécinéma ou d’un fichier ALE
72 Si vous ne disposez pas d’une liste télécinéma ou d’un fichier ALE
74 Autres usages de la base de données
74 Création et configuration d’une nouvelle base de données
74 Création d’une nouvelle base de données à l’aide de Cinema Tools
75 Création d’une nouvelle base de données à l’aide de Final Cut Pro
77 Réglages de la zone de dialogue Nouvelle base de donées
80 Utilisation de la base de données
80 Ouvrir une base de données existante
80 Recherche et ouverture d’enregistrements de base de donnée
84 Sauvegarde, copie, renommage et verrouillage de bases de données
84 Accès à des informations sur un plan source
85 Saisie d’informations dans la base de données
85 Importation des informations de la base de données
91 Saisie manuelle des informations de base de données
102 Utilisation de la fonction Identify pour saisir et calculer des informations de base de
données
104 Modification d’informations dans la base de données
105 Suppression d’un enregistrement de la base de données
105 Changement de l’affiche d’un plan
106 Modification des réglages de base de données par défaut
107 Modification de tous les identifiants de bobine ou de bande
108 Vérification et correction de numéros de code de bordure de timecodeTable des matières 5
Chapitre 5 111 Capture des plans sources et création d’un lien avec la base de données
111 Préparation de la capture
112 Comment éviter les pertes d’images
113 Configuration de votre matériel afin de capturer un timecode exact
114 Avant de capturer de l’audio
115 Génération d’une liste de capture par lot dans Cinema Tools
121 Ce qu’il faut savoir avant de capturer des plans individuellement
121 Connexion des plans sources capturés à la base de données
123 Utilisation de la commande Connect Clips pour connecter des plans sources
124 Utilisation de la fenêtre Detail View pour connecter et déconnecter des plans sources
125 Utilisation de la fenêtre Clip pour connecter ou déconnecter des plans source
126 Réparation des liens rompus entre les plans et les enregistrements
127 Reconnexion de plans individuels ayant été renommés ou déplacés
127 Détection des liens rompus et reconnexion de groupes de plans ayant été déplacés
Chapitre 6 129 Préparation des plans sources pour le montage
129 Choix d’une méthode de préparation des plans sources en vue du montage
131 Utilisation de la fonction de conformation
133 Inversion du pulldown télécinéma
145 Ajustements de la vitesse audio
146 Synchronisation séparée de l’audio et de la vidéo capturés
147 Division ou suppression de sections de plans sources avant le montage
Chapitre 7 151 Montage dans Final Cut Pro
151 À propos des configurations simplifiées et du paramétrage de la base temps
153 Utilisation de vidéo à 25 ips conformée à 24 ips
154 Affichage d’informations relatives au film dans Final Cut Pro
159 Ouverture de plans Final Cut Pro dans Cinema Tools
159 Restrictions concernant l’utilisation de pistes multiples
160 Utilisation d’effets, de filtres et de transitions
165 Détection des usages multiples des plans sources
166 Exactitude des listes de conformation lors du montage
de vidéo pulldown 3:2 ou 24 & 1
Chapitre 8 167 Création de listes de film et de listes de modification
168 Sélection du format de liste
169 Listes que vous pouvez exporter
174 Exportation de listes de film à l’aide de Final Cut Pro
182 Création de listes de modification
Chapitre 9 191 Observations à propos de l’exportation et création de listes EDL audio
192 Observations à propos de l’exportation sur bande vidéo
192 Observations à propos de l’exportation audio
193 Exportation d’une liste EDL audio6 Table des matières
Chapitre 10 199 Utilisation de fichiers EDL, XML et ALE externes
199 Création de listes de film basées sur une liste EDL ou
un fichier XML
204 Utilisation de fichiers ALE
Partie II Utilisation de la vidéo 24P
Chapitre 11 209 Utilisation de la vidéo 24P et de listes EDL 24 ips
210 Éléments à prendre en compte lors de la création sur film
211 Montage de vidéo 24P avec Final Cut Pro
211 Utilisation du même système Final Cut Pro pour le montage 24p offline et online
212 Utilisation de la vidéo 24p avec Final Cut Pro et Cinema Tools
213 Utilisation de Final Cut Pro comme système de montage 24p online
214 Utilisation de Final Cut Pro comme système de montage offline 24P
218 Ajout et suppression du pulldown dans les plans 24P
219 Utilisation du pulldown 2:3:3:2
220 Suppression de pulldown 2:3:3:2 avec Final Cut Pro
221 Suppression de pulldown 2:3:3:2 ou 2:3:2:3 avec Cinema Tools
225 Modèles de pulldown applicables à la vidéo 23,98 ips
227 Ajout d’un pulldown à une vidéo de 23,98 ips
227 Utilisation de listes EDL audio pour le son à deux systèmes
Partie III Annexes
Annexe A 231 Principes généraux
231 Notions élémentaires sur le film
237 Montage selon les méthodes traditionnelles
239 Montage à l’aide des méthodes numériques
Annexe B 245 Création de listes de films avec Cinema Tools
246 À propos de la méthode basée sur les plans
247 À propos de la méthode basée sur le timecode
Annexe C 249 Solutions aux problèmes
fréquents et assistance client
249 Solutions aux problèmes fréquents
252 Contact de l’assistance AppleCare
Glossaire 253
Index 263 7
Préface
Introduction à Cinema Tools
Cinema Tools associé à Final Cut Pro est une solution qui
apporte des possibilités sans précédent aux professionnels
du montage de film et de vidéo 24p.
Aujourd’hui, dans la postproduction, les monteurs et les réalisateurs se trouvent souvent
confrontés à une multitude de formats, de fréquences d’images et de flux de production
au sein du même projet. Un projet est souvent tourné, monté et sorti dans des formats
totalement différents à chaque étape de la production. Pour les monteurs et les réalisateurs qui souhaitent tourner et finaliser sur film, Cinema Tools devient un composant
essentiel du processus de postproduction lors du montage avec Final Cut Pro, en permettant de monter de la vidéo transférée à partir d’un film et de faire le suivi des opérations
de montage numérique dans le but de pouvoir conformer ensuite les copies de travail
et les coupes au négatif de caméra original.
Par exemple, lorsque vous travaillez sur pellicule il est nécessaire de suivre la correspondance entre les images de la pellicule d’origine et leur contrepartie vidéo. Cinema Tools
exploite une base de données sophistiquée qui suit et assure cette correspondance
quel que soit le standard vidéo que vous utilisez, ce qui garantit que le film peut être
conformé pour refléter votre montage dans Final Cut Pro.
Vous pouvez aussi convertir les plans vidéo capturés en vidéo à 24 images par seconde
(ips). Pour le format NTSC, cela inclut une fonction de télécinéma inversé qui élimine les
images supplémentaires ajoutées durant le procédé de pulldown 3:2 couramment utilisé
pour le transfert du film sur bande vidéo ou pour convertir à la baisse de la vidéo 24P.
Cinema Tools, en combinaison avec Final Cut Pro, propose des outils conçus pour rendre
le montage numérique de films et l’utilisation de la vidéo 24p plus faciles et moins chers,
en offrant des fonctionnalités que l’on ne trouvait, jusque là, que dans des systèmes de
montage haut de gamme ou très spécialisés.
L’intégration entre Cinema Tools et Final Cut Pro permet d’effectuer les tâches les plus
courantes de Cinema Tools directement à partir de Final Cut Pro, Cinema Tools effectuant
les tâches automatiquement en arrière-plan.8 Préface Introduction à Cinema Tools
Montage numérique de film
La technologie informatique est en train de bouleverser le processus de création ciné-
matographique. De nos jours, la grande majorité des longs métrages sont montés
numériquement, sur des systèmes de montage non linéaires de haute technologie et
très coûteux, conçus à cet effet. Jusqu’à il y a peu, ce type d’outil n’était pas disponible
pour les réalisateurs disposant d’un budget limité.
Cinema Tools complète Final Cut Pro en lui apportant les fonctionnalités de systèmes
professionnels coûtant beaucoup plus cher, et ce à un prix abordable pour tous les réalisateurs. Si vous tournez en 35 mm ou en 16 mm et souhaitez faire un montage numé-
rique et une finalisation sur film, Cinema Tools vous permet de monter les transferts
vidéo provenant de votre film à l’aide de Final Cut Pro, puis de produire une liste de
conformation précise pouvant être utilisée pour la finalisation du film.
Même si vous ne prévoyez pas de conformer le négatif de caméra original, sachez que
Cinema Tools fournit une grande variété d’outils pour la capture et le traitement de la
vidéo de votre film.
En quoi Cinema Tools est-il utile pour le montage d’un film ?
Pour beaucoup, la pellicule constitue encore le meilleur support de capture d’images.
Si votre objectif consiste à sortir votre film en salle ou à le projeter lors d’un festival,
vous devrez disposer de l’œuvre finale sur pellicule. L’utilisation de Final Cut Pro avec
Cinema Tools ne change pas le processus d’exposition de la pellicule dans la caméra
ni la projection du film dans une salle de cinéma ; c’est toutes les opérations situées
entre ces deux activités qui peuvent profiter des avancées technologiques.
Le montage d’un film, de façon classique, c’est découper et coller bout à bout des morceaux de pellicule pour réaliser une copie de travail du film, une opération longue et fastidieuse et qui avait tendance à décourager l’expérimentation avec des versions de scène
alternatives. Le transfert de la pellicule sur vidéo rend possible l’utilisation d’un système
de montage non linéaire pour le montage de votre projet. La souplesse de ces systèmes
simplifie l’assemblage de chaque scène et vous offre la possibilité d’essayer plusieurs
options de montage. Le montage final vidéo n’est généralement pas utilisé, ce sont les
décisions de montage prises qui comptent vraiment. Elles constituent les informations
nécessaires pour couper et coller (conformation) le négatif original afin d’aboutir au film
final. La difficulté est de faire correspondre le timecode des raccords vidéo au numéros de
bord du négatif, afin qu’un monteur négatif puisse créer sur pellicule une version précise
du montage vidéo.Préface Introduction à Cinema Tools 9
Voilà où Cinema Tools entre en jeu. Cinema Tools effectue un suivi de la correspondance
entre le négatif original de la caméra et le transfert vidéo. Une fois que le montage dans
Final Cut Pro est fini, vous pouvez utiliser Cinema Tools pour générer une liste de conformation basée sur les coupes que vous avez faites. Armé de cette liste, un monteur négatif peut transformer le négatif original de la caméra en film abouti.
Si des projections et des modifications de la copie de travail font partie de votre processus
de production, vous pouvez également utiliser Cinema Tools pour créer des listes de modification décrivant les changements à réaliser sur la copie de travail afin qu’elle corresponde
à la nouvelle version de la séquence montée dans Final Cut Pro.
Quelles sont les tâches prises en charge par Cinema Tools
Cinema Tools assure le suivi de tous les éléments qui contribuent à la réalisation de l’œuvre
finale. Il « connaît » la correspondance entre le négatif original, les bandes vidéo transfé-
rées et les plans vidéo capturés sur l’ordinateur de montage. Il collabore avec Final Cut Pro
pour stocker des informations sur la façon dont les plans vidéo sont utilisés et génère la
liste de conformation nécessaire pour transformer le négatif de caméra original en film
monté final.
Cinema Tools contrôle aussi la présence ou l’absence de problèmes pouvant se poser
dans le cadre de l’utilisation de Final Cut Pro, le plus courant étant la présence de doublons de plans sources : un plan (ou une partie de plan) utilisé plusieurs fois. Outre la
création de listes d’éléments dupliqués, vous pouvez utiliser Cinema Tools pour géné-
rer d’autres listes, telles qu’une liste traitant des effets d’optique, c’est-à-dire des emplacement des transitions, effets de mouvement (vidéo à une vitesse de défilement
différente de la vitesse normale) et titres.
Cinema Tools peut aussi travailler sur le son, en relevant la relation entre l’audio utilisé
dans Final Cut Pro et les sources sonores originales. Il est possible d’utiliser l’audio monté
provenant de Final Cut Pro pour créer une liste EDL (pour l’anglais Edit Decision List) et
de traiter (ou de finaliser) l’audio dans un studio de postproduction audio spécialisé.
Il est important de garder à l’esprit que vous n’utilisez Final Cut Pro que pour prendre
les décisions de montage ; on ne tire en général pas de copie vidéo à partir de ce travail, puisque la vidéo de travail est en général compressée et assortie de timecode
gravé (fenêtre d’affichage) et d’informations sur le film. C’est la cut list basée sur le
montage, que Cinema Tools permet de générer, qui constitue l’objectif principal.
Tournage
du film
Conversion
du film
en vidéo
Conformation
du négatif
original
Montage dans Final Cut Pro
avec Cinema Tools Cut list
Négatif original Création
de copies
d’exploitation10 Préface Introduction à Cinema Tools
Pourquoi la vidéo 24P ?
La prolifération des normes vidéo haute définition (HD) et la volonté de diffuser des contenus vidéo dans le monde entier ont créé une demande pour une norme vidéo qui puisse
être convertie facilement vers toutes les autres normes. Par ailleurs, une norme facilement
convertible en film et offrant une méthode aisée et de haute qualité pour la création et le
montage vidéo avant la finalisation sur film, s’avère nécessaire.
La vidéo 24p permet tout cela. Elle utilise la même vitesse de défilement de 24 ips que
les films, ce qui permet de tirer parti des dispositifs de conversion existants pour créer
des versions NTSC et PAL de votre projet. Elle utilise le balayage progressif pour créer
une sortie convenant à la projection sur grand écran et la conversion en film.
De plus, la vidéo 24p permet de produire des transfert télécinéma 24 ips de haute qualité
à partir d’un film. Ceux-ci sont particulièrement utiles si vous comptez diffuser le produit
finalisé selon différents standard TV.
Utilisation de la vidéo 24P
Avec l’apparition des enregistreurs vidéo 24p HD, il est de plus en plus nécessaire que
Final Cut Pro prenne en charge plusieurs aspects du montage 24 ips (dans certains cas,
il s’agit en réalité d’un montage 23,98 ips). Pour cela, Final Cut Pro et Cinema Tools proposent les fonctions suivantes :
 L’importation et l’exportation de listes EDL 24 ips et 23,98 ips.
 La possibilité de convertir des listes EDL 29,97 ips NTSC en 23,98 ips ou en listes
EDL 24 ips.
 Une fonction de télécinéma inversé permettant d’annuler le pulldown 3:2 utilisé lors
de la conversion de pellicule ou de vidéo 24 ips en format NTSC 29,97 ips.
 La possibilité de supprimer le pulldown 2:3:3:2 ou 2:3:2:3 de fichier de données NTSC
afin de pouvoir monter à 24 ips ou 23,98 ips.
 La possibilité de sortir de la vidéo 23,98 ips via FireWire au format NTSC de 29,97 ips.
 La possibilité de mettre en correspondance les coupes d’audio dans une bande vidéo
avec les bandes audio de production originales et de générer une liste EDL audio
pouvant être utilisée pour recapturer et finaliser l’audio si l’on prévoit de le recapturer ailleurs pour le traitement final.
Plusieurs des fonctionnalités mentionnées ci-avant figurent dans Final Cut Pro et ne
requièrent pas Cinema Tools. Ces fonctionnalités sont toutefois décrites dans le présent
manuel parce qu’elles concernent l’utilisation de la vidéo 24p, ce qui intéresse particuliè-
rement de nombreux réalisateurs. Consultez la section « Infos générales sur la vitesse de
défilement des images » à la page 23 pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation des différentes
fréquences d’images.Préface Introduction à Cinema Tools 11
Montage offline et online
Si vous utilisez un format 24p haute résolution, comme, par exemple, la vidéo HD non
compressée, vous voudrez peut-être réaliser des copies basse résolution de votre métrage
pour économiser l’espace disque et la puissance de calcul de votre ordinateur. Dans ce cas,
le processus de montage comporte quatre grandes étapes :
 Production (génération de la vidéo maîtresse) : transfert ou tournage du film en
vidéo HD 24p sans compression.
 Montage offline : conversion du métrage en vidéo NTSC ou PAL (d’une résolution
généralement inférieure à 24p) et montage.
 Compatibilité de formats : exportation d’un projet Final Cut Pro ou d’une liste EDL
contenant vos décisions de montage finales.
 Montage online : remplacement du métrage basse résolution et création d’une
bande originale en pleine résolution.
Pour en savoir plus, consultez la section « Montage de vidéo 24P avec Final Cut Pro » à
la page 211.
À propos de ce manuel
Le présent manuel ne documente pas seulement tous les aspects de l’utilisation
de l’application Cinema Tools, mais aussi les fonctions liées de Final Cut Pro.
Ce manuel est un document PDF avec hyperliens et doté de nombreuses fonctions
qui facilitent l’obtention des informations que vous recherchez.
 La page d’entrée donne un accès rapide à diverses fonctionnalités, y compris à l’index
et au site web de Cinema Tools.
 Une liste de signets complète vous permet de choisir ce que vous souhaitez voir
en un instant, simplement en cliquant sur le lien.
 Tous les renvois du texte sont reliés. Vous pouvez cliquer sur n’importe quel renvoi
afin d’y accéder immédiatement. Vous pouvez ensuite utiliser le bouton Précédent
de la barre de navigation pour revenir à l’endroit où vous vous trouviez avant de cliquer sur le renvoi.
 La table des matières et l’index sont également reliés. Si vous cliquez sur une entrée
de l’une de ces deux sections, vous passez directement à la page concernée.
Source du
master 24P
Capture
de vidéo
Montage
online (24 ips)
Montage
de plans
Liste EDL
24 ips
Vidéo NTSC
ou PAL
Vidéo 24P
Conversion
en 24 ips
Final Cut Pro avec Cinema Tools
(montage offline)
Master 24P
monté12 Préface Introduction à Cinema Tools
 Vous pouvez aussi utiliser le champ de recherche pour rechercher un terme ou
une expression particulière.
Ce manuel vous présente des informations conceptuelles de fond, des instructions
étape par étape et un glossaire spécialisé. Il est conçu pour fournir les informations
dont vous avez besoin pour commencer à travailler sans tarder et tirer pleinement parti
des riches fonctionnalités de Cinema Tools.
 Si vous souhaitez commencer par quelques informations élémentaires sur la comparaison entre le montage traditionnel et le montage numérique, consultez l’annexe A,
« Principes généraux », à la page 231.
 Pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur l’utilisation de Cinema Tools, ainsi que
des remarques préliminaires sur la planification d’un projet, consultez la première
partie intitulée « Utilisation de Cinema Tools, » ci-après.
 Si vous êtes intéressé par l’utilisation conjointe de Final Cut Pro et Cinema Tools
pour le traitement de la vidéo 24P, consultez la deuxième partie intitulée « Utilisation
de la vidéo 24P » à la page 207.
Remarque : ce manuel ne prétend pas être un guide complet sur l’art de faire un film.
La plupart des informations sur la réalisation de films présentées ici sont de nature très
générale et sont fournies pour contextualiser la terminologie utilisée pour décrire les
fonctions de Cinema Tools.
Sites Web Apple
Plusieurs sites web Apple contiennent des informations destinées à vous aider à profiter
pleinement de la puissance de Cinema Tools et de votre système Apple.
Site Web de Cinema Tools
Pour des informations et des mises à jour générales ainsi que pour les dernières nouvelles
sur Cinema Tools, visitez le site web suivant :
 http://www.apple.com/fr/finalcutstudio/finalcutpro/cinematools.html
Site Web Apple Service et Support
Pour des mises à jour logicielles et des réponses aux questions les plus fréquemment
posées sur tous les produits Apple, y compris Cinema Tools, visitez ce site web :
 http://www.apple.com/fr/support
Vous aurez également accès aux caractéristiques des produits, à la documentation de
référence et aux articles techniques concernant les produits Apple ou de tierce partie.
Pour des informations de support technique sur Cinema Tools, allez à l’adresse
suivante :
 http://www.apple.com/fr/support/cinematoolsPréface Introduction à Cinema Tools 13
Autres sites web Apple
Démarrez à la page d’accueil du site web Apple pour tout savoir sur les produits Apple :
 http://www.apple.com/fr
QuickTime est une technologie standard de reproduction de la vidéo, du son, d’animation,
de texte de musique et de scènes de réalité virtuelle (RV) à 360°. QuickTime permet de
produire de la vidéo numérique très performante, très compatible et de qualité élevée.
Visitez le site web de QuickTime pour des informations sur les types de données pris en
charge, une visite guidée de l’interface de QuickTime, des spécifications, etc :
 http://www.apple.com/fr/quicktime
FireWire est l’une des normes standard de périphériques les plus rapides jamais développées, ce qui la rend particulièrement adaptée à l’utilisation des périphériques multimé-
dias, tels que les caméscopes ou les disques durs ultra rapides de dernière génération.
Visit this website for information about FireWire technology and available third-party
FireWire products:
 http://www.apple.com/fr/firewire
Pour plus d’informations sur les séminaires, événements et outils tiers de publication
sur le web, de conception et impression, de musique et d’audio, de films sur ordinateur
et d’art multimédia en général, allez à cette adresse :
 http://www.apple.com/fr/pro
Pour des ressources, des récits et des informations sur des projets éducatifs menés par
d’autres à l’aide de logiciels Apple, notamment Cinema Tools, allez à cette adresse :
 http://www.apple.com/fr/education
Rendez-vous sur Apple Store pour acheter du logiciel, du matériel et des accessoires
directement auprès d’Apple et profiter de promotions et rabais portant également
sur des produits logiciels et matériels tiers :
 http://www.apple.com/fr/storeI
Partie I : Utilisation de
Cinema Tools
Cette section détaille l’utilisation de Cinema Tools pendant
le montage de projets de film.
Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet
Chapitre 2 Le flux de production de Cinema Tools
Chapitre 3 L’interface utilisateur de Cinema Tools
Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools
Chapitre 5 Capture des plans sources et création d’un lien avec la base de données
Chapitre 6 Préparation des plans sources pour le montage
Chapitre 7 Montage dans Final Cut Pro
Chapitre 8 Création de listes de film et de listes de modification
Chapitre 9 Observations à propos de l’exportation et création de listes EDL audio
Chapitre 10 Utilisation de fichiers EDL, XML et ALE externes 1
17
1 Avant de commencer votre projet
Planifiez votre projet au plus tôt afin de garantir sa réussite.
Le succès de la production d’un film requiert une planification minutieuse avant même
d’avoir filmé la première scène. Si vous envisagez de procéder au montage numérique
du film, pensez aux tâches supplémentaires que cela implique. Pensez notamment au film
à utiliser, à la méthode d’enregistrement du son et à d’autres aspects de votre production.
Dans ce chapitre vous trouverez des informations générales relatives aux difficultés
susceptibles de survenir :
 choix du film à utiliser,
 choix du mode de transfert du film sur bande vidéo,
 incompatibilités de vitesses de défilement entre le film, votre format vidéo et votre
base temps de montage,
 questions relatives au son, notamment quel enregistreur et timecode utiliser et comment synchroniser le son avec la vidéo,
 questions relatives à Final Cut Pro, notamment quant à la sélection de la base temps
d’une séquence et l’utilisation d’effets.
Remarque : la plupart de ces informations sont de nature générale et ne constituent
pas un guide complet pour la création d’un film. L’industrie du film numérique change
rapidement, à tel point que ce que vous lisez ici n’est certainement pas le mot de la fin.
Avant de tourner votre film
Avant de commencer, vous devez discuter de votre projet avec toutes les personnes
impliquées dans le processus, à savoir :
 les fournisseurs du matériel qui seront utilisés pendant la production,
 les personnes impliquées dans la production elle-même,
 le studio chargé du développement de votre film, de la création de copies
de travail et de la version finale,
 le studio de transfert sur bande vidéo,
 le monteur qui utilise Cinema Tools et Final Cut Pro (si ce n’est vous-même),
 le monteur négatif,
 le studio de postproduction.18 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Toutes ces personnes connaissent parfaitement leur métier ; elles peuvent vous communiquer des informations d’une importance capitale qui vous permettront de réussir
votre projet facilement sans vous heurter constamment à des obstacles.
Choix du film à utiliser
Lorsque vous créez un film, la première chose à faire est d’en choisir le format. Pour
ce faire, vous devez prendre en compte les caractéristiques requises par Cinema Tools.
Cinema Tools prend en charge les formats de film 35 mm à 4 perforation, 35 mm à 3 perforations et 16 mm-20. Consultez la section « Notions élémentaires sur le film » à la page 231
pour des détails sur ces formats.
Vous choisirez probablement le format de votre film en fonction de votre budget. Il est
recommandé d’employer le même format tout au long de la production, même si cette
condition n’est pas nécessaire pour utiliser Cinema Tools. Chaque enregistrement de la
base de données possède son propre réglage de format de film.
Apprenez à gérer votre budget
Au cours de la production de votre film, vous serez parfois confronté au dilemme suivant : choisir entre « faire les choses bien » et « faire les choses relativement bien ». Le
choix que vous ferez dépendra du montant de votre budget ou du temps dont vous
disposez. Assurez-vous de bien comprendre les conséquences de vos décisions avant
de choisir des solutions qui, sur le long terme, pourraient vous coûter davantage de
temps et d’argent que prévu. Des difficultés liées à des décisions prises plus tôt au
cours du processus, telles que la décision de ne pas avoir recours à une liste télécinéma par exemple, peuvent resurgir plus tard et vous prendre de court.
Si vous réalisez ce type de projet pour la première fois, il est fortement conseillé de vous
adresser à des professionnels spécialisés pour chacune des tâches. Vous pouvez faire
des économies en en dépensant un peu sur des tâches que vous pouvez réaliser vousmême, comme, par exemple, en faisant appel à un studio de postproduction audio.
Par ailleurs, ne sous-estimez pas l’importance de l’utilisation d’une cut list pour conformer une copie de travail avant de conformer le négatif. La création et le montage
d’une copie de travail rend votre projet plus onéreux, mais une mauvaise conformation du négatif original peut avoir des conséquences irréparables sur votre film.Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 19
I
Transfert du film sur bande vidéo
Pour effectuer le montage numérique de votre film, vous devez le transférer sur bande
vidéo afin que l’ordinateur puisse le capturer. Il existe différentes méthodes de transfert mais vous devez avant tout disposer d’un moyen fiable permettant de faire coïncider les numéros de bord du film avec le timecode de la vidéo montée. Ce lien permet
à Cinema Tools de calculer avec précision des numéros de bord spécifiques à partir des
valeurs de timecode des points de sortie et d’entrée de chaque coupe.
Les vitesses de défilement du film et de la vidéo doivent également être prises en considération avant d’effectuer le transfert. En effet, ces vitesses affectent la base temps
et ont un impact sur la précision de la cut list créée par Cinema Tools.
Télécinéma
La méthode la plus courante pour transférer un film sur bande vidéo est, de loin, le télécinéma. Les télécinémas sont des appareils qui numérisent une à une toutes les images d’un
film à l’aide d’un capteur d’image CCD (Charge-coupled device) pour les convertir en images vidéo, qui fournit une image d’une excellente qualité. Il permet en outre de bloquer
le lien entre le film et la vidéo (aucun décalage ne se produit), ce qui constitue un énorme
avantage dans le cadre de l’utilisation de Cinema Tools.
En général, un télécinéma ménage davantage votre film et offre une correction de couleur
et un contrôle opérationnel plus sophistiqués que les chaînes de films, décrites ci-dessous.
Le télécinéma présente un autre avantage, celui de pouvoir créer la vidéo à partir du négatif original, alors que la plupart des autres méthodes requièrent la création préalable d’un
film positif (copie de travail). (La création d’une copie de travail est onéreuse, mais vous
réaliserez qu’elle s’avère d’une grande utilité par la suite puisqu’elle procure la meilleure
manière de regarder le film sur grand écran et de détecter d’éventuels problèmes, ce qui
facilite la sélection des prises à utiliser. Autre avantage de poids des copies de travail: elles
vous permettent de tester la cut list avant de travailler sur le négatif.)
La plupart des télécinémas actuels ne se contentent pas de fournir un transfert de haute
q ualité, ils peuvent également lire les numéros de bord du film et accéder au générateur
de timecode du magnétoscope, afin d’incruster ces numéros sur la bande vidéo. Cette
méthode de transfert permet en outre de synchroniser l’audio et la vidéo. Le système
est capable de contrôler la source audio et d’incruster le timecode audio ainsi que le
timecode vidéo et les numéros de bord.20 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Dans la plupart des cas, les télécinémas produisent une liste qui peut servir de référence
pour créer la base de données Cinema Tools. Cela permet d’automatiser la capture vidéo
sur l’ordinateur.
Les studios de télécinéma sont de plus en plus souvent capables de capturer aussi les
plans vidéo à votre place et de vous fournir les plans sur un disque DVD ou sur un périphérique FireWire en même temps que la liste télécinéma et les bandes vidéo.
Techniques de transfert déconseillées
Vous trouverez ci-dessous certaines techniques de transfert qu’il est préférable de
ne pas utiliser.
Chaînes de film
Évitez, si possible, d’utiliser une « chaîne de film ». Il s’agit d’une technologie relativement
dépassée par rapport au télécinéma. Une chaîne de film, c’est en fait un projecteur de
film relié à une caméra vidéo. En général, les chaînes de film ne gèrent pas les fonctionnalités telles que la lecture des numéros de bord ou le contrôle des magnétoscopes et ne
peuvent pas créer un positif vidéo à partir d’un film négatif. Pour utiliser une chaîne de
film, vous devez créer une copie de travail.
Les chaînes de film sont généralement moins coûteuses que les télécinémas, mais la création d’une copie de travail entraîne une augmentation significative du coût. Le plus grand
défi est de parvenir à définir le lien entre les numéros de bord du film et le timecode de
la vidéo. Cela est généralement réalisé à l’aide de perforations (ou d’autres types de marqueurs d’images) placées sur des images connues.
Important : certaines chaînes de film plus anciennes ne permettent pas la synchronisation du projecteur et du magnétoscope, ce qui peut entraîner un décalage entre le film
et la vidéo.
Que faire si vous voulez un original propre ?
Si vous prévoyez de conformer le négatif de caméra original, la présence d’un timecode
et de numéros de bord gravés sur les plans vidéo que vous montez dans Final Cut Pro
ne pose pas nécessairement de problème, en particulier si vous utilisez un format vidéo
très comprimé.
Les numéros gravés peuvent toutefois constituer un problème si vous prévoyez d’utiliser la vidéo montée pour des projections ou la diffusion. Si les numéros gravés sont
très précieux aux yeux des monteurs, ils peuvent distraire lorsque l’on regarde un projet monté. Voici deux méthodes pour minimiser l’impact de ce problème :
 Convertissez la vidéo au format Letterbox au cours de la capture en utilisant des proportions de 2:35 afin qu’il y ait assez d’espace sous la vidéo pour afficher les numéros.
 Ne flashez les informations gravées que sur la première image. Bien que cela ne soit
pas aussi pratique que la gravure continue, cela donne au monteur la possibilité de
s’assurer que le lien entre numéro de bord et timecode est correct.Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 21
I
Enregistrement d’une image projetée à l’aide d’un caméscope
En raison du fort pourcentage d’erreurs susceptible de se produire et des heures de
travail supplémentaires à consacrer au suivi des numéros de bord, cette méthode de
transfert est complètement déconseillée.
Projeter votre film afin de l’enregistrer à l’aide d’un caméscope revient relativement
bon marché mais la présence d’erreurs est quasiment inévitable dans le découpage
final du négatif. Avec les systèmes de télécinéma et de chaîne de film, le film et la vidéo
sont en général synchronisés, ce qui garantit un transfert réussi quelles que soient les
vitesses choisies. Dans ce type de transfert, même si les vitesses du projecteur et du
caméscope sont quasi idéales, elles se décaleront progressivement au cours du transfert et il sera alors impossible de garantir un lien fiable entre les numéros de bord du
film et le timecode vidéo. Cela signifie que du temps supplémentaire devra être consacré à l’examen de la cut list afin de vérifier l’exactitude des images utilisées. Il se peut
en outre qu’une fois sur bande vidéo, les images soient affectées d’un scintillement
important, ce qui rend difficile la lecture de certaines d’entre elles et la sélection de
celles qui serviront au montage.
Étant donné que la bande vidéo ne sert presque exclusivement qu’à sélectionner des
points de coupe, sa qualité ne revêt pas une grande importance. Comme dans le cas
des chaînes de film, vous devez créer une copie de travail pour projeter votre film. Avec
ce type de transfert, il est très important de pouvoir corriger votre cut list avant de travailler sur le négatif original.
Quelle quantité de données faut-il transférer ?
Pour déterminer la quantité de données du film à transférer sur support vidéo, vous
devez considérer plusieurs facteurs, dont le plus important sera sans doute le coût.
Il dépend du temps passé par l’opérateur télécinéma sur la réalisation du transfert.
Vous devez déterminer au préalable s’il est plus intéressant de transférer des bobines
entières de film (transfert « camera-roll »), y compris les mauvaises prises et les scènes
qui ne seront pas employées, ou de consacrer du temps à la détection de prises particulières afin de ne transférer que celles dont vous ferez usage (transfert « scene-and-take »).22 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Transferts camera-roll
Cinema Tools utilise une base de données pour réaliser un suivi du lien entre les numé-
ros de bord du film et les timecodes audio et vidéo. La base de données est conçue pour
contenir un enregistrement par prise, mais cette condition n’est pas obligatoire. Si vous
transférez sur bande vidéo une bobine de film entière sans interruption, Cinema Tools
n’aura besoin que d’un enregistrement pour établir le lien entre les numéros de bord
et le timecode vidéo. Toutes les coupes utilisant l’une ou l’autre portion de ce grand plan
unique pourront être associées avec précision aux numéros de bord correspondants
du négatif caméra original. Un des inconvénients de cette méthode de transfert, c’est
le volume important des fichiers, en particulier en cas d’utilisation de longs passages
de métrage.
Par ailleurs, l’audio, de par la façon dont il est enregistré, est difficile à synchroniser
sur télécinéma quand il s’agit d’un transfert caméra-bobine. Pendant la production,
l’enregistrement audio démarre généralement avant que le film ne se mette à tourner et s’interrompt après l’arrêt de la caméra. Il est également courant de tourner un
film sans son (technique appelée plans MOS [Motion Omit Sound]). Cela signifie qu’il
est impossible, même si la synchronisation audio est établie en début de bobine, de
la conserver tout au long de la bobine. Vous devez dans ce cas synchroniser chaque
plan individuellement. La base de données de Cinema Tools inclut des fonctionnalités permettant de réaliser un suivi des bandes son et du timecode du film original.
Après la capture, un long plan peut être subdivisé en plusieurs petits plans, ce qui vous permet de supprimer la vidéo superflue. Même en présence de plusieurs plans, Cinema Tools
est capable de créer une cut list complète avec un seul enregistrement. Une autre méthode
consiste à ajouter manuellement des enregistrements pour chaque plan, ce qui permet
de tirer parti des capacités de base de données étendues de Cinema Tools. Consultez
la section « Création de la base de données Cinema Tools » à la page 37 pour une
approche détaillée des options possibles.
Transfert scene-and-take
Les transferts scène et prise sont un peu plus onéreux que les transferts caméra-bobine
mais offrent des avantages importants :
 Avec les transferts scène et prise, l’audio est plus facile à synchroniser durant le transfert.
 La liste télécinéma contient un enregistrement par prise, ce qui constitue une base
de données solide une fois importée dans Cinema Tools.
 À partir d’une base de données préétablie, Cinema Tools peut exporter une liste
de capture par lot. Grâce à cette liste (et au contrôle de périphérique approprié),
Final Cut Pro peut capturer et numériser les prises appropriées avec un effort minimal pour vous.
Il est possible, grâce à une liste de film précise et à un clap, d’accélérer le processus
du transfert et d’en réduire le coût.Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 23
I
Infos générales sur la vitesse de défilement des images
Pour transférer un film sur support vidéo, il faut prendre en compte la différence de
vitesse de défilement entre le film et la vidéo. Les films sont presque toujours tournés
en 24 images par seconde (ips) ou 23,98 ips, alors que l’on utilise généralement 25 ips
pour livrer le projet final sous la forme de vidéo PAL. La vitesse de la vidéo est, selon le
format vidéo choisi, de 29,97 ips (NTSC), de 25 ips (PAL) ou de 24 ou 23,98 ips (24p).
La vitesse de défilement de votre vidéo (que vous synchronisiez l’audio durant le transfert télécinéma ou pas) et la vitesse à laquelle vous souhaitez réaliser le montage peuvent déterminer les étapes à suivre pour préparer vos plans en vue du montage. Il est
conseillé de lire la section « Choix d’une méthode de préparation des plans sources en
vue du montage » à la page 129 avant de choisir les vitesses de défilement.
Utilisation de la vidéo NTSC
À l’origine, la vitesse de défilement de la vidéo NTSC était de 30 ips. Lorsque la couleur fut
ajoutée, elle dut être légèrement modifiée de façon à atteindre la valeur de 29,97 ips. La
fréquence de trame de la vidéo NTSC est de 59,94. On dit souvent que la vidéo NTSC
a une fréquence d’images de 30 ips, mais, bien que la différence soit minime, elle ne peut
pas être ignorée lors du transfert d’un film sur vidéo (à cause de son impact sur la synchronisation audio, comme c’est expliqué à la section « Synchronisation de l’audio et de la
vidéo » à la page 32).
Vous devez à présent penser au problème suivant: comment distribuer les 24 ips du film
sur les 29,97 ips de la vidéo NTSC. Deux options s’offrent à vous :
 réaliser un 3:2 pulldown
 lire le film à 29.97 ips
Réalisation d’un 3:2 pulldown
La méthode la plus courante pour passer des 24 ips du film aux 29,97 ips de la vidéo est
d’effectuer un pulldown 3:2 (appelé 2:3:2:3 pulldown). En alternant l’enregistrement de
deux trames d’une image du film et de trois trames de l’image suivante, les 24 images qui
défilent en 1 seconde de film finissent par remplir les 30 images d’une seconde de vidéo. 24 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Remarque : la fréquence d’images de la vidéo NTSC est de 29,97 ips. La fréquence
d’images du film est changée en 23,98 ips pour créer le modèle 3:2.
Comme illustré ci-dessus, le modèle 3:2 (qui est en réalité un modèle 2:3:2:3 étant donné
que l’image A est enregistrée en deux trames, suivie de l’image B enregistrée en trois trames) est reproduit au bout de quatre images du film. Presque tous les spots publicitaires
de haute qualité, les films et les programmes de télévision en différé utilisent ce procédé
avant la diffusion.
Notez qu’après ce pull-down, les images du film ne correspondent pas exactement
à celles de la vidéo. En effet, la durée d’une image vidéo ne correspond qu’aux quatre
cinquièmes de la durée d’une image du film. En raison de cet écart, si vous comparez
un nombre précis d’images vidéo et le nombre correspondant d’images du film, vous
vous rendrez compte que les deux durées sont rarement exactement les mêmes. Pour
que la synchronisation de l’ensemble soit maintenue, il faut généralement ajouter (ou
supprimer) une fraction d’une image du film à la durée de la coupe suivante. Cela signifie que Cinema Tools doit parfois ajouter (ou supprimer), dans la liste de conformation,
une image du film à la fin d’une coupe pour conserver la synchronisation. Pour cette
raison, si vous montez une vidéo à laquelle a été appliqué un 3:2 pull-down, la cut list
de Cinema Tools n’est précise qu’à plus ou moins 1 image pour chaque coupe.
Avant
(23,98 ips)
A B A B B C C D D D
A B C D A D A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D B C
A A B B B C C D D D A A B B B C C D D D A A B B C C D D D A A B B B D B C C D D D A B A B B C C D D
A B C D
A A B B B C C D D D
Field
1
Field
2
Field
1
Field
2
Field
1
Field
2
Field
1
Field
2
Field
1
Field
2
3:2 Pulldown
Après
(29,97 ips)
Une secondeChapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 25
I
Ce problème de précision peut être résolu facilement à l’aide de la fonction Reverse Telecine (ou du matériel ou des logiciels de tierce partie) pour supprimer les trames supplé-
mentaires et revenir aux 24 ips originales du film avant de commencer le montage
numérique, à condition qu’il y ait une relation de un à un entre les images de la vidéo et
les images du film. Le choix de 24 ips (ou de 23,98 ips, voir « Synchronisation de l’audio
et de la vidéo » à la page 32) comme base temps de montage Final Cut Pro dans l’Éditeur de préréglage de séquence vous permet de monter la vidéo et de générer une liste
de conformation très précise. Consultez la section « Choix d’une méthode de préparation des plans sources en vue du montage » à la page 129 pour en savoir plus sur ces
options.
Lecture du film à 29,97 ips
Une autre option en matière de transferts de vidéo NTSC consiste à faire tourner le film
à 29,97 ips. De cette manière, les images du film coïncident exactement avec celles de la
vidéo, mais l’action du film subit une accélération de 25 pour cent. En raison de facteurs
liés à la synchronisation audio, cette méthode est rarement employée ou recommandée.
Utilisation de la vidéo PAL
La vitesse de défilement de la vidéo PAL est d’exactement 25 ips. Deux méthodes peuvent être utilisées pour transférer un film sur une bande vidéo PAL : lire le film à 25 ips
(méthode appelée 24 @ 25) et ajouter deux trames supplémentaires par seconde (similaire au pulldown 3:2 de la vidéo NTSC, appelé méthode 24 & 1, ou à la méthode de
pulldown 24 @ 25).
Qu’est-ce qu’une image A ?
Il est souvent fait référence aux images « A » au sujet de la vidéo pulldown 3:2. Comme
le montre l’illustration ci-avant, l’image A est la seule dont toutes les trames tiennent
dans une image vidéo. Les autres images (B, C et D) apparaissent dans deux images
vidéo. L’image A étant le point de départ du modèle vidéo à cinq images, il est souhaitable qu’elle soit la première image de chacun des plans vidéo. En général, les images A
sont placées aux numéros de timecode « non-drop frame » se terminant par « 5 » et « 0 ».
Consultez la section « À propos des images A » à la page 142 pour en savoir plus.26 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Méthode 24 @ 25
En lisant le film à 25 ips, les images du film coïncident exactement avec les images de
la vidéo. L’inconvénient réside dans le fait que l’action subit une accélération de 4 pour
cent et qu’il faut par conséquent accélérer l’audio dans les mêmes proportions pour
conserver la synchronisation. Pour tirer parti de la grande variété disponible d’équipements vidéo à 25 ips, vous pouvez choisir de réaliser le montage avec des images plus
rapides de 4 pour cent. Vous pouvez également choisir la fonction Conform (conformation) de Cinema Tools pour faire passer la base temps du plan à 24 ips, corrigeant ainsi
la vitesse. La vidéo peut ensuite être montée à l’aide de Final Cut Pro à condition que
les séquences qui l’utilisent aient une base temps de 24 ips.
Remarque : Final Cut Pro comprend une configuration simplifiée et un préréglage de
séquence dont les noms contiennent « 24 @ 25 », ainsi qu’un format de timecode appelé
« 24 @ 25 ». Ils sont tous les deux destinés à être utilisés avec des plans provenant de
vidéo PAL à 25 ips mais ayant été conformés à la vidéo 24 ips. Consultez la section
« Utilisation de vidéo à 25 ips conformée à 24 ips » à la page 153 pour en savoir plus.
Méthode 24&1
L’ajout de deux trames vidéo supplémentaires par seconde (appelée également méthode
de pulldown 24 @ 25 dans Final Cut Pro) offre l’avantage de conserver la vitesse originale
du film tout en perdant la relation univoque film vers vidéo. Cette méthode consiste à
enregistrer une trame vidéo supplémentaire toutes les 12 images du film.
Utilisation de la vidéo 24P
Avec sa fréquence d’images et son balayage progressif, la vidéo 24p convient bien aux
transferts télécinéma. Il utilise la même vitesse que le film et permet par conséquent
une concordance parfaite des images du film et de la vidéo, sans conversion de vitesse.
24 ips
25 ips
1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 6 7
Première trame de la seconde suivante
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
17
18
18 19 20 21 22 23 24
19 20 21 22 23 24
Une Seconde
1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 6 7
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Trame répétée Trame répétée
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12 24
24
Une seconde
24 ips
25 ipsChapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 27
I
Votre système Final Cut Pro doit être équipé d’un matériel spécialisé pour capturer de la
vidéo 24P, que ce soit en plans compressés ou décompressés. Vous pouvez également utiliser certaines caméras DV, telles que la Panasonic AG-DVX100, pour tourner de la vidéo
24P et utiliser la méthode 2:3:3:2 pulldown pour l’enregistrer sur bande à 29,97 ips (NTSC).
À l’aide de Final Cut Pro et de Cinema Tools, vous pouvez capturer cette vidéo et supprimer le 2:3:3:2 pulldown afin de pouvoir effectuer le montage à 24 ips. Consultez la section
« Ajout et suppression du pulldown dans les plans 24P » à la page 218 pour en savoir
plus.
Remarque : lorsque l’enregistreur de bande vidéo 24p est utilisé au sein d’un système
NTSC, sa fréquence d’images est en réalité de 23,976 ips (on parle de 23,98 ips) pour être
compatible avec la fréquence d’images de 29,97 ips du NTSC.
Prise en compte du timecode
Il est important de prendre en considération les remarques générales ci-dessous concernant le timecode. Si vous utilisez de la vidéo NTSC, vous pouvez choisir entre deux
formats de timecode.
Conseils généraux relatifs au timecode
Si votre appareil audio ou vidéo vous permet de définir les réglages du timecode, il est
recommandé de régler la partie « heures » du timecode de sorte qu’elle corresponde au
numéro de la bande vidéo. Il est ainsi beaucoup plus facile de savoir de quelle bande provient un plan. Il est également fortement conseillé de ne pas « passer minuit » sur une
bande. Cela arrive lorsque le timecode passe de 23:59:59:29 à 00:00:00:00 lors de la lecture.
Vous avez le choix entre le timecode record run et le timecode free run au cours de
la production :
 Timecode record run : le générateur de timecode s’arrête chaque fois que vous arrêtez
l’enregistrement. Vous obtenez de cette manière une bande à timecode continu
puisque chaque fois que vous commencez à enregistrer, le timecode reprend au
point où il s’était arrêté précédemment.
 Timecode free run : le générateur de timecode tourne sans arrêt. Une rupture de
timecode est donc générée chaque fois que vous relancez l’enregistrement.
Pour éviter d’éventuels problèmes au moment de la capture des plans, il est recommandé d’employer la méthode record run, ce qui permet d’éviter les ruptures de
timecode sur une bande.
Dans le cas où une bande contiendrait des ruptures de timecode (avec des sauts de
numérotation entre les prises), veillez à laisser suffisamment de temps (poignées) pour
les pre-roll et post-roll requis durant la capture lorsque vous listez vos plans. Consultez
la documentation de Final Cut Pro pour des informations supplémentaires sur l’utilisation du timecode.28 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
À propos du timecode NTSC
Le timecode NTSC normal (appelé non-drop frame fonctionne comme son nom l’indique :
chaque image utilise le numéro libre suivant. Il y a 30 images par seconde, 60 secondes par
minute et 60 minutes par heure. Étant donné que la vitesse d’images réelle de la norme
NTSC est un peu inférieure à 30 ips (29,97 ips), le timecode non-drop frame finit par prendre du retard (3 secondes et 18 images par heure) par rapport au temps réel écoulé.
Pour compenser cela, le timecode drop frame saute en avant de deux images par minute,
sauf pour les minutes se terminant par « 0 ». (Le saut se fait uniquement par rapport aux
numéros, pas par rapport aux images vidéo.) Cette correction permet de faire coïncider
le timecode avec le temps réel, mais rend le montage numérique du film plus confus.
Avec le timecode non-drop frame, une fois que vous avez trouvé une image A, vous
savez que l’image A suivante correspond au numéro de cette image plus 5, et ainsi de
suite. Si vous trouvez par exemple une image A à 1:23:14:15, vous savez que toutes les
images terminant par « 5 » et « 0 » seront des images A. Avec le timecode drop frame,
il est difficile d’établir ce type de lien.
Remarque : en général, les images A sont placées aux numéros de timecode « non-drop
frame » se terminant par « 5 » et « 0 ».
Il est vivement recommandé de ne pas utiliser de timecode non-drop frame pour la
vidéo et l’audio dans vos projets de montage, même si Cinema Tools et Final Cut Pro
sont capables de le traiter. Quel que soit le type de timecode que vous utilisez,
n’oubliez pas d’utiliser le même pour les bandes vidéo et pour les bandes audio.
Remarque : le timecode PAL ne pose pas ce problème : il lit à une vitesse réelle de 25 ips.
Qu’arrive-t-il au timecode après que vous ayez utilisé la fonction
Reverse Telecine ?
La fonction Reverse Telecine (utilisée pour convertir de la vidéo 29,97 ips en vidéo 23,98 ips)
a une incidence directe sur le timecode des images vidéo. Comme Cinema Tools doit géné-
rer un nouveau timecode 23,98 ips pour les images (à partir du timecode original), il se
peut qu’il y ait une différence entre les numéros de timecode gravés et les numéros affichés dans Final Cut Pro. Bien que les différences de timecode entre la fenêtre d’affichage
et le timecode de Final Cut Pro puissent provoquer une certaine confusion, Cinema Tools
gère le nouveau timecode de la vidéo 23,98 ips et est capable de le remettre en correspondance avec les valeurs NTSC ou PAL originales et donc avec les numéros de bord du film.
Remarque : la fonction Reverse Telecine est généralement utilisée pour convertir de
la vidéo NTSC en 23,98 ips afin qu’elle corresponde au timecode audio, mais elle peut
aussi convertir la vidéo en 24 ips. Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 29
I
Le timecode passe par les modifications suivantes : le télécinéma inversé supprime six
images par seconde afin que les valeurs de timecode coïncident toujours au début de
chaque seconde. Cela signifie qu’un plan qui dure 38 secondes s’il est lu à la vitesse NTSC
de 29,97 ips conservera sa durée de 38 secondes s’il est lu à la vitesse de 23,98 ips du télé-
cinéma inversé.
Dans l’illustration ci-avant, les trames NTSC bleues représentent les trames supprimées au
cours du processus de télécinéma inversé sur un plan à l’aide du pulldown 3:2 traditionnel.
(Consultez la section « Ajout et suppression du pulldown dans les plans 24P » à la
page 218 pour des informations sur le pulldown 2:3:3:2.) La fenêtre d’affichage du timecode
NTSC sera différente de ce que Final Cut Pro affiche pour toutes les images
sauf la première de chaque seconde, quelle que soit la longueur du plan.
Qu’arrive-t-il au timecode après que vous ayez utilisé la fonction
Conform ?
L’on utilise la fonction Conform dans trois situations :
 Conversion de vidéo 25 ips PAL en 24 ips : le timecode n’est pas modifié, ce qui garantit
qu’une liste EDL exportée après le montage des plans fera bien référence au timecode
PAL original. L’inconvénient, c’est que le timecode, à 25 ips, ne représente plus exactement le passage du temps réel lors de la lecture à 24 ips car chaque image est affichée un peu plus longtemps. Consultez la section « Utilisation de vidéo à 25 ips
conformée à 24 ips » à la page 153 pour en savoir plus.
 Conformation de vidéo 29,97 ips en 29,97 ips : le timecode n’est pas modifié. Ce processus est utilisé pour corriger des problèmes dans un fichier QuickTime avant l’utilisation
de la fonction Reverse Telecine. Consultez l’annexe C, « Solutions aux problèmes
fréquents et assistance client », à la page 249 pour en savoir plus.
 Conversion de vidéo 29,97 ips NTSC en 23,98 ips : le timecode est modifié, un numéro
étant passé toutes les cinq images. Cette situation de conformation est rare.
Consultez la section « Utilisation de la fonction de conformation » à la page 131 pour
en savoir plus.
1:00 1:11 1:01 1:02 1:03 1:04 1:05 1:16 1:06 1:07 1:08 1:09 1:10 1:12 1:13 1:14 1:15 1:17 1:18 1:19 1:20 1:21 1:22 1:23 1:24 1:25 1:26 1:27 1:28 1:29 2:00 2:01 2:02
1:00 1:01 1:02 1:03 1:04 1:05 1:06 1:07 1:08 1:09 1:10 1:11 1:12 1:13 1:14 1:15 1:16 1:17 1:18 1:19 1:20 1:21 1:22 1:23 2:00 2:01 2:02
Images vidéo NTSC (29,97 ips)
Images vidéo télécinéma inversé (23,98 ips)
Début du plan Trames éliminées Une seconde30 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
À propos du son
Le son d’un film étant enregistré séparément sur un enregistreur audio, certains aspects
sont à prendre en considération :
 choix du type d’enregistreur audio à utiliser
 format de timecode à utiliser
 mode de mixage audio final
 mode de synchronisation de l’audio et de la vidéo
Choix d’un enregistreur audio
Il existe plusieurs types d’enregistreurs audio : le magnétophone analogique (en géné-
ral un Nagra), le magnétophone numérique (DAT, pour Digital Audio Tape) ou l’enregistreur de disques numériques. Qu’il soit analogique ou numérique, l’essentiel est qu’il
gère les timecodes.
Choix d’un format de timecode audio
Contrairement à la vidéo ou au film, qui doivent être structurés avec une vitesse spécifique, l’audio est linéaire et dépourvu de divisions dues aux images. L’ajout de timecode
à l’audio sert donc à déterminer des points dans le temps afin de faciliter la synchronisation de l’audio avec les images de la vidéo ou du film.
Durant le tournage, vous pouvez choisir le format de timecode audio à utiliser (généralement 30 ips, 29,97 ips, 25 ips, 24 ips ou 23,98 ips). Vous pouvez également choisir, pour
les formats 30 ips et 29,97 ips, d’utiliser le timecode drop frame ou non-drop frame. Pour
les transferts de vidéo NTSC, il est fortement recommandé d’utiliser le timecode non-drop
frame tant pour la vidéo que pour l’audio (même si Cinema Tools est compatible avec les
deux). Consultez la section « À propos du timecode NTSC » à la page 28 pour en savoir
plus sur les timecodes drop frame et non-drop frame.
Au moment de choisir votre réglage de timecode audio, vous devez tenir compte du mode
de mixage du son final :
 Si le mixage final doit être réalisé à l’aide de Final Cut Pro : ce réglage doit correspondre
au réglage Editing Timebase dans l’Éditeur de préréglage de séquence de Final Cut Pro.
 Si le mixage final doit être réalisé dans un studio de postproduction audio : le timecode
doit être compatible avec l’équipement du studio.
Remarque : contactez le studio afin de confirmer ces réglages avant de commencer
le tournage.
En général, si vous synchronisez l’audio au cours du transfert télécinéma, le timecode
doit correspondre à celui du format vidéo (29,97 ips pour NTSC, 25 ips pour PAL ou
24 ips pour 24p). Consultez le monteur son avant le tournage, afin de vous assurer
qu’il pourra travailler avec le timecode choisi.Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 31
I
Mixage de l’audio final
La méthode utilisée pour mixer l’audio final dépend de la complexité de la bande
sonore (le nombre de pistes, les effets sonores et l’overdubbing peuvent la rendre très
complexe) et de votre budget. Vous pouvez soit finaliser l’audio dans Final Cut Pro soit
le faire finaliser dans un studio de postproduction.
Finishing the Audio With Final Cut Pro
Si vous capturez des plans audio en haute qualité, vous pouvez terminer l’audio de
votre projet à l’aide de Final Cut Pro, qui comprend des outils de montage du son
sophistiqués. N’oubliez toutefois pas qu’il faut absolument disposer d’audio de bonne
qualité pour faire un bon film et que choisir de ne pas confier l’audio à un studio de
postproduction audio familier aux problèmes liés à la création d’audio pour les films
peut donner des résultats décevants.
Vous pouvez exporter l’audio de Final Cut Pro sous la forme d’un fichier Open Media
Framework (OMF) pouvant être utilisé dans un studio de postproduction audio. Un
fichier OMF exporté contient le son ainsi que les informations sur les point d’entrée
et de sortie audio. Cela signifie que tous les éléments d’effets sonores que peut contenir votre projet sont inclus dans le fichier. Lorsque vous utilisez un fichier OMF, la qualité de l’enregistrement doit être optimale car elle correspond exactement à ce que
les spectateurs entendront. Veillez par conséquent à utiliser un appareil de capture
de bonne qualité et des niveaux d’enregistrement appropriés.
Exportation de listes EDL audio
Une autre façon de faire consiste à utiliser des plans de moindre qualité dans Final Cut Pro,
puis à les exporter dans une liste EDL audio (Edit Decision List) que l’on fournit au studio
de postproduction audio. Dans le studio, des éléments audio de haute qualité peuvent
être capturés directement à partir de la source sonore d’origine, puis montés en se basant
sur la liste EDL. Pour que cela marche, il faut que le timecode et les numéros des bandes
sonores originales soient consignés et utilisés pour créer la liste EDL audio.
Les plans audio capturés dans des plans vidéo ne conservent pas leur timecode ni leur
numéros de bobine originaux et la liste EDL de Final Cut Pro ne peut pas être utilisée par
les studios de postproduction audio. Cela arrive souvent avec les plans créés à partir d’un
transfert scene-and-take, car l’audio est alors synchronisé avec le film, puis enregistré sur
la bande vidéo et perd le timecode audio original. Toutefois, étant donné que la liste télécinéma produite lors du transfert contient généralement les informations de timecode et de
numéro de bande de l’audio et de la vidéo, il suffit de l’importer dans la base de données
de Cinema Tools afin que la base de données puisse assurer le suivi de l’audio et que vous
puissiez exporter une liste EDL audio depuis Cinema Tools une fois le montage terminé.
Consultez la section « Exportation d’une liste EDL audio » à la page 193 pour en savoir
plus sur ce procédé.32 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Synchronisation de l’audio et de la vidéo
Le son de production d’un film est enregistré séparément sur un enregistreur audio ; ce
procédé est connu sous le nom de méthode du système d’enregistrement dual (ou double) system recording. La synchronisation du son avec le film et la bande vidéo (pour une
synchronisation labiale parfaite) est une étape fondamentale dans la réalisation d’un film.
La méthode de synchronisation dépendra de l’équipement dont vous disposez ainsi que
du moment choisi pour la synchronisation. D’autres considérations liées au format vidéo,
à la méthode de transfert télécinéma et au timecode employés ont également un impact
sur le processus et ne doivent pas être oubliées.
La synchronisation est particulièrement importante lors des trois étapes suivantes :
 durant le transfert télécinéma
 durant le montage
 au moment de la création de la version finale
Pour conserver la synchronisation à chacune de ces étapes, différentes stratégies peuvent
s’avérer nécessaires. Veillez à planifier votre travail en conséquence.
Synchronisation : informations générales
La synchronisation du son avec l’image vidéo ne doit pas poser de problème majeur si
les précautions nécessaires ont été prises lors du tournage. La synchronisation du son
comporte deux aspects : l’établissement de la synchronisation à un point particulier
de chaque plan et la lecture du son à la bonne vitesse afin qu’il reste synchronisé.
Lorsque vous filmez, vous devez créer des repères sonores et visuels qui serviront à
la synchronisation. La méthode la plus courante consiste à utiliser un clap (également
appelé ardoise ou claquette) au début de chaque prise. L’idéal est d’employer un clap
avec timecode sur lequel est affiché le timecode de l’enregistreur audio. Pour synchroniser l’audio et la vidéo, positionnez la vidéo sur la première image où le clap est refermé,
puis localisez le son (ou timecode) correspondant. Sachez que pour des raisons liées à la
production, il est parfois nécessaire que le clap soit effectué à la fin de la prise. En géné-
ral, il doit alors être tenu à l’envers.
Le transfert par télécinéma engendrant souvent une accélération ou un ralentissement
du film, la vitesse audio doit également être modifiée. Si la synchronisation audio se fait
au cours du transfert, le changement de vitesse s’effectue à ce moment-là. Si la synchronisation audio/bande vidéo est effectuée après le transfert, le changement de vitesse doit
également être effectué au cours de cette synchronisation.Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 33
I
Synchronisation au cours du transfert par télécinéma
Lors du tournage, l’enregistreur audio démarre généralement juste avant que la caméra
ne se mette à tourner et s’arrête un petit peu après la caméra. Comme l’enregistrement
audio obtenu est plus long que le film, il n’est pas possible de lire en même temps la
bande sonore et le film pendant plusieurs prises consécutives tout en conservant la synchronisation. Si vous souhaitez que le transfert par télécinéma enregistre l’audio synchronisé sur la bande vidéo, vous devez soit utiliser le transfert scene-and-take en synchronisant
chaque prise séparément, soit créer une bande audio synchronisée avant de réaliser un
transfert camera-roll.
La synchronisation durant le transfert télécinéma permet non seulement d’obtenir des
bandes vidéo avec audio synchronisé prêtes pour la capture, mais présente également
un autre avantage : la liste télécinéma inclut généralement les informations de timecode
et de numéro de bande audio. L’importation de la liste dans Cinema Tools permet d’exporter une liste EDL audio afin qu’un studio de postproduction audio puisse ensuite recapturer les plans audio à une qualité supérieure, si nécessaire.
Transferts de vidéo NTSC
Lorsque vous transférez un film sur bande NTSC, il est toujours nécessaire de lire le film
à une vitesse plus lente de 0,1 pour cent que 24 ips (c’est-à-dire à 23,976 ips ou 23.98 ips)
afin de compenser la vitesse réelle de 29,97 ips de la bande NTSC (au lieu de la vitesse
idéale de 30 ips). La vitesse du film ayant été réduite, celle de l’audio doit l’être à son tour
pour que la synchronisation soit conservée.
Transferts de vidéo PAL
Pour les transferts de vidéo PAL à l’aide de la méthode 24@25 (en augmentant la vitesse
du film à 25 ips), l’audio doit également être accéléré si vous le synchronisez durant le
transfert par télécinéma ou si vous avez l’intention de monter la vidéo à cette vitesse.
Si vous transférez le film sur bande à l’aide de la méthode 24&1 (en enregistrant une
trame vidéo supplémentaire toutes les douze images du film), vous devez lire l’audio
à sa vitesse normale sans vous préoccuper du point où la synchronisation est établie.
Dans ce cas, utilisez un timecode audio de 25 ips.
Synchronisation dans Final Cut Pro
Si vous ne synchronisez pas le son et les images sur la bande via le transfert télécinéma,
ils seront capturés séparément dans Final Cut Pro : éléments audio et plans vidéo. Vous
pouvez les synchroniser par la suite dans Final Cut Pro en utilisant les plans avec clap
(méthode expliquée dans la section « Synchronisation : informations générales » à la
page 32). Une fois que deux plans (ou plus) sont synchronisés, vous pouvez les fusionner
en un seul plan grâce à la fonction des plans fusionnés de Final Cut Pro. Consultez la section « Synchronisation séparée de l’audio et de la vidéo capturés » à la page 146 ainsi
que la documentation de Final Cut Pro pour en savoir plus.34 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Utilisation de Final Cut Pro
Les décisions que vous prenez pour le transfert télécinéma et la façon dont vous utilisez
l’audio influent sur votre utilisation de Final Cut Pro au cours du processus de montage.
Réglage de la base temps des séquences
Dans Final Cut Pro, vous devez définir la base temps de sorte que les séquences correspondent à la fréquence d’images des plans capturés.
Important : ne placez pas des plans dans une séquence dont la vitesse de défilement
est différente de la leur, car vous risquez d’obtenir une liste de film inexacte. Si vous
souhaitez par exemple effectuer un montage à 24 ips, assurez-vous que les vitesses de
vos plans sont toutes réglées sur 24 ips (en utilisant soit la fonction Reverse telecine
(télécinéma inversé), soit la fonction Conform (conformation)).
Consultez la section « À propos des configurations simplifiées et du paramétrage de la
base temps » à la page 151 et la documentation de Final Cut Pro pour des détails sur la
définition de la base temps de montage pour des séquences.
Sortie sur bande lors d’un montage à 24 ips
Le montage à 24 ips offre l’avantage d’une concordance parfaite entre les images du film
et les images vidéo, permettant ainsi la création de listes de conformation très précises.
L’un des inconvénients provient du fait qu’un magnétoscope 24P est nécessaire pour enregistrer directement la vidéo à 24 ips (car l’enregistrement avec des appareils vidéo NTSC
ou PAL standard est compliqué). Cela peut poser problème si vous souhaitez enregistrer
votre projet monté sur une cassette vidéo (soit pour la montrer à d’autres personnes, soit
pour la donner au monteur négatif, comme référence visuelle à utiliser avec la cut list).
Il existe cependant des solutions :
 Si vous utilisez de la vidéo NTSC : vous pouvez utiliser la fonction d’insertion de pulldown
de Final Cut Pro pour appliquer un modèle de pulldown à la vidéo et donc sortir la
vidéo à 29,97 ips. Consultez la section « Modèles de pulldown applicables à la vidéo
23,98 ips » à la page 225 pour en savoir plus. Il existe également des cartes et des applications de tierce partie qui peuvent réaliser un 3:2 pulldown sur la vidéo, permettant
ainsi la vitesse NTSC de 29,97 ips.
 Si vous utilisez de la vidéo PAL : si vous envisagez d’enregistrer votre projet sur bande
vidéo au terme de votre travail, il s’avère plus simple de réaliser le montage à 25 ips
(après avoir augmenté la vitesse du film afin de conserver la concordance des images).Chapitre 1 Avant de commencer votre projet 35
I
Utilisation d’effets
Final Cut Pro offre des possibilités d’effets étendues, notamment des effets de film courants
tels que les fondus, les balayages, les modifications de vitesse et les textes de génériques.
N’oubliez pas que la sortie vidéo de Final Cut Pro n’est pas conçue pour être transférée sur
film et ces effets doivent être créés par une fonction spécialisée pour les trucages optiques
ou créés numériquement à l’aide de numérisations haute résolution du métrage à combiner. Consultez la section « Utilisation d’effets, de filtres et de transitions » à la page 160
pour obtenir des informations supplémentaires, y compris un aperçu des étapes élémentaires d’insertion d’effets et de transitions dans un film monté numériquement.2
37
2 Le flux de production de
Cinema Tools
Cinema Tools s’inscrit facilement dans un flux de production
de montage de film.
L’objectif premier de Cinema Tools est de créer une cut list précise en fonction des
montages réalisés dans Final Cut Pro. Il existe un certain nombre d’étapes cruciales pour
y parvenir mais pour la plupart, le flux de production de Cinema Tools lui-même dépend
de l’équipement utilisé, de votre standard vidéo et de la façon dont vous travaillez.
Étapes fondamentales du flux de production
Voici à quoi ressemble un flux de production dans Cinema Tools (chacun de ces étapes
est décrite en détail dans les rubriques qui suivent) :
Étape 1: création de la base de données Cinema Tools
Étape 2: capture des plans sources avec Final Cut Pro
Étape 3: connexion des plans à la base de données
Étape 4: préparation des plans pour le montage
Étape 5: montage des plans dans Final Cut Pro
Étape 6: création de listes de conformation et d’autres listes avec Cinema Tools
Création de la base de données Cinema Tools
Le point central de Cinema Tools est sa base de données, dans laquelle les liaisons entre
les éléments de votre film (le film, la vidéo et le son) sont établies et suivies. Bien qu’il ne
soit pas obligatoire de créer une base de données avant de commencer le montage, cette
étape peut fournir des outils utiles pour la capture de plans et la planification du montage.38 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Fonctionnement de la base de données
La base de données peut contenir une fiche ou bien des milliers selon la manière dont
vous choisissez d’utiliser Cinema Tools. Ces fiches sont mises en correspondance avec les
montages réalisés dans Final Cut Pro afin de créer la cut list. Pour être valide, une fiche doit
comporter des valeurs relatives à la caméra, le rush, ou la bobine laboratoire, le code de
bordure et être reliée à un plan ou comporter des valeurs de bande vidéo et de timecode
vidéo (point d’entrée et durée).
Lorsque vous exportez la cut list après avoir monté la vidéo dans Final Cut Pro,
Cinema Tools regarde chaque montage et cherche la fiche approprié dans sa base
de données afin de déterminer les numéros de clé et la codification manuelle qui
correspondent (code de bordure). Cinema Tools recherche d’abord une fiche qui est
reliée au nom du plan utilisé dans le montage. S’il la trouve, il localise le fichier du
plan, une note est ajoutée à la cut list et Cinema Tools passe au montage suivant.
Si aucun enregistrement n’est trouvé sur la base du nom de plan d’une coupe ou si le
plan n’est pas localisé, Cinema Tools analyse le numéro de bande vidéo pour voir si des
enregistrements portent le même numéro (« 001 » est différent de « 0001 »). Si c’est le cas,
il recherche ensuite si les points d’entrée et de sortie du montage sont à la portée d’une
des fiches. Si cette condition est également remplie, le montage est ajouté à la cut list et
Cinema Tools passe au montage suivant.
Si une fiche utilisant le nom du chemin d’accès à un plan ou un numéro de bobine vidéo
avec des données de timecode appropriées est introuvable, « » apparaît dans la
cut list et une note est ajoutée à la liste des éléments manquants. Si une fiche est trouvée
mais qu’elle est incomplète (numéro de clé manquant, par exemple), « » est
placé dans ces champs et une note est ajoutée à la liste des éléments manquants.
Consultez le chapitre 8, « Création de listes de film et de listes de modification », à la
page 167 et l’annexe B, « Création de listes de films avec Cinema Tools », à la page 245
pour des détails sur ce processus et la liste des éléments manquants.
Base de données simple ou détaillée
Cinema Tools est conçu pour vous permettre de créer un enregistrement pour toute
une bobine de caméra, pour chaque prise ou entre ces deux extrêmes, selon la façon
dont vous travaillez. Chaque enregistrement peut contenir :
 les numéros de scène, de plan et de prise avec descriptions,
 le numéro de la bobine de caméra du film, le code de bordure, le timecode et le numéro
de bobine de la vidéo,
 le numéro de bobine et le timecode audio,
 une affiche de plan avec une image représentative du plan,
 des réglages de base tels que les formats du timecode et du film.Chapitre 2 Le flux de production de Cinema Tools 39
I
Les fiches peuvent être saisies manuellement ou importées d’une liste télécinéma. Vous
pouvez modifier, supprimer et ajouter des fiches à la base de données en fonction des
nécessités, même si elles sont basées sur la liste télécinéma. Vous pouvez également
fusionner des bases de données. Si vous travaillez avec des rushes par exemple, vous
pouvez créer une nouvelle base de données pour chaque session et toutes les fusionner
une fois que le tournage est terminé.
La liste télécinéma des transferts scene-and-take, dans lesquels seules les prises de
films spécifiées sont transférées sur vidéo, peut fournir les informations basiques à la
base de données. Vous pouvez ajouter d’autres fiches, des commentaires ou d’autres
informations si besoin est.
La liste télécinéma des transferts camera-roll fournit des informations pour une seule
fiche (le code de bordure et le timecode vidéo utilisés au début du transfert). Si les
numéros de clé et le timecode vidéo du film sont continus tout au long du transfert,
cette seule fiche suffit à Cinema Tools pour générer une cut list pour cette bobine de film.
Importation de listes télécinéma
Vous pouvez importer la liste télécinéma à l’aide de Cinema Tools ou de Final Cut Pro.
Vous pouvez choisir l’une des deux méthodes en fonction de votre flux de production.
Dans les deux cas, vous pouvez assigner une lettre de caméra, qui est ajoutée aux
entrées de prise, à l’importation. Cela est utilise dans les cas où plusieurs caméras sont
utilisées pour chaque prise. Consultez la rubrique « Attribution de lettres de caméra » à
la page 86 pour en savoir plus.
Consultez la rubrique « Importation d’informations à partir d’une liste télécinéma ou
d’un fichier ALE » à la page 85 pour en savoir plus sur l’importation de listes télécinéma.
Importation de listes télécinéma à l’aide de Cinema Tools
Pour importer une liste télécinéma dans Cinema Tools, vous devez d’abord disposer
d’une base de données ouverte. La base de données peut être une base de données
existante à laquelle vous ajoutez de nouveaux enregistrements ou une nouvelle sans
enregistrement.
Une fois que les enregistrements ont été importés, vous pouvez exporter une liste de
capture par lot de Cinema Tools que vous pouvez ensuite importer dans Final Cut Pro
pour automatiser le processus de capture des plans.
Importation de listes télécinéma à l’aide de Final Cut Pro
Lorsque vous importez une liste télécinéma à l’aide de Final Cut Pro, vous spécifiez si
vous voulez l’importer dans une base de données Cinema Tools existante ou créer une
nouvelle base de données. 40 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Lors de l’ajout d’enregistrements à la base de données Cinema Tools sélectionnée, chaque
enregistrement crée un plan offline dans le Navigateur de Final Cut Pro pour que les plans
puissent être capturés par lot. Les informations relatives au film provenant de la liste
télécinéma sont ajoutées automatiquement à chaque plan. Vous pouvez afficher ces
informations de plusieurs façons pendant le montage des plans dans Final Cut Pro.
Consultez la rubrique « Affichage d’informations relatives au film dans Final Cut Pro » à
la page 154 pour en savoir plus.
Entrée manuelle de fiches de la base de données
La raison la plus courante d’entrer manuellement une fiche dans la base de données
est qu’il n’y a pas de liste disponible à partir du processus de transfert du film vers la
vidéo. Certaines méthodes de tranfert du film vers la vidéo, telles que les chaînes de
films, ne produisent pas de liste.
Chaque enregistrement, dans une base de données, doit faire référence à un fichier de
données possédant un timecode et des numéros de bord continus. Avec les transferts
scene-and-take, chaque prise nécessite sa propre fiche puisque les numéros de bord de
film sont ignorés en sautant d’une prise à l’autre pendant le transfert.
Avec les transferts camera-roll, comme la bobine de film et l’enregistreur vidéo tournent
continuellement du début à la fin, vous n’avez besoin que d’un seul enregistrement pour
l’ensemble du plan, même si vous le subdivisez ultérieurement en plans plus petits (ces
derniers gardent le timecode original) et supprimez les portions non utilisées. Cela est dû
au fait que Cinema Tools peut utiliser le numéro de bobine vidéo et les points de montage
d’une coupe pour calculer les numéros de bord appropriés, tant que les informations de
bobine vidéo et de point de montage figurent dans un enregistrement.
Pour saisir des enregistrements de base de données manuellement, vous devez connaître
le numéro de bord et le numéro de timecode vidéo d’une image du plan. Le plus simple
est d’avoir ces valeurs gravées dans la vidéo grâce au transfert.Chapitre 2 Le flux de production de Cinema Tools 41
I
Consultez le chapitre 4, « Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools »,
à la page 69 pour des détails sur la création et la gestion de base de données
Cinema Tools.
Capture des plans sources
Vous devez capturer la vidéo et l’audio sur l’ordinateur du montage. Votre manière de
procéder dépendra en majeure partie du support utilisé pour le transfert télécinéma.
Si vous avez utilisé un magnétoscope analogue, tel qu’un Sony Betacam, la vidéo et
l’audio doivent être convertis en format numérique et compressés avant de pouvoir
être utilisés. Si vous avez utilisé un magnétoscope numérique, tel qu’un Sony Digital
Betacam, la vidéo et l’audio sont déjà numériques mais doivent être capturés et
compressés. Dans les deux cas, un matériel spécialisé avec des connexions adéquates
est généralement nécessaire.
Si vous avez utilisé un système DV, la vidéo (et l’audio, en fonction du type de transfert) est
déjà numérique et compressée et a seulement besoin d’être capturée à l’aide de FireWire.
Important : lorsque vous utilisez le contrôle de périphériques en série, n’oubliez pas de
calibrer son décalage de capture. Consultez la documentation de Final Cut Pro pour obtenir
plus d’informations. Consultez aussi la rubrique « Configuration de votre matériel afin de
capturer un timecode exact » à la page 113 pour en savoir plus sur la capture de plans.
Les numéros de fenêtre d’affichage sont-ils corrects ?
Il peut y avoir plusieurs raisons à l’affichage de valeurs de fenêtre d’affichage incorrectes.
Elles vont de la saisie de valeurs incorrectes à la détection automatique incorrecte. Vous
devez vérifier que les valeurs de fenêtre d’affichage sont correctes. Il est essentiel que
ces valeurs soient correctes si vous devez compter sur elle. Le numéro de clé se vérifie
généralement en comparant la valeur affichée avec une valeur documentée sur une
image perforée ou marquée près de la tête du plan. N’oubliez pas de vérifier cela au
moins une fois par bobine de caméra (l’idéal étant de faire la vérification pour chaque
prise). Comparez le timecode dans la fenêtre d’affichage avec la valeur affichée par la
platine de la bande vidéo.42 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Dans tous les cas, il se peut que vous décidiez de recompresser les fichiers pour en
diminuer la taille et les rendre plus faciles à exploiter. En utilisant le bon codec par
exemple, vous pourrez monter sur un ordinateur portable plus ancien.
Tactiques de capture
Il existe diverses manières de capturer la vidéo et l’audio. Déterminer le meilleur
choix pour vous dépend d’un certain nombre de facteurs, en particulier si vous avez
le contrôle du périphérique de la platine de la bande source et le type de transfert
utilisé (camera-roll ou scene-and-take).
Contrôle de périphérique
La première question à se poser avant de déterminer la méthode à suivre pour capturer la
vidéo et l’audio est de savoir si Final Cut Pro prend en charge le contrôle de périphérique
pour la platine que vous utilisez. Le contrôle de périphérique vous permet de capturer
avec précision la vidéo et l’audio que vous voulez suivant un procédé pouvant être répété
de manière exacte si nécessaire. Vous pouvez même définir une « capture par lot » qui
automatise le processus et vous laisse libre de vous concentrer sur d’autres tâches.
La capture sans contrôle de périphérique présente plusieurs inconvénients. Les plans
capturés manuellement n’ont pas de temps de début et de fin précis. Si vous cherchez à
faire correspondre les temps de début et de fin d’une liste télécinéma, vous devez rogner
les plans après les avoir capturés. De plus, sans contrôle de périphérique le timecode d’un
plan ne correspond pas au timecode de la bande. Final Cut Pro permet de changer le
timecode d’un plan, mais pour que ce timecode corresponde à la bande source, vous
devez disposer d’une référence visuelle (une perforation ou une image marqué)
possédant une valeur de timecode connue.
À propos de la compression
La compression, en termes de vidéo numérique, est une méthode de transformation
du contenu en fichiers plus petits utilisant moins d’espace sur le disque dur et
potentiellement moins d’énergie de la part du processeur au moment de les afficher.
L’inconvénient, c’est que les images sont de qualité moindre.
Il est important d’avoir à l’esprit que la vidéo montée à partir de Final Cut Pro et utilisée
avec Cinema Tools ne sera généralement pas utilisée si une grande qualité est exigée.
L’usage le plus courant de la vidéo montée est de servir de guide visuel allant avec la cut
list pour le monteur négatif. Cela signifie que la qualité de la vidéo doit juste être assez
bonne pour que vous puissiez faire vos choix de montage et lire les valeurs de la fenêtre
d’affichage. Cependant, vos choix de montage étant parfois basés sur des repères visuels
subtils, il vaut mieux ne pas s’embarquer dans un choix de compression excessif.
Important : n’utilisez pas de codecs de compression temporelle, comme, par exemple,
le MPEG-2. En plus d’être difficiles à monter, ces fichiers ne peuvent pas bénéficier de la
fonction Reverse Telecine. Chapitre 2 Le flux de production de Cinema Tools 43
I
Pour en savoir plus sur le contrôle de périphérique, consultez la documentation de
Final Cut Pro.
Transferts camera-roll
Pour effectuer des transferts camera-roll, vous devez soit capturer la bande entière soit
capturer manuellement un plan pour chaque prise. Si la bande utilise un timecode
vidéo et des numéros de bord de film continus, Cinema Tools n’a besoin que d’un seul
enregistrement de base de données établissant la relation entre les deux.
Si Final Cut Pro a un contrôle de périphérique de votre magnétoscope source, la meilleure
façon de capturer les prises souhaitées consiste à utiliser la fenêtre Log and Capture de
Final Cut Pro et à saisir les points d’entrée et de sortie et le numéro de bande de chaque.
Vous pouvez alors utiliser la capture par lot pour terminer le processus. Il n’est pas
nécessaire de créer une fiche dans la base de données pour chaque plan du moment
que vous ne changez pas le timecode.
Sans contrôle de périphérique, vous devez capturer manuellement soit les prises désirées
soit la bande entière. Il se peut que vous ayez à rogner chaque prise que vous capturez
manuellement et vous devrez également définir manuellement le timecode pour qu’il
corresponde à la bande source. L’avantage de capturer la bande entière est que vous n’avez
à définir le timecode du plan qu’une seule fois (en partant du principe que la bande source
avait un timecode continu). L’inconvénient, c’est la quantité d’espace disque nécessaire,
bien qu’une fois que la bande est capturée, vous pouvez utiliser Final Cut Pro pour créer
des sous-plans des prises utiles, puis supprimer le contenu inutilisé.
Consultez le chapitre 5, « Capture des plans sources et création d’un lien avec la base
de données », à la page 111 pour des détails sur la capture de plans.
Transfert scene-and-take
En réalisant des transferts scene-and-take, les fiches de la base de données de Cinema Tools
sont généralement adaptées à la capture par lot. Vous pouvez exporter une liste des
captures de Cinema Tools, puis l’importer dans le Navigateur de Final Cut Pro. Final Cut Pro
peut ensuite réaliser une capture par lot (en partant du principe qu’il puisse contrôler
le périphérique source) et créer des plans comme indiqué dans la liste Cinema Tools.
Ces plans peuvent ensuite être facilement liés aux fiches de la base de données de
Cinema Tools. 44 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Finalisation avec de la vidéo de haute qualité
Si vous voulez fournir une sortie vidéo de haute qualité au terme du projet, vous devez
tenir compte de plusieurs points.
Lorsque vous capturez de la vidéo pour le montage offline initial, vous pouvez la capturer
avec une compression relativement haute et inclure un timecode et des numéros de
bord gravés. La compression permet à votre ordinateur de traiter la vidéo plus facilement
et nécessite moins d’espace sur votre disque dur, ce qui vous permet de capturer plus de
vidéo pour prendre les décisions en matière de montage.
Une fois que vous avez fini le montage offline, vous pouvez utiliser Final Cut Pro pour
recapturer uniquement la vidéo réellement utilisée dans les coupes à l’aide d’un codec
de haute qualité et d’une version de la vidéo sans timecode ni numéros de bord gravés.
Consultez le chapitre 11, « Utilisation de la vidéo 24P et de listes EDL 24 ips », à la
page 209 pour en savoir plus sur ce processus. Consultez aussi la documentation
Final Cut Pro pour en savoir plus sur les flux de production du montage offline et online.Chapitre 2 Le flux de production de Cinema Tools 45
I
Connexion des plans à la base de données
Une fois que vous avez capturé les plans sources, vous pouvez les connecter à la base de
données Cinema Tools (on parle aussi de lier les plans à la base de données). Lier un plan
à la base de données permet à Cinema Tools d’accéder au plan d’une fiche en créant la
cut list, ce qui réduit la probabilité d’avoir des problèmes d’entrées de timecode.
Lors de la création d’une liste de conformation, Cinema Tools commence par analyser le
chemin d’accès aux plans utilisés dans le montage et les remet en correspondance avec
la base de données. Le fait que Cinema Tools soit capable de travailler avec le fichier du
plan de cette façon réduit la possibilité d’une erreur de timecode pouvant provoquer des
imprécisions dans la liste de conformation. Ceci est primordial lorsque vous effectuez un
montage à 24 ips. Consultez l’annexe B, « Création de listes de films avec Cinema Tools »,
à la page 245 pour en savoir plus sur la façon dont Cinema Tools génère une liste de
conformation. Consultez également la rubrique « Connexion des plans sources capturés
à la base de données » à la page 121 pour obtenir plus d’informations.
Préparation des plans pour le montage
Cinema Tools présente deux puissantes fonctions pouvant être utilisées sur les plans
avant de les monter : la fonction Reverse Telecine et la fonction Conform.
Reverse Telecine
La fonction Reverse Telecine (pour les transferts NTSC uniquement) permet de supprimer
les trames supplémentaires ajoutées lors du processus pull-down 3:2 d’un transfert
télécinéma. Vous devez l’utiliser lorsque vous montez de la vidéo à 23.98 ips. Consultez la
rubrique « Infos générales sur la vitesse de défilement des images » à la page 23 pour
des informations sur ce qu’est un pulldown 3:2 et pourquoi vous pouvez vouloir l’inverser.
Consultez la rubrique « Inversion du pulldown télécinéma » à la page 133 pour des
détails sur son utilisation.
Remarque : la fonction Reverse Telecine ne peut pas être utilisée avec de la vidéo
comprimée dans le temps, comme, par exemple, la vidéo au format MPEG-2.
Conform
La fonction Conform est utile à la fois pour corriger les erreurs présentes dans des plans
vidéo et pour changer la fréquence d’images (base temps) d’un plan. Cinema Tools vous
permet de sélectionner la fréquence d’images à laquelle vous souhaitez conformer un plan.
Afin de comprendre la fonction Conform, il faut connaître la nature des fichiers vidéo
QuickTime. Chaque image vidéo au sein d’un fichier QuickTime a un réglage de durée qui
définit pendant combien de temps l’image doit être affichée (dans les vidéos QuickTime
basées sur NTSC ou PAL normales, toutes les images ont la même durée). Par exemple, le
taux vidéo NTSC a une valeur correspondant à 1/30e de seconde (plus exactement 1/29,97e
de seconde) attribué à chaque image. Le taux vidéo PAL correspond à 1/25e de seconde. 46 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Il arrive parfois qu’à la capture de plans vidéo, la durée de certaines images soit définie
sur une valeur légèrement différente. Alors que les différences ne sont pas visibles lors
de la lecture du plan, elles peuvent provoquer des problèmes lorsque Cinema Tools
crée la liste de conformation ou lorsque vous utilisez la fonction Reverse Telecine. Dans
ce cas, vous devez conformer le plan à sa fréquence d’images actuelle.
Il peut également vous arriver de vouloir changer la fréquence d’images d’un plan. Si vous
avez transféré du film à 24 ips en vidéo en l’accélérant (soit à 29,97 ips pour le standard
NTSC, soit à 25 ips pour le standard PAL — en prenant soin d’assurer à chaque fois une
relation individuelle entre images du film et images de la vidéo), le mouvement à l’écran
sera plus rapide que dans le film d’origine et il faudra rectifier la vitesse de lecture de la
bande son pour compenser. Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction Conform pour changer la
fréquence d’images et la définir sur 24 ips pour que la lecture se fasse à la fréquence
originale du film et soit synchronisée avec l’audio. Consultez la rubrique « Utilisation de la
fonction de conformation » à la page 131 pour des détails sur l’utilisation de la fonction
Conform.
Remarque : n’oubliez pas qu’il faut utiliser la fonction Conform sur un plan avant de le
monter dans Final Cut Pro. Vérifiez aussi que la base temps dans l’Éditeur de préréglage
de séquence de Final Cut Pro est réglé sur la même vitesse que la vitesse à laquelle
vous conformez le plan.
Consultez la rubrique « Choix d’une méthode de préparation des plans sources en vue
du montage » à la page 129 pour en savoir plus.
Montage des plans dans Final Cut Pro
On monte les plans dans Final Cut Pro plus ou moins comme n’importe quel autre
projet vidéo, mais il a quelques points importants à garder à l’esprit. Ces points sont
expliqués dans le chapitre 7, « Montage dans Final Cut Pro », à la page 151.
Génération de listes de film et de listes des modifications
dans Cinema Tools
Une fois que vous avez monté vos plans et êtes satisfaits du montage numérique de
votre projet, vous êtes prêt à générer des listes relatives au film qui décrivent la façon
dont le négatif ou la copie de travail doit être monté. La cut list reprend les informations
de montage et de titrage.
Il existe un certain nombre d’autres listes utiles pouvant être générées à tout moment.
Un fichier de liste de film peut contenir une des listes suivantes :
 liste des éléments manquants : liste contenant les informations nécessaires
introuvables dans la base de données ;
 liste des doublons : liste des utilisations multiples d’une même source ;Chapitre 2 Le flux de production de Cinema Tools 47
I
 liste optique : liste destinée aux effets spéciaux, décrivant les transitions et les effets
de mouvement ;
 liste Pull : liste destinée à aider le laboratoire à tirer les négatifs dont il a besoin ;
 liste des scènes : liste de toutes les scènes utilisées dans votre projet et des plans
utilisés pour les effets d’optique.
Vous pouvez également exporter une liste des modifications, ce qui s’avère utile si votre flux
de production comprend des visionnements et des modifications de votre copie de travail.
La liste des modifications part du principe qu’une copie de travail a été montée selon les
spécifications de la liste de conformation (ou de la liste de modifications antérieure) et elle
indique d’autres modifications à apporter à la copie de travail en fonction des modifications
que vous avez apportées à la séquence dans Final Cut Pro. Consultez la rubrique « Quand
utilise-t-on des listes de modification ? » à la page 182 pour voir un organigramme du
processus de la liste des modifications et de la copie de travail.
Consultez le chapitre 8, « Création de listes de film et de listes de modification », à la
page 167 pour plus de détails sur les listes relatives au film qui sont disponibles.
Cinema Tools Exemples de flux de production
Cette rubrique présente divers scénarios du flux de production de la base de données
Cinema Tools. N’oubliez pas qu’il en existe de nombreuses variantes et qu’il n’est souvent
pas nécessaire de suivre ces étapes dans l’ordre exact. Il est aussi possible d’utiliser des
parties de plusieurs flux de production. Consultez la rubrique « Étapes fondamentales du
flux de production » à la page 37 pour des détails sur les différentes étapes.
La première rubrique décrit l’intégration entre Final Cut Pro et Cinema Tools. Elle est
suivie par des rubriques qui couvrent deux groupes de flux de production : ceux qui
utilisent des transferts scene-and-take et ceux qui utilisent des transferts camera-roll.
Celles-ci sont ensuite divisées à nouveau en fonction de la disponibilité d’une liste
télécinéma et du contrôle de périphérique de votre lecture vidéo lors du processus
de capture.
Jusqu’où peut-on aller dans Final Cut Pro ?
Grâce à niveau d’intégration élevé entre Cinema Tools et Final Cut Pro, vous avez plusieurs
possibilités pour chaque étape de flux de production. Par exemple, vous pouvez importer
la liste télécinéma dans Cinema Tools et exporter une liste de capture par lot pour
Final Cut Pro ou vous pouvez importer la liste télécinéma directement dans Final Cut Pro.
Vos choix seront déterminés par votre situation et vos préférences en matière de
méthodes de travail. Parmi les fonctions liées à Cinema Tools que vous pouvez exécuter
directement à partir de Final Cut Pro il y a les fonctions suivantes :
 Importation de fichiers de liste télécinéma48 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
 Conformation de vidéo à 25 ips en 24 ips
 Inversion du télécinéma (en utilisant les derniers réglages utilisés dans Cinema Tools)
 Ouverture d’un plan dans la fenêtre Clip de Cinema Tools
 Synchronisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools avec un groupe de plans
sélectionnés
Voici une illustration représentant le flux de production idéal mettant l’accent sur
l’utilisation de méthodes Final Cut Pro.
Dans cet exemple, vous pouvez utiliser Final Cut Pro, Cinema Tools effectuant des tâches
en arrière-plan, si nécessaire. Vous devez utiliser Cinema Tools manuellement si vous
souhaitez ajouter des informations dans la base de données en plus de ce que la liste
télécinéma a fourni ou si vous avez rencontré un problème unique avec le télécinéma
inversé et devez configurer ses réglages.
Étapes effectuées à partir de
Final Cut Pro
Implication de
Cinema Tools
Traitement des plans
(si nécessaire)
• Télécinéma inverse
• Conformation (25 @ 24)
Synchronisation des plans
capturés avec la base de
données Cinema Tools
Montage des plans
Importation d’une liste
dans le projet Final Cut Pro
pour créer les plans offline
à capturer
Capture des plans par lots
Exportation des listes
Cinema Tools
crée les listes
Cinema Tools
effectue le traitement
Une nouvelle base de données
Cinema Tools est créée
Les plans sont connectés à la
base de données Cinema Tools
Création d’un nouveau projet
Final Cut ProChapitre 2 Le flux de production de Cinema Tools 49
I
Si vous avez utilisé des transferts scene-and-take
Comme les transferts scene-and-take nécessitent un enregistrement de base de données
pour chaque prise (à cause des numéros de bord non continus), une première décision
importante va dépendre de l’existence ou non d’une liste télécinéma.
Flux de production pour un transfert scene-and-take avec une liste
télécinéma
Oui Non
Génération d’une liste
de capture par
lot avec Cinema Tools
Importation de la liste par lot
dans le navigateur Final
Cut Pro et capture par lot
Utilisation de la commande
Connect Clips de Cinema
Tools pour connecter les
plans à la base de données
Contrôle de
périphériques ?
Oui Non
Importation de la liste
télécinéma dans
la base de données
Création d’une base
de données vide
Connexion des plans
à la base de données
Numéro de
bord incrusté ?
Trimming des plans pour
les faire correspondre
aux enregistrements de
la base de données
Capturer chaque plan
manuellement à l’aide
de Final Cut Pro
Connexion des plans
à la base de données
Utilisation de la
fonction Identify
pour déterminer
et saisir le numéro
de bord et le timecode
d’une image connue
de chaque plan
Capturer chaque plan
manuellement à l’aide
de Final Cut Pro
Indique les étapes utilisant des processus automatisés.
Les boîtes bleues illustrent le processus préféré, qui comprend les étapes
les plus automatisées et produit la cut list la plus précise.50 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Flux de production pour un transfert scene-and-take sans liste
télécinéma
Si vous avez utilisé des transferts camera-roll
Le premier point à considérer lors de l’utilisation de transferts camera-roll est la méthode
de génération de la liste de film que vous comptez utiliser. Consultez l’annexe B, « Création
de listes de films avec Cinema Tools », à la page 245 pour obtenir des explications su les
deux méthodes disponibles. Il est fortement recommandé de synchroniser l’audio et la
vidéo avant de capturer les plans.
Oui Non
Génération d’une liste
de capture par
lot avec Cinema Tools
Importation de la liste par lot
dans le navigateur Final
Cut Pro et capture par lot
Utilisation de la commande
Connect Clips de Cinema
Tools pour connecter les
plans à la base de données
Contrôle de
périphériques ?
Oui Non
Ajout dans la base de
données Cinema Tools d’une
entrée pour chaque plan
Création d’une base
de données vide
Connexion des plans
à la base de données
Numéro de
bord incrusté ?
Trimming des plans pour
les faire correspondre
aux enregistrements de
la base de données
Capturer chaque plan
manuellement à l’aide
de Final Cut Pro
Connexion des plans
à la base de données
Utilisation de la
fonction Identify
pour déterminer
et saisir le numéro
de bord et le timecode
d’une image connue
de chaque plan
Capturer chaque plan
manuellement à l’aide
de Final Cut Pro
Indique les étapes utilisant des processus automatisés.
Les boîtes bleues illustrent le processus préféré, qui comprend les étapes
les plus automatisées et produit la cut list la plus précise.Chapitre 2 Le flux de production de Cinema Tools 51
I
Flux de production pour un transfert camera-roll (méthode basée
sur le plan)
Oui Non
Oui Non
Contrôle de
périphériques ?
Importation de la liste
dans la base de données
(devrait générer un
enregistrement par bobine)
Saisie d’au moins un
enregistrement par bobine
définissant la relation entre
numéro de bord et timecode
Facultatif : saisie d’unenregistrement supplémentaire par
plan (recommandé en cas de
contrôle de périphériques)
Facultatif : saisie d’un enregistrement supplémentaire par
plan (recommandé en cas de
contrôle de périphérique)
Génération d’une liste de
capture par lot avec
Cinema Tools
Importation de la liste par lot
dans le navigateur Final
Cut Pro et capture par lot
Utilisation de la commande
Connect Clips de Cinema
Tools pour la connexion
à la base de données
Liste
télécinéma ?
Oui Non
Création d’une base
de données vide
Indique les étapes utilisant des processus automatisés.
Les boîtes bleues illustrent le processus préféré, qui comprend les étapes
les plus automatisées et produit la cut list la plus précise.
Connexion des plans
à la base de données
Numéro de
bord incrusté ?
Trimming des plans pour
les faire correspondre
aux enregistrements de
la base de données
Capturer chaque plan
manuellement à l’aide
de Final Cut Pro
Connexion des plans
à la base de données
Utilisation de la
fonction Identify
pour déterminer
et saisir le numéro
de bord et le timecode
d’une image connue
de chaque plan
Capturer chaque plan
manuellement à l’aide
de Final Cut Pro52 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Flux de production pour un transfert camera-roll (méthode basée
sur le timecode)
Saisie d’au moins un enregistrement définissant la relation
entre numéro de bord
et timecode
Importation de la liste dans
la base de données (devrait
générer un enregistrement
par bobine)
Liste
télécinéma ?
Oui Non
Création d’une base
de données vide
Utilisation de Final Cut Pro
pour capturer l’intégralité
de la bobine sous forme
de plan unique ou capturer
les prises souhaitées sous
forme de plans séparés
(en prenant soin que
le timecode ne soit
pas modifié)3
53
3 L’interface utilisateur de
Cinema Tools
Cinema Tools dispose de tout un ensemble de fenêtres et de
zones de dialogue pour vous permettre d’accéder à ses puissantes fonctions.
Certaines fenêtres et zones de dialogue sont génériques, comme, par exemple, les zones
de dialogue de sélection de fichier, alors que d’autres sont spécialisées pour des fonctions
et des réglages uniques. La plupart de ces fenêtres et zones de dialogue s’ouvrent depuis
Cinema Tools ; trois zones de dialogues liées s’ouvrent aussi depuis Final Cut Pro.
Cinema Tools Fenêtres et zones de dialogues
Les fenêtres et zones de dialogue suivantes s’ouvrent à partir de Cinema Tools.
Fenêtre Welcome
La première fois que vous ouvrez Cinema Tools, une fenêtre de bienvenue apparaît.
Par la suite, Cinema Tools ouvre la base de données qui était ouverte la dernière fois
que vous avez fermé Cinema Tools. Si aucune base de données n’était ouverte lorsque
vous avez fermé Cinema Tools, la fenêtre Welcome apparaît à nouveau. 54 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Sélectionnez une option, puis cliquez sur Continue.
 Create a New Database : ouvre la zone de dialogue New Database pour vous permettre
de configurer une nouvelle base de données.
 Open Existing Database : ouvre une zone de dialogue de sélection de fichiers pour
vous permettre de sélectionner une base de données existante à ouvrir.
 View Documentation : ouvre le Manuel de l’utilisateur de Cinema Tools dans Aperçu.
Zone de dialogue New Database
La zone de dialogue New Database permet de définir des réglages élémentaires chaque
fois que vous créez une base de données Cinema Tools. Ces réglages s’appliquent à tous
les enregistrements que vous créez dans la base de données. La fenêtre Detail View permet de modifier individuellement ces réglages pour chaque enregistrement de la base
de données.
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue New Database :
m Choisissez Database > New Database (ou appuyez sur Commande + Maj + N).
Remarque : la base de données courante se ferme, si une base de données était ouverte.
Pour des informations sur les réglages par défaut de votre base de données, consultez
la section « Réglages de la zone de dialogue Nouvelle base de donées » à la page 77.
Fenêtre Detail View
La fenêtre Detail View permet d’afficher, de saisir et de modifier les informations d’un
enregistrement de base de données. Lorsque vous ouvrez une base de données existante, la fenêtre Detail View affiche le premier enregistrement. Les numéros spécifiques
de la fenêtre Detail View (numéros de bande, de bobine, de bord ainsi que la codification manuelle) décrivent tous des valeurs concernant la première image du plan source
associé à l’enregistrement de la base de données.
La fenêtre Detail View s’affiche en même temps que la fenêtre List View chaque fois
que vous ouvrez une base de données. Chapitre 3 L’interface utilisateur de Cinema Tools 55
I
Pour afficher la fenêtre Detail View, procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :
m Choisissez Window > Detail View (ou appuyez sur Commande + 2).
m Si nécessaire, faites glisser la fenêtre List View vers un autre endroit de l’écran.
m Si nécessaire, cliquez sur la fenêtre Detail View pour la faire passer au premier plan.
Le bouton qui se trouve dans le coin inférieur droit de la fenêtre est intitulé soit :
 Open Clip : avec un plan connecté (comme illustré ci-avant), le bouton est intitulé Open
Clip. Cliquez sur Open Clip pour ouvrir la fenêtre Clip qui affiche le plan connecté.
 Connect Clip : si aucun plan n’est connecté à l’enregistrement de base de données, le
bouton Open Clip est intitulé Connect Clip. Cliquez sur le bouton Connect Clip pour
ouvrir une zone de dialogue de sélection de fichier. Une fois le fichier de plan localisé
et sélectionné, la fenêtre Clip s’ouvre et l’affiche.
De plus, placer le pointeur au-dessus de la vignette affiche une bulle d’aide indiquant
l’emplacement du plan. Cela est particulièrement utile si le plan est absent, car cela
vous permet de voir où Cinema Tools s’attend à trouver le plan.
Pour en savoir plus sur l’utilisation de la fenêtre Detail View, consultez la section
« Saisie manuelle des informations de base de données » à la page 91.56 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Fenêtre List View
Tous les enregistrements de la base de données ouverte apparaissent sous forme de liste
dans la fenêtre List View. Elle peut afficher une liste de tous les enregistrements de la base
de données ou, si vous utilisez la fonction Find, uniquement les enregistrements trouvés.
Les fenêtres List View et Detail View s’affichent chaque fois que vous ouvrez une base de
données.
Pour afficher la fenêtre List View, procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :
m Choisissez Window > List View (ou appuyez sur Commande + 1).
m Faites glisser la fenêtre Detail View vers un autre endroit de l’écran.
m Cliquez sur la fenêtre List View pour la faire passer au premier plan.
Les boutons Show All et Find permettent d’afficher rapidement tous les enregistrements
de la base de données ouvertes (cliquez sur Show All) ou d’afficher rapidement les enregistrements trouvés à l’aide de la zone de dialogue Find (cliquez sur Find).
Le menu local qui se trouve dans le coin supérieur gauche de la fenêtre permet de
sélectionner le mode d’affichage en sélectionnant le type d’informations à afficher :
 Keycode : affiche des informations sur le film telles que les numéros de bord et de bobine.
 Video : affiche les informations de timecode et de bande vidéo.
 Sound : affiche les informations de timecode et de bande audio.
 Ink Numbers : affiche des informations sur la copie de travail, telles que la codification
manuelle et les rushes.Chapitre 3 L’interface utilisateur de Cinema Tools 57
I
Colonne Display Mode
Les colonnes suivantes apparaissent dans tous les modes d’affichages :
 Slate : une combinaison des champs Scene et Take, séparés par un tiret
 Clip : le nom du plan connecté à chaque enregistrement de la base de données
Les colonnes suivantes apparaissent en mode d’affichage Keycode :
 Lab Roll : valeur spécifiée dans le champ Lab Roll (dans la fenêtre Detail View)
 Cam Roll : valeur spécifiée dans le champ Cam Roll
 Keycode : valeur spécifiée dans le champ Key
Les colonnes suivantes apparaissent en mode d’affichage Video :
 Reel : valeur spécifiée dans le champ Video Reel
 Timecode : valeur spécifiée dans le champ Video Timecode
Les colonnes suivantes apparaissent en mode d’affichage Sound :
 Roll : valeur spécifiée dans le champ Sound Roll
 Timecode : valeur spécifiée dans le champ Sound Timecode
Les colonnes suivantes apparaissent en mode d’affichage Ink Numbers :
 Lab Roll : la valeur spécifiée dans le champ Lab Roll
 Daily roll : valeur spécifiée dans le champ Daily Roll
 Ink number : valeur spécifiée dans le champ Ink
Tri des colonnes
Par défaut, les colonnes sont triées par ordre croissant de la valeur Slate. Il est possible de
trier les données en fonction de n’importe quelle colonne affichée en cliquant sur le nom
de la colonne souhaitée. Le nom de la colonne change de couleur pour indiquer qu’elle
sert de critère de tri, puis une flèche indiquant l’ordre du tri s’affiche. Une flèche orientée
vers le haut indique un ordre croissant, alors qu’une flèche orientée vers le bas indique un
ordre décroissant. Cliquez sur le nom de la colonne pour changer le sens du tri.
Localisation des enregistrements comportant des éléments manquants
Le tri des colonnes peut aider à retrouver des enregistrements comportant des éléments
manquants. Par exemple, la sélection de la colonne Cam Roll rassemble tous les enregistrements n’ayant pas d’entrée dans ce champ et les place tout en bas (ou en haut) de la
liste, en fonction du sens de la flèche.
Recherche d’enregistrements spécifiques
Vous pouvez localiser un enregistrement à l’aide d’un numéro de bord ou d’un numéro
de timecode spécifique en triant les colonnes. Par exemple, en sélectionnant la colonne
Keycode, les enregistrements sont classés en fonction de leur numéros de bord. Vous
pouvez alors faire défiler la liste pour retrouver un enregistrement à l’aide d’une image
du film donnée.58 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Sélection d’enregistrements
Il y a plusieurs façons de sélectionner des enregistrements dans une base de données
Cinema Tools.
Remarque : vous pouvez ne sélectionner qu’un seul enregistrement à la fois.
Pour sélectionner un enregistrement de la base de données, procédez de l’une des
manières suivantes :
m Cliquez sur n’importe quel enregistrement affiché.
m Double-cliquez sur un enregistrement pour ouvrir son plan dans la fenêtre Clip.
m Utilisez la touche Flèche vers le haut du clavier pour sélectionner l’enregistrement qui
se trouve juste au-dessus de l’enregistrement sélectionné.
m Utilisez la touche Flèche vers le bas du clavier pour sélectionner l’enregistrement qui se
trouve juste au-dessous de l’enregistrement sélectionné.
m Utilisez la touche Page préc. du clavier pour monter d’une page d’enregistrements dans
la liste.
m Utilisez la touche Page suiv. du clavier pour descendre d’une page d’enregistrements
dans la liste.
Une fois un enregistrement sélectionné, il reste sélectionné lorsque vous changez le
mode d’affichage.
Modification des données affichées
Il n’est pas possible de modifier les réglages d’un enregistrement dans la fenêtre List View.
Pour faire des modifications, utilisez la fenêtre Detail View.
Pour afficher un enregistrement dans la fenêtre List View, dans la fenêtre Detail
View, procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :
m Cliquez sur l’enregistrement.
Remarque : un double clic sur un enregistrement l’ouvre également dans la fenêtre Clip.
m Sélectionnez l’enregistrement à l’aide des touches fléchées du clavier.
Zone de dialogue Find
Il est possible de sélectionner des enregistrements spécifiques pour les afficher dans la
fenêtre List View en créant un ensemble d’enregistrements trouvés. Il est possible par
exemple de créer une liste de tous les enregistrements liés à une scène donnée. Utilisez pour cela la zone de dialogue Find.Chapitre 3 L’interface utilisateur de Cinema Tools 59
I
Pour ouvrir la zone dialogue Find, procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :
m Choisissez Database > Find (ou appuyez sur Commande + F).
m Cliquez sur Find dans la fenêtre List View.
Consultez la section « Recherche et ouverture d’enregistrements de base de donnée » à
la page 80 pour des détails sur la création d’ensembles d’enregistrements trouvés.
Fenêtre Clip
La fenêtre Clip permet de lire le plan sélectionné, d’identifier le timecode et le numéro
de bord d’une image donnée, d’afficher des informations générales sur le plan et de le
traiter à l’aide des fonctions Reverse Telecine et Conform.
Pour ouvrir la fenêtre Clip, procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :
m Choisissez File > Open Clip (ou appuyez sur Commande + O), localisez un plan, puis
cliquez sur Choose.
m Cliquez sur Open Clip dans la fenêtre Detail View (si un plan est connecté à l’enregistrement actuel).
m Cliquez sur Connect Clip dans la fenêtre Detail View, puis sélectionnez un plan (si aucun
plan n’est connecté à l’enregistrement).
Remarque : il est possible d’ouvrir plusieurs fenêtres Clip en même temps. Elles s’ajoutent au menu Window et en disparaissent de façon dynamique au fur et à mesure que
vous les ouvrez et les fermez. 60 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Vous pouvez lire le plan en cliquant sur le bouton de lecture (triangle situé à gauche
de la Timeline) ou en appuyant sur la barre d’espace.
Remarque : pour lire le plan en utilisant la barre d’espace, veillez à ce qu’aucun champ
de texte de la sous-fenêtre Identify ne soit sélectionné. Vous pouvez appuyer sur la touche de tabulation autant de fois que cela est nécessaire ou cliquer sur le bouton Analysis pour désélectionner les champs de texte.
Si le plan contient de l’audio, vous pouvez contrôler le volume en cliquant sur l’icône de
haut-parleur qui se trouve près du bouton de lecture, puis en faisant glisser le curseur de
volume. Vous pouvez aussi faire glisser la tête de lecture pour faire défiler le plan. Vous
pouvez cliquer sur les boutons avec la flèche vers la gauche ou vers la droite qui se trouvent à l’extrême droite de la Chronologie ou appuyer sur les touches Flèche gauche ou
Flèche droite du clavier pour faire défiler le plan une image à la fois.
La plupart des boutons qui se trouvent dans le bas de la fenêtre ouvrent des fenêtres
ou des zones de dialogue supplémentaires et sont aussi disponibles dans le menu Clip :
 Set Poster Frame : affecte l’image actuellement affichée aux vignettes de la fenêtre
Detail View.
 Disconnect Clip : le bouton Disconnect Clip change selon que le plan actuel est connecté à la base de données ou pas. Avec un plan connecté (comme illustré ci-avant),
le bouton est intitulé Disconnect Clip. Cliquez sur Disconnect Clip pour déconnecter le
plan de la base de données.
 Enter in Database : si le plan actuel n’est pas connecté à la base de données, le bouton Disconnect Clip s’intitule Enter in Database. Cliquez sur Enter in Database pour
ouvrir une zone de dialogue dans laquelle vous pouvez connecter le plan à un enregistrement existant ou un nouvel enregistrement en tapant des valeurs de scène et
de prise.
 Reverse Telecine : ouvre la zone de dialogue Reverse Telecine (télécinéma inversé).
 Conform : ouvre la zone de dialogue Conform Clip.
 Boutons Previous Clip et Next Clip (flèches) : les flèches vers la gauche et vers la droite qui
se trouvent dans le coin inférieur droit de la fenêtre Clip permettent de passer facilement à l’enregistrement précédent ou suivant (tels qu’ils sont affichés et triés dans la
fenêtre List View) assigné à un plan.
Remarque : ces boutons ne sont actifs que lorsque le plan courant est relié à un
enregistrement de la base de données courante et cet enregistrement fait partir
des résultats de recherche de la fenêtre List View. L’un de ces boutons est estompé
lorsqu’il n’y a pas de plan précédent ou suivant.Chapitre 3 L’interface utilisateur de Cinema Tools 61
I
Les deux boutons qui se trouvent dans le coin supérieur droit déterminent quelles
informations sont affichées dans la partie droite de la fenêtre.
 Identify : affiche les informations du plan provenant de la base de données Cinema Tools
à laquelle il est connecté. Vous pouvez utiliser la sous-fenêtre Identify pour saisir des
informations de film et de timecode dans la base de données ou pour obtenir des
informations sur l’image affichée dans la fenêtre Clip. De plus, les réglages sont mis à
jour pour toujours afficher les informations relatives à l’image affichée lorsque vous faites défiler un plan. Consultez la section « Utilisation de la fonction Identify pour saisir
et calculer des informations de base de données » à la page 102 pour des informations sur l’utilisation de la fonction Identify.
 Analysis : affiche les informations de fichier d’un plan. Ces informations comprennent
à la fois des informations spécifiques aux fichiers (nom et taille, emplacement et date
de création) ainsi que des informations spécifiques au contenu (durée, vitesse de défilement, format d’image et type de compression utilisé).
Zone de dialogue Reverse Telecine
On utilise la zone de dialogue Reverse Telecine pour convertir de la vidéo pulldown 3:2
NTSC ou de la vidéo pulldown 2:3:3:2 en 24 ips.
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue Reverse Telecine, procédez de l’une des manières
suivantes :
m Sélectionnez Clip > Reverse Telecine (uniquement disponible si la fenêtre Clip est ouverte).62 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
m Cliquez sur Reverse Telecine dans la fenêtre Clip.
Consultez la section « Inversion du pulldown télécinéma » à la page 133 pour des détails
sur l’utilisation de cette fonction. Il existe aussi une forme simplifiée de la zone de dialogue Reverse Telecine qui s’affiche si le ou les plans ont été capturés depuis un caméscope numérique DV 24P, tel que le Panasonic AG-DVX100. Les informations sur la cadence
de pulldown de ces plans sont incorporées de telle façon que Cinema Tools puisse les lire,
si bien que si Cinema Tools détecte ces informations de cadence, la zone de dialogue du
télécinéma inversé automatique s’affiche. Consultez la section « Suppression de pulldown 2:3:3:2 ou 2:3:2:3 avec Cinema Tools » à la page 221 pour en savoir plus.
Zone de dialogue Conform Clip
La zone de dialogue Conform Clip sert à régler la durée de chaque image du plan actuel
sur une valeur spécifique. Par exemple, sélectionnez 24,0 pour régler la durée de chaque
image sur 1/24 de seconde. Cela permet de changer la vitesse de défilement d’un plan capturé ou de s’assurer de la précision et de la cohérence de la vitesse de défilement d’un plan.
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue Conform Clip, procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :
m Sélectionnez Clip > Conform (uniquement disponible si la fenêtre Clip est ouverte).
m Cliquez sur Conform dans la fenêtre Clip.
Remarque : vous devez disposer d’un accès en lecture et écriture au fichier du plan
pour pouvoir utiliser la fonction Conform.
Important : la fonction Conform modifie le fichier de données source.
Consultez la section « Utilisation de la fonction de conformation » à la page 131 pour
des détails sur l’utilisation de cette fonction.Chapitre 3 L’interface utilisateur de Cinema Tools 63
I
Zone de dialogue Change Reel
La zone de dialogue Change Reel vous permet d’introduire des modifications d’ensemble dans les paramètres de bande vidéo, bande-son, bobine de caméra ou de laboratoire
des enregistrements de la base de données. Par exemple, il se peut que le nombre de
zéros initiaux diffère (« 001 » par rapport à « 0001 ») entre les numéros de bande vidéo
de Final Cut Pro et ceux que vous avez saisi dans la base de données Cinema Tools. Cette
zone de dialogue vous permet de modifier toutes les occurrences d’un numéro de bande
ou de bobine.
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue Change Reel :
m Choisissez Database > Change Reel.
Zone de dialogue Database Properties
La zone de dialogue Database Properties affiche une grande variété d’informations sur
la base de données actuelle, y compris les paramètres par défaut et des statistiques sur
les enregistrements.
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue Database Properties :
m Choisissez Database > Database Properties (ou appuyez sur Commande + I). 64 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Les zones de dialogues disponibles dans Final Cut Pro et
Cinema Tools
Les zones de dialogue suivantes s’ouvrent tant à partir de Final Cut Pro que de
Cinema Tools.
Zone de dialogue Export Film Lists
On utilise la zone de dialogue Export Film Lists pour exporter des listes de film au format PDF. Il faut définir le type d’informations et les listes à exporter, la plus importante
étant la liste de conformation. Il faut définir aussi les éléments que vous souhaitez voir
figurer dans la liste de film exportée. On utilise généralement cette zone de dialogue
une fois que l’on a fini le montage des plans du film, mais vous pouvez l’utiliser à tout
moment pour vérifier l’état de la coupe.
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue Export Film Lists à partir de Final Cut Pro :
m Dans Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter > Listes de films Cinema Tools.
(Cette commande n’est disponible que lorsque la Chronologie de Final Cut Pro
est active ou lorsque vous avez sélectionné une séquence dans le Navigateur.)
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue Export Film Lists à partir de Cinema Tools :
1 Dans Cinema Tools, choisissez File > Export > Film Lists from EDL ou File > Export >
Film Lists from XML.
2 Dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît, localisez le fichier EDL ou XML sur lequel vous
souhaitez baser la liste de film exportée, puis cliquez sur Choose.
Consultez le chapitre 8, « Création de listes de film et de listes de modification », à la
page 167 pour des détails sur les réglages de cette zone de dialogue.
Consultez le chapitre 10, « Utilisation de fichiers EDL, XML et ALE externes », à la
page 199 pour des détails sur la génération de listes de film à partir de listes EDL externes.Chapitre 3 L’interface utilisateur de Cinema Tools 65
I
Zone de dialogue Export XML Film Lists
On utilise la zone de dialogue Export XML Film Lists pour exporter des listes de film au
format XML. Il faut définir le type d’informations et les listes à exporter, la plus importante étant la liste de conformation. Contrairement à l’exportation de listes de film au
format PDF, tous les éléments possibles figurent d’office dans la liste exportée, vous
n’avez pas besoin de sélectionner les éléments à exporter. On utilise généralement
cette zone de dialogue une fois que l’on a fini le montage des plans du film, mais vous
pouvez l’utiliser à tout moment pour vérifier l’état de la coupe.
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue Export XML Film Lists à partir de Final Cut Pro :
m In Final Cut Pro, choisissez File > Export > Cinema Tools XML Film Lists. (Cette commande n’est disponible que lorsque la Chronologie de Final Cut Pro est active ou lorsque vous avez sélectionné une séquence dans le Navigateur.)
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue Export XML Film Lists à partir de Cinema Tools :
1 Dans Cinema Tools, choisissez File > Export > XML Film Lists from EDL ou File >
Export > XML Film Lists from XML.
2 Dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît, localisez le fichier EDL ou XML sur lequel vous
souhaitez baser la liste de film exportée, puis cliquez sur Choose.
Consultez le chapitre 8, « Création de listes de film et de listes de modification », à la
page 167 pour des détails sur les réglages de cette zone de dialogue.
Consultez le chapitre 10, « Utilisation de fichiers EDL, XML et ALE externes », à la
page 199 pour des détails sur la génération de listes de film à partir de listes EDL externes.66 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Zone de dialogue Export Change List
On utilise la zone de dialogue Export Change List pour faire des sélections relatives
à l’exportation d’une liste décrivant les différences entre deux versions d’une même
séquence montée dans Final Cut Pro. Il est possible d’inclure une liste Pull de modifications, qui ne détaille que le film à traiter pour effectuer les modifications.
Important : pour pouvoir exporter une liste des modifications, vous devez avoir enregistré un fichier de programme Cinema Tools de la version précédente de la séquence. Consultez la section « Création de listes de modification » à la page 182 pour en savoir plus.
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue Export Change List à partir de Final Cut Pro :
1 In Final Cut Pro, choose File > Export > Cinema Tools Change List. (Cette commande
n’est disponible que lorsque la Chronologie de Final Cut Pro est active ou lorsque vous
avez sélectionné une séquence dans le Navigateur.)
2 Dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît, localisez le fichier de programme Cinema Tools
de la version précédente de cette séquence, puis cliquez sur Open.
La zone de dialogue Export Change List apparaît.
Lorsque vous exportez un fichier de liste des modifications à partir de Final Cut Pro,
vous pouvez aussi exporter une nouvelle liste de conformation (ainsi que toutes les
autres listes disponibles dans la zone de dialogue Export Film Lists) pour la séquence.
Ces autres listes fournissent des informations sur la séquence entière, plutôt que des
informations sur les modifications uniquement.
L’ouverture de la zone de dialogue Export Change List à partir de Cinema Tools nécessite la présence de deux fichiers de programme Cinema Tools : un pour l’ancienne version de la séquence et un autre pour la version actuelle de la séquence.Chapitre 3 L’interface utilisateur de Cinema Tools 67
I
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue Export Change List à partir de Cinema Tools :
1 In Cinema Tools, choose File > Export > Change List.
2 Dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît, localisez le fichier de programme Cinema Tools
de la version précédente de cette séquence, puis cliquez sur Open.
3 Dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît, localisez le fichier de programme Cinema Tools
de la version courante de cette séquence, puis cliquez sur Open.
La zone de dialogue Export Change List apparaît.
Consultez la section « Création de listes de modification » à la page 182 pour des détails
sur les réglages de la zone de dialogue Export Change List.
Zone de dialogue Export Audio EDL
L’audio est souvent remonté dans un studio de postproduction audio à l’aide de maté-
riel et de logiciels de haute qualité et d’outils de traitement haut de gamme. Selon la
façon dont vous montez, il se peut que la sortie EDL de Final Cut Pro ne contienne pas
le numéro de bande et le timecode des bandes audio de production originales. Ces
informations se trouvent souvent dans la liste télécinéma que vous importez dans
Cinema Tools ou peuvent être saisies manuellement.
On ouvre en général la zone de dialogue Export Audio EDL à partir de Final Cut Pro.
Vous pouvez aussi l’ouvrir à partir de Cinema Tools, si nécessaire, bien que des étapes
supplémentaires soient nécessaires, y compris la création d’un fichier de programme
dans la zone de dialogue Export Film Lists.
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue Export Audio EDL depuis Final Cut Pro :
m Dans Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez Fichier > Exporter > EDL audio Cinema Tools. (Cette
commande n’est disponible que lorsque la Chronologie de Final Cut Pro est active ou
lorsque vous avez sélectionné une séquence dans le Navigateur.)68 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Pour ouvrir la zone de dialogue Export Audio EDL depuis Cinema Tools :
1 Dans Cinema Tools, sélectionnez File > Export > Audio EDL from Program DB.
2 Dans la zone de dialogue qui s’affiche, sélectionnez le fichier de programme à utiliser,
puis cliquez sur Open.
La zone de dialogue Export Audio EDL s’affiche.
Consultez la section « Exportation d’une liste EDL audio » à la page 193 pour des détails
sur l’exportation de listes EDL audio.4
69
4 Création et utilisation d’une base
de données Cinema Tools
Le cœur de Cinema Tools est constitué par sa base de
données, qui offre de puissants outils d’organisation.
Une base de données Cinema Tools contient des enregistrements qui :
 décrivent vos plans sources ;
 effectuent le suivi du lien entre les bobines et le code de bordure du film (numéros
de bord, codification manuelle ou les deux) et les bandes et le timecode vidéo ;
 peuvent également effectuer le suivi d’autres éléments tels que les scènes, les plans,
les prises, les bandes son et le timecode audio.
Vous pouvez créer une base de données pour chaque projet de film. Grâce aux bases
de données, vous pouvez exporter des listes de film à partir desquelles le monteur de
film pourra savoir comment couper votre négatif original.
Hormis cet usage, les bases de données peuvent tout simplement servir d’outils
d’organisation. Ces derniers fonctionnent selon le code habituellement utilisé dans la
postproduction de films en gérant des éléments importants tels que la scène, le plan
et la prise ; la caméra et les bobines de laboratoire ; les numéros de code de bordure ;
les bandes vidéo et numéros de timecode ; les bandes son et les numéros de timecode
et les plans source.
Selon votre situation, il se peut que vous puissiez simplifier le processus de création de
la base de données en construisant celle-ci à partir d’une liste télécinéma ou en créant
un seul enregistrement de base de données par bobine.70 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Structure de base d’une base de données Cinema Tools
Une base de données contient des enregistrements. Chaque enregistrement décrit
un plan source. Un enregistrement peut être créé pour trois types de plans sources :
 Si vous avez utilisé un transfert scène-prise : vous disposez d’un enregistrement
de base de données par prise, chaque plan source correspondant à une prise.
 Si vous avez utilisé un transfert télécinéma caméra-bobine : vous disposez d’un
enregistrement de base de données par bobine dans lequel chaque plan source
correspond à une bobine (contenant habituellement plusieurs prises).
 Si vous avez subdivisé les plans source en groupes de prises : chaque enregistrement
de base de données est associé à un plan source contenant plusieurs prises.
Un plan source
comportant une prise
Take 1
Un enregistrement de
base de
donnée
Un plan source
comportant une bobine
Un enregistrement de
base de
données
Un plan source
comportant plusieurs prises
Take 1 Take 2 Take 3
Un enregis-
trement de
base de
donnéesChapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 71
I
Choix du mode de création de la base de données
Le mode de création de la base de données dépend de l’usage auquel vous la destinez et
de la disponibilité ou non d’une liste télécinéma ou d’un fichier ALE (Avid Log Exchange).
Si vous ne l’avez pas encore fait, jetez un coup d’œil à la section « Le flux de production
de Cinema Tools » à la page 37. Utilisez les exemples ci-dessous pour savoir quelles
étapes suivre pour créer votre base de données et capturer vos plans. Les étapes à
suivre et l’ordre à respecter dépendent de facteurs qui sont brièvement expliqués dans
les exemples de travail.
Réalisation de la capture avant la création de la base de données
Il est possible de capturer les plans sources avant de créer la base de données, puis de
construire la base de données Cinema Tools en important une liste de capture de lots
créée à l’aide Final Cut Pro. Cette méthode est plus compliquée que la création à partir
d’une liste télécinéma ou d’un fichier ALE car vous devez ensuite ajouter manuellement
les informations de numéros de bord et de bobine de film à chaque enregistrement.
Consultez à ce sujet la section « Importation des informations relatives à une base de
données dans une liste de capture de lots Final Cut Pro » à la page 89.
Si vous disposez d’une liste télécinéma ou d’un fichier ALE
Une liste télécinéma, que l’on nomme parfois aussi un fichier FLEX, est un fichier créé par
un technicien de télécinéma au cours d’un transfert télécinéma. Vous pouvez également
utiliser un fichier ALE (Avid Log Exchange) de la même manière qu’une liste télécinéma.
La liste télécinéma enregistre les numéros de bord du négatif caméra original et le
timecode du transfert vidéo, puis assure le suivi de leur lien.
Pour créer une base de données à partir d’une liste existante :
1 Créez une nouvelle base de données vide.
Consultez à ce sujet la section « Création et configuration d’une nouvelle base de
données » à la page 74.
Avantages de l’utilisation d’une liste télécinéma ou d’un fichier ALE
La création de votre base de données à partir d’une liste présente les avantages suivants :
 Gain de temps : vous pouvez créer des enregistrements à partir d’une liste télécinéma.
La création et la saisie des informations de chaque enregistrement ne se fait pas
manuellement. Vous pouvez ensuite créer une liste de capture par lot à partir de
la base de données, ce qui permet d’accélérer le processus de capture.
 Exactitude : si la liste ne contient aucune erreur, l’exactitude de la base de données
obtenue est assurée, ce qui vous épargne tout souci d’erreur de saisie éventuelle.
L’utilisation de la liste de capture par lot de la base de données permet aussi de
s’assurer que les fichiers de données source que vous capturez correspondent bien
aux informations qui figurent dans la base de données.72 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
2 Créez des enregistrements à partir de la liste.
Consultez à ce sujet la section « Importation d’informations à partir d’une liste
télécinéma ou d’un fichier ALE » à la page 85.
Si vous ne disposez pas d’une liste télécinéma ou
d’un fichier ALE
Bien qu’il soit plus rapide de créer une base de données à partir d’une liste, vous pouvez
également vous en passer.
Pour créer une base de données sans liste :
1 Créez une nouvelle base de données vide.
Consultez à ce sujet la section « Création et configuration d’une nouvelle base de
données » à la page 74.
2 Saisissez manuellement les informations des enregistrements.
Consultez à ce propos la section « Gain de temps potentiel lors du transfert camera-roll »
à la page 73 et « Saisie manuelle des informations de base de données » à la page 91.
Remarque : vous pourriez aussi capturer les plans sources avant de créer la base de
données et construire la base de données Cinema Tools en important une liste de
capture par lot créée dans Final Cut Pro. Consultez à ce sujet la section « Importation
des informations relatives à une base de données dans une liste de capture de lots
Final Cut Pro » à la page 89.
Le lien entre les numéros de code de bordure et le timecode est-il
continu ou discontinu ?
Le lien entre le numéro de code de bordure et la timecode dans une bobine est
continu si la bobine a été transférée vers la vidéo sans arrêt.
Le lien entre le numéro de code de bordure et le timecode est non continu si :
 vous avez utilisé le transfert télécinéma scene-and-take, c’est-à-dire que
l’enregistrement vidéo a été interrompu puis relancé entre chaque prise ;
 la bobine du film était composée de prises jointes les unes aux autres avant
d’être transférée sur bande vidéo.
Remarque : occasionnellement, le lien entre le numéro de code de bordure et le
timecode est brisé lorsque, au cours de la prise de vue, l’équipe de prise de vues a ouvert
une caméra pour en contrôler, nettoyer ou remplacer des pièces (on parle souvent de
contrôler le couloir). Dans les cas où la caméra est ouverte pour ces motifs, le film est en
général déchargé, puis rechargé. Il se peut qu’il soit rechargé sur un numéro de
perforation différent. Cela signifie que le technicien du télécinéma devra s’arrêter, recadrer
et faire une coupe, ce qui entraînera une rupture du lien entre les numéros de code de
bordure et le timecode dans la bobine. Cela doit apparaître dans la liste télécinéma.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 73
I
Gain de temps potentiel lors du transfert camera-roll
Si vous effectuez un transfert camera-roll et que vous devez créer manuellement votre
base de données, gagnez du temps en créant un enregistrement par bobine, en
fonction du caractère continu ou non du lien entre les numéros du code de bordure
et le timecode pour chaque transfert camera-roll.
Si le lien code de bordure/timecode est continu sur chaque bobine
Vous pouvez créer un enregistrement de base de données par bobine et Cinema Tools peut
utiliser la méthode des timecodes pour localiser les enregistrements de base de données
pour créer des listes de films. Dans ce cas, chaque bobine représente un plan source.
Tant que vous créez des enregistrements de base de données précis pour les bobines,
Cinema Tools sera capable de créer des listes de films précises. Toutefois, si vous connectez
aussi les plans sources aux enregistrements de base de données, vous augmentez les
chances de pouvoir réaliser un mise en correspondance correcte même en cas d’erreur de
timecode. Pour en savoir plus, consultez les sections « Flux de production pour un
transfert camera-roll (méthode basée sur le timecode) » à la page 52 et « Création de
listes de films avec Cinema Tools » à la page 245.
Il peut s’avérer utile, même si le lien code de bordure/timecode est continu, de prendre
le temps de créer un enregistrement par plan source afin de pouvoir travailler de façon
plus organisée. Par exemple :
 Une base de données peut servir à vérifier sur quelle bande son se trouve une prise
particulière ou quelle bobine de laboratoire contient le négatif dont vous avez besoin.
 Vous pouvez prévoir des enregistrements pour chaque plan afin de pouvoir ajouter
des commentaires sur différents plans.
 Chaque enregistrement de la base de données contient une affiche du plan
correspondant, ce qui permet de se repérer visuellement et d’accéder à un plan
pour le lire dans sa totalité à partir de la base de données.
Si le lien code de bordure/timecode est discontinu sur chaque bobine
Vous devez créer des enregistrements de base de données séparés pour chaque plan
et connecter chaque plan à l’enregistrement correspondant. Chaque enregistrement
doit contenir le numéro de bord ou la codification manuelle de la première image du
plan correspondant afin que Cinema Tools puisse suivre parfaitement le lien entre le
numéro du code de bordure et le timecode tout au long de votre séquence.74 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Autres usages de la base de données
Vous pouvez également utiliser votre base de données à d’autres fins que de faire
coïncider la vidéo et le film. Si c’est le cas, tenez compte de ce qui suit avant de créer
vos bases de données :
 Bases de données individuelles pour les rushes : si vous disposez de rushes quotidiens
à traiter et à synchroniser séparément, vous pouvez créer des bases de données
individuelles pour chaque session quotidienne. Pensez alors à utiliser la date des
rushes comme intitulé de chaque fichier de base de données. Vous pouvez ensuite
les fusionner dans une base de données principale en important toutes les bases
de données dans une seule base de données.
 Création d’une liste EDL audio (Edit Decision List) : si vous prévoyez de fournir une liste
audio EDL à la postproduction audio, vérifiez que les informations de timecode audio,
timecode vidéo et la bande son ont bien été saisies pour chaque enregistrement de
base de données. La création de la base de données par importation de la liste
télécinéma est la façon la plus facile et la plus efficace de s’assurer que toutes les
informations nécessaires figurent bien dans la base de données.
Création et configuration d’une nouvelle base de données
Lorsque vous créez une nouvelle base de données Cinema Tools, vous définissez des
réglages par défaut pour le projet dans la zone de dialogue New Database.
Remarque : lorsque vous importez les données qui figurent dans la liste télécinéma, le
format de film, la vitesse du timecode vidéo, la vitesse du timecode audio et la vitesse
télécinéma de la liste sont définis automatiquement dans Cinema Tools. Les informations
contenues dans la liste télécinéma ont la priorité sur les réglages par défaut. Cinema Tools
utilisera donc les réglages de la liste même sils diffèrent des réglages par défaut.
Vous pouvez créer une nouvelle base de données à l’aide de Cinema Tools ou de
Final Cut Pro.
Création d’une nouvelle base de données à l’aide de
Cinema Tools
Vous pouvez créer une nouvelle base de données et définir ses réglages par défaut
directement dans Cinema Tools.
Pour créer une nouvelle base de données :
1 Procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :
 Ouvrez Cinema Tools et cliquez sur Create a New Database dans la fenêtre Welcome,
si elle apparaît.
 Choisissez Database > New Database (ou appuyez sur Commande + Maj + N).
Remarque : le menu New Database ne sera pas disponible si une base de données
Cinema Tools est ouverte. Fermez toute base de données ouverte pour pouvoir
accéder à la commande de menu New Database.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 75
I
2 Dans la zone de dialogue New Database, définissez des réglages par défaut pour votre
base de données, puis cliquez sur OK. Consultez la section « Réglages de la zone de
dialogue Nouvelle base de donées » à la page 77 pour des informations sur les réglages.
3 Dans la zone de dialogue Create a new database, choisissez un emplacement pour
le fichier et donnez-lui un nom.
Une base de données vide est créée dans laquelle vous pouvez saisir des informations.
Pour savoir comment procéder, consultez la section « Saisie d’informations dans la base
de données » à la page 85.
Création d’une nouvelle base de données à l’aide de
Final Cut Pro
Vous pouvez utiliser deux méthodes pour créer une base de données Cinema Tools
à l’aide de Final Cut Pro :
 Synchronisation d’un ensemble de plans avec une nouvelle base de données
 Importation d’un fichier de liste télécinéma dans une nouvelle base de données
Synchronisation d’un ensemble de plans sélectionnés pour créer une
nouvelle base de données
Vous pouvez utiliser la commande Synchroniser avec Cinema Tools si vous voulez ajouter
un ou plusieurs plans des plans qui figurent dans le Navigateur de Final Cut Pro dans une
nouvelle base de données Cinema Tools. Cela peut s’avérer utile lorsque vous avez capturé
un ensemble de plans manuellement mais ne disposez pas de la liste télécinéma
correspondante ou lorsque vous souhaitez créer une base de données séparée pour
un ensemble de plans qui figure déjà dans une base de données.
Pour créer une nouvelle base de données à l’aide de la commande Synchroniser
avec Cinema Tools :
1 Dans le Navigateur de Final Cut Pro, sélectionnez les plans à ajouter dans la nouvelle
base de données Cinema Tools.
Il peut s’agir de plans qui figurent déjà dans une base de données ou de nouveaux
plans qui ne figurent encore dans aucune base de données. 76 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
2 Choisissez Outils > Synchroniser avec Cinema Tools.
Une zone de dialogue apparaît dans laquelle vous pouvez configurer le processus
de synchronisation.
Le champ Base de donées indique la base de données sélectionnée.
3 Sélectionnez la case Ajouter de nouveaux enregistrements.
Cette option doit être sélectionnée en cas de synchronisation avec une nouvelle base
de données.
4 Sélectionnez la case Connecter automatiquement si vous voulez que la base de
données connecte automatiquement les plans à tout nouvel enregistrement qui est
créé dans la base de données.
5 Cliquez sur Nouvelle base de données pour créer une nouvelle base de données
Cinema Tools.
6 Dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît, saisissez le nom et l’emplacement de la base de
données et configurez ses réglages par défaut. Consultez la section « Réglages de la
zone de dialogue Nouvelle base de donées » à la page 77 pour des informations sur ces
réglages.
7 Pour fermer la zone de dialogue, cliquez sur Save lorsque vous avez fini.
8 Cliquez sur OK.
Une nouvelle base de données Cinema Tools est créée et les plans sélectionnés y sont
ajoutés en même temps que toutes les informations relatives au film qu’ils peuvent
contenir. Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 77
I
Consultez la section « Synchronisation de plans Final Cut Pro avec Cinema Tools » à la
page 155 pour en savoir plus sur la commande Synchronize with Cinema Tools, y compris
sur la façon de l’utiliser pour synchroniser des plans avec une base de données existante.
Importation d’un fichier de liste télécinéma pour créer une nouvelle
base de données
Lorsque vous importez un fichier de liste télécinéma dans Final Cut Pro, vous pouvez
choisir de l’importer dans une base de données Cinema Tools existante ou dans une
nouvelle. Consultez la section « Importation de listes télécinéma à l’aide de
Final Cut Pro » à la page 87 pour en savoir plus.
Réglages de la zone de dialogue Nouvelle base de donées
Au moment de choisir vos réglages, rappelez-vous les points suivants :
 Le fait de sélectionner des réglages par défaut ne vous oblige pas à les utiliser dans
les enregistrements de la base de données. Les réglages par défaut sont appliqués
automatiquement aux nouveaux enregistrements de base de données, mais vous
pouvez changer le format de film, la vitesse du timecode vidéo et la vitesse du
timecode audio pour chaque plan séparément dans la fenêtre Detail View.
 Lorsque vous importez les données qui figurent dans la liste télécinéma, le format de film,
la vitesse du timecode vidéo, la vitesse du timecode audio et la vitesse télécinéma de la
liste sont définis automatiquement dans Cinema Tools. Les informations contenues dans
la liste télécinéma ont la priorité sur les réglages par défaut. Cinema Tools utilisera donc
les réglages de la liste même s’ils diffèrent des réglages par défaut.
Pour modifier des réglages par défaut, consultez la section « Modification des réglages
de base de données par défaut » à la page 106.
? Astuce : si vous combinez des bases de données existantes ou si vous voulez contrôler des
attributs tels que les réglages par défaut, les noms de fichier et les dates de modification
d’une base de données existante, choisissez Database > Database Properties. La zone de
dialogue Database Properties affiche le chemin d’accès complet et la taille du fichier de
la base de données, ainsi que ses dates de création et de modification. Vous pouvez voir
les réglages de projet par défaut pour le format de film, la vitesse du timecode vidéo et
la vitesse du timecode audio.78 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Format de film
Cinema Tools prend en charge les formats 35 mm à 4 perforations, 35 mm à 3 perforations
et 16 mm-20. (Consultez l’annexe A, « Principes généraux », à la page 231 pour des
informations sur ces formats.)
Le même film est généralement utilisé pour tout le projet afin de conserver le format.
Vous pouvez cependant choisir un format différent pour chaque prise dans la fenêtre
Detail View. Si par exemple certains de vos plans sont inversés alors que la majorité
sont normaux, vous pouvez spécifier le format de film inversé pour ces plans dans la
fenêtre Detail View.
Pour choisir un format de film par défaut :
m Sélectionnez le format de film utilisé dans le projet dans le menu local Film Standard :
 35 mm 4p : film 35 mm, 4 perforations par image
 16 mm 20 : film 16 mm, 20 images par numéro de bord
 35 mm 3p : film 35 mm, 3 perforations par image
Vitesse du timecode (Video TC Rate)
Cinema Tools gère quatre vitesses de timecode vidéo. Consultez l’annexe A, « Principes
généraux », à la page 231 pour des informations sur les vitesses de timecode. Le laboratoire
qui transfère votre film sur bande vidéo peut vous dire quel type de timecode est
enregistré sur la bande vidéo.
Pour choisir une vitesse de timecode vidéo par défaut :
m Sélectionnez le type de timecode enregistré sur les bandes vidéo pour votre projet
dans le menu local Video TC Rate :
 30 NDF : Timecode Non-drop frame NTSC à 29,97 ips
 30 DF : Timecode NTSC drop frame à 29.97 ips
 25 FPS : Timecode PAL à 25 ips
 24 FPS : Timecode vidéo à 24 ips ou 23,98 ipsChapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 79
I
Vitesse du timecode audio
Le timecode est généralement enregistré en même temps que les pistes sonores sur les
bandes son de production. Ce timecode peut être utilisé pour localiser l’audio d’un plan
particulier. Par ailleurs, de nombreux systèmes l’utilisent pour synchroniser l’audio et la
vidéo. La saisie des bandes audio et du timecode audio dans la base de données vise
principalement à faire correspondre l’audio à une liste EDL audio, opération expliquée
à la section « Exportation d’une liste EDL audio » à la page 193.
Pour choisir une vitesse de timecode audio par défaut :
m Sélectionnez le type de timecode enregistré sur les bandes son de production dans
le menu local Sound TC Rate :
 30 NDF : Timecode Non-drop frame NTSC à 29,97 ips
 30 DF : Timecode NTSC drop frame à 29.97 ips
 25 FPS : Timecode PAL à 25 ips
 24 FPS : Timecode vidéo à 24 ips ou 23,98 ips
Vitesse télécinéma
La vitesse télécinéma (appelée TK Speed dans la fenêtre Detail View, dans la sous-fenêtre
Identify de la fenêtre Clip et, facultativement, dans la fenêtre Navigateur de Final Cut Pro)
fait référence à la fréquence d’images du film dans le matériel de télécinéma durant le
transfert sur bande vidéo.
Si vous travaillez avec la vidéo NTSC, vous choisirez généralement une vitesse télécinéma
de 24 ips, alors que la vitesse télécinéma réelle est d’approximativement 23,98 ips. Le
menu local Telecine Speed vous permet aussi de sélectionner une vitesse de 30 ips car
il est possible de transférer un film vers une vidéo NTSC lorsque le film tourne à une
vitesse de 30 ips (en réalité 29,97 ips).
Si vous travaillez sur vidéo PAL, consultez la section « Infos générales sur la vitesse de
défilement des images » à la page 23 pour savoir quelle vitesse choisir.
Si votre film a été transféré sur bande vidéo à une vitesse télécinéma de 24 ips, sélectionnez
24 ips comme vitesse télécinéma. Si votre film a été transféré sur bande vidéo à une vitesse
téléciméma de 25 ips, choisissez 25 ips.80 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Pour choisir une vitesse télécinéma par défaut :
m Dans le menu local Telecine Speed, sélectionnez la vitesse à laquelle le film a été transféré :
 24 : vitesse télécinéma de 24 ips ou 23,98 ips
 25 : vitesse télécinéma de 25 ips
 30 : vitesse télécinéma de 29.97 ips
Utilisation de la base de données
Pour utiliser la base de données, vous devez savoir réaliser les tâches suivantes :
 Ouvrir une base de données existante
 Recherche et ouverture d’enregistrements de base de donnée
 Sauvegarde, copie, renommage et verrouillage de bases de données
 Accéder aux informations relatives à un plan.
Ouvrir une base de données existante
La première étape, lorsque vous utilisez une base de données, consiste à l’ouvrir.
Pour ouvrir une base de données existante :
m Choisissez Database > Open Database (ou appuyez sur Commande + Maj + O), puis
sélectionnez la base de données souhaitée dans la zone de dialogue.
Tous les enregistrements de la base de données ouverte sont répertoriés dans la
fenêtre List View.
Remarque : si une base de données était ouverte, elle se ferme.
Recherche et ouverture d’enregistrements de base de donnée
Les enregistrements sont généralement ouverts à partir de la fenêtre List View. Le groupe
d’enregistrements qui apparaît dans cette fenêtre est souvent appelé (ensemble trouvé)
found set, car vous avez utilisé la commande Find pour spécifier ces enregistrements.
Pour afficher un enregistrement de la base de données dans la fenêtre Detail View :
m Sélectionnez l’enregistrement dans la fenêtre List View. Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 81
I
Pour afficher des enregistrements particuliers dans la fenêtre List View :
m Utilisez la zone de dialogue Find. Consultez la section sur l’utilisation de la commande
Find (ci-dessous) pour des détails.
Pour naviguer dans les enregistrements de la fenêtre Detail View :
m Cliquez sur les boutons Previous Record et Next Record.
Pour rechercher un numéro de bord :
m Dans la fenêtre List View, choisissez Keycode dans le menu local, puis cliquez sur
le titre de la colonne Keycode pour effectuer le tri par numéro de bord.
Consultez la section « Fenêtre List View » à la page 56 pour en savoir plus.
Pour utiliser la commande Find afin de rechercher des enregistrements dans
la base de données ouverte :
1 Ouvrez la zone de dialogue Find en procédant de l’une des manières suivantes :
 Choisissez Database > Find (ou appuyez sur Commande + F).
 Cliquez sur le bouton Find dans la fenêtre List View.
Boutons Previous Record
et Next Record82 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
2 Choisissez l’un des éléments suivants dans le menu local Results :
 Replace Current Found Records : les enregistrements trouvés remplacent ceux qui sont
affichés dans la fenêtre List View.
 Add to Current Found Records : les enregistrements trouvés sont ajoutés à ceux de
la fenêtre List View.
? Astuce : l’option Add to Current Found Records est utile lorsque vous souhaitez rechercher
des enregistrements de plus d’une scène, mais pas pour toutes les scènes. Par exemple,
pour n’afficher que les enregistrements des scènes 5 et 6, choisissez Replace Current
Found Records, saisissez « 5 » dans le champ Scene, puis cliquez sur Find Records. Ensuite,
choisissez Add to Current Found Records, saisissez « 6 » dans le champ Scene, et cliquez
sur Find Records. Seuls les enregistrements des scènes 5 et 6 apparaissent dans la fenêtre
List View.
3 Procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :
 Pour rechercher tous les enregistrements qui figurent dans la base de données ouverte :
laissez les champs Scene et Take vides et cliquez sur Show All Records.
 Pour rechercher tous les enregistrements relatifs à une scène ou un plan particulier :
saisissez l’identifiant de la scène ou du plan dans le champ Scene, laissez le champ Take
vide, puis cliquez sur le bouton Find Records. (Le champ Take est ignoré, à moins que
vous ne sélectionniez la case Show only exact matches.)
Par exemple, si vous saisissez « 1 » dans le champ Scene puis cliquez sur Find Records,
Cinema Tools recherche tous les enregistrements associés à la scène 1, y compris les
plans 1, 1A, 1B, 1C, etc. Si vous saisissez « 1A » dans le champ Scene, seuls les
enregistrements du plan 1A sont recherchés.
 Pour rechercher l’enregistrement relatif à une scène ou prise particulière : saisissez les
identifiants de la scène et de la prise dans les champs Scene et Take, sélectionnez
Show only exact matches, puis cliquez sur Find Records.
Les enregistrements trouvés apparaissent dans la fenêtre List View.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 83
I
Détails relatifs à la scène, le plan et la prise
La façon dont Cinema Tools interprète les numéros de scène peut donner des résultats
inattendus lors de l’utilisation de la zone de dialogue Find.
Cinema Tools traite les numéro de scène comme ayant jusqu’à quatre parties :
 Préfixe : partie facultative composée d’une ou plusieurs lettres qui figure devant le
numéro de scène, généralement utilisée pour identifier une scène nouvelle et unique
ajoutée au script. Par exemple, le « A » dans la scène A54C-3. Les préfixes n’identifient
toutefois pas toujours des scènes uniques, les lettres utilisées dans le préfixe contrôlent
la façon dont ils affectent l’utilisation de la zone de dialogue Find (décrit plus loin).
 Numéro de scène : le premier groupe de chiffres. Selon le préfixe, il peut s’agir du
numéro de scène entier, bien qu’avec certains préfixes, le préfixe fasse partie intégrante
du numéro de scène (comme décrit plus loin).
 Suffixe : groupe d’une ou plusieurs lettres qui suit le numéro de scène et qui identifie
le plan de la scène. Par exemple, le « C » dans la scène A54C-3.
 Numéro de prise : numéro qui suit le suffixe (indicateur de prise) qui identifie la
prise. Il est généralement précédé par un trait d’union (que vous n’avez pas besoin
de saisir dans la zone de dialogue Find). Par exemple, le « 3 » dans la scène A54C-3.
La difficulté consiste à déterminer si le préfixe indique une scène unique ou pas. Les
préfixes qui utilisent les lettres de A à D sont traités comme faisant référence à des scènes
uniques. Les préfixes qui utilisent les lettres de E à Z sont traités comme étant des lettres
de modification du numéro de scène, mais pas comme indiquant une scène unique. Par
exemple, si vous utilisez la zone de dialogue Find pour rechercher la scène 54, vous
trouverez les enregistrements « 54, » « G54 » et « K54 » (qui sont tous considérés comme
étant la scène 54), mais pas « A54, » « B54, » « C54 » ni « D54 » (qui sont considérés
comme étant des scènes différentes).
Les suffixes identifient les plans qui composent une scène. Si vous recherchez la scène 54,
vous trouverez tous les plans de la scène 54, comme, par exemple, les enregistrements
« 54A » et « 54F », mais pas l’enregistrement « B54A » car le préfixe en fait une scène
différente. Les numéros de prise sont liés à des plans spécifiques qui, à leur tour, sont liés
à des scènes spécifiques. Si vous recherchez la scène « 54 », vous trouverez tous les plans
et toutes les prises de cette scène.
Si vous saisissez « 54A » dans le champ Scene de la zone de dialogue, vous ne trouverez
que les enregistrements relatifs au plan A de la scène 54 ; vous ne trouverez pas les
enregistrements relatifs à la scène 54B. Si vous saisissez un nombre dans le champ Take,
vous ne trouverez que les plans qui utilisent cette prise. Par exemple, saisir « 54A » dans
le champ Scene et « 3 » dans le champ Take ne vous permettra de trouver que
l’enregistrement « 54A-3 ». Saisir « 54 » dans le champ Scene (sans spécifier de plan) et
« 3 » dans le champ Take, vous permettra de trouver tous les enregistrements de la scène
54 qui ont une prise 3, comme, par exemple, les enregistrements « 54A-3 » et « 54D-3 ».84 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Sauvegarde, copie, renommage et verrouillage de bases
de données
Comme vous le faites avec toutes vos données importantes, veillez à réaliser des copies
de sauvegarde de vos fichiers de bases de données Cinema Tools et de verrouiller ces
fichiers afin de ne pas courir le risque de les modifier ou de les supprimer. Utilisez à cette
fin n’importe quelle méthode standard de copie et de verrouillage de fichiers. Vous
pouvez sauvegarder vos fichiers sur le disque dur de votre ordinateur ou sur une unité
de stockage amovible. Avant de verrouiller un fichier de base de données, assurez-vous
que la base des données est fermée.
Vous pouvez également employer la méthode standard de votre choix pour modifier le
nom d’un fichier de base de données. La modification du nom de fichier d’une base de
données (contrairement à la modification du nom de fichier d’un plan source) n’affecte
pas les fonctions de la base de données ni son contenu.
Important : il est déconseillé de modifier le nom de fichier d’un plan source (dans le
Finder) car cela entraîne la rupture du lien entre le plan source et la base de données.
Vous pouvez toutefois reconnecter des plans à la base de données à l’aide de la
commande Reconnect.
Accès à des informations sur un plan source
La sous-fenêtre Analysis de la fenêtre Clip vous permet d’accéder à des informations
spécifiques sur un plan source.
La sous-fenêtre Analysis affiche le chemin complet (l’emplacement) et le nom du fichier
ainsi que la taille et les dates de création et de modification de ce dernier. La durée du
plan y est également indiquée.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 85
I
Apparaissent aussi des informations relatives aux différentes piste d’un plan :
 Pour les pistes vidéo : vous voyez les dimensions de l’image et la fréquence d’images,
le compresseur utilisé et la qualité de la compression, le débit de données et s’il s’agit
d’un fichier autonome ou d’un fichier de données de référence. Consultez la section
« La différence entre les fichiers de données autonomes et les fichiers de données de
référence » à la page 149 pour en savoir plus.
 Pour les pistes audio : vous voyez la fréquence d’échantillonnage et le nombre de canaux
pour jusqu’à deux pistes.
Saisie d’informations dans la base de données
Comme l’explique la section « Choix du mode de création de la base de données » à la
page 71, il existe deux méthodes principales pour créer une base de données :
 Vous pouvez générer la base de données en important une liste télécinéma, un fichier
ALE ou une liste de capture par lot Final Cut Pro.
 Vous pouvez saisir manuellement les informations.
Même si vous créez votre base de données à partir d’une liste télécinéma, il est probable
que vous deviez ultérieurement apporter des modifications ou faire des ajouts aux
enregistrements. Procédez à ces changements via les fenêtres Detail View ou Clip. (Dans
la fenêtre Clip, vous ne pouvez modifier que des enregistrements de base de données
existants.)
Important : pour pouvoir saisir des informations dans une base de données, vous devez
disposer d’une base de données existante. Pour créer une base de données vide, consultez
la section « Création et configuration d’une nouvelle base de données » à la page 74.
Importation des informations de la base de données
Vous pouvez créer une base de données en important les données d’une liste télécinéma,
d’un fichier ALE, d’une liste de capture par lot Final Cut Pro ou d’une base de données
Cinema Tools existante.
Importation d’informations à partir d’une liste télécinéma ou
d’un fichier ALE
Vous pouvez saisir des informations dans la base de données en important la liste
télécinéma provenant du transfert film vers vidéo.
Cinema Tools gère les listes télécinéma suivantes :
 Fichiers de listes télécinéma ATN de Aaton
 Fichiers d’historique FLX (Film Log EDL Exchange, généralement abrégé en FLEx)
provenant du logiciel TLC (Time Logic Controller software)86 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
 Fichiers d’historique FTL (Film Transfer List) provenant d’Evertz
 Fichiers ALE (Avid Log Exchange) (différent des listes télécinéma du point de vue
technique, mais contiennent les mêmes informations)
Vous pouvez importer des fichiers de liste télécinéma à l’aide de soit Cinema Tools
soit Final Cut Pro.
Attribution de lettres de caméra
Pour importer le fichier de liste télécinéma à l’aide de Cinema Tools ou de Final Cut Pro,
vous pouvez attribuer une lettre de caméra de A à E à tous les enregistrements importés.
La lettre de caméra est ajoutée à l’entrée de prise de chaque enregistrement.
Cela est utile en cas d’utilisation de plusieurs caméras par prise, les lettres permettant
de distinguer aisément les plans des différentes caméras. De plus, si vous configurez
un multiplan dans Final Cut Pro, les lettres de caméra seront utilisées pour créer les
différents angles.
Importation de listes télécinéma à l’aide de Cinema Tools
Pour importer une liste télécinéma dans Cinema Tools, vous devez d’abord disposer
d’une base de données ouverte. La base de données peut être une base de données
existante à laquelle vous ajoutez de nouveaux enregistrements ou une nouvelle sans
enregistrement.
Pour importer une liste télécinéma à l’aide de Cinema Tools :
1 Procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :
 Ouvrez une base de données Cinema Tools existante. Consultez la section « Ouvrir
une base de données existante » à la page 80 pour en savoir plus.
 Créez une nouvelle base de données Cinema Tools. Consultez la section « Création
et configuration d’une nouvelle base de données » à la page 74 pour en savoir plus.
2 Importez le fichier de liste télécinéma en choisissant File > Import > Telecine Log (ou
en appuyant sur Commande + L).
3 Dans la zone de dialogue qui s’ouvre, sélectionnez la liste télécinéma ou le fichier ALE.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 87
I
4 Pour affecter une lettre de caméra aux enregistrements importés, sélectionnez la case
Append a camera letter et choisissez une lettre de caméra dans le menu local.
5 Cliquez sur Open.
Les données de la liste sont importées dans la base de données ouverte et chaque
nouvel enregistrement est affiché dans la fenêtre List View.
Une fois que Cinema Tools a fini de créer les enregistrements pour une liste télécinéma,
il affiche le nombre d’événements que la liste contient et le nombre de ces événements
qui ont été importés dans la base de données. Certaines entrées de la liste télécinéma
font référence à des coupes pour lesquelles aucune donnée de film n’a été transférée.
Aucun enregistrement n’est créé pour ces entrées.
Une fois que les enregistrements ont été importés, vous pouvez exporter une liste de
capture par lot de Cinema Tools que vous pouvez ensuite importer dans Final Cut Pro
pour automatiser le processus de capture des plans. Consultez la section « Génération
d’une liste de capture par lot dans Cinema Tools » à la page 115 pour en savoir plus.
Importation de listes télécinéma à l’aide de Final Cut Pro
Lorsque vous importez une liste télécinéma à l’aide de Final Cut Pro, vous spécifiez si vous
voulez l’importer dans une base de données Cinema Tools existante ou créer une nouvelle
base de données.
Lors de l’ajout d’enregistrements à la base de données Cinema Tools sélectionnée, chaque
enregistrement crée un plan offline dans le Navigateur de Final Cut Pro pour que les plans
puissent être capturés par lot. Les informations relatives au film qui figurent dans la liste
télécinéma sont aussi ajoutées à chacun de ces plans.
Pour importer une liste télécinéma à l’aide de Final Cut Pro :
1 Créez un nouveau projet ou ouvrez un projet existant.
Ce projet contient les plans offline créés lors de l’importation du fichier de liste télécinéma.
2 Sélectionnez le projet dans le Navigateur.
3 Choisissez Fichier > Importer > Liste télécinéma Cinema Tools.88 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
La zone de dialogue d’importation de liste télécinéma Cinema Tools est alors affichée.
4 Utilisez la partie supérieure de la zone de dialogue pour sélectionner le fichier de liste
télécinéma à importer.
5 Pour affecter une lettre de caméra aux enregistrements importés, sélectionnez la case
Ajouter une lettre à la caméra et choisissez une lettre de caméra dans le menu local.
6 Procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :
 Cliquez sur Nouvelle base de donées pour créer une nouvelle base de données
Cinema Tools dans laquelle importer le fichier de liste télécinéma. Cela a pour effet
d’ouvrir une nouvelle zone de dialogue dans laquelle vous pouvez saisir le nom et
l’emplacement de la base de données ainsi que configurer ses réglages par défaut.
Consultez la section « Réglages de la zone de dialogue Nouvelle base de donées » à la
page 77 pour des informations sur ces réglages. Cliquez sur Enregistrer lorsque vous
avez fini.
 Cliquez sur Choisir une base de donées pour ouvrir une zone de dialogue dans
laquelle vous pouvez sélectionner la base de données existante dans laquelle vous
voulez importer les enregistrements du fichier de liste télécinéma. Cliquez sur Ouvrir
lorsque vous avez fini.
Sélectionnez le fichier
de liste télécinéma à
importer.
Choisissez de créer une
nouvelle base de données
ou d’importer le fichier
dans une base de données.
Choisissez la lettre de
caméra à ajouter aux
prises importées (si
nécessaire).
Indique le nom de la
base de données
sélectionnée.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 89
I
La base de données sélectionnée, nouvelle ou préexistante, apparaît dans le champ
Base de donées de la zone de dialogue d’importation de liste télécinéma Cinema Tools.
7 Cliquez sur Ouvrir pour importer le fichier de liste télécinéma sélectionné dans la base
de données Cinema Tools sélectionnée.
Une fois que les enregistrements ont été importés et que les plans offline ont été ajoutés
au Navigateur, vous pouvez utiliser Final Cut Pro pour capturer les plans par lot. Consultez
la documentation de Final Cut Pro pour des informations sur la capture de plans par lot.
Importation des informations relatives à une base de données dans
une liste de capture de lots Final Cut Pro
Il se peut que vous souhaitiez créer des enregistrements de base de données en important
une liste de capture par lot Final Cut Pro si :
 vous ne disposez pas de liste télécinéma ni de fichier ALE ;
 vous avez déjà capturé par lots les plans dont vous voulez disposer dans Final Cut Pro
et vous voulez que des enregistrements soient créés dans la base de données pour ces
plans sources et non pour les prises énumérées dans votre liste télécinéma.
Remarque : la création d’enregistrements dans la base de données à partir d’une liste de
capture par lot Final Cut Pro n’est pas l’idéal, car vous perdez l’avantage d’utiliser une liste
télécinéma ou un fichier ALE pour construire votre base de données. Ainsi, une liste de
capture par lot Final Cut Pro ne contient pas d’indication de numéro de bord ou de
bobine de caméra ou de laboratoire, des informations qui seraient importées d’une
liste télécinéma. Consultez également la section « Avantages de l’utilisation d’une liste
télécinéma ou d’un fichier ALE » à la page 71.
? Astuce : dans la plupart des cas, au lieu d’exporter une liste de capture par lot Final Cut Pro,
puis de l’importer dans une base de données Cinema Tools, utilisez la fonction Final Cut Pro
intitulée « Synchroniser avec Cinema Tools ». Consultez la section « Synchronisation de
plans Final Cut Pro avec Cinema Tools » à la page 155 pour en savoir plus.
Pour importer les informations relatives à une base de données dans une liste de
capture par lot Final Cut Pro :
1 Assurez-vous qu’une base de données Cinema Tools est ouverte.
2 Dans Cinema Tools, sélectionnez File > Import > Final Cut Pro Batch List.
3 Dans la boîte de dialogue qui apparaît, sélectionnez la liste de capture par lot que vous
avez exportée depuis Final Cut Pro.
4 Cliquez sur Open pour importer la liste de capture par lot.
Les données de la liste sont utilisées pour créer les enregistrements de la base de données. 90 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Remarque : les plans sources ne sont pas encore connectés à des enregistrements de
la base de données. Vous devez utiliser la commande Connect Clips pour les relier. Pour
en savoir plus, consultez la section « Utilisation de la commande Connect Clips pour
connecter des plans sources » à la page 123.
5 Dans chaque enregistrement, saisissez le numéro du code de bordure et l’identifiant de
la bobine de film (ces éléments sont nécessaires pour créer une cut list ou une liste de
modification).
Remarque : étant donné qu’une liste de capture par lot Final Cut Pro contient tout ce
qui apparaît dans le Navigateur Final Cut Pro, il se peut qu’elle contienne des plans ou
des séquences dont vous ne voulez pas. Procédez par conséquent à la suppression de
tous les enregistrements inutiles. Consultez à ce sujet la section « Suppression d’un
enregistrement de la base de données » à la page 105.
Importation d’une base de données Cinema Tools existante
Il est possible d’importer une base de données Cinema Tools dans une autre base de
données Cinema Tools. Cette opération peut s’avérer nécessaire dans les cas suivants :
 Il se peut que vous souhaitiez créer des bases de données séparées à des fins
d’organisation et d’archivage, puis les rassembler au sein d’une base de données
maîtresse. Des bases de données séparées peuvent être utiles pour vos rushes par
exemple. Si vous souhaitez gérer vos rushes en créant une base de données portant
une date comme nom pour chacun des jours de tournage, vous pouvez importer la liste
télécinéma pour la session quotidienne en question, exporter une liste de capture par
lot, capturer les plans, puis utiliser la commande Connect Clips de Cinema Tools pour
connecter tous les plans à ce fichier de base de données portant une date comme nom.
Ensuite, vous pouvez importer ce fichier de base de données dans une base de données
maîtresse contenant toutes les bases de données quotidiennes.
 Si vous devez corriger les réglages de projet par défaut d’une base de données.
Pour ce faire, créez une nouvelle base de données vide avec les réglages par défaut
corrects, puis import votre fichier de base de données original dans la nouvelle.
Pour importer un fichier de base de données dans un autre fichier :
1 Ouvrez la base de données dans laquelle vous avez importé un autre fichier de base
de données en choisissant Database > Open Database (ou en appuyant sur
Commande + Maj + O), puis en sélectionnant la base de données dans la zone de dialogue.
2 Choisissez File > Import > Database.
3 Dans la zone de dialogue qui s’affiche, sélectionnez la base de données à importer.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 91
I
Saisie manuelle des informations de base de données
Vous pouvez utiliser la fenêtre Detail View pour modifier manuellement les informations des
enregistrements. Vous devez d’abord créer des enregistrements dans la base de données.
Remarque : si un enregistrement de base de données a déjà été créé pour un plan, vous
pouvez aussi utiliser la fenêtre Identify de la fenêtre Clip pour saisir des informations.
Consultez la section « Utilisation de la fonction Identify pour saisir et calculer des
informations de base de données » à la page 102 pour en savoir plus.
Description du lien entre les scènes, les plans et les prises
Pour saisir des informations de scène, de plan et de prise dans la base de données,
vous devez savoir comment les scènes, les plans et les prises sont compris par la base
de données.
Un film est composé d’une série de scènes et chaque scène est généralement
composée de plusieurs plans ou angles de vue. Un plan est un enregistrement continu
sans interruptions. Lors d’un tournage, il peut y avoir plusieurs prises par plan, une prise
est donc une version d’un plan. Une scène peut compter plusieurs plans. Le tableau cidessous présente un exemple de lien entre les scènes, les prises et les plans dans une
base de données Cinema Tools.
Scène 1
Prise de vue
1A
Prise de vue
1
Prise de vue
1B
Prise 1
Prise 2
Prise 4
Prise 2
Prise 3
Prise 5
Clap 1-1
Clap 1-2
Clap 1-4
Clap 1A-2
Clap 1A-3
Clap 1B-592 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Création d’un enregistrement de base de données
Vous devez créer des enregistrements de base de données si vous saisissez les informations
de base de données manuellement.
Pour créer un enregistrement :
1 Procédez de l’une des manières suivantes :
 Choisissez Database > New Record (ou appuyez sur Commande + N).
 Cliquez sur New Record dans la fenêtre Detail View.
2 Dans la zone de dialogue qui apparaît, saisissez des identifiants pour la scène et la prise
ou laissez ces champs vides, puis cliquez sur OK. Pour en savoir plus, lisez l’encadré
ci-dessous « Utilisation d’identifiants de scène, de plan et de prise, ».
Remarque : il n’est pas nécessaire de saisir quoi que ce soit dans les champs Scene et Take
pour utiliser Cinema Tools pour mettre en correspondance vos modifications numériques
et vos négatifs de caméra originaux. Vous pouvez laisser ces champs vides ou les compléter
ultérieurement. Souvenez-vous aussi que les entrées de scène et de prise sont utilisées
pour créer les noms des plans, si vous exportez une liste de capture par lot. Consultez
la section « Génération d’une liste de capture par lot dans Cinema Tools » à la page 115
pour en savoir plus.
La fenêtre Detail View apparaît une fois que vous cliquez sur OK.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 93
I
Utilisation d’identifiants de scène, de plan et de prise
Un identifiant peut comprendre des chiffres et des lettres et compter jusqu’à
15 caractères.
 Take identifier : si le plan source associé à un enregistrement de base de données
contient plus d’une prise, vous pouvez vous représenter l’identifiant de prise comme
un identifiant de sous-plan source. Si le plan source associé à un enregistrement
de base de données ne contient qu’une seule prise, vous pouvez vous représenter
l’identifiant de prise comme un identifiant de plan source.
 Scene identifier : l’identifiant que vous saisissez dans le champ Scene identifie en
réalité tant la scène que le plan (la position de la caméra) pour le plan en question.
On inscrit généralement dans ce champ la combinaison de lettres ou de chiffres qui
apparaît dans le champ Scene du clap. La méthode généralement employée pour
identifier les scènes et les plans est d’attribuer un chiffre à la scène et d’ajouter une
lettre pour spécifier le plan de la scène. Ainsi, si un clap indique « Scène 12B », il fait
référence à la prise B de la scène 12. Cette information est reflétée dans la fenêtre
Detail View ; le premier nombre indiqué dans le champ Scene apparaît en regard
du mot « Scene » dans la fenêtre Detail View. En regard du mot « Shot », par contre,
tant le numéro que la lettre apparaissent.
Par exemple, si vous saisissez « 1D » dans le champ Scene, vous voyez apparaître
ce qui suit dans le coin supérieur gauche de la fenêtre Detail View :
 « 1 » en regard du mot « Scene »
 « 1D » en regard du mot « Shot »
Astuce : dans le champ Scene, vous pouvez saisir une lettre (de A à D) devant le premier
numéro, elle fera partie intégrante de l’identifiant de scène. Ajouter une lettre devant un
identifiant de scène est une convention d’appellation utile lorsque vous devez ajouter une
scène au milieu d’une série de scènes. Imaginons, que vous ajoutiez une scène nommée
A2 entre la scène 1 et la scène 2. Le nouvel ordre serait donc scène 1, scène A2, scène 2,
scène 3, et ainsi de suite. L’ajout d’autres lettres (de E à Z) n’ajoute pas de nouvelle scène.
Par exemple, la scène G2 est identique à la scène 2. Pour plus d’informations, reportezvous à la section « Détails relatifs à la scène, le plan et la prise » à la page 83.94 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Saisie d’informations dans un enregistrement de base de données
Une fois que vous avez créé un enregistrement de base de données, vous pouvez saisir
les informations sur son plan.
Pour saisir des informations dans un enregistrement de base de données :
1 Assurez-vous que l’enregistrement souhaité apparaît dans la fenêtre Detail View.
(Si nécessaire, cliquez sur l’enregistrement, dans la fenêtre List View, pour l’ouvrir
dans la fenêtre Detail View.)
Pour en savoir plus, consultez la section « Recherche et ouverture d’enregistrements de
base de donnée » à la page 80.
2 Saisissez des informations et des réglages dans la fenêtre Detail View.
« Réglages de la fenêtre Detail View, » ensuite, décrivez tous les réglages et spécifiez ceux
qui sont obligatoires si vous prévoyez d’utiliser la base de données pour générer des listes
de conformation ou de modification.
Utilisez la touche de tabulation pour passer d’un champ ou d’un réglage à l’autre.
? Astuce : lorsque vous reliez un plan à enregistrement de base de données et que cet
enregistrement ne contient pas encore le timecode, le numéro de bobine et la durée
du timecode du plan, Cinema Tools recherche ces informations dans le fichier du plan
et les introduit automatiquement dans l’enregistrement.
Si vous connaissez le code de bordure ou le numéro de timecode d’une autre image
d’plan, la fonction Identify peut vous aider à déterminer le timecode ou numéro de
code de bordure correct de la première image d’un plan. Consultez à ce sujet la section
« Utilisation de la fonction Identify pour saisir et calculer des informations de base de
données » à la page 102.
3 Cliquez sur Save.
Les informations affichées dans la fenêtre Detail View ne sont définitivement saisies dans la
base de données que si vous les enregistrez. Vous pouvez choisir Database > Revert Record
(ou appuyer sur Commande + R) pour revenir à la dernière version enregistrée de
l’enregistrement.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 95
I
Réglages de la fenêtre Detail View
La fenêtre Detail View contient des champs et des boutons servant à la création
d’enregistrements de base de données. Parmi ces réglages, seul un petit nombre sert
à la création de cut lists ou de listes de modification à partir de la base de données.
Réglages nécessaires
Les réglages nécessaires dépendant du type de liste à créer et de la méthode que vous
allez utiliser pour la créer.
Ces réglages sont nécessaires si vous prévoyez de générer une liste de conformation
ou de modifier une liste de modifications :
 Lab, camera, or daily roll
 Key number or ink number
Par ailleurs, chaque plan source doit être associé à un enregistrement, sauf si vous pouvez
utiliser la méthode basée sur le timecode pour créer les cut lists ou les listes de modification
(consultez à ce sujet la section « Gain de temps potentiel lors du transfert camera-roll »
à la page 73).
Pour utiliser la méthode basée sur le timecode afin de créer des cut lists ou des listes
de modification, les éléments suivants sont également requis :
 Video reel
 Timecode vidéo et durée
Ces réglages sont nécessaires pour exporter une liste audio EDL :
 Chaque plan source doit être connecté à un enregistrement ou la bande vidéo,
le timecode vidéo et la durée doivent être saisis pour chaque enregistrement.
 Chaque enregistrement doit comporter le numéro de la bande audio, le timecode
audio et la vitesse du timecode audio (Sound TC Rate).96 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Réglages de la fenêtre Detail View
La fenêtre Detail View contient les champs et boutons suivants :
Boutons et champs Database
Ces boutons et champs s’appliquent à la base de données entière.
 Boutons Previous Record et Next Record (flèches) : cliquez sur ces boutons pour passer à
l’enregistrement précédent ou suivant (selon l’ordre en vigueur dans la fenêtre List View).
Remarque : l’un de ces boutons est estompé lorsque vous vous trouvez au début
ou à la fin de la liste et qu’il n’y a pas de plan précédent ou suivant.
Vous pouvez utiliser comme raccourci les touches fléchées vers la droite et vers la
gauche de votre clavier. Si vous avez apporté des modifications à l’enregistrement
courant, une zone de dialogue vous demandant si vous souhaitez enregistrer ces
modifications apparaît.
 Bouton New Record : cliquez sur ce bouton pour créer un nouvel enregistrement. Dans
la zone de dialogue qui s’ouvre, saisissez les identifiants de scène et de prise du nouvel
enregistrement. Consultez la section « Utilisation d’identifiants de scène, de plan et de
prise » à la page 93 pour en savoir plus.
 Bouton Save : cliquez sur ce bouton si vous avez ajouté ou modifié des données dans
l’enregistrement actuel. Ces ajouts ou modifications ne seront enregistrés que si vous
cliquez sur le bouton Save.
 Zone Telecine Session : cette zone, au centre droit de la fenêtre, indique le nom du fichier
de liste télécinéma importé dans la base de données (si d’application).
 Champ Telecine Session Notes : saisissez d’éventuels commentaires sur la session
télécinéma.
Remarque : ce champ n’est disponible que si vous avez importé un fichier de liste
télécinéma dans la base de données.
Champ pour la
prise de notes
Champ destiné
aux notes sur
les sessions
télécinéma
Boutons Previous
Record et Next RecordChapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 97
I
Champs Scene et Shot Description
Ne remplissez ces champs qu’une seule fois par scène. Une fois les données saisies,
elles sont ajoutées à tous les enregistrements existants et nouveaux correspondant
à la même scène.
 Champ de description Scene : décrivez la scène.
 Champ de description Shot : décrivez la prise de vue.
 Champs Script Pages : saisissez la première et la dernière page de script associées
à la scène et à la prise.
Réglages du film
Les réglages suivants portent sur le film.
 Champ Scene : saisissez ou modifiez l’identifiant de la scène dans ce champ. Consultez
la section « Utilisation d’identifiants de scène, de plan et de prise » à la page 93 pour
en savoir plus.
 Champ Take : saisissez un identifiant de prise dans ce champ. En règle générale, des
chiffres sont utilisés mais vous pouvez saisir n’importe quelle combinaison de caractères
(maximum 15). Si le plan source comporte plusieurs prises, considérez l’identifiant de
prise comme un identifiant de sous-plan.
À propos des descriptions de scènes et de prises de vue
Toutes les prises de vue d’une scène sont reliées à cette scène et tous les plans
sources d’une prise de vue sont reliés à cette prise de vue. Comme la base de
données mémorise ces liens, vous n’avez à saisir ces descriptions qu’une fois pour
chaque scène et prise de vue.
Lorsque vous saisissez ou modifiez la description d’une scène, les mêmes informations
apparaissent pour toutes les prises de vue associées à la scène, dans les enregistrements
existants comme dans ceux que vous créerez ultérieurement et qui porteront le même
identifiant de scène. De la même façon, toutes données descriptives que vous saisissez
pour un plan apparaîtra dans les enregistrements de base de données existants avec
le même identifiant de plan.
Dans l’exemple ci-après, tous les enregistrements de la scène A54 auront le même
texte descriptif (« Outside ») et les mêmes numéros de page (de 146 à 167). Toutes
les prises du plan (A54J) auront le même texte descriptif (« Left » dans cet exemple)
et les mêmes numéros de page (de 148 à 155). Chaque prise de ce plan aura aussi
une entrée de note de prise unique.98 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
 Champ Cam Roll : (si vous prévoyez de créer une liste de conformation ou une liste de
modifications, vous devez compléter un des champs de bobine.) Si vous procédez à un
montage à partir des bobines d’une caméra, saisissez l’identifiant de bobine attribué
par l’assistant cameraman au cours de la production. Cet identifiant doit être le même
que celui qui est affiché sur le clap de la prise.
Remarque : souvent, la bobine de caméra et la bobine de laboratoire sont identiques et
peuvent donc porter le même identifiant. Vous pouvez saisir des données dans l’un de
ces deux champs ou dans les deux. Veillez cependant à être cohérent. Lorsque vous créez
une cut list ou une liste de modification, Cinema Tools vous donne l’option d’afficher la
bobine caméra, la bobine laboratoire ou la bobine des rushes. Quelle que soit l’option
choisie, elle doit apparaître dans tous les enregistrements de la base de données, sinon
Cinema Tools signalera une erreur lorsque vous exporterez une liste de film.
 Champ Lab Roll : (si vous prévoyez de créer une liste de conformation ou une liste de
modifications, vous devez compléter un des champs de bobine.) Si les données que
vous montez proviennent de bobines de laboratoire, saisissez l’identifiant attribué
par le laboratoire qui a traité votre film. Ou alors saisissez l’identifiant d’une bobine
créée à partir de prises choisies, pour l’impression (cette bobine est parfois appelée
négatif A). Souvent, la bobine de caméra et la bobine de laboratoire sont identiques
et peuvent donc porter le même identifiant (consultez la note ci-avant).
 Champ Daily Roll : (si vous prévoyez de créer une liste de conformation ou une liste
de modifications, vous devez compléter un des champs de bobine.) Si vous procédez
au montage à partir des rushes, saisissez l’identifiant attribué à la bobine de rushes
d’où le plan source est tiré.
 Champs Key : (si vous prévoyez de créer une liste de conformation ou une liste de
modifications, ces champs ou les champs de codification manuelle sont obligatoires.)
Le premier champ doit contenir le préfixe utilisé tout au long de la bobine de film. Par
exemple, pour le numéro de clé KJ 29 1010 5867+07, le préfixe de clé est « KJ 29 1010 »
que l’on saisit sous la forme « KJ291010 ». Vous pouvez saisir jusqu’à huit caractères (y
compris les espaces, bien que vous passerez les espaces dans la plupart des cas, comme
dans cet exemple). Dans le deuxième champ, saisissez la deuxième partie du numéro de
bord (numéro d’image) de la première image du plan. Par exemple, pour le numéro de
clé KJ 29 1010 5867+07, le numéro d’image est « 5867+07 ». Le numéro d’image indique
chaque pied ou demi-pied de la bobine, complété du numéro de comptage d’image.
Si vous connaissez le numéro de clé d’une autre partie du plan, la fonction Identify peut
déterminer et saisir le numéro de clé (champs Key) de la première image du plan.
Consultez à ce sujet la section « Utilisation de la fonction Identify pour la saisie de
numéros de code de bordure et de timecode dans la base de données » à la
page 102.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 99
I
 Champs Ink : (si vous prévoyez de créer une liste de conformation ou une liste de
modifications, ces champs ou les champs de clé sont obligatoires.) Saisissez le numéro
du préfixe dans le premier champ et le numéro d’image dans le second. Par exemple,
dans la codification manuelle 123 4567+08, le préfixe est « 123 » et le numéro d’image
est « 4567+08 », ce qui indique que l’image apparaît à 4567 pieds et 8 images.
 Menu local TK Speed : ce menu local vous donne la possibilité de spécifier
individuellement la vitesse de transfert de télécinéma pour chaque enregistrement
de la base de données. Si l’enregistrement de base de données a été créé à partir
d’une liste télécinéma, ce réglage devrait déjà être correct et il ne devrait pas être
nécessaire de le modifier. Si vous créez la base de données manuellement, la valeur
de ce menu local devrait refléter le réglage de la vitesse du film de télécinéma que
vous avez choisi lorsque vous avez défini les valeurs par défaut au niveau du projet.
Pour en savoir plus, consultez la section « Vitesse télécinéma » à la page 79.
 Menu local Film Std : ce menu permet de spécifier individuellement le format du film
pour chaque enregistrement de la base de données. Si l’enregistrement de base de
données a été créé à partir d’une liste télécinéma, ce réglage devrait déjà être correct
et il ne devrait pas être nécessaire de le modifier. Si vous créez la base de données
manuellement, cette valeur doit refléter le réglage choisi dans la zone de dialogue
New Database.
Pour les plans qui sont en sens inverse, vous pouvez spécifier un sens inverse pour le
format de film en choisissant 35.4p.rev (pour les films 35 mm à 4 perforations) ou
16.20.rev (pour les films 16 mm-20). Un film en sens inverse est un film dont les
numéros de bord sont en ordre décroissant plutôt que croissant. Cette situation se
produit par exemple quand le film a été tourné en sens inverse ou quand la bobine
a été placée à l’envers dans la caméra et que les numéros de bord sont alors lus dans
l’ordre inverse. Pour en savoir plus, consultez la section « Format de film » à la page 78.
Pour les plans qui utilisent le format 35 mm à 3 perforations, choisissez de décalage
de la perforation du numéro de bord. Ce décalage (3 perf. •1, 3 perf. •2 ou 3 perf. •3)
fait référence à la relation entre la perforation marquée du symbole « • » et l’image
du film à ce point. Pour en savoir plus, consultez la section « Décalages 35 mm à 3
perforations » à la page 235.
Remarque : le film 35 mm à 3 perforations en sens inverse n’est pas pris en charge.100 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Réglages vidéo
Les réglages suivants portent sur les bandes vidéo.
 Champ Video Reel : (à moins que tous les plans que vous allez monter ne soient
connectés à la base de données, ce champ est obligatoire si vous prévoyez de créer
une liste de conformation, une liste de modifications ou une liste audio EDL.) Saisissez
l’identifiant de la bande vidéo contenant cette prise. Ce champ doit être rempli sans
faute si vous souhaitez garantir l’exactitude de la cut list ou de la liste de modification.
Lorsque vous reliez un plan à un enregistrement de base de données qui ne contient
pas encore l’identifiant de bande, Cinema Tools recherche cette information dans le
fichier du plan et l’introduit automatiquement dans l’enregistrement. Veillez à ne pas
commettre d’erreurs lors de la saisie de cet identifiant afin que l’enregistrement puisse
être associé au plan approprié après le montage numérique de votre film. Par exemple,
« 001 » est différent de « 0001 ».
 Champ Video Timecode : (à moins que tous les plans que vous allez monter ne soient
connectés à la base de données, ce champ est obligatoire si vous prévoyez de créer
une liste de conformation, une liste de modifications ou une liste audio EDL.)
Saisissez le numéro de timecode de la première image du plan. Le lien entre les
numéros de code et le timecode est établi lors du transfert du film sur bande vidéo
et ces informations sont en général saisies automatiquement lorsque vous créez la
base de données à partir d’une liste télécinéma. Lorsque vous reliez un plan à un
enregistrement de la base de données qui ne contient pas encore le timecode du
plan, Cinema Tools recherche cette information dans le fichier du plan et l’introduit
automatiquement dans l’enregistrement. Vous pouvez aussi déterminer la valeur du
timecode pour ce champ en jetant un coup d’œil à la première image du plan, à
condition que le numéro de bord et le timecode soient gravés dans la vidéo.
? Tip : si vous saisissez les informations de bande vidéo et de timecode dans la fenêtre Detail
View, vous pouvez utiliser la base de données pour localiser du matériel source sur la bande
vidéo pendant le montage. Si vous êtes par exemple en train de monter un plan et que
vous souhaitez vérifier le contenu d’une partie du plan dont la netteté est médiocre, il est
alors nécessaire d’utiliser la bande vidéo, où l’image est de meilleure qualité. Vous pouvez
consulter l’enregistrement de base de données du plan pour voir quelle bande contient le
matériel et l’emplacement de timecode sur la bande.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 101
I
 Champ Video Duration : (à moins que tous les plans que vous allez monter ne soient
connectés à la base de données, ce champ est obligatoire si vous prévoyez de créer
une liste de conformation, une liste de modifications ou une liste audio EDL.) Saisissez
la durée du timecode du plan source. Cette valeur peut provenir d’une liste télécinéma.
Lorsque vous reliez un plan à un enregistrement de base de données qui ne contient
pas encore le timecode du plan, Cinema Tools recherche cette information dans le
fichier du plan et l’introduit automatiquement dans l’enregistrement. Cette durée est
exprimée en heures, minutes, secondes et images, ce qui peut vous sembler plus
parlant que la longueur exprimée en pieds et images. La durée du timecode est
particulièrement importante si vous souhaitez réaliser une capture par lot ou créer
une cut list ou une liste de modification en faisant correspondre le programme monté
avec la bande et le timecode vidéo.
 Menu local Video TC Rate : ce menu local affiche la vitesse de timecode vidéo par défaut
que vous avez choisie lorsque vous avez créé la base de données ou le format qui
figurait dans la liste télécinéma que vous avez importée pour créer la base de données.
Le laboratoire qui transfère votre film sur bande vidéo peut vous dire quel type de
timecode vidéo est enregistré sur la bande vidéo. Consultez la section « Vitesse du
timecode (Video TC Rate) » à la page 78 pour en savoir plus.
Réglages du son
Les réglages suivants portent sur les bandes son.
 Champ Sound Roll : (obligatoire si vous prévoyez de créer une liste audio EDL.)
Saisissez le nom de la bande son.
 Champ Sound Timecode : (obligatoire si vous prévoyez de créer une liste audio EDL.)
Saisissez le numéro de timecode audio de début du plan. Le format du timecode
audio peut être différent de celui du timecode vidéo.
 Champ Sound TC Rate : (obligatoire si vous prévoyez de créer une liste audio EDL.)
Saisissez le type de timecode utilisé sur les bandes son de production.
Bouton Clip et réglages
Ce qui suit s’applique en particulier au plan lié à cet enregistrement.
 Bouton Connect Clip/Open Clip : si aucun plan n’a été associé à l’enregistrement, ce
bouton s’intitule Connect Clip. Si un plan est déjà associé, il s’intitule Open Clip.
 Cliquez sur Connect Clip pour sélectionner un plan source à relier à cet enregistrement.
Lorsque vous sélectionnez un plan, il est relié à la base de données et sa première
image s’affiche dans la zone située sous le bouton Connect Clip/Open Clip.
 Cliquez sur Open Clip pour ouvrir la fenêtre du plan relié. Si le plan est introuvable,
une zone de dialogue s’ouvre pour vous permettre de sélectionner le bon plan.
 Appuyez sur la touche Commande pour passer d’Open Clip à Disconnect Clip.
Cliquez sur Disconnect Clip pour annuler le lien entre le plan et la base de données.
 Champ Take Notes : saisissez-y les commentaires que vous souhaitez inclure à propos
du plan source.102 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
Utilisation de la fonction Identify pour saisir et calculer des
informations de base de données
Vous pouvez utiliser la fonction Identify de la fenêtre Clip pour déterminer le numéro de
bord, le numéro de codification manuelle ou les valeurs de timecode des plans de la base
de données. Ces valeurs sont obligatoires dans la base de données pour la première
image du plan, mais il se peut qu’elles ne soient pas disponibles si vous ne créez pas les
enregistrements de base de données à partir d’une liste télécinéma ou si vos plans n’ont
pas de fenêtre d’affichage.
Pour utiliser la fonction Identify afin de déterminer ou de vérifier le code de bordure
ou le timecode :
 Vous devez connaître le numéro de bord, la codification manuelle ou le timecode
d’au moins une des images du plan.
 Le plan doit posséder un enregistrement dans la base de données.
 Le lien numéro de bord/timecode doit être continu. Consultez à ce sujet la section
« Le lien entre les numéros de code de bordure et le timecode est-il continu ou
discontinu ? » à la page 72.
N’oubliez pas qu’avec la fonction Identify, les champs Key, Ink, Video Timecode et Sound
Timecode doivent toujours refléter les valeurs de l’image affichée dans la fenêtre Clip, alors
que dans la fenêtre Detail View, ces champs sont associés à la première image du plan.
Toutefois, la fonction Identify calcule et introduit les valeurs de la première image qui
apparaissent dans la fenêtre Detail View.
Utilisation de la fonction Identify pour la saisie de numéros de code
de bordure et de timecode dans la base de données
Si vous connaissez le code de bordure (numéro de bord ou codification manuelle) et
le timecode de toute image d’un plan, vous pouvez utiliser la fonction Identify pour
déterminer ces valeurs pour la première image du plan. Ces informations seront alors
saisies automatiquement dans la base de données.
Cette fonction est particulièrement utile si vous travaillez sur une bande vidéo sans
fenêtre d’affichage, car vous devez dans ce cas marquer physiquement une image de
chaque plan pour assurer le suivi des timecodes et codes de bordure. Si l’image marquée
n’est pas la toute première image du plan, la fonction Identify peut calculer les valeurs de
la première image, qui sont alors automatiquement saisies dans la base de données.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 103
I
Pour saisir les valeurs du code de bordure et du timecode dans la base de données :
1 Si le plan souhaité n’est pas encore ouvert, ouvrez-le dans la fenêtre Clip en procédant
de l’une des manières suivantes :
 Choisissez File > Open Clip (ou appuyez sur Commande + O), puis utilisez la zone
de dialogue pour sélectionner le plan.
 Cliquez sur Open Clip, dans la fenêtre Detail View de l’enregistrement dans la base
de données du plan.
2 Cliquez sur Identify dans la fenêtre Clip pour afficher les réglages relatifs à l’image actuelle.
3 Localisez l’image marquée dans la zone de lecture du plan.
? Astuce : utilisez les touches fléchées du clavier pour avancer et reculer image par image.
Les réglages Identify sont mis à jour pour afficher les informations de chaque image
lorsque vous vous déplacez dans un plan afin que vous puissiez localiser l’image marquée.
4 Saisissez, dans les champs appropriés, les valeurs de code de bordure et de timecode
de l’image marquée (l’image affichée dans la fenêtre Clip).
Remarque : vous pouvez utiliser soit la codification manuelle, soit les numéros de bord.
Dans ce cas, ne remplissez pas le champ inutile.
Remarque : pour réinitialiser les valeurs aux valeurs en vigueur à l’ouverture du plan
dans la fenêtre, cliquez sur Revert.
5 Lorsque vous identifiez un plan de 35 mm à 3 perforations, vous devez aussi choisir
le décalage (3 perf. •1, 3 perf. •2 ou 3 perf. •3) dans le menu local Film Std.
Remarque : en principe, vous ne devez pas modifier le réglage du menu local Film Std
si vous utilisez l’un des autres formats de film.
6 Cliquez sur Save.
Saisissez les
valeurs de
numéro de bord
ou de codification
manuelle de
l’image marquée.
Saisissez la valeur
de timecode
vidéo de l’image
marquée.104 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
L’enregistrement de base de données correspondant à ce plan est immédiatement
actualisé avec les valeurs de la première image du plan. De plus, la durée du plan est
calculée et saisie.
À propos de la modification de données à l’aide de la fonction Identify
Vous ne pouvez utiliser la fonction Identify pour un plan que si un enregistrement de
base de données a été créé pour ce plan. La sous-fenêtre Identify de la fenêtre Clip
contient des champs et des menus locaux pour des réglages qui apparaissent aussi
dans la fenêtre Detail View. Vous pouvez modifier ces réglages à l’aide de la fonction
Identify, mais gardez les points suivants à l’esprit :
 Les champs Key, Ink, Video Timecode et Sound Timecode doivent toujours refléter les
valeurs de l’image affichée dans la fenêtre Clip, alors que dans la fenêtre Detail View,
ces champs sont associés à la première image du plan. C’est pourquoi il se peut que
ce que vous voyez ou saisissez dans la sous-fenêtre Identify de la fenêtre Clip diffère
de ce que vous voyez ou saisissez dans la fenêtre Detail View. Consultez à ce sujet la
section « Utilisation de la fonction Identify pour saisir et calculer des informations de
base de données » à la page 102.
 La fonction Identify ne permet de faire le suivi des numéros de bord que si la relation
entre les numéros de bord et les timecodes est continue, comme c’est le cas avec la
plupart des transferts caméra-bande. Consultez à ce sujet la section « Le lien entre les
numéros de code de bordure et le timecode est-il continu ou discontinu ? » à la
page 72.
Si vous avez modifié les valeurs dans la fenêtre et souhaitez revenir aux valeurs
antérieures, cliquez sur Revert plutôt que sur Save. Lorsque vous cliquez sur Save,
l’enregistrement de base de données est mis à jour et ces modifications sont reflétées
dans la fenêtre Detail View.
Modification d’informations dans la base de données
Vous pouvez modifier toute information de la base de données en modifiant des réglages
dans la fenêtre Detail View et dans la sous-fenêtre Identify de la fenêtre Clip. Certains
des calculs que vous faites à l’aide de la fonction Identify modifient automatiquement
des informations qui figurent dans la base de données. Consultez la section « Utilisation
de la fonction Identify pour saisir et calculer des informations de base de données » à la
page 102 pour en savoir plus. Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 105
I
Suppression d’un enregistrement de la base de données
Il se peut que vous n’ayez plus besoin de certains enregistrements. Vous pouvez alors
les supprimer de la base de données.
Remarque : soyez très prudent lors de cette opération car elle est irréversible.
Pour supprimer un enregistrement de la base de données :
1 Ouvrez l’enregistrement dans la fenêtre Detail View ou sélectionnez-le dans la fenêtre
List View.
2 Choisissez Database > Delete Record (ou appuyez sur Commande + Suppr).
Remarque : lorsque vous supprimez un enregistrement de base de données qui est
connecté à un fichier de données source, vous ne supprimez pas le fichier du disque
dur. Vous ne supprimez que l enregistrement de base de données.
Changement de l’affiche d’un plan
Par défaut, lorsqu’un plan relié à un enregistrement est ouvert dans la fenêtre Clip, une
vignette de la première image du plan est affichée dans la fenêtre Detail View. Cette
image est appelée affiche du plan. Vous pouvez choisir une autre affiche si cette image
n’est pas pertinente (si elle est noire par exemple).
L’affiche de plan par défaut n’apparaît dans la fenêtre Detail View qu’une fois que :
 le plan est relié à un enregistrement de la base de données
 le plan est ouvert dans la fenêtre Clip
Pour choisir une nouvelle affiche :
1 Si le plan souhaité n’est pas encore ouvert, ouvrez-le dans la fenêtre Clip en procédant
de l’une des manières suivantes :
 Choisissez File > Open Clip (ou appuyez sur Commande + O), puis utilisez la zone
de dialogue pour sélectionner le plan.
 Cliquez sur Open Clip, dans la fenêtre Detail View de l’enregistrement dans la base
de données du plan.
2 Dans la zone de lecture du plan, repérez l’image à utiliser comme affiche.106 Partie I Utilisation de Cinema Tools
? Tip : utilisez les touches fléchées du clavier pour avancer et reculer image par image.
3 Cliquez sur Set Poster Frame une fois que l’image souhaitée apparaît dans la zone
de lecture du plan.
La nouvelle affiche apparaît dans la fenêtre Detail View du plan.
Remarque : quelle que soit l’affiche choisie, la fenêtre Clip s’ouvre toujours sur la
première image du plan.
Modification des réglages de base de données par défaut
Bien que vous ne puissiez pas modifier les réglages par défaut d’une base de données
directement, vous pouvez obtenir le même résultat en créant une nouvelle base de
données possédant les réglages souhaités, puis en important la base de données
original dedans.
Pour modifier les réglages par défaut d’une base de données :
m Créez une nouvelle base de données, attribuez-lui des réglages par défaut, puis importez-y
la base de données originale. Consultez à ce sujet la section « Importation d’une base de
données Cinema Tools existante » à la page 90.
Vous pouvez faire glisser la tête
de lecture pour localiser et
afficher l’image que vous
voulez utiliser comme affiche
de plan.
Cliquez sur le bouton Set Poster
Frame pour que l’image
courante apparaisse comme
vignette dans la fenêtre Detail
View.Chapitre 4 Création et utilisation d’une base de données Cinema Tools 107
I
Modification de tous les identifiants de bobine ou de bande
Il s’avère parfois nécessaire de modifier tous les identifiants de bobine ou de bande
contenus dans une base de données. Par exemple pour passer d’un identifiant de bobine
non compatible EDL à un identifiant compatible, ou pour faire